.Umerical $istance 0rotection 2elay 3) 02/4%# 3!:) Nstruction - Anual

.
UMERICAL $ISTANCE 0ROTECTION 2ELAY
3)02/4%# 3! 6

)NSTRUCTION -ANUAL /RDER .O # ' #
&IGURE )LLUSTRATION OF THE NUMERICAL DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY 3! IN HOUSING FOR SURFACE MOUNTING
D 3IEMENS !'

3! 6 #ONFORMITY
#ONFORMITY
4HIS PRODUCT IS IN CONFORMITY WITH THE DIRECTIVE OF THE #OUNCIL OF THE %UROPEAN #OMMUNITIES ON THE APPROXIMA
TION OF THE LAWS OF THE -EMBER 3TATES RELATING TO ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY %-# #OUNCIL $IRECTIVE
%%# AND CONCERNING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR APPLICATION WITHIN SPECIFIED VOLTAGE LIMITS ,OW VOLTAGE
DIRECTIVE %%#
#ONFORMITY IS PROVED BY TESTS THAT HAD BEEN PERFORMED ACCORDING TO ARTICLE OF THE #OUNCIL $IRECTIVE IN ACCOR
DANCE WITH THE GENERIC STANDARDS %. AND %. FOR %-# DIRECTIVE AND THE STANDARDS %.
FOR LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE BY 3IEMENS !'
4HE DEVICE IS DESIGNED AND MANUFACTURED FOR APPLICATION IN INDUSTRIAL ENVIRONMENT
4HE DEVICE IS DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS OF )%# AND THE 'ERMAN STANDARDS
$). PART CORRESPONDING TO 6$% PART
# ' #

3! 6 #ONTENTS
#ONTENTS
)NTRODUCTION
!PPLICATION
&EATURES
)MPLEMENTED FUNCTIONS
$ESIGN
!RRANGEMENTS
$IMENSIONS
/RDERING DATA
4ECHNICAL $ATA
'ENERAL DATA
)NPUTSOUTPUTS
%LECTRICAL TESTS
-ECHANICAL STRESS TESTS
#LIMATIC STRESS TESTS
3ERVICE CONDITIONS
$ESIGN
$ISTANCE PROTECTION
0OWER SWING SUPPLEMENT OPTIONAL ONLY WITH IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
4ELEPROTECTION INTERFACE
5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL
(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN SOLIDLY EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL
!UTO RECLOSURE OPTIONAL
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK OPTIONAL
&AULT LOCATION
!NCILLARY FUNCTIONS
# ' #

3! 6 #ONTENTS
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
/PERATION OF COMPLETE UNIT
$ISTANCE PROTECTION
&AULT DETECTION
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION AND PROCESSING
/VERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION
)MPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION FIX IMPEDANCE OPTIONAL
6OLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION UNDER IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION OPTIONAL
$ETERMINATION OF THE FAULTED LOOP
,OOP DETERMINATION FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED SYSTEMS
,OOP DETERMINATION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
&AULT IMPEDANCE CALCULATION
$IRECTIONAL DETERMINATION
4RIPPING CHARACTERISTICS
4RIPPING LOGIC
3WITCH ONTO FAULT PROTECTION
$EFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT AND EMERGENCY PROTECTION
-EASURES TO BE TAKEN IN THE CASE OF POWER SWINGS OPTIONAL WITH IMPEDANCE FAULT
DETECTION
$ETECTION OF POWER SWINGS
0OWER SWING BLOCKING
/UT OF STEP TRIPPING
5NIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE
0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP WITH FAULT DETECTION
:ONE ACCELERATION WITH :"
0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP WITH :"
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON FAULT DETECTION ZONE RELEASE
5NBLOCKING MODE WITH :"
$IRECTIONAL UNBLOCKING MODE WITH FAULT DETECTION
"LOCKING MODE
/VERREACHING ZONE COMPARISON VIA PILOT WIRES
2EVERSE INTERLOCKING
7EAK INFEED MEASURES ECHO FUNCTION
4RANSIENT BLOCKING
5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS TRIP COMMANDS AND ANNUNCIATIONS
%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN SYSTEMS WITH NON EARTHED STARPOINT OPTIONAL
&AULT DETECTION
$ETERMINATION OF THE EARTH FAULTED PHASE
3ENSITIVE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION
&AULTED LINE LOCATION
(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL
$IRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
)NVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION FOR EARTH FAULTS
!UTOMATIC RECLOSURE OPTIONAL
3ELECTIVITY DURING AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE
!CTION TIMES AND RECLAIM TIMES
)NTERROGATION FOR READINESS OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
4HREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
3INGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
3INGLE AND THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
# ' #

3! 6 #ONTENTS
4REATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS

-ULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSE
#ONNECTION OF EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE SYSTEM
#ONTROL OF THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION BY AN EXTERNAL PROTECTIVE RELAY
4WO PROTECTION RELAYS WITH TWO !2 DEVICES
/PERATING MODES
$EAD LINE OR DEAD BUS SWITCHING
3WITCHING AT SYNCHRONISM
!SYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING
$ISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATION
#IRCUIT BREAKER TRIP TEST
!NCILLARY FUNCTIONS
0ROCESSING OF ANNUNCIATIONS
)NDICATORS AND BINARY OUTPUTS SIGNAL RELAYS
)NFORMATION ON THE DISPLAY PANEL OR TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER
)NFORMATION TO A CENTRAL UNIT OPTIONAL
$ATA STORAGE AND TRANSMISSION FOR FAULT RECORDING
/PERATING MEASUREMENTS AND CONVERSION
-ONITORING FUNCTIONS
(ARDWARE MONITORING
3OFTWARE MONITORING
-ONITORING OF EXTERNAL MEASURING TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS
)NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

5NPACKING AND REPACKING
0REPARATIONS
-OUNTING AND CONNECTIONS
-ODEL 3!J J"JJJ FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING
-ODEL 3!J J#JJJ FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR J%JJJ FOR CUBICLE INSTALLATION
#HECKING THE RATED DATA
#ONTROL DC VOLTAGE OF BINARY INPUTS
)NSERTING THE BACK UP BATTERY
#HECKING THE ,3! TRANSMISSION LINK
#ONNECTIONS
#HECKING THE CONNECTIONS
#ONFIGURATION OF OPERATION AND MEMORY FUNCTIONS
/PERATIONAL PRECONDITIONS AND GENERAL
3ETTINGS FOR THE INTEGRATED OPERATION ADDRESS BLOCK
#ONFIGURATION OF THE SERIAL INTERFACES ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR FAULT RECORDING ADDRESS BLOCK
#ONFIGURATION OF THE PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
)NTRODUCTION
0ROGRAMMING THE SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTING THE DEVICE CONFIGURATION ADDRESS BLOCK
-ARSHALLING OF BINARY INPUTS BINARY OUTPUTS AND ,%$ INDICATORS
)NTRODUCTION
-ARSHALLING OF THE BINARY INPUTS ADDRESS BLOCK
-ARSHALLING OF THE SIGNAL OUTPUT RELAYS ADDRESS BLOCK
-ARSHALLING OF THE ,%$ INDICATORS ADDRESS BLOCK
-ARSHALLING OF THE COMMAND TRIP RELAYS ADDRESS BLOCK
# ' #

3! 6 #ONTENTS
/PERATING INSTRUCTIONS
3AFETY PRECAUTIONS
$IALOG WITH THE RELAY

-EMBRANE KEYBOARD AND DISPLAY PANEL
/PERATION WITH A PERSONAL COMPUTER
/PERATIONAL PRECONDITIONS
2EPRESENTATION OF THE RELAY FRONT VIEW
3ETTING THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS

)NTRODUCTION
0ARAMETERIZING PROCEDURE
3ELECTABLE PARAMETER SETS OPTIONAL
3ETTING OF DATE AND TIME
)NITIAL DISPLAYS ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
0OWER SYSTEM DATA ADDRESS BLOCK
'ENERAL DATA
,INE DATA GENERAL
!DDITIONAL PLANT DATA
'ENERAL DEVICE DATA
3ETTINGS FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION
'ENERAL SETTINGS ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTING OF THE DISTANCE STAGES ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
3ELECTION OF THE FAULT DETECTION PROGRAM ADDRESS BLOCK
'ENERAL SETTING FOR FAULT DETECTION ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTING FOR VOLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION 5)
3ETTINGS FOR IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
3ETTINGS FOR DETERMINATION OF THE FAULTED LOOP ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
3ETTINGS FOR THE POWER SWING SUPPLEMENT ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR TELEPROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
5NDERREACH TRANSFER SCHEMES ADDRESS BLOCK
/VERREACH TRANSFER SCHEMES ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR MEASURED VALUE MONITORING ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN SYSTEMS WITH ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED STAR POINT
ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
$IRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DEFINITE TIME ADDRESS BLOCK
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCK
.ON DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION INVERSE TIME ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR AUTO RECLOSURE ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR FAULT LOCATION ADDRESS BLOCK
!NNUNCIATIONS

)NTRODUCTION
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS ADDRESS BLOCK
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
$ATA OF EARTH FAULTS IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS ADDRESS BLOCK
#IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION STATISTICS ADDRESS BLOCK
2EAD OUT OF OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
2EAD OUT OF EARTH FAULT MEASURED VALUES IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS ADDRESS BLOCK
# ' #

3! 6 #ONTENTS
/PERATIONAL CONTROL FACILITIES

!DJUSTING AND SYNCHRONIZING THE REAL TIME CLOCK ADDRESS BLOCK
%RASING STORED ANNUNCIATIONS AND COUNTERS ADDRESS BLOCK
/FF/N CONTROL OF PART FUNCTIONS OF THE DEVICE
)NFORMATION TO ,3! DURING TEST OPERATION ADDRESS BLOCK
3ELECTION OF PARAMETER SETS ADDRESS BLOCK
2EAD OUT OF SETTINGS OF A PARAMETER SET
#HANGE OVER OF THE ACTIVE PARAMETER SET FROM THE OPERATING PANEL
#HANGE OVER OF THE ACTIVE PARAMETER SET VIA BINARY INPUTS
4ESTING AND COMMISSIONING

'ENERAL
4ESTING THE OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION STAGE AND EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
4ESTING THE VOLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION IF FITTED
4ESTING THE IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION IF FITTED
4ESTING THE DISTANCE ZONES
4ESTING THE GRADING TIMES
4ESTING THE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION FUNCTIONS
0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH PROCEDURES
0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH PROCEDURES
4ESTING THE USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS
4ESTING THE THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION FUNCTION
4ESTING THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION FUNCTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS IF FITTED
4ESTING THE HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED SYSTEMS IF FITTED
4ESTING THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTIONS IF FITTED
4ESTING THE INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTIONS IF FITTED
#OMMISSIONING USING PRIMARY TESTS

#URRENT VOLTAGE AND PHASE SEQUENCE CHECKS
$IRECTION CHECK WITH LOAD CURRENT
%ARTH FAULT CHECKS FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS IF USED
$IRECTION CHECK FOR DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IF USED
#HECKING THE VOLTAGE POLARITY FOR SYNCHRONISM CHECK
#HECKING THE CARRIER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
#HECKING OVERREACH ZONE COMPARISON VIA PILOT WIRES
#HECKING REVERSE INTERLOCKING
#HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION WITH RELEASE SIGNAL
#HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION WITH BLOCKING SIGNAL
#HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION WITH UNDERREACH TRANSFER SIGNAL
#HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
4RIPPING TEST INCLUDING CIRCUIT BREAKER
42)0 #,/3% TEST CYCLE ADDRESS BLOCK
,IVE TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER ADDRESS BLOCK
3TARTING A TEST FAULT RECORD ADDRESS BLOCK
0UTTING THE RELAY INTO OPERATION
-AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING

2OUTINE CHECKS
2EPLACING THE BACK UP BATTERY
&AULT TRACING

2EPLACING THE MINI FUSE
# ' #

3! 6 #ONTENTS
2EPAIRS
3TORAGE
!PPENDIX
! 'ENERAL DIAGRAMS

" #ONNECTION DIAGRAMS
# 4ABLES
./4%
4HIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL DOES NOT PURPORT TO COVER ALL 4HE CONTENTS OF THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL NOT
DETAILS IN EQUIPMENT NOR TO PROVIDE FOR EVERY POSSI BECOME PART NOR MODIFY ANY PRIOR OR EXISTING AGREE
BLE CONTINGENCY TO BE MET IN CONNECTION WITH INSTAL MENT COMMITMENT OR RELATIONSHIP 4HE SALES CON
LATION OPERATION OR MAINTENANCE TRACT CONTAINS THE ENTIRE OBLIGATIONS OF 3IEMENS 4HE
WARRANTY CONTAINED IN THE CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PAR
3HOULD FURTHER INFORMATION BE DESIRED OR SHOULD TIES IS THE SOLE WARRANTY OF 3IEMENS !NY STATEMENTS
PARTICULAR PROBLEMS ARISE WHICH ARE NOT COVERED CONTAINED HEREIN DO NOT CREATE NEW WARRANTIES NOR
SUFFICIENTLY FOR THE PURCHASER S PURPOSE THE MATTER MODIFY THE EXISTING WARRANTY
SHOULD BE REFERRED TO THE LOCAL 3IEMENS SALES OFFICE
# ' #

3! 6 )NTRODUCTION
)NTRODUCTION
!PPLICATION &EATURES
.UMERICAL DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY 3)02/4%# 0ROCESSOR SYSTEM WITH POWERFUL BIT MICRO
3! PROVIDES FAST RELIABLE AND SELECTIVE CLEAR PROCESSOR
ANCE OF ALL KINDS OF GROUND AND PHASE FAULTS IN SINGLE
ANDOR MULTIPLE FED OVERHEAD LINES AND CABLES IN RA COMPLETE DIGITAL MEASURED VALUE PROCESSING AND
DIAL RING OR ANY TYPE OF MESHED NETWORKS 4HE SYS CONTROL FROM DATA ACQUISITION AND DIGITIZING OF THE
TEM STARPOINT MAY BE ISOLATED COMPENSATED ARC MEASURED VALUES UP TO THE TRIP AND CLOSE DECISION
SUPPRESSED BY 0ETERSEN COIL SOLIDLY EARTHED OR LOW FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
RESISTANCE EARTHED
COMPLETE GALVANIC AND RELIABLE SEPARATION OF THE
)T CONTAINS ALL THE VITAL FUNCTIONS FOR THE PROTECTION OF A INTERNAL PROCESSING CIRCUITS FROM THE MEASURE
LINE FEEDER CIRCUIT AND IS THUS UNIVERSALLY APPLICABLE MENT CONTROL AND SUPPLY CIRCUITS OF THE SYSTEM
)T CAN ALSO BE USED AS A TIME GRADED BACK UP PRO WITH ANALOG INPUT TRANSDUCERS BINARY INPUT AND
TECTION FOR DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS OF ALL KINDS OUTPUT MODULES AND DCDC CONVERTER
FOR LINES TRANSFORMERS GENERATORS MOTORS AND BUS
BARS
COMPLETE SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS REQUIRED FOR THE PRO
TECTION OF A HIGH VOLTAGE FEEDER CIRCUIT
)TS FUNDAMENTAL FUNCTION IS DETERMINATION OF THE DIS
TANCE OF THE SHORT CIRCUIT BY IMPEDANCE MEASURE
OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION OPTIONALLY VOLTAGE
MENT 4HIS CAN BE SUPPLEMENTED BY A SERIES OF OP
TIONAL FUNCTION MODULES WHICH PROVIDE POWER SWING CONTROLLED 5) OR PHASE ANGLE DEPENDENT IM
SUPPLEMENT TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE FOR RAP PEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
ID CLEARANCE THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION FOR
CABLES EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR ISOLATED OR COM POLYGONAL TRIPPING CHARACTERISTIC WITH INDEPEN
PENSATED NETWORKS HIGHLY SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT PRO DENT SETTING OF REACH ALONG THE 2 AND 8 AXIS
TECTION FOR HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT IN EARTHED WITH SEPARATE 2 SETTING FOR EARTH FAULTS
NETWORKS AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE FOR OVERHEAD LINES
SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FAULT LOCATION FOR DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION USING SOUND PHASE PO
SPEEDY LOCATION OF THE DAMAGED AREA %XTERNAL AC LARIZATION AND VOLTAGE MEMORY GIVING UNLIMITED
CESSORIES ARE THEREFORE NORMALLY NOT REQUIRED DIRECTIONAL SENSITIVITY
4HROUGHOUT A FAULT IN THE NETWORK THE MAGNITUDES OF COMPREHENSIVE SUPPLEMENTARY FUNCTIONS CAN BE
THE INSTANTANEOUS VALUES ARE STORED FOR A PERIOD OF AT ORDERED AS AN OPTION
MOST SECONDS AND ARE AVAILABLE FOR SUBSEQUENT
FAULT ANALYSIS CONTINUOUS CALCULATION OF OPERATIONAL MEASURED
VALUES AND INDICATION ON THE FRONT DISPLAY
#ONTINUOUS MONITORING OF THE MEASURED VALUES PER
MITS RAPID ANNUNCIATION OF ANY FAULT IN THE MEASURING SIMPLE SETTING AND OPERATION USING THE INTEGRATED
TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS #ONTINUOUS PLAUSIBILITY MONI OPERATION PANEL OR A CONNECTED PERSONAL COMPUT
TORING OF THE INTERNAL MEASURED VALUE PROCESSING CIR ER WITH MENU GUIDED SOFTWARE
CUITS AND MONITORING OF THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGES TO EN
SURE THAT THEY REMAIN WITHIN TOLERANCE ARE OBVIOUSLY STORAGE OF FAULT DATA STORAGE OF INSTANTANEOUS VAL
INHERENT FEATURES UES DURING A FAULT FOR FAULT RECORDING
3ERIAL INTERFACES ALLOW COMPREHENSIVE COMMUNICA COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL CONTROL AND STORAGE
TION WITH OTHER DIGITAL CONTROL AND STORAGE DEVICES
DEVICES VIA SERIAL INTERFACES IS POSSIBLE OPTIONALLY
&OR DATA TRANSMISSION A STANDARDIZED PROTOCOL IN AC
WITH K6 INSULATION OR FOR CONNECTION OF OPTICAL
CORDANCE WITH 6$%7:6%) AND )%# IS
FIBRE
USED AS WELL AS ACCORDING $). SELECTABLE
4HE DEVICE CAN THEREFORE BE INCORPORATED IN ,OCAL
IZED 3UBSTATION !UTOMATION NETWORKS ,3! 4HE CONTINUOUS MONITORING OF THE MEASURED VALUES
SYSTEM INTERFACE IS SUITED TO COMMUNICATION VIA A AND THE HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE OF THE RELAY
MODEM LINK
# ' #

3!6 )NTRODUCTION
)MPLEMENTED FUNCTIONS
3! CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT FUNCTION
$ISTANCE PROTECTION WITH WITH TWO STAGE DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT CHARAC
TERISTIC AND SEPARATE EARTH CURRENT STAGE
PHASE SELECTIVE OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION
FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION IF VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
OPTIONAL VOLTAGE CONTROLLED 5) FAULT DETECTION OR MCB TRIPS OR
IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION WITH POLYGONALLY
SHAPED ANGLE DEPENDENT CHARACTERISTIC FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION IN CASE OF VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMER SECONDARY FUSE FAILURE
FIVE DISTANCE ZONES CAN BE SET TO OPERATE EITHER IN
THE FORWARD DIRECTION OR IN THE REVERSE DIRECTION OR 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
NON DIRECTIONAL AND TWO CAN BE USED AS GRADED
OVERREACH ZONES
PROVIDES THERMAL REPLICA OF THE CURRENT HEAT
LOSSES
SEVEN TIME STAGES
TRUE RMS MEASUREMENT OF ALL THREE CONDUCTOR
POLYGONAL TRIPPING CHARACTERISTIC WITH INDEPEN
CURRENTS
DENT SETTING OF REACH ALONG THE 2 AND 8 AXIS
SEPARATE 2 SETTING FOR PHASE AND EARTH FAULTS
ADJUSTABLE WARNING STAGES
DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION USING SOUND PHASE PO
LARIZATION AND VOLTAGE MEMORY THUS SUITABLE FOR %ARTH FAULT DETECTION OPTIONAL
USE WITH CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND GIV
ING UNLIMITED DIRECTIONAL SENSITIVITY FOR COMPENSATED OR ISOLATED NETWORKS WITH
PHASE SEGREGATED TRIP FOR USE WITH SINGLE POLE PHASE SELECTIVE FAULT DETECTION
AUTO RECLOSURE
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION
0OWER SWING SUPPLEMENT OPTIONAL WITH IMPED
ANCE FAULT DETECTION (IGHLY SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION OPTIONAL
POWER SWING DETECTION BY D2DT MEASUREMENT FOR HIGH RESISTIVE EARTH FAULTS IN NETWORKS WITH
EARTHED STARPOINT
AVOIDS UNWANTED TRIP OCCURRENCES DURING POWER
SWINGS IN THE SYSTEM WITH TWO STAGE EARTH CURRENT PICK UP
FOR USE OF POWER SWING BLOCKING OR OUT OF STEP DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION USING ZERO SEQUENCE
TRIPPING COMPONENTS OF CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES
5NIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE OPTIONALLY WITH DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON VIA COM

MUNICATION LINK EG 0,# OR OPTICAL FIBRE
PROGRAMMABLE FOR DIFFERENT SCHEMES OF
BACK UP FUNCTION IN CASE OF VOLTAGE FAILURE USING
PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIPPING 0544
DEFINITE TIME EARTH CURRENT PROTECTION
PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIPPING 0/44 IN
ALTERNATIVELY NON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE TIME EARTH
RELEASE OR BLOCK MODE
CURRENT PROTECTION WITH THREE SELECTABLE CHARAC
$EAD FAULT PROTECTION TERISTICS NOT IN CONJUNCTION WITH DIRECTIONAL EARTH
FAULT PROTECTION
PROVIDES HIGH SPEED OPERATION AT EITHER LINE END
WHEN SWITCHING MANUALLY ONTO A BOLTED FAULT
# ' #

3! 6 )NTRODUCTION
!UTOMATIC RECLOSE FUNCTION OPTIONAL OUTPUT OF FAULT DISTANCE IN OHMS PRIMARY AND SEC
ONDARY KILOMETERS AND LINE LENGTH
SINGLE POLE THREE POLE OR SINGLE AND THREE
POLE OPTIONALLY WITH PARALLEL LINE MUTUAL COMPENSATION
SINGLE OR MULTI SHOT EG 2!2 AND $!2 THREE 4HE STANDARD FUNCTIONS ALSO INCLUDE
POLE $!2 FROM SECOND SHOT ON
TWO LOGICAL FUNCTIONS WITH TIME STAGES WHICH CAN
WITH SEPARATELY ALLOCATED ACTION TIMES AND DEAD BE DEFINED BY THE USER IN ORDER TO COMBINE DELAY
TIMES FOR SINGLE POLE THREE POLE 2!2 RAPID !2 OR PROCESS EXTERNAL SIGNALS
FOR FIRST SHOT AND THREE POLE $!2 DELAYED !2 FOR
FURTHER SHOTS CONTINUOUS SELF MONITORING RIGHT FROM THE $# CIR
CUITS THROUGH THE CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK OPTIONAL INPUTS TO THE TRIPPING RELAYS THUS ACHIEVING MAXI
MUM AVAILABILITY AND A MORE CORRECTIVE THAN PRE
SYNCHRO CHECK BEFORE AUTO RECLOSURE AFTER VENTIVE MAINTENANCE STRATEGY
THREE POLE TRIP
MEASUREMENT AND TEST ROUTINES UNDER NORMAL
HIGH SPEED MEASUREMENT OF VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE LOAD CONDITIONS
5 PHASE ANGLE DIFFERENCE AND FREQUENCY DIF MEASUREMENT OF LOAD CURRENTS AND OPERATING VOLT
FERENCE F AGES
MEASUREMENT OF POWER AND FREQUENCY
SETTABLE ALTERNATIVELY FOR DEAD LINE CHECK ANDOR OUTPUT OF MEASURED IMPEDANCES DIRECTIONAL AND
DEAD BUS CHECK PHASE SEQUENCE CHECK
ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING POSSIBLE WITH PRE DE ANNUNCIATION STORAGE AND TRANSMISSION OF THE LAST
TERMINATION OF THE INSTANT OF SYNCHRONISM FOUR NETWORK FAULTS WITH REAL TIME CLOCK
SETTABLE MINIMUM VOLTAGE STORAGE OF DATA OF THE LAST THREE EARTH FAULTS IN ISO
LATED OR ARC COMPENSATED SYSTEMS
SYNCHRO CHECK DEAD LINE CHECK OR DEAD BUS
CHECK ALSO POSSIBLE BEFORE MANUAL CLOSE OF THE DATA STORAGE AND TRANSMISSION FOR FAULT RECORDS
CIRCUIT BREAKER GIVING
RAPID FAULT ANALYSIS
MEASURED VOLTAGES CAN BE CONNECTED EITHER PHA DETAILED FAULT RECORDS
SE TO PHASE OR PHASE TO EARTH
COUNTING OF TRIPPING AND CLOSING COMMANDS AS
$ISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATION WELL AS RECORDING OF FAULT DATA AND ACCUMULATIVE
ADDITION OF THE INTERRUPTED FAULT CURRENTS
CAN BE STARTED BY FAULT DETECTION OR TRIP COMMAND
OR BY EXTERNAL COMMAND COMMISSIONING AIDS SUCH AS DIRECTIONAL VERIFICA
TION AND CIRCUIT BREAKER LIVE TEST
CALCULATION OF THE FAULT DISTANCE
# ' #

3! 6 $ESIGN
$ESIGN
!RRANGEMENTS
!LL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS INCLUDING DCDC CONVERTER 3!J J#JJJ IN HOUSING 80 FOR
ARE ACCOMMODATED ON TWO PLUG IN MODULES OF PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR 3!J J%JJJ FOR
$OUBLE %UROPA &ORMAT 4HESE MODULES ARE INSTALLED CUBICLE INSTALLATION
IN A HOUSING 80 4WO DIFFERENT TYPES OF HOUSINGS
CAN BE DELIVERED 4HE HOUSING HAS FULL SHEET METAL COVERS AS WELL
AS A REMOVABLE FRONT COVER WITH TRANSPARENT PLAS
3!J J"JJJ IN HOUSING 80 FOR TIC WINDOW FOR PANEL MOUNTING
PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING
0LASTIC GUIDE RAILS ARE BUILT IN FOR THE SUPPORT OF
4HE HOUSING HAS FULL SHEET METAL COVERS AS WELL PLUG IN MODULES .EXT TO THE GUIDE RAIL AT THE BOT
AS A REMOVABLE FRONT COVER WITH TRANSPARENT PLAS TOM ON THE LEFT HAND SIDE OF EACH MODULE A CON
TIC WINDOW TACT AREA WHICH IS ELECTRICALLY CONNECTED TO THE
HOUSING IS INSTALLED TO MATE WITH THE EARTHING
0LASTIC GUIDE RAILS ARE BUILT IN FOR THE SUPPORT OF SPRING OF THE MODULE #ONNECTION TO EARTH IS MADE
PLUG IN MODULES .EXT TO THE GUIDE RAIL AT THE BOT BEFORE THE PLUGS MAKE CONTACT %ARTHING SCREWS
TOM ON THE LEFT HAND SIDE OF EACH MODULE A CON HAVE BEEN PROVIDED ON THE REAR WALL OF THE HOUS
TACT AREA WHICH IS ELECTRICALLY CONNECTED TO THE ING
HOUSING IS INSTALLED TO MATE WITH THE EARTHING
SPRING OF THE MODULE #ONNECTION TO EARTH IS MADE !LL EXTERNAL SIGNALS ARE CONNECTED TO CONNECTOR
BEFORE THE PLUGS MAKE CONTACT %ARTHING SCREWS MODULES WHICH ARE MOUNTED ON THE REAR COVER
HAVE BEEN PROVIDED ON THE LEFT HAND SIDE OF THE OVER CUT OUTS &OR EACH ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
ONE SCREWED TERMINAL AND ONE PARALLEL SNAP IN
HOUSING !DDITIONALLY TERMINAL IS CONNECTED TO
TERMINAL ARE PROVIDED &OR FIELD WIRING THE USE OF
THE CASE
THE SCREWED TERMINALS IS RECOMMENDED SNAP IN
CONNECTION REQUIRES SPECIAL TOOLS
!LL EXTERNAL SIGNALS ARE CONNECTED TO SCREWED
TERMINALS WHICH ARE ARRANGED OVER CUT OUTS ON
4HE HEAVY DUTY CURRENT PLUG CONNECTORS PROVIDE
THE TOP AND BOTTOM COVERS 4HE TERMINALS ARE
AUTOMATIC SHORTING OF THE CT CIRCUITS WHENEVER
NUMBERED CONSECUTIVELY FROM LEFT TO RIGHT AT THE
THE MODULES ARE WITHDRAWN 4HIS DOES NOT RELEASE
BOTTOM AND TOP FROM THE CARE TO BE TAKEN WHEN CT SECONDARY CIR
CUITS ARE CONCERNED
4HE HEAVY DUTY CURRENT PLUG CONNECTORS PROVIDE
AUTOMATIC SHORTING OF THE CT CIRCUITS WHENEVER 4HE ISOLATED INTERFACE TO A CENTRAL CONTROL AND STOR
THE MODULES ARE WITHDRAWN 4HIS DOES NOT RELEASE AGE UNIT 3!J JJJJJ J" IS LED TO A
FROM THE CARE TO BE TAKEN WHEN CT SECONDARY CIR POLE CONNECTION MODULE )N THE INTERFACE FOR
CUITS ARE CONCERNED OPTICAL FIBRE CONNECTION 3!J JJJJJ J#
A MODULE WITH & 3-! CONNECTORS IS PROVIDED
&OR THE ISOLATED INTERFACE TO A CENTRAL CONTROL AND INSTEAD
STORAGE UNIT AN ADDITIONAL COUPLING FACILITY HAS
BEEN PROVIDED &OR THE HARD WIRED 6 4HE PLUG MODULES ARE LABELLED ACCORDING TO THEIR
23# SERIAL INTERFACE 3!J JJJJJ MOUNTING POSITION BY MEANS OF A GRID SYSTEM EG
J" SCREWED TERMINALS ARE PROVIDED &OR THE IN ! 4HE INDIVIDUAL CONNECTIONS WITHIN A MODULE
TERFACE FOR OPTICAL FIBRE CONNECTION MODEL ARE NUMBERED CONSECUTIVELY FROM LEFT TO RIGHT
3!J JJJJJ J# TWO & 3-! CONNECTORS WHEN VIEWED FROM THE REAR EG ! REFER TO
HAVE BEEN PROVIDED &IGURE
4HE DEGREE OF PROTECTION FOR THE HOUSING IS )0 $EGREE OF PROTECTION FOR THE HOUSING IS )0 FOR
FOR THE TERMINALS )0 &OR DIMENSIONS PLEASE RE CUBICLE INSTALLATION )0 FOR THE TERMINALS )0
FER TO &IGURE &OR DIMENSIONS PLEASE REFER TO &IGURE
# ' #

3! 6 $ESIGN
$ # " !

$ # " !

6OLTAGE CONNECTOR (EAVY CURRENT CONNECTOR

EG " EG !
!
HORIZONTAL POSITION
VERTICAL POSITION
CONSECUTIVE CONNECTION NUMBER

" !
&IGURE #ONNECTION PLUGS REAR VIEW HOUSING FOR FLUSH MOUNTING EXAMPLE
# ' #

3! 6 $ESIGN
$IMENSIONS
&IGURES AND SHOW THE DIMENSIONS OF THE VARIOUS TYPES OF HOUSINGS AVAILABLE
3! (OUSING FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING 80

)NTERFACE FOR OPTICAL

FIBRE BELOW
2ESET AND PAG
ING BUTTONS

%ARTHING TERMINAL
-AX TERMINALS FOR CROSS SECTION MAX MM

/PTICAL FIBRE CONNECTORS
INTEGRATED & 3-! CONNECTOR
WITH CERAMIC POST
EG FOR GLASS FIBRE UM
$IMENSIONS IN MM
&IGURE $IMENSIONS FOR HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING
# ' #

3! 6 $ESIGN
3! (OUSING FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR CUBICLE INSTALLATION 80

-OUNTING PLATE

$ # " !

2ESET AND PAGING

BUTTONS #ONNECTOR MODULES

(EAVY CURRENT CONNECTORS

3CREWED TERMINAL FOR MAX MM
4WIN SPRING CRIMP CONNECTOR IN PARALLEL FOR
MAX MM
OR -
&URTHER CONNECTORS
3CREWED TERMINAL FOR MAX MM
4WIN SPRING CRIMP CONNECTOR IN PARALLEL FOR
MAX MM
/PTICAL FIBRE CONNECTORS

INTEGRATED & 3-! CONNECTOR
0ANEL CUT OUT WITH CERAMIC POST
EG FOR GLASS FIBRE UM
$IMENSIONS IN MM

&IGURE $IMENSIONS FOR HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR CUBICLE INSTALLATION
# ' #

3! 6 $ESIGN
/RDERING DATA
.UMERICAL DISTANCE PROTECTION
RELAY 3!
2ATED CURRENT RATED FREQUENCY
! (Z
! (Z
!UXILIARY VOLTAGE
6 DC
6 DC
6 DC
#ONSTRUCTION
IN HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING "
IN HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING #
IN HOUSING 80 FOR CUBICLE INSTALLATION

WITHOUT GLASS FRONT %
/PERATING LANGUAGE
'ERMAN !
%NGLISH !
&RENCH "
&AULT DETECTION SYSTEMS
/VERCURRENT FAULT DETECTORS
/VERCURRENT AND VOLTAGE CONTROLLED UNDERIMPEDANCE 5)

AND POLYGONAL IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTORS
/VERCURRENT AND UNDERIMPEDANCE 5) FAULT DETECTORS
-EASURED CURRENT INPUT FOR EARTH CURRENT
)NPUT FOR )% RESIDUAL CURRENT OF PROTECTED LINE
)NPUT FOR HIGHLY SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
)NPUT FOR )%0 PARALLEL LINE COMPENSATION FOR FAULT LOCATION
3ERIAL INTERFACE FOR COUPLING TO A CONTROL CENTRE
WITHOUT SERIAL INTERFACE !
WITH ISOLATED SERIAL INTERFACE SIMILAR 6 OR 23 # "
WITH SERIAL INTERFACE FOR OPTICAL FIBRE CONNECTION #
NEXT PAGE
# ' #

3! 6 $ESIGN
.UMERICAL DISTANCE PROTECTION
RELAY 3!
3UPPLEMENTS
!2 !UTO 2ECLOSURE
0#/ 0ARAMETER #HANGE /VER FACILITY
3# 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE #HECK
WITHOUT !2 WITHOUT 3# WITHOUT 0#/ !
WITH !2 POLE WITH 3# WITHOUT 0#/ "
WITH !2 POLE WITH 3# WITHOUT 0#/ #
WITHOUT !2 WITH 3# WITH 0#/ %
WITH !2 POLE WITH 3# WITH 0#/ &
WITH !2 POLE WITH 3# WITH 0#/ '
3UPPLEMENTS
03 0OWER 3WING OPTION

%& (IGH RESISTANCE %ARTH &AULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED SYSTEMS
WITHOUT 03 WITHOUT %&
WITH 03 WITHOUT %&
WITHOUT 03 WITH %&
WITH 03 WITH %&

ONLY WITH POLYGONAL IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTORS TH FIGURE OF ORDERING CODE

ONLY WITH EARTH CURRENT INPUT FOR )% OR )%0 TH FIGURE OF ORDERING CODE OR
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
4ECHNICAL DATA
'ENERAL DATA
)NPUTSOUTPUTS
-EASURING CIRCUITS
2ATED CURRENT ). ! OR !
2ATED VOLTAGE 5. 6 TO 6 SETTABLE
2ATED FREQUENCY F. (Z OR (Z SETTABLE
"URDEN CT CIRCUITS PER PHASE AND RESIDUAL PATH

AT ). ! APPROX 6!
AT ). ! APPROX 6!
FOR HIGHLY SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT DETECTION AT ! APPROX 6!
"URDEN VT CIRCUITS
AT 6 6!
FOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION OR BUSBAR VOLTAGE AT 6 6!
/VERLOAD CAPABILITY CT CIRCUITS PHASES AND EARTH

THERMAL RMS }). FOR SECOND
}). FOR SECONDS
}). CONTINUOUS
DYNAMIC IMPULSE }). HALF CYCLE
/VERLOAD CAPABILITY CT CIRCUIT FOR HIGHLY SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT DETECTION

THERMAL RMS ! FOR SECOND
! FOR SECONDS
! CONTINUOUS
/VERLOAD CAPABILITY VT CIRCUITS

THERMAL RMS 6 CONTINUOUS
!UXILIARY $# SUPPLY
!UXILIARY DC VOLTAGE SUPPLY VIA INTEGRATED DCDC CONVERTER

!UXILIARY VOLTAGE 5( 6 DC 6 DC 6 DC
/PERATING RANGES TO 6 DC TO 6 DC TO 6 DC
3UPERIMPOSED AC VOLTAGE AT RATED VOLTAGE

PEAK TO PEAK AT THE LIMITS OF THE VOLTAGE RANGES
0OWER CONSUMPTION QUIESCENT APPROX 7

PICKED UP APPROX 7
"RIDGING TIME DURING FAILURESHORT CIRCUIT

OF AUXILIARY DC VOLTAGE MS AT 5 6 DC
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
(EAVY DUTY TRIP CONTACTS
4RIP RELAYS NUMBER

#ONTACTS PER RELAY ./
3WITCHING CAPACITY -!+% 76!
"2%!+ 76!
3WITCHING VOLTAGE 6
0ERMISSIBLE CURRENT ! CONTINUOUS
! FOR S
3IGNAL CONTACTS
3IGNAL RELAYS
#ONTACTS PER RELAY #/ OR ./
3WITCHING CAPACITY -!+%"2%!+ 76!
3WITCHING VOLTAGE 6
0ERMISSIBLE CURRENT !
"INARY INPUTS NUMBER
6OLTAGE RANGE RECONNECTABLE TO 6 DC UP TO PRODUCTION SERIES ''

IN FROM PRODUCTION SERIES (( OR LATER IN RANGES
FOR RATED CONTROL VOLTAGE 6DC 6DC 6DC 6DC
PICK UP VALUE APPROX 6DC 6DC 6DC 6DC
-AX CONTROL VOLTAGE 6DC

#URRENT CONSUMPTION APPROX M! INDEPENDENT OF OPERATING VOLTAGE
3ERIAL INTERFACES
/PERATOR TERMINAL INTERFACE NON ISOLATED

#ONNECTION AT THE FRONT POLE SUBMINIATURE CONNECTOR ACCORDING
)3/ FOR CONNECTION OF A PERSONAL COMPUTER OR SIMILAR
4RANSMISSION SPEED AS DELIVERED "AUD
MIN "AUD MAX "AUD
)NTERFACE FOR DATA TRANSFER TO A CONTROL CENTRE
3TANDARDS SIMILAR 66 TO ##)44 23 # TO %)!

0ROTOCOL ACCORDING TO )%# OR $).
4RANSMISSION SPEED AS DELIVERED "AUD
MIN "AUD MAX "AUD
4RANSMISSION SECURITY (AMMING DISTANCE D
#ONNECTION DIRECTLY AT HOUSING TERMINALS

CORE PAIRS WITH INDIVIDUAL AND COMMON SCREENING
EG ,) 9#9 #9 X X MM
4RANSMISSION DISTANCE MAX M
4EST VOLTAGE K6 WITH RATED FREQUENCY FOR MIN
#ONNECTION OPTICAL FIBRE INTEGRATED & 3-! CONNECTOR FOR DIRECT OPTICAL FIBRE
CONNECTION WITH CERAMIC POST
EG GLASS FIBRE ¿M
FOR FLUSH MOUNTED HOUSING AT THE REAR
FOR SURFACE MOUNTED HOUSING ON THE BOTTOM COVER
/PTICAL WAVE LENGTH NM
0ERMISSIBLE LINE ATTENUATION MAX D"
4RANSMISSION DISTANCE MAX KM
.ORMAL SIGNAL POSITION RECONNECTABLE FACTORY SETTING LIGHT OFF
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
%LECTRICAL TESTS
)NSULATION TESTS
3TANDARDS )%#
(IGH VOLTAGE TEST ROUTINE TEST K6 RMS (Z

EXCEPT DC VOLTAGE SUPPLY INPUT
(IGH VOLTAGE TEST ROUTINE TEST K6 DC

ONLY DC VOLTAGE SUPPLY INPUT
)MPULSE VOLTAGE TEST TYPE TEST K6 PEAK ¿S * POSITIVE
ALL CIRCUITS CLASS ))) AND NEGATIVE SHOTS AT INTERVALS OF S
%-# TESTS IMMUNITY TYPE TESTS

3TANDARDS )%# )%# PRODUCT STANDARDS
%. GENERIC STANDARD
6$% PART
(IGH FREQUENCY K6 PEAK -(Z Ç ¿S SHOTSS

)%# CLASS ))) DURATION S
%LECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE K6 K6 CONTACT DISCHARGE K6 AIR DISCHARGE

)%# CLASS ))) BOTH POLARITIES P& 2I ¬
AND )%# CLASS )))
2ADIO FREQUENCY ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD 6M -(Z TO -(Z

NON MODULATED )%# REPORT CLASS
2ADIO FREQUENCY ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD 6M -(Z TO -(Z !- K(Z
AMPLITUDE MODULATED )%# CLASS
2ADIO FREQUENCY ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD PULSE 6M -(Z REPETITION FREQUENCY (Z
MODULATED )%# %.6 CLASS DUTY CYCLE
&AST TRANSIENTS
)%# AND )%# CLASS K6 NS K(Z BURST LENGTH MS
REPETITION RATE MS BOTH POLARITIES 2I ¬
DURATION MIN
#ONDUCTED DISTURBANCES INDUCED BY

RADIO FREQUENCY FIELDS AMPLITUDE MODULATED 6 K(Z TO -(Z !- K(Z
)%# CLASS )))
0OWER FREQUENCY MAGNETIC FIELD

)%# CLASS )6 !M CONTINUOUS !M FOR S (Z
)%# M4 (Z
%-# TESTS EMISSION TYPE TESTS
3TANDARD %. J GENERIC STANDARD
#ONDUCTED INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE AUX VOLTAGE K(Z TO -(Z

#)302 %. CLASS "
)NTERFERENCE FIELD STRENGTH -(Z TO -(Z
#)302 %. CLASS !
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
-ECHANICAL STRESS TESTS
6IBRATION AND SHOCK DURING OPERATION

3TANDARDS )%#
AND )%#
6IBRATION SINUSOIDAL
)%# CLASS (Z TO (Z MM AMPLITUDE
)%# (Z TO (Z G ACCELERATION
SWEEP RATE OCTAVEMIN
CYCLES IN ORTHOGONAL AXES
3HOCK HALF SINE

)%# CLASS ACCELERATION G DURATION MS SHOCKS IN
EACH DIRECTION OF ORTHOGONAL AXES
3EISMIC VIBRATION SINUSOIDAL

)%# CLASS (Z TO (Z MM AMPLITUDE HOR AXIS
)%# (Z TO (Z MM AMPLITUDE VERT AXIS
(Z TO (Z G ACCELERATION HOR AXIS
(Z TO (Z G ACCELERATION VERT AXIS
CYCLE IN ORTHOGONAL AXES
6IBRATION AND SHOCK DURING TRANSPORT
3TANDARDS )%#

AND )%#
6IBRATION SINUSOIDAL
)%# CLASS (Z TO (Z MM AMPLITUDE
)%# (Z TO (Z G ACCELERATION
CYCLES IN ORTHOGONAL AXES
3HOCK HALF SINE

)%# CLASS ACCELERATION G DURATION MS SHOCKS IN
)%# EACH DIRECTION OF ORTHOGONAL AXES
#ONTINUOUS SHOCK HALF SINE

)%# CLASS ACCELERATION G DURATION MS SHOCKS
)%# EACH DIRECTION OF ORTHOGONAL AXES
#LIMATIC STRESS TESTS
0ERMISSIBLE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

DURING SERVICE # TO #
DURING STORAGE # TO #
DURING TRANSPORT # TO #
3TORAGE AND TRANSPORT WITH STANDARD WORKS PACKAGING
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
0ERMISSIBLE HUMIDITY MEAN VALUE PER YEAR RELATIVE HUMIDITY

ON DAYS PER YEAR RELATIVE HUMIDITY
#ONDENSATION NOT PERMISSIBLE
7E RECOMMEND THAT ALL UNITS ARE INSTALLED SUCH THAT THEY ARE NOT SUBJECTED TO DIRECT SUNLIGHT NOR TO LARGE TEM
PERATURE FLUCTUATIONS WHICH MAY GIVE RISE TO CONDENSATION
3ERVICE CONDITIONS
4HE RELAY IS DESIGNED FOR USE IN INDUSTRIAL ENVIRON NORMALLY NECESSARY FOR SUB STATIONS OF LOWER
MENT FOR INSTALLATION IN STANDARD RELAY ROOMS AND VOLTAGES
COMPARTMENTS SO THAT WITH PROPER INSTALLATION ELEC
TRO MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY %-# IS ENSURED )T IS NOT PERMISSIBLE TO WITHDRAW OR INSERT INDIVIDU
4HE FOLLOWING SHOULD ALSO BE HEEDED AL MODULES UNDER VOLTAGE )N THE WITHDRAWN CONDI
TION SOME COMPONENTS ARE ELECTROSTATICALLY EN
!LL CONTACTORS AND RELAYS WHICH OPERATE IN THE DANGERED DURING HANDLING THE STANDARDS FOR
SAME CUBICLE OR ON THE SAME RELAY PANEL AS THE ELECTROSTATICALLY ENDANGERED COMPONENTS MUST
DIGITAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT SHOULD AS A RULE BE BE OBSERVED 4HE MODULES ARE NOT ENDANGERED
FITTED WITH SUITABLE SPIKE QUENCHING ELEMENTS WHEN PLUGGED IN
!LL EXTERNAL CONNECTION LEADS IN SUB STATIONS 7!2.).' 4HE RELAY IS NOT DESIGNED FOR USE IN RESI
FROM K6 UPWARDS SHOULD BE SCREENED WITH A DENTIAL COMMERCIAL OR LIGHT INDUSTRIAL ENVIRONMENT
SCREEN CAPABLE OF CARRYING POWER CURRENTS AND AS DEFINED IN %.
EARTHED AT BOTH SIDES .O SPECIAL MEASURES ARE
$ESIGN
(OUSING 80 REFER TO 3ECTION
$IMENSIONS REFER 3ECTION
7EIGHT FROM PRODUCTION SERIES (( OR LATER

UP TO '' IN PARENTHESIS
IN HOUSING FOR SURFACE MOUNTING APPROX KG KG
IN HOUSING FOR FLUSH MOUNTING APPROX KG KG
$EGREE OF PROTECTION ACC TO %.

(OUSING )0

4ERMINALS )0
)0 FOR CUBICLE INSTALLATION THE DEGREE OF PROTECTION REQUIRED FOR THE POINT OF INSTALLATION MUST BE ENSURED BY THE CUBICLE
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
$ISTANCE PROTECTION
%ARTH IMPEDANCE MATCHING

2%2, TO STEPS
8%8, TO STEPS
-UTUAL IMPEDANCE MATCHING FOR FAULT LOCATION WITH PARALLEL LINE

COMPENSATION OPTIONAL
2-2, TO STEPS
8-8, TO STEPS
0HASE PREFERENCES
FOR DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS PHASE TO PHASE OR
IN SOLIDLY EARTHED SYSTEMS LEADING PHASE TO EARTH OR
LAGGING PHASE TO EARTH
FOR DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS , , OR , , ACYCLIC OR
IN ISOLATED OR , , OR , , ACYCLIC OR
ARC COMPENSATED SYSTEMS , , OR , , ACYCLIC OR
, , OR , , CYCLIC
$ISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE PICK UP 5E o 5
IN ISOLATED OR ARC COMPENSATED SYSTEMS 6 TO 6 STEPS 6
&AULT DETECTION
/VERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION GENERAL FAULT DETECTION PARAMETERS
0HASE CURRENTS )PH). TO STEPS
%ARTH CURRENT )E). TO STEPS
$ISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE PICK UP 5E o 5 6 TO 6 STEPS 6 0
$ROP OFF RATIOS APPROX
-EASURING TOLERANCES ACCORDING 6$% PART q
6OLTAGE CONTROLLED CURRENT FAULT DETECTION UNDER IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION OPTIONAL
#HARACTERISTIC TWO STAGE WITH SETTABLE INCLINATION
6OLTAGE CONTROL BY 5PH E OR 5PH PH SELECTABLE
3ETTING RANGES
MINIMUM CURRENT PICK UP )PH TO | ). STEPS | ).
5NDERVOLTAGE PICK UP 5PH E 6 TO 6 STEPS 6
5PH PH 6 TO 6 STEPS 6
$ROP OFF RATIOS
)PH APPROX
5PH E 5PH PH APPROX

#HARACTERISTIC POLYGONAL PHASE ANGLE DEPENDENT 2 SECTION
3ETTING VALUES BASED ON ). !

8! FORWARDS REACH FOR ALL FAULTS ¬ TO ¬ STEPS ¬
8 ! REVERSE REACH FOR ALL FAULTS ¬ TO ¬ STEPS ¬
2! RESISTANCE TOLERANCE PHASE PHASE 3# ! ¬ TO ¬ STEPS ¬
2! RESISTANCE TOLERANCE PHASE PHASE 3# ! ¬ TO ¬ STEPS ¬
! LIMIT ANGLE BETWEEN 2! AND 2! TO STEPS
2!% RESISTANCE TOLERANCE PHASE EARTH 3# !% ¬ TO ¬ STEPS ¬
2!% RESISTANCE TOLERANCE PHASE EARTH 3# !% ¬ TO ¬ STEPS ¬
!% LIMIT ANGLE BETWEEN 2!% AND 2!% TO STEPS
)PH MINIMUM OPERATING PHASE CURRENT TO ). STEPS | ).
$ROP OFF RATIOS

FOR 2 8 APPROX
FOR )PH APPROX FOR ) ).
3ECONDARY VALUES ARE RELATED ON ). ! FOR ). ! THE VALUES ARE TO BE DIVIDED BY
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
-EASURING TOLERANCES ACCORDING 6$% PART 8 Ì FOR Ì Ì

8 SC
WITH SINUSOIDAL QUANTITIES
2 Ì FOR Ì Ì
2 SC
$ISTANCE MEASUREMENT
#HARACTERISTIC POLYGONAL INDEPENDENT CONTROLLED STAGES
3ETTING VALUES BASED ON ). !

8 FORWARDS REACH FOR ALL FAULTS ¬ TO ¬ STEPS ¬
2 RESISTANCE TOLERANCE PHASE PHASE ¬ TO ¬ STEPS ¬
2% RESISTANCE TOLERANCE PHASE EARTH ¬ TO ¬ STEPS ¬
-EASURING TOLERANCES ACCORDING 6$% PART 8 Ì FOR Ì Ì
8 SC
2 Ì FOR Ì Ì
2 SC
&OR ALL TYPES OF FAULTS WITH QUADRATURE VOLTAGES AND

VOLTAGE MEMORY
3ENSITIVITY DYNAMICALLY UNLIMITED
4IMES
3HORTEST TRIPPING TIME APPROX MS

$ROP OFF TIME APPROX MS
4IME STAGES
3ETTING RANGES S TO S STEPS S
FOR ALL STAGES OR 0 IE STAGE INEFFECTIVE
4IME EXPIRY TOLERANCES OF SET VALUE OR MS
!LL STAGES CAN BE SET TO OPERATE IN FORWARD OR REVERSE DIRECTION OR NON DIRECTIONAL 4HE SET TIMES ARE PURE DELAY TIMES
/VERCURRENT EMERGENCY PROTECTION
WITH MEASURED VOLTAGE FAILURE EG 64 SECONDARY MCB TRIP OR DETECTED FUSE FAILURE
(IGH SET PHASE OVERCURRENT )). TO STEPS

$EFINITE TIME DELAY 4) S TO S STEPS S
OR 0 IE STAGE INEFFECTIVE
0HASE OVERCURRENT )PH). TO STEPS
$EFINITE TIME DELAY 4)PH S TO S STEPS S
%ARTH OVERCURRENT )%). TO STEPS
$EFINITE TIME DELAY 4)% S TO S STEPS S
$ROP OFF RATIOS

FOR ) ). APPROX
FOR ) X ). APPROX
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
0OWER SWING SUPPLEMENT OPTIONAL ONLY WITH IMPEDANCE FAULT DE

TECTION
0OWER SWING DETECTION RATE OF CHANGE OF THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR

BETWEEN POWER SWING POLYGON AND
FAULT DETECTION POLYGON
3ETTING THE DIFFERENCE 2 BETWEEN THE POLYGONS ¬ TO ¬ STEPS ¬
SECONDARY BASED ON ). !

3ETTING RATE OF CHANGE D2D4 ¬S TO ¬S STEPS ¬S
0ROGRAMS BLOCK FIRST DISTANCE ZONE ONLY

BLOCK ALL ZONES BUT FIRST ZONE
BLOCK ALL DISTANCE ZONES
OUT OF STEP TRIPPING
!CTION TIME S TO S STEPS S

OR 0 IE UNTIL DROP OFF OF THE POWER SWING
POLYGON
4ELEPROTECTION INTERFACE
4ELEPROTECTION MODES SELECTABLE
0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP FAULT DETECTION ACCELERATION

ZONE ACCELERATION SPECIAL ZONE :"
4RANSMIT SIGNAL PROLONGATION S TO S STEPS S

4RANSMIT SIGNAL DELAY S TO S STEPS S
2ECEIVED SIGNAL PROLONGATION S TO S STEPS S
0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP RELEASE OVERREACHING ZONE :"

RELEASE FAULT DETECTION ZONE DIRECTIONAL
UNBLOCKING ZONE :"
UNBLOCKING FAULT DETECTION ZONE DIRECTIONAL
BLOCKING ZONE :"
4RANSMIT SIGNAL PROLONGATION S TO S STEPS S

4RANSMIT SIGNAL DELAY S TO S STEPS S
%CHO DELAY TIME S TO S STEPS S 0
%CHO PULSE DURATION S TO S STEPS S
%CHO BLOCK DURATION S TO S STEPS S
4RANSIENT BLOCKING TIME S TO S STEPS S
7AITING TIME FOR TRANSIENT BLOCKING S TO S STEPS S 0
/VERREACHING TRANSFER VIA PILOT WIRES .# LINK WITH $# CONTROL CABLE AND SUPPLEMENTARY
AUXILIARY RELAY
2EVERSE INTERLOCKING WITH ./ OR .# INTERLOCK LOOP
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
.UMBER
LOGICAL INPUTS VIA BINARY INPUT 3TART AND 3TOP

LOGICAL OUTPUTS FOR BINARY OUTPUTS TIME EXPIRED
OPERATING TIME APPROX MS
DELAY S TO S STEPS S
TIME TOLERANCE OF SET VALUE OR MS
4HE DELAY TIMES DO NOT INCLUDE THE INHERENT OPERATING TIMES
3ETTING RANGESSTEPS
&ACTOR K ACCORDING TO )%# TO STEPS

4IME CONSTANT Ç TO MIN STEPS MIN
4HERMAL WARNING STAGE WARNTRIP TO REFERRED TO TRIP
TEMPERATURE RISE STEPS
#URRENT WARNING STAGE )WARN). TO STEPS

4RIP TIME CHARACTERISTIC )+ ) . ) PREK ) .
TÇ LN
)+ ) .
T TRIP TIME
Ç TIME CONSTANT
) LOAD CURRENT
)PRE PRELOAD CURRENT
K FACTOR ACCORDING TO )%#
REFER ALSO TO &IGURES AND
$ROP OFF RATIOS

TRIP APPROX
WARN APPROX
))WARN APPROX
4OLERANCES
REFERRING TO Kw ). q
REFERRING TO TRIP TIME q q S
)NFLUENCE VARIABLES REFERRED TO Kw).

!UXILIARY DC VOLTAGE IN RANGE 5(5(.
4EMPERATURE IN RANGE # AMB # +
&REQUENCY IN RANGE FF.
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
TMIN TMIN

0ARAMETER 0ARAMETER
SETTING VALUE SETTING VALUE
TIME CONSTANT TIME CONSTANT
ÇMIN ÇMIN

)K | ). )K | ).

)K ). )K ) . ) PREK ) .
TÇ LN TÇ LN
)K ).
)K ) .
FOR PRELOAD
&IGURE 4RIP TIME CHARACTERISTIC OF OVERLOAD &IGURE 4RIP TIME CHARACTERISTIC OF OVERLOAD
PROTECTION WITHOUT PRELOAD PROTECTION WITH PRELOAD
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL
$ETECTION
$ISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5E 6 TO 6 STEPS 6
$ELAY APPROX S SETTABLE UP TO S

OPTIONAL TRIP
-EASURING TOLERANCE ACCORDING 6$% PART OF SET VALUE
&AULTED PHASE DETERMINATION
-EASURING PRINCIPLE VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT PHASE TO EARTH
5 FAULTED PHASE 6 TO 6 STEPS 6

5 UNFAULTED PHASES 6 TO 6 STEPS 6
-EASURING PRINCIPLE MEASUREMENT OF ACTIVE AND REACTIVE POWER
0ICK UP VALUE )E ACTIVE OR REACTIVE COMPONENT M! TO M! STEPS M!

#4 ANGLE ERROR CORRECTION TO STEPS FOR OPERATING POINTS
OF THE #4 CHARACTERISTIC

FOR TAN WITH ACTIVE COMPONENT
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN SOLIDLY EARTHED SYSTEMS

OPTIONAL
&AULT DETECTION
%ARTH CURRENT PICK UP )%). FOR TRIP TO STEPS
,OWER PICK UP VALUE FOR MEASUREMENT RELEASE )%).
$ISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5% 6 TO 6 STEPS 6
$ROP OFF RATIO APPROX

-EASURING PRINCIPLE WITH )% ) AND 5% o 5
&ORWARDS ANGLE APPROX ^ TO ^

-EASURING TOLERANCES AT 5. AND ). ^
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON RELEASE MODE
4IMES
3HORTEST TRIPPING TIME APPROX MS

2E ORIENTATION TIME AFTER CHANGE OF DIRECTION APPROX MS
4RIP DELAY TIME S TO S STEPS S 0

"ACK UP TIME 4 DIRECTIONAL S TO S STEPS S 0
"ACK UP TIME 4 NON DIRECTIONAL S TO S STEPS S 0
%CHO DELAY TIME S TO S STEPS S 0
%CHO PULSE DURATION S TO S STEPS S
%CHO BLOCK DURATION S TO S STEPS S
4RANSIENT BLOCKING TIME S TO S STEPS S
7AITING TIME FOR TRANSIENT BLOCKING S TO S STEPS S 0
4IME EXPIRY TOLERANCES OR MS
)NVERSE TIME EARTH FAULT BACK UP PROTECTION
CAN BE USED INSTEAD OF THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION AS DESCRIBED BEFORE
#HARACTERISTICS NORMAL INVERSE OR

VERY INVERSE OR
EXTREMELY INVERSE
TYPE ! OR " OR # ACCORDING )%#
OR "3 REFER TO &IGURE
0ICK UP VALUE )%). TO STEPS

4IME SETTING 4)% S TO S STEPS S 0
CORRESPONDS TO 4- FACTOR TO STEPS 0
-EASURING TOLERANCES
EARTH CURRENT PICK UP VALUE TO
TIME EXPIRY MS FOR ))% AND
4)%S
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
T;S= T;S=

4 )%;S= 4
)%;S=

%

) ) %
) )

4 )% T
4 )% ;S=
%
.ORMAL INVERSE T ;S= 6ERY INVERSE

) )

%
) )
T;S=

4)% CORRESPONDS TO THE
USUAL TIME MULTIPLIER 4-

4 )%;S=

T TRIPPING TIME

4)% SET TIME DELAY
PARAMETER 4)E
) EARTH FAULT CURRENT
)% SET EARTH FAULT PICK UP VALUE
PARAMETER )E

%

) )

4 )%
%
%XTREMELY INVERSE T ;S=

) )
&IGURE 4RIPPING TIME CHARACTERISTICS OF INVERSE TIME EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
!UTO RECLOSURE OPTIONAL
-AX NUMBER OF POSSIBLE SHOTS 2!2 FIRST SHOT

UP TO $!2 FURTHER SHOTS
!UTO RECLOSE MODES SINGLE POLE OR THREE POLE OR

SINGLETHREE POLE ST SHOT 2!2
FURTHER SHOTS THREE POLE $!2
!CTION TIMES S TO S STEPS S

2!2 DEAD TIME SINGLE POLE S TO S STEPS S
2!2 DEAD TIME THREE POLE S TO S STEPS S
$!2 DEAD TIMES S TO S STEPS S
$ISCRIMINATION TIME FOR EVOLVING FAULTS S TO S STEPS S
2ECLAIM TIME S TO S STEPS S

,OCK OUT TIME S TO S STEPS S 0
2ECLAIM TIME AFTER MANUAL CLOSE S TO S STEPS S
$URATION OF 2%#,/3% COMMAND S TO S STEPS S
/PERATION MODES
#HECK PROGRAMS FOR AUTO RECLOSE SYNCHRO CHECK

DEAD LINE LIVE BUS CHECK
DEAD BUS LIVE LINE CHECK
DEAD BUS DEAD LINE CHECK
OR COMBINATIONS
#HECK PROGRAMS FOR MANUAL CLOSE SAME AS FOR AUTO RECLOSE INDEPENDENT SETTING
6OLTAGES
5 FOR DEAD LINE OR DEAD BUS CHECK 6 TO 6 STEPS 6

5 FOR LIVE LINE OR LIVE BUS CHECK 6 TO 6 STEPS 6
5 MEASUREMENT
SETTING RANGE 6 TO 6 STEPS 6
MEASURING TOLERANCE 6
MEASUREMENT
SETTING RANGE TO STEPS
MEASURING TOLERANCE
F MEASUREMENT
SETTING RANGE FOR ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING (Z TO (Z STEPS (Z
SETTING RANGE FOR SYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING (Z TO (Z STEPS (Z 0
MEASURING TOLERANCE M(Z
MIN OPERATING VOLTAGE 6
4IMES
MINIMUM MEASURING TIME APPROX MS
ACTIVE TIME S TO S STEPS S
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
&AULT LOCATION
/UTPUT OF FAULT DISTANCE IN ¬ PRIMARY

IN ¬ SECONDARY
IN KM LINE LENGTH
IN PERCENT LINE LENGTH
3TART TO MEASURE COMMAND BY TRIP SIGNAL OR BY DROP OFF OF FAULT DETECTION

OR BY EXTERNAL COMMAND VIA BINARY INPUT
3ETTING REACTANCE PER UNIT LINE LENGTH SECONDARY

¬KM TO ¬KM STEPS ¬KM
0ARALLEL LINE MUTUAL COMPENSATION CAN BE ORDERED AS AN OPTION

SETTING OF MATCHING REFER TO 3ECTION
-EASURING TOLERANCES ACCORDING 6$% PART OF LINE LENGTH WITHOUT INTERMEDIATE
SINUSOIDAL QUANTITIES INFEED
FOR SC AND 5SC5.

/UTPUT OF FAULT DISTANCE IN KM OR MILES OR PERCENTS ONLY FOR HOMOGENEOUS LINES 7HEN SETTING RELATED REACTANCE IN ¬MILE
THE OUTPUT CAN BE READ IN MILES
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
!NCILLARY FUNCTIONS
/UTPUT OF MEASURED VALUES

/PERATIONAL VALUES OF CURRENTS ), ), ),
IN ! PRIMARY AND IN ).
RANGE TO ).
TOLERANCE OF ). FOR ) ).
OF MEAS VALUE FOR ) ).
/PERATIONAL VALUES OF VOLTAGES 5, % 5, % 5, %

IN K6 PRIMARY AND IN 5.o
RANGE TO 5.o
TOLERANCE OF 5.
/PERATIONAL VALUES OF VOLTAGES 5, , 5, , 5, ,

IN K6 PRIMARY AND IN 5.
RANGE TO 5.
TOLERANCE OF 5.
/PERATIONAL VALUES OF POWERS 0A 0R ACTIVE AND REACTIVE POWER

IN -7 OR -6!R PRIMARY AND
IN 3. o 5. ).
RANGE TO 3.
TOLERANCE OF 3.
/PERATIONAL VALUE OF FREQUENCY F

IN F.
RANGE TO F.
TOLERANCE OF F.
/PERATIONAL VALUES OF OVERLOAD PROTECTION CALCULATED TEMPERATURE RISE RELATED ON

TRIP TEMPERATURE RISE
%ARTH FAULT MEASURED VALUES IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS )%A )%R ACTIVE AND REACTIVE EARTH CURRENT
MODELS WITH SENSITIVE RESIDUAL CURRENT INPUT IN ! PRIMARY AND M! AT RELAY INPUT
-EASURED VALUES PLAUSIBILITY CHECKS

3UM OF CURRENTS PHASES AND EARTH
3UM OF VOLTAGES PHASES AND EARTH

PHASE TO PHASE
PHASE TO PHASE AGAINST PHASE TO EARTH
3TEADY STATE MEASURED VALUE SUPERVISION
#URRENT UNBALANCE )MAX)MIN SYMMETRY FACTOR

AS LONG AS ) )LIMIT
6OLTAGE UNBALANCE 5MAX5MIN SYMMETRY FACTOR

PHASE TO PHASE AND PHASE TO EARTH AS LONG AS 5 5LIMIT
6OLTAGE FAILURE THREE PHASE \5\ LIMIT VOLTAGE AS LONG AS \)MAX\ LIMIT CURRENT
6OLTAGE FAILURE SINGLE PHASE 5% AND )%
0HASE SEQUENCE CLOCKWISE PHASE ROTATION
# ' #

3! 6 4ECHNICAL DATA
&AULT EVENT DATA STORAGE
3TORAGE OF ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE LAST FOUR FAULT EVENTS THE THREE LAST CAN BE READ OUT LOCALLY
2EAL TIME CLOCK
2ESOLUTION FOR OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS MIN MS WITH PERSONAL COMPUTER

2ESOLUTION FOR FAULT EVENT ANNUNCIATIONS MS
2ESOLUTION FO EARTH FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS MS
-AX TIME DEVIATION

"UFFER BATTERY ,ITHIUM "ATTERY 6 !H 4YPE #2 !!
3ELF DISCHARGE TIME YEARS
$ATA STORAGE FOR FAULT RECORDING
3TORAGE PERIOD FAULT DETECTION OR TRIP COMMAND MS

MAX S SELECTABLE PRE TRIGGER AND POST FAULT TIME
3AMPLING RATE INSTANTANEOUS VALUE PER MS AT (Z

INSTANTANEOUS VALUE PER MS AT (Z
#IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION LOG
.UMBER OF STORED TRIP EVENTS CAUSED BY 3! UP TO DECIMAL DIGITS

POLE SEGREGATED
.UMBER OF STORED RECLOSE EVENTS UP TO DECIMAL DIGITS

FOR EACH KIND OF AUTO RECLOSURE
4OTAL OF TRIPPED CURRENTS UP TO DECIMAL DIGITS PLUS AFTER DECIMAL POINT

POLE SEGREGATED
4RIP COMMAND AND ANNUNCIATIONS VIA BINARY INPUT
USER DEFINABLE TRIP COMMAND FOR ANNUNCIATION PROCESSING AND DIRECT LOCAL TRIP
USER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATIONS FOR ANNUNCIATION PROCESSING
#OMMISSIONING AIDS
0HASE SEQUENCE AND DIRECTIONAL CHECK
#IRCUIT BREAKER TEST

WITH AUTO RECLOSURE SINGLE POLE OR THREE POLE
WITHOUT AUTO RECLOSURE THREE POLE
3TORAGE OF A TEST RECORD
# ' #

3!6 -ETHOD OF OPERATION
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
/PERATION OF COMPLETE UNIT
4HE NUMERICAL DISTANCE PROTECTION 3)02/4%# 4HE TRANSDUCERS OF THE MEASURED VALUE INPUT SEC
3! IS EQUIPPED WITH A POWERFUL AND PROVEN TION -% TRANSFORM THE CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES FROM THE
BIT MICROPROCESSOR 4HIS PROVIDES FULLY DIGITAL MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS OF THE SWITCH GEAR AND
PROCESSING OF ALL FUNCTIONS FROM DATA ACQUISITION OF MATCH THEM TO THE INTERNAL PROCESSING LEVEL OF THE
MEASURED VALUES TO THE TRIP SIGNALS FOR THE CIRCUIT UNIT !PART FROM THE GALVANIC AND LOW CAPACITIVE
BREAKERS ISOLATION PROVIDED BY THE INPUT TRANSFORMERS FILTERS
ARE PROVIDED FOR THE SUPPRESSION OF INTERFERENCE 4HE
&IGURE SHOWS THE BASE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT FILTERS HAVE BEEN OPTIMIZED WITH REGARD TO BANDWIDTH
, , , -% !%
¯ ,#$ DISPLAY
X
CHARACTERS
&AULT
2EADY
SIGNALS
CAN BE MAR
SHALLED
¿#
,%$ CAN BE
MARSHALLED
,%$
#7 2ESET
X TRIP COM
2 MANDS CAN BE
MARSHALLED
/PERATOR &
PANEL
$! 0
-3 *9 . %
3ERIAL
INTERFACE #ONTROL CENTRE
BINARY ISOLATED
INPUTS CAN BE
MARSHALLED
3ERIAL 0ERSONAL
INTERFACE COMPUTER
0OWER
SUPPLY
&IGURE (ARDWARE STRUCTURE OF DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY 3!
# ' #

AND PROCESSING SPEED TO SUIT THE MEASURED VALUE !N INTEGRATED MEMBRANE KEYBOARD IN CONNECTION
PROCESSING 4HE MATCHED ANALOG VALUES ARE THEN WITH A BUILT IN ALPHANUMERICAL ,#$ DISPLAY ENABLES
PASSED TO THE ANALOG INPUT SECTION !% COMMUNICATION WITH THE UNIT !LL OPERATIONAL DATA
SUCH AS SETTING VALUES PLANT DATA ETC ARE ENTERED
4HE ANALOG INPUT SECTION !% CONTAINS INPUT AMPLIFI INTO THE PROTECTION FROM THIS PANEL REFER 3ECTION
ERS SAMPLE AND HOLD ELEMENTS FOR EACH INPUT ANA 5SING THIS PANEL THE PARAMETERS CAN BE RECALLED AND
LOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTERS AND MEMORY CIRCUITS FOR THE RELEVANT DATA FOR THE EVALUATION OF A FAULT CAN BE
THE DATA TRANSFER TO THE MICROPROCESSOR READ OUT AFTER A FAULT HAS OCCURRED REFER 3ECTION
4HE DIALOG WITH THE RELAY CAN BE CARRIED OUT ALTERNA
!PART FROM CONTROL AND SUPERVISION OF THE MEASURED TIVELY VIA THE SERIAL INTERFACE IN THE FRONT PLATE BY
VALUES THE MICROPROCESSOR PROCESSES THE ACTUAL MEANS OF A PERSONAL COMPUTER
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 4HESE INCLUDE IN PARTICULAR
6IA A SECOND SERIAL INTERFACE OPTION FAULT DATA CAN
&ILTERING AND FORMATION OF THE MEASURED QUANTI BE TRANSMITTED TO A CENTRAL EVALUATION UNIT $URING
TIES HEALTHY OPERATION MEASURED VALUES CAN ALSO BE
#ONTINUOUS CALCULATION OF THE VALUES WHICH ARE TRANSMITTED EG LOAD CURRENTS 4HIS SECOND INTER
RELEVANT FOR FAULT DETECTION FACE IS ISOLATED AND THUS SATISFIES THE REQUIREMENTS
$ETERMINATION OF THE FAULTED PHASES IN CASE OF A FOR EXTERNAL SIGNALS IE ISOLATION AND INTERFERENCE
FAULT SUPPRESSION COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS ACCORD
ING TO )%# AND 6$% PART
3CANNING OF LIMIT VALUES AND TIME SEQUENCES
#ONTROLLING OF SIGNALS AND SEQUENCES FOR TELEPRO #OMMUNICATION VIA THIS INTERFACE IS ALTERNATIVELY POS
TECTION AUTO RECLOSURE ETC SIBLE BY MEANS OF FIBRE OPTIC LINKS PROVIDED THIS IN
$ECISION ABOUT TRIP AND CLOSE COMMANDS TERFACE IS ACCORDINGLY ORDERED REFER 3ECTION /R
3TORAGE OF INSTANTANEOUS CURRENT AND VOLTAGE VAL DERING DATA
UES DURING A FAULT FOR ANALYSIS
! POWER SUPPLY UNIT PROVIDES THE AUXILIARY SUPPLY ON
"INARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS TO AND FROM THE PROCESSOR THE VARIOUS VOLTAGE LEVELS TO THE DESCRIBED FUNCTIONAL
ARE CHANNELLED VIA THE INPUTOUTPUT ELEMENTS &ROM UNITS 6 IS USED FOR THE RELAY OUTPUTS 4HE ANALOG
THESE THE PROCESSOR RECEIVES INFORMATION FROM THE INPUT REQUIRES q 6 WHEREAS THE PROCESSOR AND ITS
SWITCH GEAR EG REMOTE RESETTING OR FROM OTHER IMMEDIATE PERIPHERALS ARE SUPPLIED WITH 6 4RAN
EQUIPMENT EG BLOCKING SIGNALS /UTPUTS INCLUDE SIENT FAILURES IN THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE UP TO MS
IN PARTICULAR TRIP COMMANDS TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS WHICH MAY OCCUR DURING SHORT CIRCUITS IN THE DC
SIGNALS FOR REMOTE SIGNALLING OF IMPORTANT EVENTS AND SUPPLY SYSTEM OF THE PLANT ARE BRIDGED BY A DC VOLT
CONDITIONS AS WELL AS VISUAL INDICATORS ,%$S AND AN AGE STORAGE ELEMENT RATED AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
ALPHANUMERICAL DISPLAY ON THE FRONT 6DC
# ' #

$ISTANCE PROTECTION
$ISTANCE PROTECTION IS THE MAIN FUNCTION OF THE RELAY 4HE OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION OPERATES WITH HIGH
)T IS CHARACTERIZED BY HIGH MEASURING ACCURACY AND SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENTS )F THERE IS NO SIGNIFICANT DIFFER
FLEXIBLE ADAPTATION POSSIBILITIES FOR THE GIVEN NETWORK ENCE BETWEEN NORMAL OPERATION INCLUDING OVER
CHARACTERISTICS )T CAN BE EXTENDED BY A RANGE OF LOAD AND SHORT CIRCUIT IN TERMS OF THE CURRENT WHICH
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS WILL FLOW EG IN NETWORKS WITH HIGHLY FLUCTUATING
SYSTEM IMPEDANCE OR WHERE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT
LIMITING DEVICES ARE INSTALLED THEN UNDER IMPE
DANCE FAULT DETECTION VOLTAGE CONTROLLED CURRENT OR
&AULT DETECTION IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION MUST BE USED 7ITH THESE
OPTIONS COMPREHENSIVE FACILITIES ARE POSSIBLE TO
&AULT DETECTION HAS THE DUTY TO DETECT A FAULTY CONDI MATCH TO THE NETWORK CONDITIONS AND THE USER S PHI
TION IN THE NETWORK AND TO INITIATE ALL THE NECESSARY LOSOPHY
PROCEDURES FOR SELECTIVE CLEARANCE OF THE FAULT
3TART THE DELAY TIMES

3ELECTION OF THE MEASURED VALUES %ARTH FAULT DETECTION AND PROCESSING
2ELEASE OF IMPEDANCE CALCULATION AND DIRECTIONAL
IDENTIFICATION !N IMPORTANT ELEMENT FOR ALL FAULT DETECTION METHODS
2ELEASE OF TRIPPING COMMAND IS THE DETECTION OF AN EARTH FAULT SINCE THE DETERMINA
)NITIATION OF AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS TION OF THE FAULTY LINE LOOPS 3ECTION ESSENTIALLY
)NDICATIONOUTPUT OF THE FAULTY CONDUCTORS DEPENDS ON WHETHER IT IS AN EARTH FAULT OR NOT 4HE
MODEL 3! IS EQUIPPED WITH STABILIZED MEASURE
4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY HAS A VARIETY OF FAULT MENT OF THE EARTH CURRENT WITH DELAY FACILITY AS WELL
DETECTION FUNCTIONS FROM WHICH THE OPTIMUM CAN BE AS DETECTION OF THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE -EASURES
CHOSEN FOR THE SYSTEM UNDER CONSIDERATION REFER TO HAVE ALSO BEEN PROVIDED TO SUPPRESS FAULT DETECTION
3ECTION /RDERING DATA IN THE CASE OF SINGLE PHASE EARTH FAULTS IN ISOLATED
OR COMPENSATED SYSTEMS
) %
).

) % RESET
) % PICK UP

) PH MAX
).
&IGURE %ARTH CURRENT DETECTOR PICK UPRESET CHARACTERISTIC EXAMPLE )%). SET AT
# ' #

4HE EARTH CURRENT DETECTOR MONITORS THE FUNDAMEN ABLE DELAY TIME 4)E 0(!3% ADDRESS THIS IS
TAL WAVE OF THE TOTAL OF THE PHASE CURRENTS )% | ) NECESSARY SO THAT THE DISTANCE PROTECTION IS STILL ABLE
IN COMPARISON WITH THE THRESHOLD VALUE )T IS STABI TO RECOGNIZE A CROSS COUNTRY DOUBLE EARTH FAULT WITH
LIZED AGAINST FAULTY PICK UP CAUSED BY ASYMMETRIC ONE BASE POINT ON A SPUR FEEDER )F HOWEVER AN EARTH
OPERATING CURRENTS OR DISTORTED CURRENTS IN THE SEC FAULT IS ALREADY PRESENT IN THE SYSTEM THIS IS DETECTED
ONDARY CIRCUIT OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS RESULTING BY THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE MONITOR THE DELAY IS
FROM DIFFERENT CURRENT TRANSFORMER SATURATION WITH THEN NOT EFFECTIVE AN EARTH FAULT WHICH NOW OCCURS IN
EARTH FREE SHORT CIRCUITS THE ACTUAL PICK UP VALUE ANOTHER PHASE CAN ONLY BE A DOUBLE PHASE EARTH
IS AUTOMATICALLY INCREASED AS THE PHASE CURRENTS IN FAULT
CREASE &IGURE %XAMPLE FOR SETTING THE HOR
IZONTAL BRANCH IS SHIFTED ACCORDING DIFFERENT SET
TINGS 4HE DROP OFF VALUE IS APPROX OF THE /VERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION
PICK UP VALUE
4HE OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION IS A PHASE DEDI
4HE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE DETECTOR MONITORS THE FUN CATED FAULT DETECTION PROCEDURE &OLLOWING NUMERIC
DAMENTAL WAVE OF THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5% FILTERING THE CURRENTS IN EACH PHASE ARE MONITORED IN
o | 5 IN COMPARISON WITH THE SET THRESHOLD VALUE COMPARISON WITH A SET THRESHOLD VALUE ! PICK UP
4HE DROP OFF VALUE IS APPROX OF THE PICK UP SIGNAL IS OUTPUT FOR THAT THOSE PHASES IN WHICH THE
VALUE SET THRESHOLD HAS BEEN EXCEEDED
)N SYSTEMS WITH AN EARTHED STARPOINT SOLIDLY EARTHED 4O ENABLE MEASURED VALUE SELECTION SEE 3ECTION
OR LOW RESISTANCE EARTHED THE PICK UP OF THE THE PHASE DEDICATED FAULT DETECTION SIGNALS
EARTH CURRENT MONITOR AS WELL AS THAT OF THE DISPLACE ARE CONVERTED INTO PHASE LOOP INFORMATION 4HIS IS
MENT VOLTAGE MONITOR LEAD TO PICK UP OF THE EARTH CARRIED OUT DEPENDING ON THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION
FAULT DETECTOR $ETECTION OF AN EARTH FAULT ON ITS OWN ACCORDING 3ECTION AND IN EARTHED SYSTEMS
DOES NOT LEAD TO GENERAL FAULT DETECTION SIGNAL OF THE ON THE PARAMETER 0( &!5,43 ADDRESS AC
DISTANCE PROTECTION BUT ONLY CONTROLS THE OTHER FAULT CORDING TO 4ABLE )N NON EARTHED SYSTEM THE
DETECTION MODULES )T IS NOT ANNUNCIATED ON ITS OWN PHASE PHASE LOOP IS ALWAYS SELECTED IN THE CASE OF
EITHER A SINGLE PHASE FAULT DETECTION WITHOUT EARTH FAULT
DETECTION
)N NON EARTHED SYSTEMS ISOLATED STARPOINT OR WITH
ARC COMPENSATION BY MEANS OF 0ETERSEN COIL THE 4HE FAULTY PHASES ARE ANNUNCIATED !N EARTH FAULT IS
DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE MONITOR IS NOT USED FOR EARTH ALSO ANNUNCIATED IF DETECTED ACCORDING TO 3ECTION
FAULT DETECTION ! SINGLE PHASE EARTH FAULT IS ALSO INI
TIALLY ASSUMED IN THESE SYSTEMS IN THE EVENT OF A
SINGLE PHASE FAULT DETECTION AND THE DETECTION IS 4HE OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTOR IS RESET WHEN OF
SUPPRESSED TO PREVENT FAULTY PICK UP BY THE OSCILLA THE PICK UP VALUE IS FALLEN BELOW
TION TRANSIENTS ON THE OCCURRENCE OF A SIMPLE EARTH
FAULT 0ICK UP IS ENABLED AGAIN FOLLOWING AN ADJUST
&AULT DETECTION %ARTH FAULT 0ARAMETER 2ESULTANT !NNUNCI

MODULE DETECTION 0( &!5,43 LOOP ATION
, NO 0(!3% 0(!3% , , , ,
, NO , , , ,
, NO , , , ,
, NO 0(!3% %!24( , % ,
, NO , % ,
, NO , % ,
, YES IRRELEVANT , % , %
, YES , % , %
, YES , % , %

ONLY FOR EARTHED SYSTEM STARPOINT
4ABLE ,INE LOOPS AND PHASE ANNUNCIATIONS WITH SINGLE PHASE OVERCURRENT
FAULT DETECTION
# ' #

)MPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION IS A LOOP DEDICATED FAULT 8

DETECTION PROCEDURE %ITHER THE THREE PHASE PHASE
LOOPS WITHOUT EARTH FAULT OR THE THREE PHASE EARTH
LOOPS WITH EARTH FAULT ARE MONITORED DEPENDING ON 8!
THE RESULT OF THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION 3ECTION &ORWARDS
! PREREQUISITE FOR MEASUREMENT OF A LOOP DIRECTION
IMPEDANCE IS THAT AT LEAST ONE OF THE ASSIGNED PHASE

CURRENTS AS WELL AS THE DIFFERENCE CURRENT DECISIVE FOR
THE LOOP HAVE EXCEEDED AN ADJUSTABLE MINIMUM VAL
UE )PH
0ICK UP CAUSED BY SINGLE PHASE EARTH FAULTS IN

SYSTEMS WITH A NON EARTHED STARPOINT IS EFFECTIVELY 2!% 2! ! 2! 2!%
SUPPRESSED BY THE MEASURES DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION 2! 2! 2

4HE IMPEDANCES ARE CALCULATED SEPARATELY FOR 2 AND

8 IN CYCLIC TIME INTERVALS AND COMPARED WITH THE SET
VALUES ! MEASURED VALUE STEP CHANGE MONITOR IS
2EVERSE
USED TO SYNCHRONIZE THE MEASUREMENT WINDOW ON
DIRECTION
OCCURRENCE OF A FAULT #ALCULATION PROCEDURE IS THE
SAME AS THAT DESCRIBED FOR DISTANCE MEASUREMENT 8 !
IN 3ECTION
&IGURE )MPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION CHARACTER
!N EXAMPLE OF THE FAULT DETECTION CHARACTERISTIC IN
ISTICS
THE COMPLEX 28 PLANE IS SHOWN IN &IGURE 4HE
BOLD DOTS IDENTIFY THE SETTING PARAMETERS WHICH DE
TERMINE THE GEOMETRY OF THE FAULT DETECTION POLYGON
4HE 8 INTERSECTIONS 8! AND 8 ! ARE DECISIVE FOR
0ICK UP RESULTS FOR THE MEASUREMENT LOOP IN WHICH
THE FAULT REACH IN THE FORWARD LINE DIRECTION AND IN
THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR LIES WITHIN THE FAULT DETECTION
THE REVERSE BUS BAR DIRECTION 4HE 2 INTERSECTIONS
POLYGON )F DETECTION OCCURS IN MORE THAN ONE LOOP
CAN BE SET DIFFERENTLY FOR PHASE PHASE LOOPS 2!
THE RELAY REGARDS AS VALID ALL THOSE LOOPS WHOSE IM
AND PHASE EARTH LOOPS 2!% )T IS THUS POSSIBLE
PEDANCE IS NOT GREATER THAN OF THAT SMALLEST
EG TO PERMIT A LARGER FAULT RESISTANCE TOLERANCE FOR
IMPEDANCE 4HIS AVOIDS WRONG PICK UP SIGNALS
EARTH FAULTS BOLD DOTTED LINE IN &IGURE
WHICH COULD BE CAUSED BY THE INFLUENCE OF THE FAULT
CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES ON THE UNFAULTED LINE LOOPS
)N ORDER TO GUARANTEE UNEQUIVOCAL CRITERIA FOR DIS
ESPECIALLY IN CASES OF SMALL SOURCE IMPEDANCES
CRIMINATION BETWEEN LOAD OPERATION AND A SHORT CIR
CUIT ESPECIALLY IN THE CASE OF LONG HIGH LOADED
4HE IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION FOR PHASE EARTH IS
LINES THE CHARACTERISTICS CAN BE SET DEPENDENT ON
SUPPLEMENTED BY AN OVERCURRENT STAGE )PH
THE PHASE ANGLE THE 2 SECTION 2! THEN APPLIES TO
WHERE PICK UP OF THE OVERCURRENT STAGE ONLY LEADS
PHASE ANGLES ABOVE A SETTABLE VALUE ! THE 2 SEC
TO DETECTION IF THE ASSOCIATED IMPEDANCE LOOP HAS
TION 2! BELOW !
BEEN ELIMINATED AS DESCRIBED IN THE PREVIOUS PARA
GRAPH )N THIS MANNER DOUBLE FAULTS WITH HIGH CURRENT
4O AVOID INTERMITTENT PICK UP SIGNALS NEAR THE BOR
ARE ALSO CORRECTLY DETECTED EVEN IF A FAULT LOOP HAS
DER LINES OF THE CHARACTERISTIC A HYSTERESIS OF IS
BEEN ELIMINATED BY THE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED ABOVE
PROVIDED
3INCE THE OVERCURRENT STAGE CAN ONLY RE ESTABLISH
ELIMINATED LOOPS FOR PICK UP ERRONEOUS FAULT DETEC
0HASE ANGLE DEPENDENCE CAN SEPARATELY BE
TION AS A RESULT OF AN OVERCURRENT IS PREVENTED AT THE
ACHIEVED FOR EARTH FAULT WITH 2!% AND !% BUT FOR
SAME TIME IF THE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENTS IN THE FAULT
REASONS OF SIMPLIFICATION THIS IS NOT ILLUSTRATED IN &IG
FREE PHASES CAN EXCEED THE SET OVERCURRENT VALUE ON
URE
NON EARTHED FEEDING TRANSFORMERS OR EARTHED CON
SUMER TRANSFORMERS
# ' #

)T IS ADDITIONALLY POSSIBLE TO USE THE IMPEDANCE FAULT 56
DETECTION JUST ONLY FOR EARTH FAULTS )N THIS CASE THE

PHASE EARTH MEASUREMENT IS ENABLED BY MEANS OF
THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION IT IS NOT EFFECTIVE FOR PHASE
PHASE FAULTS /VERCURRENT DETECTION IS EFFECTIVE IN
STEAD IN THIS CASE 4HIS DETECTION PROGRAM IS OF AD 5)
VANTAGE IN SYSTEMS WITH LIMITERS FOR EARTH CURRENTS
EARTHED AT LOW IMPEDANCE SO CALLED RESISTANCE

5)
EARTHING WHERE A SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SUFFICIENT FOR
THE OVERCURRENT STAGE FLOWS FOR PHASE PHASE FAULTS

BUT NOT FOR PHASE EARTH FAULTS %ARTH FREE FAULTS ARE

THUS DETECTED BY THE OVERCURRENT STAGE )PH

6OLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION

5NDER IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
OPTIONAL
) PH ) PH

4HE VOLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION IS A PHASE

DEDICATED FAULT DETECTION PROCEDURE WHICH ALSO )).
TAKES INTO CONSIDERATION LOOP INFORMATION $ECISIVE
IS THE EXCEEDING OF PHASE CURRENTS WHERE THE PICK
UP VALUE DEPENDS ON THE MAGNITUDE OF THE LOOP VOLT
AGES &IGURE 6OLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTORS
5) CHARACTERISTIC
4HE BASIC CHARACTERISTIC CAN BE GATHERED FROM THE
CURRENTVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTIC SHOWN IN &IGURE
4HE EXCEEDING OF A MINIMUM CURRENT )PH IS THE FIRST
PREREQUISITE FOR EACH PHASE PICK UP !BOVE THIS
CURRENT VOLTAGE CONTROLLED OVERCURRENT DETECTION IS #ONTROL WITH 50H % IS CHARACTERIZED BY A HIGH SENSI
EFFECTIVE WHOSE SLOPE IS DEFINED BY THE PARAMETERS TIVITY TO EARTH SHORT CIRCUITS AND IS THEREFORE PARTICU
5) AND 5) ! HIGH SET OVERCURRENT STAGE LARLY ADVANTAGEOUS IN SYSTEMS WITH AN EARTHED STAR
)PH IS SUPERIMPOSED IN THE CASE OF SHORT CIRCUITS POINT )T IS AUTOMATICALLY ADAPTED TO THE EXISTING LOAD
OF HIGH CURRENT 4HE BOLD DOTS IN &IGURE IDENTIFY CONDITIONS IE IT BECOMES MORE CURRENT SENSITIVE
THE SETTING PARAMETERS WHICH DETERMINE THE GEOME DURING LOW LOAD OPERATION THE PICK UP THRESHOLD
TRY OF THE CURRENTVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTIC IS HIGHER IN THE CASE OF HIGH LOAD CURRENTS 4ABLE
SHOWS THE ASSIGNMENT OF THE PHASE CURRENTS LOOP
&AULT DETECTION OF A PHASE IS RESET WHEN OF THE VOLTAGES AND OUTPUT RESULTS WITH SINGLE PHASE
RESPECTIVE CURRENT IS FALLEN BELOW OR OF THE RE PICK UP IF CONTROL WITH PHASE EARTH VOLTAGES IS SE
SPECTIVE VOLTAGE IS EXCEEDED LECTED
4HE DEVICE HAS THREE SUCH FAULT DETECTION MODULES 4HE MEASURED LINE LOOP DEPENDS ON THE EARTH FAULT
EACH OF WHICH IS CONTROLLED BY THE PHASE EARTH VOLT DETECTION ACCORDING TO 3ECTION AND IN
AGES OR THE PHASE PHASE VOLTAGES 0ARAMETERS ARE EARTHED SYSTEMS ON THE PARAMETER 0( &!5,43
USED TO DEFINE WHETHER THE VOLTAGES 50H % OR THE ADDRESS ACCORDING TO 4ABLE )N NON
VOLTAGES 50H 0H ARE DECISIVE OR WHETHER THIS DE EARTHED SYSTEMS THE PHASE PHASE LOOP IS ALWAYS
PENDS ON THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION AS DESCRIBED IN SELECTED IN THE CASE OF SINGLE PHASE PICK UP WITH
3ECTION 4HIS ENABLES HIGHLY FLEXIBLE ADAPTA OUT EARTH FAULT DETECTION
TION TO THE SYSTEM CONDITIONS /PTIMUM CONTROL
LARGELY DEPENDS ON WHETHER THE SYSTEM STARPOINT IS 4HE DETECTED PHASES ARE ANNUNCIATED !N EARTH
NOT EARTHED ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED EARTHED WITH FAULT IS ALSO ANNUNCIATED IF DETECTED ACCORDING TO
A LOW IMPEDANCE RESISTANCE EARTHED OR SOLIDLY
EARTHED 4HE POSITION OF THE STARPOINT EARTHING IS ALSO
SIGNIFICANT IN THE LATTER CASE )NFORMATION ON THE SET
TING IS CONTAINED IN 3ECTION
# ' #

&AULT DETECTION -EASURED -EASURED %ARTH FAULT 0ARAMETER 2ESULTANT !NNUNCI

MODULE CURRENT VOLTAGE DETECTION 0( &!5,43 LINE LOOP ATION
, , , % NO 0(!3% 0(!3% , , , ,
, , , % NO , , , ,
, , , % NO , , , ,
, , , % NO 0(!3% %!24( , % ,
, , , % NO , % ,
, , , % NO , % ,
, , , % YES IRRELEVANT , % , %
, , , % YES , % , %
, , , % YES , % , %

ONLY FOR EARTHED SYSTEM STARPOINT
4ABLE ,INE LOOPS AND PHASE ANNUNCIATIONS WITH SINGLE PHASE VOLTAGE CONTROLLED
FAULT DETECTION PHASE EARTH
4HE SENSITIVITY IS PARTICULARLY HIGH IN THE CASE OF PHA CURRENTS 4ABLE SHOWS THE ASSIGNMENT OF THE
SE PHASE FAULTS WHEN CONTROLLING WITH 50H 0H 4HIS PHASE CURRENTS LOOP VOLTAGES AND OUTPUT RESULTS IN
CONTROL IS ADVANTAGEOUS WITH EXTENDED COMPEN THE CASE OF PICK UP OF ONLY ONE FAULT DETECTION MOD
SATED SYSTEMS BECAUSE ITS PRINCIPLE EXCLUDES PICK ULE IF CONTROL WITH PHASE PHASE VOLTAGES IS SE
UP BY SINGLE EARTH FAULTS )T IS AUTOMATICALLY ADAPTED LECTED
TO THE EXISTING LOAD CONDITIONS IN THE CASE OF TWO
PHASE AND THREE PHASE FAULTS IE IT BECOMES MORE 4HE MEASURED LINE LOOP IN THIS CASE IS INDEPENDENT
CURRENT SENSITIVE DURING LOW LOAD OPERATION THE OF THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION AND THIS METHOD IS THERE
PICK UP THRESHOLD IS HIGHER IN THE CASE OF HIGH LOAD FORE NOT SUITABLE FOR EARTHED SYSTEMS

, , , , IRRELEVANT IRRELEVANT , , , ,
, , , , , , , ,
, , , , , , , ,
FAULT DETECTION PHASE PHASE
)F THE POSSIBILITY OF MAKING THE VOLTAGE LOOPS DEPEN STARPOINT IT ASSUMES HOWEVER THAT THE EARTH FAULT
DENT ON THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION IS USED THE HIGH CRITERIA ACCORDING TO 3ECTION HAVE BEEN SATIS
SENSITIVITY FOR PHASE EARTH FAULTS THEN ALSO APPLIES FIED SAFELY FOR ALL EARTH FAULTS 4ABLE APPLIES TO THE
TO PHASE PHASE FAULTS 4HIS POSSIBILITY IS IN PRIN FAULT DETECTION PROGRAM PHASE EARTH OR PHASE
CIPLE INDEPENDENT OF THE TREATMENT OF THE SYSTEM PHASE VOLTAGES WITH SINGLE PHASE PICK UP
# ' #


, , , , NO IRRELEVANT , , , ,
, , , , NO , , , ,
, , , , NO , , , ,
, , , % YES , % , %
, , , % YES , % , %
4ABLE ,INE LOOPS AND PHASE ANNUNCIATIONS WITH SINGLE PHASE VOLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION
VOLTAGES PHASE EARTH WITH EARTH FAULT VOLTAGES PHASE PHASE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT
)T IS FINALLY ALSO POSSIBLE TO ONLY CONTROL WITH THE VOLTA TROLLED FAULT DETECTION )T IS USUALLY EVEN UNDESIRABLE
GE LOOPS 50H % WHEN AN EARTH FAULT HAS BEEN DE THAT PHASE PHASE SHORT CIRCUITS LEAD TO UNDER
TECTED $ETECTION FOR PHASE PHASE FAULTS THEN ONLY IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
TAKES PLACE WITH HIGH SET OVERCURRENT ) 4HIS IS
ADVANTAGEOUS IN SYSTEMS WITH A LOW IMPEDANCE 4HE MEASURED LOOP IS INDEPENDENT OF THE PARAMETER
EARTHED STARPOINT IE WITH EARTH FAULT LIMITING AIDS 0( &!5,43 4ABLE SHOWS THE ASSIGNMENT OF THE
SO CALLED RESISTANCE EARTHING )N THESE CASES ONLY PHASE CURRENTS LOOP VOLTAGES AND OUTPUT RESULTS
EARTH FAULTS ARE TO BE DETECTED BY THE VOLTAGE CON

, , , % YES , % , %
, , , % YES , % , %
, , , % NO IRRELEVANT NO PICK UP AND

, , , % NO NO ANNUNCIATION
, , , % NO BY 50H %)
FAULT DETECTION PHASE EARTH WITH EARTH FAULT DETECTION ONLY
WITHOUT EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION ) MUST PICK UP
# ' #

$ETERMINATION OF THE FAULTED LOOP
&OR CALCULATION OF THE DISTANCE TO FAULT THE CURRENTS WHEREBY THE FACTOR :%:, IS DEPENDENT ONLY UPON THE
AND VOLTAGES OF THE FAULTY LOOP ARE DECISIVE 4HE LINE CONSTANTS AND NOT UPON THE DISTANCE TO FAULT
PHASE SELECTIVE FAULT DETECTOR DETERMINES THE FAULTED
LOOP AND RELEASES THE CORRESPONDING MEASUREMENT
VALUES FOR IMPEDANCE CALCULATION
,
&OR CALCULATION OF A PHASE PHASE LOOP FOR EXAMPLE
FOR A TWO PHASE SHORT CIRCUIT , , &IGURE THE
FOLLOWING IDENTITY APPLIES ,
), :, ), :, 5, % 5, %

), :,
,
WHERE 5 ) ARE COMPLEX MEASURED VALUES
AND 5, %
: 2 J8 IS THE COMPLEX LINE IMPEDANCE )% :%
%
4HE LINE IMPEDANCE IS THUS
&IGURE 0HASE EARTH SHORT CIRCUIT LOOP

5 5 ,%
: , ,%
) , ) ,
&AULT LOOP SELECTION IS SUCH THAT FOR EACH TYPE OF FAULT

), :, THE CORRECT MEASURED VALUES ARE USED FOR THE CALCU
LATION &OR MULTIPLE FAULTS WHEREBY MORE THAN TWO
,
PHASES OR EARTH ARE INVOLVED ONE OF THE POSSIBLE
5, ), FAULT LOOPS WILL BE GIVEN PREFERENCE
% :,
,
4HE SELECTION OF VALID SHORT CIRCUIT LOOPS VARIES CON
SIDERABLY DEPENDENT UPON WHETHER THE SYSTEM STAR
POINT IS EARTHED ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED 0ETERSEN
, COIL !CCORDINGLY THE TREATMENT OF THE SYSTEM STAR
POINT HAS TO BE KNOWN BEFORE THE DEVICE IS PUT INTO
5, %
OPERATION SEE 3ECTION
&IGURE 0HASE PHASE SHORT CIRCUIT LOOP

,OOP DETERMINATION FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED
SYSTEMS
&OR THE CALCULATION OF A PHASE EARTH LOOP FOR EXAM )N NETWORKS WITH EARTHED STARPOINT EACH CONTACT OF A
PLE FOR A SHORT CIRCUIT , % &IGURE IT MUST BE PHASE WITH EARTH IS A SHORT CIRCUIT WHICH MUST BE IN
OBSERVED THAT THE IMPEDANCE OF THE EARTH RETURN TERRUPTED IMMEDIATELY BY THE NEAREST PROTECTIVE DE
PATH IS NOT NORMALLY EQUAL WITH THE IMPEDANCE OF THE VICE )F ALL POWER TRANSFORMERS FEEDING TOWARDS THE
PHASE )N THE LOOP EQUATION SHORT CIRCUIT ARE EARTHED THEN THE EARTH FAULT ELEMENT
WILL RESPOND 4HE EARTH FAULT ELEMENT IS
THEREFORE USED AS AN ADDITIONAL CRITERION FOR EARTH
) , :, ) % : % 5 ,%
FAULTS
:%
:% IS REPLACED BY : , WHICH GIVES US
:, 7ITH DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS PICK UP NORMALLY OCCURS IN
:% TWO PHASES AND EARTH WITH OVERCURRENT DETECTION OR
) , : , ) % : , 5 ,%
:, FOR TWO PHASE EARTH LOOPS IMPEDANCE DETEC
FROM WHICH ONE OBTAINS THE LINE IMPEDANCE TION )N THIS CASE IT IS POSSIBLE TO SET THE RELAY SO THAT
5 ,% ONLY THE PHASE PHASE LOOP PARAMETER 0(0(%
:, &,43 0(!3% 0(!3% /.,9 OR THE LOOP OF THE
) , : %: , ) %
LEADING PHASE TO EARTH 0(0(% &,43 ,%!$).'
# ' #

0( % OR THE LOOP OF THE LAGGING PHASE TO EARTH ERS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE )% CURRENT PATH OF THE
0(0(% &,43 ,!'').' 0( % WILL BE SELECTED RELAY )F THE )% CURRENT PATH OF THE RELAY IS FED FROM THE
STAR POINT LEAD OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMER SET OF A PAR
4ABLES AND SHOW THE MEASUREMENT QUANTI ALLEL LINE FOR PARALLEL LINE COMPENSATION OF THE FAULT LO
TIES WHICH WILL BE SELECTED FOR DISTANCE MEASURE CATOR IF THIS OPTION IS AVAILABLE THE RELAY CALCULATES
MENT IN EARTHED NETWORKS THE EARTH FAULT CURRENT FROM THE SUM OF THE THREE
PHASE CURRENTS )F THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS HAVE RE
.OTE )N SYSTEMS WITH EARTHED STAR POINT THE RELAY SIDUAL VOLTAGE WINDINGS THESE SHOULD BE CONNECTED
MUST BE CONNECTED TO THREE STAR CONNECTED VOLTAGE IN OPEN DELTA TO THE VOLTAGE INPUT PROVIDED FOR THE
TRANSFORMERS 5, . 5, . 5, . WITH EARTHED PRI PURPOSE THIS ALLOWS THE RELAY TO GIVE COMPLETE MONI
MARY STAR POINT AND TO THREE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ), TORING OF THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS SECONDARY CIR
), ), 4HE STAR POINT LEAD FOR THE CURRENT TRANSFORM CUITS
&AULT DETECTION 3ELECTED 3ELECTED

PHASES LOOP SETTING PARAMETER
, % , % IRRELEVANT
, % , %
, % , %
, , , , IRRELEVANT
, , , ,
, , , ,
, , % , , 0(0(% &,43
, , % , , 0(!3% 0(!3% /.,9
, , % , ,
, , % , % 0(0(% &,43
, , % , % ,%!$).' 0( %
, , % , %
, , % , % 0(0(% &,43
, , % , % ,!'').' 0( %
, , % , %
, , , , , 0( &!5,43
, , , % , % %& #/.42/,
, , , , , 0( &!5,43
, , , % , , 0(!3% 0(!3% /.,9
, , , , % 0( &!5,43
, , , % , % 0(!3% %!24( /.,9
4ABLE 3ELECTED MEASUREMENT QUANTITIES IN EARTHED SYSTEMS WITH OVERCURRENT OR UNDER IMPE
DANCE FAULT DETECTION
# ' #


PHASE LOOPS LOOP SETTING PARAMETER
, % , % IRRELEVANT
, % , %
, % , %
, , , , IRRELEVANT
, , , ,
, , , ,
, % , % , , 0(0(% &,43
, % , % , , 0(!3% 0(!3% /.,9
, % , % , ,
, % , % , % 0(0(% &,43
, % , % , % ,%!$).' 0( %
, % , % , %
, % , % , % 0(0(% &,43
, % , % , % ,!'').' 0( %
, % , % , %
, , , , , , IRRELEVANT
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, % , % , % , % 0( &!5,43
, , , , , , , , %& #/.42/,
, % , % , % , , 0( &!5,43
, , , , , , , , 0(!3% 0(!3% /.,9
, % , % , % , % 0( &!5,43
, , , , , , , % 0(!3% %!24( /.,9
4ABLE 3ELECTED MEASUREMENT QUANTITIES IN EARTHED SYSTEMS WITH IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
# ' #

,OOP DETERMINATION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
)N ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORKS NO CURRENTS EARTH VOLTAGE OF THE FAULTY PHASE IS ZERO THROUGHOUT
RESEMBLING A SHORT CIRCUIT ARE PRESENT IN THE CASE OF A THE WHOLE GALVANICALLY INTERCONNECTED NETWORK 4HIS
SINGLE PHASE EARTH FAULT /NLY A DISPLACEMENT OF THE WOULD LEAD TO A MEASURED IMPEDANCE EQUAL ZERO FOR
VOLTAGE TRIANGLE OCCURS &IGURE 4HIS CONDITION THE FAULTY PHASE EARTH LOOP AT EACH MEASURING
DOES NOT REPRESENT ANY IMMEDIATE DANGER FOR THE POINT &OR THIS REASON PICK UP OF ONE SINGLE PHASE
OPERATION OF THE NETWORK )N THIS CASE THE DISTANCE TO EARTH FAULT DETECTOR IS AVOIDED IN 3! RELAY
PROTECTION MUST NOT RESPOND SINCE THE PHASE TO
5,
5,
%
5
%
5, 5,
5, 5,
A SOUND NETWORK WITHOUT EARTH FAULT B EARTH FAULT IN PHASE ,
&IG %ARTH FAULT IN A NON EARTHED NETWORK
/N THE OCCURRENCE OF AN EARTH FAULT ABOVE ALL IN EX ABBREVIATED ,, CYCLIC

TENSIVE COMPENSATED NETWORKS A SIGNIFICANT IGNI /NE EARTH FAULT WILL BE CLEARED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
TION CURRENT CAN FLOW WHICH CAN CAUSE THE EARTH CUR SELECTED PREFERENCE A SECOND CROSS COUNTRY
RENT DETECTOR TO PICK UP OR FOR THE OVERCURRENT ELE FAULT WOULD REMAIN ON THE NETWORK AND CAN BE DE
MENT IN CERTAIN CIRCUMSTANCES EVEN A PHASE CUR TECTED BY THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION FACILITY SEE 3EC
RENT PICK UP 3! HAS SPECIAL FEATURES TO PRE TION
VENT SUCH FAULTY REACTION SEE 3ECTION
&OR UNEARTHED NETWORKS MEASURING QUANTITIES WILL
)N THE CASE OF A DOUBLE EARTH FAULT IN ISOLATED OR COM BE SELECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH 4ABLES AND
PENSATED NETWORKS IT IS SUFFICIENT TO ELIMINATE ONE
FAULT 4HE SECOND FAULT REMAINS IN THE NETWORK AS A .OTE 'ENERALLY IT IS ASSUMED THAT THREE CURRENT
SIMPLE EARTH FAULT 7HICH ONE OF THE FAULTS WILL BE IN TRANSFORMERS ), ), ), AND THREE STAR CONNECTED
TERRUPTED IS DEPENDENT UPON THE DOUBLE EARTH FAULT VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ARE PROVIDED )F ONLY TWO CUR
PRIORITY WHICH IS SET TO BE THE SAME THROUGHOUT THE RENT TRANSFORMERS ANDOR TWO VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
WHOLE GALVANICALLY CONNECTED NETWORK 7ITH IN 6 CONNECTION ARE AVAILABLE RELIABLE DETECTION OF
3! THE FOLLOWING DOUBLE EARTH FAULT PRIORITIES DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS IN NON EARTHED NETWORKS IS NOT
CAN BE SELECTED ALWAYS POSSIBLE &OR THE DOUBLE EARTH FAULT PREFER
ENCE THE PREFERRED PHASES MUST ALWAYS BE
ACYCLIC , BEFORE , BEFORE , EQUIPPED WITH THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS IF ONLY TWO
ABBREVIATED ,, ACYCLIC CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ARE CONNECTED
ACYCLIC , BEFORE , BEFORE ,
ABBREVIATED ,, ACYCLIC
CYCLIC , BEFORE , BEFORE , BEFORE ,
ABBREVIATED ,, CYCLIC
CYCLIC , BEFORE , BEFORE , BEFORE ,
# ' #


PHASES LOOP SETTING PARAMETER
, % , % IRRELEVANT
, % , %
, % , %
, , , , IRRELEVANT
, , , ,
, , , ,
, , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, , % , % ,, !#9#,)#
, , % , %
, , , , ,
, , , % , %
, , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, , % , % ,, !#9#,)#
, , % , %
, , , , ,
, , , % , %
, , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, , % , % ,, !#9#,)#
, , % , %
, , , , ,
, , , % , %
, , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, , % , % ,, !#9#,)#
, , % , %
, , , , ,
, , , % , %
, , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, , % , % ,, !#9#,)#
, , % , %
, , , , ,
, , , % , %
, , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, , % , % ,, !#9#,)#
, , % , %
, , , , ,
, , , % , %
, , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, , % , % ,, #9#,)#
, , % , %
, , , , ,
, , , % , %
, , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, , % , % ,, #9#,)#
, , % , %
, , , , ,
, , , % , %
4ABLE 3ELECTED MEASUREMENT QUANTITIES IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS WITH OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION
OR UNDERIMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
# ' #


, % , % IRRELEVANT
, % , %
, % , %
, , , , IRRELEVANT
, , , ,
, , , ,
, % , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, % , % , % ,, !#9#,)#
, % , % , %
, % , % , % , %
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , , , ,
, % , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, % , % , % ,, !#9#,)#
, % , % , %
, % , % , % , %
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , , , ,
, % , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, % , % , % ,, !#9#,)#
, % , % , %
, % , % , % , %
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , , , ,
, % , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, % , % , % ,, !#9#,)#
, % , % , %
, % , % , % , %
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , , , ,
, % , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, % , % , % ,, !#9#,)#
, % , % , %
, % , % , % , %
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , , , ,
CONTINUED NEXT PAGE
# ' #


, % , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, % , % , % ,, !#9#,)#
, % , % , %
, % , % , % , %
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , , , ,
, % , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, % , % , % ,, #9#,)#
, % , % , %
, % , % , % , %
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , , , ,
, % , % , % 0(!3% 02%&
, % , % , % ,, #9#,)#
, % , % , %
, % , % , % , %
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , ,
, , , , , , , ,
4ABLE 3ELECTED MEASUREMENT QUANTITIES IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS WITH IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
# ' #

&AULT IMPEDANCE CALCULATION
4HE RELAY CALCULATES THE RESISTANCE 2 AND THE REAC 2% 2

TANCE 8 OF THE FAULT LOOP SEPARATELY USING THE MEA
2, 2
SURED VALUES DETERMINED BY THE SELECTION DESCRIBED
IN 3ECTION !S LONG AS A FAULT DETECTOR HAS PICK AND
ED UP THE CALCULATION IS EFFECTED CONTINUOUSLY 4HE
ALGORITHM EVALUATES ALL THE UPDATED INSTANTANEOUS 8% 8
VALUES OF CURRENT AND VOLTAGE THROUGHOUT AT LEAST THE
8, 8
LAST HALF CYCLE 7ITH DIFFICULT MEASUREMENT CONDI
TIONS EG VERY SMALL MEASUREMENT VOLTAGES OR NEAR REFER TO 3ECTION
THE BALANCED POINT THE DATA WINDOW AND THUS THE
NUMBER OF EVALUATED VALUES IS AUTOMATICALLY IN 4HE SEPARATE SETTING FACILITIES FOR THE FACTORS ALLOWS
CREASED THE POSSIBLE PHASE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN EARTH AND
CONDUCTOR IMPEDANCE TO BE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT IN
4HE CALCULATION IS AN INTEGRATION OF THE LINE IDENTITY ADDITION TO THE RELATIONSHIP :%:, 4HIS DIFFERENCE
CAN BE OF SIGNIFICANT VALUE IN CABLE NETWORKS
, DI 2 I U
DT
AND ALLOWS WITH ITS IDEAL FILTER CHARACTERISTICS DETER

MINATION OF THE 2 AND 8 Ì, COMPONENTS FOR THE ) , 2, 8,
SHORT CIRCUIT LOOP INDEPENDENT OF THE SETTING OF THE ,
TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS 2&
5, % ) , 2, 8,
&OR CALCULATION OF A PHASE TO PHASE LOOP VALUES ,
CONFORMING TO THE SELECTION GIVEN IN FOR U THE
INSTANTANEOUS VALUES OF PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGE
AND FOR I THE DIFFERENCE OF THE PHASE CURRENTS ARE ,
USED EG &IGURE
5, %
DI , DI , %
, 2 I , I , U ,% U ,%
DT DT
&IGURE 0HASE PHASE SHORT CIRCUIT LOOP
&OR CALCULATION OF A PHASE TO EARTH LOOP ACCORD
ING &IGURE
DI , 8 % DI % 2
, 2 I , % I % U ,% ,
DT 8, DT 2,
2 AND , ARE THE REQUIRED IMPEDANCE COMPONENTS

,
4HE CALCULATED REACTANCE IS THE LINE REACTANCE 8, UP
TO THE POINT OF FAULT 4HIS DETERMINES THE DISTANCE TO ), 2, 8,
FAULT 4HE RESISTANCE VALUE ON THE OTHER HAND CON ,
TAINS IN ADDITION TO THE CONDUCTOR RESISTANCE 2, THE
FAULT RESISTANCE 2& REFER TO &IGURES AND
5, %
2&
)% 2% 8%
.OTE 4HE FACTORS 2%2, AND 8%8, ARE PURELY MATHE
MATICAL VALUES AND HAVE NO PHYSICAL MEANING 4HEY %
CAN BE RELATIVELY EASILY CALCULATED FROM THE LINE DATA
WITHOUT USING COMPLEX FORMS FROM THE FORMULAE &IGURE 0HASE EARTH SHORT CIRCUIT LOOP
# ' #

4HE DIRECTION OF THE FLOW OF FAULT ENERGY IS DETERMINED 4HE REFERENCE VOLTAGE FOR BOTH A PHASE EARTH LOOP
IN A SIMILAR WAY TO DISTANCE MEASUREMENT 3ECTION AND A PHASE PHASE LOOP IS ALWAYS AT RIGHT ANGLES TO
&OR THE DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION HOWEVER THE SHORT CIRCUIT VOLTAGES &IGURE 4HIS IS CON
SOUND PHASE AND STORED REFERENCE VOLTAGES ARE SIDERED IN THE CALCULATION OF THE DIRECTIONAL VECTOR
USED )T IS THUS ENSURED THAT THE RELAY CORRECTLY DETER 4ABLE SHOWS THE ALLOCATION OF MEASURED VALUES
MINES THE DIRECTION OF ALL TYPES OF FAULT EVEN WHEN FOR THE CALCULATION OF DISTANCE AND DIRECTION TO THE
THE SHORT CIRCUIT VOLTAGE HAS COLLAPSED 4HE DEPTH POSSIBLE FAULT LOOPS
OF THE STORED VOLTAGE VARIES DEPENDENT ON THE MEA
SURING CONDITIONS 4HE STORED VOLTAGE IS ONLY OF IM 4HE THEORETICAL DIRECTIONAL LINE IS SHOWN IN &IGURE
PORTANCE IF THE MEASURING CIRCUIT VOLTAGE IS NOT SUF )N PRACTICE THE POSITION OF THE DIRECTIONAL CHAR
FICIENT FOR A PRECISE DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION 3INCE ACTERISTIC IS DEPENDENT UPON THE SOURCE IMPEDANCE
THE PHASE RELATIONSHIP OF THE STORED VOLTAGES IS FRE AS WELL AS THE LOAD CURRENT CARRIED BY THE LINE IMMEDI
QUENCY DEPENDANT THE FREQUENCY IS MEASURED AND ATELY BEFORE FAULT INCEPTION
FED INTO THE CALCULATION
5 , 5 , , 5 ,
5
, ,
5 , 5 , 5 , 5 ,
5 , , 5 , ,
A ,OOP PHASE EARTH , % B ,OOP PHASE PHASE , ,
&IGURE 2EFERENCE VOLTAGES FOR DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION
&AULTED -EASURING CURRENT -EASURING VOLTAGE -EASURING VOLTAGE

LOOP DISTANCEDIRECTION DISTANCE DIRECTION
, % ), K% | ) % 5, % 5, ,

, % ), K% | ) % 5, % 5, ,
, % ), K% | ) % 5, % 5, ,
, , ), ), 5, , 5, , 5, ,
, , ), ), 5, , 5, , 5, ,
, , ), ), 5, , 5, , 5, ,
.OTE K% :%:,
4ABLE -EASURED VALUES FOR DISTANCE CALCULATION AND DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION
# ' #

&IGURE SHOWS THE DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC TAK

8
INDUCTIVE
ING INTO CONSIDERATION THE SOURCE IMPEDANCE WITH
OUT LOAD CURRENT 3INCE THE UNFAULTED VOLTAGE EQUALS
THE GENERATOR VOLTAGE AND DOES NOT CHANGE AFTER
: FORWARDS FAULT INCEPTION THE DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC IN THE
IMPEDANCE DIAGRAM APPEARS TO BE DISPLACED BY THE
SOURCE IMPEDANCE )F THE LOCATION OF THE FAULT IS &
$IRECTIONAL
CHARACTERISTIC
&IGURE A THE SHORT CIRCUIT LIES IN THE FORWARD DI
RECTION THE SOURCE IMPEDANCE IN THE REVERSE DIREC
TION !LL FAULT LOCATIONS RIGHT UP TO THE RELAY LOCATION
REVERSE
^ 2
CTS ARE CLEARLY RECOGNIZED AS FORWARDS &IGURE
B 7HEN THE CURRENT FLOWS IN THE OPPOSITE DIREC
CAPACITIVE
TION THE DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC CHANGES IMMEDI
ATELY &IGURE C 4HEN THE REVERSED CURRENT
WHICH IS DETERMINED BY THE SOURCE IMPEDANCE :3
:, FLOWS THROUGH THE MEASURING POINT CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
&IGURE 3! DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS

&
&
: 3 : , : 3
3!
A
J8
J8
,
: : 3
&
,
: : 3
: 3 2 2
&
: 3
B C
&IGURE $IRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC WITH SOURCE IMPEDANCE WITHOUT LOAD TRANSPORT
)F LOAD IS CARRIED BY THE LINE THEN THIS RESULTS IN A VOLT URES B AND C 4HEREFORE THE DIRECTIONAL
AGE DROP AT THE SOURCE IMPEDANCE &IGURE A CHARACTERISTIC HAS A SAFETY DISTANCE FROM THE LIMITS OF
3INCE AT THE MEASURING POINT THE VOLTAGE 5 IS MEA THE FIRST QUADRANT IN THE 2 8 DIAGRAM &IGURE
SURED NOT GENERATOR VOLTAGE % THE DIRECTIONAL CHAR
ACTERISTIC SUFFERS A ROTATION BY THE LOAD ANGLE · &IG
# ' #

: 3 | ) ,
% , % ,
5 ,
·
5 ,
5 ,
% , % , % , % ,
5 , 5 , 5 ,
BEFORE FAULT INCEPTION AFTER FAULT INCEPTION
A 6OLTAGE VECTOR DIAGRAM FOR EARTH FAULT ON LOADED LINE
J8 J8
: 3 : ,
·
: 3
2
B C
&IGURE $IRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC WITH SOURCE IMPEDANCE AND LOAD TRANSPORT
# ' #

4RIPPING CHARACTERISTICS
4HE TRIPPING ZONES OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY "ESIDES THESE INDEPENDENT ZONES TWO CONTROLLED
3! HAVE A POLYGONAL CHARACTERISTIC 4HEY CON ZONES ARE AVAILABLE WHICH CAN BE ACTIVATED BY LOG
SIST OF THE DIRECTIONAL LINES IN ACCORDANCE WITH 3EC ICAL CONDITIONS
TION AND IN EACH CASE A REACTANCE AND RESIS
TANCE LIMIT 2EACTANCE INTERSECTION 8 AND RESISTANCE /VERREACH ZONE :" FOR ZONE EXTENSION EG FOR
INTERSECTION 2 CAN BE SET SEPARATELY AND INDEPEN TELEPROTECTION AUTO RECLOSURE OR CONTROLLED VIA
DENTLY FROM EACH OTHER )N ADDITION THE 2 INTERSEC BINARY INPUT WITH THE SETTING PARAMETERS
TIONS CAN BE SET SEPARATELY FOR PHASE PHASE FAULTS
AND PHASE EARTH FAULTS 2% SO THAT A HIGHER RESIS 8" 2EACTANCE REACH
TANCE MARGIN CAN BE OBTAINED FOR EARTH FAULTS IF RE 2" 2ESISTANCE PHASE PHASE
QUIRED 2"% 2ESISTANCE PHASE EARTH
4" 4" OR DELAYED IF REQUIRED SEPARATE
!S SHOWN IN &IGURE THE RELAY POSSESSES THE FOL TIME SETTINGS FOR SINGLE PHASE AND MULTI
LOWING CHARACTERISTICS WHICH CAN BE SET INDEPEN PHASE FAULTS
DENTLY
/VERREACH ZONE :, ACTIVATED BY MULTI SHOT !2
ST ZONE INSTANTANEOUS ZONE : WITH THE SETTING ND AND FURTHER CYCLES SO CALLED $!2 OR CON
PARAMETERS TROLLED VIA BINARY INPUT WITH THE SETTING PARAME
TERS
8 2EACTANCE REACH
2 2ESISTANCE PHASE PHASE 8, 2EACTANCE REACH
2% 2ESISTANCE PHASE EARTH 2, 2ESISTANCE PHASE PHASE
4 4 OR DELAYED IF REQUIRED SEPARATE 2,% 2ESISTANCE PHASE EARTH
TIME SETTINGS FOR SINGLE PHASE AND MULTI 4, 4, OR DELAYED IF REQUIRED
PHASE FAULTS
!LL ZONES CAN BE SET TO OPERATE EITHER IN FORWARD DI
ND ZONE DELAYED BACK UP ZONE : WITH THE RECTION OR IN REVERSE DIRECTION OR NON DIRECTIONAL
SETTING PARAMETERS
&IGURE SHOWS THE TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS &OR
AN EASIER CLARIFICATION SEPARATE 2 SETTING FOR EARTH
8 2EACTANCE REACH
FAULTS IS SHOWN FOR ST ZONE ONLY :ONE :, IS OMITTED
2 2ESISTANCE PHASE PHASE
FOR THE SAME REASON
2% 2ESISTANCE PHASE EARTH
4 $ELAYSEPARATE SETTINGS FOR SINGLE
!DDITIONALLY A DIRECTIONAL AND A NON DIRECTIONAL FI
PHASE AND MULTI PHASE FAULTS
NAL STAGE ARE AVAILABLE #HARACTERISTIC AND REACH OF
THESE ARE DETERMINED BY THE SELECTED FAULT DETECTION
RD ZONE DELAYED BACK UP ZONE : WITH THE SET
OPTION REFER 3ECTION &OR MODELS WITH IMPED
TING PARAMETERS
ANCE FAULT DETECTION FAULT DETECTION ZONE
:! IS PROVIDED AS SHOWN IN &IGURE 4HE REACHES
8 2EACTANCE REACH OF THE OTHER TYPES OF FAULT DETECTION ARE DEPENDENT
2 2ESISTANCE PHASE PHASE ON THE INFEED CHARACTERISTICS EG SYSTEM IMPED
2% 2ESISTANCE PHASE EARTH ANCE RATIO SO THAT THEY HAVE NO FIXED SHAPE IN THE
4 $ELAY 2 8 PLANE
# ' #

J8
&AULT DETECTION
8 4 4
4
8
4
8"
4"
8
4
2 2% 2 2" 2
2 2" 2 CA^ 2% 2 2
8
8"
8
4 y 4 8
&IGURE 4RIPPING CHARACTERISTICS
# ' #

4RIPPING LOGIC 3WITCH ONTO FAULT PROTECTION
7HEN THE RELAY HAS DETECTED A FAULT SEE 3ECTION )F ONE SWITCHES A DEAD BUT SHORT CIRCUITED LINE ONTO A
THE DELAY TIMES ARE STARTED 4HE IMPEDANCE LIVE BUS BAR IT IS ESSENTIAL IN GENERAL THAT THIS LINE
OF THE SELECTED FAULT LOOP ACCORDING TO 3ECTION BE IMMEDIATELY DISCONNECTED 5SING DISTANCE PRO
ARE COMPARED WITH THE THRESHOLD OF THE SET ZONES TECTION ALONE HOWEVER DISCONNECTION FOR FAULTS
4RIPPING OCCURS WHEN THE IMPEDANCE IS WITHIN A CLOSE TO EITHER LINE END IS NOT ALWAYS POSSIBLE FOR A
ZONE WHOSE CORRESPONDING TIME STAGE HAS EXPIRED THREE PHASE FAULT AT THE LOCATION OF A RELAY AN ACCU
AND THE FAULT DIRECTION COMPLIES WITH THE DIRECTION AS RATE MEASURED VOLTAGE FOR CORRECT DIRECTIONAL DETER
SET FOR THAT ZONE &OR ZONE : AND :" THE DELAY MINATION WILL NOT NECESSARILY BE AVAILABLE WHEN THE
TIME CAN EQUAL ZERO IE TRIPPING OCCURS AS SOON AS IT VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ARE CONNECTED ON THE LINE SIDE
HAS BEEN CONFIRMED THAT THE FAULT LIES WITHIN THE EVEN STORED VOLTAGE VALUES ARE NOT AVAILABLE )F THE
ZONE !N AUTOMATIC REPETITION OF THE MEASUREMENT FAULT IS AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END DISTANCE PROTECTION
BECOMES EFFECTIVE NEAR TO THE BALANCED POINT IN OR WILL OPERATE ONLY AFTER A TIME DELAY
DER TO PREVENT ANY TRANSIENT OVERREACH 4HIS CAN LEAD
TO A SLIGHT INCREASE IN THE REACTION TIME &OR CLOSE UP FAULTS THE DISTANCE PROTECTION WILL DE
CIDE ON FORWARDS AFTER CONNECTION OF THE LINE WHEN
)N STAGES : AND :" AND IF DESIRED IN STAGE : THE VOLTAGE SIGNAL IS MISSING 4HUS INSTANTANEOUS
SINGLE PHASE FAULTS CAN BE TRIPPED SINGLE POLE TRIP BY THE FIRST ZONE IS POSSIBLE
4HIS IS ALWAYS MEANINGFUL WHEN THE NETWORK PRAC
TICE REQUIRES SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE -ULTI 4O BE SURE OF AN IMMEDIATE DISCONNECTION UNDER ANY
PHASE FAULTS WILL ALWAYS RESULT IN THREE POLE CLEAR CONDITION AND ESPECIALLY WHEN SWITCHING ONTO BOLTED
ANCE )F THE !2 FUNCTION IS NOT READY TO CARRY OUT AN FAULT THE MANUAL CLOSE COMMAND FROM THE DISCREP
AUTO RECLOSURE CYCLE SEE 3ECTION THREE ANCY SWITCH CAN BE REPEATED VIA A BINARY INPUT TO
POLE CLEARANCES WILL ALWAYS RESULT )F SINGLE POLE CAUSE AN IMMEDIATE TRIP SIGNAL WHEN A FAULT IS DE
AUTO RECLOSURE IS NOT AVAILABLE EACH CLEARANCE WILL TECTED WITHIN AN ADJUSTABLE TIME &IGURE 4HE
EQUALLY BE THREE POLE )F AN EXTERNAL !2 RELAY IS FAULT IS CLEARED EITHER WITH PICK UP OF OVERREACHING
USED THE TRIPPING COMMAND CAN ALSO BE COUPLED ZONE :" DIRECTIONAL AS ILLUSTRATED IN &IGURE OR
THREE POLE VIA A BINARY INPUT PICK UP OF OVERREACHING ZONE :" NON DIRECTION
AL OR PICK UP OF THE FAULT DETECTOR SELECTABLE WITH
-OREOVER EXTERNAL BINARY INPUTS CAN BE USED TO RE OUT DELAY
LEASE THE OVERREACH ZONES :" ANDOR :,
4HE INTEGRATED SWITCH ONTO FAULT LOGIC OF 3!
&IGURE ILLUSTRATES THE BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE TRIP AUTOMATICALLY DISTINGUISHES BETWEEN AN EXTERNAL
PING LOGIC CONTROL COMMAND AND AN AUTOMATIC AUTO RECLOSE
COMMAND BY MEANS OF THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE
4HE INTEGRATED SWITCH ONTO FAULT LOGIC 3ECTION CIRCUITS SO THAT THE BINARY INPUT MANUAL CLOSE CAN
CAN BE SET TO ACTIVATE EITHER ZONE :" DIREC BE CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE CONTROL CIRCUIT OF THE
TIONAL OR NON DIRECTIONAL OR FAULT DETECTION NON CLOSING COIL OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER )F HOWEVER EXTER
DIRECTIONAL AND NON DELAYED NAL CLOSING COMMANDS ARE POSSIBLE WHICH THE
SWITCH ONTO FAULT PROTECTION SHALL NOT OPERATE EG
&OR THE ISSUE OF TRIPPING COMMANDS TO THE CIRCUIT EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE DEVICES THE BINARY INPUT
BREAKER APPROPRIATELY POWERFUL TRIPPING RELAYS ARE MANUAL CLOSE MUST BE TRIGGERED BY A SEPARATE AUX
PROVIDED EACH WITH TWO CLOSING CONTACTS 4HE TRIP ILIARY CONTACT ON THE DISCREPANCY SWITCH
PING RELAYS ARE AUTOMATICALLY RESET WHEN THE FAULT
DETECTOR RESETS AND THE FAULT CURRENT HAS BEEN
SWITCHED OFF RESET OF MINIMUM CURRENT MONITOR
). 5P TO THAT POINT THE TRIPPING CIRCUIT MUST BE
BROKEN BY AN AUXILIARY CONTACT ON THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
# ' #

&AULT
DIREC
TION
POLE TRIP &AULT DETECTION

$IREC
PERMITTED
, , ,
22
4RIP ,
88 4
$IREC
, , ,
42)00/, : 4RIP ,
22 9%3

88 4 ./
, , ,
$IREC

4RIP ,
22
'EN FAULT
88 4
$IR"

22" MULTI PHASE
88" 4"

4RIP ,
THREE POLE
")
40

'EN FAULT
2!2
-#

$IR,
22,
88, 4,
$IRECTION SET FOR ZONE
$IREC
: ETC
$!2
22
&AULT IN ZONE ETC
88
$IR&$

4 4IME 4 ETC EXPIRED
'EN ") #ONTROL SIGNAL VIA BINARY INPUT

&AULT
40 #ONTROL SIGNAL FROM TELE
PROTECTION LOGIC
4

2!2 #ONTROL SIGNAL FROM
40 AUTO RECLOSE LOGIC 2AP
ID !2 FIRST SHOT
$!2 #ONTROL SIGNAL FROM

4 AUTO RECLOSE LOGIC
40

$ELAYED !2 FURTHER SHOTS
-# -# -ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND
&IGURE 3CHEMATIC BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE TRIPPING LOGIC OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION
# ' #

,INE , ,
%ARTHING
DISCONNECTOR
:"
4RIP
#LOSE

$ISCREPANCY
4 -#
SWITCH
02/,
3!
#IRCUIT
BREAKER
,
, "US BAR
,
&IGURE &UNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF THE SWITCH ONTO FAULT PROTECTION
$EFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT AND EMERGENCY PROTECTION
3! PROVIDES AN OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 4HIS )F EITHER OF THESE FACTORS OCCURS DISTANCE PROTECTION
FEATURE MAY FOR EXAMPLE BE USEFUL WHEN DURING IS IMMEDIATELY BLOCKED AND EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT
FIRST COMMISSIONING VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER OUTPUT IS PROTECTION MAY BECOME OPERATIVE SELECTABLE
NOT AVAILABLE
5NDER THIS CONDITION SELECTIVITY CAN ONLY BE
4HE OVERCURRENT FUNCTION MAY ALSO COME AUTOMATI ACHIEVED BY TIME DELAY JUST AS FOR ALL TYPES OF OVER
CALLY INTO OPERATION WHEN THE MEASURED VOLTAGE IS CURRENT PROTECTION SCHEME
NOT AVAILABLE EG DURING SHORT CIRCUIT OR AN INTER
RUPTION IN THE 64 CIRCUITS !S SOON AS THE DEVICE RECOGNIZES THAT THE MEASURED
VOLTAGES HAVE REAPPEARED THE SYSTEM SWITCHES
/VERCURRENT PROTECTION BACKS UP THE DISTANCE PRO BACK TO DISTANCE PROTECTION
TECTION WHEN FAILURE OF THE MEASURED VOLTAGES IS DE
TECTED BY ANY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS &OR FURTHER DETAILS REFER TO 3ECTION
OPERATION OF THE FUSE FAILURE MONITOR REFER 3ECTION
OR THE SIGNAL 64 MCB TRIPPED IS APPLIED TO
AN INPUT RELAY
# ' #

-EASURES TO BE TAKEN IN THE CASE OF POWER SWINGS OPTIONAL WITH

IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
!FTER DYNAMIC OCCURRENCES SUCH AS LOAD FLUCTUA $ETECTION OF POWER SWINGS
TIONS SHORT CIRCUITS AUTO RECLOSURES OR SWITCHING
OPERATIONS THE GENERATORS MAY HAVE TO ADJUST TO THE 0OWER SWINGS ARE THREE PHASE SYMMETRICAL OCCUR
NEW LOAD CONDITIONS IN THE NETWORK 4HE DISTANCE RENCES 4HE FIRST PREREQUISITE IS THEREFORE THE AB
PROTECTION REGISTERS THE HIGH EQUALIZING CURRENTS AND SENCE OF ANY EARTH FAULT AND THE SYMMETRY OF THE
IN PARTICULAR IN THE ELECTRICAL CENTRE REDUCED VOLT MEASURED IMPEDANCES !S LONG AS THE EARTH FAULT
AGES DURING POWER SWINGS &IGURE 3MALL VOLT DETECTION HAS PICKED UP SEE 3ECTION OR THE
AGES WITH SIMULTANEOUSLY HIGH CURRENTS SIMULATE AP THREE IMPEDANCES PHASE PHASE DIFFER FROM EACH
PARENTLY SMALL IMPEDANCES WHICH CAN LEAD TO TRIP OTHER BY MORE THAN POWER SWINGS ARE NOT DE
PING )N EXTENSIVE NETWORKS WHICH CARRY HIGH LOADS TECTED !SYMMETRICAL SHORT CIRCUITS IE ALL ONE
EVEN THE STABILITY OF THE ENERGY TRANSFER CAN BE EN PHASE AND TWO PHASE SHORT CIRCUITS CAN THEREFORE
DANGERED BY SUCH POWER SWINGS NOT RESULT IN PICK UP OF THE POWER SWING BLOCKING
FUNCTION %VEN WHEN A POWER SWING HAS BEEN RECOG
NIZED THE FOLLOWING ASYMMETRICAL SHORT CIRCUIT CUR
% %
- RENTS LEAD TO FAST RELEASE OF THE POWER SWING BLOCK
ING FUNCTION AND RENDER POSSIBLE TRIPPING BY THE DIS
TANCE PROTECTION
)N ORDER TO DETECT A POWER SWING THE RATE OF CHANGE

) OF THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR IS MEASURED "ECAUSE OF
THE SYMMETRY CONDITIONS IT IS SUFFICIENT TO LIMIT THE
- POWER SWING DETECTION TO ONE LOOP , , 4HE
MEASUREMENT COMMENCES WHEN THE IMPEDANCE
5 VECTOR MOVES INTO THE POWER SWING POLYGON 00/,
% % SEE &IGURE )N THE CASE OF A THREE PHASE SHORT
CIRCUIT THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR IMMEDIATELY MOVES
INTO THE FAULT DETECTION POLYGON !0/, (OWEVER IN
% % THE CASE OF A POWER SWING THE APPARENT IMPEDANCE
) AT MEASURING POINT - VECTOR FIRST MOVES INTO THE POWER SWING POLYGON
8
00/, AND LATER INTO THE FAULT DETECTION POLYGON
!0/, )T IS ALSO POSSIBLE FOR THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR
&IGURE 0OWER SWING
TO ENTER AND LEAVE THE POWER SWING POLYGON WITHOUT
MOVING INTO THE FAULT DETECTION POLYGON )F THE IM
PEDANCE VECTOR MOVES THROUGH THE WHOLE AREA REP
RESENTED BY THE POWER SWING POLYGON THEN PARTS OF
)N ORDER TO PREVENT UNCONTROLLED TRIPPING THE DIS
THE NETWORK SEEN FROM THE PROTECTIVE DEVICE HAVE
TANCE PROTECTION DEVICES ARE PROVIDED WITH POWER
BECOME ASYNCHRONOUS THE TRANSFER OF ENERGY
SWING BLOCKING DEVICES )N CERTAIN STRATEGIC LOCA
HAS BECOME UNSTABLE
TIONS WITHIN THE NETWORK OUT OF STEP TRIPPING DE
VICES ARE INSTALLED SO THAT THE NETWORK CAN BE SPLIT
)F THE RATE OF CHANGE OF THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR IS
INTO PART NETWORKS IN THE CASE OF LOSS OF SYNCHRONISM
SMALLER THAN A SELECTABLE VALUE D2DT A POWER
DUE TO STRONG UNSTABLE POWER SWINGS
SWING IS RECOGNIZED 4HE MEASURING TIME OF THE
POWER SWING DETECTOR IS COORDINATED WITH THE DIS
)N MODELS WITH IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTOR THE PROTEC
TANCE BETWEEN POWER SWING POLYGON 00/, AND FAULT
TION RELAY 3! CAN BE EQUIPPED WITH A POWERFUL
DETECTION POLYGON !0/, SO THAT THE POWER SWING IS
POWER SWING SUPPLEMENTARY FUNCTION DEPENDENT OF
DETECTED BEFORE THE VECTOR MOVES INTO THE FAULT DE
THE ORDERED MODEL WHICH PREVENTS TRIPPING BY THE
TECTION POLYGON
DISTANCE PROTECTION DURING POWER SWINGS POWER
SWING BLOCKING BUT ALSO ALLOWS TRIPPING AT PREDETER
MINED LOCATIONS IN THE CASE OF UNSTABLE POWER
SWINGS OUT OF STEP TRIPPING
# ' #

8
00/,
00/, !0/,
!0/,
8!

2!
2
00/,
!0/,
8 !
00/, 0OWER SWING POLYGON
!0/, &AULT DETECTION POLYGON
&IGURE 0ICK UP CHARACTERISTIC FOR THE DETECTION OF POWER SWINGS
0OWER SWING BLOCKING /UT OF STEP TRIPPING
7HEN THE CRITERIA FOR POWER SWING DETECTION HAVE 7HEN THE CRITERIA FOR POWER SWING DETECTION ARE MET
BEEN MET THEN THE FOLLOWING REACTIONS ARE POSSIBLE AND WHEN OUT OF STEP TRIPPING IS SELECTED THEN
SETTABLE FOR POWER SWING BLOCKING THE DISTANCE PROTECTION WITH ALL OF ITS STAGES IS
BLOCKED IN ORDER TO PREVENT TRIPPING BY THE DISTANCE
"LOCKING OF THE FIRST STAGE ONLY PROTECTION
4HE FIRST STAGE OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION : AND
:" CANNOT TRIP &AULTS FROM THE SECOND STAGE 7HEN THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR LEAVES THE POWER SWING
ONWARDS 4 EXPIRED ARE TRIPPED AFTER THEIR DELAY POLYGON THE VECTOR IS CHECKED BY ITS 2 COMPON
TIME ENT )F THE 2 COMPONENT STILL HAS THE SAME SIGN AS AT
THE POINT OF ENTRY THEN THE POWER SWING IS IN THE PRO
"LOCKING OF ALL STAGES BUT THE FIRST CESS OF STABILIZING /THERWISE THE VECTOR HAS PASSED
/NLY THE FIRST STAGE OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION : THROUGH THE POLYGON LOSS OF SYNCHRONISM CASE
OR :" IS AVAILABLE (IGHER STAGES ARE NOT AVAIL IN &IGURE 4HE DEVICE ISSUES A TRIPPING COM
ABLE MAND OF ADJUSTABLE DURATION 4HE OUT OF STEP TRIP
IS ANNOUNCED 4HE IMPEDANCE VECTOR MUST HAVE
"LOCKING OF ALL STAGES PASSED THROUGH THE POWER SWING POLYGON WITHIN AN
4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION IS BLOCKED WITH ALL OF ITS ACTIVE TIME WHICH IS IDENTICAL WITH 03 4 !#4
STAGES
4HE SELECTED REACTION REMAINS EFFECTIVE UNTIL THE

MEASURED IMPEDANCE VECTOR LEAVES THE POWER
SWING POLYGON 00/, OR WHEN DUE TO EARTH FAULT
PICK UP OR ASYMMETRY THE POWER SWING CRITERIA ARE
NO LONGER MET 4HE ACTION TIME OF THE POWER SWING
BLOCKING DEVICE CAN ALSO BE LIMITED BY A SELECTABLE
TIME 03 4 !#4
# ' #

5NIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE
3HORT CIRCUITS ON THE PROTECTED LINE WHICH LIE BEYOND :ONE :" COMPARISON UNBLOCKING MODE
THE FIRST DISTANCE ZONE CAN BE SELECTIVELY CLEARED BY $IRECTIONAL COMPARISON UNBLOCKING MODE WITH
DISTANCE PROTECTION ONLY AFTER A DELAY TIME &OR LINE FAULT DETECTION
LENGTHS WHICH ARE SHORTER THAN THE SHORTEST REASON
ABLE DISTANCE SETTING SHORT CIRCUITS CAN EQUALLY NOT "LOCKING MODE
BE SELECTIVELY CLEARED INSTANTANEOUSLY "LOCKING OF THE OVERREACH ZONE :"
4HUS TO ACHIEVE INSTANTANEOUS CLEARANCE OF ALL 0ILOT WIRE MODES

FAULTS FOR OF LINE LENGTH 3! CAN EXCHANGE :ONE :" OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP VIA PILOT
AND PROCESS INFORMATION FROM THE OPPOSITE END STA 2EVERSE INTERLOCKING
TION BY THE USE OF AN INCORPORATED TELEPROTECTION IN
TERFACE &OR THIS PURPOSE THE RELAY HAS TRANSMITTER 4HE COMPARISON VIA PILOT WIRE IS PARTICULARLY USEFUL IN
OUTPUT AND RECEIVER INPUT CABLE NETWORKS WITH SHORT DISTANCES (ERE THE INFOR
MATION EXCHANGE BETWEEN THE LINE ENDS CAN BE
$ISTINCTION IS MADE BETWEEN PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH MADE VIA ONE PILOT WIRE PAIR OR CONTROL CORES USING
TRANSFER TRIP MODES 0544 AND PERMISSIVE OVER DIRECT CURRENT 4HE REVERSE INTERLOCKING SCHEME
REACH COMPARISON TRANSFER MODES 0/44 WORKS WITH DC CONTROL SIGNALS TOO
&OR UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIPPING THE RELAY IS SET WITH &OR THE OTHER TELEPROTECTION MODES A VOICE FREQUEN
NORMAL DISCRIMINATION STEPS )F A TRIPPING COMMAND CY CHANNEL IS MOST FREQUENTLY USED EG 3IEMENS
IS GIVEN IN THE FIRST ZONE THIS IS TRANSMITTED TO THE OTH TRANSMISSION DEVICE 374 & WITH FREQUENCY
ER LINE END THROUGH A TELEPROTECTION SYSTEM 4HERE SHIFT MODULATION 4HE VOICE FREQUENCY IS TRANSMITTED
THE RECEIVED SIGNAL WILL CAUSE INTERTRIPPING AS LONG VIA TELEPHONE CABLE POWER LINE CARRIER OR RADIO
AS THE RELAY AT THAT END HAS PICKED UP OR HAS RECOG TRANSMISSION !LTERNATIVELY THE SIGNALS CAN BE TRANS
NIZED A FAULT IN ITS OVERREACHING ZONE 3! PER MITTED VIA OPTICAL FIBRE CONNECTIONS
MITS
)F A FAULT OCCURS IN THE RECEIVING DEVICE OR ON THE
UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP VIA FAULT DETECTION ZONE TRANSMISSION LINK THE RECEIVER LOGIC OF THE UNIVERSAL
&$ NON DIRECTIONAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE CAN BE BLOCKED BY THE INPUT
OF A BINARY SIGNAL WITHOUT AFFECTING THE NORMAL DIS
UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP VIA OVERREACH ZONE :" TANCE PROTECTION GRADING -EASUREMENT RANGE CON
ACCELERATION DIRECTIONAL TROL RELEASE OF ZONE :" CAN THEN BE TRANSFERRED TO
THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION SEE ALSO 3ECTION
&OR THE COMPARISON OVERREACH TRANSFER MODES THE OR THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION CAN BE BLOCKED
RELAY WILL ALREADY INCORPORATE A FAST OVERREACH ZONE
4HIS CAN HOWEVER GIVE A TRIP SIGNAL ONLY WHEN A FAULT 3INCE IN 3! ALL ZONES OPERATE INDEPENDENTLY IT
IS ALSO DETECTED AT THE OTHER LINE END IN AN OVERREACH IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO GIVE RAPID TRIP IN : WITHOUT RECEIPT
ZONE %ITHER A RELEASE OR A BLOCKING SIGNAL CAN BE OF A RELEASE SIGNAL OR WITH A BLOCKING SIGNAL PRESENT
TRANSMITTED IN THE COMPARISON MODES )F INSTANTANEOUS TRIP IS NOT
DESIRED EG FOR EXTREMELY SHORT LINES FOR REASONS OF
$ISTINCTION IS MADE BETWEEN SELECTIVITY THEN ZONE : MUST BE DELAYED BY TIME
STAGE 4
2ELEASE MODES
0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER WITH OVERREACH 7HEN EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION IS OPERAT
ZONE :" ING THE UNIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE FUNCTION IS
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON TRANSFER WITH FAULT DETEC OUT OF OPERATION
TION
# ' #

0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER :ONE ACCELERATION WITH :"

TRIP WITH FAULT DETECTION
*UST AS FOR A PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP WITH
7ITH A FAULT IN ZONE : AN INTERTRIP SIGNAL IS TRANS FAULT DETECTION THE TRIPPING SIGNAL OF DISTANCE ZONE
MITTED TO THE OPPOSITE END OF THE LINE 4HIS CAN BE : WILL TRANSMIT AN INTERTRIP SIGNAL TO THE OPPOSITE LINE
DELAYED BY 4D 4HE SIGNAL RECEIVED THERE WILL RESULT IN END IF DESIRED DELAYED BY 4D 4HERE A TRIP COM
A TRIP AS LONG AS THE RELEVANT PROTECTIVE DEVICE HAS MAND IS GIVEN WHEN THE FAULT HAS BEEN DETECTED IN
PICKED UP FAULT DETECTION &$ 4HE DURATION OF THE ZONE :" IN THE SET DIRECTION 4HE DIFFERENCE BE
TRANSMIT SIGNAL CAN BE INCREASED BY 4S PROGRAM TWEEN PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRIP WITH FAULT DETEC
TION AND ZONE :" ACCELERATION IS THAT AT THE RECEIV
MABLE IN ORDER TO MATCH WITH DIFFERENT PICK UP
ING END THE TRIPPING AREA IS DEFINED BY THE EXTENDED
TIMES OF THE RELAYS AT THE LINE ENDS 4HE DURATION OF
ZONE :" DIRECTIONAL 4HE DURATION OF THE TRANSMIT
THE RECEIVE SIGNAL CAN BE INCREASED BY 4R
SIGNAL CAN BE INCREASED BY 4S THE DURATION OF THE RE
CEIVE SIGNAL CAN BE INCREASED BY 4R
&IGURE SHOWS A SIMPLIFIED BLOCK SCHEME OF THIS
FUNCTION
&IGURE SHOWS A SIMPLIFIED BLOCK SCHEME OF THIS
FUNCTION
)N THIS OPERATING MODE THE OVERREACH ZONE :" IS OF
NO IMPORTANCE FOR THE UNIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTER )F THE TRANSMISSION LINK IS FAULTY THE OVERREACH ZONE
FACE BUT IT CAN BE INITIATED BY THE AUTO RECLOSURE :" CAN BE INITIATED BY THE AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION
FUNCTION SEE 3ECTION SEE 3ECTION
:
&AULT DETECTION &AULT DETECTION

:
: :
4D 4S 4S 4D
4 4
&ORW &ORW
DIREC 4 4 DIREC
&LTDET &LTDET

4RIP 4RIP

&URTHER &URTHER
ZONES ZONES
4R 4R
2 2
: &AULT IN FIRST DISTANCE ZONE 4 $ELAY OF FIRST ZONE NORMALLY

&ORWDIREC &AULT IN PARAMETERIZED DIRECTION 4D $ELAY OF TRANSMISSION SIGNAL
4 4RANSMITTER 4S 0ROLONGATION OF TRANSMISSION SIGNAL
2 2ECEIVER 4R 0ROLONGATION OF RECEIVED SIGNAL
&IGURE 0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP &$ ACCELERATION BLOCK SCHEME
# ' #

:
:"
&AULT DETECTION &AULT DET
&AULT DET &AULT DETECTION

:"
:
: :
4D 4S 4S 4D
4 4
:" 4 4 :"

4" 4"
&ORW &ORW

4RIP 4RIP

DIREC DIREC
&URTHER &URTHER
ZONES ZONES
4R 4R
2 2
: &AULT IN FIRST DISTANCE ZONE 4 $ELAY OF FIRST ZONE NORMALLY

:" &AULT IN OVERREACH ZONE :" 4" $ELAY OF OVERREACH ZONE :" NORMALLY
2 2ECEIVER 4R 0ROLONGATION OF RECEIVED SIGNAL
&IGURE :ONE ACCELERATION :" BLOCK SCHEME
0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP WITH :"
4HE PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP FUNCTION USES &IGURE SHOWS A SIMPLIFIED BLOCK SCHEME
A PERMISSIVE RELEASE PRINCIPLE :ONE :" IS OF SIGNIFI
CANCE AS IT IS SET TO INCLUDE THE NEXT STATION AND BE )F THE DISTANCE PROTECTION DETECTS A FAULT WITHIN THE
YOND 4HIS METHOD OF SIGNAL COMPARISON CAN ALSO BE OVERREACH ZONE :" A RELEASE SIGNAL IS SENT TO THE
USED FOR EXTREMELY SHORT LINE LENGTHS WHEN A SETTING OPPOSITE LINE END IF DESIRED DELAYED BY 4D )F A RE
TO OF THE LINE LENGTH AND THEREFORE SELECTIVE IM LEASE SIGNAL IS ALSO RECEIVED FROM THE OPPOSITE END OF
MEDIATE DISCONNECTION IS NOT POSSIBLE )N THE LATTER THE LINE THE TRIPPING COMMAND IS TRANSMITTED TO THE
CASE :ONE : HAS TO BE DELAYED BY 4 BECAUSE IT COMMAND RELAY 0REREQUISITE FOR IMMEDIATE DISCON
WILL OPERATE INDEPENDENT OF RECEIPT OF A SIGNAL NECTION IS THEREFORE THE DETECTION OF A FAULT WITHIN
ZONE :" FROM BOTH LINE ENDS IN THE PARAMETERIZED
DIRECTION
# ' #

4HE DURATION OF THE TRANSMIT SIGNAL CAN BE INCREASED CAN THEN BE INITIATED FROM THE !2 FUNCTION SEE 3EC
BY 4S PROGRAMMABLE BUT THIS PROLONGATION IS EFFEC TION
TIVE ONLY AFTER THE PROTECTION HAS ISSUED A TRIP COM
MAND 4HIS ENSURES THE REMOTE LINE END TO BE RE &ALSE SIGNALS WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN CAUSED BY TRAN
LEASED ALSO IN CASE THE LOCAL LINE END IS TRIPPED VERY SIENT OSCILLATIONS AFTER THE INTERRUPTION OF EXTERNAL
QUICKLY BY THE INDEPENDENT FIRST DISTANCE ZONE FAULTS OR BY REVERSAL OF DIRECTION OF FLOW AFTER INTERRUP
TION OF FAULTS ON PARALLEL LINES ARE RENDERED HARMLESS
&OR THE OTHER ZONES : : : TRIPPING OCCURS BY A TRANSIENT BLOCKING FUNCTION REFER 3ECTION
WITHOUT RELEASE FROM THE OPPOSITE LINE END SO THAT
THE DISTANCE PROTECTION WORKS NORMALLY EVEN WITHOUT
TRANSMISSION &OR LINES WHICH ARE FED FROM ONE LINE END ONLY NO RE
LEASE SIGNAL CAN BE FORMED AT THE UNFED LINE END
)F THE TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL IS MONITORED AND A SINCE NO PICK UP CAN OCCUR THERE )N ORDER TO
TRANSMISSION FAULT IS DETECTED THE RECEIVING END LOG ACHIEVE EVEN IN THIS CASE IMMEDIATE TRIPPING OVER
IC CAN BE MADE INEFFECTIVE BY THE INPUT OF A BINARY OF THE LINE LENGTH AN ADDITIONAL ECHO FUNCTION
SIGNAL $ISTANCE PROTECTION THEN OPERATES WITH NOR IS AVAILABLE SEE 3ECTION
MAL GRADING RAPID TRIP IN : /VERREACH ZONE :"
:
:"

:"
:
:" :"
4D 4D
4 4
4" 4"
4S 4S

&ORW &ORW

DIREC

4RIP 4RIP

DIREC
: AND : AND
FURTHER FURTHER
ZONES ZONES
2 2
:" &AULT IN OVERREACH ZONE :" 4" $ELAY OF OVERREACH ZONE NORMALLY
2 2ECEIVER
&IGURE 0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP RELEASE OF :" BLOCK SCHEME
# ' #

$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON FAULT DETECTION ZONE RELEASE
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON ALSO PERFORMS A TRANSFER RE )F THE TRANSMISSION CHANNEL IS MONITORED AND A FAULT
LEASE FUNCTION IS DETECTED THIS WILL ONLY BLOCK THE DIRECTIONAL COM
PARISON FUNCTION VIA THE INPUT CHANNEL 2ECEPTION
&IGURE SHOWS A SIMPLIFIED BLOCK SCHEME FAULTY
)F THE RELAY DETECTS A FAULT IN THE LINE DIRECTION IT SENDS &ALSE SIGNALS WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN CAUSED BY TRAN
AFTER A SETTABLE TIME TD IF DESIRED A RELEASE SIGNAL TO SIENT OSCILLATIONS AFTER THE INTERRUPTION OF EXTERNAL
THE RELAY AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END AND WHEN A CORRE FAULTS OR BY REVERSAL OF DIRECTION OF FLOW AFTER INTERRUP
SPONDING CONFIRMATION SIGNAL IS RECEIVED ISSUES THE TION OF FAULTS ON PARALLEL LINES ARE RENDERED HARMLESS
TRIPPING SIGNAL 4HE DISTANCE GRADING OPERATES INDE BY A TRANSIENT BLOCKING FUNCTION REFER 3ECTION
PENDENTLY OF THE DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON
4HE DURATION OF THE TRANSMIT SIGNAL CAN BE INCREASED &OR LINES WHICH ARE FED FROM ONE LINE END ONLY NO RE
BY 4S PROGRAMMABLE BUT THIS PROLONGATION IS EFFEC LEASE SIGNAL CAN BE FORMED AT THE UNFED LINE END
TIVE ONLY AFTER THE PROTECTION HAS ISSUED A TRIP COM SINCE NO PICK UP CAN OCCUR THERE )N ORDER TO
MAND 4HIS ENSURES THE REMOTE LINE END TO BE RE ACHIEVE EVEN IN THIS CASE IMMEDIATE TRIPPING OVER
LEASED ALSO IN CASE THE LOCAL LINE END IS TRIPPED VERY OF THE LINE LENGTH AN ADDITIONAL ECHO FUNCTION
QUICKLY BY THE INDEPENDENT FIRST DISTANCE ZONE IS AVAILABLE SEE 3ECTION
:

:
&LTDET &LTDET
4D 4D
4 4
4S 4S

&ORW &ORW

DIREC
4RIP 4RIP

DIREC
: AND : AND
FURTHER FURTHER
ZONES ZONES
2 2
4 4RANSMITTER 4D $ELAY OF TRANSMISSION SIGNAL

2 2ECEIVER 4S 0ROLONGATION OF TRANSMISSION SIGNAL
&IGURE $IRECTIONAL COMPARISON BLOCK SCHEME
# ' #

5NBLOCKING MODE WITH :"
4HE UNBLOCK MODE IS A RELEASING PROCEDURE :ONE &OR SIGNAL TRANSMISSION ONE REQUIRES TWO SIGNAL FRE
:" IS SET TO REACH BEYOND THE NEXT STATION 4HE DIF QUENCIES WHICH ARE SHIFTED OVER FROM THE TRANSMITTER
FERENCE FROM PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP WITH OUTPUT IN 3! )F THE 0,# SYSTEM INCORPORATES
:" 3ECTION IS THAT A TRIP COMMAND IS ALSO CHANNEL MONITORING EG 3IEMENS VOICE FREQUENCY
POSSIBLE WHEN NO RELEASE SIGNAL IS RECEIVED FROM THE UNIT 374 & THEN THE MONITORING FREQUENCY F IS
OPPOSITE END )T IS THEREFORE PRINCIPALLY USED FOR LONG SWITCHED TO A WORKING FREQUENCY )F THE RELAY DETECTS
LINES WHEN THE SIGNAL HAS TO BE TRANSMITTED OVER THE A FAULT WITHIN THE OVERREACH ZONE :" IT INITIATES
PROTECTED LINE USING A 0,# SYSTEM AND THE DAMPING TRANSMISSION OF THE WORKING FREQUENCY F5 UNBLOCK
OF THE TRANSMITTED SIGNAL CAN BE SO LARGE AT THE POINT ING FREQUENCY CAN BE DELAYED BY 4D 5NDER NORMAL
OF FAULT THAT ITS RECEIPT FROM THE OTHER LINE END CANNOT CONDITIONS OR WITH A FAULT OUTSIDE THE :" ZONE OR IN
BE UNCONDITIONALLY GUARANTEED &OR THIS PARTICULAR THE DIRECTION OPPOSITE TO THAT SET THE MONITORING FRE
CASE A SPECIAL UNBLOCKING LOGIC COMES INTO OPERA QUENCY F IS TRANSMITTED )F THE TRANSMISSION CHANNEL
TION IS DISTORTED THE RECEIVER UNIT WILL ISSUE THE FAULT SIGNAL
& 2ECEIVED SIGNAL AND FAULT SIGNAL PASS THROUGH AN
&IGURE SHOWS A SIMPLIFIED BLOCK SCHEME OF THIS UNBLOCKING LOGIC CIRCUIT WHICH CAN BE SEEN IN &IGURE
FUNCTION
:
:"

:"
:
:" :"
4D 4D
4 4
5 5
4" 4"
4S 4S

&ORW &ORW

DIREC
4RIP 4RIP

DIREC
: AND : AND
FURTHER FURTHER
ZONES ZONES
5 5 5NBLOCK
5NBLOCK
2 2
& 2 2 &
LOGIC LOGIC
:" &AULT IN OVERREACH ZONE :" 4" $ELAY OF OVERREACH ZONE NORMALLY
2 2ECEIVER
&IGURE 5NBLOCKING MODE WITH :" BLOCK SCHEME
# ' #

)F THE UNBLOCKING SIGNAL 5 IS FAULTLESSLY RECEIVED THEN )F THE TRANSMISSION DEVICE HAS NO CHANNEL SUPERVI
THE RELEASE SIGNAL 2 IS FORMED IN &IGURE UPPER SION FACILITY BUT ONLY DEMODULATES THE TWO FREQUEN
SIGNAL ROUTE THAT IS THE TRIPPING SIGNAL OF ZONE :" CIES UNBLOCKING FREQUENCY AND BLOCKING FREQUEN
IS FORWARDED TO THE TRIPPING RELAY AS WITH OVERREACH CY THE FAULT SIGNAL & CAN BE PRODUCED BY A SIMPLE
TRANSFER WITH :" )F FAULT SIGNAL & APPEARS NO RE LOGIC ACCORDING TO &IGURE )NSTEAD OF THE !.$
LEASE IS GIVEN GATE AN EXCLUSIVE /2 GATE CAN BE INCORPORATED
3TANDING TRANSMISSION FAULTS WILL BE RECOGNIZED BY
)F THE SIGNAL TO BE TRANSMITTED DOES NOT REACH THE OTH 3! AFTER APPROXIMATELY S AND ANNUNCIATED
ER LINE END BECAUSE A SHORT CIRCUIT ON THE LINE CAUSES
EXCESSIVE DAMPING OR REFLECTION OF THE SIGNAL THE RE &ALSE SIGNALS WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN CAUSED BY TRAN
CEIVER RECOGNIZES A FAULT AND ISSUES FAULT SIGNAL & )N SIENT OSCILLATIONS AFTER THE INTERRUPTION OF EXTERNAL
THIS CASE AFTER A SAFETY DELAY TIME OF MS RELEASE FAULTS OR BY REVERSAL OF DIRECTION OF FLOW AFTER INTERRUP
SIGNAL 2 IS DISPATCHED BUT BY THE TIME STAGE TION OF FAULTS ON PARALLEL LINES ARE RENDERED HARMLESS
MS IT IS CANCELLED AFTER A FURTHER MS BY A TRANSIENT BLOCKING FUNCTION REFER 3ECTION
7HEN THE FAULT SIGNAL DISAPPEARS AGAIN THE QUIES
CENT CONDITION IS REESTABLISHED AFTER ANOTHER MS
RESET DELAY OF TIME STAGE MS THAT IS THE &OR LINES WHICH ARE FED FROM ONE LINE END ONLY NO RE
UPPER RELEASE ROUTE IN &IGURE IS AGAIN AVAILABLE LEASE SIGNAL CAN BE FORMED AT THE UNFED LINE END
SINCE NO PICK UP CAN OCCUR THERE )N ORDER TO
&OR ALL ZONES WITH THE EXCEPTION OF :" TRIPPING IS ACHIEVE EVEN IN THIS CASE IMMEDIATE TRIPPING OVER
PERMITTED WITHOUT RELEASE SO THAT THE RELAY OPERATES OF THE LINE LENGTH AN ADDITIONAL ECHO FUNCTION
INDEPENDENT OF SIGNAL TRANSMISSION 4HE OVERREACH IS AVAILABLE SEE 3ECTION
ZONE :" CAN THEN BE INITIATED FROM THE AUTOMATIC
RECLOSING SYSTEM SEE 3ECTION
:

:
&LTDET &LTDET
4D 4D
4 4
4S 4S

&ORW &ORW

DIREC

4RIP 4RIP

DIREC
: AND : AND
FURTHER FURTHER
ZONES ZONES
5NBLOCK 5 5 5NBLOCK
2 2
& 2 2 &
LOGIC LOGIC
4 4RANSMITTER 4D $ELAY OF TRANSMISSION SIGNAL

2 2ECEIVER 4S 0ROLONGATION OF TRANSMISSION SIGNAL
&IGURE $IRECTIONAL COMPARISON UNBLOCKING MODE WITH FAULT DETECTION BLOCK SCHEME
# ' #

$IRECTIONAL UNBLOCKING MODE WITH FAULT DETECTION
4HE UNBLOCKING MODE IS A RELEASE PROCEDURE 4HE FAULT IN LINE DIRECTION AS WITH DIRECTIONAL COMPARI
DIFFERENCE FROM DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON PROCEDURES SON )F FAULT SIGNAL & APPEARS NO RELEASE IS GIVEN
3ECTION IS THAT A TRIPPING SIGNAL IS ALSO POSSI
BLE WHEN NO RELEASE SIGNAL IS RECEIVED FROM THE OP )F THE SIGNAL TO BE TRANSMITTED DOES NOT REACH THE OTH
POSITE END )T IS THEREFORE PRINCIPALLY USED FOR LONG ER LINE END BECAUSE A SHORT CIRCUIT ON THE LINE CAUSES
LINES WHEN THE SIGNAL MUST BE TRANSMITTED OVER THE EXCESSIVE DAMPING OR REFLECTION OF THE SIGNAL THE RE
PROTECTED LINE BY A 0,# SYSTEM AND THE DAMPING OF CEIVER RECOGNIZES A FAULT AND ISSUES FAULT SIGNAL & )N
THE TRANSMITTED SIGNAL AT THE POINT OF FAULT IS SO LARGE THIS CASE AFTER A SAFETY DELAY TIME OF MS RELEASE
THAT RECEIPT FROM THE OTHER LINE END CANNOT BE UNCON SIGNAL 2 IS DISPATCHED BUT BY THE TIME STAGE
DITIONALLY GUARANTEED )N THIS CASE A SPECIAL UN MS IT IS CANCELLED AFTER A FURTHER MS
BLOCKING LOGIC COMES INTO OPERATION 7HEN THE FAULT SIGNAL DISAPPEARS AGAIN THE QUIES
CENT CONDITION IS REESTABLISHED AFTER ANOTHER MS
&IGURE SHOWS A SIMPLIFIED BLOCK SCHEME OF THIS RESET DELAY OF TIME STAGE MS THAT IS THE
FUNCTION UPPER RELEASE ROUTE IN &IGURE IS AGAIN AVAILABLE
&OR SIGNAL TRANSMISSION ONE REQUIRES TWO SIGNAL FRE )F THE TRANSMISSION DEVICE HAS NO CHANNEL SUPERVI
QUENCIES WHICH ARE SHIFTED OVER FROM THE TRANSMITTER SION FACILITY BUT ONLY DEMODULATES THE TWO FREQUEN
OUTPUT IN 3! )F THE 0,# SYSTEM INCORPORATES CIES UNBLOCKING FREQUENCY AND BLOCKING FREQUEN
CHANNEL MONITORING EG 3IEMENS VOICE FREQUENCY CY THE FAULT SIGNAL & CAN BE PRODUCED BY A SIMPLE
UNIT 374 & THEN THE MONITORING FREQUENCY F IS LOGIC IN ACCORDANCE WITH &IGURE )NSTEAD OF THE
SWITCHED TO A WORKING FREQUENCY )F THE RELAY DETECTS !.$ GATE AN EXCLUSIVE /2 GATE CAN BE INCORPO
A FAULT IN THE LINE DIRECTION IT INITIATES TRANSMISSION OF RATED 3TANDING TRANSMISSION FAULTS WILL BE RECOG
THE WORKING FREQUENCY F5 UNBLOCKING FREQUENCY NIZED BY 3! AFTER APPROXIMATELY S AND AN
CAN BE DELAYED 5NDER NORMAL CONDITIONS OR WITH A NUNCIATED
FAULT IN THE DIRECTION OPPOSITE TO THAT SET THE MONITOR
ING FREQUENCY F IS TRANSMITTED )F THE TRANSMISSION
CHANNEL IS DISTORTED THE RECEIVER UNIT WILL ISSUE THE
FAULT SIGNAL & 2ECEIVED SIGNAL AND FAULT SIGNAL PASS
THROUGH AN UNBLOCKING LOGIC CIRCUIT WHICH CAN BE
SEEN IN &IGURE 5NBLOCK FREQUENCY
&
"LOCK FREQUENCY
&IGURE 0RODUCING THE FAULT SIGNAL &

5

&
2
&ALSE SIGNALS WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN CAUSED BY TRAN

SIENT OSCILLATIONS AFTER THE INTERRUPTION OF EXTERNAL

FAULTS OR BY REVERSAL OF DIRECTION OF FLOW AFTER INTERRUP
MS MS
TION OF FAULTS ON PARALLEL LINES ARE RENDERED HARMLESS
BY A TRANSIENT BLOCKING FUNCTION REFER 3ECTION
&IGURE 5NBLOCKING ,OGIC
&OR LINES WHICH ARE FED FROM ONE LINE END ONLY NO RE
LEASE SIGNAL CAN BE FORMED AT THE UNFED LINE END
)F THE UNBLOCKING SIGNAL 5 IS FAULTLESSLY RECEIVED THEN SINCE NO PICK UP CAN OCCUR THERE )N ORDER TO
THE RELEASE SIGNAL 2 IS FORMED IN &IGURE UPPER ACHIEVE EVEN IN THIS CASE IMMEDIATE TRIPPING OVER
SIGNAL ROUTE THAT IS AN UNDELAYED TRIPPING SIGNAL OF THE LINE LENGTH AN ADDITIONAL ECHO FUNCTION
CAN BE FORWARDED TO THE TRIPPING RELAY FOR A DETECTED IS AVAILABLE SEE 3ECTION
# ' #

"LOCKING MODE
)N THE BLOCKING PROCEDURE THE TRANSMISSION LINK IS BEEN CAUSED BY TRANSIENT OSCILLATIONS AFTER THE INTER
USED TO SEND A BLOCKING SIGNAL FROM ONE LINE END TO RUPTION OF EXTERNAL FAULTS OR BY REVERSAL OF DIRECTION OF
THE OTHER 4HE SIGNAL IS TRANSMITTED WHEN THE RELAY FLOW AFTER INTERRUPTION OF FAULTS ON PARALLEL LINE 3EE
DETECTS A FAULT IN THE REVERSE DIRECTION TRANSIENT BLOCKING FUNCTION 3ECTION
&IGURE SHOWS A SIMPLIFIED BLOCK SCHEME )F THE TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL IS MONITORED AND A
TRANSMISSION FAULT IS DETECTED THE RECEIVING END LOG
&AULTS IN THE OVERREACH ZONE :" WHICH IS SET TO AP IC CAN BE MADE INEFFECTIVE BY THE INPUT OF A BINARY
PROXIMATELY OF THE LINE LENGTH LEAD TO A TRIP SIG SIGNAL $ISTANCE PROTECTION THEN OPERATES WITH NOR
NAL AS LONG AS NO BLOCKING SIGNAL IS RECEIVED FROM THE MAL GRADING RAPID TRIP IN : /VERREACH ZONE :"
OPPOSITE LINE END "ECAUSE OF POSSIBLE DIFFERENCES CAN THEN BE INITIATED FROM THE !2 FUNCTION SEE 3EC
IN THE PICK UP TIMES OF THE RELAYS AT EACH LINE END TION
AND BECAUSE OF THE TRANSMISSION TIME ZONE :"
MUST BE SOMEWHAT DELAYED WITH TIME 4" !N INHERENT CHARACTERISTIC OF THE BLOCKING FUNCTION IS
THAT RAPID DISCONNECTION OF SINGLE END FED FAULTS IS
%QUALLY TO AVOID COMPETITION A DISPATCHED SIGNAL ENSURED EVEN WITHOUT SPECIAL MEASURES SINCE NO
WILL BE LENGTHENED BY THE ADJUSTABLE TIME BLOCKING SIGNAL CAN BE FORMED AT THE NON FEEDING
4 3%.$ 02, 4S IN &IGURE !LSO THE RECEIVE END !LSO THE PROCEDURE IS PARTICULARLY SUITABLE WHEN
SIGNAL WILL BE LENGTHENED BY THE TRANSIENT BLOCKING THE SIGNAL MUST BE TRANSMITTED VIA THE PROTECTED LINE
TIME 4 42!.3",/ 4" IN &IGURE PROVIDED IT USING A 0,# SYSTEM AND THE DAMPING OF THE TRANS
HAS BEEN RECEIVED FOR THE WAITING TIME 47 4HE MITTED SIGNAL CAN BE SO LARGE AT THE POINT OF FAULT THAT
TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME AGAIN COMES INTO OPERATION ITS RECEIPT FROM THE OTHER LINE END CANNOT BE UNCONDI
TO RENDER HARMLESS FAULT SIGNALS WHICH MAY HAVE TIONALLY GUARANTEED
:"
:

:
:"
&LTDET &LTDET
4S 4S
4 4
:" :"

4" 4"
&ORW &ORW

DIREC 4RIP 4RIP DIREC
: AND : AND
FURTHER FURTHER
ZONES ZONES
4" 47 47 4"
2 2

&IGURE "LOCKING MODE BLOCK SCHEME
# ' #

/VERREACHING ZONE COMPARISON 4HE RECEIVE SIGNALS ARE MAINTAINED AT BOTH LINE ENDS
VIA PILOT WIRES AND THEREFORE NO TRIP RESULTS 4HE REMAINING DISTANCE
STAGES HOWEVER OPERATE INDEPENDENTLY SO THAT THE
BACK UP PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ARE NOT AFFECTED
)N THIS MODE THE OVERREACH ZONE :" TAKES ON THE
FUNCTION OF THE INSTANTANEOUS STAGE AT BOTH ENDS OF &OR LINES SHORTER THAN THE SHORTEST DISTANCE SETTING
THE PROTECTED LINE :ONE :" IS SET BEYOND THE NEXT ONE MUST NEVERTHELESS OBSERVE THAT THE FIRST DIS
STATION 4HE COMPARISON FUNCTION PREVENTS NON SE TANCE ZONE SHALL BE SET TO BE EITHER INEFFECTIVE OR THE
LECTIVE TRIPPING TIME 4 SHALL BE SET EQUAL TO THE SECOND DISTANCE
ZONE
4HE INFORMATION EXCHANGE BETWEEN THE TWO LINE
ENDS IS MADE VIA A PILOT WIRE OR CONTROL CORE LOOP 7ITH SINGLE END FEED INSTANTANEOUS TRIP WILL EQUALLY
CONNECTED AT EACH END VIA AN AUXILIARY RELAY AND FED BE ACHIEVED FOR THE TOTAL PROTECTED LINE LENGTH 3INCE
FROM THE DC BATTERY OF ONE OF THE SUBSTATIONS &OR NO PICK UP RESULTS AT THE NON FEEDING END THE
EACH LINE END AN INTERPOSING RELAY 0! ! IS LOOP IS NOT INTERRUPTED THERE 7HEN AT THE OTHER END
THEREFORE NECESSARY &IGURE #ONNECTION DIA THE FAULT IS DETECTED WITHIN :" THE LOOP IS AGAIN
GRAMS ARE INCLUDED IN !PPENDIX " CLOSED AND THE TRIP SIGNAL RELEASED
5NDER HEALTHY CONDITIONS THE PILOT WIRES CARRY DIRECT 3O THAT SUFFICIENT TIME IS AVAILABLE TO OPEN AND CLOSE
CURRENT THUS ACHIEVING PILOT WIRE MONITORING "OTH THE PILOT WIRE LOOP BETWEEN PICK UP AND TRIP SIGNAL
AUXILIARY RELAYS + ARE ENERGIZED IN CONTRAST TO THE FROM THE RELAY 4" MUST BE SLIGHTLY DELAYED )F THE
ILLUSTRATION IN &IGURE OVERREACHING ZONE COMPARISON VIA PILOT WIRES IS
ACHIEVED WITH TWO DIFFERENT RELAY TYPES AT THE TWO LINE
$ISTANCE PROTECTION PICK UP AT EITHER LINE END WILL IN ENDS EG 3! AT ONE END AND A CONVENTIONAL
TERRUPT THE WIRE LOOP VIA THE SEND SIGNAL AND AUXILIARY RELAY AT THE OTHER IT MUST BE ENSURED THAT POSSIBLE
RELAY + "OTH + DROP OFF AND BLOCK TRIPPING IN :" FUNDAMENTAL DIFFERENCES IN PICK UP AND TRIPPING
VIA THE RECEIVE SIGNAL )F THE RELAY THEN DETECTS THE TIMES OF BOTH RELAYS DO NOT LEAD TO FALSE RELEASE SIG
FAULT WITHIN THE OVERREACH ZONE :" THE SEND SIGNAL NALS 4HIS IS ALSO TO BE COVERED BY THE DELAY TIME
DISAPPEARS AGAIN )F THE LOOP AT THE OPPOSITE END STA 4"
TION IS ALSO CLOSED BY THE SAME PROCEDURE RELAYS +
ARE ENERGIZED AGAIN AND AS A RESULT THE RECEIVE SIG 4HE NORMALLY CLOSED DC PILOT WIRE LOOP ALLOWS CON
NALS DISAPPEAR AND TRIPPING IS RELEASED AT BOTH LINE TINUOUS MONITORING OF THE PILOT WIRES 3INCE WITH
ENDS EACH LINE FAULT THE LOOP IS INTERRUPTED THE PILOT WIRE
INTERRUPTION SIGNAL IS DELAYED FOR SECONDS 4HE
)F A FAULT OCCURS BEYOND THE PROTECTED LINE THE DC COMPARISON FUNCTION IS THEN BLOCKED 4HE REMAINING
LOOP WILL BE INTERRUPTED BY FAULT DETECTOR PICK UP OF STAGES OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION CONTINUE TO FUNC
THE DEVICES AT BOTH ENDS 3INCE HOWEVER AT LEAST TION NORMALLY 4HE INPUT 2ECEPTION FAULTY ON
ONE LINE END WILL NOT DE ENERGIZE THE SEND SIGNAL 3! IS NOT USED BECAUSE A PILOT WIRE FAULT WILL BE
FAULT NOT IN ZONE :" IN LINE DIRECTION THE LOOP RE RECOGNIZED WITHIN THE RELAY ITSELF
MAINS OPEN
3UBSTATION ! 3UBSTATION "

3! 0! 0! 3!
+ +
3IGNAL SEND 3IGNAL SEND
&AULT , , &AULT
:" 4" , 4" :"

DIREC DIREC
4RIP 0ILOT 4RIP
+ 7IRES +
,
,
1 3 3IGNAL 3IGNAL
3 1
RECEIVE RECEIVE
,
2 2
&AULT &AULT
, , 0ILOT WIRE LOOP VOLTAGE

, , 0ROTECTION VOLTAGE
, , RESPECTIVE SUBSTATION
&IGURE /VERREACHING ZONE COMPARISON VIA PILOT WIRES SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
# ' #

2EVERSE INTERLOCKING
)F THE PROTECTION SYSTEM IS INSTALLED AS BACK UP PRO DANCE WITH ITS PURPOSE AND IN THE ABSENCE OF SUCH
TECTION IN A SINGLE END FEED TRANSFORMER CIRCUIT THE AN INPUT SIGNAL THIS ZONE GUARANTEES RAPID DISCON
DISTANCE RELAY CAN BE USED TO PROVIDE HIGH SPEED NECTION OF THE BUS BAR IN THE CASE OF
PROTECTION FOR THE BUS BAR WITHOUT ENDANGERING THE
SELECTIVITY FOR THE OUTGOING LINES &AULT IN THE OUTGOING TRANSFORMER CIRCUIT FOR EXAM
PLE IN !
$ISTANCE ZONES : AND : THEN SERVE AS BACK UP &AILURE OF A LINE PROTECTION RELAY
STAGES FOR FAULTS ON THE OUTGOING LINES FOR EXAMPLE
AT " AS ILLUSTRATED IN &IGURE 4HE DISTANCE ZONE 2EVERSE INTERLOCKING IS ACHIEVED BY DELIBERATE RE
SETTINGS SHOULD BE BASED ON THE CHARACTERISTICS OF LEASE OR BLOCKING OF THE OVERREACHING ZONE :" )T
THE SHORTEST LINE CAN BE USED IN A BLOCKING MODE AS SHOWN IN &IGURE
OR IN RELEASE MODE BY A NORMALLY CLOSED CIRCUIT
4HE OVERREACHING ZONE :" WHOSE DELAY TIME 4"
WILL BE SET HIGHER THAN THE PICK UP TIME OF ANY SUB 4O AVOID TRANSIENT FALSE SIGNALS AFTER DISCONNECTION
ORDINATE RELAY WILL BE BLOCKED IF A SUBORDINATE RELAY OF EXTERNAL FAULTS THE BLOCKING FUNCTION IS EXTENDED
HAS PICKED UP !S ILLUSTRATED IN &IGURE THE BY A TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME 4 42!.3",/ 4" IN
PICK UP SIGNAL WILL BE FED THROUGH THE RECEIVER IN &IGURE UNDER REVERSE INTERLOCK CONDITIONS
PUT TO THE PROTECTION SYSTEM (OWEVER IN ACCOR
:
4
:
4
4!
:"
4"
SHORTEST
LINE
! , &AULT "
, &AULT
4"
:" 4RIP
, &AULT
4"
, &AULT
&IGURE 2EVERSE INTERLOCKING SCHEME GRADING OF DISTANCE ZONES EXAMPLE
# ' #

7EAK INFEED MEASURES ECHO FUNCTION
)N THOSE CASES WHERE AT ONE LINE END THERE IS NO OR WHAT LATER BECAUSE OF UNFAVOURABLE SHORT CIRCUIT CUR
ONLY A WEAK INFEED SO THAT THE PROTECTION DEVICE AT RENT DISTRIBUTION )F HOWEVER THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AT
THAT END CANNOT PICK UP AND THEREFORE CANNOT SEND THE NON FEEDING LINE END IS OPEN DELAY OF THE ECHO
ANY RELEASE SIGNAL AN ECHO INTERTRIP SIGNAL CAN BE IS NOT NECESSARY 4HE ECHO DELAY TIME CAN THEN BE
SENT IN CONJUNCTION WITH OVERREACHING MODES WITH BY PASSED AS LONG AS THE RELAY IS INFORMED OF THE
RELEASE SIGNAL 4HIS FEATURE CAN BE MADE EFFECTIVE OR STATUS OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER VIA A BINARY INPUT
INEFFECTIVE BY A SOFTWARE /./&& SWITCH &IGURE
SHOWS THE LOGIC DIAGRAM 4O PREVENT THE FORMATION OF AN ECHO AFTER DISCONNEC
TION OF THE LINE AND RESET OF THE FAULT DETECTION ELE
)N THE EVENT OF PICK UP FAILURE AT ONE LINE END THE MENT NO ECHO CAN BE FORMED WHEN FAULT DETECTION
ECHO FUNCTION ENSURES THAT THE RECEIVED SIGNAL IS HAS PREVIOUSLY BEEN PRESENT 23 MEMORY IN &IGURE
SENT BACK TO THE OTHER LINE END AS AN ECHO AND &OR THE SAME REASON AN ADJUSTABLE TIME 4
THERE PERMITS RELEASE OF THE TRIPPING COMMAND 4HE %#(/ ",/ PREVENTS FORMATION OF AN ECHO AFTER A
DURATION OF THE ECHO IMPULSE IS ADJUSTABLE TRIPPING COMMAND
4 %#(/ )-0
7ITH THE BLOCKING MODE AND FOR TRANSFER TRIP MODES
4HE ECHO IS DELAYED BY AN ADJUSTABLE TIME THE ECHO FUNCTION IS NOT EFFECTIVE %QUALLY IT HAS NO
4 %#(/ $%, 4HIS DELAY IS NECESSARY SO THAT THE FUNCTION IN OVERREACHING ZONE COMPARISON VIA PILOT
ECHO IS NOT EFFECTIVE WHEN THE RELAY AT ONE LINE END WIRES OR REVERSE INTERLOCKING SCHEMES
HAS A HIGHER PICK UP TIME OR WHEN IT PICKS UP SOME
#OMPARISON RELEASE LOGIC
2

3 1
2E
CEP
TION
&AULT 4
4
3END
DET %#(/ %#(/
$%, )-0
4RIP 4
%#(/
SIGNAL ",/
#"

OPEN
&IGURE "LOCK DIAGRAM OF ECHO FUNCTION FOR RELEASE MODES
# ' #

4RANSIENT BLOCKING
)N OVERREACH TRANSFER AND COMPARISON MODES TRAN 4 42!.3",/ IDENTIFIED IN &IGURE WITH 4"
SIENT BLOCKING PROVIDES ADDITIONAL SECURITY AGAINST EVEN AFTER THE BLOCKING CRITERION HAS BEEN REMOVED
FALSE SIGNALS WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN CAUSED BY TRAN
SIENT OSCILLATION AFTER THE INTERRUPTION OF EXTERNAL 3IMILARLY THE RELEASE OF OVERREACHING ZONE :" OR DI
FAULTS OR BY REVERSAL OF DIRECTION OF FLOW AFTER INTERRUP RECTIONAL TRIP CAN BE RESTRICTED WHEN AFTER FAULT DE
TION OF FAULTS ON PARALLEL LINES TECTION NO RELEASE SIGNAL IS RECEIVED FROM THE OPPO
SITE LINE END WITHIN THE SETTABLE WAITING TIME 47 4HIS
4HE PRINCIPLE OF TRANSIENT BLOCKING IS THAT AFTER THE OC BLOCKING WILL ALSO BE EXTENDED BY THE TRANSIENT
CURRENCE OF AN EXTERNAL FAULT FORMATION OF A RELEASE BLOCKING TIME .ORMALLY THIS MODE OF TRANSIENT
SIGNAL IS PREVENTED FOR A SPECIFIC ADJUSTABLE TIME BLOCKING IS REASONABLE ONLY WHEN THE PROTECTION
4 42!.3",/ )N THE RELEASE MODES THIS IS ACCOM SCHEME AT THE REMOTE LINE END HAS NO TRANSIENT
PLISHED BY BLOCKING THE TRANSMISSION AND RECEIVER BLOCKING FEATURE 4RANSIENT BLOCKING IS SUPPRESSED
CIRCUITS IN THE BLOCKING MODE BY LENGTHENING OF THE WHEN THE WAITING TIME 47 IS SET TO INFINITY
BLOCKING SIGNAL AT THE RECEIVER END
)N THE BLOCKING MODE NON RECEIPT OF THE RELEASE
&IGURE SHOWS THE PRINCIPLE OF TRANSIENT BLOCKING SIGNAL QUALIFIES AS RECEIPT OF A BLOCKING SIGNAL (ERE
FOR A RELEASE MODE )F AFTER FAULT DETECTION A FAULT IS TRANSIENT BLOCKING MEANS PROLONGATION OF THE BLOCK
SHOWN TO BE IN THE REVERSE DIRECTION OPPOSITE TO THE ING SIGNAL 4HE BLOCKING SIGNAL MUST HAVE BEEN RE
SET DIRECTION THE TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT AND THE RE CEIVED FOR THE WAITING TIME 47 4HE TRANSMISSION SIG
LEASE OF OVERREACHING ZONE :" OR DIRECTIONAL TRIP WILL NAL CAN BE LENGTHENED BY THE TIME 4 3%.$ 02,
BE BLOCKED AFTER A WAITING TIME OF MS 4HIS BLOCK SEE ALSO 3ECTION
ING WILL BE MAINTAINED FOR THE TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME
&ORW 4"
"LOCK TRANSMISSION
DIREC AND RELEASE SIGNAL
&AULT
DETEC
2E 47 4"
CEP "LOCK RELEASE SIGNAL
TION
&IGURE 4RANSIENT BLOCKING WITH RELEASE MODE
# ' #

5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS TRIP COMMANDS AND ANNUNCIATIONS
3! CONTAINS TWO USER DEFINABLE LOGIC MODULES "INARY INPUT

4HESE COMPRISE EACH A TIMER WHICH CAN BE STARTED
5SER 4 3TART
AND BLOCKED VIA A BINARY INPUT &IGURE ! PICK 0 5SER OUTPUT 4
UP TIME DELAY AND A DROP OFF TIME DELAY CAN BE SET 5SER 4 2ESET
4HE TIMES CAN ALSO BE SET TO OR 0
3ET MEMORY WITH 5SER 4 3TART
2ESET MEMORY WITH 5SER 4 2ESET
"INARY INPUTS "INARY OUTPUT

&IGURE &LIP FLOP
5SER 4 3TART
4PICK 4DROP 5SER OUTPUT 4
5SER 4 2ESET
&IGURE 5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC ONE MODULE !NY DESIRED TRIP SIGNAL FROM AN EXTERNAL PROTECTION OR
SUPERVISION UNIT CAN BE INCORPORATED INTO THE PRO
CESSING OF 3! 4HE SIGNAL IS COUPLED AS %XTER
NAL SIGNAL VIA A BINARY INPUT ,IKE THE INTERNAL PROTEC
TION AND SUPERVISION SIGNALS IT CAN BE ANNUNCIATED
4HE OUTPUTS ARE INCLUDED IN THE ANNUNCIATION PRO AS %XTERNAL FAULT AND TRANSMITTED TO THE TRIP RELAYS
CESSING OF THE DEVICE 4HEY CAN BE ASSIGNED TO SIG
NAL RELAYS ,%$S OR TRIP RELAYS !DDITIONALLY FOUR ANNUNCIATIONS ARE AVAILABLE WHICH
CAN BE DEFINED BY THE USER HIMSELF 3IGNALS AND
4HE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS CAN BE REALIZED FOR EXAMPLE MESSAGES OF OTHER DEVICES WHICH HAVE NO INTERFACES
0# OR ,3! INTERFACE CAN BE INCLUDED IN THE ANNUN
PICK UP DELAY WITH 4PICK 4DROP CIATION PROCESSING OF THE DEVICE ,IKE THE INTERNAL AN
NUNCIATIONS THEY CAN BE ALLOCATED TO SIGNAL RELAYS
DROP OFF DELAY PULSE LENGTHENING WITH 4DROP ,%$S OR TRIP RELAYS OR TRANSMITTED TO THE FRONT DIS
4PICK PLAY A 0# OR ,3!
PICK UP DELAY AND DROP OFF DELAY
BISTABLE MEMORY FLIP FLOP REFER TO &IGURE
FLIP FLOP WITH DELAY
# ' #

%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTEC

TIME PROTECTION TION
3! PROVIDES AN EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME 4HE THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION PREVENTS THE POWER
PROTECTION 7HEREAS DISTANCE PROTECTION CAN OPER LINE PARTICULARLY IN CASE OF CABLES FROM DAMAGE
ATE ONLY AS LONG AS THE LINE VOLTAGES ARE PROPERLY CAUSED BY THERMAL OVERLOADING
AVAILABLE THE OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION NEEDS THE
CURRENTS ONLY 4HE UNIT COMPUTES THE TEMPERATURE RISE ACCORDING
TO A THERMAL SINGLE BODY MODEL AS PER THE FOLLOWING
4HE OVERCURRENT FUNCTION COMES AUTOMATICALLY INTO THERMAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION
OPERATION WHEN FAILURE OF THE MEASURED VOLTAGES IS
DETECTED BY ANY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS
D Ç )
DT Ç
OPERATION OF THE FUSE FAILURE MONITOR OR THREE
PHASE VOLTAGE FAILURE SUPERVISION REFER 3ECTION
OR WHERE
THE SIGNAL 64 MCB TRIPPED IS APPLIED TO A BINARY INSTANTANEOUS TEMPERATURE RISE RELATED
INPUT ON THE FINAL TEMPERATURE RISE FOR THE MAXI
MUM PERMISSIBLE CABLE CURRENT Kw).
)F EITHER OF THESE FACTORS OCCURS DISTANCE PROTECTION
Ç THERMAL TIME CONSTANT FOR HEATING UP OF
IS IMMEDIATELY BLOCKED AND EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT
THE CABLE
PROTECTION MAY BECOME OPERATIVE SELECTABLE
) INSTANTANEOUS CABLE CURRENT RMS VALUE
5NDER THIS CONDITION SELECTIVITY CAN ONLY BE RELATED ON THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE
ACHIEVED BY TIME DELAY JUST AS FOR ALL OTHER TYPES OF CABLE CURRENT )MAX K w ).
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION SCHEME
7HEN THE TEMPERATURE RISE REACHES THE FIRST SET
!S SOON AS THE DEVICE RECOGNIZES THAT THE MEASURED THRESHOLD A WARNING ALARM IS GIVEN IN ORDER TO REN
VOLTAGES HAVE REAPPEARED THE SYSTEM SWITCHES DER POSSIBLE AN EARLY LOAD REDUCTION )F THE SECOND
BACK TO DISTANCE PROTECTION TEMPERATURE THRESHOLD IS REACHED THE LINE CAN BE
DISCONNECTED FROM THE NETWORK SELECTABLE
4HE EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS DE
SIGNED TWO STAGE FOR PHASE CURRENT WITH AN ADDI 4HE TEMPERATURE RISES ARE CALCULATED SEPARATELY FOR
TIONAL EARTH CURRENT STAGE !LL STAGES ARE INDEPEN EACH INDIVIDUAL PHASE ! CHOICE CAN BE MADE
DENT FROM EACH OTHER AND CAN BE SET INDIVIDUALLY WHETHER THE MAXIMUM CALCULATED TEMPERATURE RISE
OF THE THREE PHASES THE AVERAGE TEMPERATURE RISE OR
) HIGH CURRENT LIMIT VALUE THRESHOLD FOR THE TEMPERATURE RISE CALCULATED FROM THE PHASE WITH
PHASE CURRENTS MAXIMUM CURRENT SHOULD BE DECISIVE ! TRUE RMS
4) CORRESPONDING DELAY TIME VALUE MEASUREMENT IS PERFORMED IN ORDER TO INCLUDE
FOR THE EFFECT OF HARMONIC CONTENT
)PH DEFINITE TIME LIMIT VALUE THRESHOLD FOR
PHASE CURRENTS 4HE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE CONTINUOUS THERMAL OVER
4) CORRESPONDING DELAY TIME LOAD CURRENT )MAX IS DESCRIBED AS A MULTIPLE OF THE
RATED CURRENT ).
)% DEFINITE TIME LIMIT VALUE THRESHOLD FOR
EARTH CURRENTS )MAX K ).
4)% CORRESPONDING DELAY TIME
)N ADDITION TO THIS K VALUE THE TIME CONSTANT Ç AS
5NDER CONDITIONS OF MANUAL CLOSING ONTO FAULT THE WELL AS THE ALARM TEMPERATURE WARN MUST BE EN
EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION CAN ALSO PROVIDE TERED INTO THE PROTECTION UNIT
A RAPID TRIP ! CHOICE CAN BE MADE WHETHER THE )
STAGES OR THE ) STAGES ARE DECISIVE FOR AN UNDE !PART FROM THE THERMAL WARNING STAGE THE OVERLOAD
LAYED TRIP IE THE ASSOCIATED TIME DELAY IS BY PROTECTION ALSO INCLUDES A CURRENT DEPENDENT
PASSED FOR THIS CONDITION 4HE EMERGENCY PROTECTION WARNING STAGE 4HIS LATTER ALARM STAGE CAN GIVE AN
CAN ALSO BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH AUTO RECLO EARLY ANNUNCIATION OF AN IMPENDING OVERLOAD CURRENT
SURE )N THESE CASES THE ) STAGES BECOMES VALID EVEN IF THE TEMPERATURE RISE HAS NOT YET REACHED THE
BEFORE RECLOSURE ALARM OR TRIP TEMPERATURE RISE VALUES
# ' #

%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN SYSTEMS WITH NON EARTHED STARPOINT

OPTIONAL
)N SYSTEMS WHOSE STARPOINT IS EITHER ISOLATED OR &AULT DETECTION
EARTHED THROUGH AN ARC SUPPRESSION COIL 0ETERSEN
COIL SINGLE PHASE EARTH FAULTS WILL NOT BE DETECTED BY 4HE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FUNCTION CAN BE SWITCHED
THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION SINCE NO SIGNIFICANT EARTH ON AND OFF BY PARAMETER 7HEN ON PICK UP OCCURS
FAULT CURRENT FLOWS &URTHERMORE SINCE NETWORK OPER WHEN AN ADJUSTABLE THRESHOLD FOR THE DISPLACEMENT
ATION IS NOT IMMEDIATELY AFFECTED BY AN EARTH FAULT VOLTAGE 5% IS EXCEEDED 4O ENSURE MEASUREMENT
THE VOLTAGE TRIANGLE IS MAINTAINED &IGURE RAP OF STABLE VALUES ALL EARTH FAULT DETECTION FUNCTIONS
ID DISCONNECTION IS NOT NORMALLY DESIRED )T IS MORE ARE DELAYED UNTIL SECOND SETTABLE AFTER INCEPTION
IMPORTANT THAT THE EARTH FAULT BE RECOGNIZED INDI OF VOLTAGE DISPLACEMENT &URTHER EACH ALTERATION OF
CATED AND WHEN POSSIBLE LOCATED !FTER SWITCHING THE EARTH FAULT CONDITIONS EG ALTERED DIRECTION IS
TO ALTERNATIVE NETWORK ROUTES IT CAN THEN BE CLEARED RECOGNIZED ONLY AFTER THIS DELAY %ARTH FAULT ANNUNCI
"UT IT IS POSSIBLE TO TRIP ON DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT IN ATION IS ONLY ISSUED AFTER EARTH FAULT DETECTION IS EN
NON EARTHED SYSTEMS SURED ACCORDING
5,
$ETERMINATION OF THE EARTH

FAULTED PHASE
%
!FTER RECOGNITION OF DISPLACED VOLTAGE CONDITIONS THE
FIRST OBJECTIVE OF THE DEVICE IS SELECTIVE DETECTION OF
5, 5, THE EARTH FAULTED PHASE &OR THIS PURPOSE THE INDI
VIDUAL PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGES ARE MEASURED 4HE
A (EALTHY NETWORK WITHOUT EARTH FAULT AFFECTED PHASE IS THE ONE IN WHICH THE VOLTAGE IS BE
5,
LOW THE SETTABLE THRESHOLD 5PH WHEN SIMULTA
% NEOUSLY THE OTHER TWO VOLTAGES EXCEED AN EQUALLY
SETTABLE MAXIMUM THRESHOLD 5PH
5
5, 5,
3ENSITIVE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL

DETERMINATION
B %ARTH FAULT IN PHASE , 4HE DIRECTION OF THE EARTH FAULT CAN BE DETERMINED
FROM THE DIRECTION OF THE EARTH FAULT CAPACITIVE OR
&IGURE %ARTH FAULT IN NON EARTHED NEUTRAL OHMIC CURRENT RELATED TO THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE
NETWORK 4HE ONLY RESERVATION IS THAT THE ACTIVE OR REACTIVE CUR
RENT COMPONENTS MUST BE AVAILABLE IN SUFFICIENT
MAGNITUDE AT THE POINT OF MEASUREMENT
$EPENDENT UPON THE CHOSEN MODEL THE RELAY CAN
BE FITTED WITH OPTIONAL EARTH FAULT DETECTION MODULE )N NETWORKS WITH ISOLATED STARPOINT THE EARTH FAULT
WHICH INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS CURRENT FLOWS AS CAPACITIVE CURRENT FROM THE HEALTHY
LINES VIA THE MEASURING POINT TO THE POINT OF FAULT 4HIS
$ETECTION OF AN EARTH FAULT PICK UP BY MONITOR CAPACITIVE CURRENT DETERMINES THE DIRECTION
ING THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE
)N NETWORKS WITH ARC SUPPRESSION COILS THE 0ETERSEN
$ETERMINATION OF THE FAULTED PHASE BY MEASURING COIL SUPERIMPOSES A CORRESPONDING INDUCTIVE CUR
THE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGES RENT ON THE CAPACITIVE EARTH FAULT CURRENT WHEN AN
EARTH FAULT OCCURS SO THAT THE CAPACITIVE CURRENT AT
$ETERMINATION OF THE DIRECTION OF THE EARTH FAULT THE POINT OF FAULT IS COMPENSATED $EPENDENT UPON
RESIDUAL CURRENT BY HIGH ACCURACY REAL AND REAC THE POINT OF MEASUREMENT IN THE NETWORK THE RESUL
TIVE COMPONENT MEASUREMENT TANT MEASURED CURRENT CAN HOWEVER BE INDUCTIVE OR
# ' #

CAPACITIVE AND THE REACTIVE CURRENT IS THEREFORE NOT 2EACTIVE POWER

SUITABLE FOR THE DETERMINATION OF DIRECTION )N THIS T4
CASE ONLY THE OHMIC RESIDUAL CURRENT WHICH RESULTS 0 %R U % T I % T DT
FROM THE LOSSES OF THE 0ETERSEN COIL CAN BE USED FOR 4
T
DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION 4HIS EARTH FAULT OHMIC CUR
RENT IS ONLY A FEW PERCENT OF THE CAPACITIVE EARTH FAULT WHERE 4 EQUALS PERIOD OF INTEGRATION
CURRENT
4HE USE OF AN EFFICIENT CALCULATION ALGORITHM AND SI
)N 3! THE EARTH FAULT DIRECTION IS DETERMINED MULTANEOUS NUMERICAL FILTERING ALLOWS THE DIRECTIONAL
FROM A HIGHLY ACCURATE CALCULATION OF ACTIVE AND REAC DETERMINATION TO BE ACHIEVED WITH HIGH ACCURACY
TIVE POWER USING THE DEFINITIONS AND SHARPLY DEFINED THRESHOLD LIMITS SEE &IGURE
AND INSENSITIVITY TO HARMONIC INFLUENCES PAR
!CTIVE POWER TICULARLY THE FREQUENTLY STRONG THIRD AND FIFTH HARMON
T4
ICS WHICH OCCUR PARTICULARLY IN OHMIC EARTH FAULT CUR
0 %A U % T I % T DT RENTS 4HE DIRECTIONAL DECISION RESULTS FROM THE SIGNS
4
T OF ACTIVE AND REACTIVE POWER
)%A ACTIVE COMPONENT
M!

M!
2EVERSE &ORWARDS &ORWARDS 2EVERSE
M!
)% LEADING )% LAGGING
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
&IGURE $IRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT MEASUREMENT CHARACTERISTIC
3INCE THE ACTIVE AND REACTIVE COMPONENT OF THE CUR )N NETWORKS WITH ISOLATED STARPOINT THE FOLLOWING CRI
RENT NOT THE POWER DETERMINE PICK UP OF THE TERIA APPLY
EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL DECISION THESE CURRENT COM
PONENTS ARE CALCULATED FROM THE POWER COMPO EARTH FAULT FORWARDS WHEN 0%R AND )%R SET
NENTS 4HUS FOR DETERMINATION OF THE DIRECTION OF THE VALUE
EARTH FAULT ACTIVE AND REACTIVE COMPONENTS OF THE
EARTH FAULT CURRENT AS WELL AS THE DIRECTION OF THE AC EARTH FAULT BACKWARDS WHEN 0%R AND )%R SET
TIVE AND REACTIVE POWER ARE EVALUATED VALUE
# ' #

)N COMPENSATED NETWORKS WITH ARC SUPPRESSION ING POINT ON THE FAULTED LINE IN AN ISOLATED NETWORK
COIL THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA APPLY SEES ALMOST THE ENTIRE PROSPECTIVE EARTH FAULT CURRENT
OF THE NETWORK IN COMPENSATED NETWORKS THE WATT
EARTH FAULT FORWARDS WHEN 0%A AND )%A SET METRIC RESIDUAL CURRENT FROM THE 0ETERSEN COIL FLOWS
VALUE THROUGH THE MEASURING POINT &OR THE FAULTED LINE OR
CABLE A DEFINITE FORWARDS DECISION WILL RESULT
EARTH FAULT BACKWARDS WHEN 0%A AND )%A SET WHILST IN THE REMAINING CIRCUITS A REVERSE INDICATION
VALUE WILL BE GIVEN UNLESS THE EARTH CURRENT IS SO SMALL THAT
NO MEASUREMENT CAN BE TAKEN )N ANY CASE THE
)N THE LATTER CASE IT MUST BE NOTED THAT DEPENDENT FAULTED CABLE CAN BE CLEARLY DETERMINED
UPON THE LOCATION OF THE PROTECTIVE RELAY A CONSIDER
ABLE REACTIVE COMPONENT MAY BE SUPERIMPOSED
WHICH IN THE MOST UNFAVOURABLE CASES CAN ATTAIN
TIMES THE ACTIVE COMPONENT %VEN THE EXTREMELY
HIGH ACCURACY OF THE CALCULATION ALGORITHM IS THEN IN
ADEQUATE IF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS DO NOT EXACTLY
CONVERT THE PRIMARY VALUES
4HE MEASUREMENT INPUT CIRCUIT OF THE RELAY MODEL

WITH EARTH FAULT DETECTION IS PARTICULARLY DESIGNED FOR
THIS PURPOSE AND PERMITS AN EXTREMELY HIGH SENSITIV
ITY FOR THE DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION OF THE WATTMETRIC
RESIDUAL CURRENT )N ORDER TO UTILIZE THIS SENSITIVITY IT IS
RECOMMENDED THAT WINDOW TYPE CURRENT TRANS &IGURE &AULTED LINE LOCATION IN RADIAL NET
FORMERS BE USED FOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN COMPEN WORK
SATED NETWORKS !S EVEN THE CORE BALANCE TRANS
FORMERS HAVE AN ANGLE OF ERROR THE PROTECTION SYS )N MESHED OR RING NETWORKS THE MEASURING POINTS AT
TEM ALLOWS THE SETTING OF FACTORS WHICH DEPENDENT THE ENDS OF THE FAULTED CABLE EQUALLY SEE A MAXIMUM
UPON THE REACTIVE CURRENT WILL CORRECT THE ERROR OF EARTH FAULT CAPACITIVE OR OHMIC CURRENT /NLY IN
ANGLE THIS CABLE WILL THE DIRECTION FORWARDS BE INDICATED
ON BOTH LINE ENDS &IGURE %VEN THE REMAINING
DIRECTIONAL INDICATIONS IN THE NETWORK CAN AID LOCA
TION OF THE EARTH FAULT "UT UNDER CERTAIN CIRCUM
&AULTED LINE LOCATION STANCES ONE OR MORE INDICATIONS MAY NOT BE GIVEN
DUE TO INSUFFICIENT EARTH CURRENT &URTHER ADVICE CAN
)N RADIAL NETWORKS LOCATION OF THE FAULTED LINE IS RELA BE FOUND IN THE LEAFLET %ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN ISO
TIVELY SIMPLE 3INCE ALL CIRCUITS ON A BUSBAR &IGURE LATED NEUTRAL OR ARC SUPPRESSION COIL EARTHED HIGH
CARRY A CAPACITIVE PARTIAL CURRENT THE MEASUR VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
&IGURE ,OCATION OF EARTH FAULT BASED ON THE DIRECTIONAL INDICATORS IN A MESHED NETWORK
# ' #

(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL
)N EARTHED NETWORKS IN WHICH THE EARTH PATH RESIS $IRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
TANCE CAN BE EXTREMELY HIGH EG OVERHEAD LINES
WITHOUT LIGHTNING PROTECTION CONDUCTOR OR SANDY 4HE DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION &IGURE
SOILS THE OVERCURRENT SOMETIMES EVEN THE UN HAS AN ADJUSTABLE EARTH CURRENT DETECTION ELEMENT
DER IMPEDANCE ELEMENT WILL OFTEN NOT PICK UP SO )% AND AN ADJUSTABLE DELAY TIME "ECAUSE OF THE
THAT NO PHASE SELECTION IS POSSIBLE FOR THE DISTANCE POSSIBILITY OF DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON SEE 3ECTION
MEASUREMENT %VEN WHEN USING IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION IS TWO STAGE A LOWER VALUE
DETECTION EARTH FAULT IMPEDANCES CAN OCCUR WHICH )% RELEASES DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION &OR TRIP
APPEAR TO LIE OUTSIDE THE PICK UP CHARACTERISTIC OF PING THE HIGH VALUE STAGE MUST ADDITIONALLY BE EX
THE DISTANCE RELAY CEEDED CORRESPONDING TO THE SET VALUE OF )%
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 3! DEPENDENT UPON THE $IRECTIONAL DETERMINATION REQUIRES A LEAST VALUE DIS
MODEL ORDERED SEE 3ECTION /RDERING DATA CAN PLACEMENT VOLTAGE FOR WHICH THE 5% SETTING IS
PROVIDE PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS FOR SUCH HIGH RESISTANCE USED )F THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE IS TOO SMALL A DI
EARTH FAULTS /NE OF THE FOLLOWING FEATURES CAN THEN RECTIONAL DETERMINATION AND THUS DIRECTIONAL DE
BE SELECTED PENDENT TRIPPING IS NOT POSSIBLE $IRECTIONAL DETER
MINATION IS ALSO SUPPRESSED AND TRIPPING PREVENTED
DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DEFINITE TIME WHEN THE INDICATION VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER PROTECTIVE
EARTH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION WITH NON DIRECTION DEVICE TRIPPED IS SIGNALLED TO THE RELAY VIA A BINARY
AL BACK UP AND STAND BY PROTECTION FUNCTION INPUT
NON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE TIME LAG OVERCURRENT TIME 4HE CRITERION FOR THE DELAY TIME IS THE SETTING 4 $)
PROTECTION FOR EARTH FAULTS WITH SELECTABLE CHARAC 2%#4
TERISTICS
! FURTHER TIME STAGE 4 ./. $)2 WILL CAUSE TRIPPING
4HE DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION CAN BE EX WITHOUT DIRECTIONAL MEASUREMENT )T CAN BE SET AS A
TENDED BY AN INTEGRATED DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON LOG NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE FOR THE DIRECTIONAL
IC SO THAT BY MEANS OF A CARRIER CHANNEL FAST AND SE STAGE )F THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE IS TOO SMALL OR IF
LECTIVE TRIPPING FOR HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULTS IS ALSO THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER PROTECTIVE DEVICE HAS OPER
POSSIBLE ATED THIS STAGE REMAINS EFFECTIVE AND CAN ALSO SERVE
AS AN EMERGENCY FUNCTION FOR THE DIRECTIONAL EARTH
4HE NON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE TIME PROTECTION IS USED FAULT PROTECTION AND THE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL COM
MOSTLY FOR HIGHLY INTERLINKED ALL ROUND EARTHED NET PARISON PROTECTION
WORKS WITH HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULTS WHERE THE
ENDS OF THE FAULTY LINE SECTION CARRY THE LARGEST FAULT 4HE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL FUNCTION IS BLOCKED FROM
CURRENT AND THUS PRODUCE THE SHORTEST TRIPPING TIME THE DISTANCE PROTECTION OR EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT
PROTECTION 7HEN THE FAULT IS DETECTED BY THE DIS
TANCE PROTECTION OR EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME
PROTECTION THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DOES NOT OPER
5% $IREC ATE 4HIS GIVES SELECTIVE FAULT DETERMINATION BY THE
TION
DISTANCE PROTECTION PREFERENCE OVER TRIPPING BY THE
EARTH FAULT PROTECTION !DDITIONALLY THE EARTH FAULT DI
RECTIONAL PROTECTION IS BLOCKED DURING A SINGLE POLE
AUTO RECLOSE CYCLE TO PREVENT FROM ERRONEOUS MEA
)% 4$)2%#4

SUREMENT WITH THE ZERO SEQUENCE QUANTITIES WHICH
ARE NOW PRESENT )N CASE A FAULT IS CLEARED BY AN EX
4RIP TERNAL PROTECTION DEVICE BLOCKING OF THE EARTH FAULT
)% 4./. PROTECTION CAN BE EXTENDED BY AN ADJUSTABLE TIME
$)2 4 ",/#+ TO ALLOW A SINGLE PHASE AUTO RECLOSING
CYCLE TO BE CARRIED OUT
&IGURE $IRECTIONAL EARTH PROTECTION WITH

NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE
# ' #

$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
7ITH THE AID OF THE INTEGRATED COMPARISON LOGIC THE MEANS OF A TRANSIENT BLOCKING FUNCTION &IGURE
DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION CAN BE EXTENDED TO 4HE PRINCIPLE OF THIS TRANSIENT BLOCKING IS THAT AFTER
FORM A DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON PROTECTION &OR THIS THE OCCURRENCE OF AN EXTERNAL FAULT THE FORMATION OF A
PURPOSE A CARRIER CHANNEL IS NECESSARY FOR EACH DI RELEASE SIGNAL IS PREVENTED FOR A SPECIFIC ADJUSTABLE
RECTION WHICH TRANSMITS THE SIGNALS OF THE DIRECTIONAL TIME 4 42!.3",/
EARTH FAULT PROTECTION EG VIA 0,# TO THE ASSO
CIATED OTHER LINE END 4HIS CAN ALSO BE THE SAME )F AFTER FAULT DETECTION IT IS DETERMINED THAT THE FAULT IS
CHANNEL AS FOR SIGNAL TRANSMISSION WITH DISTANCE PRO IN THE REVERSE DIRECTION OPPOSITE TO THE SET DIRECTION
TECTION 3ECTION UNDER THE CONDITION THAT A COR THE TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT AND RELEASE ARE SUPPRESSED
RESPONDING COMPARISON PROCEDURE 0ERMIS AFTER A WAITING TIME OF MS 4HIS BLOCKING WILL BE
SIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP WITH :" OR $IREC MAINTAINED FOR THE TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME 4
TIONAL COMPARISON HAS BEEN SELECTED AT THE DIS 42!.3",/ IN &IGURE ABBREVIATED TO 4"
TANCE PROTECTION ELEMENT EVEN AFTER THE BLOCKING CRITERION IS REMOVED
!FTER THE PICK UP )% THE RELAY CARRIES OUT DI 3IMILARLY THE RELEASE OF DIRECTIONAL TRIP CAN BE RE
RECTIONAL DETERMINATION USING THE EARTH CURRENT )% STRICTED WHEN AFTER FAULT DETECTION NO RELEASE SIGNAL
| ) AND THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5% o | 5 IS RECEIVED FROM THE OPPOSITE LINE END WITHIN THE SET
7ITH AN EARTH FAULT IN THE LINE DIRECTION A RELEASE SIG TABLE WAITING TIME 47 4HIS BLOCKING WILL ALSO BE EX
NAL IS SENT TO THE OPPOSITE END IF A RELEASE SIGNAL IS TENDED BY THE TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME .ORMALLY THIS
THEN RECEIVED FROM THAT END TRIPPING RESULTS AS LONG MODE OF TRANSIENT BLOCKING IS NECESSARY ONLY WHEN
AS THIS RELAY HAS ALSO DETECTED AN EARTH FAULT IN THE THE PROTECTION SCHEME AT THE REMOTE LINE END HAS NO
LINE DIRECTION AND THE SET PICK UP VALUE )% IS EX TRANSIENT BLOCKING FEATURE 4RANSIENT BLOCKING IS SUP
CEEDED &IGURE 4RANSMISSION SIGNAL AND TRIP PRESSED WHEN THE WAITING TIME 47 IS SET TO INFINITY
PING CAN BOTH BE MADE DEPENDENT ON A DELAY TIME
4 $%,!9 &OR LINES WITH SINGLE END INFEED OR STAR POINT EARTHING
AT ONE LINE END ONLY NO RELEASE CAN BE FORMED FROM
$ELAY BY 4 $%,!9 CAN BE APPROPRIATE WHEN AN EX THE RESIDUAL CURRENT FREE LINE SINCE NO FAULT DETEC
TERNAL PROTECTION RELAY SHALL OPERATE IN CONJUNCTION TION SIGNAL OCCURS AT THAT END 4O ACHIEVE TRIPPING BY
WITH SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE 3INCE THE EARTH THE DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON ELEMENT EVEN IN THIS
FAULT DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON DOES NOT SUPPLY ANY IN CASE AN ECHO FUNCTION IS ADDITIONALLY AVAILABLE &IG
FORMATION ABOUT THE FAULTED PHASES IT CAN ONLY INITI URE 4HIS HAS THE EFFECT THAT WHEN THE LOW VALUE
ATE THREE PHASE AUTO RECLOSE DETECTION SIGNAL IS NOT PRESENT AT ONE LINE END
)% THE RECEIVED SIGNAL WILL BE SENT BACK TO THE
!NY FAULTY SIGNALS WHICH COULD BE CAUSED BY TRAN OTHER LINE END AS AN ECHO AND THUS PERMITS THE RE
SIENT OSCILLATIONS DURING THE CLEARANCE OF EXTERNAL LEASE OF A TRIPPING COMMAND AT THAT END 4HE DURA
FAULTS OR DURING CHANGE OF DIRECTION AFTER CLEARANCE TION OF THIS ECHO IMPULSE IS ADJUSTABLE 4 %#(/
OF FAULTS ON PARALLEL LINES ARE MADE HARMLESS BY )-0
&ORW &ORW
5% 4 4 5%
DIREC DIREC

4RIP 4RIP
)% 4
$%,!9
4
$%,!9
)%
)% 2 2 )%
&IGURE %ARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON PROTECTION
# ' #

BEEN PRESENT 23 MEMORY IN &IGURE &OR THE

SAME REASON NO ECHO IS PERMITTED FOR AN ADJUSTABLE
$IREC 4" "LOCKING OF TIME 4 %#(/ ",/ AFTER A TRIPPING COMMAND HAS
TION BEEN ISSUED
TRANSMISSION
AND TRIP
)NDEPENDENT OF THE RESULT OF THE DIRECTIONAL COMPARI

SON THE DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT STAGE DESCRIBED IN
)% SECTION IS EFFECTIVE WITH THE TIME 4 $)2%#4
AND THE NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE WITH THE
2ECEP

47 4" "LOCKING
TIME 4 ./. $)2 )F ONE OF THESE STAGES IS NOT RE
TION OF TRIP QUIRED THE CORRESPONDING TIME MUST BE SET TO INFIN
ITY
4HE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON PROTECTION

&IGURE 4RANSIENT "LOCKING FUNCTION IS BLOCKED FROM THE DISTANCE PROTECTION OR
EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 4HEREFORE IF A
FAULT IS RECOGNIZED BY THE DISTANCE PROTECTION OR
4HE ECHO IS DELAYED BY AN ADJUSTABLE TIME EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION THEN THE
4 %#(/ $%, 4HIS DELAY IS NECESSARY SO THAT EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DOES NOT OPERATE 4HIS GIVES
THE ECHO WILL NOT BE EFFECTIVE WHEN THE PROTECTION AT SELECTIVE FAULT EVALUATION BY THE DISTANCE PROTECTION
ONE LINE END HAS A HIGHER FAULT DETECTION TIME OR IF IT PREFERENCE OVER TRIPPING VIA THE EARTH FAULT PROTEC
PICKS UP SOMEWHAT LATER DUE TO UNFAVOURABLE EARTH TION !DDITIONALLY THE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL COMPARI
CURRENT DISTRIBUTION )F HOWEVER THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AT SON PROTECTION IS BLOCKED DURING A SINGLE POLE AU
THE NON INFEED LINE END IS OPEN THE DELAY OF THE TO RECLOSE CYCLE TO PREVENT FROM ERRONEOUS MEA
ECHO IS NOT NECESSARY 4HE ECHO DELAY TIME CAN THEN SUREMENT WITH THE ZERO SEQUENCE QUANTITIES WHICH
BE BY PASSED IF THE RELAY IS INFORMED OF THE POSITION ARE NOW PRESENT )N CASE A FAULT IS CLEARED BY AN EX
OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER THROUGH A BINARY INPUT TERNAL PROTECTION DEVICE BLOCKING OF THE EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION CAN BE EXTENDED BY AN ADJUSTABLE TIME
4O PREVENT THE FORMATION OF AN ECHO AFTER CLEARANCE 4 ",/#+ TO ALLOW A SINGLE PHASE AUTO RECLOSING
OF THE LINE AND RESET OF THE FAULT DETECTION ELEMENTS CYCLE TO BE CARRIED OUT
AN ECHO IS NOT FORMED WHEN A PICK UP HAS ALREADY
#OMPARISON LOGIC
2

3 1
2E
CEPT
4
4
3END
)% %#(/ %#(/
$%, )-0
4RIP 4
SIG %#(/
NAL ",/#
#"

OPEN
&IGURE "LOCK DIAGRAM OF ECHO FUNCTION FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON
# ' #

)NVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION FOR EARTH FAULTS
4HE INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS THE FAULTY LINE SECTION THE INVERSE CHARACTERISTIC HAS
NON DIRECTIONAL )T CAN BE USED INSTEAD OF THE DIREC THE EFFECT THAT HERE THE SHORTEST RESPONSE TIME OC
TIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION CURS AND THE REMAINING RELAYS RESET
OR 4HE REQUIRED CHARACTERISTICS CAN BE
CHOSEN FROM THE THREE WHICH ARE AVAILABLE 4HE RANGE OF DEFINITION OF THE CHARACTERISTICS GOES
FURTHER THAN THAT OF THE )%# STANDARDS 4HEY ARE DE
NORMAL INVERSE TYPE ! )%# "3 FINED FROM ABOVE THE SET VALUE UP TO TIMES
THE SET VALUE "EYOND THAT POINT NO FURTHER REDUCTION
VERY INVERSE TYPE " )%# OF THE TRIPPING TIME OCCURS
EXTREMELY INVERSE TYPE # )%# 4HE EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION FUNCTION
IS BLOCKED FROM THE DISTANCE PROTECTION OR EMERGEN
4HE SHAPE OF THE CHARACTERISTICS AND THE FORMULAE ON CY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 4HEREFORE IF A FAULT IS REC
WHICH THEY ARE BASED ARE GIVEN IN THE 4ECHNICAL DATA OGNIZED BY THE DISTANCE PROTECTION OR EMERGENCY
3ECTION &IGURE OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION THEN THE EARTH FAULT PRO
TECTION DOES NOT OPERATE 4HIS GIVES SELECTIVE FAULT
4RIPPING TIME IS THEN DEPENDENT ON THE LEVEL OF CUR EVALUATION BY THE DISTANCE PROTECTION PREFERENCE
RENT )F THIS VALUE CHANGES DURING THE FAULT THE TRIP OVER TRIPPING VIA THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION !DDITION
PING TIME WILL BE DETERMINED STRICTLY IN ACCORDANCE ALLY THE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON PROTECTION
WITH THE CHANGING CURRENT VALUE 4HIS IS ACHIEVED BY IS BLOCKED DURING A SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSE CYCLE
AN INTEGRATING PROCESS SIMILAR TO THAT OF CONVENTIONAL TO PREVENT FROM ERRONEOUS PICK UP ON THE ZERO SE
INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION RELAYS 4HUS THE QUENCE CURRENT WHICH MAY NOW BE PRESENT )N CASE
GRADING PLAN CAN EASILY BE COORDINATED WITH INVERSE A FAULT IS CLEARED BY AN EXTERNAL PROTECTION DEVICE
TIME OVERCURRENT RELAYS OF CONVENTIONAL CONSTRUC BLOCKING OF THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION CAN BE EX
TION )N STRONGLY MESHED ALL ROUND EARTHED NET TENDED BY AN ADJUSTABLE TIME 4 ",/#+ TO ALLOW A
WORKS THE LARGEST FAULT CURRENTS FLOW AT THE ENDS OF SINGLE PHASE AUTO RECLOSING CYCLE TO BE CARRIED OUT
# ' #

!UTOMATIC RECLOSURE OPTIONAL
%XPERIENCE HAS SHOWN THAT APPROXIMATELY OF MULTI PHASE FAULTS IN THREE POLE
SHORT CIRCUITS ARE CAUSED BY AN ARC ON OVERHEAD FINAL DISCONNECTION /PTIONALLY
LINES AND SELF EXTINGUISH AFTER INTERRUPTION BY THE SINGLE POLE !2 IS POSSIBLE AFTER
PROTECTIVE DEVICE 4HE LINE CAN THEREFORE BE RE EN TWO PHASE FAULTS WITHOUT EARTH
ERGIZED 4HIS IS CARRIED OUT BY THE AUTOMATIC RECLO CONNECTION
SURE !2 FUNCTION &IGURE SHOWS AN EXAMPLE
FOR THE TIME SEQUENCE OF SUCH AN AUTO RECLOSE 2!2 02/' 3).',%4(2%% 0/,E IE SIN
CYCLE GLE PHASE FAULT OR TWO PHASE
WITHOUT EARTH RESULT IN SINGLE PO
)F THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POLES CAN BE TRIPPED INDIVIDUAL LE !2 MULTI PHASE FAULTS IN
LY THEN !2 IS OFTEN CARRIED OUT SINGLE POLE FOR SING THREE POLE !2
LE PHASE FAULTS AND THREE POLE FOR MULTI PHASE
FAULTS IN NETWORKS WITH EARTHED STARPOINT )F THE SHORT )F MORE THAN ONE RECLOSE ATTEMPT WILL BE CARRIED OUT
CIRCUIT IS STILL PRESENT AFTER THE AUTO RECLOSURE ARC THE SECOND AND ANY FURTHER AUTO RECLOSE CYCLE ARE
NOT QUENCHED OR METALLIC SHORT CIRCUIT THEN THE PRO DESIGNATED IN THE FOLLOWING WITH $!2 DELAYED
TECTIVE RELAY FINALLY DISCONNECTS THE POWER -ULTIPLE AUTO RECLOSURE INDEPENDENT ON THE SETTING OF THE
AUTO RECLOSURE ATTEMPTS OFTEN WITH A FIRST RAPID DEAD TIMES OF THE CYCLES )T IS POSSIBLE TO SKIP THE
AUTO RECLOSURE 2!2 AND SUBSEQUENT DELAYED 2!2 CYCLE SO THAT ONLY $!2 CYCLES OCCUR $!2
AUTO RECLOSE CYCLES $!2 ARE POSSIBLE IN SOME CYCLES ARE ALWAYS THREE POLE &OR THE $!2 FUNC
NETWORKS TION THE FOLLOWING PROGRAMS ARE SELECTABLE
4HE STRINGENT LOOP DETERMINATION OF 3! SEE $!2 02/' ./ $!2 IE NO $!2 OCCURS UN
3ECTION ALLOWS RELIABLY SINGLE POLE AUTO RE SUCCESSFUL 2!2 RESULTS IN FINAL TRIP
CLOSURE 4HE 3! ALSO ALLOWS AUTOMATIC SINGLE
AND THREE POLE AS WELL AS SINGLE AND MULTI SHOT $!2 02/' $!2 7)4(/54 2!2 IE $!2 CY
RECLOSURE IF THE !2 FUNCTION IS ACCORDINGLY ORDERED CLES CAN BE CARRIED OUT EVEN WI
REFER 3ECTION /RDERING DATA THOUT A PRECEDING 2!2 CYCLE EG
2!2 IS BY PASSED BECAUSE BLOK
3! CAN ALSO WORK IN CONJUNCTION WITH AN EXTER KED
NAL AUTO RECLOSE SYSTEM )N THIS CASE THE SIGNAL EX
CHANGE BETWEEN 3! AND THE EXTERNAL !2 UNIT $!2 02/' $!2 !&4%2 2!2 IE THE $!2 CY
MUST BE ACCOMPLISHED VIA THE BINARY INPUTS AND OUT CLES CAN ONLY BE INITIATED AFTER AN
PUTS SEE 3ECTION UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2
&URTHERMORE IT IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO ALLOW THE INTERNAL 4HE POSSIBILITIES AND FUNCTIONS OF THE INTERNAL !2
!2 FUNCTION TO BE TRIGGERED FROM AN EXTERNAL PRO UNIT ARE DESCRIBED IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS 0REREQ
TECTION RELAY EG BACK UP RELAY SEE 3ECTION UISITE FOR INITIATION OF THE !2 FUNCTION IS ALWAYS THAT
4HE USE OF TWO 3! WITH INTERNAL !2 THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS READY FOR OPERATION WHEN THE
FUNCTION IS ALSO POSSIBLE AS WELL AS THE USE OF ONE !2 FUNCTION IS ACTIVATED 4HIS INFORMATION HAS TO BE
3! WITH !2 FUNCTION AND A SECOND PROTECTION TRANSMITTED TO THE DEVICE VIA A BINARY INPUT
RELAY WITH SEPARATE !2 UNIT EXAMPLE SEE 3ECTION
&URTHERMORE RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED IF THE TRIPPING
COMMAND OCCURS AFTER THE ACTION TIME WHICH CAN BE
4HE POSSIBLE PROGRAMS OF THE INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION SET INDIVIDUALLY FOR 2!2 AND $!2 !DDITIONALLY THE
FOR THE FIRST !2 CYCLE DESIGNATED IN THE FOLLOWING AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION IS NOT READY WHEN AT THE
WITH 2!2 RAPID AUTO RECLOSURE ARE MOMENT OF INITIATION THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS AN
NOUNCED VIA A BINARY INPUT TO BE OPEN 4HIS PRE
2!2 02/' 4(2%% 0/,% IE ALL TYPES OF VENTS FROM AN ACCIDENTAL CLOSE COMMAND SHOULD
FAULTS RESULT IN THREE POLE !2 THE AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION RECEIVE AN ERRONEOUS
TRIP COMMAND FOR ANY REASON EG VIA A BINARY IN
2!2 02/' 3).',% 0/,% IE SINGLE PHA PUT EVEN THOUGH THE BREAKER IS OPEN AND THE LINE
SE FAULTS RESULT IN SINGLE POLE !2 MAY BE DEAD
# ' #

- E
) M
! IT
,
% # IM
3 % A
2 L
/ C
, E
# 4 2
E
M R ,
IT E /
H
TR 0
D
A U
E F
D D 4
D N 2
N A
!
$

4
#
!
4
2
!
$
,
/
0
, ,
/ /
0 0 4
E 2
M !
IT 4 4 2
,
D 2 2 2
/
A ! ! # 0
E 2 2 3
)
D
T E E $
L L 4
S O O
P P 4 2 D
! TE
2 IT

O M
T R
R E
E P
4 V
# 2
O !
! G E
L
4 IN O
H P
2 C
TI
!
2 W
E 3 IF
M
IT
N
IO
T
E
C E A M
IT
TE M
IT N
I
E E
D S N M
IR IM
LT O
L A
L
C IO
T C C
U P
A RI E C IS E
& 4 2 ! $ 2
&IGURE 3! $IAGRAM OF RECLOSURE SEQUENCE
# ' #

3ELECTIVITY DURING AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE
&OR THE AUTO RECLOSURE SEQUENCE TO BE SUCCESSFUL )F THE DISTANCE PROTECTION IS OPERATED WITH ONE OF THE
FAULTS ON ANY PART OF THE LINE MUST BE CLEARED FROM CARRIER SIGNAL TELEPROTECTION SYSTEMS DESCRIBED IN
BOTH LINE ENDS WITHIN THE SAME SHORTEST POSSI 3ECTION THE OVERREACH ZONE IS CONTROLLED BY THE
BLE TIME 5SUALLY THEREFORE AN INSTANTANEOUS UNIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE IE THE INTERFACE
STAGE OF THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS SET TO OPERATE DETERMINES IF AN UNDELAYED TRIP OR WITH 4" IS PER
BEFORE A RECLOSURE BY THE !2 UNIT 4HEREFORE THE MITTED FOR FAULTS IN THE OVERREACH ZONE IE TO THE LIMIT
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION FUNCTION OF 3! WHICH OF ZONE :" AND THUS IF TRIPPING IS SIMULTANEOUS AT
CAN INITIATE THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTIONS PROVIDE A BOTH LINE ENDS 7HETHER THE !2 FUNCTION IS READY FOR
SPECIAL 2!2 STAGE &URTHERMORE ONE CAN DECIDE FOR OPERATION OR NOT IS IRRELEVANT IN THIS CASE SINCE THE
EACH SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION WHETHER OR NOT IT SHALL TRANSMISSION SYSTEM GUARANTEES SELECTIVITY OVER
INITIATE THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION OF THE LINE LENGTH AND FAST SIMULTANEOUS DISCON
NECTION 3IMILAR APPLIES FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON
7ITH DISTANCE PROTECTION THE FIRST !2 CYCLE IN THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION REFER 3ECTION
FOLLOWING CALLED 2!2 ALLOWS FAULTS IN THE OVERREACH
ZONE :" TO BE CLEARED INSTANTANEOUSLY HOWEVER (OWEVER IF THE UNIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION IS SWITCHED
THIS CAN BE CHANGED WHEN SETTING THE RELAY &OR POS OFF OR IF THE CARRIER DEVICE IS FAULTY THEN THE !2 FUNC
SIBLE FURTHER CYCLES IN THE FOLLOWING CALLED $!2 A TION DETERMINES WHICH STAGE : OR :" IS DECISIVE
SEPARATE ZONE :, WITH A SEPARATE TIME STAGE 4, FOR FAST TRIPPING )F NO AUTO RECLOSURE IS AVAILABLE FOR
BECOMES EFFECTIVE EXAMPLE CIRCUIT BREAKER NOT READY FOR OPERATION
THEN THE NORMAL GRADING OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION
4HE NORMAL DISTANCE ZONES : : : AND THE DIREC MUST BE VALID IE INSTANTANEOUS TRIPPING ONLY FOR
TIONAL AND NON DIRECTIONAL END STAGES OF THE DIS FAULTS WITHIN STAGE : IN ORDER TO MAINTAIN SELECTIVITY
TANCE PROTECTION ARE INDEPENDENT OF THE AUTOMATIC &IGURE
RECLOSE FUNCTION 4HIS MUST BE CONSIDERED WHEN A
FAULT SHALL BE CLEARED AFTER A TIME DELAY FOR SELECTIVITY )T IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO BLOCK THE !2 FUNCTION IF THE
REASONS WHEN NO AUTO RECLOSE WILL OCCUR 4HUS IT IS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM IS NOT WORKING
NOT REASONABLE TO SET A SHORTER TIME DELAY FOR NORMAL
DISTANCE ZONES THAN FOR THE 2!2 OVERREACH ZONE
:"
:
: :"
:ONE REACH UNTIL THE END OF THE FIRST DEAD TIME :" RELEASE
:
: :"
:ONE REACH AFTER THE FIRST DEAD TIME UNTIL EXPIRY OF RECLAIM TIME :" BLOCKED
&IGURE :ONE REACH CONTROL WITH THE !2 FUNCTION
# ' #

3! PROVIDES A SELECTION PROCEDURE WHICH CAN !DDITIONALLY DIFFERENT DEAD TIMES CAN BE SET AT BOTH
IMPROVE SELECTIVITY DURING SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLO LINE ENDS SO THAT ONE END EG AT THE LOCATION ) IS
SURE IN THOSE CASES WHERE NO TELEPROTECTION MODE IS RECLOSED AT FIRST )F RECLOSURE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFUL
AVAILABLE OR USED 5 PROCESSING PARAMETER THEN THE HEALTHY VOLTAGE IS PRESENT ALSO AT THE OTHER
! PREREQUISITE IS THAT THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ARE IN LINE END )) SO THAT THE ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE IS VERY
STALLED AT THE LINE SIDE AS SEEN FROM THE CIRCUIT BREAK SMALL THIS LINE END CAN BE RECLOSED WITH A SLIGHTLY
ER HIGHER DEAD TIME )F THE FAULT HAS REMAINED UN
SUCCESSFUL AUTO RECLOSURE IT CAN BE INSTANTA
7HEN A SHORT CIRCUIT OCCURS NEAR ONE END OF THE NEOUSLY CLEARED AT LINE END ) AT LINE END )) A SIGNIFI
LINE EVEN THE NEIGHBOURING LINES ARE TRIPPED AT FIRST CANT ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE REMAINS BECAUSE ONE
BECAUSE THEY RECOGNIZE THE FAULT IN THEIR OVERREACH SINGLE POLE OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS OPEN RECLOSURE IS
ING ZONE :" REFER &IGURE )F THE NETWORK IS IN BLOCKED 4HE CIRCUIT BREAKER POLES WHICH ARE STILL
TERCONNECTED AND THE BUS BAR " IS FITTED WITH AT CLOSED CAN BE TRIPPED BY THE POLE DISCREPANCY PRO
LEAST ONE EARTHED TRANSFORMER WITH A DELTA WINDING TECTION OR BY 3! ITSELF 4HIS METHOD BY THE WAY
THE VOLTAGES WILL BE SYMMETRIZED THERE 4HUS DIS SAVES THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AT LOCATION )) BECAUSE THIS
TINCTION CAN BE MADE BETWEEN THE FAULTED LINE AND #" NEED NOT SWITCH ONTO THE FAULT AGAIN
THE UNFAULTED LINES AFTER DISCONNECTION AT THE LOCA
TIONS ) )) AND ))) 4HE SETTING PARAMETERS FOR THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNC
TIONS AT BOTH LINE ENDS DETERMINE AT WHICH LINE END
3INCE LINE " # IS INTERRUPTED AT ONE END ONLY A RE THE BREAKER IS RECLOSED WITH NORMAL DEAD TIME WITH
VERSE VOLTAGE APPEARS FROM THE NON INTERRUPTED OUT ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE CHECK AND AT WHICH LINE
LINE END 4HUS THE INTERRUPTED PHASE CARRIES VOLTAGE END THE ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE IS MEASURED TO DE
AGAIN 4HEREFORE THE ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE MEA CIDE WHETHER RECLOSURE TAKES PLACE WITH A SLIGHTLY
SURED AT THE RELAY LOCATION ))) IS VERY SMALL )F THE RELAY HIGHER DEAD TIME OR NOT
AT THIS LOCATION RECOGNIZES THIS IT CAN RECLOSE IMME
DIATELY OR WITH ONLY A SMALL DEAD TIME WHICH MAY )F A LINE TO BE PROTECTED IS COMPOSED OF OVERHEAD LINE
COVER THE MEASURING TIME 4HE HEALTHY LINES ARE IN AND CABLE SECTIONS THE CONTROLLED ZONES :" AND
OPERATION VERY SOON BY THIS PROCEDURE :, CAN BE USED TO DISTINGUISH BETWEEN FAULTS ON THE
THE OVERHEAD SECTION AND CABLE FAULTS TO A CERTAIN
,INE ! " HAS BEEN INTERRUPTED AT BOTH ENDS 4HUS A DEGREE 2ECLOSURE CAN BE BLOCKED FOR CABLE FAULTS
SIGNIFICANT ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE IS PRESENT WHICH USING SETTING PARAMETERS REFER TO 3ECTION
IDENTIFIES AT BOTH LINE ENDS THIS LINE AS THE FAULTY LINE )F FOR EXAMPLE A CABLE SECTION IS FOLLOWED BY AN
4HE NORMAL DEAD TIME FOR SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLO OVERHEAD LINE SECTION REFER TO &IGURE ZONE
SURE BECOMES VALID :" IS SET TO COVER THE CABLE SECTION AND RECLOSURE
IS BLOCKED FOR FAULTS WITHIN :" BUT RELEASED FOR FAULTS
&URTHERMORE 3! PRESENTS THE POSSIBILITY TO TRIP OUT OF :" #ONVERSELY THE OTHER LINE END IS SET SUCH
A REMAINING FAULT INSTANTANEOUSLY OVER LINE THAT FAULTS WITHIN ZONE :" WHICH NEARLY COVERS THE
LENGTH EVEN AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL AUTO RECLOSURE !S OVERHEAD LINE SECTION ARE CLEARED WITH AUTO RECLO
LINE ! " HAS BEEN IDENTIFIED AS THE FAULTED LINE BY SURE WHEREAS RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED FOR FAULT OUT OF
THE METHOD PREVIOUSLY DESCRIBED THE OVERREACH ZONE :" )F FURTHER SEGREGATION IS NECESSARY EG
ZONE CAN REMAIN EFFECTIVE EVEN AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL CABLE OVERHEAD LINE CABLE DISTINCTION CAN BE
AUTO RECLOSURE SO THAT A PERSISTENT FAULT CAN BE MADE BY A FURTHER ZONE :, IN SIMILAR WAY
CLEARED IMMEDIATELY EVEN AT LINE END )
! : " :"
#
) :" )) )))
! " # BUS BARS

) )) ))) 2ELAY LOCATIONS
8 TRIPPED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
&IGURE %XAMPLE FOR THE 5 PROCEDURE
# ' #

!CTION TIMES AND RECLAIM TIMES

:"
:
! "
)T IS OFTEN APPROPRIATE TO PREVENT READINESS FOR RECLO
:
:"
SURE WHEN THE FAULT HAS PERSISTED FOR A SPECIFIED
TIME FOR EXAMPLE WHEN IT CAN BE ASSUMED THAT THE
ARC HAS BURNT ITSELF IN TO SUCH AN EXTENT THAT THERE IS
NO CHANCE OF NATURAL QUENCHING DURING THE DEAD
3UBSTATION ! TIME

UP TO :" AUTO RECLOSURE BLOCKED

OUT OF :" AUTO RECLOSURE PERMITTED 4RIPPING AFTER FAULTS WHICH ARE CLEARED IN A DELAYED
3UBSTATION " TIME SHOULD FOR REASONS OF SELECTIVITY ALSO NOT RESULT

UP TO :" AUTO RECLOSURE PERMITTED IN AN AUTO RECLOSURE

OUT OF :" AUTO RECLOSURE BLOCKED
4HE !2 FUNCTIONS OF 3! ARE PROVIDED WITH SET
OVERHEAD LINE SECTION TABLE ACTION TIMES SEPARATE FOR 2!2 AND $!2 WHICH
CABLE SECTION
ARE STARTED BY THE FAULT DETECTION SIGNAL )F AFTER EXPI
RY OF THE ACTION TIME NO TRIPPING SIGNAL HAS BEEN GIV
&IGURE ,INE WITH OVERHEAD AND CABLE SEC EN RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED
TION
4HE !2 FUNCTIONS OF 3! ARE PROVIDED WITH
THREE SETTABLE RECLAIM TIMES WHICH DO NOT DISCRIMI
NATE BETWEEN 2!2 AND $!2 'ENERALLY THE RECLAIM
&OR OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION EMERGENCY MODE TIME IS THE TIME PERIOD DURING WHICH NO FURTHER RECLO
STAGE ) OPERATES UNDELAYED AS 2!2 STAGE "E SURE ATTEMPT IS PERMITTED
FORE ANY RECONNECTION IE WHEN THE 2!2 FUNCTION
IS READY FOR OPERATION DISCONNECTION IS EFFECTED WITH 4HE RECLAIM TIME 4 2%#,!)- IS STARTED AT EVERY RE
) !FTER AN UNSUCCESSFUL AUTO RECLOSURE ATTEMPT CLOSE COMMAND )F AUTO RECLOSURE HAS BEEN SUC
OR WHEN THE !2 FUNCTION IS NOT READY FOR OPERATION CESSFUL ALL FUNCTIONS RESET TO THE QUIESCENT CONDITION
STAGE ) IS BLOCKED )N ORDER TO MAINTAIN SELECTIV AFTER EXPIRY OF 4 2%#,!)- ANY FAULT OCCURRING AFTER
ITY DISCONNECTION THEN IS EFFECTED WITH ) AFTER EXPIRY THE EXPIRY OF THE RECLAIM TIME IS CONSIDERED TO BE A
OF THE DELAY TIME 4) 7HEN THE !2 FUNCTION IS NEW SYSTEM FAULT 7HEN A RENEWED TRIP COMMAND IS
BLOCKED OR SWITCHED OFF ) IS ALSO BLOCKED 4HIS GIVEN WITHIN THIS RECLAIM TIME THE NEXT AUTO RECLOSE
CAN BE CHANGED IN THAT THE ) STAGE IS EFFECTIVE AL CYCLE IS STARTED IF MULTI SHOT !2 IS PERMITTED IF NO
WAYS INDEPENDENT OF THE 2!2 FURTHER !2 CYCLE IS PERMITTED A RENEWED TRIP COM
MAND WITHIN THE RECLAIM TIME IS FINAL !2 HAS BEEN
!LL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS WHICH CAN OPERATE DIRECTION UNSUCCESSFUL
AL CAN BLOCK RECLOSURE IN CASE THE FAULT LIES IN REVERSE
DIRECTION 4HIS APPLIES ALSO IF A TRIP COMMAND IS GIVEN 4HE LOCK OUT TIME 4 ,/#+ IS THE TIME PERIOD DUR
FOR A REVERSE FAULT BEFORE THE ACTION TIME HAS ING WHICH ANY FURTHER CLOSE COMMAND BY THE
ELAPSED 3! RELAY IS BLOCKED AFTER FINAL DISCONNECTION
4HIS APPLIES FOR ALL CLOSING ATTEMPTS WHICH ARE PER
FORMED BY THE RELAY )F THIS TIME IS SET TO 0 CLOSING IS
LOCKED OUT UNTIL THE !2 FUNCTION IS RESET BY ENERGIZA
TION OF THE BINARY INPUT !2 2ESET !FTER THE RESET
SIGNAL ALL FUNCTIONS RESET TO THE QUIESCENT CONDITION
! SPECIAL RECLAIM TIME 4 ",/#+ -# IS PROVIDED FOR

MANUAL CLOSING $URING THIS TIME AFTER MANUAL CLOSE
RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED ANY TRIP COMMAND WILL BE A
THREE POLE FINAL TRIP
# ' #

)NTERROGATION FOR READINESS OF 4HREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE

THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
7HEN THE !2 FUNCTION IS READY FOR OPERATION THE
! PRE CONDITION FOR A RECLOSE ATTEMPT AFTER SHORT SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION TRIPS THREE POLE FOR ALL
CIRCUIT INTERRUPTION IS THAT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS READY FAULTS WITHIN THE STAGE VALID FOR 2!2 EG THE DIS
FOR AT LEAST ONE 42)0 #,/3% 42)0 CYCLE WHEN TANCE PROTECTION IN ZONE :" 4HE !2 FUNCTION IS
THE !2 FUNCTION IS INITIATED IE AT THE INSTANT OF TRIP INITIATED PROVIDED TRIPPING OCCURS WITHIN THE ACTION
COMMAND 4HE READINESS INFORMATION FROM THE TIME REFER 3ECTION 7ITH FAULT CLEARANCE THE
BREAKER HAS TO BE TRANSMITTED TO THE DEVICE VIA A SETTABLE DEAD TIME 2!2 4 0/, COMMENCES FOR
BINARY INPUT )N CASE THAT SUCH READINESS INFORMATION THREE POLE 2!2 !FTER THIS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER RE
IS NOT AVAILABLE INTERROGATION CAN BE SUPPRESSED CEIVES A CLOSING COMMAND THE DURATION OF WHICH IS
SINCE OTHERWISE NO AUTO RECLOSE WOULD BE POSSIBLE SETTABLE 3IMULTANEOUSLY THE SETTABLE RECLAIM TIME
AT ALL 4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION IS STARTED
7HEN SINGLE SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE IS PERFORMED IT IS )F THE FAULT IS CLEARED SUCCESSFUL 2!2 THE RECLAIM
SUFFICIENT TO INTERROGATE THE BREAKER READINESS ONE TIME 4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION EXPIRES AND ALL
SINGLE TIME BEFORE INITIATION OF !2 !S FOR EXAMPLE FUNCTIONS RESET TO THE QUIESCENT CONDITION 4HE NET
THE AIR PRESSURE FOR BREAKER OPERATION WILL COLLAPSE WORK FAULT IS CLEARED
DURING THE TRIP EXECUTION NO FURTHER INTERROGATION
SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT )F THE FAULT HAS NOT BEEN CLEARED UNSUCCESSFUL !2
THEN THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION CARRIES OUT A FINAL
7HEN MULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE IS USED IT IS AD DISCONNECTION IN THE STAGE THAT IS VALID WITHOUT 2!2
VANTAGEOUS TO INTERROGATE BREAKER READINESS NOT WHEN THE UNIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE IS IN OP
ONLY AT THE INSTANT OF THE FIRST TRIP COMMAND BUT ALSO ERATION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION THEN :" CAN RE
BEFORE EVERY RECLOSE ATTEMPT OR BEFORE EVERY OTHER MAIN EFFECTIVE FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION SEE 3ECTION
RECLOSE ATTEMPT )F THIS FACILITY IS SELECTED RECLOSURE !LSO EVERY FAULT DURING THE RECLAIM TIME WILL RE
IS BLOCKED AS LONG AS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS NOT READY SULT IN FINAL DISCONNECTION
FOR ANOTHER 42)0 #,/3% SEQUENCE
!FTER UNSUCCESSFUL !2 FINAL DISCONNECTION THE
4HE RECOVERY TIME OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CAN BE SU LOCK OUT TIME 4 ,/#+ 3ECTION IS STARTED
PERVISED BY THE 3! RELAY 4HIS SUPERVISION TIME &OR THIS TIME ANY CLOSE COMMAND FROM 3! IS
4 #" 3506 WILL RUN AS LONG AS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER LOCKED
DOES NOT INFORM ABOUT READINESS )N THIS CASE THE
DEAD TIME MAY BE EXTENDED WHEN THE BREAKER IS NOT 4HE ABOVE SEQUENCE COMES INTO EFFECT WITH SINGLE
READY AFTER EXPIRY OF THE SET DEAD TIME "UT IF THE SHOT 2!2 7ITH 3! MULTIPLE !2 ATTEMPTS UP
BREAKER IS NOT YET READY AFTER EXPIRY OF THE SUPERVI TO $!2 SHOTS REFER 3ECTION ARE ALSO POS
SION TIME THEN RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED 4HIS BLOCKING IS SIBLE !DDITIONALLY IT IS POSSIBLE TO SKIP THE 2!2 CYCLE
CANCELED ONLY AFTER THE LOCK OUT TIME 4 ,/#+ RE BY A SIGNAL VIA A BINARY INPUT OF THE DEVICE )N THIS
FER 3ECTION HAS ELAPSED )F 4 ,/#+ IS SET TO CASE ONLY $!2 IS EFFECTIVE REFER 3ECTION
0 CLOSING IS LOCKED OUT UNTIL THE !2 FUNCTION IS RESET
BY ENERGIZATION OF THE BINARY INPUT !2 2ESET !F
TER THE RESET SIGNAL ALL FUNCTIONS RESET TO THE QUIES
CENT CONDITION
# ' #

3INGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE 3INGLE AND THREE POLE AUTO
RECLOSURE
7HEN ONLY SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS CARRIED
OUT AND THE 2!2 FUNCTION IS READY FOR RECLOSE THE 7HEN THE !2 FUNCTION IS READY FOR OPERATION THE
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION TRIPS SINGLE POLE IF A SING SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION TRIPS SINGLE POLE FOR
LE PHASE FAULT IS DETECTED IN THE STAGE VALID FOR 2!2 SINGLE PHASE FAULTS AND THREE POLE FOR MULTI
&OR DISTANCE PROTECTION EG ZONE :" IS EFFECTIVE PHASE FAULTS 4HE RELAY CAN ALSO BE SET TO TRIP SINGLE
ONLY FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS 4HE RELAY CAN ALSO BE POLE IN CASE OF TWO PHASE FAULTS WITHOUT EARTH CON
SET TO TRIP SINGLE POLE IN CASE OF TWO PHASE FAULTS NECTION 4HE STAGE VALID FOR 2!2 EG THE DISTANCE
WITHOUT EARTH CONNECTION PROTECTION ZONE :" IS VALID FOR ALL TYPES OF FAULT
!FTER OCCURRENCES OF MULTI PHASE FAULTS THE SHORT 4HE !2 FUNCTION IS INITIATED PROVIDED TRIPPING OC
CIRCUIT PROTECTION TRIPS FINALLY THREE POLE AFTER THE CURS WITHIN THE ACTION TIME REFER 3ECTION
TIME THAT IS VALID WITHOUT 2!2 &OR DISTANCE PROTEC 7ITH FAULT CLEARANCE THE SETTABLE DEAD TIME
TION EG ZONE : IS DECISIVE NOT :" WHEN THE UNI 2!2 4 0/, COMMENCES FOR SINGLE POLE 2!2 OR
VERSAL TELEPROTECTION IS IN OPERATION ZONE :" CAN THE SEPARATELY SETTABLE DEAD TIME 2!2 4 0/, FOR
REMAIN EFFECTIVE SEE 3ECTION %VERY THREE THREE POLE 2!2 !FTER THIS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER RE
POLE TRIP IS A FINAL TRIP 4HE LOCK OUT TIME 4 ,/#+ CEIVES A CLOSING COMMAND THE DURATION OF WHICH IS
3ECTION IS STARTED &OR THIS TIME ANY CLOSE SETTABLE 3IMULTANEOUSLY THE SETTABLE RECLAIM TIME
COMMAND FROM 3! IS LOCKED 4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION IS STARTED
!FTER A SINGLE POLE TRIP THE !2 FUNCTION IS INITIATED )F THE FAULT IS CLEARED SUCCESSFUL 2!2 THE RECLAIM
PROVIDED TRIPPING OCCURS WITHIN THE ACTION TIME 7ITH TIME 4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION EXPIRES AND ALL
THE CLEARANCE OF THE FAULT THE SETTABLE DEAD TIME FUNCTIONS RESET TO THE QUIESCENT CONDITION 4HE NET
2!2 4 0/, FOR SINGLE POLE 2!2 COMMENCES !F WORK FAULT IS CLEARED
TER THIS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER RECEIVES A CLOSING COM
MAND THE DURATION OF WHICH IS SETTABLE 3IMULTA )F THE FAULT HAS NOT BEEN CLEARED UNSUCCESSFUL !2
NEOUSLY THE SETTABLE RECLAIM TIME 4 2%#,!)- THEN THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION CARRIES OUT A FINAL
3ECTION IS STARTED )F AUTO RECLOSURE IS DISCONNECTION IN THE STAGE THAT IS VALID WITHOUT 2!2
BLOCKED DURING THE DEAD TIME AFTER SINGLE POLE TRIP WHEN THE UNIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE IS IN OP
THEN THE BREAKER CAN BE TRIPPED THREE POLE IMMEDI ERATION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION SEE 3ECTION OR
ATELY SELECTABLE WHEN THE 5 PROCESSING FEATURE IS OPERATIVE SEE
3ECTION THEN :" CAN REMAIN EFFECTIVE FOR
)F THE FAULT IS CLEARED SUCCESSFUL 2!2 THE RECLAIM DISTANCE PROTECTION !LSO EVERY FAULT DURING THE RE
TIME 4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION EXPIRES AND ALL CLAIM TIME WILL RESULT IN FINAL DISCONNECTION
FUNCTIONS RESET TO THE QUIESCENT CONDITION 4HE NET
WORK FAULT IS CLEARED !FTER UNSUCCESSFUL !2 FINAL DISCONNECTION THE
LOCK OUT TIME 4 ,/#+ 3ECTION IS STARTED
)F THE FAULT HAS NOT BEEN CLEARED UNSUCCESSFUL !2 &OR THIS TIME ANY CLOSE COMMAND FROM 3! IS
THEN THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION CARRIES OUT A FINAL LOCKED
DISCONNECTION IN THE STAGE THAT IS VALID WITHOUT 2!2
WHEN THE UNIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE IS IN OP 4HE ABOVE SEQUENCE COMES INTO EFFECT WITH SINGLE
ERATION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION SEE 3ECTION OR SHOT 2!2 7ITH 3! MULTIPLE !2 ATTEMPTS UP
WHEN THE 5 PROCESSING FEATURE IS OPERATIVE SEE TO $!2 SHOTS REFER 3ECTION ARE ALSO POS
3ECTION THEN :" CAN REMAIN EFFECTIVE FOR SIBLE !DDITIONALLY IT IS POSSIBLE TO SKIP THE 2!2 CYCLE
DISTANCE PROTECTION !LSO EVERY FAULT DURING THE RE BY A SIGNAL VIA A BINARY INPUT OF THE DEVICE )N THIS
CLAIM TIME WILL RESULT IN FINAL DISCONNECTION CASE ONLY $!2 IS EFFECTIVE REFER 3ECTION
!FTER UNSUCCESSFUL !2 FINAL DISCONNECTION THE

LOCK OUT TIME 4 ,/#+ 3ECTION IS STARTED
&OR THIS TIME ANY CLOSE COMMAND FROM 3! IS
LOCKED
)N THIS MODE ONLY SINGLE SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE IS

POSSIBLE
# ' #

4REATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS -ULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE
7HEN SINGLE POLE OR SINGLE AND THREE POLE 4HE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FEATURE IN 3! WILL
AUTO RECLOSURES ARE CARRIED OUT IN THE NETWORK SPE ALSO PERMIT MULTI SHOT RECLOSURE UP TO CONSECU
CIAL ATTENTION HAS TO BE DIRECTED TO EVOLVING FAULTS TIVE $!2 CYCLES 4HE SECOND AND EACH FURTHER
%VOLVING FAULTS ARE THOSE WHICH AFTER CLEARANCE OF CYCLE ARE ALWAYS THREE POLE !N INDIVIDUAL ZONE :,
THE FIRST DETECTED FAULT OCCUR DURING THE DEAD TIME WITH DELAY TIME 4, IS AVAILABLE FOR THE DISTANCE PRO
TECTION !LSO THE ACTION TIME AND SEVERAL DEAD TIMES
3! ALLOWS SEVERAL POSSIBILITIES FOR THE TREATMENT CAN BE INDEPENDENTLY SET FOR THESE $!2 CYCLES
OF EVOLVING FAULTS DEPENDENT UPON THE REQUIREMENTS
OF THE NETWORK
$IFFERENT NUMBERS OF $!2 CYCLES CAN BE SET FOR SING
4HE CRITERION FOR RECOGNITION OF EVOLVING FAULTS CAN BE LE PHASE FAULTS AND MULTI PHASE FAULT TRIPPING
SELECTED TO BE EITHER 42)0 #/--!.$ IN ANOTHER COMMAND IS NEVERTHELESS ALWAYS THREE POLE 4HE
PHASE DURING THE DEAD TIME OR ANY FURTHER &!5,4 $% SET NUMBER OF $!2 CYCLES DOES NOT INCLUDE THE FIRST
4%#4)/. 2!2 CYCLE
4HE REACTION OF THE !2 FUNCTION TO A RECOGNIZED $EAD TIMES CAN BE INDIVIDUALLY SET FOR THE FIRST THREE
EVOLVING FAULT CAN ALSO BE SELECTED !2 CYCLES FURTHER CYCLES OPERATE WITH THE DEAD TIME
OF THE THIRD CYCLE )N THIS CASE ALL !2 CYCLES ARE DECI
A ./ SPECIAL REACTION TO EVOLVING FAULTS SIVE IE ALSO THE 2!2 CYCLE 4HE 2!2 CYCLE OPERATES
WITH ITS DEAD TIME 2!2 4 0/, FOR SINGLE OR 2!2
!S SOON AS AN EVOLVING FAULT HAS BEEN DETECTED 4 0/, FOR THREE POLE 2!2 THE FIRST $!2 IS THE
THE UNIT SWITCHES TO THE THREE POLE AUTO RECLO
SECOND CYCLE WITH THE DEAD TIME FOR THE SECOND
SURE CYCLE ! THREE POLE TRIP OCCURS )F THREE
POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS PERMITTED THEN THE DEAD CYCLE $!2 40/, ETC )F NO 2!2 CYCLE HAS OC
TIME FOR THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE BEGINS SI CURRED EG 2!2 BLOCKED THEN THE FIRST $!2 CYCLE
MULTANEOUSLY WITH THE INTERRUPTION OF THE EVOLVING OPERATES WITH THE DEAD TIME FOR THE FIRST CYCLE $!2
FAULT 7HEN THE DEAD TIME HAS EXPIRED THE CIRCUIT 40/, ETC
BREAKER RECEIVES THE COMMAND TO CLOSE 4HE FUR
THER SEQUENCE IS THE SAME AS FOR SINGLE AND %ACH NEW PICK UP RESTARTS THE ACTION TIME
THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE $!2 4 !#4 WITHIN WHICH A TRIPPING COMMAND MUST
OCCUR !FTER FAULT CLEARANCE THE DEAD TIME BEGINS !T
4HE TOTAL DEAD TIME IN THIS CASE CONSISTS OF THE THE END OF THIS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS GIVEN A NEW
DEAD TIME FOR THE SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE CLOSING COMMAND 3IMULTANEOUSLY THE RECLAIM TIME
WHICH HAS EXPIRED WHEN THE EVOLVING FAULT IS INTER
4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION IS STARTED
RUPTED PLUS THE DEAD TIME FOR THE THREE POLE
AUTO RECLOSURE 4HIS IS USEFUL BECAUSE ONLY THE
DEAD TIME FOR THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS OF IM !S LONG AS THE PERMITTED NUMBER OF CYCLES HAS NOT
PORTANCE FOR THE STABILITY OF THE NETWORK BEEN REACHED THE RECLAIM TIME IS RESET BY EACH NEW
PICK UP AND RECOMMENCES WITH THE NEXT CLOSING
B "LOCKING OF RECLOSURE AFTER EVOLVING FAULTS !, COMMAND
7!93
)F ONE OF THE CYCLES IS SUCCESSFUL THAT IS AFTER RECLOSE
!S SOON AS AN EVOLVING FAULT HAS BEEN DETECTED THE FAULT IS NO LONGER PRESENT THE RECLAIM TIME 4
RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED 4HE TRIP IS THREE POLE AND
2%#,!)- EQUALLY RUNS OUT AND ALL FUNCTIONS RETURN TO
OCCURS REGARDLESS WHETHER THREE POLE !2 IS PER
MITTED OR NOT THE QUIESCENT CONDITION 4HE NETWORK FAULT IS
CLEARED
C "LOCKING AFTER EVOLVING FAULTS AFTER AN ADJUSTABLE
DISCRIMINATION TIME 4 $)3#2)- )F NONE OF THE !2 CYCLES HAS BEEN SUCCESSFUL THEN
THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION CARRIES OUT A FINAL DIS
4HE DISCRIMINATION TIME STARTS SIMULTANEOUSLY CONNECTION AFTER THE LAST PERMISSIBLE CYCLE 4HE
WITH THE DEAD TIME )T IS USED TO DISCRIMINATE FROM LOCK OUT TIME 4 ,/#+ 3ECTION IS STARTED
WHICH POINT IN TIME AN EVOLVING FAULT IS IDENTIFIED AS
&OR THIS TIME ANY CLOSE COMMAND FROM 3! IS
SUCH )F THE EVOLVING FAULT OCCURS BEFORE THE EXPIRY
OF THE DISCRIMINATION TIME A THREE POLE TRIP IS CAR LOCKED
RIED OUT AND THE DEVICE IS SWITCHED TO A THREE
POLE !2 CYCLE IF PERMITTED AS UNDER A )F HOW 4HE SUBSEQUENT CYCLES $!2 CAN BE BLOCKED BY A
EVER THE EVOLVING FAULT OCCURS AFTER THE DISCRIMINA BINARY INPUT INDEPENDENTLY OF THE FUNCTION OF THE
TION TIME HAS EXPIRED A THREE POLE TRIP IS CARRIED 2!2 CYCLE
OUT AND RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED AS UNDER B
# ' #

#ONNECTION OF EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE SYSTEM
3! CAN OPERATE IN CONJUNCTION WITH AN EXTERNAL SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION

AUTO RECLOSE SYSTEM 4HE INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION FUNCTIONS OF 3! ARE RE
CANNOT THEN BE ALLOWED TO OPERATE IT MUST BE PRO LEASED BY BINARY INPUT
GRAMMED TO BE INEFFECTIVE DE CONFIGURED SEE ONLY WHEN A SINGLE PHASE
3ECTION FAULT IS DETECTED WHEN A
MULTI PHASE FAULT IS DE
TECTED THE 2!2 STAGES ARE
3IGNAL EXCHANGE BETWEEN 3! AND THE EXTERNAL
NOT RELEASED BUT THE NORMAL
AUTO RECLOSE DEVICE MUST BE MADE VIA THE BINARY IN
GRADING STAGES ARE EFFECTIVE
PUTS AND OUTPUTS OF THE RELAY 4HE FOLLOWING LIST MAY ONLY
BE REGARDED AS A RECOMMENDATION
P 4RIP 0ERM 4HE EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE PER
"INARY INPUTS MITS SINGLE POLE TRIPPING
IE IS READY FOR RECLOSURE AF
2!2 2ELEASE 4HE EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE RE
TER SINGLE POLE TRIP 4HIS
LEASES THE 2!2 STAGES OF ALL
FUNCTION IS THE LOGICAL INVER
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS WITHIN 3! SION OF THREE POLE COUPLING
WHICH SHALL OPERATE WITH !2 )F THIS BINARY INPUT IS NOT ALLO
EG ZONE :" OF THE DIS CATED THEN ONLY THREE POLE
TANCE PROTECTION VIA THIS TRIPPING CAN OCCUR
BINARY INPUT
$!2 2ELEASE 4HE EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE CON
/NLY POLE 4HE EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE IS TROLS THE $!2 STAGE :, OF
PROGRAMMED TO RECLOSE ONLY THE DISTANCE PROTECTION ONLY
IN CASE OF SINGLE POLE TRIP RELEVANT WHEN MULTI SHOT
PING 4HE 2!2 STAGES OF THE AUTO RECLOSURE IS USED
3! EXTERNAL
!2 DEVICE
&AULT DETECTION
4RIP ,
4RIP ,
4RIP ,
, ,
2!2 2ELEASE
POLE COUPLING
POLE ONLY
,
P
POLE P ,
3ELECTION

POLE COUPLING CAN BE
INVERTED IN 3! , 3WITCH
&IGURE %XAMPLE OF CONNECTIONS WITH EXTERNAL !2 SYSTEM
# ' #

"INARY OUTPUTS
)N ORDER TO ACHIEVE A PHASE SEGREGATED TRIP SIGNAL
$EVICE&LT$ET 'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION OF THE THE SINGLE POLE TRIP COMMAND FOR EACH POLE AND THE
DEVICE THREE POLE TRIP COMMAND MUST BE COMBINED TO THE
PHASE TRIP SIGNAL
$EV4RIP P 4HREE POLE TRIP COMMAND
OF THE DEVICE $EPENDENT OF THE FEATURES OF THE EXTERNAL AUTO RE
$EV4RIP P, 3INGLE POLE TRIP COMMAND CLOSE DEVICE IT IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO COMBINE THE THREE
, OF THE DEVICE SINGLE POLE TRIP COMMANDS &.O TO
A SIGNAL SINGLE POLE TRIP THE THREE POLE TRIP COM
$EV4RIP P 4HREE POLE TRIP COMMAND MAND &.O GIVES THE SIGNAL THREE POLE TRIP
OF THE DEVICE
$EV4RIP P, 3INGLE POLE TRIP COMMAND &OR THREE POLE !2 THE GENERAL FAULT DETECTION AND
, OF THE DEVICE TRIPPING SIGNALS ARE NORMALLY SUFFICIENT
$EV4RIP P 4HREE POLE TRIP COMMAND &IGURE SHOWS A CONNECTION EXAMPLE FOR THE IN
OF THE DEVICE TERCONNECTION BETWEEN 3! AND AN EXTERNAL
$EV4RIP P, 3INGLE POLE TRIP COMMAND !2 SYSTEM USING A PROGRAM SELECTOR SWITCH
, OF THE DEVICE
#ONTROL OF THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION BY AN EXTERNAL PROTECTIVE RELAY
)F 3! IS FITTED WITH AN INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION THIS FOR THREE POLE COUPLING SHOULD BE AVAILABLE EXTER
CAN BE CONTROLLED FROM AN EXTERNAL PROTECTIVE DEVICE NALLY )F ONLY THREE POLE !2 IS TO BE CARRIED OUT ALL
4HIS IS APPLICABLE FOR EXAMPLE FOR LINE ENDS WITH DU THREE BINARY INPUT FOR THE TRIPPING SIGNALS MUST BE AL
PLICATED PROTECTION OR ADDITIONAL BACK UP PROTEC LOCATED TO A PHYSICAL BINARY INPUT MODULE
TION WHEN A SECOND PROTECTIVE DEVICE IS USED FOR THE
SAME LINE END AND SHALL OPERATE WITH THE !2 FUNC 4O COUPLE THE EXTERNAL RELAY THREE POLE AND TO RE
TION INCORPORATED IN 3! LEASE ITS OVERREACH ZONE THE FOLLOWING OUTPUT FUNC
TIONS ARE SUITABLE
3IGNAL EXCHANGE BETWEEN 3! AND THE EXTERNAL
AUTO RECLOSE DEVICE MUST BE MADE VIA THE BINARY IN P 4RIP 0ERM INTERNAL !2 IS READY FOR
PUTS AND OUTPUTS OF THE RELAY 4HE FOLLOWING LIST MAY SINGLE POLE RECLOSURE LOG
BE REGARDED AS A RECOMMENDATION ICAL INVERSION OF THREE POLE
COUPLING
4HE INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION CAN BE STARTED FOR EXAM
2!2 :ONE 2EL INTERNAL !2 IS READY FOR AN
PLE VIA THE BINARY INPUTS
2!2 CYCLE IE RELEASES
2!2 ZONE FOR THE EXTERNAL
3TART !2 'ENERAL START SIGNAL FOR !2
PROTECTION RELAY
4RIP , !2 4RIPPING COMMAND , FOR $!2 :ONE 2EL INTERNAL !2 IS READY FOR A
!2 $!2 CYCLE IE RELEASES
$!2 ZONE FOR THE EXTERNAL
4RIP , !2 4RIPPING COMMAND , FOR PROTECTION RELAY
!2
2!2 P 0ROG INTERNAL 2!2 PROGRAMMED
4RIP , !2 4RIPPING COMMAND , FOR TO SINGLE POLE RECLOSURE
!2 ONLY IE WILL RECLOSE ONLY AF
TER SINGLE POLE TRIP
4HE GENERAL START SIGNAL IS THE CRITERION FOR THE START OF
THE ACTION TIMES !T THE ISSUE OF THE TRIPPING COM $EPENDING ON THE ACTUAL PHILOSOPHY AND THE USED
MAND IT IS DECIDED WHETHER THE DEAD TIME FOR FUNCTIONS OF THE AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION ONE OR THE
SINGLE POLE !2 OR THREE POLE !2 WILL BE EFFECTED OR OTHER BINARY OUTPUT MAY BE OMITTED &OR EXAMPLE
IF FOR THREE POLE TRIPPING RECLOSURE WILL BE BLOCKED THE 2!2 :ONE 2EL OUTPUT &.O IS SUFFI
DEPENDENT UPON THE SET !2 PROGRAM ! POSSIBILITY CIENT WHEN ONLY THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS USED
# ' #

4WO PROTECTION RELAYS WITH TWO !2 DEVICES
)F A FEEDER IS EQUIPPED WITH DUPLICATED PROTECTION COUPLING SHOULD BE ARRANGED WITH AN EXTERNAL COU
AND EACH PROTECTION RELAY SHOULD CONTROL ITS OWN AU PLING UNIT WHICH INTERACTS DIRECTLY WITH THE CIRCUIT
TO RECLOSE DEVICE CERTAIN EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION BREAKER TRIP CIRCUITS 4HIS ENSURES THREE POLE TRIP
IS NECESSARY BETWEEN THE TWO COMBINATIONS 4HIS IS PING UNDER ALL CIRCUMSTANCES OF MULTI POLE FAULTS
SHOWN AS AN EXAMPLE IN &IGURE 4HREE POLE
3! 3ECOND RELAY
INTERNAL ND !2
!2 FUNCTION DEVICE
3 !2 BLOCKDYN !2 BLOCK INT 3

, ,
") !2 BLOCK !2 BLOCKED ")

, ,
") 3TART !2 3TART !2 ")
") 4RIP , !2 4RIP , FOR !2 ")
") 4RIP , !2 4RIP , FOR !2 ")
") 4RIP , !2 4RIP , FOR !2 ")
, ,
,INE PROTECTION
ND PROTECTION
, FUNCTION
RELAY
,
3 'EN &AULT
'EN &AULT 3
3 4RIP ,
4RIP , 3
3 4RIP ,
4RIP , 3
3 4RIP ,
4RIP , 3
, ,
$EV4RIP P,
# $EV4RIP P 4RIP , #
$EV4RIP P,
$EV4RIP P,
") "INARY INPUT

3 3IGNALLING OUTPUT POLE
# 4RIP COMMAND COUPLING
FOR ALL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

WHICH OPERATE WITH !2
, , ,
TO CIRCUIT BREAKER
&IGURE #ONNECTION EXAMPLE FOR PROTECTION RELAYS WITH AUTO RECLOSURE DEVICES
# ' #

4HE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION WILL EN 7HEN A POWER TRANSFORMER LIES BETWEEN THE FEEDER
SURE WHEN SWITCHING A LINE CIRCUIT ONTO A BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER AND THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANS
THAT THE STABILITY OF THE NETWORK WILL NOT BE ENDAN FORMER &IGURE ITS VECTOR GROUP CAN BE
GERED 4HE FUNCTION CAN BE PROGRAMMED TO PERFORM MATCHED AT THE 3! RELAY SO THAT NO EXTERNAL
THE SYNCHRO CHECK ONLY FOR AUTO RECLOSE ONLY FOR MATCHING TRANSFORMERS ARE NECESSARY
MANUAL CLOSE OR FOR BOTH CASES $IFFERENT PERMIS
SION CRITERIA CAN ALSO BE PROGRAMMED FOR AUTOMATIC 4HE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION IN 3! NORMALLY
CLOSE AND FOR MANUAL CLOSE OPERATES IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE INTEGRATED AUTO RE
CLOSE AND MANUAL CLOSE FUNCTIONS )T IS HOWEVER POS
SIBLE TO OPERATE WITH AN EXTERNAL PROTECTION RELAY
ANDOR WITH AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE RELAY )N THIS
"US BAR
CASE THE SIGNAL EXCHANGE BETWEEN THE DEVICES
MUST BE PERFORMED THROUGH BINARY INPUTS AND OUT
&EEDER
PUTS
) 5
&URTHERMORE SYNCHRONOUS OR ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCH
ING IS POSSIBLE 3YNCHRONOUS SWITCHING MEANS THAT
3!
, THE CLOSING COMMAND IS GIVEN AS SOON AS THE CRITICAL
42)0 0ROTECTION VALUES VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE DIFFERENCE 5 ANGLE DIF
$ISCREP FERENCE AND FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE F LIE WITHIN
ANCY
#,/3% !2 CONTROL THE SET TOLERANCES &OR ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING THE
SWITCH
DEVICE CALCULATES THE CORRECT TIMING OF THE CLOSING
3YNC
COMMAND FROM THE ANGLE DIFFERENCE AND THE FRE
5 QUENCY DIFFERENCE F SUCH THAT THE VOLTAGES AT THE
BUS BAR AND THE FEEDER CIRCUIT ARE EXACTLY THE SAME
AT THE INSTANT THAT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTACTS TOUCH
&IGURE 3YNCHRO CHECK ON CLOSING
&OR THAT PURPOSE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING TIME
MUST BE PROGRAMMED INTO THE RELAY &OR SYNCHRO
NOUS AND ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING DIFFERENT FRE
QUENCY DIFFERENCE LIMITS CAN BE PROGRAMMED
&OR COMPARISON OF THE TWO VOLTAGES THE SYNCHRO
4HE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION OPERATES ONLY WHEN IT
CHECK ELEMENT USES THE FEEDER VOLTAGE 5 AND AN
IS REQUESTED TO DO SO 4HIS REQUEST CAN COME FROM
ADDITIONALLY CONNECTED BUS BAR VOLTAGE 5 4HE LAT THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION FROM THE MANUAL
TER CAN BE ANY CONVENIENT PHASE EARTH OR PHASE
CLOSING COMMAND OR FROM AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE
PHASE VOLTAGE FROM THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORM
RELAY BY BINARY INPUT
ERS
4HE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION GIVES PERMISSION FOR
PASSAGE OF THE CLOSING COMMAND PROVIDED THE FEED
"US BAR ER IS CURRENT FREE ) ). )F NOT EITHER THE BREAK
ER IS NOT OPEN OR A FAULT IS SITUATED BETWEEN THE
BREAKER AND THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
) 5 /PTIONALLY A CLOSING COMMAND CAN BE GIVEN BY THE

SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION 4HIS CAN CONTROL THE CLOS
3!
,
ING COIL OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER OR !2 CLOSING COM
MAND AND SYNCHRO CHECK CLOSING COMMAND CAN
42)0 0ROTECTION
BE CONNECTED IN SERIES
#,/3% 3YNC
4HE PERMISSION TIME WINDOW IS LIMITED BY AN ADJUST
ABLE SYNCHRONOUS MONITORING TIME 7ITHIN THIS PERI
5 OD THE PROGRAMMED CONDITIONS MUST HAVE BEEN
MET OTHERWISE CLOSING PERMISSION WILL NOT BE GIVEN
! NEW SYNCHRO CHECK SEQUENCE REQUIRES A NEW RE
&IGURE 3YNCHRO CHECK ACROSS TRANSFORMER QUEST
# ' #

/PERATING MODES 3WITCHING AT SYNCHRONISM
4HE CLOSING CHECK PROCEDURE CAN BE SELECTED FROM 4O RELEASE A CLOSING COMMAND THE FOLLOWING CONDI
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS TIONS ARE CHECKED
39.#(2 2ELEASE AT SYNCHRONISM 4HAT IS $OES THE VOLTAGE 5 LIE ABOVE THE SET VALUE 5
WHEN THE CRITICAL VALUES 5 AND
F LIE WITHIN THE SET LIMITS $OES THE VOLTAGE 5 LIE ABOVE THE SET VALUE 5
5 5 2ELEASE FOR ENERGIZED LINE 5 )S THE VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE DIFFERENCE
AND DE ENERGIZED BUS BAR 5 \\5\ \5\\ WITHIN THE PERMISSIBLE TOLER
ANCE 5
5 5 2ELEASE FOR DE ENERGIZED LINE
5 AND ENERGIZED BUS BAR )S THE ANGLE DIFFERENCE \ \ WITHIN THE PER
5 MISSIBLE TOLERANCE
5 5 2ELEASE FOR DE ENERGIZED LINE )S THE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE \F F\ WITHIN THE
5 AND DE ENERGIZED BUS BAR PERMISSIBLE TOLERANCE F
5
7HEN THE CONDITIONS ARE SATISFIED THE CLOSING COM
/6%22)$% 2ELEASE WITHOUT ANY CHECK MAND IS RELEASED 4HE DURATION OF THE COMMAND CAN
BE ADJUSTED
%ACH OF THESE CONDITIONS CAN BE SWITCHED TO EFFEC
TIVE OR NOT EFFECTIVE COMBINATIONS ARE ALSO POSSIBLE
EG RELEASE WHEN 5 5 OR 5 5 ARE SATIS
FIED #OMBINATION OF /6%22)$% WITH OTHER PARAME
TERS IS OF COURSE NOT MEANINGFUL
!SYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING
4HE RELEASE CONDITIONS CAN BE SET INDIVIDUALLY FOR AU
TOMATIC AND FOR MANUAL CLOSING EG ONE CAN PERMIT &OR RELEASE OF A CLOSING COMMAND THE FOLLOWING
MANUAL CLOSING AT SYNCHRONISM OR DEAD LINE WHILST CONDITIONS ARE CHECKED
BEFORE AN AUTO RECLOSE AT ONE LINE END ONLY FREE
DOM FROM VOLTAGE AND AT THE OTHER ONLY SYNCHRONISM $OES THE VOLTAGE 5 LIE ABOVE THE SET VALUE 5
WILL BE CHECKED
$OES THE VOLTAGE 5 LIE ABOVE THE SET VALUE 5
)S THE VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE \\5\ \5\\ WITHIN

THE PERMISSIBLE LIMIT 5
$EAD LINE OR DEAD BUS SWITCH
ING )S THE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE \F F\ WITHIN THE
PERMISSIBLE DIFFERENCE F BUT LARGER THAN FSYNC
&OR RELEASE OF THE CLOSING COMMAND TO ENERGIZE A
VOLT FREE LINE FROM THE BUS BAR THE FOLLOWING CONDI 7HEN THE CONDITIONS ARE SATISFIED THE DEVICE CALCU
TIONS ARE CHECKED LATES THE TIME TO THE NEXT INSTANT OF SYNCHRONISM
FROM THE RATE OF CHANGE OF ANGLE AND FREQUENCY DIF
$OES THE VOLTAGE 5 LIE BELOW THE SET VALUE 5 FERENCE 4HE CLOSING COMMAND IS THEN RELEASED AT
THE INSTANT THAT THE CLOSING TIME OF THE BREAKER
$OES THE VOLTAGE 5 LIE ABOVE THE SET VALUE 5 EQUALS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN INSTANT OF COMMAND
AND THE NEXT INSTANT OF SYNCHRONISM 4HE DURATION OF
7HEN THE CONDITIONS ARE SATISFIED THE CLOSING COM THE COMMAND IS ADJUSTABLE
MAND IS RELEASED 4HE DURATION OF THE COMMAND CAN
BE ADJUSTED
#ORRESPONDING CONDITIONS APPLY WHEN SWITCHING A

LIVE LINE ONTO A DEAD BUS BAR OR A DEAD LINE ONTO A
DEAD BUS BAR
# ' #

$ISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATION
$ISTANCE TO FAULT MEASUREMENT BEFORE CLEARANCE THE REACTANCE PER PHASE IN /HMS PRIMARY AND
OF THE FAULT IS AN IMPORTANT ADDITION TO THE FUNCTION OF SECONDARY
A DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY !VAILABILITY OF THE LINE FOR
ENERGY TRANSMISSION IN THE NETWORK CAN BE IN THE RESISTANCE PER PHASE IN /HMS PRIMARY AND
CREASED BY RAPID LOCATION OF POINT OF FAULT AND REPAIR SECONDARY
OF ANY RESULTANT DAMAGE
THE FAULT DISTANCE IN KM LINE LENGTH PROPORTIONAL TO
$ISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATION IN DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY THE REACTANCE CALCULATED ON THE BASIS OF THE SET
3! IS A FUNCTION INDEPENDENT OF DISTANCE PRO UNIT REACTANCE OF THE LINE
TECTION )T POSSESSES INDEPENDENT MEASURED VALUE
STORES AND ITS OWN FILTER ALGORITHMS $ISTANCE PROTEC THE DISTANCE TO FAULT IN OF THE LINE LENGTH CALCU
TION PROVIDES ONLY A START TO MEASURE COMMAND IN LATED ON THE BASIS OF THE SET UNIT REACTANCE AND THE
ORDER TO DETERMINE THE VALID MEASUREMENT LOOP AND SET LINE LENGTH
THE MOST FAVOURABLE TIME INTERVAL FOR MEASURED VALUE
STORAGE .OTE #ALCULATION OF THE DISTANCE IN KM AND PERCENT
CAN ONLY BE APPLICABLE TO HOMOGENEOUS LINE
.ORMALLY THE FAULT LOCATION FUNCTION IS STARTED BY THE LENGTHS "UT IF THE LINE IS MADE UP OF SECTIONS WITH
TRIPPING COMMAND FROM THE DISTANCE PROTECTION DIFFERING REACTANCE VALUES EG OVERHEAD LINE
0AIRED VALUES OF SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT AND SHORT CIRCUIT CABLE COMBINATIONS THE DISTANCE TO FAULT CAN STILL BE
VOLTAGE TAKEN AT INTERVALS OF OF A CYCLE AND CALCULATED MANUALLY FROM THE REACTANCE DETERMINED
STORED IN A CIRCULATING BUFFER ARE FROZEN MS LATER BY THE FAULT LOCATION IF THE LINE CHARACTERISTICS ARE
WHICH EVEN WITH EXTREMELY FAST CIRCUIT BREAKERS EN KNOWN
SURES THAT THE MEASUREMENTS ARE NOT DISTORTED BY
THE TRIPPING TRANSIENTS &ILTERING OF THE MEASURED VAL 7ITH EARTH FAULTS ON PARALLEL CIRCUIT LINES THE LOOP
UES AND QUANTITY OF THE IMPEDANCE CALCULATIONS ARE EQUATION USED FOR CALCULATION OF THE IMPEDANCE SEE
AUTOMATICALLY MATCHED TO THE NUMBER OF INCOMING 3ECTION IS INFLUENCED BY THE COUPLING OF THE
VALUE PAIRS FROM THE TIME OF FAULT INCEPTION TO MS EARTH IMPEDANCES OF BOTH CONDUCTOR SYSTEMS )F NO
AFTER TRIPPING COMMAND SPECIAL MEASURES ARE TAKEN THIS WILL LEAD TO MEA
SUREMENT ERRORS IN THE RESULT OF THE IMPEDANCE CAL
&AULT LOCATION CAN ALSO BE INITIATED VIA A BINARY INPUT CULATION 4HE RELAY CAN THEREFORE BE FITTED WITH A PAR
4HUS CALCULATION IS POSSIBLE WHEN A DIFFERENT PROTEC ALLEL LINE COMPENSATION MODULE FOR SUCH FAULT LOCA
TION DEVICE EFFECTS CLEARANCE OF A SHORT CIRCUIT &UR TION SEE 3ECTION /RDERING DATA 4HIS TAKES INTO
THER FAULT CALCULATION CAN BE STARTED WITHOUT RECEIPT ACCOUNT THE EARTH CURRENT OF THE PARALLEL LINE IN THE
OF ANY TRIPPING COMMAND )N THIS CASE THE START TO LINE EQUATION AND THUS COMPENSATES FOR THE INFLU
MEASURE CRITERION IS FAULT DETECTION BY THE 3! ENCE OF THE COUPLING &OR THIS PURPOSE THIS EARTH CUR
RELAY RENT MUST BE FED INTO THE RELAY 4HE LOOP EQUATION IN
DIFFERENTIAL FORM IS THEN AS FOLLOWS
%VALUATION OF THE MEASURED VALUES OCCURS AFTER THE
FAULT HAS BEEN CLEARED &ROM THE STORED AND FILTERED DI , 8 % DI % 8 - DI %J
VALUES AT LEAST THREE RESULTANT PAIRS FOR 2 AND 8 ARE ,
DT 8, DT 8, DT
DETERMINED )F LESS THAN THREE RESULTANT PAIRS ARE
2 2
AVAILABLE NO FAULT LOCATION IS GIVEN &ROM THE RESUL 2 I, % I% - I %J 5 ,%
2, 2,
TANT PAIRS AVERAGE VALUE AND STANDARD DEVIATION ARE
CALCULATED !FTER ELIMINATION OF EXCEPTIONS WHICH WHERE I% IS THE EARTH CURRENT OF THE PARALLEL LINE AND
ARE RECOGNIZED BY THEIR EXCESSIVE DIFFERENCE FROM THE RATIOS 8-8, AND 2-2, ARE LINE CONSTANTS WHICH
THE STANDARD DEVIATION ANOTHER AVERAGE IS AGAIN CAL RESULT FROM THE GEOMETRY OF THE DOUBLE LINE AND THE
CULATED FOR 8 4HIS AVERAGE IS TAKEN AS FAULT REAC CHARACTERISTICS OF THE EARTH RETURN PATH 4HE LINE CON
TANCE STANTS ARE INPUT TO THE RELAY JUST AS THE OTHER LINE DATA
ARE ALSO SET
!S A RESULT OF THE FAULT LOCATION CALCULATION THE FOLLOW
ING OUTPUTS ARE GIVEN 4HE PARALLEL LINE COMPENSATION IS VALID ONLY FOR FAULTS
ON THE PROTECTED LINE &OR FAULTS BEYOND THE PRO
THE SHORT CIRCUIT LOOP FROM WHICH THE FAULT REAC TECTED ZONE AND FAULTS ON THE PARALLEL LINE COMPEN
TANCE IS DETERMINED SATION IS NOT POSSIBLE
# ' #

#IRCUIT BREAKER TRIP TEST
.UMERICAL DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY 3! ALLOWS ! 42)0 #,/3% CYCLE CAN BE PERFORMED THREE POLE
SIMPLE CHECKING OF THE TRIPPING CIRCUIT AND THE CIRCUIT OR SINGLE POLE 4HREE POLE TRIP IS INITIATED ONLY
BREAKER )F THE DEVICE INCORPORATES AN INTERNAL AUTO WHEN THE !2 FUNCTION INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL PERMITS
RECLOSE SYSTEM A 42)0 #,/3% TEST CYCLE IS ALSO THREE POLE RECLOSURE 3INGLE POLE TRIP IS INITIATED
POSSIBLE THE LATTER CAN ALSO BE PERFORMED WITH AN EX ONLY WHEN THE !2 FUNCTION INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL PER
TERNAL AUTO RECLOSE DEVICE MITS SINGLE POLE RECLOSURE 3INGLE POLE TRIP TEST
CAN ALSO BE CARRIED OUT WITH A SEQUENCE 42)0 ,
0REREQUISITE FOR THE START OF A TEST CYCLE IS THAT NO PRO 2%#,/3% 42)0 , 2%#,/3% 42)0 , 2%
TECTIVE FUNCTION HAS PICKED UP )F THE CIRCUIT BREAKER #,/3%
AUXILIARY CONTACTS ADVISE THE RELAY THROUGH A BINARY
INPUT OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION THE TEST CYCLE 4HE TEST SEQUENCE IS SUPERVISED BY 3! BY
CAN ONLY BE STARTED WHEN THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS MEANS OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT POSI
CLOSED 4HIS ADDITIONAL SECURITY FEATURE SHOULD NOT TION PROVIDED THE AUXILIARY CONTACT IS CONNECTED TO A
BE OMITTED BINARY INPUT )F THE BREAKER DOES NOT REACT CORRECTLY
THEN THE TEST SEQUENCE IS ABORTED A CORRESPONDING
&OR STARTING A 42)0 #,/3% CYCLE A FURTHER CONDITION MESSAGE IS GIVEN IN THE DISPLAY OR ON THE 0# SCREEN
IS THAT THE CONDITIONS FOR RECLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER
READY !2 NOT BLOCKED ARE FULFILLED 4HIS APPLIES ALSO 4RIP TEST CAN ALSO BE STARTED BY ENERGIZATION OF A
FOR AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE DEVICE BINARY INPUT ! PURE TRIP TEST WITHOUT RECLOSURE BY IN
TERNAL OR EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSURE IS NOT RECOM
)NITIATION OF THE TEST CYCLE CAN BE GIVEN FROM THE OPER MENDED FOR SAFETY REASONS
ATOR KEYBOARD OR VIA THE FRONT OPERATOR INTERFACE
7HEN A PURE TRIP TEST IS STARTED THE RELAY ISSUES A

THREE POLE TRIP COMMAND
# ' #

!NCILLARY FUNCTIONS
4HE ANCILLARY FUNCTIONS OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION 3OME INDICATORS AND RELAYS INDICATE CONDITIONS IT IS
3! INCLUDE NOT APPROPRIATE THAT THESE SHOULD BE STORED %QUALLY
THEY CANNOT BE RESET UNTIL THE ORIGINATING CRITERION
0ROCESSING OF ANNUNCIATIONS HAS BEEN REMOVED 4HIS MAINLY CONCERNS FAULT INDI
CATIONS SUCH AS AUXILIARY VOLTAGE FAULT EMERGENCY
3TORAGE OF SHORT CIRCUIT DATA FOR FAULT RECORDING /# ETC
/PERATIONAL MEASUREMENTS AND TESTING ROUTINES ! GREEN ,%$ INDICATES READINESS FOR OPERATION 4HIS
,%$ CANNOT BE RESET AND REMAINS ILLUMINATED WHEN
-ONITORING FUNCTIONS THE MICROPROCESSOR IS WORKING CORRECTLY AND THE UNIT
IS NOT FAULTY 4HE ,%$ EXTINGUISHES WHEN THE SELF
CHECKING FUNCTION OF THE MICROPROCESSOR DETECTS A
FAULT OR WHEN THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE IS ABSENT
0ROCESSING OF ANNUNCIATIONS 7ITH THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE PRESENT BUT WITH AN EXIST
ING INTERNAL FAULT IN THE UNIT A RED ,%$ ILLUMINATES
!FTER A FAULT IN THE NETWORK INFORMATION CONCERNING "LOCKED AND BLOCKS THE UNIT
THE RESPONSE OF THE PROTECTIVE DEVICE AND KNOWL
EDGE OF THE MEASURED VALUES ARE OF IMPORTANCE FOR
AN EXACT ANALYSIS OF THE HISTORY OF THE FAULT &OR THIS
PURPOSE THE DEVICE PROVIDES ANNUNCIATION PROCESS
ING WHICH IS EFFECTIVE IN THREE DIRECTIONS )NFORMATION ON THE DISPLAY PANEL OR TO
A PERSONAL COMPUTER
%VENTS AND CONDITIONS CAN BE READ OFF IN THE DISPLAY

)NDICATORS AND BINARY OUTPUTS SIGNAL ON THE FRONT PLATE OF THE DEVICE !DDITIONALLY A PER
RELAYS SONAL COMPUTER FOR EXAMPLE CAN BE CONNECTED VIA
THE OPERATION INTERFACE AND ALL THE INFORMATIONS CAN
)MPORTANT EVENTS AND CONDITIONS ARE INDICATED BY THEN BE SENT TO IT
OPTICAL INDICATORS ,%$ ON THE FRONT PLATES 4HE
MODULES ALSO CONTAIN SIGNAL RELAYS FOR REMOTE INDI )N THE QUIESCENT STATE IE AS LONG AS NO NETWORK
CATION -OST OF THE SIGNALS AND INDICATIONS CAN BE FAULTS ARE PRESENT THE DISPLAY OUTPUTS SELECTABLE OP
MARSHALLED IE THEY CAN BE ALLOCATED MEANINGS OTH ERATING INFORMATION USUALLY AN OPERATIONAL MEA
ER THAN THE FACTORY SETTINGS )N 3ECTION THE DELIV SURED VALUE IN EACH OF THE TWO LINES )N THE EVENT OF A
ERED CONDITION AND THE MARSHALLING FACILITIES ARE DE NETWORK FAULT SELECTABLE INFORMATION ON THE FAULT AP
SCRIBED IN DETAIL PEARS INSTEAD OF THE OPERATING INFORMATION EG DE
TECTED PHASES AND ELAPSED TIME FROM FAULT DETEC
4HE OUTPUT SIGNAL RELAYS ARE NOT LATCHED AND AUTO TION TO TRIP COMMAND 4HE QUIESCENT INFORMATION IS
MATICALLY RESET AS SOON AS THE ORIGINATING SIGNAL DIS DISPLAYED AGAIN ONCE THESE FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS
APPEARS 4HE ,%$S CAN BE ARRANGED TO LATCH OR TO BE HAVE BEEN ACKNOWLEDGED 4HE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
SELF RESETTING IS IDENTICAL TO RESETTING OF THE STORED ,%$ DISPLAYS AS
IN 3ECTION
4HE MEMORIES OF THE ,%$S ARE SAVED AGAINST SUPPLY
VOLTAGE FAILURE 4HEY CAN BE RESET 4HE DEVICE ALSO HAS SEVERAL EVENT BUFFERS EG FOR
OPERATING MESSAGES CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION STA
LOCALLY BY OPERATION OF THE RESET BUTTON ON THE TISTICS ETC SEE 3ECTION WHICH ARE SAVED AGAINST
RELAY SUPPLY VOLTAGE FAILURE BY A BUFFER BATTERY 4HESE
REMOTELY BY ENERGIZATION OF THE REMOTE RESET IN MESSAGES AS WELL AS ALL AVAILABLE OPERATING VALUES
PUT CAN BE TRANSFERRED INTO THE FRONT DISPLAY AT ANY TIME
REMOTELY VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES USING THE KEYBOARD OR TO THE PERSONAL COMPUTER VIA
AUTOMATICALLY ON OCCURRENCE OF A NEW GENERAL THE OPERATING INTERFACE
FAULT DETECTION SIGNAL
# ' #

!FTER A FAULT FOR EXAMPLE IMPORTANT INFORMATION CON $ATA STORAGE AND TRANSMISSION
CERNING ITS HISTORY SUCH AS PICK UP AND TRIPPING FOR FAULT RECORDING
CAN BE CALLED UP ON THE DISPLAY OF THE DEVICE 4HE
FAULT INCEPTION IS INDICATED WITH THE ABSOLUTE TIME OF
4HE INSTANTANEOUS VALUES OF THE MEASURED VALUES
THE OPERATING SYSTEM PROVIDED THE REAL TIME CLOCK IS
AVAILABLE 4HE SEQUENCE OF THE EVENTS IS TAGGED WITH
I, I, I, I% U, U, U, U%.
THE RELATIVE TIME REFERRED TO THE MOMENT AT WHICH THE . . .
FAULT DETECTOR HAS PICKED UP 4HUS THE ELAPSED TIME

ARE SAMPLED AT MS INTERVALS FOR (Z AND STORED
UNTIL TRIPPING IS INITIATED AND UNTIL RESET CAN BE READ
IN A CIRCULATING SHIFT REGISTER )N CASE OF A FAULT THE
OUT 4HE RESOLUTION IS MS
DATA ARE STORED OVER A SELECTABLE TIME PERIOD BUT
MAX OVER SECONDS 4HE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FAULT
4HE EVENTS CAN ALSO BE READ OUT WITH A PERSONAL
RECORDS WITHIN THIS TIME PERIOD IS 4HESE DATA ARE
COMPUTER BY MEANS OF THE APPROPRIATE PROGRAM
THEN AVAILABLE FOR FAULT ANALYSIS &OR EACH RENEWED
$)'3) 4HIS PROVIDES THE COMFORT OF A #24 SCREEN
FAULT EVENT THE ACTUAL NEW FAULT DATA ARE STORED WITH
AND MENU GUIDED OPERATION !DDITIONALLY THE DATA
OUT ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF THE OLD DATA
CAN BE DOCUMENTED ON A PRINTER OR STORED ON A
FLOPPY DISC FOR EVALUATION ELSEWHERE
4HE DATA CAN BE TRANSFERRED TO A CONNECTED PERSONAL
COMPUTER VIA THE OPERATION INTERFACE AT THE FRONT AND
4HE PROTECTION DEVICE STORES THE DATA OF THE LAST FOUR
EVALUATED BY THE PROTECTION DATA EVALUATION PROGRAM
NETWORK FAULTS IF A FIFTH FAULT OCCURS THE OLDEST FAULT IS
$)'3) 4HE CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES ARE REFERRED TO
OVERWRITTEN IN THE FAULT MEMORY 4HE ANNUNCIATIONS
THEIR MAXIMUM VALUES NORMALIZED TO THEIR RATED VAL
OF THE LAST THREE NETWORK FAULT CAN BE READ OUT IN THE
UES AND PREPARED FOR GRAPHIC VISUALIZATION )N ADDI
LOCAL DISPLAY
TION SIGNALS CAN BE MARKED AS BINARY TRACES EG
0ICK UP AND 4RIP
! NETWORK FAULT BEGINS WITH RECOGNITION OF THE FAULT BY
PICK UP OF ANY FAULT DETECTOR AND ENDS WITH FAULT DE
!DDITIONALLY THE FAULT RECORD DATA CAN BE TRANSMITTED
TECTOR RESET OR EXPIRY OF THE AUTO RECLOSE SEQUENCE
TO A CONTROL CENTRE VIA THE SERIAL SYSTEM INTERFACE IF
SO THAT NON SUCCESSFUL AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS WILL
FITTED %VALUATION OF THE DATA IS MADE IN THE CONTROL
ALSO BE STORED AS PART OF ONE NETWORK FAULT 4HUS
CENTRE USING APPROPRIATE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS 4HE
ONE NETWORK FAULT CAN INCLUDE DIFFERENT FAULT EVENTS
CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES ARE REFERRED TO THEIR MAXIMUM
FROM PICK UP UNTIL DROP OFF 4HIS IS PARTICULARLY
VALUES NORMALIZED TO THEIR RATED VALUES AND PRE
ADVANTAGEOUS FOR ALLOCATION OF TIME DATA
PARED FOR GRAPHIC VISUALIZATION )N ADDITION SIGNALS
CAN BE MARKED AS BINARY TRACES EG 0ICK UP AND
4RIP
7HEN THE DATA ARE TRANSFERRED TO A CENTRAL UNIT

)NFORMATION TO A CENTRAL UNIT OPTIONAL
READ OUT CAN PROCEED AUTOMATICALLY OPTIONALLY AF
TER EACH PICK UP OF THE RELAY OR ONLY AFTER A TRIP 4HE
)N ADDITION ALL STORED INFORMATION CAN BE TRANSMITTED
FOLLOWING THEN APPLIES
VIA AN OPTICAL FIBRE CONNECTOR OR THE ISOLATED SECOND
INTERFACE SYSTEM INTERFACE TO A CONTROL CENTRE FOR
4HE RELAY SIGNALS THE AVAILABILITY OF FAULT RECORD
EXAMPLE THE 3)%-%.3 ,OCALIZED 3UBSTATION !UTO
DATA
MATION 3YSTEM ,3! 4RANSMISSION USES A STAN
DARDIZED TRANSMISSION PROTOCOL ACCORDING TO )%#
4HE DATA REMAIN AVAILABLE FOR RECALL UNTIL THEY ARE
AND 6$%7:6%) OR SELECTABLE AC
OVERWRITTEN BY NEW DATA
CORDING TO $).
! TRANSMISSION IN PROGRESS CAN BE ABORTED BY THE
CENTRAL UNIT
# ' #

/PERATING MEASUREMENTS AND -ONITORING FUNCTIONS

CONVERSION
3! INCORPORATES COMPREHENSIVE MONITORING
&OR LOCAL RECALL OR TRANSMISSION OF DATA THE TRUE RMS FUNCTIONS WHICH COVER BOTH HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
VALUES OF THE CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES ARE ALWAYS AVAIL FURTHERMORE THE MEASURED VALUES ARE CONTINUOUSLY
ABLE AS ARE ACTIVE AND REACTIVE POWER AS WELL AS THE CHECKED FOR PLAUSIBILITY SO THAT THE CURRENT AND VOLT
FREQUENCY CALCULATED FROM AN AVERAGE OF MS AS AGE TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS ARE ALSO INCLUDED IN THE
LONG AS AT LEAST ONE PHASE VOLTAGE IS PRESENT MONITORING SYSTEM
4HE FOLLOWING IS VALID

(ARDWARE MONITORING
), ), ), 0HASE CURRENTS IN AMPS PRIMARY AND
IN OF RATED CURRENT ). 4HE COMPLETE HARDWARE IS MONITORED FOR FAULTS AND
INADMISSIBLE FUNCTIONS FROM THE MEASURED VALUE IN
5,% 5,% 6OLTAGES PHASE EARTH IN KILOVOLTS PUTS TO THE OUTPUT RELAYS )N DETAIL THIS IS ACCOM
5,% PRIMARY AND IN OF RATED VOLTAGE PLISHED BY MONITORING
5.o
!UXILIARY AND REFERENCE VOLTAGES
5, 5, 6OLTAGES PHASE PHASE IN KILOVOLTS
5, PRIMARY AND IN OF RATED VOLTAGE 4HE PROCESSOR MONITORS THE OFFSET AND REFERENCE
5. VOLTAGE OF THE !$# ANALOGDIGITAL CONVERTER 4HE
PROTECTION IS BLOCKED AS SOON AS IMPERMISSIBLE
0A !CTIVE POWER IN MEGAWATTS PRIMARY DEVIATIONS OCCUR 0ERMANENT FAULTS ARE ANNUN
AND IN OF o).5. CIATED
0R 2EACTIVE POWER IN MEGVARS PRIMARY &AILURE OR SWITCH OFF OF THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE AUTO
AND IN OF o).5. MATICALLY PUTS THE SYSTEM OUT OF OPERATION THIS
STATUS IS INDICATED BY A FAIL SAFE CONTACT 4RAN
F &REQUENCY IN OF RATED FREQUENCY SIENT DIPS IN SUPPLY VOLTAGE OF LESS THAN MS WILL
NOT DISTURB THE FUNCTION OF THE RELAY 5( 6
TRIP OVERLOAD MEASURED VALUES REFERRED
TO TRIP TEMPERATURE RISE -EASURED VALUE ACQUISITION
!DDITIONALLY THE COMPONENTS OF THE EARTH FAULT CUR 4HE COMPLETE CHAIN FROM THE INPUT TRANSFORMERS
RENT CAN BE OUTPUT FOR RELAYS WITH HIGHLY SENSITIVE UP TO AND INCLUDING THE ANALOGDIGITAL CONVERTERS
EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS ARE MONITORED BY THE PLAUSIBILITY CHECK OF THE
MEASURED VALUES
)%A )%R ACTIVE AND REACTIVE COMPONENT OF
EARTH FAULT CURRENT IN NON EARTHED )N THE CURRENT PATH THERE ARE FOUR INPUT CONVER
SYSTEMS TERS THE DIGITIZED SUM OF THE OUTPUTS OF THESE
MUST ALWAYS BE ZERO ! FAULT IN THE CURRENT PATH IS
%VEN THE DIRECTION OF THE ENERGY FLOW FORWARDS RECOGNIZED WHEN
LINE DIRECTION CAN BE RECALLED UPON REQUEST 4HESE
DATA ARE PARTICULARLY USEFUL WHEN CHECKING THAT THE \I, I, I, K) X I%\
TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS ARE CORRECT DURING COM 35-)THRES X ). 35-&ACT) X )MAX
MISSIONING SEE 3ECTION
# ' #

!N ADJUSTABLE FACTOR K) PARAMETER )E)PH CAN BE 3INCE THE PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGES ARE SEPA
SET TO CORRECT THE DIFFERENT RATIOS OF PHASE AND RATELY FORMED AND MEASURED WITHIN THE DEVICE A
EARTH CURRENT TRANSFORMERS EG WINDOW TYPE SIMILAR MONITORING PROCEDURE APPLIES
TRANSFORMER FOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION )F THE RESIDU
AL EARTH CURRENT IS DERIVED FROM THE CURRENT TRANS \U, , U, , U, \ 6
,
FORMER STARPOINT K) 35-)THRES AND

35-&ACT) ARE SETTING PARAMETERS REFER TO !DDITIONALLY THE PHASE PHASE VOLTAGES ARE COM
4HE COMPONENT 35-&ACT) X )MAX TAKES PARED WITH THE ASSOCIATED PHASE EARTH VOLTAGES
INTO ACCOUNT PERMISSIBLE CURRENT PROPORTIONAL ! FAULT WILL BE RECOGNIZED WHEN
TRANSFORMATION ERRORS IN THE INPUT CONVERTERS
WHICH MAY PARTICULARLY OCCUR UNDER CONDITIONS OF \U, , U, U, \ 6
HIGH SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENTS &IGURE \U, , U, U, \ 6
\U, , U, U, \ 6
.OTE #URRENT SUM MONITORING CAN OPERATE PROP
ERLY ONLY WHEN THE RESIDUAL CURRENT OF THE PRO )F ANY OF THESE MONITORING FUNCTIONS DETECTS THAT
TECTED LINE IS FED TO THE )% INPUT OF THE RELAY THE MEASURED VALUES ARE NOT PLAUSIBLE IT WILL CON
CLUDE THAT THERE IS A FAULT IN THE ANALOG MEASURE
MENT CIRCUITS !FTER APPROXIMATELY SECOND AN
ALARM WILL BE GIVEN
)&
)& &AULT CURRENT #OMMAND OUTPUT CHANNELS
).
3LOPE
35-&ACT)
4HE COMMAND RELAYS FOR TRIPPING AND CLOSING ARE
CONTROLLED BY TWO COMMAND AND ONE ADDITIONAL
RELEASE CHANNELS !S LONG AS NO PICK UP CONDI
35-)THRES TION EXISTS THE CENTRAL PROCESSOR MAKES A CYCLIC
CHECK OF THESE COMMAND OUTPUT CHANNELS FOR
AVAILABILITY BY EXCITING EACH CHANNEL ONE AFTER THE
OTHER AND CHECKING FOR CHANGE IN THE OUTPUT SIG
) MAX
). NAL LEVEL #HANGE OF THE FEED BACK SIGNAL TO LOW
LEVEL INDICATES A FAULT IN ONE OF THE CONTROL CHAN
&IGURE #URRENT SUM MONITORING CURRENT NELS OR IN THE RELAY COIL 3UCH A CONDITION LEADS AU
PLAUSIBILITY CHECK TOMATICALLY TO ALARM AND BLOCKING OF THE COMMAND
OUTPUT
-EMORY MODULES
)N THE VOLTAGE PATH THERE ARE SEVEN INPUT CONVER
TERS THREE CONNECTED TO EACH PHASE EARTH VOLT 4HE MEMORY MODULES ARE PERIODICALLY CHECKED
AGE THREE CONNECTED TO EACH PHASE PHASE VOLT FOR FAULT BY
AGE ONE FURTHER CONNECTED TO THE DISPLACEMENT
VOLTAGE 5%. OR A BUS BAR VOLTAGE ! FAULT IN THE C 7RITING A DATA BIT PATTERN FOR THE WORKING
VOLTAGE CIRCUITS WILL BE RECOGNIZED WHEN MEMORY 2!- AND READING IT
\U, U, U, K5 | U%.\ 6 C &ORMATION OF THE MODULUS FOR THE PROGRAM
MEMORY %02/- AND COMPARISON OF IT WITH A
&ACTOR K5 PARAMETER 5PH5DELTA CAN BE SET TO REFERENCE PROGRAM MODULUS STORED THERE
CORRECT DIFFERENT RATIOS OF PHASE AND OPEN DELTA
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER WINDINGS C &ORMATION OF THE MODULUS OF THE VALUES STORED
IN THE PARAMETER STORE %%02/- THEN COM
.OTE 6OLTAGE SUM PHASE EARTH MONITORING CAN PARING IT WITH THE NEWLY DETERMINED MODULUS AF
OPERATE PROPERLY ONLY WHEN AN EXTERNALLY FORMED TER EACH PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT PROCESS
OPEN DELTA VOLTAGE 5%. IS CONNECTED TO THE RESID
UAL VOLTAGE INPUT OF THE RELAY
# ' #

3OFTWARE MONITORING ) MIN

).
&OR CONTINUOUS MONITORING OF THE PROGRAM SE
QUENCES A WATCHDOG TIMER IS PROVIDED WHICH WILL RE
SET THE PROCESSOR IN THE EVENT OF PROCESSOR FAILURE OR 3LOPE
39-&ACT)
IF A PROGRAM FALLS OUT OF STEP &URTHER INTERNAL PLAUSI
BILITY CHECKS ENSURE THAT ANY FAULT IN PROCESSING OF
THE PROGRAMS CAUSED BY INTERFERENCE WILL BE RECOG
NIZED 3UCH FAULTS LEAD TO RESET AND RESTART OF THE PRO
CESSOR ) MAX
39-)THRES ).
)F SUCH A FAULT IS NOT ELIMINATED BY RESTARTING FURTHER
RESTARTS ARE INITIATED )F THE FAULT IS STILL PRESENT AFTER
&IGURE #URRENT SYMMETRY MONITORING
THREE RESTART ATTEMPTS THE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM WILL
SWITCH ITSELF OUT OF SERVICE AND INDICATE THIS CONDITION
BY DROP OFF OF THE AVAILABILITY RELAY THUS INDICATING
EQUIPMENT FAULT AND SIMULTANEOUSLY THE ,%$ 6OLTAGE SYMMETRY
"LOCKED COMES ON
)N HEALTHY OPERATION IT CAN BE EXPECTED THAT THE
VOLTAGES WILL BE APPROXIMATELY SYMMETRICAL
4HEREFORE THE DEVICE CHECKS THE THREE PHASE
TO PHASE VOLTAGES FOR SYMMETRY -ONITORING OF
-ONITORING OF EXTERNAL MEASURING THE SUM OF THE PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGES IS NOT
TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS INFLUENCED BY EARTH FAULTS WHICH CAN BE A LASTING
OPERATING CONDITION IN NON EARTHED NETWORKS
4O DETECT INTERRUPTIONS OR SHORT CIRCUITS IN THE EXTER
NAL MEASURING TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS OR FAULTS IN THE 4HE FOLLOWING APPLIES
CONNECTIONS AN IMPORTANT COMMISSIONING AID THE
MEASURED VALUES ARE CHECKED AT CYCLIC INTERVALS AS \ 5MIN \ \ 5MAX \ 39-&ACT5
LONG AS NO PICK UP CONDITION EXISTS IF
\ 5MAX \ 39-5THRES
#URRENT SYMMETRY
WHEREBY 5MAX IS THE LARGEST OF THE THREE VOLTAGES
)N HEALTHY OPERATION IT CAN BE EXPECTED THAT THE
AND 5MIN THE SMALLEST 4HE SYMMETRY FACTOR
CURRENTS WILL BE APPROXIMATELY SYMMETRICAL 4HE 39-&ACT5 REPRESENTS THE MAGNITUDE OF THE
FOLLOWING APPLIES ASYMMETRY OF THE SUM OF THE VOLTAGES 4HE THRESH
OLD 39-5THRES IS THE LOWER LIMIT OF THE PROCESSING
\ )MIN \ \ )MAX \ 39-&ACT) AREA OF THIS MONITORING FUNCTION SEE &IGURE
IF "OTH PARAMETERS CAN BE SET SEE 3ECTION
)MAX ). 39-)THRES ).
)MAX IS ALWAYS THE LARGEST OF THE THREE PHASE CUR

RENTS AND )MIN ALWAYS THE SMALLEST 4HE SYMMETRY
FACTOR 39-&ACT) REPRESENTS THE MAGNITUDE OF 5MIN
ASYMMETRY OF THE PHASE CURRENTS AND THE THRESH 5.
OLD 39-)THRES IS THE LOWER LIMIT OF THE PROCESSING
AREA OF THIS MONITORING FUNCTION SEE &IGURE 3LOPE
"OTH PARAMETERS CAN BE SET SEE 3ECTION 39-&ACT5
5MAX
39-5THRES 5.
&IGURE 6OLTAGE SYMMETRY MONITORING
# ' #

-EASURED VOLTAGE FAILURE ARY CIRCUITS OF THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 4HE DIS
TANCE FUNCTION IS THEN BLOCKED AND THE RELAY CAN
&AILURE OF THE MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE CAN BE DE BE SWITCHED TO EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT OPERATION
TECTED WHEN A MINIMUM CURRENT FLOWS ON THE PRO SEE 3ECTION )MMEDIATE BLOCKING IS PER
TECTED LINE BUT THE CURRENT STAGES )PH OF THE FAULT FORMED PROVIDED AT LEAST ONE PHASE CURRENT IS
DETECTORS HAVE NOT YET PICKED UP 6OLTAGE FAILURE FLOWING
IS DETECTED WHEN
)F WITHIN APPROXIMATELY SECONDS OF RECOGNITION
5PH PH 5-%!3 5 AND AT THE SAME TIME OF THIS CRITERION AN EARTH CURRENT OCCURS DISTANCE
)MAX 5-%!3 ) PROTECTION AUTOMATICALLY BECOMES OPERATIVE FOR
THE DURATION OF THE TIME OF THE EARTH FAULT )F THE FUSE
WHEREBY 5PH PH REPRESENTS ANY PHASE PHASE FAILURE CRITERION LASTS LONGER THAN APPROXIMATELY
VOLTAGE 5-%!3 5 AND 5-%!3 ) ARE SETTING SECONDS THE DISTANCE PROTECTION IS BLOCKED AND
PARAMETERS SEE 3ECTION 4HIS MONITOR WILL NOT BE RELEASED UNTIL THE CAUSE OF THE VOLTAGE
DOES NOT OPERATE ONCE THE MINIMUM CURRENT FAILURE HAS BEEN REMOVED 4HE DISTANCE PROTEC
THRESHOLD OF ANY FAULT DETECTOR HAS BEEN EXCEED TION FUNCTION WILL THEN AUTOMATICALLY BE RESTORED
ED SINCE THIS MAY INDICATE A REAL SYSTEM FAULT
.OTE 7HEN FOR EXAMPLE ON LINES FED BY UN
!FTER THIS MONITOR HAS OPERATED DISTANCE PROTEC EARTHED TRANSFORMERS THE EARTH CURRENT DURING
TION IS BLOCKED AND WILL NOT BE RELEASED UNTIL THE EARTH FAULT IS INSIGNIFICANTLY SMALL OR ABSENT THE
CAUSE OF THE VOLTAGE FAILURE HAS BEEN REMOVED FUSE FAILURE MONITORING MUST NOT BE ACTIVATED )N
4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION FUNCTION WILL THEN AUTO NON EARTHED NETWORKS THIS FUSE FAILURE MONITOR
MATICALLY BE RESTORED #HANGE OVER TO OVERCUR ING FACILITY IS POINTLESS AND WILL BE IGNORED BY
RENT EMERGENCY PROTECTION IS POSSIBLE 3!
&USE FAILURE MONITOR 0HASE ROTATION
)F ANY MEASURED VOLTAGE IS NOT PRESENT DUE TO 3INCE CORRECT FUNCTIONING OF MEASURED VALUE SE
SHORT CIRCUIT OR CONDUCTOR BREAKAGE IN THE VOLTAGE LECTION AND DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION RELIES UPON
TRANSFORMER SECONDARY SYSTEM IT MAY APPEAR A CLOCKWISE SEQUENCE OF THE PHASE VOLTAGES THE
THAT THE VOLTAGE IS ZERO FOR CERTAIN MEASURED DIRECTION OF ROTATION IS MONITORED
LOOPS
5, BEFORE 5, BEFORE 5,
)F NO PROTECTIVE MCB WITH APPROPRIATELY SET AUXIL
IARY CONTACT IS AVAILABLE IN THE 64 SECONDARY CIR 4HIS CHECK IS CARRIED OUT WHEN THE MEASURED VOLT
CUIT BUT INSTEAD FOR EXAMPLE FUSES ARE FITTED THE AGES AS DESCRIBED IN ARE PLAUSIBLE AND
OPTIONAL FUNCTION FUSE FAILURE MONITOR CAN BE HAVE A MINIMUM VALUE OF AT LEAST
MADE EFFECTIVE IN SOLIDLY EARTHED NETWORKS /B
VIOUSLY THIS FUNCTION CAN ALSO BE USED TOGETHER \5,\\5,\\5,\ 6o
WITH THE ABOVE MENTIONED 64 PROTECTIVE MCB
#OUNTER CLOCKWISE ROTATION WILL CAUSE AN ALARM
7HEN A ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE IS INDICATED WITH
OUT SIMULTANEOUS RECOGNITION OF AN EARTH FAULT THIS 4ABLE GIVES A SURVEY OF ALL THE FUNCTIONS OF THE
IS INDICATIVE OF A SINGLE PHASE FAULT IN THE SECOND MEASURED VALUE MONITORING SYSTEM
# ' #

-ONITORING &AILURE COVERED REACTION

0LAUSIBILITY CHECK OF CURRENTS 2ELAY FAILURES IN THE SIGNAL ACQUISITION CIRCUITS
I, I, I, I%
\I, I, I, )E)PH X I%\
35-)THRES X ). 35-&ACT) X )MAX DELAYED ALARM &AILURE ¦)
0LAUSIBILITY CHECK OF VOLTAGES PHASE EARTH 2ELAY FAILURES IN THE SIGNAL ACQUISITION CIRCUITS
U, U, U, U%
\U, U, U, 5PH5DELTA X U%.\ 6
DELAYED ALARM &AILURE ¦5PH E
0LAUSIBILITY CHECK OF VOLTAGE PHASE PHASE 2ELAY FAILURES IN THE SIGNAL ACQUISITION CIRCUITS
U, , U, , U, ,
\U, , U, , U, \ 6
, DELAYED ALARM &AILURE ¦5P P
0HASE PHASE VOLTAGES AGAINST VOLTAGE #ONNECTION ERROR IN ONE OF THE VOLTAGE CONNEC
DIFFERENCES TIONS PHASE PHASE ANDOR PHASE EARTH
\U, , U, U, \ 6
\U, , U, U, \ 6 DELAYED ALARM &AILURE ¦5P P
\U, , U, U, \ 6
#URRENT UNBALANCE 3INGLE OR PHASE TO PHASE SHORT CIRCUITS OR BRO
\) MIN\ KEN CONDUCTORS IN THE CT CIRCUITS I, I, I,
39-&ACT) OR
\) MAX\ 5NBALANCED LOAD
AND \)MAXb 39-)THRES DELAYED ALARM &AILURE )SYMM
6OLTAGE UNBALANCE PHASE PHASE 3HORT CIRCUIT OR INTERRUPTION PHASE PHASE

\5 MIN\ IN VT SECONDARY CIRCUITS
39-&ACT5 OR
\5 MAX\ UNBALANCED VOLTAGE ON THE SYSTEM
AND \5MAXi 39-5THRES DELAYED ALARM &AILURE 5SYMM
-EASURED VOLTAGE FAILURE ,OSS OF MEASURED VOLTAGES
5PH PH 5-%!3 5 AND )MAX 5-%!3 ) DELAYED ALARM &AILURE 5MEAS

AND BLOCK OF DISTANCE PROTECTION
&USE FAILURE MONITOR &USE FAILURE OR CONDUCTOR INTERRUPTION NON SYM

METRIC IN VT SECONDARY CIRCUIT
\U, U, U,\ &&- ~5O AND
DELAYED ALARM &USE &AILURE
\I, I, I,\ &&- )E AND IMMEDIATE BLOCK OF DISTANCE PROTECTION
0HASE ROTATION 3WOPPED VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS OR REVERSE ROTATION
SEQUENCE
U, BEFORE U, BEFORE U,
AS LONG AS \5,\ \5,\ \5,\ 6o DELAYED ALARM &AIL0HASE3EQ
"OLTED FIGURES ARE SETTING VALUES
4ABLE 3UMMARY OF MEASURING CIRCUIT MONITORING
# ' #

3!6 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
)NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
7ARNING
4HE SUCCESSFUL AND SAFE OPERATION OF THIS DEVICE IS DEPENDENT ON PROPER HANDLING AND INSTALLATION
BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL UNDER OBSERVANCE OF ALL WARNINGS AND HINTS CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL
)N PARTICULAR THE GENERAL ERECTION AND SAFETY REGULATIONS EG )%# $). 6$% OR NATIONAL STANDARDS
REGARDING THE CORRECT USE OF HOISTING GEAR MUST BE OBSERVED .ON OBSERVANCE CAN RESULT IN DEATH
PERSONAL INJURY OR SUBSTANTIAL PROPERTY DAMAGE
5NPACKING AND REPACKING 0REPARATIONS
7HEN DISPATCHED FROM THE FACTORY THE EQUIPMENT IS 4HE OPERATING CONDITIONS MUST ACCORD WITH 6$%
PACKED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE GUIDELINES LAID DOWN AND 6$% PART OR CORRESPOND
IN )%# WHICH SPECIFIES THE IMPACT RESIS ING NATIONAL STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL POWER INSTALLA
TANCE OF PACKAGING TIONS
4HIS PACKING SHALL BE REMOVED WITH CARE WITHOUT

#AUTION
FORCE AND WITHOUT THE USE OF INAPPROPRIATE TOOLS 4HE
EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE VISUALLY CHECKED TO ENSURE 4HE MODULES OF DIGITAL RELAYS CONTAIN #-/3
THAT THERE ARE NO EXTERNAL TRACES OF DAMAGE CIRCUITS 4HESE SHALL NOT BE WITHDRAWN OR IN
SERTED UNDER LIVE CONDITIONS 4HE MODULES
4HE TRANSPORT PACKING CAN BE RE USED FOR FURTHER MUST BE SO HANDLED THAT ANY POSSIBILITY OF
TRANSPORT WHEN APPLIED IN THE SAME WAY 4HE STOR DAMAGE DUE TO STATIC ELECTRICAL CHARGES IS
AGE PACKING OF THE INDIVIDUAL RELAYS IS NOT SUITED TO EXCLUDED $URING ANY NECESSARY HANDLING
OF INDIVIDUAL MODULES THE RECOMMENDA
TRANSPORT )F ALTERNATIVE PACKING IS USED THIS MUST
TIONS RELATING TO THE HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATI
ALSO PROVIDE THE SAME DEGREE OF PROTECTION AGAINST CALLY ENDANGERED COMPONENTS %%# MUST
MECHANICAL SHOCK AS LAID DOWN IN )%# BE OBSERVED
CLASS AND )%# CLASS
)N INSTALLED CONDITIONS THE MODULES ARE IN NO DAN
"EFORE INITIAL ENERGIZATION WITH SUPPLY VOLTAGE THE
GER
RELAY SHALL BE SITUATED IN THE OPERATING AREA FOR AT
LEAST TWO HOURS IN ORDER TO ENSURE TEMPERATURE
EQUALIZATION AND TO AVOID HUMIDITY INFLUENCES AND
CONDENSATION
# ' #

-OUNTING AND CONNECTIONS #HECKING THE RATED DATA
-ODEL 3!J J"JJJ FOR PANEL SUR 4HE RATED DATA OF THE UNIT MUST BE CHECKED AGAINST
FACE MOUNTING THE PLANT DATA 4HIS APPLIES IN PARTICULAR TO THE AUXIL
IARY VOLTAGE AND THE RATED CURRENT OF THE CURRENT
3ECURE THE UNIT WITH FOUR SCREWS TO THE PANEL &OR TRANSFORMERS
DIMENSIONS REFER TO &IGURE
#ONNECT EARTHING TERMINAL 4ERMINAL OF THE UNIT

TO THE PROTECTIVE EARTH OF THE PANEL #ONTROL DC VOLTAGE OF BINARY INPUTS
-AKE A SOLID LOW OHMIC AND LOW INDUCTIVE OP 7HEN DELIVERED FROM FACTORY THE BINARY INPUTS ARE
ERATIONAL EARTH CONNECTION BETWEEN THE EARTHING DESIGNED TO OPERATE WITH A CONTROL VOLTAGE WHICH
SURFACE AT THE SIDE OF THE UNIT USING AT LEAST ONE CORRESPONDS WITH THE RATED VOLTAGE OF THE POWER
STANDARD SCREW - AND THE EARTHING CONTINUITY SUPPLY OF THE RELAY )N ORDER TO OPTIMIZE THE OPERATION
SYSTEM OF THE PANEL RECOMMENDED GROUNDING OF THE INPUTS THEY SHOULD BE MATCHED TO THE REAL
STRAP $). FORM ! EG /RDER .O OF CONTROL VOLTAGE )T DEPENDS ON THE HARD WARE STATE
-ESSRS $RUSEIDT 2EMSCHEID 'ERMANY PRODUCTION SERIES OF THE RELAY HOW THIS IS CARRIED
OUT 4HIS STATE IS FOUND ON THE NAME PLATE BEHIND THE
-AKE CONNECTIONS VIA SCREWED TERMINALS COMPLETE ORDER DESIGNATION
4HE FOLLOWING IS VALID FOR PRODUCTION SERIES ''
-ODEL 3!J J#JJJ FOR PANEL FLUSH 4HE BINARY INPUTS REACT ON CONTROL DC VOLTAGES IN
MOUNTING OR 3!J J%JJJ FOR CU THE TOTAL VOLTAGE RANGE FROM 6 TO 6 4HE
BICLE INSTALLATION PICK UP THRESHOLD LIES NEAR 6 )F THE RATED CON
TROL VOLTAGE FOR BINARY INPUTS IS 6 OR HIGHER IT IS
,IFT UP BOTH LABELLING STRIPS ON THE LID OF THE UNIT ADVISABLE TO FIT A HIGHER PICK UP THRESHOLD TO
AND REMOVE COVER TO GAIN ACCESS TO FOUR HOLES FOR THESE INPUTS TO INCREASE STABILITY AGAINST STRAY
THE FIXING SCREWS VOLTAGES IN THE DC CIRCUITS
)NSERT THE UNIT INTO THE PANEL CUT OUT AND SECURE IT 4O FIT A HIGHER PICK UP THRESHOLD OF APPROXIMATELY
WITH THE FIXING SCREWS &OR DIMENSIONS REFER TO &IG 6 TO A BINARY INPUT A SOLDER BRIDGE MUST BE RE
URE MOVED &IGURE SHOWS THE ASSIGNMENT OF THESE
SOLDER BRIDGES FOR THE INPUTS ") TO ") AND THEIR
#ONNECT EARTHING SCREW ON THE REAR OF THE UNIT TO LOCATION ON THE BASIC PCB OF THE BASIC INPUTOUT
THE PROTECTIVE EARTH OF THE PANEL OR CUBICLE PUT MODULE '%! &IGURE SHOWS THE ASSIGN
MENT OF THESE SOLDER BRIDGES FOR THE INPUTS ") TO
-AKE A SOLID LOW OHMIC AND LOW INDUCTIVE OP ") AND THEIR LOCATION ON THE ADDITIONAL INPUT
ERATIONAL EARTH CONNECTION BETWEEN THE EARTHING OUTPUT MODULE :%!
SURFACE AT THE REAR OF THE UNIT USING AT LEAST ONE
STANDARD SCREW - AND THE EARTHING CONTINUITY 4HE FOLLOWING IS VALID FOR PRODUCTION SERIES (( OR LAT
SYSTEM OF THE PANEL OR CUBICLE RECOMMENDED ER
GROUNDING STRAP $). FORM ! EG /RDER
.O OF -ESSRS $RUSEIDT 2EMSCHEID 'ER 4ABLE SHOWS THE ASSIGNMENT OF THE PRESET
MANY TINGS OF THE CONTROL VOLTAGE OF THE BINARY INPUTS
AGAINST THE RATED SUPPLY VOLTAGE OF THE RELAY )F THE
-AKE CONNECTIONS VIA THE SCREWED OR SNAP IN CONTROL VOLTAGE OF A BINARY INPUT IS OF THE SAME
TERMINALS OF THE SOCKETS OF THE HOUSING /BSERVE MAGNITUDE AS THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE OF THE RELAY NO
LABELLING OF THE INDIVIDUAL CONNECTOR MODULES TO MATCHING IS NECESSARY %VEN WITH HIGHER CONTROL
ENSURE CORRECT LOCATION OBSERVE THE MAX PERMIS VOLTAGE THE BINARY INPUT WILL OPERATE "UT IT IS AD
SIBLE CONDUCTOR CROSS SECTIONS 4HE USE OF THE VISABLE TO FIT A HIGHER PICK UP THRESHOLD TO IN
SCREWED TERMINALS IS RECOMMENDED SNAP IN CREASE STABILITY AGAINST STRAY VOLTAGES 2EFER TO
CONNECTION REQUIRES SPECIAL TOOLS AND MUST NOT BE 4ABLE FOR POSSIBILITIES )F A BINARY INPUT IS TO BE
USED FOR FIELD WIRING UNLESS PROPER STRAIN RELIEF AND CONTROLLED BY A LOWER VOLTAGE THEN THE PICK UP
THE PERMISSIBLE BENDING RADIUS ARE OBSERVED THRESHOLD MUST BE MATCHED /THERWISE IT CANNOT
BE ENERGIZED
# ' #

8 8 8 8
"INARY INPUT 3OLDER BRIDGE 8
&OR RATED VOLTAGES 6 3OLDER BRIDGES MUST BE FITTED
&OR RATED VOLTAGES 6 3OLDER BRIDGES MAY BE REMOVED

#UT AND BEND ASIDE
&IGURE #HECKING FOR CONTROL VOLTAGES FOR BINARY INPUTS TO ON BASIC MODULE '%! UP TO PRO
DUCTION SERIES ''
8 8 8 8 8 8
&OR RATED VOLTAGES 6 3OLDER BRIDGES MUST BE FITTED
&OR RATED VOLTAGES 6 3OLDER BRIDGES MAY BE REMOVED

#UT AND BEND ASIDE
&IGURE #HECKING FOR CONTROL VOLTAGES FOR BINARY INPUTS TO ON ADDITIONAL MODULE :%! UP TO
PRODUCTION SERIES ''
# ' #

4ABLE SHOWS THE SETTING POSSIBILITIES FOR THE

/RDER CODE 2ATED AUXILIARY 0RESETTING OF BINARY INPUTS ") TO ") ON THE BASIC PCB OF THE
3!J VOLTAGE RANGE BINARY INPUTS
BASIC INPUTOUTPUT MODULE '%! 4ABLE FOR THE
INPUTS ") TO ") ON THE ADDITIONAL INPUTOUTPUT
JJJJ JJJJ 6DC 6DC MODULE :%! 4HE FIGURES AND SHOW THE
JJJJ JJJJ 6DC 6DC PRINTED CIRCUITS BOARDS VIEWED FROM THE COMPONENT
SIDE WITH THE SETTING PLUGS FOR THE CONTROL VOLTAGE OF
JJJJ JJJJ 6 6DC THE BINARY INPUTS 4HEY ARE VALID FOR RELAYS FROM PRO
DUCTION SERIES (( )F THE ACTUAL CONTROL VOLTAGE IS NOT
FOUND ON THE PCB SELECT THE SETTING FOR THE NEXT
4ABLE 0RESETTING OF CONTROL VOLTAGE FOR LOWER VOLTAGE 4HE FIGURES SHOW FURTHER PLUGS WHICH
BINARY INPUTS FOR PRODUCTION SERIES
MUST NOT BE CHANGED
(( OR LATER
"INARY INPUT 3ETTINGS FOR RATED CONTROL VOLTAGE

ON '%! 6DC 6DC 6DC 6DC
") PLUG 8 8 PLUG 8 8 PLUG 8 8 NO PLUG

5NUSED PLUGS MAY BE PARKED ON THE PINS 8 TO 8
4ABLE #HECKING FOR CONTROL VOLTAGES OF BINARY INPUTS TO ON THE BASIC MODULE '%! VALID FROM
PRODUCTION SERIES ((
"INARY INPUT 3ETTINGS FOR RATED CONTROL VOLTAGE

ON :%! 6DC 6DC 6DC 6DC
") PLUG 6 PLUG 6 PLUG 6 PLUG 6

4ABLE #HECKING FOR CONTROL VOLTAGES OF BINARY INPUTS TO ON THE ADDITIONAL MODULE :%! VALID
FROM PRODUCTION SERIES ((
# ' #

8 TO 8 UNUSED PLUGS

MAY BE PARKED HERE

8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

8 8 8 8

8 8 8 8

8 8 8 8

8 8 8 8

8 8 8 8

8 8 8 8
C C
D D
6 6 C
D
6
C
D
6
D

T E T T T
K
U R U U U
P D A 8 P D P D P D
IN E
T
P IN E
T IN E
T IN E
T
Y A IS Y A Y A Y A
D R RT R RT R RT R RT
E A S G 8 A S A S A S
T
A IN U
LL LU N IN U
LL IN U
LL IN U
LL
RT " I 0 O " I " I " I
S
LU
IL
D S
E A

G
G D
LU E
P G
T G
O LU
N P

! !

) .) .
T T
A A
8
8

8 8

8
8 8
&IGURE 3ETTING PLUGS ON BASIC INPUTOUTPUT MODULE '%! FROM PRODUCTION SERIES ((
# ' #

6 6 6 6 6

6 6 6 6 6 6
6 6 6 6 6 6

6 6 6 6 6 6

C C C C
D D D D
6 6 6 6 C
D
C 6
D
6

T T T T T T
U U U U U U
P D P D P D P D P D P D
IN E
T IN E T IN E
T IN E
T IN E
T IN E
T
Y A Y A Y A Y A Y A Y A
R RT R RT R RT R RT R RT R RT
A S A S A S A S A S A S
IN U
LL IN U L IN U
LL IN U
LL IN U
LL IN U
LL
" I " LI " I " I " I " I

8

8
AT )
. ! NOT PLUGGED
AT )
. ! PLUGGED AS ILLUSTRATED
WITH HIGHLY SENSITIVE EARTH CURRENT
INPUT NOT PLUGGED
&IGURE 3ETTING PLUGS ON ADDITIONAL INPUTOUTPUT MODULE :%! FROM PRODUCTION SERIES ((
# ' #

/PEN HOUSING COVER WHERE NECESSARY

&OR PRODUCTION SERIES FROM (( CHECK THE PLUGS
,OOSEN THE BASIC MODULE USING THE PULLING AIDS ACCORDING TO &IGURE
PROVIDED AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM
)NSERT BASIC MODULE INTO THE HOUSING ENSURE THAT
#AUTION THE RELEASING LEVER IS PUSHED FULLY TO THE LEFT BEFORE
THE MODULE IS PRESSED IN
%LECTROSTATIC DISCHARGES VIA THE COMPO
NENT CONNECTIONS THE 0#" TRACKS OR THE &IRMLY PUSH IN THE MODULE USING THE RELEASING LE
CONNECTING PINS OF THE MODULES MUST BE VER
AVOIDED UNDER ALL CIRCUMSTANCES BY PRE
VIOUSLY TOUCHING AN EARTHED METAL SUR
3IMILARLY CHECK ON THE ADDITIONAL INPUTOUTPUT
FACE
MODULE :%!
&OR PRODUCTION SERIES UP TO '' CHECK SOLDER
0ULL OUT BASIC MODULE AND PLACE ONTO A CONDUC BRIDGES ACCORDING TO &IGURE
TIVE SURFACE &OR PRODUCTION SERIES FROM (( CHECK THE PLUGS
ACCORDING TO &IGURE
&OR PRODUCTION SERIES UP TO '' CHECK THE SOLDER
BRIDGES ACCORDING TO &IGURE REMOVE BRIDGES #LOSE HOUSING COVER
)NSERTING THE BACK UP BATTERY
4HE DEVICE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE STORED IN .6 2!-S 4HE BATTERY IS SUPPLIED SEPARATELY WITH RELAYS OF PRO
%VEN THE FAULT RECORDING DATA ARE STORED IN .6 DUCTION SERIES UP TO '' )T SHOULD BE INSERTED BE
2!-S FOR RELAYS FROM PRODUCTION SERIES '' OR LATER FORE THE RELAY IS INSTALLED 3ECTION EXPLAINS IN DE
! BACK UP BATTERY IS AVAILABLE SO THAT THEY ARE RE TAIL HOW TO REPLACE THE BACK UP BATTERY *OIN THIS
TAINED EVEN WITH A LONGER FAILURE OF THE DC SUPPLY SECTION ACCORDINGLY WHEN INSERTING THE BATTERY FOR
VOLTAGE 4HE BACK UP BATTERY IS ALSO REQUIRED FOR THE THE FIRST TIME
INTERNAL SYSTEM CLOCK WITH CALENDER TO CONTINUE IN
THE EVENT OF A POWER SUPPLY FAILURE 7HEN THE PRODUCTION SERIES OF THE RELAY IS (( OR LAT
ER THE BATTERY IS INSTALLED AT DELIVERY SO THAT NO ACTIVI
TIES ARE NECESSARY HERE
#HECKING ,3! TRANSMISSION LINK
&OR MODELS WITH INTERFACE FOR A CENTRAL DATA PROCESS 48$ 4RANSMIT LINE OF THE RESPECTIVE UNIT
ING STATION EG ,3! THESE CONNECTIONS MUST ALSO -4 &RAME REFERENCE FOR THE TRANSMIT LINE
BE CHECKED )T IS IMPORTANT TO VISUALLY CHECK THE ALLO
CATION OF THE TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER CHANNELS 28$ 2ECEIVE LINE OF THE RESPECTIVE UNIT
3INCE EACH CONNECTION IS USED FOR ONE TRANSMISSION -2 &RAME REFERENCE FOR THE RECEIVE LINE
DIRECTION THE TRANSMIT CONNECTION OF THE RELAY MUST
BE CONNECTED TO THE RECEIVE CONNECTION OF THE CEN 4HE CONDUCTOR SCREEN AND THE COMMON OVERALL
TRAL UNIT AND VICE VERSA SCREEN MUST BE EARTHED AT ONE LINE END ONLY 4HIS
PREVENTS CIRCULATING CURRENTS FROM FLOWING VIA THE
)F DATA CABLES ARE USED THE CONNECTIONS ARE MARKED SCREEN IN CASE OF POTENTIAL DIFFERENCES
IN SYMPATHY WITH )3/ AND $).
# ' #

4RANSMISSION VIA OPTICAL FIBRE IS RECOMMENDED )T IS OF THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD CENTRE BOARD &IGURE
PARTICULARLY INSENSITIVE AGAINST DISTURBANCES AND AU
TOMATICALLY PROVIDES GALVANIC ISOLATION 4RANSMIT AND
RECEIVE CONNECTOR ARE DESIGNATED WITH THE SYMBOLS
FOR TRANSMIT OUTPUT AND FOR RECEIVE IN *UMPER 0OSITION .ORMAL SIGNAL POSITION
PUT
8 ,IGHT OFF
8 ,IGHT ON
4HE NORMAL SIGNAL POSITION FOR THE DATA TRANSMISSION
IS FACTORY PRESET AS LIGHT OFF 4HIS CAN BE CHANGED
BY MEANS OF A PLUG JUMPER 8 WHICH IS ACCESSIBLE 4HE FIGURE SHOWS ADDITIONALLY THE POSITION OF FURTHER
WHEN THE BASIC INPUTOUTPUT MODULE IS REMOVED PLUGS WHICH ARE PRESET BY THE FACTORY AND MUST NOT
FROM THE CASE 4HE JUMPER IS SITUATED IN THE REAR AREA BE CHANGED

8 $ 8

8 8
8 8
8 8
8 8
8 8
8 8
8 8
8
#
8
8 8
8 8 8

0LUG JUMPER SHOWN AS DELIVERED

8 0OSITION ,IGHT OFF

WITH 6 INTERFACE WITH OPTICAL FIBRE IN

TERFACE
&IGURE 0OSITION OF THE JUMPER 8 ON THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD
# ' #

#ONNECTIONS C )S THE POLARITY OF THE OPEN DELTA WINDING ON THE

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND THE CONNECTION COR
RECT IF FITTED
'ENERAL AND CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ARE SHOWN IN !P
PENDIX ! AND " 4HE MARSHALLING POSSIBILITIES OF THE
C !RE THE POLARITIES OF THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANS
BINARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ARE DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION
FORMERS CORRECT IF USED FOR SYNCHRONISM OR VOLT
AGE CHECK
)F TEST SWITCHES HAVE BEEN FITTED IN THE SECONDARY

CIRCUITS CHECK THEIR FUNCTION PARTICULARLY THAT IN
THE TEST POSITION THE CURRENT TRANSFORMER SEC
#HECKING THE CONNECTIONS ONDARY CIRCUITS ARE AUTOMATICALLY SHORT CIRCUITED
%NSURE THAT THE MINIATURE SLIDE SWITCH ON THE FRONT

7ARNING PLATE IS IN THE /&& ew POSITION REFER &IGURE
3OME OF THE FOLLOWING TEST STEPS ARE CARRIED
OUT IN PRESENCE OF HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES
4HEY SHALL BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED PER &IT A DC AMMETER IN THE AUXILIARY POWER CIRCUIT
SONNEL ONLY WHICH IS THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH RANGE APPROX ! TO !
ALL SAFETY REGULATIONS AND PRECAUTIONARY
MEASURES AND PAY DUE ATTENTION TO THEM #LOSE THE BATTERY SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER CHECK
.ON OBSERVANCE CAN RESULT IN SEVERE PER POLARITY AND MAGNITUDE OF VOLTAGE AT THE TERMINALS
SONAL INJURY
OF THE UNIT OR AT THE CONNECTOR MODULE
"EFORE INITIAL ENERGIZATION WITH SUPPLY VOLTAGE THE 4HE MEASURED CURRENT CONSUMPTION SHOULD BE IN
RELAY SHALL BE SITUATED IN THE OPERATING AREA FOR AT SIGNIFICANT 4RANSIENT MOVEMENT OF THE AMMETER
POINTER ONLY INDICATES THE CHARGING CURRENT OF THE
STORAGE CAPACITORS
EQUALIZATION AND TO AVOID HUMIDITY INFLUENCES AND
CONDENSATION
0UT THE MINIATURE SLIDE SWITCH OF THE FRONT PLATE IN
THE /. POSITION 4HE UNIT STARTS UP AND ON
3WITCH OFF THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR THE DC SUPPLY
COMPLETION OF THE RUN UP PERIOD THE GREEN ,%$
AND THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS ON THE FRONT COMES ON THE RED ,%$ GETS OFF AFTER AT
MOST SEC
#HECK THE CONTINUITY OF ALL THE CURRENT AND VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS AGAINST THE PLANT AND CONNEC /PEN THE CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE DC POWER SUPPLY
TION DIAGRAMS
2EMOVE DC AMMETER RECONNECT THE AUXILIARY VOLT
C !RE THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS CORRECTLY AGE LEADS
EARTHED
#LOSE THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER MCB SECONDARY
C !RE THE POLARITIES OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMER CIRCUIT
CONNECTIONS CONSISTENT
#HECK THE DIRECTION OF PHASE ROTATION AT THE RELAY
C )S THE PHASE RELATIONSHIP OF THE CURRENT TRANS TERMINALS CLOCKWISE
FORMERS CORRECT
/PEN THE MCB S FOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SEC
C !RE THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS CORRECTLY EARTHED ONDARY CIRCUITS AND DC POWER SUPPLY
C !RE THE POLARITIES OF THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CIR #HECK THROUGH THE TRIPPING CIRCUITS TO THE CIRCUIT
CUITS CORRECT BREAKER
C )S THE PHASE RELATIONSHIP OF THE VOLTAGE TRANS #HECK THROUGH THE CONTROL WIRING TO AND FROM OTH
FORMERS CORRECT ER DEVICES
C )S THE POLARITY OF THE WINDOW TYPE SUMMATION #HECK THE SIGNAL CIRCUITS
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CORRECT FOR THE MODEL WITH
EARTH FAULT DETECTION 2ECLOSE THE PROTECTIVE MCB S
# ' #

#ONFIGURATION OF OPERATION AND MEMORY FUNCTIONS
/PERATIONAL PRECONDITIONS AND GENERAL
&OR MOST OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS THE INPUT OF A CODE INITIATION OF TEST PROCEDURES
WORD IS NECESSARY 4HIS APPLIES FOR ALL ENTRIES VIA THE
MEMBRANE KEYBOARD OR FRONT INTERFACE WHICH CON 4HE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THE READ OUT OF AN
CERN THE OPERATION ON THE RELAY FOR EXAMPLE NUNCIATIONS OPERATING DATA OR FAULT DATA OR FOR THE
READ OUT OF SETTING PARAMETERS
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR CONFIGURATION OF THE
INTERFACES AND THE DEVICE FUNCTIONS 4O INDICATE AUTHORIZED OPERATOR USE PRESS KEY #7
ENTER THE SIX FIGURE CODE AND CONFIRM
ALLOCATION OR MARSHALLING OF ANNUNCIATION SIGNALS WITH % #ODEWORD ENTRY CAN ALSO BE MADE RETRO
BINARY INPUTS OPTICAL INDICATIONS AND TRIP RELAYS SPECTIVELY AFTER PAGING OR DIRECT ADDRESSING TO ANY
SETTING ADDRESS
SETTING OF FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS THRESHOLDS
FUNCTIONS
% . 4 % 2 # / $ % 7 / 2 $ 4HE ENTERED CHARACTERS DO NOT APPEAR IN THE DISPLAY

INSTEAD ONLY A SYMBOL APPEARS !FTER CONFIRMATION
OF THE CORRECT INPUT WITH % THE DISPLAY RESPONDS WITH
# 7 ! # # % 0 4 % $ #7 !##%04%$ 0RESS THE ENTRY KEY % AGAIN
)F THE CODEWORD IS NOT CORRECT THE DISPLAY SHOWS

# / $ % 7 / 2 $ 7 2 / . ' #/$%7/2$ 72/.' 0RESSING THE #7 KEY ALLOWS
ANOTHER ATTEMPT AT CODEWORD ENTRY
!DDRESS BLOCKS TO ARE PROVIDED FOR CONFIGURA 4HE SIMPLEST WAY OF ARRIVING AT THE BEGINNING OF THIS
TION OF THE SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM 4HESE SET CONFIGURATION BLOCKS IS TO USE KEY $! FOLLOWED BY
TINGS CONCERN THE OPERATION OF THE RELAY COMMUNI THE ADDRESS NUMBER AND %.4%2 KEY % 4HE
CATION WITH EXTERNAL OPERATING AND PROCESSING ADDRESS APPEARS WHICH FORMS THE HEADING OF
DEVICES VIA THE SERIAL INTERFACES AND THE INTERACTION THE CONFIGURATION BLOCKS
OF THE DEVICE FUNCTIONS
/ 0 3 9 3 4 % - "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK /PERATING SYSTEM CONFIGURA

# / . & ) ' 5 2 ! 4 ) / . TION
4HE DOUBLE ARROW KEY Å SWITCHES OVER TO THE FIRST BOXES BELOW 4HE CHOSEN ALTERNATIVE MUST BE CON
CONFIGURATION BLOCK SEE BELOW 5SE THE KEY ! TO FIRMED WITH ENTER KEY %
FIND THE NEXT ADDRESS 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOUR
DIGIT ADDRESS NUMBER IE BLOCK AND SEQUENCE NUM 4HE SETTING PROCEDURE CAN BE ENDED AT ANY TIME BY
BER 4HE TITLE OF THE REQUESTED PARAMETER APPEARS THE KEY COMBINATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION
BEHIND THE BAR SEE BELOW 4HE SECOND LINE OF THE KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS
DISPLAY SHOWS THE TEXT APPLICABLE TO THE PARAMETER THE QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3 #ONFIRM
4HE PRESENT TEXT CAN BE REJECTED BY THE .O KEY . WITH THE 9ES KEY 9 THAT THE NEW SETTINGS SHALL BE
4HE NEXT TEXT CHOICE THEN APPEARS AS SHOWN IN THE COME VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE .O KEY . IN
# ' #

STEAD CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE ABORTED IE ALL AL 3%44).'3 .OW YOU CAN CONFIRM WITH *9 OR
TERATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN CHANGED SINCE THE LAST ABORT WITH . AS ABOVE
CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST 4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS
CAN BE MADE INEFFECTIVE 7HEN ONE EXITS THE SETTING PROGRAM THE ALTERED PA
RAMETERS WHICH UNTIL THEN HAVE BEEN STORED IN BUFFER
)F ONE TRIES TO LEAVE THE SETTING RANGE FOR THE CONFIGU STORES ARE PERMANENTLY SECURED IN %%02/-S AND
RATION BLOCKS IE ADDRESS BLOCKS TO WITH KEYS PROTECTED AGAINST POWER OUTAGE )F CONFIGURATION PA
Å Ç THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION %.$ /& #/$% RAMETERS HAVE BEEN CHANGED THE PROCESSOR SYSTEM
7/2$ /0%2!4)/. 0RESS THE .O KEY . TO WILL RESET AND RE START $URING RE START THE DEVICE IS
CONTINUE CONFIGURATION )F YOU PRESS THE 9ES KEY NOT OPERATIONAL
*9 INSTEAD ANOTHER QUESTION APPEARS 3!6% .%7
3ETTINGS FOR THE INTEGRATED OPERATION ADDRESS BLOCK
/PERATING PARAMETERS CAN BE SET IN ADDRESS BLOCK WORD ENTRY IS NECESSARY

4HIS BLOCK ALLOWS THE DATE FORMAT TO BE SELECTED
-ESSAGES ON THE FRONT DISPLAY CAN BE SELECTED HERE 7HEN DELIVERED FROM FACTORY THE DATE IS SHOWN IN THE
FOR THE QUIESCENT STATE OF THE UNIT OR AFTER A FAULT %UROPEAN FORMAT
EVENT 4O CHANGE ANY OF THESE PARAMETERS CODE
) . 4 % ' 2 ! 4 % $
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK )NTEGRATED OPERATION
/ 0 % 2 ! 4 ) / .
4HE DATE IN THE DISPLAY IS PRESET TO THE %UROPEAN FORMAT

$ ! 4 % & / 2 - ! 4
$AY-ONTH9EAR 3WITCH OVER TO THE !MERICAN FORMAT
$ $ - - 9 9 9 9 -ONTH$AY9EAR IS ACHIEVED BY DEPRESSING THE
.O KEY . THEN CONFIRM WITH THE ENTRY KEY %
- - $ $ 9 9 9 9 $$ TWO FIGURES FOR THE DAY
-- TWO FIGURES FOR THE MONTH
9999 FOUR FIGURES FOR THE YEAR INCL CENTURY
/ 0 % 2 S T , -ESSAGE TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE ST DISPLAY LINE DURING

) , ; = OPERATION !NY OF THE OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES AC
CORDING TO 3ECTION CAN BE SELECTED AS MESSAGES
IN THE THE QUIESCENT STATE OF THE RELAY BY REPEATEDLY DE
) , ; = PRESSING THE .O KEY . 4HE VALUE SELECTED BY THE
ENTRY KEY % UNDER ADDRESS WILL APPEAR IN THE FIRST
) , ; = LINE OF THE DISPLAY
ETC
# ' #

/ 0 % 2 N D , -ESSAGE TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE ND DISPLAY LINE DURING

5 , ; = OPERATION 4HE VALUE SELECTED BY THE ENTRY KEY % UNDER
ADDRESS WILL APPEAR IN THE SECOND LINE OF THE DIS
PLAY
ETC
&AULT EVENT ANNUNCIATIONS CAN BE DISPLAYED AFTER A ARE ACKNOWLEDGED DURING OPERATION WITH THE 2%3%4
FAULT ON THE FRONT 4HESE CAN BE CHOSEN UNDER AD KEY OR VIA THE REMOTE RESET INPUT OF THE DEVICE OR VIA
DRESSES AND 4HE POSSIBLE MESSAGES THE SYSTEM INTERFACE IF FITTED !FTER ACKNOWLEDGE
CAN BE SELECTED BY REPEATEDLY PRESSING THE MENT THE OPERATIONAL MESSAGES OF THE QUIESCENT
.O KEY . 4HE DESIRED MESSAGE IS CONFIRMED STATE WILL BE DISPLAYED AGAIN AS CHOSEN UNDER AD
WITH THE ENTER KEY % 4HESE SPONTANEOUS MESSAGES DRESSES AND
!FTER A FAULT EVENT THE FIRST LINE OF THE DISPLAY SHOWS

& ! 5 , 4 S T ,
& A U L T 4 Y P E TYPE OF FAULT FAULTY PHASES
4 R I P 4 Y P E TYPE OF TRIP COMMAND TRIPPED BREAKER POLE OR THREE

POLE TRIP
0 R O T 0 I C K U P
PROTECTION FUNCTION WHICH HAS PICKED UP
0 R O T 4 R I P PROTECTION FUNCTION WHICH HAS TRIPPED
4 $ R O P THE ELAPSED TIME FROM PICK UP TO DROP OFF
4 4 R I P THE ELAPSED TIME FROM PICK UP TO TRIP COMMAND
& A U L T L O C A T FOR THE FAULT LOCATION EACH OF THE FAULT LOCATOR MESSAGES
ACCORDING CAN BE SELECTED
& ! 5 , 4 N D , !FTER A FAULT EVENT THE SECOND LINE OF THE DISPLAY SHOWS
4 4 R I P
THE POSSIBILITIES ARE THE SAME AS UNDER ADDRESS
ETC
& ! 5 , 4 ) . $ ) # 3TORED ,%$ INDICATIONS AND THE FAULT EVENT MESSAGES IN

THE DISPLAY CAN BE DISPLAYED EITHER WITH EACH FAULT DE
7 ) 4 ( & ! 5 , 4 $ % 4 % # TECTION OR ONLY AFTER TRIP COMMAND IS GIVEN 4HIS MODE
CAN BE CHANGED BY DEPRESSING THE .O KEY . AND
7 ) 4 ( 4 2 ) 0 # / - - CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTER KEY %
# ' #

#ONFIGURATION OF THE SERIAL INTERFACES ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE DEVICE PROVIDES ONE OR TWO SERIAL INTERFACES ONE 4HESE DATA ARE ENTERED TO THE RELAY IN ADDRESS BLOCK
0# INTERFACE IN THE FRONT FOR OPERATION BY MEANS OF A #ODEWORD INPUT IS NECESSARY REFER TO 3ECTION
PERSONAL COMPUTER AND DEPENDENT OF THE ORDERED 4HE DATA MUST BE COORDINATED WITH THE CON
MODEL A FURTHER SYSTEM INTERFACE FOR CONNECTION OF NECTED DEVICES
A CENTRAL CONTROL AND STORAGE UNIT EG 3IEMENS ,3!
#OMMUNICATION VIA THESE INTERFACES REQUIRES !LL ANNUNCIATIONS WHICH CAN BE PROCESSED BY THE
SOME DATA PREARRANGEMENTS IDENTIFICATION OF THE ,3! ARE STORED WITHIN THE DEVICE IN A SEPARATE TABLE
RELAY TRANSMISSION FORMAT TRANSMISSION SPEED 4HIS IS LISTED IN !PPENDIX #
0 # 3 9 3 4 % - "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK )NTERFACES FOR PERSONAL

) . 4 % 2 & ! # % 3 COMPUTER AND CENTRAL COMPUTER SYSTEM
)DENTIFICATION NUMBER OF THE RELAY WITHIN THE SUBSTATION

$ % 6 ) # % ! $ $ VALID FOR BOTH THE INTERFACES OPERATING AND SYSTEM
INTERFACE 4HE NUMBER CAN BE CHOSEN AT LIBERTY BUT
MUST BE USED ONLY ONCE WITHIN THE PLANT SYSTEM
3MALLEST PERMISSIBLE NUMBER
,ARGEST PERMISSIBLE NUMBER
.UMBER OF THE FEEDER WITHIN THE SUBSTATION VALID FOR

& % % $ % 2 ! $ $ BOTH THE INTERFACES OPERATING AND SYSTEM INTERFACE
)DENTIFICATION NUMBER OF THE SUBSTATION IN CASE MORE

3 5 " 3 4 ! $ $ THAN ONE SUBSTATION CAN BE CONNECTED TO A CENTRAL
DEVICE
&UNCTION TYPE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6$%7:6%) FOR

& 5 . # 4 4 9 0 % DISTANCE PROTECTION NO
4HIS ADDRESS IS MAINLY FOR INFORMATION IT SHOULD NOT BE
CHANGED
$EVICE TYPE FOR IDENTIFICATION OF THE DEVICE IN 3IEMENS

$ % 6 ) # % 4 9 0 % ,3! AND PROGRAM $)'3)Q &OR 3! 6 NO
4HIS ADDRESS IS ONLY FOR INFORMATION IT CANNOT BE
CHANGED
# ' #

!DDRESSES TO ARE VALID FOR THE OPERATING AND DIFFERENCES OF THE "AUD RATE 7ITH GOOD TRANS
0# INTERFACE ON THE FRONT OF THE RELAY MISSION QUALITY S IS ADEQUATE 4HE VALUE SHOULD
BE INCREASED WHEN TRANSMISSION QUALITY IS NOT SO
.OTE &OR OPERATOR PANEL 82 THE 0# INTERFACE GOOD )T MUST BE NOTED THAT '!03 MUST BE SMALLER
FORMAT ADDRESS MUST BE !3#)) THE 0# "AUD THAN THE SETTING OF REACTION TIME PROTECTION RELAY IN
RATE ADDRESS MUST BE "!5$ THE 0# PAR THE PROTECTION SOFTWARE $)'3)Q 6 2ECOMMENDED
ITY ADDRESS MUST BE ./ 34/0 VALUE
4HE SETTING OF THE 0# '!03 ADDRESS FOR THE JJREACTION TIME PROTECTION RELAYJJ
OPERATING INTERFACE OR THE 393 '!03 ADDRESS '!03 ¹

FOR THE SYSTEM INTERFACE IS RELEVANT ONLY WHEN THE
RELAY IS INTENDED TO COMMUNICATE VIA A MODEM 4HE (IGHER VALUES FOR REACTION TIME PROTECTION RELAY RE
SETTINGS ARE THE MAXIMUM TIME PERIOD WHICH IS TOLER DUCE THE TRANSMISSION SPEED IN CASE OF TRANSMISSION
ATED BY THE RELAY WHEN GAPS OCCUR DURING TRANSMIS ERRORS )F THE RELAY INTERFACE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO A
SION OF A TELEGRAM 'APS MAY OCCUR WHEN MODEMS PERSONAL COMPUTER THEN '!03 MAY BE SET TO S
ARE USED BY COMPRESSION OF DATA ERROR CORRECTION
0 # ) . 4 % 2 & $ATA FORMAT FOR THE 0# OPERATING INTERFACE

$ ) ' 3 ) 6 FORMAT FOR 3IEMENS PROTECTION DATA PROCESSING PROGRAM
$)'3)Q 6ERSION 6
! 3 # ) ) !3#)) FORMAT
-AXIMUM TIME PERIOD OF DATA GAPS WITHIN TELEGRAMS

0 # ' ! 0 3 WHICH MAY OCCUR DURING DATA TRANSMISSION VIA MODEM
S ON THE OPERATING 0# INTERFACE
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE S
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE S
0 # " ! 5 $ 2 ! 4 % 4HE TRANSMISSION "AUD RATE FOR COMMUNICATION VIA THE

0# OPERATING INTERFACE AT THE FRONT CAN BE ADAPTED TO
" ! 5 $ THE OPERATOR S COMMUNICATION INTERFACE EG PERSONAL
COMPUTER IF NECESSARY 4HE AVAILABLE POSSIBILITIES CAN
" ! 5 $ BE DISPLAYED BY REPEATEDLY DEPRESSION OF THE .O KEY
. #ONFIRM THE DESIRED "AUD RATE WITH THE ENTRY KEY %
" ! 5 $
" ! 5 $
" ! 5 $
0 # 0 ! 2 ) 4 9 0ARITY AND STOP BITS FOR THE 0# OPERATING INTERFACE

$)'3)Q 6ERSION 6 WITH EVEN PARITY AND STOP BIT
. / 3 4 / 0 TRANSMISSION WITH ./ PARITY AND 34/0 BITS
. / 3 4 / 0 TRANSMISSION WITH ./ PARITY AND 34/0 BIT EG MO

DEM
# ' #

!DDRESSES TO ARE VALID FOR THE SYSTEM ,3! INTERFACE IF FITTED
3 9 3 ) . 4 % 2 & &ORMAT OF ANNUNCIATIONS AND FAULT RECORDS FOR THE SYS

TEM ,3! INTERFACE
6 $ % 7 # / - 0 ! 4 ) " , % ONLY DATA IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6$%7:6%) )%#

6 $ % 7 % 8 4 % . $ % $ DATA IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6$%7:6%) )%#
EXTENDED BY 3IEMENS SPECIFIED DATA
$)'3)Q 6ERSION 6
, 3 ! FORMAT OF THE FORMER 3IEMENS ,3! VERSION
3 9 3 - % ! 3 5 2 &ORMAT OF MEASURED VALUES FOR THE SYSTEM ,3! INTER

FACE
6 $ % 7 # / - 0 ! 4 ) " , % ONLY DATA IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6$%7:6%) )%#

6 $ % 7 % 8 4 % . $ % $ DATA IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6$%7:6%) )%#
EXTENDED BY 3IEMENS SPECIFIED DATA
-AXIMUM TIME PERIOD OF DATA GAPS WITHIN TELEGRAMS

3 9 3 ' ! 0 3 WHICH MAY OCCUR DURING DATA TRANSMISSION VIA MODEM
S ON THE SYSTEM ,3! INTERFACE
3 9 3 " ! 5 $ 2 4HE TRANSMISSION "AUD RATE FOR COMMUNICATION VIA THE

SYSTEM INTERFACE CAN BE ADAPTED TO THE SYSTEM INTER
" ! 5 $ FACE EG ,3! IF NECESSARY 4HE AVAILABLE POSSIBILITIES
CAN BE DISPLAYED BY REPEATEDLY DEPRESSION OF THE
" ! 5 $ .O KEY . #ONFIRM THE DESIRED "AUD RATE WITH THE
ENTRY KEY %
" ! 5 $
" ! 5 $
" ! 5 $
3 9 3 0 ! 2 ) 4 9 0ARITY AND STOP BITS FOR THE SYSTEM ,3! INTERFACE

FORMAT FOR 6$%7 PROTOCOL )%# OR
3IEMENS PROTECTION DATA PROCESSING PROGRAM $)'3)Q
6 $ % 7 $ ) ' 3 ) 6 , 3 !
6ERSION AND FORMER ,3!
. / 3 4 / 0 TRANSMISSION WITH ./ PARITY AND 34/0 BITS
. / 3 4 / 0 TRANSMISSION WITH ./ PARITY AND 34/0 BIT EG MO
DEM
# ' #

)T IS POSSIBLE TO SWITCH THE 6$%7 PROTOCOL )%# SWITCH OVER FROM 6$%7 PROTOCOL )%#
OVER TO THE TRANSMISSION PROTOCOL AC TO $)'3)Q PROTOCOL AND VICE VERSA AT
CORDING TO THE OPERATION SOFTWARE $)'3)Q DURING OP THE SYSTEM INTERFACE 4HE ACTUAL SWITCH OVER IS AR
ERATION ! PRECONDITION IS THAT A TRANSMISSION FORMAT RANGED BY A SPECIAL TELEGRAM WHICH IS SENT BY
IS SELECTED FOR THE SYSTEM INTERFACE WHICH IS COMPAT $)'3)Q TO THE SYSTEM INTERFACE WHEN TO 0# OPERA
IBLE TO THE 6$%7 PROTOCOL )%# IE TOR INITIATES THE CORRESPONDING COMMAND 7HEN AD
ADDRESS 393 ).4%2& IS SWITCHED TO 6$%7 DRESS SEE BELOW IS EQUALLY SET TO 9%3 THEN RE
#/-0!4)",% OR 6$%7 %84%.$%$ )F THIS FACILITY IS TO MOTE PARAMETERIZING IS POSSIBLE VIA THE SYSTEM
BE USED ADDRESS 393 37)4#( MUST BE SET TO INTERFACE BY MEANS OF $)'3)Q PROCEDURES
9%3 4HIS CONFIGURATION ADDRESS DOES ONLY PERMIT TO
3WITCH OVER BETWEEN 6$%7 TRANSMISSION PROTOCOL

3 9 3 3 7 ) 4 # ( )%# AND $)'3)Q PROTOCOL VIA THE SYSTEM
. / INTERFACE
./ IS NOT PERMITTED
9 % 3 9%3 IS PERMITTED
!DDRESS IS RELEVANT ONLY IN CASE THE SYSTEM IN EITHER ADDRESS 393 ).4%2& IS SET TO $)'3)
TERFACE IS CONNECTED WITH A HARDWARE THAT OPERATES 6
WITH THE PROTECTION DATA PROCESSING PROGRAM $)'
3)Q 4HIS ADDRESS DETERMINES WHETHER IS SHALL BE OR ADDRESS 393 ).4%2& IS SET TO 6$%7
PERMITTED TO CHANGE PARAMETERS VIA THIS INTERFACE #/-0!4)",% OR 6$%7 %84%.$%$ AND AT THE
/NE OF THE FOLLOWING PRECONDITIONS MUST BE FULFILLED SAME TIME ADDRESS 393 37)4#( SEE
ABOVE IS SET TO 9%3
3 9 3 0 ! 2 ! - % 4 2EMOTE PARAMETERIZING VIA THE SYSTEM INTERFACE

. / ./ IS NOT PERMITTED
9 % 3 9%3 IS PERMITTED
3 - )F A FAULT LOCATION OUTPUT DEVICE 3- OR 3- IS CON

NECTED TO THE SYSTEM INTERFACE ADDRESS 3-
. / 4 # / . . % # 4 % $ IS TO BE SET TO #/..%#4%$ )N ALL OTHER CASES THE AD
DRESS REMAINS ./4 #/..%#4%$
# / . . % # 4 % $
# ' #

3ETTINGS FOR FAULT RECORDING ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY IS EQUIPPED WITH A FAULT STANT AND ENDS WITH THE POST FAULT TIME 4 0/34
DATA STORE SEE 3ECTION $ISTINCTION MUST BE ADDRESS AFTER THE RECORDING CRITERION HAS DIS
MADE BETWEEN THE REFERENCE INSTANT AND THE STORAGE APPEARED 4HE PERMISSIBLE RECORDING TIME FOR EACH
CRITERION ADDRESS .ORMALLY THE GENERAL FAULT RECORD IS SET UNDER ADDRESS !LTOGETHER S ARE
DETECTION SIGNAL OF THE PROTECTION IS THE REFERENCE IN AVAILABLE FOR FAULT RECORDING )N THIS TIME RANGE UP TO
STANT 4HE STORAGE CRITERION CAN BE THE GENERAL FAULT FAULT RECORDS CAN BE STORED
DETECTION TOO 34/2!'% "9 &$ OR THE TRIP COM
MAND 34/2!'% "9 42)0 !LTERNATIVELY THE TRIP .OTE 4HE SET TIMES ARE RELATED ON A SYSTEM FREQUEN
COMMAND CAN BE SELECTED AS REFERENCE INSTANT CY OF (Z 4HEY ARE TO BE MATCHED ACCORDINGLY FOR
34!24 7)4( 42)0 IN THIS CASE THE TRIP COMMAND IS DIFFERENT FREQUENCIES
THE STORAGE CRITERION TOO
$ATA STORAGE CAN ALSO BE INITIATED VIA A BINARY INPUT
! FAULT EVENT BEGINS WITH THE FAULT DETECTION OF ANY OR BY OPERATOR ACTION FROM THE MEMBRANE KEYBOARD
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS AND ENDS WITH DROP OFF OF THE ON THE FRONT OF THE RELAY OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE
LATEST FAULT DETECTION 4HE SCOPE OF A FAULT RECORD IS 4HE STORAGE IS TRIGGERED DYNAMICALLY IN THESE CASES
NORMALLY THIS FAULT EVENT ADDRESS )F AUTO RE 4HE LENGTH OF THE DATA STORAGE IS DETERMINED BY THE
CLOSURE IS CARRIED OUT THE COMPLETE NETWORK FAULT SE SETTINGS IN ADDRESSES AND BUT MAX 4
QUENCE WITH ONE OR MORE RECLOSURE ATTEMPTS -!8 ADDRESS 0RE TRIGGER TIME AND POST
CAN BE RECORDED UNTIL FINAL FAULT CLEARANCE 4HIS FAULT TIME ARE ADDITIVE TO THE SET VALUES )F THE STORAGE
SHOWS THE TOTAL TIME SEQUENCE OF THE FAULT BUT UTILIZES TIME FOR START VIA BINARY INPUT IS SET TO 0 THEN THE
MORE MEMORY SPACE EVEN DURING THE DEAD TIMES STORAGE TIME ENDS AFTER DE ENERGIZATION OF THE
BINARY INPUT STATICALLY BUT NOT AFTER 4 -!8 AD
4HE ACTUAL RECORDING TIME STARTS WITH THE PRE TRIGGER DRESS
TIME 4 02% ADDRESS BEFORE THE REFERENCE IN

"EGINNING OF BLOCK &AULT RECORDINGS
& ! 5 , 4 2 % # / 2 $ ) . ' 3
) . ) 4 ) ! 4 ) / . $ATA STORAGE IS INITIATED

3 4 / 2 ! ' % " 9 & $ FAULT DETECTION IS REFERENCE INSTANT
FAULT DETECTION IS STORAGE CRITERION
3 4 / 2 ! ' % " 9 4 2 ) 0 FAULT DETECTION IS REFERENCE INSTANT
TRIP COMMAND IS STORAGE CRITERION
3 4 ! 2 4 7 ) 4 ( 4 2 ) 0 TRIP COMMAND IS REFERENCE INSTANT
TRIP COMMAND IS STORAGE CRITERION
3 # / 0 % 3COPE OF A FAULT RECORD

& ! 5 , 4 % 6 % . 4 A FAULT RECORD IS STORED FOR EACH &!5,4 %6%.4 IE FROM
PICK UP UNTIL DROP OFF
& ! 5 , 4 ) . 0 / 7 3 9 3 A FAULT RECORD COMPRISES THE TOTAL .%47/2+ &!5,4 IN
CLUDING AUTO RECLOSURE ATTEMPTS
-AXIMUM TIME PERIOD OF A FAULT RECORD

4 - ! 8
S ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE S
# ' #

0RE TRIGGER TIME BEFORE THE REFERENCE INSTANT

4 0 2 %
0OST FAULT TIME AFTER THE STORAGE CRITERION DISAPPEARS

4 0 / 3 4
3TORAGE TIME WHEN FAULT RECORDING IS INITIATED VIA A

4 " ) . ! 2 9 ) .
BINARY INPUT PRE TRIGGER AND POST FAULT TIMES ARE
S ADDITIVE
OR 0 IE AS LONG AS THE BINARY INPUT IS ENERGIZED BUT
NOT LONGER THAN 4 -!8
3TORAGE TIME WHEN FAULT RECORDING IS INITIATED VIA THE

4 + % 9 " / ! 2 $
MEMBRANE KEYBOARD PRE TRIGGER AND POST FAULT
S TIMES ARE ADDITIVE
!DDRESS IS NOT RELEVANT IN CASE THAT THE RELAY IS CONNECTED TO A CONTROL AND STORAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
WHICH OPERATES WITH THE PROTOCOL ACCORDING TO 6$%7:6%) )%# "UT IF THE RELAY IS CONNECTED TO A
FORMER ,3! SYSTEM THE RELAY MUST BE INFORMED HOW LONG A TRANSMITTED FAULT RECORD MUST BE SO THAT THE FORMER
,3! SYSTEM RECEIVES THE CORRECT NUMBER OF FAULT RECORD VALUES
/NLY FOR COMMUNICATION WITH A FORMER ,3! SYSTEM

,ENGTH OF A FAULT RECORD WHICH IS TRANSMITTED VIA THE SERIAL
3 9 3 , % . ' 4 ( SYSTEM INTERFACE
6 ! , 5 % 3 & ) 8 VALUES FIX OR
6 ! , 6 ! 2 VARIABLE LENGTH WITH A MAXIMUM OF VALUES
# ' #

#ONFIGURATION OF THE PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
)NTRODUCTION
4HE DEVICE 3! IS CAPABLE OF PROVIDING A SERIES 7ITHIN THE BOCK ONE CAN PAGE FORWARD WITH ! OR
OF PROTECTION AND ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS 4HE SCOPE OF BACK WITH " %ACH PAGING ACTION LEADS TO A FURTHER
THE HARD AND FIRM WARE IS MATCHED TO THESE FUNC ADDRESS FOR THE INPUT OF A CONFIGURATION PARAMETER )N
TIONS &URTHERMORE INDIVIDUAL FUNCTIONS CAN BE SET THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS EACH ADDRESS IS SHOWN IN A
CONFIGURED TO BE EFFECTIVE OR NON EFFECTIVE OR THE BOX AND EXPLAINED )N THE UPPER LINE OF THE DISPLAY
INTERACTION OF THE FUNCTIONS CAN BE MODIFIED BY CON BEHIND THE NUMBER AND THE BAR STANDS THE ASSO
FIGURATION PARAMETERS !DDITIONALLY THE RELAY CAN BE CIATED DEVICE FUNCTION )N THE SECOND LINE IS THE ASSO
ADAPTED TO THE SYSTEM FREQUENCY CIATED TEXT EG %8)34 )F THIS TEXT IS APPROPRIATE
THE ARROW KEYS ! OR " CAN BE USED TO PAGE THE NEXT
ST EXAMPLE FOR CONFIGURATION OF THE SCOPE OF THE DE ADDRESS )F THE TEXT SHOULD BE ALTERED PRESS THE
VICE .O KEY . AN ALTERNATIVE TEXT THEN APPEARS EG
!SSUME A NETWORK COMPRISING OVERHEAD LINES AND ./. %8)34 4HERE MAY BE OTHER ALTERNATIVES
CABLE SECTIONS &OR REASONS OF UNIFORMITY ALL DEVICES WHICH CAN THEN BE DISPLAYED BY REPEATED DEPRES
HAVE BEEN SPECIFIED WITH AUTO RECLOSE FACILITIES SION OF THE .O KEY . 4HE REQUIRED ALTERNATIVE
3INCE AUTO RECLOSE IS ONLY APPLICABLE FOR THE OVER MUST BE CONFIRMED WITH THE KEY %
HEAD LINE SECTIONS THIS FUNCTION WILL BE DE CONFI
GURED FOR THE DEVICES PROTECTING THE CABLE SECTIONS 5SE OF THE DOUBLE ARROW KEY Å BRINGS ONE TO THE NEXT
ADDRESS BLOCK IN THIS CASE 4HERE ONE FINDS FUR
ND EXAMPLE FOR THE INTERACTION OF THE FUNCTIONS THER SETTING PARAMETERS WHICH CAN EQUALLY BE CON
4HE DEVICE INCLUDES DISTANCE PROTECTION AND EARTH FIRMED OR ALTERED
FAULT PROTECTION FOR HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULTS IN
EARTHED NETWORKS 4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION IS RE 4HE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAN BE ENDED AT ANY
QUIRED TO OPERATE WITH SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSE TIME BY THE KEY COMBINATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE
THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION SHALL OPERATE WITHOUT FUNCTION KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DIS
AUTO RECLOSURE 4HE DEVICE WILL BE INFORMED OF THIS PLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3
CONDITION DURING CONFIGURATION #ONFIRM WITH THE 9ES KEY *9 THAT THE NEW SET
TINGS SHALL BECOME VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE
4HE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ARE INPUT THROUGH THE .O KEY . INSTEAD CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE
INTEGRATED OPERATION KEYBOARD AT THE FRONT OF THE DE ABORTED IE ALL ALTERATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN
VICE OR BY MEANS OF A PERSONAL COMPUTER CONNECTED CHANGED SINCE THE LAST CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST
TO THIS FRONT INTERFACE 4HE USE OF THE INTEGRATED OP 4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS CAN BE MADE INEFFEC
ERATING KEYBOARD IS DESCRIBED IN DETAIL IN 3ECTION TIVE
!LTERATION OF THE PROGRAMMED PARAMETERS RE
QUIRES THE INPUT OF THE CODEWORD SEE 3ECTION )F ONE TRIES TO LEAVE THE SETTING RANGE FOR THE CONFIGU
7ITHOUT CODEWORD THE SETTING CAN BE READ OUT BUT RATION BLOCKS IE ADDRESS BLOCKS TO WITH KEYS
NOT ALTERED Å Ç THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION %.$ /& #/$%
7/2$ /0%2!4)/. 0RESS THE .O KEY . TO
&OR THE PURPOSE OF CONFIGURATION ADDRESSES JJ CONTINUE CONFIGURATION )F YOU PRESS THE 9ES KEY
AND JJ ARE PROVIDED /NE CAN ACCESS THE BEGIN *9 INSTEAD ANOTHER QUESTION APPEARS 3!6% .%7
NING OF THE CONFIGURATION BLOCKS EITHER BY DIRECT DIAL 3%44).'3 .OW YOU CAN CONFIRM WITH *9 OR
ABORT WITH . AS DESCRIBED ABOVE
PRESS DIRECT ADDRESS KEY $!
TYPE IN ADDRESS 7HEN ONE EXITS THE SETTING PROGRAM THE ALTERED PA
PRESS EXECUTE KEY % RAMETERS WHICH UNTIL THEN HAVE BEEN STORED IN VOLA
TILE MEMORIES ARE THEN PERMANENTLY SECURED IN %%
OR BY PAGING WITH THE KEYS Å FORWARDS OR Ç BACK 02/-S AND PROTECTED AGAINST POWER OUTAGE 4HE
WARDS UNTIL ADDRESS APPEARS PROCESSOR SYSTEM WILL RESET AND RE START $URING
RE START THE DEVICE IS NOT OPERATIONAL
# ' #

0ROGRAMMING THE SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE AVAILABLE PROTECTIVE AND ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS FUNCTION MEANS THAT THE FUNCTION WILL BE PROCESSED
CAN BE PROGRAMMED AS EXISTING OR NOT EXISTING &OR THAT INDICATION WILL APPEAR EG SWITCHED OFF BUT
SOME FUNCTIONS IT MAY ALSO BE POSSIBLE TO SELECT BE THAT THE FUNCTION WILL HAVE NO EFFECT ON THE RESULT OF
TWEEN MULTIPLE ALTERNATIVES THE PROTECTIVE PROCESS EG NO TRIPPING COMMAND
&UNCTIONS WHICH ARE CONFIGURED AS ./. %8)34 WILL 4HE FOLLOWING BOXES SHOW THE POSSIBILITIES FOR THE
NOT BE PROCESSED IN 3! 4HERE WILL BE NO AN MAXIMUM SCOPE OF THE DEVICE )N AN ACTUAL CASE
NUNCIATIONS AND THE ASSOCIATED SETTING PARAMETERS FUNCTIONS WHICH ARE NOT AVAILABLE WILL NOT APPEAR IN
FUNCTIONS LIMIT VALUES WILL NOT BE REQUESTED DURING THE DISPLAY
SETTING 3ECTION )N CONTRAST SWITCH OFF OF A
3 # / 0 % / & "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 3COPE OF FUNCTIONS

& 5 . # 4 ) / . 3
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4ELEPROTECTION MODE
$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4 4 % , % 0 2 / 4 % #
% 8 ) 3 4 . / . % 8 ) 3 4
. / . % 8 ) 3 4 5 . $ % 2 2 % ! # (
/ 6 % 2 2 % ! # (
&AULT DETECTION MODE FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION

$ ) 3 4 & $ % 4
/ 6 % 2 # 5 2 2 % . 4
5 3 % 2 , / ' ) #
) - 0 % $ ! . # % : / . % . / . % 8 ) 3 4
5 ) & ! 5 , 4 $ % 4 % 8 ) 3 4
0OWER SWING DETECTION %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
0 / 7 % 2 3 7 ) . ' % - % 2 ' / #
. / . % 8 ) 3 4 % 8 ) 3 4
% 8 ) 3 4 . / . % 8 ) 3 4
# ' #

4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION )NTERNAL AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION
4 ( % 2 - ! , / , ) . 4 % 2 . ! , ! 2
. / . % 8 ) 3 4 . / . % 8 ) 3 4
% 8 ) 3 4 % 8 ) 3 4
)NTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEM

3 9 . # ( # ( % # +
. / . % 8 ) 3 4
) 3 / , % &
. / . % 8 ) 3 4 % 8 ) 3 4
% 8 ) 3 4
&AULT LOCATION
& ! 5 , 4 , / # ! 4
(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN EARTHED % 8 ) 3 4
SYSTEM
. / . % 8 ) 3 4
% ! 2 4 ( & ! 5 , 4
. / . % 8 ) 3 4
0ARAMETER SET CHANGE OVER
$ ) 2 . / . $ ) 2
0 ! 2 ! - # /
$ ) 2 % # # / - 0 ! 2 ) 3 / . . / . % 8 ) 3 4
) . 6 % 2 3 % 4 ) - % % 8 ) 3 4
4HE RATED SYSTEM FREQUENCY MUST COMPLY WITH THE SETTING UNDER ADDRESS )F THE SYSTEM FREQUENCY IS NOT
(Z ADDRESS MUST BE CHANGED
& 2 % 1 5 % . # 9
2ATED SYSTEM FREQUENCY (Z OR (Z
F . ( Z
F . ( Z
# ' #

3ETTING THE DEVICE CONFIGURATION ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE CONFIGURATION AFFECTS THE INTERACTION OF THE PROTECTIVE AND ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS ABOVE ALL FOR 3! THE
INTERACTION OF THE AUTO RECLOSING SYSTEM WITH THE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
$ % 6 ) # %
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK $EVICE CONFIGURATION
# / . & ) ' 5 2 ! 4 ) / .
# " 4 % 3 4 " ) #IRCUIT BREAKER TEST VIA BINARY INPUT IS CARRIED OUT
4 2 ) 0 # , / 3 % 0 / , %
42)0 #,/3% 0/,% THAT IS THREE POLE !2 CYCLE OR
EACH POLE ONE AFTER THE OTHER WITH A
3 % 1 5 , , ,
3%15 , , , OPEN AND CLOSE THIS IS ONLY APPLICA
BLE WHEN SINGLE POLE !2 IS USED OR
4 ( 2 % % 0 / , % 4 2 ) 0
4(2%% 0/,% 42)0 WILL BE INITIATED WITHOUT RECLOSE
! 2 W $ ) 3 4
!UTO RECLOSING WORKS TOGETHER WITH DISTANCE PROTEC
9 % 3 TION OR NOT
. /
! 2 W O 4 % , %
7HEN SIGNAL TRANSMISSION IS DISTORTED OR SWITCHED OFF
9 % 3
9%3 !2 OPERATES AS SET
./ !2 IS BLOCKED
. /
! 2 W % - % 2 ' %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION OPERATION

9 % 3 9%3 !2 WORKS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SETTING BUT
NO AUTO RECLOSE WHEN ONLY )% PICK UP
. /
./ !2 IS BLOCKED
! 2 W ) 3 % & %ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS

9 % 3 9%3 !2 WORKS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SETTING ONLY
WHEN TRIPPING ON EARTH FAULT IS ALLOWED
. / ./ !2 IS BLOCKED
# ' #

! 2 W % &
7ITH EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED NETWORKS
9 % 3
9%3 !2 WILL BE CARRIED OUT BUT ONLY THREE POLE
./ NO !2 WILL BE CARRIED OUT
. /
! 2 W % 8 4
7ITH EXTERNAL TRIP VIA BINARY INPUT
9 % 3
9%3 !2 WILL BE CARRIED OUT BUT ONLY THREE POLE
./ NO !2 WILL BE CARRIED OUT
. /
# ' #

-ARSHALLING OF BINARY INPUTS BINARY OUTPUTS AND ,%$ INDICATORS
)NTRODUCTION
4HE FUNCTIONS OF THE BINARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS REPRE CAL INPUT MODULE AND SHOULD INITIATE A LOGICAL FUNC
SENTED IN THE GENERAL DIAGRAMS !PPENDIX ! RELATE TION NAMELY BLOCKING 4HE CORRESPONDING QUESTION
TO THE FACTORY SETTINGS 4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE INPUTS TO THE OPERATOR IS THEN 7HICH SIGNAL FROM A PHYSI
AND OUTPUTS OF THE INTERNAL FUNCTIONS CAN BE REAR CAL INPUT RELAY SHOULD INITIATE WHICH REACTION IN THE
RANGED AND THUS ADAPTED TO THE ON SITE CONDITIONS DEVICE /NE PHYSICAL INPUT SIGNAL CAN INITIATE UP TO
LOGICAL FUNCTIONS
-ARSHALLING OF THE INPUTS OUTPUTS AND ,%$S IS PER
FORMED BY MEANS OF THE INTEGRATED OPERATOR PANEL OR 4HE TRIP RELAYS CAN ALSO BE ASSIGNED DIFFERENT FUNC
VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE IN THE FRONT 4HE OPERATION TIONS %ACH TRIP RELAY CAN BE CONTROLLED BY EACH COM
OF THE OPERATOR PANEL IS DESCRIBED IN DETAIL IN 3ECTION MAND FUNCTION OR COMBINATION OF COMMAND FUNC
-ARSHALLING BEGINS AT THE PARAMETER ADDRESS TIONS

4HE LOGICAL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED IN
4HE INPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS REQUIRED FOR MARSHAL MULTIPLE MANNER %G ONE ANNUNCIATION FUNCTION CAN
LING REFER TO 3ECTION 7ITHOUT CODEWORD ENTRY TRIGGER SEVERAL SIGNAL RELAYS SEVERAL TRIP RELAYS ADDI
PARAMETERS CAN BE READ OUT BUT NOT BE CHANGED TIONALLY BE INDICATED BY ,%$S AND BE CONTROLLED BY A
$URING CODEWORD OPERATION IE FROM CODEWORD BINARY INPUT UNIT 4HE RESTRICTION IS THAT THE TOTAL OF ALL
ENTRY UNTIL THE TERMINATION OF THE MARSHALLING PROCE PHYSICAL INPUTOUTPUT UNITS BINARY INPUTS PLUS SIGNAL
DURE THE SOLID BAR IN THE DISPLAY FLASHES RELAYS PLUS ,%$S PLUS TRIP RELAYS WHICH ARE TO BE AS
SOCIATED WITH ONE LOGICAL FUNCTION MUST NOT EXCEED A
7HEN THE 3! PROGRAMS ARE RUNNING THE SPECIFIC NUMBER OF )F THIS NUMBER IS TRIED TO BE EXCEEDED
LOGIC FUNCTIONS WILL BE ALLOCATED TO THE PHYSICAL INPUT THE DISPLAY WILL SHOW A CORRESPONDING MESSAGE
AND OUTPUT MODULES OR ,%$S IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
SELECTION 4HE MARSHALLING PROCEDURE IS SET UP SUCH THAT FOR
EACH PHYSICAL BINARY INPUT EACH OUTPUT RELAY AND
%XAMPLE &AULT DETECTION IS REGISTERED FROM THE DIS FOR EACH MARSHALLABLE ,%$ THE OPERATOR WILL BE
TANCE PROTECTION IN PHASE , 4HIS EVENT IS GENER ASKED WHICH LOGICAL FUNCTION SHOULD BE ALLOCATED
ATED IN 3! AS AN !NNUNCIATION LOGICAL FUNC
TION AND SHOULD BE AVAILABLE AT CERTAIN TERMINALS OF 4HE OFFERED LOGICAL FUNCTIONS ARE TABULATED FOR THE
THE UNIT AS A ./ CONTACT 3INCE SPECIFIC UNIT TERMI BINARY INPUTS OUTPUTS AND ,%$S IN THE FOLLOWING SEC
NALS ARE HARD WIRED TO A SPECIFIC PHYSICAL SIGNAL TIONS
RELAY EG TO THE SIGNAL RELAY THE PROCESSOR MUST
BE ADVISED THAT THE LOGICAL SIGNAL $IST&AULT 4HE BEGINNING OF THE MARSHALLING PARAMETER BLOCKS
, SHOULD BE TRANSMITTED TO THE SIGNAL RELAY 4HUS IS REACHED BY DIRECTLY SELECTING THE ADDRESS
WHEN MARSHALLING IS PERFORMED TWO STATEMENTS OF IE
THE OPERATOR ARE IMPORTANT 7HICH LOGICAL ANNUNCI
ATION GENERATED IN THE PROTECTION UNIT PROGRAM PRESS DIRECT ADDRESS KEY $!
SHOULD TRIGGER WHICH PHYSICAL SIGNAL RELAY 5P TO ENTER ADDRESS
LOGICAL ANNUNCIATIONS CAN TRIGGER ONE PHYSICAL PRESS ENTER KEY %
SIGNAL RELAY
OR BY PAGING WITH KEYS Å FORWARDS OR Ç BACK
! SIMILAR SITUATION APPLIES TO BINARY INPUTS )N THIS WARDS UNTIL ADDRESS HAS BEEN REACHED 4HE
CASE EXTERNAL INFORMATION EG VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER BEGINNING OF THE MARSHALLING BLOCKS THEN APPEARS
MCB TRIPPED IS CONNECTED TO THE UNIT VIA A PHYSI
"EGINNING OF MARSHALLING BLOCKS

- ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . '
# ' #

/NE CAN PROCEED THROUGH THE MARSHALLING BLOCKS FUNCTION APPEARS FOR CHECKING PURPOSES 4HIS CAN
WITH THE KEY Å OR GO BACK WITH THE KEY Ç 7ITHIN A BE ALTERED EITHER BY ENTERING A DIFFERENT FUNCTION
BLOCK ONE GOES FORWARDS WITH ! OR BACKWARDS WITH " NUMBER OR BY PAGING THROUGH THE POSSIBLE FUNC
%ACH FORWARD OR BACKWARD STEP LEADS TO DISPLAY OF TIONS FORWARDS WITH THE .O KEY . OR BACKWARDS
THE NEXT INPUT OUTPUT OR ,%$ POSITION )N THE DISPLAY WITH THE BACKSPACE KEY 2 )F THE FUNCTION HAS BEEN
BEHIND THE ADDRESS AND THE SOLID BAR THE PHYSICAL CHANGED ANOTHER CONFIRMATION IS NECESSARY WITH
INPUTOUTPUT UNIT FORMS THE HEADING THE ENTER KEY %
4HE KEY COMBINATION & ! IE DEPRESSING THE FUNC )N THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPHS ALLOCATION POSSIBILITIES
TION KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ARROW KEY ! SWITCHES OVER FOR BINARY INPUTS BINARY OUTPUTS AND ,%$ INDICATORS
TO THE SELECTION LEVEL FOR THE LOGICAL FUNCTIONS TO BE AL ARE GIVEN 4HE ARROWS Å Ç OR !" AT THE LEFT HAND SIDE
LOCATED $URING THIS CHANGE OVER IE FROM PRESS OF THE DISPLAY BOX INDICATE PAGING FROM BLOCK TO
ING THE & KEY UNTIL PRESSING THE ! KEY THE BAR BEHIND BLOCK WITHIN THE BLOCK OR ON THE SELECTION LEVEL 4HE
THE ADDRESS NUMBER IS REPLACED BY A & 4HE DIS CHARACTER & BEFORE THE ARROW INDICATES THAT THE FUNC
PLAY SHOWS IN THE UPPER LINE THE PHYSICAL INPUTOUT TION KEY & MUST BE PRESSED BEFORE PUSHING THE ARROW
PUT UNIT THIS TIME WITH A THREE DIGIT INDEX NUMBER KEY !
4HE SECOND DISPLAY LINE SHOWS THE LOGICAL FUNCTION
WHICH IS PRESENTLY ALLOCATED 4HE FUNCTION NUMBERS AND DESIGNATIONS ARE LISTED
COMPLETELY IN !PPENDIX #
/N THIS SELECTION LEVEL THE ALLOCATED FUNCTION CAN BE
CHANGED BY PRESSING THE .O KEY . "Y REPEATED 4HE MARSHALLING PROCEDURE CAN BE ENDED AT ANY
USE OF THE KEY . ALL MARSHALLABLE FUNCTIONS CAN BE TIME BY THE KEY COMBINATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE
PAGED THROUGH THE DISPLAY "ACK PAGING IS POSSI FUNCTION KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DIS
BLE WITH THE BACKSPACE KEY 2 7HEN THE REQUIRED PLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3
FUNCTION APPEARS PRESS THE EXECUTE KEY % !FTER THIS #ONFIRM WITH THE 9ES KEY *9 THAT THE NEW ALLOCA
FURTHER FUNCTIONS CAN BE ALLOCATED TO THE SAME PHYSI TIONS SHALL BECOME VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE
CAL INPUT OR OUTPUT MODULE WITH FURTHER INDEX NUM .O KEY . INSTEAD CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE
BERS BY USING THE KEY ! %ACH SELECTION MUST BE ABORTED IE ALL ALTERATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN
CONFIRMED BY PRESSING THE KEY % )F A SELECTION CHANGED SINCE THE LAST CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST
PLACE SHALL NOT BE ASSIGNED TO A FUNCTION SELECTION IS 4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS CAN BE MADE INEFFEC
MADE WITH THE FUNCTION NOT ALLOCATED TIVE
9OU CAN LEAVE THE SELECTION LEVEL BY PRESSING THE KEY )F ONE TRIES TO LEAVE THE SETTING RANGE FOR THE CONFIGU
COMBINATION & ! IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION KEY & RATION BLOCKS IE ADDRESS BLOCKS TO WITH KEYS
FOLLOWED BY THE ARROW KEY ! 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS Å Ç THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION %.$ /& #/
AGAIN THE FOUR DIGIT ADDRESS NUMBER OF THE PHYSICAL $%7/2$ /0%2!4)/. 0RESS THE .O KEY . TO
INPUTOUTPUT MODULE .OW YOU CAN PAGE WITH KEY ! CONTINUE MARSHALLING )F YOU PRESS THE 9ES KEY *
TO THE NEXT INPUTOUTPUT MODULE OR WITH " TO THE PRE 9 INSTEAD ANOTHER QUESTION APPEARS 3!6% .%7
VIOUS TO REPEAT SELECTION PROCEDURE AS ABOVE 3%44).'3 .OW YOU CAN CONFIRM WITH *9 OR
ABORT WITH . AS ABOVE
4HE LOGICAL FUNCTIONS ARE ALSO PROVIDED WITH FUNCTION
NUMBERS WHICH ARE EQUALLY LISTED IN THE TABLES )F THE 7HEN ONE EXITS THE MARSHALLING PROGRAM THE ALTERED
FUNCTION NUMBER IS KNOWN THIS CAN BE INPUT DIRECTLY PARAMETERS WHICH UNTIL THEN HAVE BEEN STORED IN
ON THE SELECTION LEVEL 0AGING THROUGH THE POSSIBLE VOLATILE MEMORY ARE THEN PERMANENTLY SECURED IN
FUNCTIONS IS THEN SUPERFLUOUS 7ITH DIRECT INPUT OF THE %%02/-S AND PROTECTED AGAINST POWER OUTAGE
FUNCTION NUMBER LEADING ZEROS NEED NOT BE ENTERED 4HE PROCESSOR SYSTEM WILL RESET AND RE START $UR
!FTER INPUT OF THE FUNCTION NUMBER USE THE ENTER KEY ING RE START THE DEVICE IS NOT OPERATIONAL
% )MMEDIATELY THE ASSOCIATED IDENTIFICATION OF THE
# ' #

-ARSHALLING OF THE BINARY INPUTS ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE UNIT CONTAINS BINARY INPUTS WHICH ARE DESIG

NATED ).054 TO ).054 4HEY CAN BE MARSHALLED 7ITH DIRECT INPUT OF THE FUNCTION NUMBER LEADING ZER
IN ADDRESS BLOCK 4HE ADDRESS BLOCK IS REACHED OS NEED NOT BE USED 4O INDICATE THE CONTACT MODE
BY PAGING IN BLOCKS Å Ç OR BY DIRECT ADDRESSING WITH THE FUNCTION NUMBER CAN BE EXTENDED BY A DECIMAL
$! % 4HE SELECTION PROCEDURE IS CARRIED OUT POINT FOLLOWED BY OR WHEREBY
AS DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION
MEANS NORMALLY OPEN MODE CORRESPONDS
! CHOICE CAN BE MADE FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL INPUT FUNC TO ./ AS ABOVE
TION AS TO WHETHER THE DESIRED FUNCTION SHOULD BE
COME OPERATIVE IN THE NORMALLY OPEN MODE OR IN MEANS NORMALLY CLOSED MODE CORRESPONDS
THE NORMALLY CLOSED MODE WHEREBY TO .# AS ABOVE
./ NORMALLY OPEN MODE THE INPUT ACTS AS A ./ )F THE EXTENSION WITH OR IS OMITTED THE DISPLAY FIRST
CONTACT IE THE CONTROL VOLTAGE AT THE INPUT INDICATES THE FUNCTION DESIGNATION IN NORMALLY
TERMINALS ACTIVATES THE FUNCTION OPEN MODE ./ "Y PRESSING THE .O KEY . THE
MODE IS CHANGED TO .# !FTER DIRECT INPUT OTHER FUNC
.# NORMALLY CLOSED MODE THE INPUT ACTS AS A TIONS CAN BE SELECTED BY PAGING THROUGH THE FUNC
.# CONTACT IE CONTROL VOLTAGE PRESENT AT THE TIONS FORWARDS WITH THE .O KEY . OR BACKWARDS
TERMINALS TURNS OFF THE FUNCTION CONTROL VOLT WITH THE BACKSPACE KEY 2 4HE CHANGED FUNCTION
AGE ABSENT ACTIVATES THE FUNCTION THEN MUST BE RE CONFIRMED BY THE ENTRY KEY %
7HEN PAGING THROUGH THE DISPLAY EACH INPUT FUNC .OTE /NE LOGICAL FUNCTION MUST NOT BE MARSHALLED TO
TION IS DISPLAYED WITH THE INDEX ./ OR .# WHEN TWO OR MORE BINARY INPUTS BECAUSE AN /2 LOGIC OF
PROCEEDING WITH THE .O KEY . THE SIGNALS CAN NOT BE GUARANTEED
4ABLE SHOWS A COMPLETE LIST OF ALL THE BINARY INPUT 4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE BINARY INPUTS AS DELIVERED
FUNCTIONS WITH THEIR ASSOCIATED FUNCTION NUMBER FROM FACTORY IS SHOWN IN THE GENERAL DIAGRAMS IN !P
&.O )NPUT FUNCTIONS NATURALLY HAVE NO EFFECT IF THE PENDIX ! 4HE FOLLOWING BOXES SHOW AS AN EXAMPLE
CORRESPONDING PROTECTION FUNCTION IS NOT FITTED IN THE THE ALLOCATION FOR BINARY INPUT 4ABLE SHOWS ALL
RELAY OR HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED OUT DE CONFI BINARY INPUTS AS PRESET FROM THE FACTORY
GURED REFER TO 3ECTION
- ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . '
"EGINNING OF BLOCK -ARSHALLING BINARY INPUTS
" ) . ! 2 9 ) . 0 5 4 3
4HE FIRST BINARY INPUT IS REACHED WITH THE KEY !
& " ) . ! 2 9
!LLOCATIONS FOR BINARY INPUT
) . 0 5 4
#HANGE OVER TO THE SELECTION LEVEL WITH & !
) . 0 5 4 2ESET OF STORED ,%$ INDICATIONS &.O

NORMALLY OPEN OPERATION
, % $ R E S E T . /
,%$S ARE RESET WHEN CONTROL VOLTAGE PRESENT
) . 0 5 4
.O FURTHER FUNCTIONS ARE INITIATED BY BINARY INPUT
N O T A L L O C A T E D
# ' #

,EAVE THE SELECTION LEVEL WITH KEY COMBINATION & ! 9OU CAN GO THEN TO THE NEXT BINARY INPUT WITH THE ARROW
KEY !
" ) . ! 2 9
-ARSHALLING BINARY INPUT
) . 0 5 4
&.O !BBREVIATION $ESCRIPTION

NOT ALLOCATED "INARY INPUT IS NOT ALLOCATED TO ANY INPUT FUNCTION
4IME 3YNCHRO 3YNCHRONIZE INTERNAL REAL TIME CLOCK
3TART &LT2EC 3TART FAULT RECORDING FROM EXTERNAL COMMAND VIA BINARY INPUT
,%$ RESET 2ESET ,%$ INDICATORS
0ARAM3ELEC 0ARAMETER SET SELECTION IN CONJUNCTION WITH &.O
!NNUNC 5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION
3YS 4EST 3YSTEM INTERFACE MESSAGESVALUES ARE MARKED WITH 4EST OPERATION
3YS -- BLOCK 3YSTEM INTERFACE MESSAGES AND MEASURED VALUES ARE BLOCKED
#" !UXP CL #IRCUIT BREAKER IS POLE CLOSED FROM #" AUXILIARY CONTACT
-ANUAL #LOSE #IRCUIT BREAKER IS MANUALLY CLOSED FROM DISCREPANCY SWITCH
#LOSE#MD"LO "LOCK ALL CLOSING COMMANDS
64 MCB 4RIP 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB FEEDER HAS TRIPPED
6 MCB 4RIP 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB BUS BAR HAS TRIPPED
P 4RIP 0ERM %XTERNAL !2 READY FOR SINGLE POLE RECLOSURE
/NLY POLE %XTERNAL !2 IS PROGRAMMED SINGLE POLE ONLY
2!2 2ELEASE 2ELEASE 2!2 STAGES FROM EXTERNAL EG EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE
$!2 2ELEASE 2ELEASE $!2 STAGE FROM EXTERNAL EG EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE
3TART &LT,OC 3TART FAULT LOCATOR FROM EXTERNAL COMMAND VIA BINARY INPUT
#" 4EST 4RIGGER CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST
%& $ET ON 3WITCH ON EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM
%& $ET OFF 3WITCH OFF EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM
%& $ETBLOC "LOCK EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM
%& BLOCK "LOCK EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED SYSTEM
%& COMP ON 3WITCH ON DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
%& COMPOFF 3WITCH OFF DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
%& 2ECEPT #ARRIER RECEPTION SIGNAL FOR DIRECTIONAL %& COMPARISON
%& 2EC&AIL #ARRIER RECEPTION FOR DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT COMPARISON FAULTY
/, ON 3WITCH ON OVERLOAD PROTECTION
/, OFF 3WITCH OFF OVERLOAD PROTECTION
/, BLOCK "LOCK OVERLOAD PROTECTION
%MER BLOCK "LOCK EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
) BLOCK "LOCK ) STAGE OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
!2 ON 3WITCH ON INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
!2 OFF 3WITCH OFF INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
!2 BLOCK "LOCK INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION STATICALLY
!2 RESET 2ESET INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
P 2!2 BLOCK "LOCK SINGLE POLE 2!2
P 2!2 BLOCK "LOCK TREE POLE 2!2
2!2 BLOCK "LOCK COMPLETE 2!2
$!2 BLOCK "LOCK COMPLETE $!2
3TART !2 3TART SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL !2
4RIP , !2 4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL !2
4RIP P !2 4RIP SIGNAL SINGLE POLE FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL !2
4RIP P !2 4RIP SIGNAL THREE POLE FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL !2
$!2 AFT 2!2 $!2 IS PERMITTED ONLY AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2
#" READY #IRCUIT BREAKER READY FOR !2 CYCLE
3YNCRELEASE 2ECLOSE RELEASE FROM AN EXTERNAL SYNCHRONISM CHECK RELAY
4ABLE -ARSHALLING POSSIBILITIES FOR BINARY INPUTS CONTINUED NEXT PAGE
# ' #


3YNC ON 3WITCH ON INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
3YNC OFF 3WITCH OFF INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
3YNC BLOCK "LOCK INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
3YNC 3TART 3TART TO MEASURE SIGNAL FOR INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK
3YNC SYNCH 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM CHECK SYNCHRONISM
3YNC 55 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM LIVE LINE DEAD BUS
3YNC 55 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM DEAD LINE LIVE BUS
3YNC 55 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM DEAD LINE DEAD BUS
3YNC ORIDE 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM OVERRIDE ANY CHECK
$IST BLOCK "LOCK DISTANCE PROTECTION
%XTENS :" 2ELEASE DISTANCE OVERREACHING ZONE :" FROM EXTERNAL
%XTENS :, 2ELEASE DISTANCE OVERREACHING ZONE :, FROM EXTERNAL
$IS 2ECEPT #ARRIER RECEPTION SIGNAL FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION
$IS2EC&AIL #ARRIER RECEPTION FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION FAULTY
$IS0/44 ON 3WITCH ON PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
$IS0/44 OFF 3WITCH OFF PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
$IS0544 ON 3WITCH ON PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
$IS0544 OFF 3WITCH OFF PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
%XT4RIP BLK "LOCK TRIP SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FUNCTION
%XT4RIP , 4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FUNCTION
%XT4RPWO!2 4RIP SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FUNCTION WITHOUT AUTO RECLOSURE
5SER 43TART 5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTION TIMER START
5SER 42ESET 5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTION TIMER RESET
4ABLE -ARSHALLING POSSIBILITIES FOR BINARY INPUTS
!DDR ST DISPLAY LINE ND DISPLAY LINE &.O 2EMARKS

-!23(!,,).' ").!29 ).0543 (EADING OF THE ADDRESS BLOCK
").!29 ).054 !CKNOWLEDGE AND RESET OF STORED ,%$ AND DIS
).054 ,%$ RESET ./ PLAY INDICATIONS ,%$ TEST
").!29 ).054 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB HAS

).054 64 MCB 4RIP ./ TRIPPED
").!29 ).054 FROM CIRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT #" POSI
).054 #" !UXP CL ./ TION IS /.
").!29 ).054 -ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND FROM DISCREPANCY

).054 -ANUAL #LOSE ./ SWITCH
").!29 ).054

).054 $IS 2ECEPT ./
FROM CARRIER DEVICE FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DIS
").!29 ).054 TANCE PROTECTION
).054 $IS2EC&AIL ./
").!29 ).054

).054 #" READY ./
").!29 ).054 "INARY INPUTS TO ARE ONLY EFFECTIVE WHEN THE
).054 !2 BLOCK ./ INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS AVAILABLE IN
THE RELAY AND HAS BEEN CONFIGURED AS %8)34 RE
").!29 ).054 FER TO 3ECTION
).054 !2 ON ./
").!29 ).054

).054 !2 OFF ./
4ABLE 0RESET BINARY INPUTS
# ' #

-ARSHALLING OF THE SIGNAL OUTPUT RELAYS ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE UNIT CONTAINS SIGNAL OUTPUTS ALARM RELAYS .OTE AS TO 4ABLE !NNUNCIATIONS WHICH ARE INDI
4HE SIGNAL RELAYS ARE DESIGNATED 3)'.!, 2%,!9 CATED BY A LEADING SIGN REPRESENT THE DIRECT
TO 3)'.!, 2%,!9 AND CAN BE MARSHALLED IN AD CONFIRMATION OF THE BINARY INPUTS AND ARE AVAILABLE AS
DRESS BLOCK 4HE BLOCK IS REACHED BY PAGING IN LONG AS THE CORRESPONDING BINARY INPUT IS ENERGIZED
BLOCKS WITH Å Ç OR BY DIRECTLY ADDRESSING $!
% 4HE SELECTION PROCEDURE IS CARRIED OUT AS DE &URTHER INFORMATION ABOUT ANNUNCIATIONS SEE 3EC
SCRIBED IN 3ECTION -ULTIPLE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE TION
POSSIBLE IE ONE LOGICAL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTION CAN
BE GIVEN TO SEVERAL PHYSICAL SIGNAL RELAYS SEE ALSO 4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE OUTPUT SIGNAL RELAYS AS DELIV
3ECTION ERED FROM FACTORY IS SHOWN IN THE GENERAL DIAGRAMS
IN !PPENDIX ! 4HE FOLLOWING BOXES SHOW EXAMPLES
4ABLE GIVES A LISTING OF ALL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS FOR MARSHALLING )N THE EXAMPLE FOR SIGNAL RELAY THE
WITH THE ASSOCIATED FUNCTION NUMBERS &.O !NNUN GROUP ANNUNCIATION FOR SEVERAL ANNUNCIATION FUNC
CIATION FUNCTIONS ARE NATURALLY NOT EFFECTIVE WHEN THE TIONS ON ONE SIGNAL RELAY IS SHOWN 4ABLE SHOWS
CORRESPONDING PROTECTION FUNCTION IS NOT FITTED IN THE ALL SIGNAL RELAYS AS PRESET FROM THE FACTORY
RELAY OR HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED OUT DE CONFI
GURED REFER TO 3ECTION
- ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . ' "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK -ARSHALLING OF THE OUTPUT

3 ) ' . ! , 2 % , ! 9 3 SIGNAL RELAYS
4HE FIRST SIGNAL RELAY IS REACHED WITH THE KEY !
& 3 ) ' . ! ,
!LLOCATIONS FOR SIGNAL RELAY
2 % , ! 9
2 % , ! 9 3IGNAL RELAY HAS BEEN PRESET FOR

4RANSMISSION SIGNAL FOR CARRIER FOR TELEPROTECTION
$ I S 3 E N D WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION &.O
2 % , ! 9
NO FURTHER FUNCTIONS ARE PRESET FOR SIGNAL RELAY
,EAVE THE SELECTION LEVEL WITH KEY COMBINATION & ! 9OU CAN GO THEN TO THE NEXT SIGNAL OUTPUT RELAY WITH THE
ARROW KEY ! 3IGNAL RELAY REPRESENTS AS PRESET FROM THE FACTORY AN EXAMPLE FOR A GROUP ANNUNCIATION IE
SEVERAL LOGICAL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS ARE GIVEN TO ONE OUTPUT SIGNAL RELAY
& 3 ) ' . ! , !LLOCATIONS FOR SIGNAL RELAY

2 % , ! 9 -EANING &AILURE IN MEASURED QUANTITIES

ST 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB HAS
6 4 M C B 4 R I P
TRIPPED &.O
# ' #


ND &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED CURRENT SUM
& A I L U R E ¦ )
MONITOR &.O

RD &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE SUM
& A I L U R E ¦5 P E MONITOR PHASE TO EARTH &.O

TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE SUM
& A I L U R E ¦ 5 P P
MONITOR PHASE TO PHASE &.O

& A I L U R E ) S Y M M TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED CURRENT SYMME
TRY MONITOR &.O

& A I L U R E 5 S Y M M TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE SYM
METRY MONITOR PHASE TO PHASE &.O

& A I L U R E 5 M E A S TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE MONITOR
MEASURED VOLTAGE COLLAPSED &.O
2 % , ! 9
3IGNAL RELAY HAS BEEN PRESET FOR
& U S E & A I L U R E TH &AILURE DETECTED BY FUSE FAILURE MONITOR &.O

2 % , ! 9
3IGNAL RELAY HAS BEEN PRESET FOR
& A I L 0 H A S E 3 E Q
TH &AILURE DETECTED BY PHASE SEQUENCE MONITOR
&.O
2 % , ! 9
N O T A L L O C A T E D NO FURTHER FUNCTIONS ARE PRESET FOR SIGNAL RELAY
!FTER INPUT OF ALL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS FOR SIGNAL RELAY CHANGE BACK TO THE MARSHALLING LEVEL IS CARRIED OUT
WITH & !
3 ) ' . ! , !LLOCATIONS FOR SIGNAL RELAY

2 % , ! 9 -EANING &AILURE IN MEASURED QUANTITIES
# ' #


NOT ALLOCATED .O ANNUNCIATION ALLOCATED
4IME 3YNCHRO 3YNCHRONIZE INTERNAL REAL TIME CLOCK
3TART &LT2EC 3TART FAULT RECORDING BY EXTERNAL COMMAND VIA BINARY INPUT
,%$ RESET 2ESET ,%$ INDICATORS
3YS 4EST 3YSTEM INTERFACE MESSAGESVALUES ARE MARKED WITH 4EST OPERATION
3YS -- BLOCK 3YSTEM INTERFACE MESSAGES AND MEASURED VALUES ARE BLOCKED
$EVOPERATIVE 0ROTECTION DEVICE OPERATIVE
0ROT OPERAT !T LEAST ONE PROTECTION FUNCTION IS OPERATIVE
,%$ RESET 3TORED ANNUNCIATIONS ARE RESET
0ARAMRUNNING 0ARAMETERS ARE BEING SET
0ARAM 3ET ! 0ARAMETER 3ET ! IS ACTIVATED
0ARAM 3ET " 0ARAMETER 3ET " IS ACTIVATED
0ARAM 3ET # 0ARAMETER 3ET # IS ACTIVATED
0ARAM 3ET $ 0ARAMETER 3ET $ IS ACTIVATED
&AILURE 6 &AILURE 6 INTERNAL DC SUPPLY
&AILURE 6 &AILURE 6 !$ CONVERTER
&AILURE )/ &AILURE IN FIRST INPUTOUTPUT MODULE BASE MODULE '%!
&AILURE )/ &AILURE IN ADDITIONAL INPUTOUTPUT MODULE ADDITIONAL MODULE :%!
) SUPERVISION 'ENERAL FAILURE DETECTED BY CURRENT SUPERVISION
&AILURE ¦) &AILURE SUPERVISION ¦) MEASURED CURRENTS
&AILURE )SYMM &AILURE SUPERVISION SYMMETRY )
5 SUPERVISION 'ENERAL FAILURE DETECTED BY VOLTAGE SUPERVISION
&AILURE ¦5P E &AILURE SUPERVISION ¦5 PHASE EARTH
&AILURE ¦5P P &AILURE SUPERVISION ¦5 PHASE PHASE
&AILURE 5SYMM &AILURE SUPERVISION SYMMETRY 5
&AILURE 5MEAS &AILURE MEASURED VOLTAGE
&USE &AILURE &USE FAILURE MONITOR OPERATED
&AIL0HASE3EQ &AILURE SUPERVISION PHASE SEQUENCE
#" !UXP CL #IRCUIT BREAKER POSITION IS /. FROM #" AUXILIARY CONTACT
-ANUAL #LOSE #IRCUIT BREAKER IS MANUALLY CLOSED FROM DISCREPANCY SWITCH
#LOSE#MD"LO "LOCK CLOSING COMMAND
64 MCB 4RIP 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB FEEDER HAS TRIPPED
6 MCB 4RIP 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB BUS BAR HAS TRIPPED
P 4RIP 0ERM %XTERNAL !2 READY FOR POLE RECLOSURE
/NLY POLE %XTERNAL !2 IS PROGRAMMED POLE ONLY
2!2 2ELEASE 2ELEASE 2!2 STAGES FROM EXTERNAL
$!2 2ELEASE 2ELEASE $!2 STAGES FROM EXTERNAL
$EVICE &LT$ET 'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION OF THE DEVICE
$EV&LT$ET , &AULT DETECTION OF THE DEVICE PHASE ,
$EV&LT$ET % &AULT DETECTION OF THE DEVICE EARTH FAULT
4ABLE -ARSHALLING POSSIBILITIES FOR SIGNAL RELAYS AND ,%$S CONTINUED NEXT PAGE
# ' #


$EVICE 4RIP 'ENERAL TRIP OF THE DEVICE
$EV4RIP P, 4RIP BY THE DEVICE SINGLE POLE ,
$EV4RIP P 4RIP BY THE DEVICE THREE POLE , , ,
$EV4RIP FORW 4RIP BY THE DEVICE ON FAULT IN FORWARD LINE DIRECTION
$EV4RIP REV 4RIP BY THE DEVICE ON FAULT IN REVERSE BUS BAR DIRECTION
-ANUAL #LOSE -ANUAL CLOSE INDICATION OF CIRCUIT BREAKER
-AN#LOSE #MD -ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
#" !LARM 3UPP #IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION ALARM SUPPRESSED
3TART &LT,OC 3TART FAULT LOCATOR BY EXTERNAL COMMAND VIA BINARY INPUT
#" 4EST 4RIGGER CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST
#" IN 4EST #IRCUIT BREAKER TEST IS IN PROGRESS
#" 4EST 4RIP 4RIP BY INTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST FUNCTION GENERAL
#" 4EST P , 4RIP BY INTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST FUNCTION SINGLE POLE ,
#" 4EST P 4RIP BY INTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST FUNCTION THREE POLE ,
%& $ET ON 3WITCH ON EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM
%& $ET OFF 3WITCH OFF EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM
%& $ETBLOC "LOCK EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM
%& $ET OFF %ARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM IS SWITCHED OFF
%& $ETBLOCK %ARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM IS BLOCKED
%& $ETACTIV %ARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM IS ACTIVE
%& $ETECTION %ARTH FAULT IN NON EARTHED SYSTEM DETECTED
%& $ETEC , %ARTH FAULT NON EARTHED IN PHASE , DETECTED
%& FORWARDS %ARTH FAULT NON EARTHED IN FORWARD DIRECTION DETECTED
%& REVERSE %ARTH FAULT NON EARTHED IN REVERSE DIRECTION DETECTED
%& UNDEFINED %ARTH FAULT NON EARTHED DIRECTION UNDEFINED
%& $ET 4RIP 4RIP BY EARTH FAULT DETECTION
%& BLOCK "LOCK EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED NETWORKS
%& COMP ON 3WITCH ON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
%& COMPOFF 3WITCH OFF EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
%& 2ECEPT 2ECEPTION SIGNAL FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
%& 2EC&AIL 2ECEPTION FAILURE FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
%& 0ROT OFF %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF
%& BLOCKED %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS BLOCKED
%& ACTIVE %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS ACTIVE
%& $IRBLOCK %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION DIRECTIONAL STAGE IS BLOCKED
%& &LT)E %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION LOW VALUE STAGE )% PICKED UP
%& &LT )E %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION NON DIRECTIONAL STAGE )% PICKED UP DEFINITE OR
INVERSE TIME
%& &LT )E %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION DIRECTIONAL STAGE )% PICKED UP
%& 5E %ARTH FAULT DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5E PICKED UP
%& 4 $ELAY %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION DELAY TIME EXPIRED
%& 4 %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION DIRECTIONAL DELAY TIME EXPIRED
%& 4 %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION NON DIRECTIONAL DELAY TIME EXPIRED
%& 4RIP 4RIP BY EARTH FAULT PROTECTION GENERAL
%& $IR OFF $IRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF
%& 3END #ARRIER TRANSMISSION SIGNAL FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON %&
%& %CHO %CHO SIGNAL SENT FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON %&
%& 4RANS"LOC 4RANSIENT BLOCKING OF EARTH FAULT PROTECTION AFTER EXTERNAL FAULT
# ' #

/, ON 3WITCH ON THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

/, OFF 3WITCH OFF THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
/, BLOCK "LOCK THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
/, 0ROT OFF 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF
/, BLOCKED 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION IS BLOCKED
/, ACTIVE 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION IS ACTIVE
/, 7ARN ) 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION CURRENT WARNING STAGE PICKED UP
/, 7ARN 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION THERMAL WARNING STAGE PICKED UP
/, PICKUP 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION FAULT DETECTION OF TRIP STAGE
/, 4RIP 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION TRIP BY TRIP STAGE
%MER BLOCK "LOCK EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
) BLOCK "LOCK ) STAGE OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
%MER OFF %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF
%MER BLOCK %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS BLOCKED
%MER ACTIVE %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS ACTIVE
%MER MODE %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME MODE IS RUNNING
%MER'EN&LT 'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
%MER &LT , &AULT DETECTION , OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
%MER &LT % %ARTH FAULT DETECTION OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
%MER ) &AULT DETECTION OF ) STAGE OF EMERGENCY /# PROTECTION
%MER ) &AULT DETECTION OF ) STAGE OF EMERGENCY /# PROTECTION
%MER )% &AULT DETECTION OF )% STAGE OF EMERGENCY /# PROTECTION
%MER 4) %MERGENCY /# PROTECTION TIME 4 ) EXPIRED
%MER 4) %MERGENCY /# PROTECTION TIME 4 ) EXPIRED
%MER 4)% %MERGENCY /# PROTECTION TIME 4 )% EXPIRED
%MER'EN4RIP 'ENERAL TRIP BY EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
%MER4RIPP, 4RIP SINGLE POLE , BY EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
%MER4RIP P 4RIP THREE POLE BY EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
!2 ON 3WITCH ON INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
!2 OFF 3WITCH OFF INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
!2 BLOCK "LOCK INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION ABORT
!2 RESET 2ESET INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
P 2!2 BLOCK "LOCK SINGLE POLE RAPID AUTO RECLOSURE 2!2 ST SHOT
P 2!2 BLOCK "LOCK THREE POLE RAPID AUTO RECLOSURE 2!2 ST SHOT
2!2 BLOCK "LOCK COMPLETE RAPID AUTO RECLOSURE 2!2 ST SHOT
$!2 BLOCK "LOCK COMPLETE DELAYED AUTO RECLOSURE $!2 FURTHER SHOTS
3TART !2 3TART SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
4RIP , !2 4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
4RIP P !2 4RIP SIGNAL SINGLE POLE FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
4RIP P !2 4RIP SIGNAL THREE POLE FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
$!2 AFT 2!2 $!2 IS PERMITTED ONLY AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2
#" READY #IRCUIT BREAKER READY FOR !2 CYCLE
3YNCRELEASE 2ECLOSE RELEASE BY AN EXTERNAL SYNCHRONISM CHECK RELAY
!2 OFF )NTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS SWITCHED OFF
!2 ON )NTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS SWITCHED ON
# ' #


!2 INOPERATIV )NTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS NOT OPERATIVE
!2 NOT READY )NTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS NOT READY FOR RECLOSE
!2 BLOCKDYN )NTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS BLOCKED DYNAMICALLY
#" NOT READY #IRCUIT BREAKER NOT READY FOR A TRIPRECLOSE CYCLE
!2 4 #" %XP #IRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION TIME EXPIRED
!2 IN PROG !UTO RECLOSE CYCLE IS IN PROGRESS
2!2 ONLY )NTERNAL !2 FUNCTION IS PROGRAMMED TO PERFORM ONLY 2!2 CYCLE
2!2 4 ACTRUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION ACTION TIME FOR 2!2 IS RUNNING
2!2 4 P RUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION SINGLE POLE DEAD TIME FOR 2!2 IS RUNNING
2!2 4 P RUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION THREE POLE DEAD TIME FOR 2!2 IS RUNNING
2!2 P 0ROG 2!2 FUNCTION IS PROGRAMMED TO PERFORM ONLY SINGLE POLE !2
2!2 P 0ROG 2!2 FUNCTION IS PROGRAMMED TO PERFORM ONLY THREE POLE !2
2!2 :ONE 2EL )NTERNAL !2 FUNCTION IS READY TO PERMIT TRIP IN 2!2 STAGE
!2 EVOLVFLT !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION EVOLVING FAULT RECOGNIZED DURING DEAD TIME
$!2 ONLY )NTERNAL !2 FUNCTION IS PROGRAMMED TO PERFORM ONLY $!2 CYCLES
$!2 4 ACT RUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION ACTION TIME FOR $!2 IS RUNNING
$!2 4 P RUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION DEAD TIME FOR FIRST $!2 IS RUNNING
$!2 4 P RUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION DEAD TIME FOR SECOND $!2 IS RUNNING
$!2 4 P RUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION DEAD TIME FOR FURTHER $!2 IS RUNNING
$!2 :ONE 2EL INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION IS READY TO PERMIT TRIP IN $!2 STAGE
!2 #LOSE #MD 2ECLOSE COMMAND BY INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
2!2 P #LOSE 2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER POLE 2!2
2!2 P #LOSE 2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER POLE 2!2 RAPID !2
$!2 P #LOSE 2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER POLE $!2 DELAYED !2
!2 4 2ECLRUN !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION RECLAIM TIME IS RUNNING
!2 SUCCESSFUL !UTO RECLOSURE WAS SUCCESSFUL
$EFINIT4RIP $EFINITIVE FINAL TRIP SIGNAL
P 4RIP PERM )NTERNAL !2 FUNCTION IS READY TO PERMIT SINGLE POLE TRIP
3YNC-EAS2EQ )NTERNAL !2 FUNCTION REQUEST FOR SYNCHRONISM OR VOLTAGE CHECK
!2 4RIP P )NTERNAL !2 FUNCTION TRIPS THREE POLE BECAUSE BLOCKED
3YNC ON 3WITCH ON SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
3YNC OFF 3WITCH OFF SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
3YNC BLOCK "LOCK SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
3YNC 3TART 3TART TO MEASURE SIGNAL FOR INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK
3YNC SYNCH 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM CHECK SYNCHRONISM
3YNC 55 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM LIVE LINE DEAD BUS
3YNC 55 3YNCHROC HECK PROGRAM DEAD LINE LIVE BUS
3YNC 55 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM DEAD LINE DEAD BUS
3YNC ORIDE 3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM OVERRIDE ANY CHECK
3YNC OFF 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS SWITCHED OFF
3YNC BLOCKED 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS BLOCKED
3YNC FAULTY 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS DISTURBED
3YNC4SUP%XP #IRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION TIME EXPIRED
3YNC RUNNING 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK IS RUNNING
3YNC/VERRIDE 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK HAS STATED OVERRIDE
3YNC 3YNCHRO 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK HAS STATED SYNCHRONISM
3YNC 55 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK HAS STATED LIVE LINE DEAD BUS
3YNC 55 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK HAS STATED DEAD LINE LIVE BUS
3YNC 55 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK HAS STATED DEAD LINE DEAD BUS
3YNC 5DIFF 3YNCHRONISM CHECK 5 EXCEEDED
3YNC FDIFF 3YNCHRONISM CHECK F EXCEEDED
3YNC DIFF 3YNCHRONISM CHECK EXCEEDED
# ' #


3YNC RELEASE 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK CLOSING RELEASE
3YNC#LOSE#MD 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK CLOSING COMMAND
$IST BLOCK "LOCK DISTANCE PROTECTION
%XTENS :" 2ELEASE DISTANCE OVERREACHING ZONE :" FROM EXTERNAL
%XTENS :, 2ELEASE DISTANCE OVERREACHING ZONE :, FROM EXTERNAL
$IST OFF $ISTANCE PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF
$IST BLOCKED $ISTANCE PROTECTION IS BLOCKED
$IST ACTIVE $ISTANCE PROTECTION IS ACTIVE
$IS:" !2 BLK $ISTANCE PROTECTION BLOCKS RECLOSURE AFTER FAULT IN ZONE :"
$IS:, !2 BLK $ISTANCE PROTECTION BLOCKS RECLOSURE AFTER FAULT IN ZONE :,
$IST'EN&LT $ISTANCE PROTECTION 'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION
$IST&AULT , $ISTANCE PROTECTION &AULT DETECTION ,
$IST&AULT % $ISTANCE PROTECTION %ARTH FAULT DETECTION
,OOP , % F $ISTANCE PROTECTION &AULT IN LOOP , % IN FORWARD DIRECTION
,OOP , F $ISTANCE PROTECTION &AULT IN LOOP , , IN FORWARD DIRECTION
,OOP , % R $ISTANCE PROTECTION &AULT IN LOOP , % IN REVERSE DIRECTION
,OOP , R $ISTANCE PROTECTION &AULT IN LOOP , , IN REVERSE DIRECTION
$IST &OR$IR $ISTANCE PROTECTION &AULT IN FORWARD DIRECTION
$IST 2EV$IR $ISTANCE PROTECTION &AULT IN REVERSE DIRECTION
$IST 4 $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4IME 4 ST STAGE EXPIRED
$IST 4 $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4IME 4 ND STAGE EXPIRED
$IST 4 $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4IME 4 RD STAGE EXPIRED
$IST 4 $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4IME 4 TH STAGE DIRECTIONAL EXPIRED
$IST 4 $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4IME 4 FINAL STAGE EXPIRED
$IST 4" $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4IME 4" ST EXTENDED STAGE EXPIRED
$IST 4, $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4IME 4, ND EXTENDED STAGE EXPIRED
$IS'EN 4RIP $ISTANCE PROTECTION 'ENERAL 4RIP COMMAND
$IS4RIP P, $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP SINGLE POLE ,
$IS4RIP P $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP THREE POLE
$IS4RIP BACK $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP WITH A HIGHER BACK UP STAGE
$IS4RIP:P $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN STAGE :4 SINGLE POLE
$IS4RIP:P $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN STAGE :4 THREE POLE
$IS4RIP:"P $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN EXTENDED STAGE :"4" SINGLE POLE
$IS4RIP:"P $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN EXTENDED STAGE :"4" THREE POLE
$IS4RIP :, $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN EXTENDED STAGE :,4,
$IS4RIP:P $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN STAGE :4 SINGLE POLE
$IS4RIP:P $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN STAGE :4 THREE POLE
$IS4RIP:4 $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN STAGE :4
$IS4RIP &$ $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN DIRECTIONAL STAGE FAULT DETECTION
$IS4RIP $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN NON DIRECTIONAL STAGE FAULT DETECTION
# ' #


$IS 2ECEPT #ARRIER RECEPTION SIGNAL FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION
$IS2EC&AIL #ARRIER RECEPTION FAULTY SIGNAL FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION
$IS0/44 ON 3WITCH ON PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
$IS0/44 OFF 3WITCH OFF PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
$IS0544 ON 3WITCH ON PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
$IS0544 OFF 3WITCH OFF PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
$IS4ELE ON 4ELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION IS SWITCHED ON
$IS4ELE OFF 4ELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF
$IS 2ECEPT #ARRIER SIGNAL FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION RECEIVED
$IS 2EC&AIL #ARRIER RECEPTION FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION FAULTY
$IS 3END 4RANSMISSION SIGNAL FROM DISTANCE PROTECTION
$IS0/44 %CHO %CHO SIGNAL DISTANCE PROTECTION TRANSMITTED
$IS4RANS"LO 4RANSIENT BLOCKING DISTANCE PROTECTION IS RUNNING
0OWER 3WING 0OWER SWING DETECTED
03 4 ACTION 0OWER SWING ACTION TIME IS RUNNING
/3 4RIP /UT OF STEP 4RIP COMMAND
%XT4RIP BLK "LOCK TRIP SIGNAL BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
%XT4RIP , 4RIP SIGNAL , BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
%XT4RPWO!2 4RIP SIGNAL BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION WITHOUT AUTO RECLOSURE
%XT'EN4RIP 'ENERAL TRIP BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
%XT4RIP P, 4RIP SINGLE POLE , BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
%XT4RIP P 4RIP THREE POLE BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
%XT4RIP WO!2 4RIP THREE POLE BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION WITHOUT AUTO RECLOSURE
5SER OUTPUT /UTPUT SIGNAL OF USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTION
4ABLE -ARSHALLING POSSIBILITIES FOR SIGNAL RELAYS AND ,%$S
# ' #


-!23(!,,).' 3)'.!, 2%,!93 (EADING OF THE ADDRESS BLOCK
3)'.!, 2%,!9 4RANSMISSION SIGNAL FOR CARRIER FROM TELEPRO

2%,!9 $IS 3END TECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION
3)'.!, 2%,!9

2%,!9 !2 INOPERATIV ONLY WHEN AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS AVAIL
ABLE AND CONFIGURED AS %8)34
3)'.!, 2%,!9
2%,!9 #" !LARM 3UPP
3)'.!, 2%,!9

2%,!9 64 MCB 4RIP
2%,!9 &AILURE ¦)
2%,!9 &AILURE ¦5P E
2%,!9 &AILURE ¦5P P 'ROUP ANNUNCIATION OF ALL DISTURBANCES IN
2%,!9 &AILURE )SYMM MEASURED QUANTITIES
2%,!9 &AILURE 5SYMM
2%,!9 &AILURE 5MEAS
2%,!9 &USE &AILURE
2%,!9 &AIL0HASE3EQ
3)'.!, 2%,!9 4HE .# CONTACT OF THIS RELAY INDICATES $E

2%,!9 $EVOPERATIVE VICE FAULT
3)'.!, 2%,!9 4RIP SIGNAL GIVEN BY EITHER PROTECTION FUNC

2%,!9 $EVICE 4RIP TION OF THE DEVICE
3)'.!, 2%,!9

2%,!9 $IST&AULT ,
2%,!9 %MER &LT ,
3)'.!, 2%,!9

2%,!9 $IST&AULT , &AULT DETECTION ANNUNCIATIONS OF
2%,!9 %MER &LT , THE DISTANCE PROTECTION FUNCTION
OR EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME
3)'.!, 2%,!9 PROTECTION
2%,!9 $IST&AULT ,
2%,!9 %MER &LT ,
3)'.!, 2%,!9

2%,!9 $IST&AULT %
2%,!9 %MER &LT %
3)'.!, 2%,!9 &AULT IN REVERSE DIRECTION

2%,!9 $EV4RIP 2EV
4ABLE 0RESET ANNUNCIATIONS FOR SIGNAL RELAYS
# ' #

-ARSHALLING OF THE ,%$ INDICATORS ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE UNIT CONTAINS ,%$S FOR OPTICAL INDICATIONS ESSARY TO INPUT THE LEADING ZEROS 4O INDICATE WHETH
OF WHICH CAN BE MARSHALLED 4HEY ARE DESIGNATED ER THE STORED OR UNSTORED MODE SHALL BE EFFECTIVE THE
,%$ TO ,%$ AND CAN BE MARSHALLED IN ADDRESS FUNCTION NUMBER CAN BE EXTENDED BY A DECIMAL
BLOCK 4HE BLOCK IS REACHED BY PAGING IN BLOCKS POINT FOLLOWED BY OR WHEREBY
WITH Å Ç OR BY DIRECTLY ADDRESSING WITH $!
% 4HE SELECTION PROCEDURE IS CARRIED OUT AS DE UNSTORED INDICATION NOT MEMORIZED CORRE
SCRIBED IN 3ECTION -ULTIPLE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE SPONDS TO NM AS ABOVE
POSSIBLE IE ONE LOGICAL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTION CAN STORED INDICATION MEMORIZED CORRESPONDS TO
BE GIVEN TO SEVERAL ,%$S SEE ALSO 3ECTION M AS ABOVE
!PART FROM THE LOGICAL FUNCTION EACH ,%$ CAN BE )F THE EXTENSION WITH OR IS OMITTED THE DISPLAY
MARSHALLED TO OPERATE EITHER IN THE STORED MODE M SHOWS FIRST THE FUNCTION DESIGNATION IN UNSTORED
FOR MEMORIZED OR UNSTORED MODE NM FOR NOT MEM MODE WITH NM 0RESS THE .O KEY . TO CHANGE TO
ORIZED %ACH ANNUNCIATION FUNCTION IS DISPLAYED STORED MODE M !FTER DIRECT INPUT OTHER FUNCTIONS
WITH THE INDEX M OR NM WHEN PROCEEDING WITH THE . CAN BE SELECTED BY PAGING THROUGH THE FUNCTIONS FOR
KEY WARDS WITH THE .O KEY . OR BACKWARDS WITH THE
BACKSPACE KEY 2 4HE CHANGED FUNCTION THEN MUST
4HE MARSHALLABLE ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS ARE THE BE RE CONFIRMED BY THE ENTER KEY %
SAME AS THOSE LISTED IN 4ABLE !NNUNCIATION FUNC
TIONS ARE OF COURSE NOT EFFECTIVE WHEN THE CORRE 4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE ,%$S AS PRESET BY THE FACTORY
SPONDING PROTECTION FUNCTION IS NOT FITTED IN THE RELAY IS SHOWN IN THE FRONT OF THE UNIT &IGURE 4HE FOL
OR HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED OUT DE CONFIGURED LOWING BOXES SHOW AS AN EXAMPLE THE ASSIGNMENT
FOR ,%$ 4ABLE SHOWS ALL ,%$ INDICATORS AS THEY
ARE PRESET FROM THE FACTORY
7ITH DIRECT INPUT OF THE FUNCTION NUMBER IT IS NOT NEC
- ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . ' "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK -ARSHALLING OF THE ,%$ IN

, % $ ). $ ) # ! 4 / 2 3 DICATORS
4HE FIRST MARSHALLABLE ,%$ IS REACHED WITH THE KEY !
, % $ !LLOCATIONS FOR ,%$

-EANING &AILURE IN MEASURED QUANTITIES
, % $ ,%$ HAS BEEN PRESET FOR

ST 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB HAS
6 4 M C B 4 R I P N M
TRIPPED &.O

& A I L U R E ¦ ) N M ND &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED CURRENT SUM
MONITOR &.O
# ' #


RD &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE SUM
& A I L U R E ¦ 5 P E N M MONITOR PHASE TO EARTH &.O

TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE SUM
& A I L U R E ¦ 5 P P N M
MONITOR PHASE TO PHASE &.O

TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED CURRENT SYMME
& A I L U R E ) S Y M M N M
TRY MONITOR &.O

& A I L U R E 5 S Y M M N M TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE SYM
METRY MONITOR PHASE TO PHASE &.O

& A I L U R E 5 M E A S N M TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE MONITOR
MEASURED VOLTAGE COLLAPSED &.O

TH &AILURE DETECTED BY FUSE FAILURE MONITOR &.O
& U S E & A I L U R E N M


TH &AILURE DETECTED BY PHASE SEQUENCE MONITOR
& A I L 0 H A S E 3 E Q N M &.O
, % $
NO FURTHER FUNCTIONS ARE PRESET FOR ,%$
!FTER INPUT OF ALL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS FOR ,%$ CHANGE BACK TO THE MARSHALLING LEVEL IS CARRIED OUT WITH
& !
, % $ !LLOCATIONS FOR ,%$

-EANING &AILURE IN MEASURED QUANTITIES
4HE COMPLETE PRESETTINGS FOR ,%$ INDICATORS ARE LISTED IN 4ABLE
# ' #


-!23(!,,).' ,%$S (EADING OF THE ADDRESS BLOCK
,%$
,%$ 64 MCB 4RIP NM
,%$ &AILURE ¦ ) NM
,%$ &AILURE ¦ 5P E NM
,%$ &AILURE ¦ 5P P NM 'ROUP ANNUNCIATION OF ALL DISTURBANCES IN
,%$ &AILURE )SYMM NM MEASURED QUANTITIES
,%$ &AILURE 5SYMM NM
,%$ &AILURE 5MEAS NM
,%$ &USE &AILURE NM
,%$ &AIL0HASE3EQ NM
,%$
,%$ $IST&AULT , M
,%$ %MER &LT , M
,%$
,%$ $IST&AULT , M
,%$ %MER &LT , M &AULT DETECTION ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE
DISTANCE PROTECTION FUNCTION OR THE EMER
,%$ GENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
,%$ $IST&AULT , M
,%$ %MER &LT , M
,%$
,%$ $IST&AULT % M
,%$ %MER &LT % M
,%$ ONLY WHEN THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNC

,%$ !2 NOT READY NM TION IS AVAILABLE AND CONFIGURED AS %8)34
,%$
,%$ $IST 4 M
,%$ %MER 4) M
,%$
,%$ $IST 4 M
,%$ )NDICATION OF EXPIRY OF THE DISTANCE PROTEC

,%$ $IST 4 M TION STAGES OR OF THE TIME STAGES OF THE
EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
,%$
,%$ $IST 4 M
,%$
,%$ $IST 4 M
,%$ %MER 4) M
,%$ %MER 4)% M
,%$
,%$ $EV4RIP P, M
,%$ $EV4RIP P M
,%$ 4RIP SIGNAL GIVEN BY EITHER PROTECTION FUNC

,%$ $EV4RIP P, M TION OF THE DEVICE
,%$ $EV4RIP P M
,%$
,%$ $EV4RIP P, M
,%$ $EV4RIP P M
4ABLE 0RESET ,%$ INDICATORS
# ' #

-ARSHALLING OF THE COMMAND TRIP RELAYS ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE UNIT CONTAINS TRIP RELAYS WHICH ARE DESIGNATED FACTORY IS SHOWN IN THE GENERAL DIAGRAMS IN !PPEN
42)0 2%,!9 TO 42)0 2%,!9 %ACH TRIP RELAY CAN DIX ! 4HE FOLLOWING BOXES SHOW EXAMPLES FOR MAR
BE CONTROLLED BY UP TO LOGICAL COMMANDS 4HE TRIP SHALLING OF TRIP RELAYS AND )N THE EXAMPLE FOR TRIP
RELAYS CAN BE MARSHALLED IN THE ADDRESS BLOCK RELAY THE GROUP COMMAND FOR SEVERAL COMMAND
4HE BLOCK IS REACHED BY PAGING IN BLOCKS WITH Å Ç OR FUNCTIONS ON ONE TRIP RELAY IS SHOWN 4ABLE SHOWS
BY DIRECTLY ADDRESSING WITH $! INPUT OF THE ADDRESS ALL TRIP RELAYS AS PRESET FROM THE FACTORY
NUMBER AND PRESSING THE ENTER KEY % 4HE
SELECTION PROCEDURE IS CARRIED OUT AS DESCRIBED IN )MPORTANT NOTE 7ITH SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
3ECTION -ULTIPLE COMMANDS ARE POSSIBLE IE IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT FOR EACH CIRCUIT BREAKER POLE THE
ONE LOGICAL COMMAND FUNCTION CAN BE GIVEN TO SEV CORRESPONDING PHASE SEGREGATED COMMAND EG
ERAL TRIP RELAYS SEE ALSO 3ECTION $EV4RIP P, &.O FOR POLE , AS ALSO
THE THREE POLE COMMAND $EV4RIP P &.O
-OST OF THE ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS IN ACCORDANCE IS MARSHALLED TO THE CORRECT TRIPPING RELAY 4HIS
WITH 4ABLE CAN BE MARSHALLED TO OUTPUT COM IS TAKEN CARE OF IN THE PRESETTING OF THE RELAY BUT MUST
MAND RELAYS "UT THOSE LISTED IN 4ABLE ARE PARTICU ALSO BE CONSIDERED IF THE ALLOCATION OF THE TRIP RELAYS
LARLY SUITABLE FOR TRIP RELAY OUTPUT 2EGARD THE TABLE AS IS ALTERED
A RECOMMENDED PRE SELECTION #OMMAND FUNC
TIONS ARE NATURALLY NOT EFFECTIVE WHEN THE CORRE )F FURTHER PROTECTION FUNCTIONS SHALL TRIP THE SAME
SPONDING PROTECTION FUNCTION IS NOT FITTED IN THE RELAY BREAKER EACH COMMAND RELAY MUST BE TRIGGERED BY
OR HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED OUT DE CONFIGURED THE CORRESPONDING COMMAND FUNCTION 3IMILAR IS VAL
ID FOR CLOSING COMMANDS
4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE TRIP RELAYS AS DELIVERED FROM
- ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . ' "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK -ARSHALLING OF THE TRIP RE

4 2 ) 0 2 % , ! 9 3 LAYS
4HE FIRST TRIP RELAY IS REACHED WITH THE KEY !
4 2 ) 0
!LLOCATIONS FOR TRIP RELAY
2 % , ! 9
4 2 ) 0 2 % , 4RIP RELAY HAS BEEN PRESET FOR

!UTO RECLOSE COMMAND BY INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE
! 2 # L O S E # M D FUNCTION &.O
4 2 ) 0 2 % ,
NO FURTHER FUNCTIONS ARE PRESET FOR TRIP RELAY
,EAVE THE SELECTION LEVEL WITH KEY COMBINATION & ! 9OU CAN GO THEN TO THE NEXT TRIP RELAY WITH THE ARROW KEY !
4RIP RELAY REPRESENTS AS PRESET FROM THE FACTORY AN EXAMPLE FOR TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POLE , &OR
THIS ALL COMMAND FUNCTIONS WHICH SHALL TRIP POLE , ARE ALLOCATED
# ' #

4 2 ) 0 !LLOCATIONS FOR TRIP RELAY

2 % , ! 9 4RIP CIRCUIT BREAKER POLE ,

ST 'ENERAL SINGLE POLE TRIP COMMAND OF THE DE
$ E V 4 R I P P ,
VICE FOR BREAKER POLE , &.O

ND 'ENERAL THREE POLE TRIP COMMAND OF THE DE
$ E V 4 R I P P
VICE &.O
&.O !BBREVIATION ,OGICAL COMMAND FUNCTION
NOT ALLOCATED .O FUNCTION ALLOCATED

$EVICE &LT$ET 'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION OF THE DEVICE
$EV4RIP P 4RIP BY THE DEVICE THREE POLE , , ,
$EV4RIP FORW 4RIP BY THE DEVICE ON FAULT IN FORWARD LINE DIRECTION
$EV4RIP REV 4RIP BY THE DEVICE ON FAULT IN REVERSE BUS BAR DIRECTION
-AN#LOSE #MD -ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
#" 4EST P 4RIP BY INTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST FUNCTION THREE POLE ,
%& $ET 4RIP 4RIP BY EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
%& &LT)E %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION LOW VALUE STAGE )% PICKED UP
%& &LT )E %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION NON DIRECTIONAL STAGE )% PICKED UP DEFINITE
TIME OR INVERSE TIME
%& &LT )E %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION DIRECTIONAL STAGE )% PICKED UP
%& 4 $ELAY %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION DELAY TIME EXPIRED
%& 4 %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION DIRECTIONAL DELAY TIME EXPIRED
%& 4 %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION NON DIRECTIONAL DELAY TIME EXPIRED
%& 4RIP 4RIP BY EARTH FAULT PROTECTION GENERAL
%& 3END #ARRIER TRANSMISSION SIGNAL FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON %&
/, 4RIP 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION TRIP BY TRIP STAGE
%MERG'EN&LT 'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
%MER4RIP P 4RIP THREE POLE BY EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
!2 #LOSE #MD 2ECLOSE COMMAND BY INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
2!2 P #LOSE 2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER POLE 2!2
2!2 P #LOSE 2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER POLE 2!2 RAPID !2
$!2 P #LOSE 2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER POLE $!2 DELAYED !2
3YNC#LOSE#MD 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK CLOSING COMMAND
$IST'EN&LT $ISTANCE PROTECTION 'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION
4ABLE #OMMAND FUNCTIONS CONTINUED NEXT PAGE
# ' #

&.O !BBREVIATION ,OGICAL COMMAND FUNCTION

$IS4RIP P $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP THREE POLE
$IS4RIP BACK $ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP WITH A HIGHER BACK UP STAGE
$IS 3END 4RANSMISSION SIGNAL FROM DISTANCE PROTECTION
/3 4RIP /UT OF STEP TRIP COMMAND
%XT4RIP P 4RIP THREE POLE BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
%XT4RIP WO!2 4RIP THREE POLE BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION WITHOUT !2
4ABLE #OMMAND FUNCTIONS

-!23(!,,).' 42)0 2%,!93 (EADING OF THE ADDRESS BLOCK
42)0 2%,!9 ONLY WHEN INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS

42)0 2%, !2 #LOSE #MD AVAILABLE AND CONFIGURED AS %8)34
42)0 2%,!9

42)0 2%, $EVICE &LT$ET 'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION OF THE DEVICE
42)0 2%,!9

42)0 2%, $EV4RIP P, 4RIP COMMAND FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER POLE ,
42)0 2%, $EV4RIP P
42)0 2%,!9

42)0 2%, $EV4RIP P
42)0 2%,!9

42)0 2%, $EV4RIP P
4ABLE 0RESET COMMAND FUNCTIONS FOR TRIP RELAYS
# ' #

3! 6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS
/PERATING INSTRUCTIONS
3AFETY PRECAUTIONS 4HE KEYBOARD COMPRISES KEYS WITH NUMBERS

9ES.O AND CONTROL BUTTONS 4HE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE
KEYS IS EXPLAINED IN DETAIL IN THE FOLLOWING
7ARNING
.UMERICAL KEYS FOR THE INPUT OF NUMERALS
!LL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHICH APPLY FOR WORK
IN ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS ARE TO BE OBSERVED
DURING TESTS AND COMMISSIONING TO $IGITS TO FOR NUMERICAL INPUT
#AUTION $ECIMAL POINT

#ONNECTION OF THE DEVICE TO A BATTERY CHAR
GER WITHOUT CONNECTED BATTERY MAY CAUSE
IMPERMISSIBLY HIGH VOLTAGES WHICH DAMAGE 0 )NFINITY SYMBOL
THE DEVICE 3EE ALSO 3ECTION UNDER
4ECHNICAL DATA FOR LIMITS
#HANGE OF SIGN INPUT OF NEGATIVE

NUMBERS
$IALOG WITH THE RELAY
3ETTING OPERATION AND INTERROGATION OF DIGITAL PROTEC 9ES.O KEYS FOR TEXT PARAMETERS
TION AND AUTOMATION SYSTEMS CAN BE CARRIED OUT VIA
THE INTEGRATED MEMBRANE KEYBOARD AND DISPLAY
9ES KEY OPERATOR AFFIRMS THE DIS
PANEL LOCATED ON THE FRONT PLATE !LL THE NECESSARY *9
PLAYED QUESTION
OPERATING PARAMETERS CAN BE ENTERED AND ALL THE IN
FORMATION CAN BE READ OUT FROM HERE /PERATION IS
ADDITIONALLY POSSIBLE VIA THE INTERFACE SOCKET BY .O KEY OPERATOR DENIES THE DIS
MEANS OF A PERSONAL COMPUTER OR SIMILAR . PLAYED QUESTION OR REJECTS A SUG
GESTION AND REQUESTS FOR ALTERNATIVE
-EMBRANE KEYBOARD AND DIS

PLAY PANEL +EYS FOR PAGING THROUGH THE DISPLAY
4HE MEMBRANE KEYBOARD AND DISPLAY PANEL IS EXTER

NALLY ARRANGED SIMILAR TO A POCKET CALCULATOR &IGURE 0AGING FORWARDS THE NEXT ADDRESS
IS DISPLAYED
ILLUSTRATES THE FRONT VIEW
0AGING BACKWARDS THE PREVIOUS
! TWO LINE EACH CHARACTER LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
ADDRESS IS DISPLAYED
PRESENTS THE INFORMATION %ACH CHARACTER COMPRISES
A X DOT MATRIX .UMBERS LETTERS AND A SERIES OF
SPECIAL SYMBOLS CAN BE DISPLAYED
"LOCK PAGING FORWARDS THE BEGIN
$URING DIALOG THE UPPER LINE GIVES A FOUR FIGURE NUM NING OF THE NEXT ADDRESS BLOCK IS DIS
BER FOLLOWED BY A BAR 4HIS NUMBER PRESENTS THE SET PLAYED
TING ADDRESS 4HE FIRST TWO DIGITS INDICATE THE AD
DRESS BLOCK THEN FOLLOWS THE TWO DIGIT SEQUENCE "LOCK PAGING BACKWARDS THE BEGIN
NUMBER )N MODELS WITH PARAMETER CHANGE OVER FA NING OF PREVIOUS ADDRESS BLOCK IS
DISPLAYED
CILITY THE IDENTIFIER OF THE PARAMETER SET IS SHOWN BE
FORE THE SETTING ADDRESS
# ' #

#ONFIRMATION KEY /PERATION WITH A PERSONAL COM

%NTER OR CONFIRMATION KEY EACH NU PUTER
% MERICAL INPUT OR CHANGE VIA THE 9ES
.O KEYS MUST BE CONFIRMED BY THE ! PERSONAL COMPUTER ALLOWS JUST AS THE OPERATOR
ENTER KEY ONLY THEN DOES THE DE PANEL ALL THE APPROPRIATE SETTINGS INITIATION OF TEST
VICE ACCEPT THE CHANGE 4HE ENTER ROUTINES AND READ OUT OF DATA BUT WITH THE ADDED
KEY CAN ALSO BE USED TO ACKNOWL
COMFORT OF SCREEN BASED VISUALIZATION AND A ME
EDGE AND CLEAR A FAULT PROMPT IN
NU GUIDED PROCEDURE
THIS DISPLAY A NEW INPUT AND RE
PEATED USE OF THE ENTER KEY IS THEN
NECESSARY !LL DATA CAN BE READ IN FROM OR COPIED ONTO MAGNET
IC DATA CARRIER FLOPPY DISC EG FOR SETTINGS AND CON
FIGURATION !DDITIONALLY ALL THE DATA CAN BE DOCU
MENTED ON A CONNECTED PRINTER )T IS ALSO POSSIBLE BY
#ONTROL AND SPECIAL KEYS CONNECTING A PLOTTER TO PRINT OUT THE FAULT HISTORY
TRACES
#ODEWORD PREVENTS UNAUTHORIZED
#7 ACCESS TO SETTING PROGRAMS NOT
NECESSARY FOR CALL UP OF ANNUNCI &OR OPERATION OF THE PERSONAL COMPUTER THE INSTRUC
ATIONS OR MESSAGES TION MANUALS OF THIS DEVICE ARE TO BE OBSERVED 4HE
0# PROGRAM $)'3) IS AVAILABLE FOR SETTING AND PRO
2 "ACKSPACE ERASURE OF INCORRECT EN CESSING OF ALL DIGITAL PROTECTION DATA .OTE THAT THE
TRIES OPERATING INTERFACE IN THE FRONT OF THE RELAY IS NOT GAL
VANICALLY ISOLATED AND THAT ONLY ADEQUATE CONNEC
& &UNCTION KEY EXPLAINED WHEN TION CABLES ARE APPLIED EG 86 &URTHER
USED INFORMATION ABOUT FACILITIES ON REQUEST
$! $IRECT ADDRESSING IF THE ADDRESS

NUMBER IS KNOWN THIS KEY ALLOWS
DIRECT CALL UP OF THE ADDRESS /PERATIONAL PRECONDITIONS
-ESSAGES3IGNALS INTERROGATION &OR MOST OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS THE INPUT OF A CODE

-3
OF ANNUNCIATIONS OF FAULT AND OPER WORD IS NECESSARY 4HIS APPLIES FOR ALL ENTRIES VIA THE
ATING DATA REFER 3ECTION MEMBRANE KEYBOARD OR FRONT INTERFACE WHICH CON
CERN THE OPERATION ON THE RELAY FOR EXAMPLE
SETTING OF FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS THRESHOLDS

4HE THREE KEYS ! Å 2%3%4 WHICH ARE SOMEWHAT FUNCTIONS
SEPARATED FROM THE REST OF THE KEYS CAN BE AC
CESSED WHEN THE FRONT COVER IS CLOSED 4HE ARROWS ALLOCATION OR MARSHALLING OF SIGNALS BINARY INPUTS
HAVE THE SAME FUNCTION AS THE KEYS WITH IDENTICAL ,%$ INDICATORS
SYMBOLS IN THE MAIN FIELD AND ENABLE PAGING IN FOR
WARD DIRECTION 4HUS ALL SETTING VALUES AND EVENT CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR INTERFACE AND DEVICE
DATA CAN BE DISPLAYED WITH THE FRONT COVER CLOSED CONFIGURATION
&URTHERMORE STORED ,%$ INDICATIONS ON THE FRONT CAN
BE ERASED VIA THE 2%3%4 KEY WITHOUT OPENING THE INITIATION OF TEST PROCEDURES
FRONT COVER $URING RESET OPERATION ALL ,%$S ON THE
FRONT WILL BE ILLUMINATED THUS PERFORMING A ,%$ TEST 4HE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THE READ OUT OF AN
7ITH THIS RESET ADDITIONALLY THE FAULT EVENT INDICA NUNCIATIONS OPERATING DATA OR FAULT DATA OR FOR THE
TIONS IN THE DISPLAY ON THE FRONT PANEL OF THE DEVICE READ OUT OF SETTING PARAMETERS
ARE ACKNOWLEDGED THE DISPLAY SHOWS THEN THE OP
ERATIONAL VALUES OF THE QUIESCENT STATE 4HE DISPLAY IS 4HE METHOD OF ENTRY OF THE CODEWORD IS EXPLAINED IN
SWITCHED OVER TO OPERATING MODE AS SOON AS ONE OF DETAIL IN THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UNDER 3ECTION
THE KEYS $! -3 #7 OR Å IS PRESSED
# ' #

2EPRESENTATION OF THE RELAY FRONT VIEW
2EADINESS INDICATION
GREEN
5NIT FAULTY INDICATION
RED
,%$ TO
RED CAN BE
"ETRIEB3ERVIC MARSHALLED
PRESETTING BE
3T¶RUNG"LOCKED LOW
4WO LINE DISPLAY
,#$ WITH CHARAC
TERS EACH

/N/FF SWITCH FOR
INTEGRATED POWER
SUPPLY

!DDITIONAL KEYS
CAN BE ACCESSED #7 /PERATOR
WHEN COVER IS
PANEL
CLOSED
2
&
2%3%4 $!
,%$
-3 *9 . %
POLE SOCKET FOR
CONNECTING A
PERSONAL COM
PUTER
$ISTANZSCHUTZ
$ISTANCE 0ROTECTION

5 (
). ! (Z
5 6 !# )))
6 $#
.
5(
$IAGR # ! 8 !

/PERATION ONLY WITH FIXED COVER

"ETRIEB NUR MIT ANGESCHRAUBTER +APPE
3! #! #'((
& .R "&
"ASIC MODULE !DDITIONAL MODULE
UP TO PRODUCTION SERIES ''

# ! ! 3! !
&ACTORY PRESETTING ,%$S
# ! ! 3! !
# ! ! 3! ) %2$
-EAS VALUES FAULTY 4 EXPIRED IE SENSITIVE EARTH
&AULT , 4 EXPIRED CURRENT INPUT
&AULT , 4 EXPIRED FROM PRODUCTION SERIES ((
&AULT , 44) EXPIRED # ! ! 3! !
&AULT % 4RIP , # ! ! 3! !
!2 NOT READY 4RIP , # ! ! 3! ) %2$

IE SENSITIVE EARTH
44) EXPIRED 4RIP ,
CURRENT INPUT
&IGURE &RONT VIEW OF OPERATING KEY BOARD AND DISPLAY PANEL
# ' #

3ETTING THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS
)NTRODUCTION
0ARAMETERIZING PROCEDURE !DDRESSES WHICH REQUIRE TEXT INPUT
&OR SETTING THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS IT IS NECESSARY 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOUR DIGIT ADDRESS IE
TO ENTER THE CODEWORD SEE 7ITHOUT CODE BLOCK AND SEQUENCE NUMBER EG FOR BLOCK
WORD ENTRY PARAMETERS CAN BE READ OUT BUT NOT BE SEQUENCE NUMBER "EHIND THE BAR APPEARS
CHANGED THE MEANING OF THE REQUIRED PARAMETER IN THE SEC
OND DISPLAY LINE THE APPLICABLE TEXT 7HEN THE
)F THE CODEWORD IS ACCEPTED PARAMETERIZING CAN BE RELAY IS DELIVERED A TEXT HAS BEEN PRESET )N THE
GIN )N THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS EACH ADDRESS IS ILLUS FOLLOWING SECTIONS THIS TEXT IS SHOWN )F IT IS TO BE
TRATED IN A BOX AND IS EXPLAINED 4HERE ARE THREE RETAINED NO OTHER INPUT IS NECESSARY /NE CAN
FORMS OF DISPLAY PAGE FORWARDS OR BACKWARDS WITHIN THE BLOCK OR TO
THE NEXT OR PREVIOUS BLOCK )F THE TEXT NEEDS TO BE
!DDRESSES WITHOUT REQUEST FOR OPERATOR INPUT ALTERED PRESS THE .O KEY . 4HE NEXT ALTERNATIVE
TEXT ALSO PRINTED IN THE DISPLAY BOXES ILLUSTRATED IN
4HE ADDRESS IS IDENTIFIED BY THE BLOCK NUMBER FOL THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS THEN APPEARS )F THE ALTER
LOWED BY AS SEQUENCE NUMBER EG FOR NATIVE TEXT IS NOT DESIRED THE . KEY IS PRESSED
BLOCK $ISPLAYED TEXT FORMS THE HEADING OF THIS AGAIN ETC 4HE ALTERNATIVE WHICH IS CHOSEN IS
BLOCK .O INPUT IS EXPECTED "Y USING KEYS Å OR Ç CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE CHANGED
THE NEXT OR THE PREVIOUS BLOCK CAN BE SELECTED "Y PARAMETERS ARE ONLY SAVED AFTER TERMINATION OF PA
USING THE KEYS ! OR " THE FIRST OR LAST ADDRESS WITHIN RAMETERIZING REFER BELOW
THE BLOCK CAN BE SELECTED AND PAGED
&OR EACH OF THE ADDRESSES THE POSSIBLE PARAMETERS
!DDRESSES WHICH REQUIRE NUMERICAL INPUT AND TEXT ARE GIVEN IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS )F THE
MEANING OF A PARAMETER IS NOT CLEAR IT IS USUALLY BEST
4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOUR DIGIT ADDRESS IE TO LEAVE IT AT THE FACTORY SETTING 4HE ARROWS Å Ç OR !"
BLOCK AND SEQUENCE NUMBER EG FOR BLOCK AT THE LEFT HAND SIDE OF THE ILLUSTRATED DISPLAY BOXES
SEQUENCE NUMBER "EHIND THE BAR APPEARS INDICATE THE METHOD OF MOVING FROM BLOCK TO BLOCK OR
THE MEANING OF THE REQUIRED PARAMETER IN THE SEC WITHIN THE BLOCK 5NUSED ADDRESSES ARE AUTOMATI
OND DISPLAY LINE THE VALUE OF THE PARAMETER 7HEN CALLY PASSED OVER
THE RELAY IS DELIVERED A VALUE HAS BEEN PRESET )N
THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS THIS VALUE IS SHOWN )F THIS )F THE PARAMETER ADDRESS IS KNOWN THEN DIRECT AD
VALUE IS TO BE RETAINED NO OTHER INPUT IS NECES
DRESSING IS POSSIBLE 4HIS IS ACHIEVED BY DEPRESSING
SARY /NE CAN PAGE FORWARDS OR BACKWARDS WITHIN
KEY $! FOLLOWED BY THE FOUR DIGIT ADDRESS AND SUB
THE BLOCK OR TO THE NEXT OR PREVIOUS BLOCK )F THE
SEQUENTLY PRESSING THE ENTER KEY % !FTER DIRECT AD
VALUE NEEDS TO BE ALTERED IT CAN BE OVERWRITTEN US
DRESSING PAGING BY MEANS OF KEYS Å Ç AND KEYS ! "
ING THE NUMERICAL KEYS AND IF REQUIRED THE DECI
IS POSSIBLE
MAL POINT ANDOR CHANGE SIGN OR WHERE AP
PROPRIATE INFINITY SIGN 0 4HE PERMISSIBLE SETTING
4HE SETTING PROCEDURE CAN BE ENDED AT ANY TIME BY
RANGE IS GIVEN IN THE FOLLOWING TEXT NEXT TO THE AS
SOCIATED BOX %NTERED VALUES BEYOND THIS RANGE THE KEY COMBINATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION
WILL BE REJECTED 4HE SETTING STEPS CORRESPOND TO KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS
THE LAST DECIMAL PLACE AS SHOWN IN THE SETTING BOX THE QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3 #ONFIRM
)NPUTS WITH MORE DECIMAL PLACES THAN PERMITTED WITH THE 9ES KEY 9 THAT THE NEW SETTINGS SHALL BE
WILL BE TRUNCATED DOWN TO THE PERMISSIBLE NUMBER COME VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE .O KEY . IN
4HE VALUE MUST BE CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTRY KEY STEAD CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE ABORTED IE ALL AL
% 4HE DISPLAY THEN CONFIRMS THE ACCEPTED VALUE TERATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN CHANGED SINCE THE LAST
4HE CHANGED PARAMETERS ARE ONLY SAVED AFTER TER CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST 4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS
MINATION OF PARAMETERIZING REFER BELOW CAN BE MADE INEFFECTIVE
# ' #

)F ONE TRIES TO LEAVE THE SETTING RANGE FOR THE FUNCTION !LL PARAMETER SETS CAN BE ACCESSED IN A SIMILAR MAN
AL PARAMETER BLOCKS IE ADDRESS BLOCKS TO NER
WITH KEYS Å Ç THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION %.$
/& #/$%7/2$ /0%2!4)/. 0RESS THE .O C +EY COMBINATION &
KEY . TO CONTINUE PARAMETERIZING )F YOU PRESS THE ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET !
9ES KEY *9 INSTEAD ANOTHER QUESTION APPEARS
3!6% .%7 3%44).'3 .OW YOU CAN CONFIRM C +EY COMBINATION &
WITH *9 OR ABORT WITH . AS ABOVE ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET "
!FTER COMPLETION OF THE PARAMETERIZING PROCESS THE C +EY COMBINATION &

CHANGED PARAMETERS WHICH SO FAR HAVE ONLY BEEN ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET #
STORED IN VOLATILE MEMORY ARE THEN PERMANENTLY
STORED IN %%02/-S 4HE DISPLAY CONFIRMS .%7 C +EY COMBINATION &
3%44).'3 3!6%$ !FTER PRESSING THE KEY -3 FOL ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET $
LOWED BY 2%3%4 ,%$ THE INDICATIONS OF THE QUIES
CENT STATE APPEAR IN THE DISPLAY )NPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS AGAIN NECESSARY FOR THE SET
TING OF A NEW SELECTED PARAMETER SET 7ITHOUT INPUT
OF THE CODEWORD THE SETTINGS CAN ONLY BE READ BUT
NOT MODIFIED
3ELECTABLE PARAMETER SETS OPTIONAL 3INCE ONLY A FEW PARAMETERS WILL BE DIFFERENT IN MOST
APPLICATIONS IT IS POSSIBLE TO COPY PREVIOUSLY STORED
5P TO DIFFERENT SETS OF PARAMETERS CAN BE SELECTED PARAMETER SETS INTO ANOTHER PARAMETER SET
FOR THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS IE THE ADDRESSES
ABOVE AND BELOW 4HESE PARAMETER SETS )T IS ADDITIONALLY POSSIBLE TO SELECT THE ORIGINAL SET
CAN BE SWITCHED OVER DURING OPERATION LOCALLY USING TINGS IE THE SETTINGS PRESET ON DELIVERY FOR A MODI
THE OPERATOR PANEL OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE US FIED AND STORED PARAMETER SET 4HIS IS DONE BY COPY
ING A PERSONAL COMPUTER OR ALSO REMOTELY USING ING THE /2)'3%4 TO THE DESIRED PARAMETER SET
BINARY INPUTS
)T IS FINALLY STILL POSSIBLE TO DEFINE THE ACTIVE PARAMETER
)F THIS FACILITY IS NOT USED THEN IT IS SUFFICIENT TO SET THE SET IE THE PARAMETER SET WHICH IS VALID FOR THE FUNC
PARAMETERS FOR THE PRESELECTED SET 4HE REST OF THIS TIONS AND THRESHOLD VALUES OF THE UNIT 3EE 3ECTION
SECTION IS OF NO IMPORTANCE /THERWISE THE PARAME FOR MORE DETAILS
TER CHANGE OVER FACILITY MUST BE CONFIGURED AS %8
)34 UNDER ADDRESS REFER TO 3ECTION 4HE 4HE PARAMETER SETS ARE PROCESSED IN ADDRESS BLOCK
FIRST PARAMETER SET IS IDENTIFIED AS SET ! THE OTHER 4HE MOST SIMPLE MANNER TO COME TO THIS BLOCK IS
SETS ARE " # AND $ %ACH OF THESE SETS IS ADJUSTED USING DIRECT ADDRESSING
ONE AFTER THE OTHER
PRESS DIRECT ADDRESS KEY $!
)F THE SWITCH OVER FACILITY IS TO BE USED FIRST SET ALL PA
ENTER ADDRESS EG
RAMETERS FOR THE NORMAL STATUS OF PARAMETER SET !
4HEN SWITCH OVER TO PARAMETER SET " PRESS ENTER KEY %
&IST COMPLETE THE PARAMETERIZING PROCEDURE FOR 4HE HEADING OF THE BLOCK FOR PROCESSING THE PARAME
SET ! AS DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION TER SETS THEN APPEARS
0RESS KEY COMBINATION & IE FIRST THE FUNCTION )T IS POSSIBLE TO SCROLL THROUGH THE INDIVIDUAL ADDRESS
KEY & AND THEN THE NUMBER KEY !LL FOLLOWING IN ES USING THE ! KEY 4HE COPYING FACILITIES ARE SUMMA
PUTS THEN REFER TO PARAMETER SET " RIZED IN 4ABLE
0 ! 2 ! - % 4 % 2 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 0ARAMETER CHANGE OVER

# ( ! . ' % / 6 % 2 PROCESSING OF PARAMETER SETS
# ' #

&OLLOWING COPYING ONLY SUCH PARAMETERS NEED BE

#OPY
!DDR CHANGED WHICH ARE TO BE DIFFERENT FROM THE SOURCE
FROM TO PARAMETER SET
/2)'3%4 3%4 !
0ARAMETERIZING MUST BE TERMINATED FOR EACH PARAM
/2)'3%4 3%4 " ETER SET AS DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION
/2)'3%4 3%4 #
/2)'3%4 3%4 $

3ETTING OF DATE AND TIME
3%4 ! 3%4 "
3%4 ! 3%4 # 4HE DATE AND TIME CAN BE SET IF THE THE REAL TIME CLOCK
IS AVAILABLE 3ETTING IS CARRIED OUT IN BLOCK WHICH IS
3%4 ! 3%4 $ REACHED BY DIRECT ADDRESSING $! % OR BY
PAGING WITH Å AND Ç )NPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS RE
3%4 " 3%4 ! QUIRED TO CHANGE THE DATA
3%4 " 3%4 # 3ELECTION OF THE INDIVIDUAL ADDRESSES IS BY FURTHER

SCROLLING USING ! " AS SHOWN BELOW %ACH MODIFICA
3%4 " 3%4 $ TION MUST BE CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTER KEY %
3%4 # 3%4 !
4HE DATE AND TIME ARE ENTERED WITH DOTS AS SEPARA
3%4 # 3%4 " TOR SIGNS SINCE THE KEYBOARD DOES NOT HAVE A COLON
OR SLASH FOR !MERICAN DATE
3%4 # 3%4 $
4HE CLOCK IS SYNCHRONIZED AT THE MOMENT WHEN THE
3%4 $ 3%4 ! ENTER KEY % IS PRESSED FOLLOWING INPUT OF THE COM
PLETE TIME 4HE DIFFERENCE TIME FACILITY ADDRESS
3%4 $ 3%4 " ENABLES EXACT SETTING OF THE TIME SINCE THE DIF
FERENCE CAN BE CALCULATED PRIOR TO THE INPUT AND THE
3%4 $ 3%4 #
SYNCHRONIZATION OF THE CLOCK DOES NOT DEPEND ON THE
MOMENT WHEN THE ENTER KEY % IS PRESSED
4ABLE #OPYING PARAMETER SETS
3 % 4 4 ) . ' "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 3ETTING THE REAL TIME CLOCK

2 % ! , 4 ) - % # , / # + #ONTINUE WITH !
!T FIRST THE ACTUAL DATE AND TIME ARE DISPLAYED

#ONTINUE WITH !
%NTER THE NEW DATE DIGITS FOR DAY DIGITS FOR MONTH
$ ! 4 % AND DIGITS FOR YEAR INCLUDING CENTURY USE THE ORDER
AS CONFIGURED UNDER ADDRESS 3ECTION BUT
ALWAYS USE A DOT FOR SEPARATOR
$$--9999 OR --$$9999
4 ) - % %NTER THE NEW TIME HOURS MINUTES SECONDS EACH

WITH DIGITS SEPARATED BY A DOT
((--33
5SING THE DIFFERENCE TIME THE CLOCK IS SET FORWARDS BY

$ ) & & 4 ) - % THE ENTERED TIME OR BACKWARDS USING THE KEY
4HE FORMAT IS THE SAME AS WITH THE TIME SETTING ABOVE
# ' #

)NITIAL DISPLAYS ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
7HEN THE RELAY IS SWITCHED ON FIRSTLY THE ADDRESS AND THE TYPE IDENTIFICATION OF THE RELAY APPEARS !LL 3IEMENS
RELAYS HAVE AN -,&" MACHINE READABLE TYPE NUMBER 7HEN THE DEVICE IS OPERATIVE AND DISPLAYS A QUIESCENT
MESSAGE ANY DESIRED ADDRESS CAN BE REACHED EG BY PRESSING THE DIRECT ADDRESS KEY $! FOLLOWED BY THE
ADDRESS NUMBER
4HE RELAY INTRODUCES ITSELF BY GIVING ITS TYPE NUMBER

3 ! 6

THE VERSION OF FIRMWARE WITH WHICH IT IS EQUIPPED AND
3 !

A HARDWARE IDENTIFIER 4HE SECOND DISPLAY LINE SHOWS
THE COMPLETE ORDERING DESIGNATION
!FTER ADDRESS THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS BEGIN &URTHER ADDRESS POSSIBILITIES ARE LISTED UNDER !NNUNCI
ATIONS AND 4ESTS
#OMMENCEMENT OF FUNCTIONAL PARAMETER BLOCKS

0 ! 2 ! - % 4 % 2 3
0OWER SYSTEM DATA ADDRESS BLOCK
'ENERAL DATA
4HE RELAY REQUESTS BASIC DATA OF THE POWER SYSTEM AND THE SWITCHGEAR

"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 0OWER SYSTEM DATA
0 / 7 % 2 3 9 3 4 % - $ ! 4 !
#URRENT TRANSFORMER POLARITY

# 4 3 4 ! 2 0 . 4 ,).% CT STAR POINT TOWARDS LINE
4 / 7 ! 2 $ 3 , ) . % "53"!2 CT STAR POINT TOWARDS BUSBAR
4HIS SETTING DETERMINES THE MEASUREMENT
4 / 7 ! 2 $ 3 " 5 3 " ! 2 DIRECTION OF THE RELAY FORWARDS LINE DIRECTION
3YSTEM STAR POINT CONDITION

3 9 3 4 % - 3 4 ! 2 )MPORTANT FOR EARTH FAULT AND DOUBLE EARTH FAULT
3 / , ) $ , 9 % ! 2 4 ( % $ CONDITIONS
# / - 0 % . 3 ! 4 % $
) 3 / , ! 4 % $
5 N 0 2 ) - ! 2 9 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER PRIMARY VOLTAGE LINE TO LINE

3MALLEST SETTING VALUE K6
K 6 ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE K6
# ' #

6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY VOLTAGE LINE TO LINE

5 N 3 % # / . $ 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE 6
6 ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE 6
#URRENT TRANSFORMER PRIMARY RATED CURRENT PHASES

) N 0 2 ) - ! 2 9
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE !
! ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE !
7ITH ADDRESSES TO THE DEVICE IS IN 4HREE POSSIBILITIES EXIST FOR THE EARTH CURRENT PATH
STRUCTED AS TO HOW THE ADDITIONAL CURRENT AND VOLTAGE
INPUTS ARE CONNECTED 4HIS INFORMATION IS IMPORTANT #ONNECTION OF THE EARTH CURRENT FROM THE STAR POINT
FOR THE TREATMENT OF EARTH FAULTS IN EARTHED NET OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS STANDARD CIRCUIT AR
WORKS EARTH LEAKAGE IN UNEARTHED NETWORKS PAR RANGEMENT SEE ALSO !PPENDIX " &IGURE "
ALLEL LINE COMPENSATION FOR FAULT LOCATION IF USED
SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK IF USED AND THE !DDRESS IS THEN SET AS
MONITORING OF MEASURED VALUES )E #4 02/4%#4%$ ,).%
4HE ADDITIONAL VOLTAGE INPUT IS DESIGNATED IN AD !DDRESS IS SET AS )E)PH
DRESS WITH 5X #/..%#4 IT CAN BE DECLARED AS
./4 #/..%#4%$ OR 5DELTA 42!.3&/2- OR 5 #ONNECTION OF THE EARTH CURRENT FROM THE TRANS
42!.3&/2-%2 FORMER STAR POINT OF A PARALLEL LINE COMPENSATION
OF FAULT LOCATION FOR PARALLEL LINES ONLY FOR TYPE
)F THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SET HAS E N OPEN DELTA 3!J JJJJJ JJJ SEE ALSO !PPENDIX "
WINDINGS AND IF THESE ARE CONNECTED TO THE DEVICE &IGURE "
REFER &IGURE " IN !PPENDIX " THEN THIS HAS TO BE
RECORDED IN ADDRESS WITH 5X #/..%#4 !DDRESS IS THEN SET AS
5DELTA 42!.3&/2- 3INCE THE RATIO OF THE VOLTAGE )E #4 0!2!,,%, ,).%
TRANSFORMERS IS NORMALLY
!DDRESS IS SET AS )E)PH
5 .PRIM 5 .SEC 5 .SEC
BUT IF THE TRANSFORMERS OF THE PARALLEL LINE HAVE A

RATIO WHICH DIFFERS FROM THOSE OF THE PROTECTED LINE
THE RELATION OF THESE RATIOS HAS TO BE SET FOR )E)PH
THE FACTOR 5PH5DELTA SECONDARY VALUES ADDRESS EG
SHALL BE SET AS o o WHEN THE
DELTA WINDINGS ARE CONNECTED )F THE RATIO IS DIFFERENT CURRENT TRANSFORMERS PROTECTED LINE !!
EG WHEN THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE IS FORMED BY IN CURRENT TRANSFORMERS PARALLEL LINE !!
TERMEDIATE TRANSFORMERS THE FACTOR HAS TO BE SE
LECTED ACCORDINGLY RESULTS IN )E)PH
)F THE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS TO #ONNECTION OF THE EARTH CURRENT FROM A SEPARATE
BE USED AT THE FEEDER THEN THE ADDITIONAL VOLTAGE IN EARTH CURRENT DETECTION TRANSFORMER EG WINDOW
PUT OF THE DEVICE MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE BUS BAR TYPE CURRENT TRANSFORMER FOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION
VOLTAGE )N THIS CASE ADDRESS MUST BE SET AS SEE ALSO !PPENDIX " &IGURE "
5X #/..%#4 5 42!.3&/2-%2 REFER &IGURE
" IN !PPENDIX " 5NDER ADDRESS THE DEVICE !DDRESS IS THEN SET AS
MUST BE INFORMED TO WHICH VOLTAGE OF THE BUS BAR )E #4 02/4%#4%$ ,).%
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS IS USED PHASE TO PHASE OR
PHASE TO GROUND AND WHICH PHASES 4HE DE &OR UNITS WITH HIGH SENSITIVE EARTH CURRENT INPUT
VICE AUTOMATICALLY SELECTS THE CORRESPONDING FEEDER ADDRESS NEEDS NOT BE SET IT IS NOT AVAILABLE
VOLTAGE FOR SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK
# ' #

!DDRESS IS SET AS %XAMPLE

0HASE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS !!
7INDOW TYPE SUMMATION TRANSFORMER !!
RATIO OF THE EARTH CURRENT #4
)E)PH
RATIO OF THE PHASE CURRENT #4 2ELAY TYPE FOR HIGH SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT DETECTION

LELPH

4HE ADDITIONAL MEASURED VOLTAGE INPUT 5X OF THE

5 X # / . . % # 4 DEVICE IS
. / 4 # / . . % # 4 % $ ./4 #/..%#4%$ OR
CONNECTED TO THE E N OPEN DELTA WINDINGS OF
5 E N 4 2 ! . 3 & / 2 - THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SET OF THE FEEDER OR
CONNECTED TO THE A VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER OF THE
5 4 2 ! . 3 & / 2 - % 2
BUS BAR FOR SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK
5 P H 5 D E L T A -ATCHING FACTOR FOR RESIDUAL VOLTAGE

RATED SECONDARY VOLTAGE OF VT PHASE WINDING

RATED SECONDARY VOLTAGE OF OPEN DELTA WINDING
NORMALLY
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE
LARGEST SETTING VALUE
#URRENT WHICH IS CONNECTED TO THE )% MEASURING

) E # 4 INPUT OF THE RELAY
0 2 / 4 % # 4 % $ , ) . % .OTE !DDRESS IS ONLY AVAILABLE IN MODELS WITH
PARALLEL LINE COMPENSATION 3!J JJJJJ JJJ IN
0 ! 2 ! , , % , , ) . % OTHER CASES 02/4%#4%$ ,).% IS INTERNALLY FIXED
-ATCHING FACTOR FOR EARTH CURRENT

) E ) P H
FOR CONNECTION IN CT STARPOINT

WINDOW TYPE EARTH CT RATIO
PHASE CT RATIO
FOR CONNECTION TO SEPARATE EARTH CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE
0HASE ALLOCATION FOR THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE 5 IF IT IS USED

5 # . . % # 4 FOR SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK
, ,
7HEN SYNCHRONISM OR VOLTAGE IS TO BE CHECKED BEFORE
, , CLOSING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE CON
NECTED TO THE 5 VOLTAGE INPUT OF THE RELAY IS COMPARED
, , WITH THE VOLTAGE OF THE FEEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AS SE
LECTED IN THIS ADDRESS
, %
, %
, %
# ' #

,INE DATA GENERAL
'ENERAL LINE DATA ARE THOSE WHICH ARE INDEPENDENT &OR THE EARTH IMPEDANCE RATIO WE HAVE
OF REACH OF THE DISTANCE ZONES AND THE GRADING PLAN
-ATCHING OF THE EARTH IMPEDANCE RATIO IS ACHIEVED 2% 2
BY ENTERING THE RESISTANCE RATIO 2%2, AND THE REAC
2, 2
TANCE RATIO 8%8, 4HESE ARE PURELY FORMALLY CALCU
LATED AND ARE NOT IDENTICAL WITH REAL AND IMAGINARY ¬KM

PARTS OF :%:, .O COMPLEX CALCULATION IS NECESSARY ¬KM
4HE SETTING PARAMETERS CAN BE DETERMINED FROM THE

8% 8
LINE DATA USING THE FOLLOWING FORMULAE
8, 8
2ESISTANCE RATIO
¬KM

¬KM
2% 2

2, 2 7ITH DOUBLE LINES THERE IS MUTUAL COUPLING BETWEEN
THE TWO CONDUCTOR SYSTEMS 4HIS IS ONLY RELEVANT FOR
3! WHEN IT INCORPORATES THE PARALLEL LINE FAULT LO
2EACTANCE RATIO
CATION FEATURE AND HAS BEEN ORDERED WITH PARALLEL
LINE COMPENSATION 4HIS COMPENSATION CAN ONLY BE
8% 8 EFFECTIVE FOR FAULT LOCATION WHEN ADDITIONALLY AD
DRESS IS SET AS 0!2!,,%, ,).% 9%3 3ECTION
8, 8

7HEREBY 4HE SETTING PARAMETERS CAN BE DETERMINED BY THE

2 :ERO SEQUENCE LINE RESISTANCE FOLLOWING FORMULAE
8 :ERO SEQUENCE LINE REACTANCE
2 0OSITIVE SEQUENCE LINE RESISTANCE 2ESISTANCE RATIO
8 0OSITIVE SEQUENCE LINE REACTANCE
2- 2 -
)T IS UNIMPORTANT WHETHER TOTAL LINE VALUES OR VALUES
PER UNIT LENGTH ARE USED SINCE THE RATIOS ARE INDE 2, 2
PENDENT OF THE LINE LENGTH
2EACTANCE RATIO
#ALCULATION %XAMPLE
8- 8 -
K6 OVERHEAD LINE !LU3TEEL MM WITH THE
LINE PARAMETERS 8, 8
S LENGTH KM 7HERE 8- MUTUAL REACTANCE COUPLE REAC

TANCE OF THE LINE SYSTEMS
2S ¬KM 8 POSITIVE SEQUENCE REACTANCE OF THE
8S ¬KM f 0OS SEQ IMPEDANCE
LINES
2S ¬KM f :ERO SEQ IMPEDANCE
8S ¬KM 4HESE DATA CAN BE SET EITHER FOR THE TOTAL PARALLEL CIR
#URRENT TRANSFORMERS ! ! CUIT LINE LENGTH OR AS LENGTH RELATED VALUES SINCE THE
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMERS K6 K6 QUOTIENTS ARE INDEPENDENT OF LENGTH
# ' #

-ATCHING OF EARTH IMPEDANCE RESISTANCE RATIO

2 % 2 ,
-ATCHING OF EARTH IMPEDANCE REACTANCE RATIO

8 % 8 ,
/NLY FOR PARALLEL CIRCUIT LINES IF FAULT LOCATOR IS USED WITH PARALLEL LINE COMPENSATION
-ATCHING OF MUTUAL IMPEDANCE RESISTANCE RATIO

2 - 2 ,
-ATCHING OF MUTUAL IMPEDANCE REACTANCE RATIO

8 - 8 ,
3OME ADDITIONAL DATA ARE REQUESTED FOR VARIOUS PRO 7HERE .CT CT RATIO
TECTION FUNCTIONS 4HESE HAVE TO BE ENTERED TO THE .VT VT RATIO
RELAY UNDER THE ADDRESSES TO ).! RATED CURRENT OF THE CURRENT TRANS
FORMERS RATED CURRENT OF THE DE
4HE REACTANCE PER UNIT LINE LENGTH ADDRESS IS VICE
ENTERED AS SECONDARY VALUE 4HIS CAN BE DERIVED
FROM THE PRIMARY VALUE USING THE FORMULA &INALLY THE LINE LENGTH IS ENTERED UNDER ADDRESS
. CT ). )T IS USED FOR FAULT LOCATION
8 SEC 8 PRIM
. VT !
,INE REACTANCE PER UNIT LINE LENGTH SECONDARY ONLY FOR

8 3 % #
FAULT LOCATION REFER TO 3ECTION
W K M 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE ¬KM
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE ¬KM
,ENGTH OF THE TOTAL LINE SECONDARY ONLY FOR FAULT LOCA

, ) . % , % . ' 4 (
TION REFER TO 3ECTION
K M 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE KM
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE KM
.OTE 7HEN THE LINE LENGTH IS ENTERED IN MILES INSTEAD OF KILOMETERS AND THE LINE CONSTANTS ARE ENTERED
IN OHMS PER MILE THEN THE RELAY WILL OPERATE PROPERLY
# ' #

!DDITIONAL PLANT DATA
!DDITIONAL PLANT DATA ARE REQUESTED FOR SOME DEVICE ALL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OF THE DEVICE WHICH CAN ISSUE
FUNCTIONS A TRIP SIGNAL $ISTINCTION CAN BE MADE BETWEEN THE
MINIMUM TRIP COMMAND DURATION WITH CURRENT FLOW 4
5NDER ADDRESSES AND THE MINIMUM TRIP 42)0 ) ADDRESS ) ). AND THE DURATION
COMMAND DURATION CAN BE SET 4HIS IS THEN VALID FOR WITHOUT CURRENT FLOW 4 42)0 ) ADDRESS
-INIMUM DURATION OF TRIP COMMAND WITH CURRENT FLOW

4 4 2 ) 0 )
-INIMUM DURATION OF TRIP COMMAND WITHOUT CURRENT

4 4 2 ) 0 )
FLOW
S 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE S
)F THE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS %XAMPLE

USED NOTE THE FOLLOWING
"US BAR K6 PRIMARY
4HE FEEDER VOLTAGE IS DESIGNATED WITH 5 IT IS THE REF 6 SECONDARY
ERENCE VOLTAGE FOR ALL DEVICE FUNCTIONS WHICH OPERATE
WITH MEASURED VOLTAGES 4HE BUS BAR VOLTAGE IS &EEDER K6 PRIMARY
DESIGNATED 5 4HE MODE OF CONNECTION OF 5 IE 6 SECONDARY
WHICH VOLTAGE PHASE PHASE OR PHASE EARTH HAS
BEEN ENTERED TO THE RELAY UNDER ADDRESS AND ! POWER TRANSFORMER SHOULD BE INSTALLED BETWEEN
)F A POWER TRANSFORMER IS INSTALLED BETWEEN THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND FEEDER VOLTAGE
BUS BAR AND THE LOCATION OF THE FEEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
TRANSFORMERS THEN THE PHASE DISPLACEMENT ACCORD
ING TO THE POWER TRANSFORMER CONNECTION GROUP MUST 0OWER TRANSFORMER K6 K6
BE COMPENSATED 4HIS CAN BE DONE USING THE PA CONNECTION GROUP $YN
RAMETER ADDRESS
4HE CONNECTION GROUP OF THE POWER TRANSFORMER IS
4HE SECONDARY RATED VOLTAGES OF THE VOLTAGE TRANS DEFINED FROM THE UPPER VOLTAGE SIDE TO THE LOWER VOLT
FORMERS MUST BE EQUAL !DDITIONALLY THE PRIMARY AGE SIDE 4HE FEEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS WHICH
RATED VOLTAGES OF THE FEEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ON ARE THE REFERENCE VOLTAGES FOR THE PROTECTION RELAY
THE ONE HAND AND THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORM ARE INSTALLED ON THE LOWER VOLTAGE SIDE OF THE POWER
ERS ON THE OTHER HAND MUST RELATE TO THE TRANSFOR TRANSFORMER 4HUS THE PHASE DISPLACEMENT ACCORD
MATION RATIO OF THE POWER TRANSFORMER ING TO THE CONNECTION GROUP NUMERAL IE } ^
MUST BE ENTERED AS NEGATIVE VALUE
)F NO PHASE SHIFTING TRANSFORMER IS INSTALLED BETWEEN
FEEDER AND BUS BAR THEN ADDRESS REMAINS 3ETTING WILL BE
OTHERWISE IT MUST BE CHANGED 4HE VOLTAGE IS DE
FINED FROM 5 TO 5 ADDRESS 0() 5 5 ^
0HASE DISPLACEMENT BETWEEN 5 FEEDER VOLTAGE AND

5 5 ! . ' , 5 BUS BAR VOLTAGE FOR SYNCHRONISM CHECK
^ 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE ^
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE ^
# ' #

'ENERAL DEVICE DATA
5NDER ADDRESSES TO SOME ADDITIONAL COMMAND 4HIS CORRESPONDS TO THE PRESETTING OF AD
GENERAL DEVICE DATA ARE ENTERED TO THE PROTECTION DRESS 0 #/50, 7)4( &!5,4 $%4%# )F
RELAY TO MATCH IT TO THE SWITCH GEAR CONDITIONS ADDRESS IS SET TO 7)4( 42)0 #/-- THREE
POLE COUPLING OF THE TRIP COMMAND IS SUPPRESSED
4HE CLOSING TIME OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER ADDRESS WHEN PICK UP IN ANOTHER PHASE IS REGISTERED ONLY
IS NECESSARY IF THE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION OF AFTER THE SINGLE POLE TRIP IS INITIATED 4HIS SETTING IS
THE RELAY IS USED ALSO FOR ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING )N REASONABLE WHEN IS CAN BE ASSUMED THAT A FURTHER
THIS CASE THE PROTECTION CALCULATES THE IDEAL CLOSING PICK UP AFTER INITIATION OF THE TRIP COMMAND MUST
INSTANT SUCH THAT THE TWO VOLTAGES BUS BAR AND ARISE FROM A DIFFERENT INDEPENDENT FAULT EVENT 4HIS
FEEDER ARE IN SYNCHRONISM AT THE INSTANT WHEN THE SETTING IS VALID FOR ALL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OF THE RELAY
BREAKER POLES CONTACT EACH OTHER WHICH CAN TRIP SINGLE POLE
5NDER ADDRESS THE MAXIMUM CLOSE COMMAND !DDRESS DETERMINES WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT
DURATION CAN BE SET 4HIS TIME IS THEN VALID FOR ALL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS WILL TRIP SINGLE POLE IN CASE OF
FUNCTIONS OF THE DEVICE WHICH CAN CLOSE THE CIRCUIT AN ISOLATED TWO PHASE FAULT IE WITHOUT EARTH AS
BREAKER )T MUST BE LONG ENOUGH TO ENSURE RELIABLE LONG AS SINGLE POLE TRIPPING IS ALLOWED 4HIS PARAM
CLOSURE OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER 4HE CLOSING COMMAND ETER CAN BE CHANGED IF SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
WILL BE INTERRUPTED AT ONCE ON RENEWED TRIP OF ANY OF SHOULD BE PERFORMED WITH THIS FAULT TYPE
THE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
4HE PARAMETER 4 -# 02/, ADDRESS IS OP
4HE PHASES IN WHICH FAULT DETECTION IS REGISTERED ERATIVE ONLY AFTER MANUAL CLOSING OF THE BREAKER 4HIS
ARE DECISIVE FOR THE SELECTED LINE LOOP AND THUS FOR TIME IS DECISIVE FOR THOSE PROTECTION STAGES WHICH
THE TRIP COMMAND BEING SINGLE POLE OR THREE POLE SHALL OPERATE ONLY DURING MANUAL CLOSING EG OVER
IN 3! !NOTHER PICK UP DURING OUTPUT OF THE TRIP REACH ZONE OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION
COMMAND RESULTS IN THREE POLE COUPLING OF THE TRIP
#IRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING TIME RELEVANT ONLY IN CASE

4 # " # , / 3 % ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING IS USED IN CONNECTION WITH
S SYNCHRO CHECK
-AXIMUM DURATION OF CLOSE COMMAND

4 # , / 3 %
4HREE POLE COUPLING

0 # / 5 0 ,
7 ) 4 ( & ! 5 , 4 $ % 4 % # EACH MULTI PHASE &!5,4 $%4%#TION RESULTS IN
THREE POLE COUPLING OF THE TRIP COMMAND
7 ) 4 ( 4 2 ) 0 # / - - AFTER INITIATION OF A SINGLE POLE 42)0 DECISION
NO THREE POLE COUPLING IS EFFECTIVE
# ' #

7ITH TWO PHASE FAULTS WITHOUT EARTH

4 2 ) 0 P H & , 4
4 ( 2 % % 0 / , % THREE POLE TRIP WILL ALWAYS OCCUR
0 / , % , % ! $ ) . ' SINGLE POLE TRIP OF THE LEADING PHASE WILL OCCUR

PROVIDED SINGLE POLE TRIP IS ALLOWED
0 / , % , ! ' ' ) . ' SINGLE POLE TRIP OF THE LAGGING PHASE WILL OCCUR
PROVIDED SINGLE POLE TRIP IS ALLOWED
0ROLONGATION TIME AFTER MANUAL CLOSING FOR WHICH THE

4 - # 0 2 / , ASSOCIATED PROTECTION STAGE SHALL OPERATE
3TABILIZATION TIME DELAY FOR EXTERNAL TRIP COMMAND

4 % 8 4 3 4 ! "
VIA BINARY INPUT
&ILTER FOR MEASURED QUANTITIES

& ) , 4 % 2
. / 2 - ! , ./2-!, FILTER
, / . ' ,/.' FILTER FOR DIFFICULT MEASURING CONDITIONS
# ' #

3!6 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS
3ETTINGS FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION
3INCE THE MAIN FUNCTION OF 3! IS THAT OF DISTANCE #ONTROLLED OVERREACHING STAGES
PROTECTION IT IS ASSUMED IN THE FOLLOWING THAT IN SET ZONE :" DELAY 4"
TING THE SCOPE OF THE DEVICE 3ECTION THE DIS ZONE :, DELAY 4,
TANCE PROTECTION FUNCTION HAS BEEN SET AS %8)34 AD
DRESS )F THE RESPONSE ./. %8)34 HAS BEEN &INAL STAGES
SET FOR THE DISTANCE PROTECTION FOR EXAMPLE BE FAULT DETECTION DIRECTIONAL DELAY 4
CAUSE ONLY OTHER FUNCTIONS SHALL BE USED THIS SEC FAULT DETECTION NON DIRECTIONAL DELAY 4
TION IS IRRELEVANT
&OR : : AND :" DIFFERENT DELAY TIMES CAN BE SET
FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS AND MULTI PHASE FAULTS RE
SPECTIVELY
'ENERAL SETTINGS ADDRESS BLOCK
)N ADDRESS BLOCK THE DIRECTION OF THE DIRECTIONAL
3! COMPRISES DISTANCE ZONES AND TIME STAGE AND THE DELAY TIMES 4 AND 4 ARE SET
STAGES ARRANGED AS FOLLOWS
./4%
)NDEPENDENT DISTANCE STAGES 4HE DIRECTION WHICH IS SET FOR THE DIRECTIONAL FINAL
ZONE : DELAY 4 STAGE ADDRESS IS NOT VALID FOR OTHER DIRECTION
ZONE : DELAY 4 ALLY DEPENDENT FUNCTIONS OF THE FAULT DETECTION FUNC
ZONE : DELAY 4 TIONS FOR EXAMPLE FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON WHEN
THIS IS SELECTED
$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK

$ISTANCE PROTECTION GENERAL SETTINGS
' % . % 2 ! , 3 % 4 4 ) . ' 3
$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4 $ISTANCE PROTECTION IS
/ . /. SWITCHED ON
OR
/ & & /&& SWITCHED OFF
$ ) 2 & $ 4 $IRECTION FOR DIRECTIONAL TRIP WITH FAULT DETECTION

WHICH CAN BE SET
& / 2 7 ! 2 $ 3 &/27!2$3 LINE DIRECTION OR
2 % 6 % 2 3 % 2%6%23% BUSBAR DIRECTION OR
. / . $ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! , ./. $)2%#4)/.!, EITHER DIRECTION
$ELAY FOR 4 FAULT DETECTION DIRECTIONAL TRIP

4 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE S
AND 0 NO DIRECTIONAL TRIP
$ELAY FOR 4 FAULT DETECTION NON DIRECTIONAL TRIP

4 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE S
AND 0 NO NON DIRECTIONAL TRIP
# ' #

&OR MANUAL CLOSURE ONTO THE SHORT CIRCUIT THE DIS DISTANCE ZONE :, IS AVAILABLE 2ELEASE OF THIS ZONE
TANCE PROTECTION CAN BE SET FOR VARIOUS VALUES OF BEFORE A $!2 CYCLE CAN BE BLOCKED BY SETTING AD
REACH ADDRESS &OR : %&&%#4)6% NO SPECIAL DRESS $!2 :, TO ./ 4HE $!2 CYCLES CAN
MEASURES ARE TAKEN 0OSSIBLE MEASURES ARE SWITCH ALSO BE BLOCKED BY A BINARY INPUT /NE CAN SELECT THE
TO OVERREACH ZONE INSTANTANEOUS DIRECTIONAL :" STAGE THAT SHOULD BE EFFECTIVE DURING BLOCKING OF THE
$)2%#4)/.!, OR OVERREACH ZONE INSTANTANEOUS $!2 CYCLES ADDRESS .ORMALLY : WITH 4 IS
NON DIRECTIONAL :" ./. $)2%#4 OR &$ %&&%# EFFECTIVE IN THIS CASE THIS CAN BE CHANGED TO : WITH
4)6% IE FAULT DETECTION INSTANTANEOUS NON DIREC 4"
TIONAL 0REREQUISITE IS THAT THE MANUAL CLOSING COM
MAND IS FED TO THE RELAY VIA A BINARY INPUT FROM THE )F A LINE TO BE PROTECTED IS COMPOSED OF OVERHEAD LINE
DISCREPANCY SWITCH AND CABLE SECTIONS THE CONTROLLED ZONES :" AND
:, CAN BE USED TO DISTINGUISH BETWEEN FAULTS ON THE
)F THE DISTANCE PROTECTION OPERATES TOGETHER WITH THE THE OVERHEAD SECTION AND CABLE FAULTS TO A CERTAIN
INTEGRATED OR AN EXTERNALLY CONNECTED AUTO RECLOSE DEGREE 2ECLOSURE CAN BE BLOCKED FOR CABLE FAULTS
DEVICE ADDRESS DETERMINES WHICH DISTANCE USING ADDRESSES AND )F FOR EXAMPLE A
ZONE IS VALID BEFORE AUTO RECLOSE .ORMALLY MEA CABLE SECTION IS FOLLOWED BY AN OVERHEAD LINE SEC
SUREMENT FOR THE 2!2 CYCLE TAKES PLACE IN THE EX TION ZONE :" IS SET TO COVER THE CABLE SECTION AND
TENDED OVERREACH ZONE :" 4HIS CAN BE CHANGED ADDRESS IS SET SUCH THAT RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED
BY SETTING 2!2 :" TO ./ /VERREACHING ZONE FOR FAULTS 7)4(). :" )F FURTHER SEGREGATION IS NECES
:" IS NOT RELEASED BY THE 2!2 FUNCTION IN THIS CASE SARY EG CABLE OVERHEAD LINE CABLE DISTINCTION
:ONE : IS EFFECTIVE CONTINUOUSLY CAN BE MADE BY ADDRESS IN SIMILAR WAY )N ALL
OTHER CASES BOTH ADDRESSES REMAIN IN POSITION ./
&OR $!2 FURTHER AUTO RECLOSE CYCLES A SEPARATE
$ISTANCE MEASURING RANGE WHICH IS VALID WHEN THE

- ! . # , / 3 % CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED MANUALLY
: " $ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! , :" $)2%#4)/.!, IE THE OVERREACH ZONE DIREC
TIONAL AS SET IN ADDRESS
: " . / . $ ) 2 % # 4 :" ./. $)2%#4 IE THE OVERREACH ZONE NON
DIRECTIONAL
& $ % & & % # 4 ) 6 % &$ %&&%#4)6% IE FAULT DETECTION ZONE NON
DIRECTIONAL
: % & & % # 4 ) 6 % : %&&%#4)6% IE THE NORMAL FIRST ZONE
NO SPECIAL MEASURES
:ONE :" IS EFFECTIVE BEFORE 2!2

2 ! 2 : "
9%3 OR
9 % 3
. / ./
)F $!2 ND AND FURTHER SHOTS IS BLOCKED

$ ! 2 " , / # +
: 4 : 4 ZONE : IS VALID WITH DELAY 4
: 4 " : 4" ZONE : IS VALID WITH DELAY 4"
# ' #

$ ! 2 : , :ONE :, IS EFFECTIVE BEFORE $!2

9%3 OR
9 % 3
. / ./
!UTO RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED FOR FAULTS

" , + ! 2 : "
. / ./ NORMAL SETTING
7 ) 4 ( ) . 7)4(). ZONE :"
/ 5 4 3 ) $ % /543)$% OF ZONE :"
!UTO RECLOSURE IST BLOCKED FOR FAULTS

" , + ! 2 : ,
. / ./ NORMAL SETTING
7 ) 4 ( ) . 7)4(). ZONE :,
/ 5 4 3 ) $ % /543)$% OF ZONE :,
3ETTING OF THE DISTANCE STAGES ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
4HE RELEVANT PARAMETERS ARE SET FOR EACH DISTANCE )T IS RECOMMENDED THAT A COMPREHENSIVE GRADING
STAGE 4HE REACTANCE 8 DETERMINES THE REACH OF ITS PLAN SHOULD BE MADE FOR THE COMPLETE ELECTRICALLY
ASSOCIATED ZONE 4HE RESISTANCE 2 FORMS THE ALLOW CONNECTED NETWORK )T SHOULD BE MADE BEFORE THIS
ANCE FOR LINE AND FAULT RESISTANCE )T CAN BE SET SEPA ENTRY SERIES IS ATTEMPTED 4HIS PLAN SHOULD CONTAIN
RATELY FOR PHASE PHASE FAULTS AND FOR PHASE THE LINE LENGTHS WITH THEIR PRIMARY REACTANCES 8 IN ¬
EARTH FAULTS TO ALLOW FOR EXAMPLE FOR EARTH FAULTS PHASE 4HESE REACTANCES 8 ARE THE BASIS FOR ZONE
WITH HIGHER FAULT PATH RESISTANCE REACH DETERMINATION
-EASUREMENT DIRECTION CAN BE SET INDIVIDUALLY FOR &OR THE FIRST ZONE : ONE NORMALLY SELECTS NO DELAY
EACH ZONE 4HIS ALLOWS FREE CHOICE OF FORWARDS RE TIME IE 4 S FOR THE FIRST OF THE
VERSE OR NON DIRECTIONAL STAGES EG AT TRANSFORM PROTECTED LINE LENGTH /VER THIS DISTANCE THE RELAY WILL
ERS GENERATORS OR BUS BAR COUPLERS THEN DISCONNECT FAULTS WITHIN ITS INHERENT OPERATING
TIME
4HE DELAY TIMES 4 AND 4 CAN EACH BE SET INDIVIDU
ALLY AND DIFFERENTLY FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS AND MULTI &OR EACH OF THE FOLLOWING STAGES THE DELAY TIME IS IN
PHASE FAULTS 4HUS ONE CAN FOR EXAMPLE MAKE A SET CREASED BY ONE GRADING TIME UNIT 4HIS GRADING TIME
TING FOR SINGLE POLE FAULTS HIGHER THAN THAT OF AN UNIT MUST BE ADEQUATE TO COVER THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
ASSOCIATED DIFFERENTIAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION 4 OPERATING TIME INCLUSIVE TOLERANCE THE RESET TIME OF
0(!3% GRATER THAN 4 0(!3% OR SET A SHORTER THE PROTECTION DEVICES AND THE TOLERANCE OF THE DELAY
RESERVE TIME FOR MULTI POLE FAULTS CLOSE TO A POWER TIMES .ORMALLY S TO S IS USED 2EACH IS SE
STATION 4 0(!3% LESS THAN 4 0(!3% LECTED SO THAT IT COVERS UP TO OF THE EQUAL TIME
STAGE OF THE RELAY FOR THE SHORTEST FOLLOWING LINE SEC
4HE INDEPENDENT ZONES : : : OPERATE INDEPEN TION
DENTLY FROM ONE ANOTHER AND INDEPENDENTLY OF THE
OVERREACH ZONES :" :,
# ' #

4HE VALUES DETERMINED FROM THE GRADING PLAN MUST #ALCULATION %XAMPLE
BE CONVERTED FOR THE SECONDARY SIDE OF CURRENT AND
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS )N GENERAL K6 OVERHEAD LINE !LU3TEEL MM WITH
THE CHARACTERISTICS
:SECONDARY
S LENGTH KM
#URRENT TRANSFORMER RATIO
: PRIMARY
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER RATIO 2S ¬KM
8S ¬KM
2S ¬KM
4HE SECONDARY VALUES GIVEN TO THE RELAY MUST BE RE
8S ¬KM
LATED TO A CURRENT OF ! 4HUS THE CONVERSION FORMULA
FOR REACH FOR ANY DISTANCE ZONE IS
#URRENT TRANSFORMERS ! !
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMERS K6 K6
. CT ).
8 SEC 8 PRIM -AXIMUM OVERLOAD
. VT !
0MAX -6! CORRESPONDING
)MAX !
7HERE .CT CT RATIO
.VT VT RATIO &IGURE SHOWS A SAMPLE NETWORK SECTION WITH PRI
).! RATED RELAY CURRENT IN !MPERE MARY GRADING PLAN
SECONDARY RATED CURRENT OF CUR
RENT TRANSFORMERS 7HICH GIVES THE LINE DATA
2ESISTANCE SETTING 2 ALLOWS A MARGIN FOR FAULT RESIS 8A ¬KM KM ¬
TANCE WHICH APPEARS AS AN IN PHASE RESISTANCE 2A ¬KM KM ¬
ADDITION TO THE LINE IMPEDANCE AT THE POINT OF FAULT )T
COMPRISES FOR EXAMPLE ARC RESISTANCES TOWER FOOT 8B ¬KM KM ¬
ING RESISTANCES OR SIMILAR 4HE SETTING SHOULD 2B ¬KM KM ¬
TAKE THESE FAULT RESISTANCES INTO ACCOUNT BUT NOT BE
SET HIGHER THAN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY !N ADEQUATE 8C ¬KM KM ¬
DIFFERENCE FROM THE OPERATING IMPEDANCE MUST BE 2C ¬KM KM ¬
ENSURED EVEN UNDER CONDITIONS OF TEMPORARY OVER
4HUS THE FOLLOWING ZONE LIMITS ARISE
LOAD 4HE RESISTANCE MARGIN CAN BE SET SEPARATELY
FOR PHASE PHASE FAULTS AND FOR PHASE EARTH FAULTS
:ONE PRIMARY OF LINE LENGTH
8PRIM 8A ¬ ¬
:
:
! : " # $
8A 2A 8B 2B 8C 2C
8 8A S! " KM
8 8A 8B S" # KM
8 ; 8A 8B 8C = S# $ KM
&IGURE 'RADING PLAN RELATED TO ABOVE CALCULATION EXAMPLE
# ' #

:ONE SECONDARY )N THIS EXAMPLE FOR PHASE PHASE ARCS AN ARC VOLT
AGE DROP OF MAX K6 IS ASSUMED 7ITH AN AS
. CT ). SUMED MINIMUM SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT OF ! THIS
8 SEC 8 PRIM CORRESPONDS TO ¬ PRIMARY &OR THE RESISTANCE SET
. VT !
TING OF THE FIRST ZONE THIS RESULTS IN
! ¬
¬
!
2 PRIM 2 LINE 2 ARC

:ONE PRIMARY UP TO : OF THE NEXT LINE B ¬ ¬ ¬

8PRIM 8A 8B
¬ ¬
. CT ).
¬ 2 SEC 2 PRIM
. VT !
:ONE SECONDARY !
¬
!
. CT ). ¬
8 SEC 8 PRIM
. VT !
! ¬ /NLY HALF OF THE ARC RESISTANCE VALUE WAS USED BE
¬
! CAUSE IT IS ADDITIVE TO THE LOOP IMPEDANCE AND ONLY
HALF SHOULD BE ADDED TO THE IMPEDANCE PER PHASE
:ONE PRIMARY UP TO : OF THE NEXT LINE B
&OR EARTH FAULTS A SEPARATE RESISTANCE TOLERANCE CAN
8PRIM ;8A 8B 8C = BE SET )F AN ARC RESISTANCE OF ¬ AND A RESISTANCE OF
; ¬ ¬ ¬ FOR THE TOWER FOOTING EARTH PATH ARE ASSUMED
THIS THEN LEADS TO
¬ =
¬
2% PRIM 2 LINE 2 ARC 2 TOWER
:ONE SECONDARY
¬ ¬ ¬
. CT ). ¬
8 SEC 8 PRIM
. VT ! . CT ).
2% SEC 2% PRIM
! ¬ . VT !
¬
! !
¬
!
2ESISTANCE SETTING
¬
&OR RESISTANCE SETTING IN RELATION TO OVERHEAD LINES
CONSIDERATION OF THE ARC RESISTANCE IS MOST IMPOR 4HIS VALUE GIVES AN ADEQUATE CLEARANCE TO THE MINI
TANT )N CABLE NETWORKS AN EXTENSIVE ARC IS NOT POSSI MUM LOAD IMPEDANCE 4HE POWER SWING POLYGON
BLE THUS THE EFFECTIVE RESISTANCE OF THE CABLE ITSELF CAN BE IGNORED FOR THE PHASE EARTH FAULTS BECAUSE
NORMALLY PLAYS THE MORE IMPORTANT ROLE 7ITH VERY THE POWER SWING DETECTION WORKS ONLY WITH PHASE
SHORT CABLE LENGTHS HOWEVER IT MUST BE ENSURED PHASE MEASUREMENT
THAT THE RESISTANCE OF AN ARC AT THE TERMINALS AT THE
CLOSE UP CABLE END IS COVERED BY THE RESISTANCE ./4% 4HE SETTING VALUES 2 FOR EACH ZONE SHOULD IF
WHICH IS SET FOR THE FIRST ZONE POSSIBLE NOT EXCEED TIMES THE SET 8 VALUE
)NDEPENDENT ZONES : : AND : ADDRESS BLOCK
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4
$ISTANCE PROTECTION INDEPENDENT ZONES : :
) . $ % 0 % . $ : / . % 3 AND :
# ' #

&IRST ZONE :
2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE

2 ¬
PHASE
¬ 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE ¬
2EACTANCE VALUE REACH

8 ¬
¬ ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE ¬
2 % 2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE EARTH

3MALLEST SETTING VALUE ¬
¬ ¬
$IRECTION FOR ZONE : CAN BE

$ ) 2 % # : &/27!2$3 LINE DIRECTION OR
& / 2 7 ! 2 $ 3 2%6%23% BUSBAR DIRECTION
./. $)2%#4)/.!, EITHER DIRECTION
2 % 6 % 2 3 %
. / . $ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! ,
4 0 ( ! 3 % $ELAY FOR ZONE : SINGLE PHASE FAULTS

AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE : FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS
4 0 ( ! 3 % $ELAY FOR ZONE : MULTI PHASE FAULTS

AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE : FOR MULTI PHASE FAULTS
.ORMALLY ADDRESSES AND ARE SET TO THE SAME VALUE
3ECOND ZONE :
2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE PHASE

2 ¬

8 ¬
# ' #


¬ ¬

$ ) 2 % # : &/27!2$3 LINE DIRECTION OR
2 % 6 % 2 3 %
. / . $ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! ,
$ELAY FOR ZONE : SINGLE PHASE FAULTS

4 0 ( ! 3 % 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE S
AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE : FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS
$ELAY FOR ZONE : MULTI PHASE FAULTS

4 0 ( ! 3 % 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE S
AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE : FOR MULTI PHASE FAULTS
3INGLE POLE TRIP WITH SINGLE PHASE FAULT EVEN IN

4 2 ) 0 0 : ZONE :
. / ./ OR
9 % 3 9%3
4HIRD ZONE :
2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE PHASE

2 ¬

8 ¬

¬ ¬

$ ) 2 % # :
& / 2 7 ! 2 $ 3 &/27!2$3 LINE DIRECTION OR
2 % 6 % 2 3 % 2%6%23% BUSBAR DIRECTION
. / . $ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! , ./. $)2%#4)/.!, EITHER DIRECTION
# ' #

4 $ELAY FOR ZONE :

AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE :
#ONTROLLED OVERREACH ZONES :" AND :, ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE TWO OVERREACH ZONES :" AND :, ARE CON "OTH STAGES CAN ALSO BE USED FOR SELECTION BETWEEN
TROLLED STAGES 4HEY DO NOT INFLUENCE THE NORMAL CABLE AND OVERHEAD LINE SECTIONS IN CASE OF MIXED
ZONES : : : 4HERE IS THEREFORE NO SWITCH OV LINES REFER TO 3ECTION FOR MORE DETAILS %ACH
ER RATHER THE OVERREACH ZONES WILL BE SWITCHED EFFEC OF THESE STAGES HAVE THEIR OWN DELAY TIME WHEREBY
TIVE OR NON EFFECTIVE BY THE APPROPRIATE CRITERIA )F FOR :" ONE CAN AGAIN DISTINGUISH BETWEEN SINGLE
ONE OF THESE STAGES IS NOT REQUIRED THE CORRESPOND POLE 4" 0(!3% AND MULTI POLE FAULTS 4"
ING SETTINGS ARE IRRELEVANT 0(!3
:ONE :" IS EFFECTIVE IN CONJUNCTION WITH RAPID RE -EASUREMENT DIRECTION CAN ALSO BE SET INDIVIDUALLY
CLOSING FIRST SHOT ANDOR TELEPROTECTION MODES )T
FOR THE OVERREACH ZONES
CAN ALSO BE ACTIVATED VIA A BINARY INPUT CIRCUIT )T IS
GENERALLY SET AT AT LEAST OF THE LINE LENGTH
./4% 4HE DIRECTIONS SET FOR ZONE :" AND :, AP
4HE ZONE :, IS USED FOR MULTIPLE RECLOSING AFTER THE PLY IN GENERAL FOR THIS STAGE INDEPENDENT OF THE
SECOND SHOT $!2 DELAYED AUTO RECLOSURE )T CAUSE WHICH LEADS TO ACTIVATION OF ONE OF THESE
CAN ALSO BE ACTIVATED VIA A BINARY INPUT CIRCUIT ZONES
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4 $ISTANCE PROTECTION CONTROLLED ZONES
# / . 4 2 / , , % $ : / . % 3 :" AND :,
/VERREACH ZONE :" CONTROLLED BY 2!2 TELEPROTECTION SIGNALS OR BINARY INPUT

2 " ¬
PHASE

8 " ¬
2 " % 2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE EARTH

¬ ¬
# ' #

$IRECTION FOR ZONE :" CAN BE

$ ) 2 % # : " &/27!2$3 LINE DIRECTION OR
2 % 6 % 2 3 %
. / . $ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! ,
4 " 0 ( ! 3 % $ELAY FOR ZONE :" SINGLE PHASE FAULTS

AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE :" FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS
4 " 0 ( ! 3 $ELAY FOR ZONE :" MULTI PHASE FAULTS

AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE :" FOR MULTI PHASE FAULTS
/VERREACH ZONE :, CONTROLLED BY $!2 OR BINARY INPUT

2 , ¬
PHASE

8 , ¬
2 , % 2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE EARTH

¬ ¬
$IRECTION FOR ZONE :, CAN BE

$ ) 2 % # : , &/27!2$3 LINE DIRECTION OR
2 % 6 % 2 3 %
. / . $ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! ,
$ELAY FOR ZONE :,

4 ,
AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE :,
# ' #

3ELECTION OF THE FAULT DETECTION PROGRAM ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY HAS A VARIETY OF FAULT EQUIPPED WITH MORE THAN ONE FAULT DETECTOR SELEC
DETECTION FUNCTIONS FROM WHICH THE OPTIMUM CAN BE TION HAS BEEN MADE DURING CONFIGURATION ACCORDING
CHOSEN FOR THE SYSTEM UNDER CONSIDERATION REFER TO 3ECTION ADDRESS 4HE FOLLOWING PARA
3ECTION /RDERING DATA GRAPHS SHOW THE PARAMETERS FOR ALL FAULT DETECTION FA
CILITIES 7HEN PAGING THROUGH THE DISPLAY ONLY THOSE
4HE POSSIBLE FAULT DETECTION METHODS ARE INDIVIDUAL ADDRESSES APPEAR WHICH ARE VALID FOR THE SELECTED
LY DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION )F THE DEVICE IS FAULT DETECTION METHODS
$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK $ISTANCE PROTECTION

& ! 5 , 4 $ % 4 % # 0 2 / ' FAULT DETECTION PROGRAM
ONLY WITH VOLTAGE CONTROLLED 5) FAULT DETECTION

0 2 / ' 5 ) MEASUREMENT CONTROL
, % 5 P H E , , 5 P H P H 5PH % WITH DETECTED EARTH FAULT
5PH PH WITHOUT DETECTED EARTH FAULT
, % 5 P H P H , , 5 P H P 5PH PH WITH DETECTED EARTH FAULT

5PH PH WITHOUT DETECTED EARTH FAULT
, % 5 P H E , , 5 P H E 5PH % WITH DETECTED EARTH FAULT

5PH % WITHOUT DETECTED EARTH FAULT
, % 5 P H E , , ) 5PH % WITH DETECTED EARTH FAULT

) WITHOUT DETECTED EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT
PICK UP ONLY
./4% -EASUREMENT CONTROL WITH ,%5PHPH,,5PHPH EXCLUDES MEASUREMENT OF PHASE TO EARTH LOOP THUS
IT IS NOT USED FOR SYSTEMS WITH EARTHED STARPOINT UNLESS A DIFFERENT PROTECTIVE RELAY OR FUNCTION IS ACTIVATED FOR
EARTH FAULTS
ONLY FOR IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION

0 2 / ' : ! FIX IMPEDANCE :! -EASUREMENT CONTROL
, % : P H E , , : P H P H :PH % WITH DETECTED EARTH FAULT
:PH PH WITHOUT DETECTED EARTH FAULT
, % : P H E , , ) :PH % WITH DETECTED EARTH FAULT

) WITHOUT DETECTED EARTH FAULT
OVERCURRENT PICK UP ONLY
# ' #

'ENERAL SETTING FOR FAULT DETECTION ADDRESS BLOCK
$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK &AULT DETECTION FOR DISTANCE

& ! 5 , 4 $ % 4 % # 4 ) / . PROTECTION
0ARAMETERS FOR OVERCURRENT DETECTION ARE SET IN AD #ALCULATION EXAMPLE

DRESS FOR PHASE CURRENTS AND FOR EARTH
&OR THE LINE USED IN THE EXAMPLE IN 3ECTION
CURRENTS 4HE DETERMINING FACTOR FOR OVERCURRENT
THE MAXIMUM OPERATING CURRENT IS ! WITH
SETTING IS THE MAXIMUM POSSIBLE OPERATING CURRENT
! ! CURRENT TRANSFORMERS AND THE MINIMUM
0ICK UP UNDER CONDITIONS OF PERMISSIBLE OVERLOAD
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT IS ASSUMED TO BE ! 4HE
MUST BE EXCLUDED 4HE THRESHOLD VALUE )PH !D FOLLOWING SETTING WOULD THEREFORE BE USED
DRESS MUST THEREFORE BE SET ABOVE THE MAXI
MUM ANTICIPATED OVER LOAD CURRENT APPROX ) ) ,MAX
TIMES )T MUST THEN BE CHECKED THAT THE MINIMUM !
). ). !
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT IS ABOVE THIS LIMIT )F THAT IS NOT
THE CASE A RELAY WITH VOLTAGE CONTROLLED 5) FAULT
DETECTION OR IMPEDANCE DETECTION IS NECESSARY 4HIS VALUE LIES ADEQUATELY BELOW THE MINIMUM SHORT
CIRCUIT CURRENT OF ! ! | ).
&OR THE EARTH FAULT CURRENT A SEPARATE SETTING VALUE
)E !DDRESS IS PROVIDED )N SOLIDLY EARTHED 4HE CONDITION FOR THE MINIMUM SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT IS
NETWORKS THIS WOULD BE SET BELOW THE MINIMUM EX ALSO VALID FOR EARTH FAULT CURRENTS IN SOLIDLY EARTHED
PECTED EARTH FAULT CURRENT VALUE )N ISOLATED OR COM NETWORKS EQUALLY FOR DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS IN EITHER
SYSTEM
PENSATED NETWORKS THE SETTING VALUE FOR CORRECT DE
TECTION OF DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS MUST BE SET BELOW THE
)F IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION IS USED THE
MINIMUM EXPECTED DOUBLE EARTH FAULT CURRENT ) STAGE CAN BE SET MORE SENSITIVE BECAUSE THIS
IS NOT AN INDEPENDENT STAGE BUT SUPPLEMENTS THE
IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION PHASE TO EARTH WHEN
A LINE LOOP WOULD BE ELIMINATED AS DESCRIBED IN 3EC
TION &OR LONG LINES IT CAN BE SET SUCH THAT IS
DOES NOT OPERATE IN CASE OF REVERSE FAULT BECAUSE OF
THE DAMPING EFFECT OF THE LINE ITSELF
/VERCURRENT DETECTION THRESHOLD VALUE )PH

) P H
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE ).
) ) N ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE ).
4HRESHOLD VALUE FOR EARTH CURRENT DETECTION )%

) E
# ' #

3ETTING FOR VOLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION 5)
./4% 4HIS SECTION APPLIES ONLY FOR MODELS WITH VOLT )N MOST CASES CONTROL WITH 50H % FOR EARTH FAULTS AND
AGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION FACILITY 50H 0H FOR EARTH FREE FAULTS IS PREFERRED IN SYSTEMS
3!J JJJJ OR JJJJ AND WHEN THIS WITH EARTHED STARPOINT ADDRESS ,%5PHE
METHOD HAS BEEN SELECTED 3ECTION /THER ,,5PHPH 4HIS ENSURES MAXIMUM SENSITIVITY FOR ALL
WISE IT CAN BE PASSED OVER KINDS OF FAULT ! PRE REQUISITE IS HOWEVER THAT THE
EARTH FAULT CRITERIA ARE SATISFIED AT THE MEASURING
4HE MEANING OF THE PARAMETERS CAN BE GATHERED POINT SAFELY FOR ALL EARTH FAULTS REFER 3ECTION
FROM THE CURRENTVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTIC SHOWN IN &IG /THERWISE CONTROL WITH 50H % FOR ALL KINDS OF FAULT IS
URE )PH ADDRESS IS THE MINIMUM OPERAT REASONABLE ADDRESS ,%5PHE,,5PHE
ING CURRENT THE PREREQUISITE FOR EACH PHASE PICK WHICH IS LESS SENSITIVE FOR EARTH FREE SHORT CIRCUITS
UP )T MUST BE SET BELOW THE MINIMUM PRESUMED )N MANY CASES THIS CAN BE ACCEPTED BECAUSE PHA
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SE TO PHASE FAULTS ARE COVERED BY THE OVERCURRENT
FAULT DETECTION FUNCTIONS )PH
4HE VOLTAGE DEPENDENT BRANCH CAN BE SET EITHER FOR
PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGES IN ADDRESSES AND
4HE POSSIBILITY TO CONTROL WITH THE VOLTAGE LOOPS
OR FOR PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGES UNDER AD
50H % ONLY WHEN AN EARTH FAULT HAS BEEN DETECTED IS
DRESSES AND 4HIS DEPENDS ON WHETHER
ADVANTAGEOUS IN SYSTEMS WITH A LOW IMPEDANCE
VOLTAGE CONTROL IS SELECTED WITH 5PHPH OR WITH 5PHE
EARTHED STARPOINT IE WITH EARTH FAULT LIMITING AIDS
4HE CHARACTERISTIC MUST BE SET SUCH THAT IT HAS A SUFFI
CIENT SAFETY DISTANCE FROM THE MAXIMUM OPERATION SO CALLED RESISTANCE EARTHING )N THESE SYSTEMS
CURRENT AT MINIMUM OPERATION VOLTAGE )N CASES OF ONLY EARTH FAULTS ARE TO BE DETECTED BY THE VOLTAGE
DOUBT ONE SHOULD CHECK THE PICK UP CONDITIONS CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION &OR PHASE PHASE FAULTS
AGAINST THE CHARACTERISTIC 7ITH COMPREHENSIVE NET THE HIGH SET OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTORS )PH WILL
WORKS SHORT CIRCUIT CALCULATIONS MAY BE USEFUL PICK UP ADDRESS ,%5PHE,,)
56
)N ORDER TO PREVENT FAULTY PICK UP OF THE EARTH FAULT
DETECTOR BY THE OSCILLATION TRANSIENTS ON OCCURRENCE
OF A SIMPLE EARTH FAULT IN ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED

0ETERSEN COIL NETWORKS EARTH FAULT DETECTION CAN
BE DELAYED BY THE PARAMETER 4)E 0(!3% ADDRESS
5)
REFER 3ECTION )F THE EARTH CURRENT
COULD EXCEED THE EARTH FAULT THRESHOLD EVEN UNDER
5)
STEADY STATE CONDITIONS 4)E 0(!3% SHOULD BE SET

TO 0 PICK UP ON ONE SINGLE PHASE FAULT IS THEN NO
MORE POSSIBLE EVEN IF A HIGH EARTH CURRENT WILL FLOW
$OUBLE EARTH FAULTS WILL NEVERTHELESS BE DETECTED
CORRECTLY AND CLEARED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE DOUBLE
FAULT PREFERENCE PROGRAM 3ECTION
!DDITIONALLY IT IS POSSIBLE TO MAKE VOLTAGE CONTROL

WITH PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGES ONLY ADDRESS
)PH )PH ,%5PHPH,,5PHPH 4HE MEASURED LINE LOOP IN
THIS CASE IS INDEPENDENT OF THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION

THIS METHOD EXCLUDES PICK UP ON EARTH FAULTS ABSO
)).
LUTELY HOWEVER CORRECT DOUBLE EARTH FAULT PREFER
&IGURE 6OLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTORS ENCE IS NOT POSSIBLE
5) CHARACTERISTIC
-INIMUM OPERATING CURRENT FOR FAULT DETECTION )PH

) P H ).
# ' #

5NDERVOLTAGE PICK UP VALUE AT )PH ADDRESS

5 P H E ) &IGURE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE
6 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE 6
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE 6

5 P H E )
&IGURE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE

5 P H P H ) &IGURE PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGE

5 P H P H )
&IGURE PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGE
3ETTINGS FOR IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
./4% 4HIS SECTION APPLIES ONLY FOR MODELS WITH IM

PEDANCE DETECTION FACILITY 3!J JJJJ
JJJJ AND WHEN THIS METHOD HAS BEEN SELECTED
3ECTION /THERWISE IT CAN BE PASSED OVER
4HE IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION FOR PHASE EARTH IS

SUPPLEMENTED BY AN OVERCURRENT STAGE )PH
WHERE PICK UP OF THE OVERCURRENT STAGE ONLY LEADS
TO DETECTION IF THE ASSOCIATED IMPEDANCE LOOP HAS
BEEN ELIMINATED REFER 3ECTION 4HE RESPEC
TIVE PARAMETERS HAVE BEEN SET IN 3ECTION
4HE MEANING OF THE PARAMETERS CAN BE GATHERED

FROM THE IMPEDANCE CHARACTERISTIC SHOWN IN &IGURE
4HE BOLD DOTS IDENTIFY THE SETTING PARAMETERS
WHICH DETERMINE THE GEOMETRY OF THE FAULT DETECTION
POLYGON )PH IS THE MINIMUM OPERATING CURRENT THE
PREREQUISITE FOR EACH PHASE PICK UP )T MUST BE SET
BELOW THE MINIMUM PRESUMED SHORT CIRCUIT CUR
RENT
&AULT DETECTION AREA
)MPEDANCE DETECTION SHOULD WITH SAFETY BE LOOKED
UPON AS THE ULTIMATE PROTECTION 4AKING INTO ACCOUNT 0HASE PHASE FAULTS
INTERMEDIATE FEEDING FOR REMOTE FAULTS A LARGER RATH

0HASE EARTH FAULTS
ER THAN SMALLER THRESHOLD VALUE SHOULD BE CHOSEN )F
THE LINE CARRIES REACTIVE POWER THE PICK UP THRESH
OLD MUST LIE BELOW THE REACTIVE POWER IMPEDANCE &IGURE )MPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION CHARACTER
HOWEVER ISTIC
# ' #

#ONSIDERING THE CALCULATION EXAMPLE IN 3ECTION ! SAFETY MARGIN OF AT LEAST SHOULD BE MAIN
WE SELECT APPROXIMATELY TIMES THE VALUE OF TAINED WITH RESPECT TO THIS VALUE
THE THIRD ZONE ! CALCULATION USING PRIMARY VALUES IS
SUPERFLUOUS IN THIS CONSIDERATION 2MAX ¬ ¬
8!SEC ¬ 7HEN THE POWER SWING BLOCKING FUNCTION IS USED

THIS VALUE MUST NOT BE EXCEEDED BY THE POWER SWING
&OR THE REVERSE DIRECTION DO NOT FORGET THAT WITH POLYGON EITHER SO THE PICK UP VALUE IN THE 2 DIREC
OVERREACH TELEPROTECTION PROCEDURES A REVERSE FAULT
TION MUST BE SET CONSIDERABLY SMALLER IN ORDER TO OB
MUST DEFINITELY BE RECOGNIZED IF IT LIES WITHIN THE OVER
TAIN ADEQUATE MEASURING CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE
REACH ZONE OF THE RELAY AT THE OTHER LINE END .ORMAL
SETTING VALUES ARE APPROXIMATELY HALF THOSE OF THE POWER SWING POLYGON AND THE FAULT DETECTION POLY
REACH IN THE FORWARDS DIRECTION GON REFER TO 3ECTION
8 !SEC ¬ )N ORDER TO GUARANTEE UNEQUIVOCAL CRITERIA FOR DIS

CRIMINATION BETWEEN LOAD OPERATION AND A SHORT CIR
&OR THE RESISTANCE SETTING THERE IS A LOWER AND AN UP CUIT IN THE CASE OF LONG HIGH LOADED LINES IN OTH
PER LIMIT 4HE SETTING 2! MUST STILL RECOGNIZE ARC ER WORDS IF ABOVE PRECONDITIONS CANNOT BE FULFILLED
FAULTS WITHIN ITS TOLERANCE RANGE 2OUGHLY OR THE CHARACTERISTIC CAN BE SET DEPENDENT ON THE
TIMES THE VALUE OF THE THIRD ZONE APPLIES HERE ALSO PHASE ANGLE THE 2 INTERSECTION 2! ADDRESS
THEN APPLIES TO PHASE ANGLES ABOVE THE VALUE
!T THE UPPER END THE SETTING VALUE 2! SHOULD NOT EX !.',% 0()! ADDRESS THE 2 INTERSECTION 2!
CEED TIMES THE SETTING FOR 8 ! ADDRESS TO PHASE ANGLES BELOW !.',%
0()! 4HE SAFETY MARGIN FROM THE MINIMUM LOAD IM
&OR LONG OVERHEAD LINES IT MUST BE CONSIDERED THAT PEDANCE IS NECESSARY ONLY FOR 2! 4HE ANGLE
THE SETTING IN THE RESISTIVE DIRECTION MUST HAVE A SUFFI
!.',% 0()! MUST BE SET HIGHER THAN THE MAXIMUM
CIENT SAFETY MARGIN FROM THE MINIMUM LOAD IMPED
PHASE ANGLE DURING LOAD TRANSPORT &UNDAMENTALLY IT
ANCE 4HE MINIMUM LOAD IMPEDANCE OCCURS AT MAXI
IS MOST IMPORTANT THAT THE FAULT DETECTION CHARACTER
MUM LOAD CURRENT AND MINIMUM OPERATING VOLTAGE
)N THIS EXAMPLE THEREFORE ISTIC NEVER EXCEEDS THE LOAD IMPEDANCE DURING OPER
ATION
5 MIN
2 ,PRIM K6
) ,MAX ! &OR EARTH FAULTS A SEPARATE RESISTANCE TOLERANCE AND
¬ A SEPARATE LIMIT ANGLE !.' 0()!% CAN BE SET AD
DRESS ,OAD IMPEDANCE CAN BE IGNORED FOR THE
OR SECONDARY PHASE EARTH FAULTS UNLESS THE PICK UP VALUE OF THE
EARTH CURRENT DETECTION ADDRESS COULD BE EX
CEEDED BY ZERO SEQUENCE CURRENTS CAUSED BY
. CT ).
2 ,SEC 2 ,PRIM ASYMMETRIES IN CURRENTS
. VT !
! 4HE POWER SWING DETECTION USES PHASE TO PHASE
¬
! QUANTITIES 4HUS SETTING OF THE R SECTION FOR PHASE
EARTH MEASUREMENT ARE IRRELEVANT
¬
-INIMUM CURRENT FOR IMPEDANCE DETECTION

) P H ).
2EACTANCE VALUE REACH FORWARDS

8 ! ¬
# ' #

2EACTANCE VALUE REACH REVERSE

8 ! ¬
2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE PHASE PHASE ANGLE BELOW

2 ! !.',% 0()! ADDRESS LOAD AREA
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE ¬
2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE PHASE PHASE ANGLE ABOVE

2 !
!.',% 0()! ADDRESS FAULT AREA
2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE EARTH PHASE ANGLE BELOW !.'

2 ! % ¬
0()!% ADDRESS
2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE EARTH PHASE ANGLE ABOVE !.'

2 ! %
0()!% ADDRESS
,IMIT ANGLE FOR PHASE PHASE MEASUREMENT BELOW

! . ' , % 0 ( ) !
WHICH RESISTANCE INTERSECTION 2! ADDRESS IS
^ VALID LOAD AREA ABOVE WHICH RESISTANCE INTERSECTION
2! ADDRESS IS VALID FAULT AREA
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE ^
! . ' 0 ( ) ! % ,IMIT ANGLE FOR PHASE EARTH MEASUREMENT BELOW

WHICH RESISTANCE INTERSECTION 2!% ADDRESS IS
^ VALID ABOVE WHICH RESISTANCE INTERSECTION 2!% AD
DRESS IS VALID
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE ^
.OTE $ISTINCTION BETWEEN 2! AND 2! CAN BE MADE FOR USE ON LONG HEAVY LOADED LINES )N OTHER CASES BOTH
THE PARAMETERS ARE TO BE SET TO THE SAME VALUE $ISTINCTION BETWEEN 2!% AND 2!% IS USUALLY NOT NECESSARY
# ' #

3ETTINGS FOR DETERMINATION OF THE FAULTED LOOP ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
4HE SELECTION OF VALID SHORT CIRCUITED LOOPS VARIES SOME CASES FAULT RESISTANCE PHASE PHASE LARGER
CONSIDERABLY DEPENDENT UPON WHETHER THE SYSTEM THAN PHASE EARTH ,%!$).' 0( % CAN BE MORE FA
STARPOINT IS EARTHED ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED 0ET VOURABLE
ERSEN COIL !CCORDINGLY THE TREATMENT OF THE SYSTEM
STAR POINT HAS TO BE KNOWN BEFORE THE DEVICE IS PUT &OR THREE PHASE PICK UP THE SETTING OF ADDRESS
INTO OPERATION SEE 3ECTION ADDRESS DETERMINES THE TYPE OF LOOP WHICH WILL BE SE
LECTED 0( &!5,43 %& #/.42/, MEANS THAT IF
4HE PARAMETER BLOCK IS IMPORTANT FOR NETWORKS THERE IS NO EARTH FAULT DETECTED THEN A PHASE PHASE
WITH SOLIDLY EARTHED STARPOINT 7ITH UNEARTHED STAR LOOP WILL BE MEASURED BUT WITH EARTH FAULT DETECTION A
POINT IT IS IRRELEVANT AND CAN BE PASSED OVER PHASE LOOP PHASE EARTH 4HE OTHER POSSIBILITIES
0( 0( /.,9 AND 0( % /.,9 ARE INDEPENDENT OF
0ARAMETER BLOCK IS FOR ISOLATED AND COMPENSATED THE )% PICK UP
NETWORKS &OR NETWORKS WITH EARTHED STAR POINTS IT
IS IRRELEVANT AND CAN BE PASSED OVER 5NDER ADDRESS ONE CAN SELECT WHETHER UNDER
CONDITIONS OF A SINGLE PHASE PICK UP WITHOUT EARTH
)N EARTHED NETWORKS AN EARTH FAULT CAN BE DETECTED
FAULT DETECTION A CONDUCTOR EARTH LOOP IS SELECTED
BY EARTH CURRENT OR DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE ADDRESS
4HE SETTING 0( &!5,43 0(!3% %!24( ONLY
&AULT LOOP SELECTION FOR DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS
MAKES SENSE IN EARTHED NETWORKS WHEN NO CURRENT
CAN BE PROGRAMMED UNDER ADDRESS .ORMALLY
OR ONLY EXTREMELY LOW CURRENT CAN FLOW IN THE CASE OF
THE 0(!3% 0(!3% LOOP WILL BE SELECTED )F HIGH
AN EARTH FAULT &OR IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION THIS PA
FOOTING RESISTANCES ARE EXPECTED THEN ,!'').'
RAMETER IS IRRELEVANT BECAUSE IMPEDANCE FAULT DE
0( % LOOP MAY BE MORE FAVOURABLE BECAUSE THE
TECTION ALWAYS IS RELATED TO A FAULT LOOP
LEADING PHASE EARTH LOOP TENDS TO OVERREACH )N
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
& ! 5 , 4 $ETERMINATION OF THE FAULT LOOP IN SOLIDLY EARTHED
% ! 2 4 ( % $ . % 4 7 / 2 + 3 NETWORKS
$ISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5E o | 5 FOR EARTH FAULT

5 E
DETECTION IN EARTHED SYSTEMS .OTE !DDRESS HAS
6 NO INFLUENCE ON THIS PICK UP VALUE
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE 6
OR 0 NO EARTH FAULT DETECTION BASED ON DISPLACE MENT
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT
&OR DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS IN EARTHED NETWORKS

0 ( 0 ( % & , 4 3 MEASUREMENT IS CARRIED OUT IN
0 ( ! 3 % 0 ( ! 3 % / . , 9 0(!3% 0(!3% LOOP /.,9
, % ! $ ) . ' 0 ( % 0(ASE %ARTH LOOP OF THE ,%!$).' PHASE
, ! ' ' ) . ' 0 ( % 0(ASE %ARTH LOOP OF THE ,!'').' PHASE
7ITH FAULT DETECTION IN ALL PHASES

0 ( & ! 5 , 4 3
%& #/.42/,LED FAULT LOOP IS SELECTED DEPEN
% & # / . 4 2 / , DENT ON EARTH FAULT DETECTION
0(!3% 0(!3% /.,9 FAULT LOOP PHASE TO PHASE IS
0 ( ! 3 % 0 ( ! 3 % / . , 9 SELECTED EVEN WITH EARTH
FAULT DETECTION
0 ( ! 3 % % ! 2 4 ( / . , 9
0(!3% %!24( /.,9 FAULT LOOP PHASE TO EARTH IS
SELECTED EVEN WITHOUT EARTH
FAULT DETECTION
# ' #

WITH FAULT DETECTION IN ONE SINGLE PHASE

0 ( & ! 5 , 4 3
0(!3% %!24( FAULT LOOP PHASE TO EARTH IS
0 ( ! 3 % % ! 2 4 ( SELECTED EVEN WITHOUT EARTH
FAULT DETECTION
0 ( ! 3 % 0 ( ! 3 % 0(!3% 0(!3% FAULT LOOP PHASE TO PHASE IS
SELECTED
)N ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORKS IT MUST BE DISTANCE PROTECTION TAKES PLACE IF ONLY ONE PHASE
ENSURED THAT THE PREFERENCE UNDER CONDITIONS OF PICKS UP )F HOWEVER A CROSS COUNTRY DOUBLE EARTH
DOUBLE CROSS COUNTRY EARTH FAULTS IS THE SAME FAULT OCCURS AFTER DETECTION OF A SIMPLE EARTH FAULT
THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE ELECTRICALLY CONNECTED NET THIS IS RECOGNIZED BY THE RELAY AND MEASURED AC
WORK ADDRESS 4O PREVENT PICK UP DURING THE CORDING TO THE SELECTED DOUBLE EARTH FAULT PREFERENCE
TRANSIENT SWINGS ON INCEPTION OF A SINGLE PHASE FAULT PROGRAM 3INGLE EARTH FAULT IS RECOGNIZED BY THE DIS
)% PICK UP IS DELAYED FOR SINGLE PHASE PICK UP BY PLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5E ADDRESS DELAY 4)E
SETTING 4)E 0(!3% AT SECONDS ADDRESS 0(!3% IS NOT EFFECTIVE THEREAFTER A FURTHER EARTH
)N EXTENDED COMPENSATED NETWORKS THIS TIME FAULT AFTER OCCURRENCE OF A SINGLE EARTH FAULT CAN ONLY
SHOULD BE INCREASED )F IT IS SET TO 0 NO START OF THE BE A DOUBLE EARTH FAULT
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
& ! 5 , 4 $ETERMINATION OF THE FAULT LOOP IN NON EARTHED
. / . % ! 2 4 ( % $ . % 4 ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORKS
4 ) E 0 ( ! 3 % $ELAY FOR )% DETECTION WITH SINGLE PHASE

PICK UP IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
AND 0 )% PICK UP TOTALLY AVOIDED
$ISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5E o | 5 FOR EARTH

5 E
FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS .OTE
6 !DDRESS HAS NO INFLUENCE ON THIS PICK UP
VALUE
0HASE PREFERENCE FOR DOUBLE CROSS COUNTRY EARTH

0 ( ! 3 % 0 2 %
FAULTS &OR ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORKS THE
& , , ! # 9 # , ) # PREFERENCE SEQUENCE MUST BE THE SAME THROUGHOUT
THE WHOLE ELECTRICALLY INTERCONNECTED NETWORK
, , ! # 9 # , ) #
, , ! # 9 # , ) #
, , ! # 9 # , ) #
, , ! # 9 # , ) #
, , ! # 9 # , ) #
, , # 9 # , ) #
, , # 9 # , ) #
# ' #

3ETTINGS FOR THE POWER SWING SUPPLEMENT ADDRESS BLOCK
./4% 4HIS SECTION APPLIES ONLY FOR MODELS WITH 4HE DISTANCE BETWEEN POWER SWING POLYGON AND
POWER SWING OPTION MODEL 3!J JJJJJ FAULT DETECTION POLYGON PHASE PHASE SHOULD BE
JJJ /THERWISE IT CAN BE PASSED OVER 4HE POW AS LARGE AS POSSIBLE THE 2 INTERSECTION IS DECISIVE
ER SWING SUPPLEMENT ONLY OPERATES IF IT IS CONFIGURED /N THE OTHER HAND THE POWER SWING POLYGON MUST
ADDRESS 0/7%2 37).' %8)34 REFER 3EC NOT EXTEND INTO THE OPERATIONAL IMPEDANCE
TION AND IF THE DEVICE HAS IMPEDANCE FAULT DE
TECTION 4O SET THE RATE OF CHANGE OF THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR
BOTH THE MAXIMUM POWER SWING FREQUENCY IN THE IN
4HREE POSSIBLE PROGRAMS CAN BE SELECTED FOR THE STANT OF ENTRY OF THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR INTO THE POWER
POWER SWING BLOCKING FUNCTION IN ADDITION A TRIP SWING POLYGON AND THE TIME REQUIRED BY 3! FOR
PING FUNCTION IN THE CASE OF UNSTABLE POWER SWINGS THE DETECTION OF THE POWER SWING MUST BE TAKEN INTO
ASYNCHRONISM CAN BE PROGRAMMED &OR THE DETEC CONSIDERATION 5NDER THE MOST DIFFICULT CONDITIONS AT
TION OF POWER SWINGS THE FOLLOWING CONSIDERATIONS LEAST MS SHOULD BE ALLOWED FOR THE DETECTION OF A
ARE OF IMPORTANCE SEE ALSO 3ECTION POWER SWING
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
0OWER SWING DETECTION
0 / 7 % 2 3 7 ) . '
0 3 0 2 / ' 2 &UNCTIONAL PROGRAM OF THE POWER SWING

SUPPLEMENT
" , / # + ! , ,
" , / # + : / . , 9 BLOCKING OF THE FIRST ZONE ONLY
BLOCKING OF THE HIGHER DELAYED ZONES

" , / # + ! , , " 5 4 : ONLY : IS RELEASED
/ 5 4 / & 3 4 % 0 4 2 ) 0 TRIP IN THE EVENT OF UNSTABLE POWER SWING

ASYNCHRONISM ALL ZONES ARE BLOCKED
$ISTANCE 2 BETWEEN POWER SWING POLYGON AND FAULT

$ E L T A 2
DETECTION POLYGON SECONDARY SEE IN ¬
2ATE OF CHANGE OF THE POWER SWING VECTOR BETWEEN

D 2 D 4
THE POWER SWING POLYGON AND FAULT DETECTION POLYGON
¬ S IN ¬S BELOW WHICH THE POWER SWING IS DETECTED
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE ¬S
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE ¬S
0OWER SWING ACTION TIME

0 3 4 ! # 4 4HE FUNCTION CAN BE LIMITED TO THE TIME 03 4 !#4
0 S 7ITH THE SETTING 0 THE POWER SWING FUNCTION IS
EFFECTIVE UNTIL THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR HAS LEFT THE POWER
SWING POLYGON AGAIN
AND 0 ONLY AFTER DISCONTINUATION OF THE POWER SWING
CRITERION
# ' #

3ETTINGS FOR TELEPROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
)N PROGRAMMING OF THE SCOPE OF THE FUNCTIONS 3EC 5NDERREACH TRANSFER SCHEMES AD
TION ONE SELECTS WHETHER A PERMISSIVE UNDER DRESS BLOCK
REACH TRANSFER SCHEME 5.$%22%!#( OR A PERMIS
SIVE OVERREACHING TRANSFER SCHEME /6%22%!#( &OR THE UNDERREACH TRANSFER SCHEMES THE TRANSMIS
SION SIGNAL PROLONGATION 4 3%.$ 02, ADDRESS
SHALL BE USED FOR THE TELEPROTECTION ADDRESS )F
SHALL ENSURE THAT THE TRANSMISSION SIGNAL SAFE
THE TELEPROTECTION IS PROGRAMMED AS ./. %8)34 LY REACHES THE OPPOSITE LINE END EVEN WHEN THE SIG
THIS 3ECTION IS IRRELEVANT NAL FROM THE TRANSMITTING LINE END IS INTERRUPTED
QUICKLY ANDOR WHEN THE TRANSMISSION TIME IS RELA
4HE FUNCTION OF THE VARIOUS PROCEDURES IS DESCRIBED TIVELY LONG 3IMILAR CONSIDERATIONS CAN APPLY FOR THE
IN 3ECTION RECEIVED SIGNAL PROLONGATION 4 2%# 02/, AD
DRESS $ELAY OF THE FIRST ZONE : DOES NOT DELAY
THE TRANSMISSION SIGNAL BUT AN OWN TIME DELAY 4
3%.$ $%, ADDRESS IS AVAILABLE
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
4 % , % 0 2 / 4 % # 4ELEPROTECTION PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER
0 % 2 - 5 . $ % 2 2 % ! # ( SCHEMES
0 5 4 4 0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP IS

/ . /. SWITCHED ON
-ODE SELECTION OF PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH

0 5 4 4 - / $ %
TRANSFER TRIP
: " ! # # % , % 2 ! 4 ) / . :ONE ACCELERATION :" WITH 4"
& $ ! # # % , % 2 ! 4 ) / . 4RIP WITH FAULT DETECTION NON DIRECTIONAL

INSTANTANEOUS
0ROLONGATION OF TRANSMIT SIGNAL WITH UNDERREACH

4 3 % . $ 0 2 ,
MODES
0ROLONGATION OF RECEIVED SIGNAL WITH UNDERREACH

4 2 % # 0 2 / ,
MODES
$ELAY OF TRANSMISSION SIGNAL IN PERMISSIVE UNDER

4 3 % . $ $ % ,
REACH MODES 4 IS NOT DECISIVE FOR TRANSMISSION
S SIGNAL DELAY EVEN IF A DELAY IS SET
# ' #

/VERREACH TRANSFER SCHEMES AD 4HE TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME 4 42!.3",/ ADDRESS
DRESS BLOCK MUST BE LONGER THAN THE TRANSMISSION TIME IN
ADDITION THE DURATION OF HEAVY TRANSIENT REACTIONS AT
&OR THE OVERREACH TRANSFER SCHEMES IT MUST BE NOTED THE INCEPTION AND INTERRUPTION OF SHORT CIRCUITS HAS TO
THAT THE NORMAL ZONES PARTICULARLY THEREFORE ALSO BE TAKEN INTO CONSIDERATION
: OPERATE INDEPENDENTLY )F THE DISTANCE PROTEC
TION DEVICES AT THE TWO LINE ENDS HAVE SIGNIFICANTLY 4HE TIME 4 7!)4 ADDRESS IS A WAITING TIME
DIFFERENT COMMAND TIMES MORE THAN APPROXIMATELY FOR INITIATION OF TRANSIENT BLOCKING 7HEN THE DISTANCE
MS DIFFERENCE THE FIRST ZONE WITH DELAY 4 SHALL PROTECTION HAS DETECTED A FAULT THE RECEPTION CIRCUIT
RELEASE WILL BE BLOCKED IF NO RECEPTION SIGNAL HAS
BE APPROPRIATELY DELAYED ADDRESSES AND
BEEN RECEIVED WITHIN THIS TIME THEREAFTER A RECEPTION
FOR THE RELEASE PROCEDURES :" 2%,%!3% &$
SIGNAL CAN ONLY BE EFFECTIVE AFTER THE TRANSIENT BLOCK
$)2%# 2%,%!3% :" 5.",/#+ AND &$ 5.
ING TIME 4 42!.3",/ REFER ALSO 3ECTION )F
",/#+ SET TO 0 NO BLOCKING TAKES PLACE FOR THIS CASE
&OR THE BLOCKING PROCEDURES :" ",/#+).' AND 0ROLONGATION OF THE TRANSMISSION SIGNAL 4 3%.$
2%6%23 ).4%2,/#+ 4" ADDRESSES AND 02, ADDRESS IS ONLY EFFECTIVE DURING THE RE
MUST BE SUFFICIENTLY DELAYED THAT THE BLOCKING LEASE PROCEDURE WHEN THE RELAY HAS ALREADY ISSUED A
SIGNAL IS SAFELY TRANSMITTED UNDER CONDITIONS OF EXTER TRIPPING COMMAND 4HIS ALSO GUARANTEES RELEASE OF
NAL FAULT &OR 0),/4 7)2% #/-0 A DELAY OF 4" IS THE OTHER LINE END WHEN THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS RAPIDLY
EQUALLY NECESSARY WHEN SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCES ARE CLEARED BY THE INDEPENDENT ZONE : )N THE BLOCKING
PRESENT BETWEEN THE PICK UP AND DROP OFF TIMES OF PROCEDURE :" ",/#+).' THE TRANSMISSION SIGNAL
THE DEVICES AT TWO LINE ENDS !DDITIONALLY A SUFFICIENT IS ALWAYS PROLONGED BY THIS TIME
TIME PERIOD MUST REMAIN BETWEEN FAULT DETECTION
PICK UP AND TRIP SIGNAL IN ZONE :" SO THAT THE )F A DELAY 4" IS SET FOR THE OVERREACH ZONE :" THIS
CLOSED WIRE LOOP CAN SAFELY BE INTERRUPTED BY FAULT DOES NOT LEAD TO DELAY OF THE TRANSMIT SIGNAL BUT
DETECTION AND RECLOSED BY TRIP IN :" )F NECES TRANSMISSION CAN BE DELAYED BY THE TIME 4 3%.$
SARY 4" MUST BE DELAYED FOR THIS CASE TOO $%, ADDRESS
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
4 % , % 0 2 / 4 % #
4ELEPROTECTION PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER
0 % 2 - / 6 % 2 2 % ! # ( SCHEMES
0 / 4 4 0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP IS

/ . /. SWITCHED ON
0 / 4 4 - / $ % -ODE SELECTION OF PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP

:" 2%,%!3% PERMISSIVE OVERREACH WITH
: " 2 % , % ! 3 % ZONE :" RELEASE MODE
&$ $)2%# 2%,%!3% DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON
& $ $ ) 2 % # 2 % , % ! 3 % RELEASE FAULT DETECTION
:" 5.",/#+ 5NBLOCKING MODE WITH ZONE
: " 5 . " , / # + :"
&$ 5.",/#+ 5NBLOCKING MODE WITH
& $ 5 . " , / # + FAULT DETECTION DIRECTIONAL
:" ",/#+).' "LOCKING MODE WITH ZONE
: " " , / # + ) . ' :"
0),/4 7)2% #/-0 #OMPARISON :" VIA
0 ) , / 4 7 ) 2 % # / - 0 PILOT WIRES
2%6%23 ).4%2,/#+ 2EVERSE INTERLOCKING
2 % 6 % 2 3 ) . 4 % 2 , / # +
# ' #

4RANSIENT BLOCKING TIME AFTER EXTERNAL FAULT

4 4 2 ! . 3 " ,
/ S ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE S
7AITING TIME BEFORE TRANSIENT BLOCKING WITH MISSING

4 7 ! ) 4 RECEPTION SIGNAL
0 S 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE S
OR 0 IE NO TRANSIENT BLOCKING WITH MISSING RECEPTION
!TTENTION )N BLOCKING MODE ADDRESS 0/44
-/$% :" ",/#+).' THE WAITING TIME MUST BE
SET TO THE SMALLEST VALUE IN ORDER TO ENSURE TRANSIENT
BLOCKING AFTER RECEPTION
0ROLONGATION OF THE TRANSMISSION SIGNAL EFFECTIVE

4 3 % . $ 0 2 , ONLY WITH :" ",/#+).' OR AFTER A TRIP SIGNAL HAS
S BEEN ISSUED
0 / 4 4 $ I R & $ %FFECTIVE DIRECTION FOR DIRECTIONAL 0/44 MODES &$ $)

2%# 2%,%!3% AND &$ 5.",/#+ NOT RELEVANT FOR THE
& / 2 7 ! 2 $ 3 OTHER 0/44 MODES
&/27!2$3 .ORMAL APPLICATION
2 % 6 % 2 3 %
2%6%23%
FOR SPECIAL APPLICATION ONLY
. / . $ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! , ./. $)2%#4)/.!,
$ELAY OF TRANSMISSION SIGNAL IN PERMISSIVE OVER

4 3 % . $ $ % , REACH MODES 4" IS NOT DECISIVE FOR TRANSMISSION
S SIGNAL DELAY EVEN IF A DELAY IS SET
&OR LINE ENDS WITH WEAK POWER INFEED THE ECHO FUNC 4HE ECHO IMPULSE DURATION 4 %#(/ )-0 ADDRESS
TION IS REASONABLE WHEN USING OVERREACH TRANSFER CAN BE ADJUSTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE RE
SCHEMES WITH RELEASE PERMISSION SIGNALS SO THAT QUIREMENTS OF THE NETWORK )T HAS TO BE LONG ENOUGH
THE STRONG FEEDING LINE END CAN BE RELEASED EVEN SO THAT EVEN WITH DIFFERING OPERATING TIMES OF THE PRO
WHEN THE WEAK INFEED END DOES NOT PICK UP &OR OTH TECTIVE DEVICES AT BOTH LINE ENDS AND OF THE TRANSMIS
ER TRANSFER SCHEMES THE ECHO FUNCTION IS NOT EFFEC SION DEVICES RECOGNITION OF THE RECEIVE SIGNAL IS
TIVE RESPECTIVE PARAMETERS ARE OF NO CONCERN THEN GUARANTEED
4HE ECHO DELAY TIME 4 %#(/ $%, ADDRESS 4O AVOID FALSE ECHO SIGNALS AFTER DISCONNECTION OF THE
MUST BE SET TO SUCH A LONG DURATION THAT DIFFERING LINE A BLOCKING TIME FOR ECHO GENERATION 4 %#(/
REACTION TIMES OF THE FAULT DETECTORS OF THE PROTECTIVE ",/ ADDRESS IS SET 4HIS SHOULD INCLUDE THE
RELAYS AT BOTH LINE ENDS CANNOT RESULT IN A FALSE ECHO ECHO DELAY TIME 4 %#(/ $%, PLUS THE ECHO IM
SIGNAL IN THE CASE OF EXTERNAL FAULTS PULSE DURATION 4 %#(/ )-0 PLUS A SAFETY MARGIN
OF AT LEAST TWICE THE TRANSMISSION TIME
# ' #

% # ( / 4HE ECHO FUNCTION FOR WEAK INFED LINE ENDS IS

/ .
/. SWITCHED ON
%CHO DELAY TIME

4 % # ( / $ % , 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE S
AND 0 NO ECHO SIGNAL WHEN CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED
4 % # ( / ) - 0 $URATION OF ECHO IMPULSE

4 % # ( / " , / %CHO BLOCKING TIME

3ETTINGS FOR USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS ADDRESS BLOCK
4WO USER DEFINABLE LOGICAL FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE PICK UP AND DROP OFF DELAY TIMES CAN BE SET IN AD
4HEY CAN OPERATE IF THEY ARE CONFIGURED AS %8)34 UN DRESS BLOCK
DER ADDRESS DURING CONFIGURATION OF THE SCOPE
OF FUNCTIONS REFER TO 3ECTION %ACH FUNCTION .OTE THAT THE SET TIMES ARE PURE DELAY TIMES WHICH DO
CAN BE TRIGGERED BY BINARY INPUTS AND MARSHALLED TO NOT INCLUDE THE INHERENT OPERATING TIMES OF THE
BINARY OUTPUTS ,%$S SIGNAL RELAYS TRIP RELAYS &OR BINARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
5 3 % 2 "EGINNING OF BLOCK
, / ' ) # & 5 . # 4 ) / . 3 5SER DEFINABLE LOGICAL FUNCTIONS
0ICK UP TIME DELAY FOR THE FIRST USER DEFINABLE

4 0 ) # + 5 0 LOGICAL FUNCTION
AND 0 IE NO START
$ROP OFF TIME DELAY FOR THE FIRST USER DEFINABLE

4 $ 2 / 0 LOGICAL FUNCTION
AND 0 IE DROPP OFF ONLY BY RESET SIGNAL
# ' #

0ICK UP TIME DELAY FOR THE SECOND USER DEFINABLE

4 0 ) # + 5 0 LOGICAL FUNCTION
AND 0 IE NO START
$ROP OFF TIME DELAY FOR THE SECOND USER DEFINABLE

4 $ 2 / 0 LOGICAL FUNCTION
AND 0 IE DROP OFF ONLY BY RESET SIGNAL
3ETTINGS FOR EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCK
)F THE MEASURED VOLTAGE FAILS EG BECAUSE THE VT ATE EXCEPTIONALLY FOR A CERTAIN TIME PERIOD EG BE
PROTECTION MCB HAS TRIPPED THE RELAY CAN STILL BE CAUSE OF MISSING VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ONLY AS DEFI
OPERATED AS A DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION NITE TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION THE DISTANCE
EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT FUNCTION ! PRE CONDITION PROTECTION ELEMENTS CAN BE BLOCKED BY INPUT OF THE
IS THAT THE EMERGENCY PROTECTION HAS BEEN CONFI EXTERNAL SIGNAL VT PROTECTIVE MCB TRIPPED
GURED UNDER ADDRESS AS %-%2' /# %8)34
REFER TO 3ECTION )F PARTS OF THE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ARE NOT REQUIRED
AT ALL THEN THE CORRESPONDING DELAY TIMES CAN BE SET
4HE PARAMETERS OF THE OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION AT 0
ARE SET IN BLOCK 4HE PICK UP VALUE ) ADDRESS
MUST BE SET ABOVE THE MAXIMUM EXPECTED !DDRESSES AND DETERMINE WHICH STAGES
OVER LOAD CURRENT APPROXIMATELY TIMES 4HE ARE EFFECTIVE IF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS MANUALLY CLOSED
PICK UP VALUE ) ADDRESS ALLOWS A CURRENT ! PRE REQUISITE IS THAT THE MANUAL CLOSE COMMAND
GRADING 4HE CORRESPONDING DELAY TIMES 4 ) AD FOR THE BREAKER IS REPEATED VIA A BINARY INPUT TO THE
DRESS AND 4 ) ADDRESS ARE SET IN RELAY SO THAT IT IS INFORMED ABOUT MANUAL CLOSING OF
SUCH A WAY THAT THEY ALLOW THE HIGHEST POSSIBLE DE THE BREAKER ).%&&%#4)6% MEANS THAT THE STAGES OP
GREE OF SELECTIVITY )N A RING NETWORK FOR EXAMPLE ERATE ACCORDING TO THE SETTINGS
ONE CAN SET UP A DELIBERATE BREAK POINT WITH RAPID
INTERRUPTION TO ALLOW FOR EMERGENCY CASES EG FAULT )T IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO CARRY OUT AUTO RECLOSURE IN THE
IN THE VT SECONDARY CIRCUIT 4HE RESULTANT RADIAL NET EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODE 4HIS HAS
WORKS CAN BE PROTECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CON TO BE ENTERED INTO THE DEVICE DURING CONFIGURATION
VENTIONAL PRACTICE OF GRADING OF DEFINITE TIME OVERCUR UNDER ADDRESS REFER TO 3ECTION )N THIS
RENT PROTECTION CASE THE ) STAGE WITH 4 ) IS DECISIVE FOR THE
AUTO RECLOSURE &INAL DISCONNECTION IS CARRIED OUT
&OR EARTH FAULTS BOTH THE PICK UP VALUE )% AD VIA ) WITH 4 ) DELAYED ) AND ) SHOULD THEN
DRESS AND THE DELAY TIME 4 )% ADDRESS BE SET TO THE SAME VALUE 4 ) IS SET UNDELAYED
CAN BE SET SEPARATELY )N THIS WAY IT IS OFTEN
POSSIBLE TO ACHIEVE A SEPARATE GRADING WITH SHORTER
TIMES FOR EARTH FAULTS !DDRESS DETERMINES WHETHER THE ) STAGE IN
EFFECTIVE ONLY IN CONJUNCTION WITH AUTO RECLOSURE OR
$URING EMERGENCY OPERATION TELEPROTECTION COM WHETHER IT OPERATES INDEPENDENTLY
MUNICATION IS NOT POSSIBLE
.OTE THAT THE SET TIMES ARE PURE DELAY TIMES WHICH DO
)F THE DISTANCE PROTECTION SYSTEM IS REQUIRED TO OPER NOT INCLUDE THE INHERENT OPERATING TIMES
# ' #

% - % 2 ' % . # 9 "EGINNING OF BLOCK

/ 6 % 2 # 5 2 2 % . 4 0 2 / 4 %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
% - % 2 ' / # %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS

/ .
/. SWITCHED ON
(IGH OVERCURRENT DETECTION VALUE ) FOR

) PHASE CURRENTS
) ) N 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE ).
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE ).
$ELAY FOR ) PHASE CURRENTS

4 ) 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE S
AND 0 NO TRIP WITH ) PHASES
/VERCURRENT DETECTION VALUE ) FOR PHASE

) CURRENTS
$ELAY FOR ) PHASE CURRENTS

4 ) 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE S
AND 0 NO TRIP WITH ) PHASES
0HASE OVERCURRENT STAGE WHICH IS EFFECTIVE DURING

- # , / 3 % 0 ( MANUAL CLOSING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
) 5 . $ % , ! 9 % $ ) IE ) STAGE BUT WITHOUT DELAY 4 )
) 5 . $ % , ! 9 % $ ) IE ) STAGE BUT WITHOUT DELAY 4 )
) . % & & % # 4 ) 6 % ).%&&%#4)6% IE PHASE CURRENT STAGES OPERATE AS

PARAMETERIZED
!2 FUNCTION OPERATES WITH THE )STAGE

2 ! 2 : / . % 0
) 7)4( !2 IE ) IS RELEASED ONLY IF !2 IS READY
) 7 ) 4 ( ! 2
) !,7!93 IE ) STAGE OPERATES ALWAYS INDE
) ! , 7 ! 9 3 PENDENT OF THE !2 FUNCTION
/VERCURRENT DETECTION VALUE )% FOR EARTH CURRENTS

) %
# ' #

$ELAY FOR )% EARTH CURRENT

4 ) % 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE S
AND 0 NO TRIP WITH ) EARTH
%ARTH OVERCURRENT TIME STAGE WHICH IS EFFECTIVE DURING

- # , / 3 % % MANUAL CLOSE OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
) % 5 . $ % , ! 9 % $ )% 5.$%,!9%$ IE THE )% STAGE BUT WITHOUT
DELAY
) . % & & % # 4 ) 6 % ).%&&%#4)6% EARTH CURRENT STAGE OPERATES AS
PARAMETERIZED EVEN DURING
MANUAL CLOSURE
3ETTINGS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE RELAY INCLUDES A THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION 4HE PERMISSIBLE CONTINUOUS CURRENT DEPENDS ON
FUNCTION REFER TO 3ECTION 4HIS CAN OPERATE ONLY CROSS SECTION INSULATION MATERIAL TYPE OF CONSTRUC
WHEN IT IS CONFIGURED TO 4(%2-!, /, %8)34 UNDER TION AND METHOD OF INSTALLATION OF THE CABLE ETC )N
ADDRESS DURING CONFIGURATION OF THE DEVICE GENERAL THE MAGNITUDE OF THE CURRENT CAN BE TAKEN
FUNCTIONS REFER 3ECTION FROM WIDELY AVAILABLE TABLES OR OTHERWISE IS TO BE
STATED BY THE MANUFACTURER
#ABLES ARE PARTICULARLY ENDANGERED BY OVERLOADS OF
LONGER DURATION 4HESE OVERLOADS CANNOT AND 4HE HEATING UP TIME CONSTANT Ç DEPENDS ON THE
SHOULD NOT BE DETECTED BY THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTEC CABLE DATA AND THE CABLE SURROUNDINGS )F THE TIME
TION ! BACK UP STAGE OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION FOR CONSTANT IS NOT READILY AVAILABLE IT CAN BE CALCULATED
EXAMPLE MUST BE SET SUFFICIENTLY HIGH SO AS TO ONLY FROM THE SHORT TERM OVERLOAD CAPACITY OF THE CABLE
DETECT SHORT CIRCUITS /NLY SHORT DELAYS ARE PER &REQUENTLY THE S CURRENT IE THE MAXIMUM PERMIS
MITTED FOR SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION 4HESE SHORT TIME SIBLE CURRENT FOR S DURATION IS KNOWN OR CAN BE TAK
DELAYS HOWEVER DO NOT PERMIT MEASURES TO UNLOAD EN FROM TABLES 4HE TIME CONSTANT CAN THEN BE CALCU
THE OVERLOADED CABLE NOR TO UTILIZE ITS LIMITED OVER LATED ACCORDING TO THE FOLLOWING FORMULA
LOAD CAPACITY
3ETTING VALUE Ç ;MIN=
4HE PROTECTION RELAY 3! INCLUDES AN OVERLOAD
PERMISSIBLE S CURRENT
FUNCTION WITH A THERMAL TRIP CHARACTERISTIC WHICH CAN
CONTINUOUSLY PERMISSIBLE CURRENT
BE MATCHED TO THE OVERLOAD CAPACITY OF THE PRO
TECTED CABLE 4HIS FUNCTION IS USUALLY NOT REQUIRED FOR
OVERHEAD LINES AS THE CURRENT CARRYING CAPACITY OF )F THE SHORT TIME OVERLOAD CAPACITY IS STATED FOR A DU
OVERHEAD LINES IS GENERALLY NOT DEFINED RATION OTHER THAN S THEN THAT SHORT TERM CURRENT IS
INSERTED INTO THE ABOVE FORMULA INSTEAD OF THE S CUR
4HE OVERLOAD PROTECTION FUNCTION CAN BE SET TO BE IN RENT (OWEVER THE RESULT IS THEN MULTIPLIED WITH THE
OPERATIVE TO INITIATE ALARMS ONLY OR TO INITIATE TRIPPING STATED DURATION IE IN CASE OF AN S CURRENT
INCLUDING ALARM ADDRESS

4HE RATED CURRENT OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS IS USED PERMISSIBLE S CURRENT
AS THE BASE CURRENT FOR THE OVERLOAD MEASUREMENT CONTINUOUSLY PERMISSIBLE CURRENT
4HE SETTING FACTOR K IS DETERMINED BY THE RATIO OF THE
CONTINUOUSLY PERMISSIBLE THERMAL CURRENT )MAX TO THE
)T SHOULD BE NOTED THAT THE RESULT BECOMES MORE IN
RATED CURRENT
ACCURATE THE LONGER THE STATED DURATION OF THE CUR
)
K MAX RENT BECOMES
).
# ' #

4 ( % 2 - ! , "EGINNING OF BLOCK 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

/ 6 % 2 , / ! $ 0 2 / 4
4 ( % 2 - ! , / , 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION CAN BE SET TO

! , ! 2 - / . , 9 ISSUE !,!2-S /.,9 OR
/ . BE SWITCHED /. IE TRIP AND ALARMS OR
/ & & BE SWITCHED /&&
+ & ! # 4 / 2 3ETTING VALUE OF K FACTOR )MAX).

3ETTING RANGE TO
4 # / . 3 4 ! . 4 4IME CONSTANT Ç
M I N 3ETTING RANGE TO MIN
"Y SETTING A WARNING TEMPERATURE RISE ADDRESS TING WARNTRIP TO THE TEMPERATURE WARNING IS
AN ALARM CAN BE OUTPUT BEFORE THE TRIP TEM PRACTICALLY INEFFECTIVE
PERATURE RISE IS REACHED SO THAT FOR EXAMPLE BY
PROMPT LOAD SHEDDING TRIPPING MAY BE PREVENTED ! CHOICE CAN BE MADE WHETHER THE TEMPERATURE RISE
WHICH IS DECISIVE FOR THE THRESHOLD STAGES IS THE
! FURTHER CURRENT WARNING STAGE IS AVAILABLE ADDRESS MAXIMUM CALCULATED TEMPERATURE RISE OF THE THREE
4HIS CAN BE SET AS A FACTOR OF THE RATED CURRENT CONDUCTORS THE MEAN VALUE OF THE CALCULATED TEM
AND SHOULD BE EQUAL OR LESS THAN THE CONTINUOUSLY PERATURE RISES OF THE THREE CONDUCTORS OR THE TEM
ADMISSIBLE CURRENT )T CAN BE USED BESIDES THE TEM PERATURE RISE CALCULATED FROM THE MAXIMUM CURRENT
PERATURE WARNING STAGE OR INSTEAD OF THAT 7HEN SET OF THE THREE CONDUCTORS ADDRESS
7 ! 2 . 4HERMAL WARNING STAGE IN OF TRIP TEMPERATURE RISE

WARNTRIP
3ETTING RANGE TO
) 7 ! 2 . #URRENT WARNING STAGE SET AS A MULTIPLE OF ).

3ETTING RANGE | ). TO | ).
) ) N
/ , # ! , # 5 , #ALCULATION METHOD DECISIVE FOR THERMAL STAGES

- ! 8 MAXIMUM OF THE TEMPERATURE RISES OF THE THREE CONDUC
TORS
MEAN VALUE OF THE TEMPERATURE RISES OF THE THREE CON
- % ! . DUCTORS
TEMPERATURE RISE CALCULATED FROM THE MAXIMUM CON
& 2 / - ) - ! 8 DUCTOR CURRENT
# ' #

3ETTINGS FOR MEASURED VALUE MONITORING ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE DIFFERENT MONITORING FUNCTIONS OF THE PROTECTIVE PECTED OR IF DURING OPERATION ONE OR MORE MONITOR
RELAY ARE DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION 4HEY PARTLY ING FUNCTIONS REACT SPORADICALLY THEN SENSITIVITY
MONITOR THE RELAY ITSELF PARTLY THE STEADY STATE MEA SHOULD BE REDUCED
SURED VALUES OF THE TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS
./4% 0REREQUISITE FOR CORRECT FUNCTION OF THE MEA
4HE SENSITIVITY OF THE MEASURED VALUE MONITORING CAN SURED VALUE MONITORS IS THE PROPER SETTING OF THE GEN
BE CHANGED IN BLOCK 4HE FACTORY SETTINGS ARE SUF ERAL POWER SYSTEM DATA 3ECTION ESPECIALLY
FICIENT IN MOST CASES )F PARTICULARLY HIGH OPERATIONAL THE PARAMETERS CONCERNING EARTH CURRENT VOLTAGE
ASYMMETRIES OF THE CURRENTS ANDOR VOLTAGES ARE EX CONNECTIONS AND THE MATCHING FACTORS
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 % "EGINNING OF BLOCK
-EASURED VALUE SUPERVISION
3 5 0 % 2 6 ) 3 ) / .
6OLTAGE THRESHOLD PHASE PHASE ABOVE WHICH THE

3 9 - 5 T H R E S
SYMMETRY MONITORING IS EFFECTIVE REFER &IGURE
3YMMETRY FACTOR FOR THE VOLTAGE SYMMETRY SLOPE OF

3 9 - & A C T 5
THE SYMMETRY CHARACTERISTIC REFER &IGURE
#URRENT THRESHOLD ABOVE WHICH THE SYMMETRY MONI

3 9 - ) T H R E S
TORING IS EFFECTIVE REFER &IGURE
3YMMETRY FACTOR FOR THE CURRENT SYMMETRY SLOPE OF

3 9 - & A C T )
THE SYMMETRY CHARACTERISTIC SEE &IGURE
#URRENT THRESHOLD ABOVE WHICH THE SUMMATION MONI

3 5 - ) T H R E S
TORING REFER &IGURE REACTS ABSOLUTE CONTENT RE
) ) N FERRED TO ). ONLY
2ELATIVE CONTENT RELATED TO THE MAXIMUM CONDUCTOR

3 5 - & A C T )
CURRENT FOR OPERATION OF THE CURRENT SUMMATION MONI
TORING REFER &IGURE
# ' #

6OLTAGE THRESHOLD PHASE TO PHASE BELOW WHICH

5 - % ! 3 5
THE VOLTAGE FAILURE MONITOR OPERATES
-INIMUM CURRENT TO DETECT A VOLTAGE FAILURE

5 - % ! 3 )
4HE SETTING VALUES OF THE FUSE FAILURE MONITOR AD URE MONITOR MUST NOT BE CHOSEN FOR LINES IN
DRESSES AND HAVE TO BE CHOSEN SO THAT IT EARTHED NETWORKS IN WHICH EARTH FAULTS WITH SMALL
PICKS UP RELIABLY IN THE CASE OF SINGLE PHASE VOLTAGE OR ZERO EARTH CURRENTS CAN OCCUR FOR EXAMPLE
FAILURE CRITERION X 5 BUT ON THE OTHER HAND DOES WHEN FEEDER TRANSFORMERS MAY NOT BE EARTHED )N
NOT PICK UP IN THE CASE OF EARTH FAULTS IN AN EARTHED NON EARTHED NETWORKS THIS FUSE FAILURE MONITOR IS
NETWORK )% MUST THEREFORE BE SET AT A CORRESPOND NOT MEANINGFUL AND WILL BE IGNORED BY THE 3!
INGLY SENSITIVE LEVEL BELOW THE SMALLEST FAULT CURRENT 4HE FUSE FAILURE MONITOR CAN BE SWITCHED OFF UNDER
IN THE CASE OF EARTH FAULTS 4HE FUNCTION &USE FAIL ADDRESS
& 5 3 % & ! ) , &USE FAILURE MONITOR IS

/ .
/. SWITCHED ON
$ISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5 ABOVE WHICH FUSE FAIL

& & -
5 O
URE SHOULD BE DETECTED
%ARTH CURRENT ABOVE WHICH NO FUSE FAILURE IS AS

& & - ) E
SUMED
# ' #

3ETTINGS FOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN SYSTEMS WITH ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED
STAR POINT ADDRESS BLOCK
4HIS SECTION APPLIES ONLY FOR RELAY MODELS WITH EARTH COMPENSATED NETWORKS IS IMPORTANT
FAULT DETECTION MODULE 3!J JJJJJ
JJJ SEE 3ECTION /RDERING DATA AND ONLY WHEN )N ISOLATED NETWORKS AN EARTH FAULT IN A CABLE WILL AL
THESE ARE USED IN NETWORKS WITH ISOLATED OR COMPEN LOW THE TOTAL CAPACITIVE EARTH FAULT CURRENTS OF THE EN
SATED STAR POINT )N OTHER CASES THIS SECTION CAN BE TIRE ELECTRICALLY CONNECTED NETWORK WITH THE EXCEP
PASSED OVER TION OF THE FAULTED CABLE ITSELF TO FLOW THROUGH THE
MEASURING POINT )T IS NORMAL TO USE HALF THE VALUE OF
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IS ONLY POSSIBLE IF THE RESPECTIVE THIS EARTH FAULT CURRENT AS THE THRESHOLD VALUE
CONFIGURATION PARAMETER 3ECTION ADDRESS
IS SET TO %8)34 )F THE DEVICE IS EQUIPPED WITH %XAMPLE ! K6 BUS BAR FEEDS SEVEN CABLE CIR
EARTH FAULT DETECTOR BUT SUPPOSED TO OPERATE IN AN CUITS %ACH CIRCUIT HAS A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SET
EARTHED NETWORK CONFIGURATION PARAMETER ! ! 4HE EARTH FAULT CURRENT IS !KM 4HE
)3/, %& MUST BE SET TO ./. %8)34 CABLES MIGHT BE AS FOLLOWS
4HE FUNCTION EARTH FAULT DETECTION COMPRISES RESID #ABLE KM !
UAL VOLTAGE DETECTION DETERMINATION OF THE EARTH #ABLE KM !
FAULTED PHASE AND THE DETERMINATION OF THE EARTH #ABLE KM !
FAULT DIRECTION 4HE LATTER IS ONLY POSSIBLE WHEN BOTH #ABLE KM !
EARTH CURRENT AND RESIDUAL VOLTAGE ARE AVAILABLE TO #ABLE KM !
THE RELAY #ABLE KM !
#ABLE KM !
4HE RESIDUAL VOLTAGE 5E INITIATES EARTH FAULT DETEC
TION AND IS SET IN ADDRESS 3INCE FOR EARTH FAULTS 4OTAL KM !
IN ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORKS THE FULL DIS
PLACEMENT VOLTAGE APPEARS THE SETTING VALUE IS NOT 7ITH AN EARTH FAULT ON CABLE ! !
CRITICAL IT SHOULD LIE BETWEEN 6 AN 6 %ARTH FAULT ! EARTH FAULT CURRENT WILL FLOW THROUGH THE MEASUR
IS DETECTED AND ANNUNCIATED ONLY WHEN THE DIS ING POINT SINCE ! FLOWS DIRECT FROM CABLE INTO
PLACEMENT VOLTAGE HAS BEEN STAYED FOR THE DURATION THE FAULT 3INCE THAT CABLE IS AMONGST THE LONGEST
4 %& ADDRESS THIS IS THE MOST UNFAVOURABLE CASE SMALLEST EARTH
FAULT CURRENT FLOWS THROUGH THE MEASURING POINT /N
&OR PHASE DETERMINATION 5PH ADDRESS IS THE SECONDARY SIDE FLOWS
THE CRITERION FOR THE EARTH FAULTED PHASE WHEN SI
MULTANEOUSLY THE OTHER TWO PHASE VOLTAGES HAVE EX ! !
CEEDED 5PH ADDRESS !CCORDINGLY 5PH
MUST BE SET LOWER THAN THE MINIMUM OPERATIONAL 4HE RELAY SHOULD BE SET AT APPROXIMATELY HALF THIS VAL
PHASE EARTH VOLTAGE 4HIS SETTING IS HOWEVER ALSO UE EG !
NOT CRITICAL 6 FACTORY SETTING SHOULD ALWAYS BE
ADEQUATE 5PH MUST LIE ABOVE THE MAXIMUM OP )N COMPENSATED NETWORKS DIRECTIONAL DETERMINA
ERATIONAL PHASE EARTH VOLTAGE BUT BELOW THE MINI TION IS MADE MORE DIFFICULT SINCE A MUCH LARGER REAC
MUM OPERATIONAL PHASE PHASE VOLTAGE THEREFORE TIVE CURRENT OF CAPACITIVE OR INDUCTIVE CHARACTER IS SU
FOR EXAMPLE 6 AT 5. 6 4HE IDENTIFICATION OF PERIMPOSED ON THE CRITICAL WATTMETRIC CURRENT 4HE
THE FAULTY PHASE IS A FURTHER PRECONDITION FOR ANNUNCI TOTAL EARTH CURRENT AVAILABLE TO THE RELAY CAN THERE
ATION OF AN EARTH FAULT FORE DEPENDENT UPON THE NETWORK CONFIGURATION AND
LOCATION OF THE COMPENSATION COIL ASSUME VERY DIF
&OR DETERMINATION OF THE DIRECTION OF THE EARTH FAULT IN FERENT VALUES IN MAGNITUDE AND PHASE ANGLE 4HE
PRINCIPLE THE THRESHOLD CURRENT ADDRESS RELAY HOWEVER MUST EVALUATE ONLY THE REAL COMPO
SHOULD BE SET AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE TO PREVENT FAULTY NENT OF THE EARTH FAULT CURRENT THAT IS )% X COS 4HIS
OPERATION DUE TO ASYMMETRICAL CURRENTS IN THE NET DEMANDS EXTREMELY HIGH ACCURACY PARTICULARLY WITH
WORK AND THROUGH THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS PARTICU REGARD TO PHASE ANGLE ACCURACY OF ALL THE INSTRUMENT
LARLY IN (OLMGREEN CONNECTION $EPENDENT UPON TRANSFORMERS !LSO THE RELAY SHOULD NOT BE SET UN
THE TREATMENT OF THE NETWORK STAR POINT THE MAGNI NECESSARILY SENSITIVE 7HEN USED IN COMPENSATED
TUDE OF THE CAPACITIVE EARTH FAULT CURRENT FOR ISOLATED NETWORKS THEREFORE RELIABLE DIRECTIONAL DETERMINA
NETWORKS OR THE WATTMETRIC RESIDUAL CURRENT FOR TION IS ONLY EXPECTED WHEN CORE BALANCE WINDOW
# ' #

TYPE TRANSFORMERS ARE USED (ERE ALSO USE THE RENT WHICH CAN AMOUNT TO UP TO ! FOR EARTH FAULTS
THUMB RULE SETTING AT HALF THE EXPECTED MEASURED NEAR THE 0ETERSEN COIL /N THE SECONDARY SIDE WE
CURRENT WHEREBY ONLY THE RESIDUAL WATTMETRIC CUR HAVE
RENT IS APPLICABLE 4HIS RESIDUAL WATTMETRIC CURRENT IS
PROVIDED PRINCIPALLY BY THE LOSSES IN THE 0ETERSEN ! !
COIL
!S SETTING VALUE ! IS SELECTED
%XAMPLE 4HE SAME NETWORK AS IN THE PREVIOUS EX
AMPLE IS CONSIDERED TO BE COMPENSATED BY A 0ETER 4HE HIGH REACTIVE CURRENT COMPONENT IN COMPEN
SEN COIL 4HE COIL IS MATCHED TO THE TOTAL NETWORK 4HE SATED NETWORKS AND THE UNAVOIDABLE AIR GAP OF THE
COMPENSATION CURRENT IS THUS ! 4HE LOSSES WINDOW TYPE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS OFTEN MAKE
SHOULD BE &OR EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL DETERMINA COMPENSATION OF THE ANGLE ERROR OF THE CURRENT TRANS
TION WINDOW TYPE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ! ! FORMER NECESSARY 4HIS IS POSSIBLE THROUGH ADDRESS
ARE FITTED ES TO 4HE MAX ANGLE ERROR & OF THE CT
WITH ITS ASSOCIATED CURRENT ) AS WELL AS ANOTHER CT
3INCE THE RESIDUAL WATTMETRIC CURRENT IS DERIVED PRIN OPERATING POINT )& ABOVE WHICH THE ANGLE ERROR RE
CIPALLY FROM THE COIL LOSSES IT IS INDEPENDENT OF EARTH MAINS PRACTICALLY CONSTANT ARE ENTERED FOR THE AC
FAULT LOCATION APPROXIMATELY THE SAME TUALLY CONNECTED BURDEN 4HE RELAY THEN APPROXI
MATES WITH ADEQUATE ACCURACY TO THE CHARACTERISTIC
OF ! ! OF THE TRANSFORMER )N ISOLATED NETWORKS THIS ANGLE ER
ROR COMPENSATION IS NOT NECESSARY
4HIS REAL CURRENT IS SUPERIMPOSED BY A REACTIVE CUR
% ! 2 4 ( & ! 5 , 4 "EGINNING OF BLOCK

. / . % ! 2 4 ( % $ . % 4 %ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEM
% ! 2 4 ( & ! 5 , 4 %ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS IS

! , ! 2 - / . , 9 REQUIRED TO GIVE !,!2- /.,9 NO TRIP
/ . /. SWITCHED ON AND WILL TRIP
4HRESHOLD VALUE FOR DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5E

5 E
o | 5 .OTE !DDRESS HAS NO INFLUENCE ON
6 THIS PICK UP VALUE
0HASE EARTH VOLTAGE OF A FAULTED PHASE WHICH WILL BE

5 P H
CERTAINLY UNDERSHOT UNDER EARTH FAULT CONDITIONS
0HASE EARTH VOLTAGE OF HEALTHY PHASES WHICH WILL

5 P H
CERTAINLY BE EXEEDED UNDER EARTH FAULT CONDITIONS
# ' #

) E 4HRESHOLD VALUE FOR DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION

&OR ISOLATED NETWORK CAPACITIVE EARTH FAULT CURRENT
! &OR COMPENSATED NETWORK OHMIC WATTMETRIC EARTH
FAULT RESIDUAL CURRENT
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE !
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE !
3ECONDARY CURRENT FOR MAX ERROR ANGLE OF

# 4 % 2 2 )
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
! 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE !
,ARGEST SEFTING VALUE !
%RROR ANGLE OF CURRENT TRANSFORMER AT )

# 4 % 2 2 &
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE DEG
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE DEG
3ECONDARY CURRENT ABOVE WHICH THE ANGLE

# 4 % 2 2 )
ERROR IS PRACTICALLY CONSTANT
! 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE !
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE !
%RROR ANGLE OF CURRENT TRANSFORMER AT )

# 4 % 2 2 &
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE DEG
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE DEG
$URATION OF DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE AFTER WHICH EARTH

4 % &
FAULT IS DETECTED AND ANNUNCIATED THIS DELAY IS ALSO
S VALID FOR ANNUNCIATIONS WHEN THE EARTH FAULT CONDI
TIONS CHANGE EG ALTERATION OF DIRECTION
# ' #

3ETTINGS FOR HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCKS TO

)F THE DEVICE IS EQUIPPED WITH PROTECTION FOR HIGH RE SET IN ADDRESS BLOCK 4HE PICK UP VALUE )E AD
SISTANCE EARTH FAULTS IN AN EARTHED NETWORK TYPE DRESS SHOULD BE SET SOMEWHAT BELOW THE MINI
3!J JJJJJ JJJ SEE 3ECTION /RDER MUM EXPECTED EARTH FAULT CURRENT 4HE SET VALUE OF
ING DATA THE FOLLOWING POSSIBILITIES ARE AVAILABLE FOR THE EARTH VOLTAGE 5E ADDRESS SHALL NOT BE
THE DETECTION OF HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULTS EXCEEDED BY OPERATIONAL ASYMMETRY OF THE VOLTAGES
5E MEANS THE VOLTAGE AT THE INPUT TO THE DEVICE WITH
DIRECTIONAL DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OPEN DELTA 64 IF THIS INPUT IS NOT USED THE RELAY CAL
WITH NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE CULATES
DIRECTIONAL DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 5E 5, 5, 5, o
WITH DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON AND NON DIREC
TIONAL BACK UP STAGE
4HE DIRECTIONAL DEPENDENT TRIPPING TIME 4 $)2%#4
ADDRESS IS INDEPENDENT OF DIRECTIONAL COM
NON DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION WITH IN
VERSE TIME CHARACTERISTIC PARISON AND RECEIVED SIGNAL 4HE DIRECTION SET UNDER
ADDRESS IS DECISIVE FOR THE DIRECTIONAL STAGE
)N 3! ONE OF THESE THREE POSSIBILITIES CAN BE .ORMALLY THE LINE DIRECTION IS SET AS &/27!2$3 DI
PROGRAMMED OR EARTH FAULT PROTECTION CAN BE MADE RECTION
INEFFECTIVE SEE 3ECTION
4HE NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE 4 ./. $)2
ADDRESS ALSO OPERATES WHEN NO DIRECTIONAL
$IRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DEFI DETERMINATION IS POSSIBLE BECAUSE THE MEASURED
NITE TIME ADDRESS BLOCK VOLTAGE IS TOO SMALL OR IF THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER PRO
TECTIVE MCB HAS TRIPPED OUT )T THUS ALSO PERFORMS THE
&OR DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION WITH EMERGENCY FUNCTION FOR EARTH FAULT PROTECTION AS WELL
NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE THE PARAMETERS ARE AS A BACK UP STAGE

%ARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL DEFINITE TIME PROTECTION WITH
$ ) 2 % # . / . $ ) 2 % # NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE
% & $ 4 %ARTH FAULT DEFINITE TIME PROTECTION IS

/ .
/. SWITCHED ON
0ICK UP VALUE FOR EARTH CURRENT DETECTION

) E
X )E FOR TRANSMIT SIGNAL
-INIMUM VOLTAGE FOR DIRECTIONAL DISCRIMINATION

5 E
6 ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE 6
$ELAY TIME FOR DIRECTIONAL TRIP

4 $ ) 2 % # 4
# ' #

$IRECTION FOR DIRECTIONAL STAGE

$ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . CAN BE SET TO TRIP
& / 2 7 ! 2 $ 3 &/27!2$3 IN LINE DIRECTION
2 % 6 % 2 3 % 2%6%23% IN BUSBAR DIRECTION
. / . $ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! , ./. $)2%#4)/.!, IN EITHER DIRECTION
$ELAY TIME FOR NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE

4 . / . $ ) 2
4IME DURING WHICH EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS BLOCKED AF

4 " , / # + TER DISTANCE PROTECTION HAS RESET WHEN A SECOND EXTER
S NAL PROTECTION RELAY WITH !2 IS PRESENT THIS TIME MUST BE
LONGER THAN A SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSE CYCLE
3MALLEST SETTING S
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCK
)F THE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL PROTECTION IS EXTENDED BY SIENT BLOCKING TIME 4 42!.3",/ REFER ALSO 3EC
DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON THE PARAMETERS ARE SET IN TION )F SET TO 0 NO BLOCKING TAKES PLACE FOR
ADDRESS BLOCK IN ADDITION TO THOSE OF ADDRESS THIS CASE
BLOCK 3ECTION
&OR LINES WITH ONE WEAK INFEED OR NON INFEED END
4HE DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON CAN BE SWITCH /. AND THE ECHO FUNCTION IS REASONABLE 3O THE STRONG FEED
/&& UNDER ADDRESS 4HE FUNCTIONS ACCORDING ING LINE END CAN BE RELEASED EVEN WHEN THE WEAK
TO ADDRESS BLOCK 3ECTION OPERATE INDE INFEED END DOES NOT PICK UP 4HE ECHO FUNCTION CAN
PENDENTLY "UT WHEN THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS BE SET EFFECTIVE OR NOT UNDER ADDRESS
SWITCHED OFF UNDER ADDRESS 3ECTION
THE DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS 4HE ECHO DELAY TIME 4 %#(/ $%, ADDRESS
INEFFECTIVE TOO MUST BE SET TO SUCH A LONG DURATION THAT DIFFERING
REACTION TIMES OF THE FAULT DETECTORS OF THE PROTECTIVE
4RANSMISSION SIGNAL AND TRIP WILL BE DELAYED BY THE RELAYS AT BOTH LINE ENDS CANNOT RESULT IN A FALSE ECHO
DELAY TIME TIME 4 $%,!9 ADDRESS 4HIS AL SIGNAL IN THE CASE OF EXTERNAL FAULTS
LOWS COMPENSATION FOR DIFFERENT REACTION TIMES OF THE
DEVICES AT THE TWO LINE ENDS 4HE ECHO IMPULSE DURATION 4 %#(/ )-0 ADDRESS
CAN BE ADJUSTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE RE
4HE TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME ADDRESS MUST BE QUIREMENTS OF THE NETWORK )T HAS TO BE LONG ENOUGH
LONGER THAN THE TRANSMISSION TIME IN ADDITION THE SO THAT EVEN WITH DIFFERING OPERATING TIMES OF THE PRO
DURATION OF HEAVY TRANSIENT REACTIONS AT THE INCEPTION TECTIVE DEVICES AT BOTH LINE ENDS AND OF THE TRANSMIS
AND INTERRUPTION OF SHORT CIRCUITS HAS TO BE TAKEN INTO SION DEVICES RECOGNITION OF THE RECEIVE SIGNAL IS
CONSIDERATION GUARANTEED
4HE TIME 4 7!)4 ADDRESS IS A WAITING TIME 4O AVOID FALSE ECHO SIGNALS AFTER DISCONNECTION OF THE
FOR INITIATION OF TRANSIENT BLOCKING 7HEN THE EARTH LINE A BLOCKING TIME FOR ECHO GENERATION 4 %#(/
FAULT PROTECTION HAS DETECTED A FAULT THE RECEPTION ",/ ADDRESS IS SET 4HIS SHOULD INCLUDE THE
CIRCUIT RELEASE WILL BE BLOCKED IF NO RECEPTION SIGNAL ECHO DELAY TIME 4 %#(/ $%, PLUS THE ECHO IM
HAS BEEN RECEIVED WITHIN THIS TIME THEREAFTER A RE PULSE DURATION 4 %#(/ )-0 PLUS TWICE THE TRANS
CEPTION SIGNAL CAN ONLY BE EFFECTIVE AFTER THE TRAN MISSION TIME PLUS A SAFETY MARGIN
# ' #


$ ) 2 % # # / - 0 ! 2 ) 3 / . %ARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON
% & # / - 0 ! 2 $IRECTIONAL COMPARISON FOR EARTH FAULT DEFINITE TIME

PROTECTION IS
/ .
/. SWITCHED ON
4 $ % , ! 9 $ELAY TIME FOR TRANSMISSION AND TRIP ON RECEPTION FOR

DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON
AND 0 NO TRANSMISSION NO TRIP
4RANSIENT BLOCKING TIME AFTER EXTERNAL FAULT

4 4 2 ! . 3 " , /
7AITING TIME BEFORE TRANSIENT BLOCKING WITH MISSING

4 7 ! ) 4
RECEPTION SIGNAL
0 S 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE S
OR 0 IE NO TRANSIENT BLOCKING WITH MISSING RECEPTION
% & % # ( / %CHO FUNCTION FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH

FAULT PROTECTION IS
/ .
/. SWITCHED ON
4 % # ( / $ % , %CHO DELAY TIME WHEN CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED

AND 0 NO ECHO SIGNAL WHEN CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED
4 % # ( / ) - 0 $URATION OF ECHO IMPULSE

4 % # ( / " , / %CHO BLOCKING TIME

# ' #

.ON DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION INVERSE TIME ADDRESS BLOCK
)NSTEAD OF THE ABOVE MENTIONED FUNCTIONS NON DI DANCE WITH THE FORMULAE VALID FOR THE CHARACTERISTICS
RECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION CAN BE SET ! CHOICE &IGURE 3ECTION
OF THREE CHARACTERISTICS IS GIVEN NORMAL INVERSE VERY
INVERSE AND EXTREME INVERSE )E SHALL BE SET BELOW )N SETTING THE TIME 4 )E ADDRESS ONE MUST
THE MINIMUM EXPECTED EARTH FAULT CURRENT AT OR CONSIDER THAT THE SETTING VALUE CORRESPONDS TO
LESS SINCE ACCORDING TO )%# THE PROTECTION TIMES THE TIME FACTOR OF THE TRIPPING TIME FORMULA EG
SHALL NOT OPERATE FOR CURRENTS UP TO TIMES THE
SETTING VALUE AND THE CHARACTERISTICS ARE DEFINED 4 )E S FOR NORMAL INVERSE 4- THUS
ONLY FROM TIMES THE SETTING VALUE ONWARDS )N ANY TTRIP S TRIPPING TIME AT TIMES THE SET
EVENT 3! ALREADY TRIPS FOR CURRENTS ABOVE AP VALUE )E
PROXIMATELY TIMES THE SETTING VALUE IN ACCOR

%ARTH FAULT NON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT
. / . $ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! , PROTECTION
% & ) 4 .ON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE TIME EARTH FAULT PROTECTION

IS
/ .
/. SWITCHED ON
4RIP TIME CHARACTERISTIC FOR THE NON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE

% & # ( ! 2 ! # TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ACCORDING
. / 2 - ! , ) . 6 % 2 3 % )%# OR "3
./2-!, ).6%23% TIME CHARACTERISTIC TYPE !
6 % 2 9 ) . 6 % 2 3 %
6%29 ).6%23% TIME CHARACTERISTIC TYPE "
% 8 4 2 % - % , 9 ) . 6 % 2 3 %842%-%,9 ).6%23E TIME CHARACTERISTIC TYPE #
0ICK UP VALUE FOR EARTH CURRENT DETECTION

) E
$ELAY TIME CORRESPONDS X 4-

4 ) E
AND 0 NO TRIP BY )E
4IME DURING WHICH EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS BLOCKED AFTER

4 " , / # + DISTANCE PROTECTION HAS RESET WHEN A SECOND EXTERNAL
S PROTECTION RELAY WITH !2 IS PRESENT THIS TIME MUST BE
LONGER THAN A SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSE CYCLE
# ' #

3ETTINGS FOR AUTO RECLOSURE ADDRESS BLOCK
./4% 4HIS SECTION IS VALID ONLY FOR MODELS WITH INTE 4HE RECLAIM TIME 4 2%#,!)- ADDRESS IS THE
GRATED AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION 3!J JJJJJ TIME PERIOD AFTER WHICH THE NETWORK FAULT IS SUP
JJ"#&'J /THERWISE IT CAN BE PASSED OVER !U POSED TO BE TERMINATED AFTER A SUCCESSFUL AUTO RE
TO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS EFFECTIVE ONLY IF CONFIGURED AS CLOSE CYCLE ! RENEWED TRIP OF ANY PROTECTION FUNC
%8)34 UNDER ADDRESS REFER 3ECTION TION WITHIN THIS TIME INCREMENTS THE !2 COUNTER
WHEN MULTI SHOT !2 IS USED SO THAT THE NEXT !2
7HEN NO AUTO RECLOSURE IS TO BE CARRIED OUT ON THE CYCLE STARTS IF NO FURTHER !2 IS ALLOWED THE LAST !2 IS
FEEDER WHICH IS PROTECTED BY THE DISTANCE PROTECTION TREATED AS UNSUCCESSFUL
RELAY EG CABLES TRANSFORMERS MOTORS ETC THEN
THE INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION MUST BE CONFIGURED AS
4HE LOCK OUT TIME 4 ,/#+ ADDRESS IS THE
./. %8)34 IN ADDRESS REFER TO 3ECTION
TIME PERIOD DURING WHICH AFTER AN UNSUCCESSFUL AU
4HE !2 FUNCTION IS THEN NOT EFFECTIVE AT ALL IE
TO RECLOSURE FURTHER RECLOSURES BY 3! ARE
3! DOES NOT PROCESS THE !2 FUNCTION .O CORRE
SPONDING ANNUNCIATIONS ARE GIVEN BINARY INPUTS FOR BLOCKED )F THE MANUAL CLOSE COMMAND IS LED VIA THE
AUTO RECLOSURE ARE IGNORED !LL PARAMETERS IN BLOCK 3! THEN THIS WILL BE BLOCKED ALSO 4HIS TIME
ARE IRRELEVANT AND UNAVAILABLE 4RIPPING OCCURS MUST BE LONGER THAN THE RENEWED READINESS FOR OPER
THREE POLE WITH ALL KINDS OF FAULT ATION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER UNLESS THE #" IS SUPER
VISED IN THE RELAY SEE BELOW ADDRESS )F THIS
)F THE RELAY IS REQUIRED TO OPERATE WITH AN EXTERNAL !2 TIME IS SET TO 0 BREAKER CLOSE COMMANDS ARE
DEVICE THE RELEVANT BINARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ARE TO LOCKED )N THIS CASE SWITCHING CAN BE UNLOCKED ONLY
BE USED 0ARTICULARLY THE CORRESPONDING CONTROL SIG WHEN THE BINARY INPUT !2 2ESET &.O IS
NALS MUST BE CONNECTED TO 3! EG RELEASE OF ENERGIZED
2!2 OR $!2 STAGES AND SINGLETHREE POLE TRIPPING
IF NECESSARY THE FAULT DETECTION AND TRIP SIGNAL OUT 4HE SET TIME FOR 4 ",/#+ -# ADDRESS MUST
PUTS OF 3! MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE EXTERNAL COVER THE TIME FOR SAFE CLOSING AND OPENING OF THE CIR
!2 DEVICE 4HE INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION MUST BE SET AS CUIT BREAKER S TO S )F ANY OF THE PROTECTION
./. %8)34 3ECTION ADDRESS IN THIS FUNCTIONS OF 3! DETECTS A FAULT WITHIN THIS TIME
CASE THREE POLE DEFINITIVE TRIP COMMAND IS ISSUED AND RE
CLOSURE IS BLOCKED PROVIDED -# ",/#+ ADDRESS
7ITH THE INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION GENERALLY DISTINCTION IS
SEE ABOVE IS SWITCHED /.
MADE BETWEEN THE FIRST !2 CYCLE IDENTIFIED IN THE
FOLLOWING WITH 2!2 RAPID AUTO RECLOSURE AND FUR
4HE DURATION OF THE CLOSING COMMAND HAS ALREADY
THER !2 CYCLES WITH MULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE
IDENTIFIED IN THE FOLLOWING WITH $!2 DELAYED AUTO BEEN SET WHEN SETTING THE GENERAL PARAMETERS OF THE
RECLOSURE 4HE ABOVE IDENTIFICATIONS ARE REGARDLESS DEVICE ADDRESS 3ECTION
WHETHER THE DEAD TIMES ARE REALLY RAPID OR
DELAYED 3ETTING ADDRESS TO ARE COM ! PREREQUISITE FOR INITIATION OF THE !2 FUNCTION IS THAT
MON FOR ALL TYPES OF AUTO RECLOSURE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS READY FOR AT LEAST ONE TRIP CLOSE
CYCLE WHEN ANY SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION FUNCTION
-OST OF THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OF TRIPS 4HIS INFORMATION HAS TO BE GIVEN TO THE RELAY VIA
3! HAVE SEVERAL STAGES WHICH OPERATE INDE THE BINARY INPUT #" READY &.O )N CASE
PENDENT OF EACH OTHER EG FOR THE DISTANCE PROTEC SUCH INFORMATION IS NOT AVAILABLE FROM THE #" CIRCUIT
TION STAGES TIME DELAY AND DIRECTION CAN BE SELECTED INTERROGATION OF #" READY CAN BE SUPPRESSED
FOR EACH STAGE INDIVIDUALLY AND INDEPENDENTLY BY SETTING THE PARAMETER #" 42)0 ./ IE #"
4HEREFORE RECLOSURE IS NORMALLY BLOCKED IF A PROTEC INTERROGATION ST TRIP ADDRESS OTHERWISE RE
TION TRIPS A FAULT IN REVERSE DIRECTION !CCORDINGLY AD CLOSURE WOULD NOT BE POSSIBLE
DRESS IS PRESET TO !2 ",/ 2%6 9%3
!DDITIONALLY IT IS POSSIBLE TO INTERROGATE READINESS OF
7HEN SWITCHING MANUALLY ON A DEAD FAULT IT IS NOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE EACH FURTHER RECLOSE COM
MALLY DESIRED THAT THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION TRIPS MAND OR BEFORE EVERY OTHER RECLOSE COMMAND 3ET
INSTANTANEOUSLY AND THE !2 FUNCTION IS BLOCKED
TING IS MADE IN ADDRESS
4HUS ADDRESS SHOULD REMAIN IN POSITION -#
",/#+ 9%3
# ' #

#" #,/3% #" .%6%2 INTERROGATION IS NOT )N ORDER TO MONITOR THE REGENERATION TIME OF THE CIR
MADE OR ONLY AT THE MOMENT OF THE CUIT BREAKER A SPECIAL CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION
FIRST TRIP COMMAND AS PARAMETERIZED TIME 4 #" 3506 CAN BE SET UNDER ADDRESS
UNDER ADDRESS 4HIS TIME SHOULD BE SET SLIGHTLY ABOVE THE REGENERA
TION TIME OF THE BREAKER AFTER A TRIP CLOSE CYCLE )F THE
#" #,/3% #" 7)4( %!#( !2 INTERROGATION IS CIRCUIT BREAKER IS NOT YET READY AFTER THIS TIME RECLO
MADE BEFORE EACH RECLOSE COM SURE IS SUPPRESSED
MAND
&INALLY ADDRESS DETERMINES FOR WHICH RECLOSE
CYCLES SYNCHRONISM SHALL BE CHECKED BY THE SYN
#" #,/3% #" 7)4( ND !2 INTERROGATION IS
CHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION )N THE CASES
MADE BEFORE EVERY OTHER RECLOSE WHICH ARE PARAMETERIZED IN THIS ADDRESS RECLOSURE
COMMAND IE BEFORE THE ND TH IS BLOCKED AS LONG AS THE CONDITIONS AS SET FOR THE
ETC EVERY TRIP CLOSE CYCLE IS VALID SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION 3ECTION ARE NOT FUL
REGARDLESS WHETHER IT IS 2!2 OR $!2 FILLED
! 5 4 / "EGINNING OF BLOCK
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTIONS
2 % # , / 3 % & 5 . # 4 ) / .
! 2 & 5 . # 4 !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS

/ .
/. SWITCHED ON
! 2 " , / 2 % 6 !2 WILL BE BLOCKED WHEN A FAULT IN REVERSE DIRECTION IS

TRIPPED FOR ALL SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION FUNCTIONS WHICH
9 % 3 CAN OPERATE DIRECTIONAL
. / NORMAL SETTING 9%3
- # " , / # + "LOCKING OF RECLOSING AFTER MANUAL CLOSE OF THE CIRCUIT

BREAKER
9 % 3
NORMAL SETTING 9%3
. /
2ECLAIM TIME AFTER SUCCESSFUL !2 CYCLE

4 2 % # , ! ) -
,OCK OUT TIME AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL !2 ANY CLOSE COM

4 , / # +
MAND IS BLOCKED
AND 0 LOCKED UNTIL !2 2ESET VIA BINARY INPUT
# ' #

2ECLAIM TIME AFTER MANUAL CLOSING OF CIRCUIT BREAKER

4 " , / # + - # S
#" READY INTERROGATION AT THE FIRST TRIP COMMAND

# " 4 2 ) 0
9 % 3 9%3 NORMAL SETTING
. / ./ ONLY IF THERE IS NO POSSIBILITY TO INTERROGATE #"

READINESS
# " # , / 3 % #" READY INTERROGATION BEFORE RECLOSING

# " . % 6 % 2 .%6%2 NO #" READY INTERROGATION BE
FORE RECLOSING
# " 7 ) 4 ( % ! # ( ! 2 7)4( %!#( !2 #" READY INTERROGATION BEFORE
EACH RECLOSING
# " 7 ) 4 ( N D ! 2 7)4( %!#( ND !2 #" READY INTERROGATION BEFORE
ND TH TH ETC RECLOSING
2!2 OR $!2
4 # " 3 5 0 6 #" SUPERVISION TIME WITHIN WHICH #" MUST BE READY

S
2EQUEST FOR SYNCHRONISM OR VOLTAGE CHECK INTERNAL OR

3 9 . 2 % 1 5 3 4 EXTERNAL IS MADE
" % & / 2 % 0 / , % ! 2 BEFORE EVERY RECLOSE AFTER THREE POLE TRIPPING
/ . , 9 " % & / 2 % $ ! 2 ONLY BEFORE RECLOSE DURING $!2
" % & / 2 % N D $ ! 2 ONLY BEFORE RECLOSE DURING $!2 FROM THE ND
$!2 SHOT ON
. % 6 % 2 NO REQUEST FOR SYNCHRO CHECK
&OR 2!2 FIRST AUTO RECLOSE CYCLE SEVERAL PRO LE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE WITHOUT 5 INTERROGATION )F
GRAMS ARE POSSIBLE ADDRESS THREE POLE ONLY THE IMMEDIATE RECLOSURE OF THE HEALTHY LINES
SINGLE POLE OR SINGLE AND THREE POLE SHOULD BE USED BOTH LINE ENDS CAN BE SET TO 5
02/' 0/,% 7/ 5 !DDRESS SEE BE
)F THE 5 PROCESSING FEATURE IS USED FOR IDENTIFICA LOW MUST BE OBSERVED FOR IMMEDIATE RECLOSURE OF
TION OF THE FAULTY LINE THEN ADDRESS MUST BE THE UNFAULTED LINES TOO
CHANGED ACCORDINGLY OTHERWISE IT REMAINS IN POSI
TION 5 02/' ).%&&%#4)6% 4HIS FEATURE IS EX 7HEN SETTING THE ACTION TIME 2!2 4 !#4 ADDRESS
PLAINED IN DETAIL IN SECTION )T MUST BE ENSURED IT MUST BE ENSURED THAT THIS TIME IS AT LEAST AS
THAT ONLY ONE END OF THE LINE MUST BE PARAMETERIZED LONG AS THE COMMAND TIME OF THE PROTECTIVE RELAY IN
5 02/' 0/,% 7)4( 5 IE SINGLE POLE CLUDING ANY POSSIBLE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION TIMES BUT
AUTO RECLOSURE WITH 5 INTERROGATION 4HE OTHER SMALLER THAN THE DELAY 4 OF THE SECOND DISTANCE
END IS SET 5 02/' 0/,% 7/ 5 IE SING ZONE USUALLY S
# ' #

7ITH SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE THE DEAD TIME EQUIPPED WITH THE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION A LONG
2!2 4 0/, ADDRESS MUST BE LONG ENOUGH ER TIME CAN OFTEN BE TOLERATED
TO ENSURE THAT THE FAULT ARC IS EXTINGUISHED AND THE AIR
SURROUNDING THE ARC IS DE IONIZED SO THAT AUTO RE 4HE POSSIBILITIES FOR THE TREATMENT OF MULTIPLE AND
CLOSURE CAN BE SUCCESSFUL "ECAUSE OF THE DIS EVOLVING FAULTS HAVE BEEN DESCRIBED IN DETAIL IN 3EC
CHARGE AND RE CHARGE OF THE CONDUCTOR CAPACI TION 4HE RECOGNITION OF AN EVOLVING FAULT CAN
TANCES THIS TIME INCREASES WITH THE LENGTH OF THE LINE BE MADE DEPENDENT UPON A TRIPPING COMMAND OR
#ONVENTIONAL VALUES LIE BETWEEN S AND S UPON FAULT DETECTION DURING THE DEAD TIME ADDRESS
4HE REACTION TO EVOLVING FAULTS IS SET IN AD
!DDRESS 2!2 40/, IS ONLY RELEVANT WHEN DRESS BLOCKING IN THE CASE OF AN EVOLVING FAULT
THE 5 PROCESSING FEATURE IS USED TO DISCRIMINATE THE EITHER OCCURS !,7!93 IE WITH EACH EVOLVING FAULT
UNFAULTY LINES DURING SINGLE POLE RECLOSURE )N THESE OR .%6%2 AT ALL OR BLOCKING OCCURS ONLY AFTER THE FAULT
CASES ADDRESS DETERMINES THE DEAD TIME IS DETECTED AFTER THE DISCRIMINATION TIME 4$)3#2)-
WHICH IS VALID AFTER THE LINE HAS BEEN IDENTIFIED BY THE WHICH HAS TO BE SET IN ADDRESS "LOCKING IN
5 PROCESSING FEATURE AS THE UNFAULTED LINE )T CAN THESE CASES OCCURS EVEN WHEN THREE POLE AUTO
THEREFORE BE VERY SHORT S IS SUFFICIENT 4HIS IM RECLOSURE IS PERMITTED
MEDIATE RECLOSURE IS INDEPENDENT ON WHETHER AD
DRESS HAS BEEN SET TO 5 02/# 0/,% !LSO FOR THE TREATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS AND FOR THE
7)4( 5 OR 5 02/# 0/,% 7/ 5 .EVER DISCRIMINATION TIME 4 $)3#2)- THE STABILITY OF THE
THELESS IT MUST BE OBSERVED THAT A SLIGHTLY HIGHER NETWORK IS OF THE UTMOST IMPORTANCE )N ADDITION THE
SINGLE POLE DEAD TIME ADDRESS MUST BE SET DYNAMIC BURDEN OF THE GENERATORS MUST BE TAKEN
AT THE LINE END WITH 5 INTERROGATION 5 02/# INTO ACCOUNT IN THE CASE OF FAULTS CLOSE TO A POWER
0/,% 7)4( 5 IT SHOULD BE HIGHER THAN THE STATION &OR THE DISCRIMINATION TIME 4 $)3#2)- AD
DEAD TIME OF THE LINE END WITHOUT 5 INTERROGATION DRESS IT IS ONLY MEANINGFUL TO CHOSE A VALUE
PLUS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING TIME PLUS APPROXI WHICH IS SMALLER THAN THE DEAD TIME FOR SINGLE POLE
MATELY TO MS !2 2!2 4 0/, ADDRESS
7ITH THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE ADDRESS &INALLY ADDRESS DETERMINES WHETHER THE PRO
THE STABILITY OF THE NETWORK IS THE MOST IMPORTANT CON TECTION RELAY SHOULD ISSUE A THREE POLE TRIP WHEN
SIDERATION 3INCE THE DISCONNECTED LINE CAN NO LONG DURING THE DEAD TIME OF A SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSE
ER PRODUCE ANY SYNCHRONIZING POWER ONLY A SHORT CYCLE RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED EG BECAUSE OF DETEC
DEAD TIME IS PERMITTED IN MOST CASES #ONVENTIONAL TION OF AN EVOLVING FAULT
VALUES LIE BETWEEN S AND S )F THE DEVICE IS
!UTO RECLOSE PROGRAM FOR THE FIRST !2 CYCLE 2!2

2 ! 2 0 2 / '
4(2%% 0/,% FOR EACH TYPE OF FAULT
4 ( 2 % % 0 / , % THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
3).',% 0/,% SINGLE POLE !2
3 ) . ' , % 0 / , % FOR MULTI PHASE FAULTS NO RECLOSURE
TAKES PLACE !2 BLOCKED
3 ) . ' , % 4 ( 2 % % 0 / , 3).',% FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS SINGLE POLE
4(2%% 0/,E !2 FOR MULTI PHASE FAULTS THREE
POLE !2
5SE OF THE 5 PROCESSING FOR DISCRIMINATION OF THE

5 0 2 / ' FAULTED LINE
) . % & & % # 4 ) 6 %
).%&&%#4)6% 5 PROCESSING IS INEFFECTIVE
0 / , % 7 ) 4 ( 5 0/,% 7)4( 5 5 PROCESSING WITH 5 INTERROGA
TION
0 / , % 7 / 5 0/,% 7/ 5 5 PROCESSING WITHOUT 5 INTERRO
GATION
# ' #

!CTION TIME FOR 2!2 FIRST !2 SHOT IF TRIP SIGNAL

2 ! 2 4 ! # 4
IS GIVEN AFTER THIS TIME !2 IS BLOCKED
AND 0
2 ! 2 4 0 / , $EAD TIME FOR FIRST THREE POLE 2!2 CYCLE

2 ! 2 4 0 / , $EAD TIME FOR FIRST !2 CYCLE 2!2 SINGLE POLE

2 ! 2 4 0 / , $EAD TIME FOR FIRST !2 CYCLE 2!2 SINGLE POLE WHEN

THE LINE HAS BEEN IDENTIFIED AS UNFAULTED BY THE 5 PRO
S CESSING FEATURE
2ECOGNITION OF EVOLVING FAULTS ONLY WITH SINGLE POLE

% 6 & 2 % # / ' !2
7 ) 4 ( & ! 5 , 4 $ % 4 % # 7)4( &!5,4 $%4%#TION EACH FAULT DETECTION DURING
SINGLE POLE DEAD TIME IS
RECOGNIZED AS AN EVOLVING
FAULT
7 ) 4 ( 4 2 ) 0 # / - - 7)4( 42)0 #/--AND FAULTS DURING SINGLE POLE
DEAD TIME ARE RECOGNIZED
AS EVOLVING FAULTS ONLY WHEN
THE RELAY TRIPS
4REATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS ONLY WITH POLE !2

% 6 & " , / # + EACH EVOLVING FAULT RESULTS IN FINAL THREE POLE TRIP
! , 7 ! 9 3 RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED
NO BLOCKING OF RECLOSURE IN THE CASE OF EVOLVING
. % 6 % 2 FAULTS A CHANGE FROM SINGLE POLE !2 TO THREE
POLE !2 OCCURS WHEN PERMITTED
BEFORE EXPIRY OF 4 $)3#2)- A CHANGE TO THREE
4 $ ) 3 # 2
POLE !2 WHEN PERMITTED OCCURS
AFTER EXPIRY OF 4 $)3#2)- RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED
$ISCRIMINATION TIME FOR EVOLVING FAULTS ONLY WITH SING

4 $ ) 3 # 2 ) -
LE POLE !2
4HREE POLE TRIP IS GIVEN WHEN THE !2 FUNCTION IS

! 2 4 2 ) 0 0
BLOCKED DURING A SINGLE POLE DEAD TIME CYCLE
9 % 3
9%3 OR
. / ./
# ' #

&OR $!2 FURTHER AUTO RECLOSE CYCLES SEVERAL PRO 4HE NUMBER OF $!2S CAN BE SET DIFFERENTLY AFTER SING
GRAMS ARE POSSIBLE ADDRESS $!2 CAN BE EX LE POLE 2!2 ADDRESS AND AFTER THREE POLE
CLUDED $!2 02/' ./ $!2 $!2 CAN BE PER 2!2 ADDRESS .EVERTHELESS TRIP OCCURS AL
MITTED ALSO IF NO 2!2 HAS BEEN PRECEDED $!2 WAYS THREE POLE
02/' $!2 7)4(/54 2!2 $!2 CAN BE PER
MITTED ONLY AFTER AN UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2 $!2 02/' &OR $!2 A SEPARATE ACTION TIME $!2 4 !#4 CAN BE
$!2 !&4%2 2!2 $!2 IS ALWAYS THREE POLE SET ADDRESS
-ULTIPLE AUTO RECLOSURE WITH LONGER THREE POLE $IFFERENT DEAD TIMES CAN BE SET FOR THE FIRST SECOND
DEAD TIMES ARE ONLY PERMITTED IN NETWORKS IN WHICH AND THIRD TRIP CLOSE CYCLE 4HE DEAD TIME FOR THE FIRST
NO STABILITY PROBLEMS ARE TO BE EXPECTED FOR EXAM CYCLE ADDRESS IS ONLY VALID IF THE $!2 CYCLE IS
PLE DUE TO A HIGH DEGREE OF MESHING OR IN RADIAL REALLY THE FIRST CYCLE IE 2!2 IS SUPPRESSED &OR THE
NETWORKS OR IF SYNCHRO CHECK IS USED REFER TO 3EC SECOND ADDRESS AND THIRD ADDRESS
TION CYCLE A 2!2 COUNTS ONLY IF IT HAS OCCURRED &URTHER
CYCLES ARE TREATED LIKE THE THIRD CYCLE
!UTO RECLOSE PROGRAM FOR $!2 CYCLES

$ ! 2 0 2 / '
. / $ ! 2 ./ $!2 NO DELAYED !2
$!2 7)4(/54 2!2 $!2 WILL BE CARRIED OUT ALSO

$ ! 2 7 ) 4 ( / 5 4 2 ! 2 WHEN NO 2!2 HAS PRECEDED
$ ! 2 ! & 4 % 2 2 ! 2 $!2 !&4%2 2!2 $!2 WILL BE CARRIED OUT ONLY

AFTER AN UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2
CYCLE
.UMBER OF PERMISSIBLE $!2 CYCLES AFTER SINGLE POLE

$ ! 2 . O 0 (
2!2 THE 2!2 IS NOT INCLUDED IN THIS NUMBER
.UMBER OF PERMISSIBLE $!2 CYCLES AFTER THREE POLE

$ ! 2 . O 0 (
2!2 THE 2!2 IS NOT INCLUDED IN THIS NUMBER
!CTION TIME FOR $!2 FURTHER !2 SHOTS IF TRIP SIGNAL

$ ! 2 4 ! # 4
IS GIVEN AFTER THIS TIME !2 IS BLOCKED
AND 0
$EAD TIME FOR THE FIRST !2 CYCLE IF IT IS A $!2 CYCLE

$ ! 2 4 0 / ,
$EAD TIME FOR THE SECOND !2 CYCLE

$ ! 2 4 0 / ,
$EAD TIME FOR FURTHER !2 CYCLES

$ ! 2 4 0 / ,
# ' #

3ETTINGS FOR SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK ADDRESS BLOCK
./4% 4HIS SECTION IS VALID ONLY FOR MODELS WITH INTE 4HE GENERAL FUNCTIONS AND LIMIT VALUES FOR CLOSURE ARE
GRATED SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION 3!J SET UNDER ADDRESSES TO AND !DDI
JJJJJ JJ"#%&'J AND WHEN THIS FUNCTION IS TIONALLY ADDRESSES TO ARE RELEVANT FOR AU
CONFIGURED AS %8)34 UNDER ADDRESS REFER TO TOMATIC RECLOSURE ADDRESSES TO ARE RELE
3ECTION VANT FOR MANUAL CLOSURE 'ENERALLY A CLOSURE COM
MAND IS NOT RELEASED AS LONG AS A CURRENT KEEPS
7HEN SETTING THE GENERAL POWER SYSTEM DATA 3EC FLOWING ) ).
TION THE RELAY HAS BEEN INFORMED WHICH VOLT
AGES ARE CONNECTED TO THE RELAY TO WHICH INPUTS 4HIS 4HE COMPLETE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNC
CONCERNS THE PARAMETERS
TION IS SWITCHED /&& OR /. UNDER ADDRESS
5. 3%#/.$ RATED SECONDARY VOLTAGE OF
THE FEEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORM
ERS PHASE TO PHASE IN 6 IT 7ARNING
MUST BE EQUAL TO THE RATED
)F SYNCHRONISM CHECK FUNCTION IS SWITCHED
SECONDARY VOLTAGE OF THE OFF ADDRESS EACH MANUAL OR AUTOMAT
BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORM IC CLOSURE IS CARRIED OUT WITHOUT SYNCHRO
ERS NISM CHECK
5X #/..%#4 CONNECTION OF THE ADDITIONAL

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUT OF 4HE VOLTAGE BELOW WHICH THE LINE OR BUS BAR IS RE
THE DEVICE MUST BE 5 GARDED SAFELY AS DEAD IS SET UNDER ADDRESS
42!.3&/2- 5 FOR DEAD LINE OR DEAD BUS CHECK
5 #/..%#4 TYPE OF VOLTAGE WHICH IS CON 4HE VOLTAGE ABOVE WHICH THE LINE OR BUS BAR IS RE
NECTED TO THE DEVICE FROM THE GARDED SAFELY AS LIVE IS SET UNDER ADDRESS 5
BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORM FOR LIVE LINE OR LIVE BUS CHECK )T MUST BE SET BELOW
ERS THE MINIMUM OPERATING VOLTAGE UNDER NORMAL CONDI
TIONS
5 5 !.', PHASE ANGLE DISPLACEMENT
BETWEEN THE VOLTAGES OF THE 4HE PERMISSIBLE MAGNITUDE DIFFERENCE 5 BETWEEN
BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORM
THE VOLTAGES IS SET UNDER ADDRESS $%,4! 5
ERS AND THE FEEDER VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERS
$EPENDING ON THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE CONNECTION 5
AND IF ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING SHALL BE ALLOWED #/..%#4 ADDRESS THE LINE TO LINE VOLTAGE
OR THE LINE TO EARTH VOLTAGE IS TO BE SET
4 #" #,/3% THE CLOSING TIME OF THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER 4HE PERMISSIBLE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE F BETWEEN
THE VOLTAGES IS SET UNDER ADDRESS $%,4! F
$IFFERENT INTERROGATION CONDITIONS CAN BE PARAMETER
IZED FOR AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE ON ONE HAND AND FOR 4HE PERMISSIBLE PHASE ANGLE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
MANUAL CLOSURE ON THE OTHER HAND THE VOLTAGES IS SET UNDER ADDRESS $%,4! 0()
# ( % # + "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE

3 9 . # ( 2 / . ) 3 - CHECK
# ' #

3YNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION COMPLETE IS

3 9 . # # ( % # +
/ . /. SWITCHED ON
/ & & /FF SWITCHED OFF
6OLTAGE MAGNITUDE BELOW WHICH THE LINE OR BUS BAR

5 CAN BE REGARDED AS DEAD PHASE PHASE OR PHASE
6 EARTH IN 6
6OLTAGE MAGNITUDE ABOVE WHICH THE LINE OR BUS BAR

5 CAN BE REGARDED AS LIVE PHASE PHASE OR PHASE
6 EARTH IN 6
,IMIT VALUE 5 FOR THE PERMISSIBLE VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE IN

$ % , 4 ! 5 MAGNITUDE PHASE PHASE OR PHASE EARTH IN 6
,IMIT VALUE F FOR THE PERMISSIBLE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE

$ % , 4 ! F IN (Z
( Z 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE (Z
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE (Z
,IMIT VALUE FOR THE PERMISSIBLE PHASE ANGLE DIFFER

$ % , 4 ! 0 ( ) ENCE IN ^
^ 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE ^
4HE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION IN 3! CAN ALSO NETWORKS ARE REGARDED AS SYNCHRONOUS !BOVE THIS
GIVE CLOSING COMMANDS IN ASYNCHRONOUS NETWORKS FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE ASYNCHRONOUS CLOSING IS CAR
)N THIS CASE CLOSING COMMAND IS GIVEN SUCH THAT RIED OUT UNDER CONSIDERATION OF THE PHASE ANGLE DIF
UNDER CONSIDERATION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING FERENCE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE AND THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
TIME ADDRESS THE VOLTAGE PHASORS OF THE CLOSING TIME "ELOW THIS FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE THE
LINE AND BUS BAR VOLTAGES AGREE IN PHASE AT THE IN SYNCHRO CHECK CONDITIONS AS SET UNDER ADDRESSES
STANT WHEN THERE IS CONTACT OF THE BREAKER POLES AND ARE ONLY RELEVANT 4HE SETTING
VALUE OF ADDRESS MUST LIE BELOW THAT OF ADDRESS
!DDRESS $%,F39.# DEFINES THE LIMIT WITHIN )F SET TO 0 ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING IS SUP
WHICH THE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE MUST LIE WHEN THE PRESSED FOR AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE
,IMIT VALUE F FOR SYNCHRONOUS AUTO RECLOSURE

$ % , F 3 9 . # (Z
0 ( Z ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE (Z
AND 0 NO ASYNCHRONOUS AUTO RECLOSURE
# ' #

4HE FURTHER RELEASE CONDITIONS FOR AUTOMATIC RECLOS ADDRESS THE BUS BAR
ING ARE SET UNDER ADDRESSES TO 5 MUST BE LIVE 5 REFER
ADDRESS
39.#(2 SYNCHRONISM CHECK THE CON
DITIONS FOR SYNCHRONISM 5 55 DEAD LINE AND DEAD BUS
F AND ARE CHECKED BE CHECK THE FEEDER 5 AND THE
FORE RECLOSURE BUS BAR 5 MUST BOTH BE
DEAD 5 REFER ADDRESS
55 DEAD BUS CHECK THE FEEDER
5 MUST BE LIVE 5 REFER
ADDRESS THE BUS BAR /6%22)$% AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE IS RE
5 MUST BE DEAD 5 REFER LEASED WITHOUT ANY CHECK
ADDRESS
4HE FIVE POSSIBLE RELEASE CONDITIONS ARE INDEPEN
55 DEAD LINE CHECK THE FEEDER DENT FROM EACH OTHER AND CAN BE COMBINED
5 MUST BE DEAD 5 REFER
3YNCHRONISM CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE

3 9 . # ( 2
9 % 3 9%3
. / ./
$EAD BUS CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE

5 5
. / ./
9%3
9 % 3
$EAD LINE CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE

5 5
. / ./
9%3
9 % 3
$EAD LINE AND DEAD BUS CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RE

5 5 CLOSURE
. / ./
9 % 3 9%3
/VERRIDE OF ANY CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE

/ 6 % 2 2 ) $ %
. / ./
9 % 3 9%3
# ' #

4HE FURTHER RELEASE CONDITIONS FOR MANUAL CLOSING F AND ARE CHECKED BE
ARE SET UNDER ADDRESSES TO 4HE SYNCHRO FORE MANUAL CLOSURE
NISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION FOR MANUAL CLOSING
CAN BE INDIVIDUALLY SWITCHED OFF OR ON UNDER ADDRESS -# 55 DEAD BUS CHECK THE FEEDER
7HEN 39.-!.#, IS SWITCHED /&& NO 5 MUST BE LIVE 5 REFER
CHECKS ARE CARRIED OUT FOR MANUAL CLOSING ADDRESS THE BUS BAR
5 MUST BE DEAD 5 REFER
! SEPARATE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE LIMIT CAN BE SET FOR ADDRESS
ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING AFTER MANUAL CLOSE COM
MAND !DDRESS -# $F39.# DEFINES THE LIMIT -# 55 DEAD LINE CHECK THE FEEDER
WITHIN WHICH THE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE MUST LIE WHEN 5 MUST BE DEAD 5 REFER
THE NETWORKS ARE REGARDED AS SYNCHRONOUS !BOVE ADDRESS THE BUS BAR
THIS FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE ASYNCHRONOUS CLOSING IS
5 MUST BE LIVE 5 REFER
CARRIED OUT UNDER CONSIDERATION OF THE PHASE ANGLE
ADDRESS
DIFFERENCE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE AND THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER CLOSING TIME "ELOW THIS FREQUENCY DIFFER
-# 55 DEAD LINE AND DEAD BUS
ENCE THE SYNCHRO CHECK CONDITIONS AS SET UNDER
ADDRESSES AND ARE ONLY RELEVANT CHECK THE FEEDER 5 AND THE
4HE SETTING VALUE OF ADDRESS MUST LIE BELOW BUS BAR 5 MUST BOTH BE
THAT OF ADDRESS )F SET TO 0 ASYNCHRONOUS DEAD 5 REFER ADDRESS
SWITCHING IS SUPPRESSED FOR MANUAL CLOSURE
4HE FURTHER RELEASE CONDITIONS FOR MANUAL CLOSING -# /2)$% MANUAL CLOSING IS RELEASED
ARE SET UNDER ADDRESSES TO WITHOUT ANY CHECK
-# 39.#(2 SYNCHRONISM CHECK THE CON 4HE FIVE POSSIBLE RELEASE CONDITIONS ARE INDEPEN
DITIONS FOR SYNCHRONISM 5 DENT FROM EACH OTHER AND CAN BE FREELY COMBINED
3YNCHRO CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSE COMMAND IS

3 9 . - ! . # ,
/. SWITCHED ON
/ .
/&& SWITCHED OFF
/ & &
,IMIT VALUE F FOR SYNCHRONOUS MANUAL CLOSURE

- # $ F 3 9 . # 3MALLEST SETTING VALUE (Z
0 ( Z ,ARGEST SETTING VALUE (Z
AND 0 NO ASYNCHRONOUS MANUAL SWITCHING
3YNCHRONISM CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSURE

- # 3 9 . # ( 2
9 % 3 9%3
. / ./
$EAD BUS CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSURE

- # 5 5
. / ./
9 % 3 9%3
# ' #

$EAD LINE CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSURE

- # 5 5
. / ./
9 % 3 9%3
$EAD LINE AND DEAD BUS CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLO

- # 5 5 SURE
. / ./
9 % 3 9%3
/VERRIDE OF ANY CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSURE

- # / 2 ) $ %
. / ./
9 % 3 9%3
&INALLY ADDRESS DETERMINES THE TIME PERIOD SURING REQUEST THE TIME STARTS AGAIN AND A NEW
BEGINNING FROM THE MEASURING REQUEST IE FROM CHECK IS CARRIED OUT
CLOSE COMMAND WITHIN WHICH THE CHECK CONDITIONS
AS PARAMETERIZED MUST BE FULFILLED 4HIS TIME IS VALID )F THE CONDITIONS FOR SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION SHOULD
FOR AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE AS WELL AS FOR MANUAL CLO BE CHECKED TO BE MAINTAINED FOR A CERTAIN DURATION
SURE 7HEN THE CONDITIONS ARE NOT FULFILLED WITHIN THIS THIS MINIMUM DURATION CAN BE SET UNDER ADDRESS
TIME CLOSING IS BLOCKED /NLY AFTER A RENEWED MEA
3UPERVISION TIME PERIOD WITHIN WHICH THE CHECK CONDI

4 3 9 . 3 5 0 6 TIONS MUST BE FULFILLED
-INIMUM TIME DURING WHICH THE SYNCHRONOUS CONDI

4 ) . 3 9 . # TIONS MUST BE FULFILLED
# ' #

3ETTINGS FOR FAULT LOCATION ADDRESS BLOCK
$ISTANCE TO FAULT WILL BE CALCULATED AS LONG AS &!5,4 8 PRIM ¬KM

,/#!4 %8)34 HAS BEEN SET IN ADDRESS DUR . )
ING CONFIGURATION SEE 3ECTION 8 SEC #T 8 PRIM .
. VT !
!
.ORMALLY FAULT LOCATION CALCULATION IS INITIATED AT THE ¬KM
!
INSTANT WHEN A TRIPPING COMMAND IS ISSUED )T CAN
HOWEVER ALSO BE STARTED ON FAULT DETECTION DROP OFF ¬KM
ADDRESS IF FOR EXAMPLE ANOTHER PROTECTION ,ENGTH KM
DEVICE CLEARS THE FAULT !DDITIONALLY FAULT LOCATION
CAN BE INITIATED BY AN EXTERNAL COMMAND VIA A BINARY )F FOR EXAMPLE A FAULT REACTANCE OF ¬ PRIMARY IS
INPUT &.O REFER 3ECTION PROVIDED THE CALCULATED THIS EXAMPLE GIVES US THE FAULT LOCATION
PROTECTION HAS PICKED UP DATA
4O CALCULATE THE DISTANCE IN KILOMETERS THE DEVICE RE 8PRI ¬

QUIRES THE REACTANCE VALUE IN ¬KM AS A SECONDARY D KM
VALUE RELATED TO ! #ONVERSION FROM PRIMARY TO SEC D
ONDARY VALUE IS MADE BY USING THE SAME FORMULA AS
FOR THE DISTANCE SETTING 3ECTION )F ONE PUTS )F THE RELAY IS EQUIPPED WITH PARALLEL LINE COMPENSA
IN THE REACTANCE VALUE OF THE LINE IN ¬KM FOR 8PRIM TION 3!J JJJJJ JJJ SEE /RDERING DATA
3ECTION THIS CAN ONLY FUNCTION CORRECTLY IF
ONE OBTAINS THE REQUIRED SETTING VALUE 8 3%# AD
DRESS THE EARTH CURRENT OF THE PARALLEL LINE IS CONNECTED
WITH THE CORRECT POLARITY TO THE EARTH CURRENT PATH
&OR CORRECT OUTPUT OF THE DISTANCE TO FAULT IN OF LINE AND
LENGTH THE TOTAL LINE LENGTH IN KM MUST ALSO BE INPUT IN THE POWER SYSTEM DATA SEE 3ECTION THE
ADDRESS )F THE REACTANCE 8 3%# IS ENTERED IN PARAMETER )E #4 IS SET AS 0!2!,,%, ,).% AD
¬MILE AND THE ,).% ,%.'4( ENTERED IN MILES THE DRESS AND
RESULT OF FAULT CALCULATION WOULD BE READ IN MILES IN IN THE LINE DATA SEE 3ECTION THE COUPLING
STEAD OF KILOMETERS IMPEDANCES 2-2, AND 8-8, ADDRESSES
AND ARE CORRECTLY SET AND
%XAMPLE FOR THE FAULT LOCATION THE COMPENSATION IS SWITCHED
&OR THE EXAMPLE GIVEN IN SECTION WE OBTAIN TO EFFECTIVE UNDER ADDRESS

"EGINNING OF BLOCK &AULT LOCATION
& ! 5 , 4 , / # ! 4 ) / .
3TART TO MEASURE OF FAULT LOCATION IS INITIATED

3 4 ! 2 4
$ 2 / 0 / & & O R 4 2 ) 0 BY $2/0 /&& OF THE FAULT DETECTOR OR BY 42)0
COMMAND
4 2 ) 0 # / - - ! . $ ONLY BY 42)0 #/--!.$
0 ! 2 ! , , ) . % 4HIS PARAMETER DETERMINES WHETHER PARALLEL LINE

. / COMPENSATION IS EFFECTIVE PROVIDED ABOVE
PREREQUITES ARE FULFILLED OR NOT
9 % 3
# ' #

!NNUNCIATIONS
)NTRODUCTION
!FTER A NETWORK FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS AND MESSAGES 4HE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE ARRANGED AS FOLLOWS
PROVIDE A SURVEY OF IMPORTANT FAULT DATA AND THE FUNC
TION OF THE RELAY AND SERVE FOR CHECKING SEQUENCES "LOCK /PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS THESE ARE
OF FUNCTIONAL STEPS DURING TESTING AND COMMISSION MESSAGES WHICH CAN APPEAR DURING THE
ING &URTHER THEY PROVIDE INFORMATION ABOUT THE CON OPERATION OF THE RELAY INFORMATION ABOUT
DITION OF MEASURED DATA AND THE RELAY ITSELF DURING CONDITION OF RELAY FUNCTIONS MEASURE
NORMAL OPERATION MENT DATA ETC
4O READ OUT RECORDED ANNUNCIATIONS NO CODEWORD "LOCK %VENT ANNUNCIATIONS FOR THE LAST FAULT
INPUT IS NECESSARY PICK UP TRIP !2 EXPIRED TIMES CALCU
LATED DISTANCE OR SIMILAR !S DEFINED A
4HE ANNUNCIATIONS GENERATED IN THE RELAY ARE PRES NETWORK FAULT BEGINS WITH PICK UP OF ANY
ENTED IN VARIOUS WAYS FAULT DETECTOR )F AUTO RECLOSE IS CARRIED
OUT THE NETWORK FAULT ENDS AFTER EXPIRY OF
,%$ INDICATIONS IN THE FRONT PLATES OF THE RELAY &IG THE LAST RECLAIM TIME THUS AN !2 SHOT OR
URE ALL SHOTS OCCUPY ONLY ONE FAULT DATA STORE
7ITHIN A NETWORK FAULT SEVERAL FAULT EVENTS
"INARY OUTPUTS OUTPUT RELAYS VIA THE CONNECTIONS
CAN OCCUR FROM PICK UP OF ANY FAULT DE
OF THE RELAY
TECTION UNTIL DROP OFF
)NDICATIONS IN THE DISPLAY ON THE FRONT PLATE OR ON
THE SCREEN OF A PERSONAL COMPUTER VIA THE OPERAT "LOCK %VENT ANNUNCIATIONS FOR THE PREVIOUS NET
ING INTERFACE WORK FAULT AS BLOCK
4RANSMISSION VIA THE SYSTEM INTERFACE TO LOCAL OR "LOCK %VENT ANNUNCIATIONS FOR THE LAST BUT TWO
REMOTE CONTROL FACILITIES IF AVAILABLE NETWORK FAULT AS BLOCK
-OST OF THESE ANNUNCIATIONS CAN BE RELATIVELY FREELY "LOCK !NNUNCIATIONS OF AN EARTH FAULT REPORT
ALLOCATED TO THE ,%$S AND BINARY OUTPUTS SEE 3EC MODELS WITH EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON
TION !LSO WITHIN SPECIFIC LIMITATIONS GROUP AND EARTHED SYSTEMS ONLY
MULTIPLE INDICATIONS CAN BE FORMED
"LOCK !NNUNCIATIONS FOR #" OPERATION STATISTICS
4O CALL UP ANNUNCIATIONS ON THE OPERATOR PANEL THE THAT IS COUNTERS FOR FIRST !2 2!2 SECOND
FOLLOWING POSSIBILITIES EXIST OR FURTHER !2 $!2 AND TRIPPING COM
MANDS TOGETHER WITH ACCUMULATED
"LOCK PAGING WITH THE KEYS Å FORWARDS OR Ç BACK SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENTS OF EACH BREAKER
WARDS UP TO ADDRESS POLE
$IRECT SELECTION WITH ADDRESS CODE USING KEY $!
ADDRESS AND EXECUTE WITH KEY % "LOCK )NDICATION OF OPERATIONAL MEASURED VAL
UES CURRENTS VOLTAGES POWERS FREQUEN
0RESS KEY -3 - STANDS FOR MESSAGES 3 FOR CY
SIGNALS THEN THE ADDRESS APPEARS AUTO
MATICALLY AS THE BEGINNING OF THE ANNUNCIATION "LOCK )NDICATION OF EARTH FAULT VALUES MODELS
BLOCKS WITH EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED
SYSTEMS ONLY
&OR CONFIGURATION OF THE TRANSFER OF ANNUNCIATIONS VIA
THE SERIAL INTERFACES THE NECESSARY DATA ARE ENTERED "LOCK )NDICATION OF MEASURED VALUES OF THE THER
IN ADDRESS BLOCK SEE 3ECTION MAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
#OMMENCEMENT OF ANNUNCIATION BLOCKS

! . . 5 . # ) ! 4 ) / . 3
! COMPREHENSIVE LIST OF THE POSSIBLE ANNUNCIATIONS AND OUTPUT FUNCTIONS WITH THE ASSOCIATED FUNCTION NUMBER
&.O IS GIVEN IN !PPENDIX # )T IS ALSO INDICATED TO WHICH DEVICE EACH ANNUNCIATION CAN BE ROUTED
# ' #

/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS ADDRESS BLOCK
/PERATIONAL AND STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS CONTAIN INFOR !FTER SELECTION OF THE ADDRESS BY DIRECT SELEC
MATION WHICH THE UNIT PROVIDES DURING OPERATION AND TION WITH $! % ANDOR PAGING WITH Å OR Ç
ABOUT THE OPERATION 4HEY BEGIN AT ADDRESS AND FURTHER SCROLLING ! OR " THE OPERATIONAL ANNUNCI
)MPORTANT EVENTS AND STATUS CHANGES ARE CHRONO ATIONS APPEAR 4HE BOXES BELOW SHOW ALL AVAILABLE
LOGICALLY LISTED STARTING WITH THE MOST RECENT MES OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS )N EACH SPECIFIC CASE OF
SAGE 4IME INFORMATION IS SHOWN IN HOURS AND MIN COURSE ONLY THE ASSOCIATED ANNUNCIATIONS APPEAR IN
UTES 5P TO OPERATIONAL INDICATIONS CAN BE STORED THE DISPLAY 4HE ANNUNCIATIONS WHICH ARE INDICATED
)F MORE OCCUR THE OLDEST ARE ERASED IN SEQUENCE
BY A LEADING SIGN REPRESENT THE DIRECT CONFIRMA
TION OF THE BINARY INPUTS
&AULTS IN THE NETWORK ARE ONLY INDICATED AS 3YST
&LT TOGETHER WITH THE SEQUENCE NUMBER OF THE
FAULT $ETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT THE HISTORY OF THE .EXT TO THE BOXES BELOW THE ABBREVIATED FORMS ARE
FAULT IS CONTAINED IN BLOCKS &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS RE EXPLAINED )T IS INDICATED WHETHER AN EVENT IS AN
FER TO 3ECTION NOUNCED ON OCCURRENCE # #OMING OR A STATUS
IS ANNOUNCED #OMING AND 'OING #'
)F THE DEVICE IS EQUIPPED WITH EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR 4HE FIRST LISTED MESSAGE IS AS EXAMPLE ASSIGNED
NON EARTHED SYSTEMS AN EARTH FAULT IS INDICATED WITH DATE AND TIME IN THE FIRST LINE THE SECOND LINE
WITH %& $ET DETAILED INFORMATION CAN BE FOUND SHOWS THE BEGINNING OF A CONDITION WITH THE CHARAC
IN THE EARTH FAULT REPORT REFER 3ECTION TER # TO INDICATE THAT THIS CONDITION OCCURRED AT THE
DISPLAYED TIME
4HE INPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED
/ 0 % 2 ! 4 ) / . ! "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK /PERATIONAL ANNUNCI

ATIONS
, ! . . 5 . # ) ! 4 ) / . 3
ST LINE $ATE AND TIME OF THE EVENT OR STATUS

CHANGE
% M E R - O D E #
ND LINE !NNUNCIATION TEXT IN THE EXAMPLE #OMING
)F THE REAL TIME CLOCK IS NOT AVAILABLE THE DATE IS REPLACED BY JJJJJJ THE TIME IS GIVEN AS RELATIVE TIME
FROM THE LAST RE START OF THE PROCESSOR SYSTEM
$IRECT RESPONSE FROM BINARY INPUTS
3 T A R T & L T 2 E C &AULT RECORDING STARTED VIA BINARY INPUT #
! N N U N C 5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION .O RECEIVED VIA BINARY

INPUT #'
INPUT #'
INPUT #'
INPUT #'
# L O S E # M D " L O "LOCK ALL CLOSING COMMANDS #'
# ' #

6 4 M C B 4 R I P 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB FEEDER VT

TRIPPED #'
6 M C B 4 R I P 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB BUS BAR VT

TRIPPED #'
P 4 R I P 0 E R M 3INGLE POLE TRIPPING IS PERMITTED FROM EXTERNAL !2
DEVICE #'
/ N L Y P O L E %XTERNAL !2 DEVICE IS PROGRAMMED FOR SINGLE POLE
RECLOSURE ONLY #'
2 ! 2 2 E L E A S E 2ELEASE 2!2 STAGES FROM EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE #'
$ ! 2 2 E L E A S E 2ELEASE $!2 STAGE FROM EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE #'
3 T A R T & L T , O C 3TART FAULT LOCATOR VIA BINARY INPUT #'
% & 2 E C E P T #ARRIER SIGNAL FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT

PROTECTION RECEIVED #
% & 2 E C & A I L #ARRIER RECEPTION FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT

PROTECTION FAULTY #'
) B L O C K "LOCK ) STAGE OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
FROM AN EXTERNAL DEVICE #'
! 2 B L O C K "LOCK AUTO RECLOSURE STATICALLY VIA BINARY INPUT #'
! 2 R E S E T 2ESET AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION FROM EXTERNAL VIA

BINARY INPUT #
P 2 ! 2 B L O C K "LOCK SINGLE POLE 2!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
P 2 ! 2 B L O C K "LOCK THREE POLE 2!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
2 ! 2 B L O C K "LOCK COMPLETE 2!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
$ ! 2 B L O C K "LOCK COMPLETE $!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
3 T A R T ! 2 3TARTING SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL !2

#
4 R I P , ! 2 4RIP SIGNAL POLE , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL

!2 #

!2 #

!2 #
4 R I P P ! 2 3INGLE POLE TRIP SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR

INTERNAL !2 #
4 R I P P ! 2 4HREE POLE TRIP SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR

INTERNAL !2 #
$ ! 2 A F T 2 ! 2 $!2 PERMITTED ONLY AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2 #'
% X T E N S : " 3WITCH DISTANCE REACH TO EXTENDED ZONE :" FROM EX

TERNAL SIGNAL #'
% X T E N S : , 3WITCH DISTANCE REACH TO EXTENDED ZONE :, FROM EX
TERNAL SIGNAL #'
# ' #

$ I S 2 E C E P T #ARRIER SIGNAL FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTEC

TION RECEIVED #
$ I S 2 E C & A I L #ARRIER RECEPTION FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PRO
TECTION FAULTY #'
% X T 4 R I P B L K "LOCK EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION #'
% X T 4 R I P , 4RIGGER EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION FOR POLE , #
% X T 4 R P W O ! 2 4RIGGER EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION THREE POLE WITHOUT

RECLOSURE #'
5 S E R 4 3 T A R T 3TART USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 #'
5 S E R 4 2 E S E T 2ESET USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 #
'ENERAL OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE PROTECTION DEVICE
$ E V O P E R A T I V E $EVICE OPERATIVE #'
0 R O T O P E R A T !T LEAST ONE PROTECTION FUNCTION IS OPERATIVE #'
) N I T I A L S T A R T )NITIAL START OF THE PROCESSOR SYSTEM #
, % $ R E S E T 3TORED ,%$ INDICATIONS RESET #
, O G - E A S " L O C K -ESSAGES AND MEASURED VALUES VIA THE SYSTEM INTER

FACE ARE BLOCKED #'
4 E S T M O D E -ESSAGES AND MEASURED VALUE VIA THE SYSTEM INTER
FACE ARE MARKED WITH 4EST OPERATION #'
0 A R A M R U N N I N G 0ARAMETERS ARE BEING SET #'
0 A R A M 3 E T ! 0ARAMETER SET ! IS ACTIVE #'
0 A R A M 3 E T " 0ARAMETER SET " IS ACTIVE #'
0 A R A M 3 E T # 0ARAMETER SET # IS ACTIVE #'
0 A R A M 3 E T $ 0ARAMETER SET $ IS ACTIVE #'
3 Y S T & L T .ETWORK SYSTEM FAULT #' DETAILED INFORMATION IN

THE FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS
# ' #

% & $ E T %ARTH FAULT DETECTED IN NON EARTHED SYSTEM #'

DETAILED INFORMATION IN THE EARTH FAULT REPORT
- A N U A L # L O S E -ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND REGISTERED IMPULSE #
# " I N 4 E S T #IRCUIT BREAKER TEST IS IN PROGRESS #'
& L T 2 E C $ A T $ E L &AULT RECORDING DATA DELETED #
& L T 2 E C V I A " ) &AULT RECORDING TRIGGERED VIA BINARY INPUT #
& L T 2 E C V I A + " &AULT RECORDING TRIGGERED VIA THE FRONT KEYBOARD #
& L T 2 E C V I A 0 # &AULT RECORDING TRIGGERED VIA OPERATING 0# INTERFACE

#
!NNUNCIATIONS OF MONITORING FUNCTIONS
7 R O N G 3 7 V E R S 3OFTWARE VERSION OF THE DEVICE IS WRONG #
7 R O N G D E V ) $ $EVICE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER IS WRONG #
! N N U N C L O S T !NNUNCIATIONS LOST BUFFER OVERFLOW #
! N N U 0 # L O S T !NNUNCIATIONS FOR OPERATING 0# INTERFACE LOST #
/ P E R ! N N ) N V A /PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS INVALID #'
& L T ! N N ) N V A L &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS INVALID #'
% & 0 R O T ) N V A %ARTH FAULT REPORT FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS INVALID

#'
3 T A T " U F F ) N V "UFFER FOR OPERATION STATISTICS INVALID #'
, % $ " U F F ) N V A "UFFER FOR STORED ,%$S INVALID #'
6 $ % 7 3 T A T E ) N V 6$%7 STATE )%# INVALID #'
# H S % R R O R #HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED #'
# H S ! % R R O R #HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED FOR PARAMETER SET !

NO OPERATION POSSIBLE WITH THIS SET #'
# H S " % R R O R #HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED FOR PARAMETER SET "
# H S # % R R O R #HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED FOR PARAMETER SET #
# H S $ % R R O R #HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED FOR PARAMETER SET $
# ' #

& A I L U R E 6 &AILURE IN INTERNAL SUPPLY VOLTAGE 6 #'
& A I L U R E 6 &AILURE IN OFFSET VOLTAGE 6 #'
& A I L U R E ) / &AILURE ON FIRST INPUTOUTPUT MODULE '%! #'
& A I L U R E ) / &AILURE ON SECOND INPUTOUTPUT MODULE :%! #'
& A I L 4 R I P 2 E L &AILURE IN INTERNAL TRIP RELAY CIRCUIT #'
, 3 ! D I S R U P T E D ,3! LINK DISRUPTED SYSTEM INTERFACE #'
& A I L U R E ¦ ) &AILURE DETECTED BY CURRENT PLAUSIBILITY MONITOR ¦) #

'
& A I L U R E ) S Y M M &AILURE DETECTED BY CURRENT SYMMETRY MONITOR #'
& A I L U R E ¦ 5 P E &AILURE DETECTED BY VOLTAGE PLAUSIBILITY MONITOR

¦5PH E #'
& A I L U R E ¦ 5 P P &AILURE DETECTED BY VOLTAGE PLAUSIBILITY MONITOR
¦5PH PH #'
& A I L U R E 5 S Y M M &AILURE DETECTED BY VOLTAGE SYMMETRY MONITOR #'
& A I L U R E 5 M E A S ,OSS OF MEASURED VOLTAGES #'
& & - P I C K U P &USE FAILURE MONITOR PICKED UP UNDELAYED ANNUNCI

ATION #'
& U S E & A I L U R E &USE FAILURE MONITOR OPERATED DELAYED ANNUNCI

ATION APPROX S #'
& A I L 0 H A S E 3 E Q &AILURE DETECTED BY PHASE SEQUENCE MONITOR #'
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATION OF DISTANCE PROTECTION AND TELEPROTECTION FEATURES
$ I S T O F F $ISTANCE PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF #'
$ I S T B L O C K E D $ISTANCE PROTECTION IS BLOCKED #'
% M E R M O D E %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME MODE IS RUNNING #'
% X T E N S : " 2ELEASE ZONE EXTENSION STAGE :" #'
% X T E N S : , 2ELEASE ZONE EXTENSION STAGE :, #'
$ I S 4 E L E O F F 4ELEPROTECTION FUNCTION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION IS

SWITCHED OFF #'
# ' #

$ I S 2 E C E P T #ARRIER SIGNAL FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTEC

TION RECEIVED #
$ I S 2 E C & A I L 2ECEPTION SIGNAL FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PRO

TECTION IS FAULTY #'
$ I S 0 / 4 4 % C H O %CHO SIGNAL FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION

TRANSMITTED #
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF POWER SWING SUPPLEMENT
0 O W E R 3 W I N G 0OWER SWING DETECTED #'
/ 3 4 R I P /UT OF STEP TRIP SIGNAL ISSUED #
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS AND EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
5 S E R O U T P U T /UTPUT OF USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 #'
5 S E R O U T P U T /UTPUT OF USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 #'
% X T 4 R I P B L K "LOCK EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION #'
% X T 4 R P W O ! 2 4RIGGER EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION THREE POLE WITHOUT

RECLOSURE #'
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
% M E R O F F %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF

#'
% M E R B L O C K %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS BLOCKED

#'
# ' #

% M E R M O D E %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME MODE IS RUNNING #'
) B L O C K "LOCK ) STAGE OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PRO

TECTION FROM AN EXTERNAL DEVICE #'
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
/ , 0 R O T O F F 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF #'
/ , B L O C K E D 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION IS BLOCKED #'
/ , 7 A R N ) 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION CURRENT WARNING STAGE

#'
/ , 7 A R N 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION THERMAL WARNING STAGE

#'
/ , 0 I C K U P 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION PICK UP OF THERMAL TRIP

STAGE #'
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
% & $ E T O F F %ARTH FAULT DETECTION IS SWITCHED OFF #'
% & $ E T B L O C K %ARTH FAULT DETECTION IS BLOCKED #'
$ETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT THE EARTH FAULT ARE GIVEN IN THE EARTH FAULT REPORT ADDRESS BLOCK
REFER 3ECTION
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN EARTHED SYSTEMS
% & 0 R O T O F F %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF #'
% & B L O C K E D %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS BLOCKED #'
% & $ I R O F F %ARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON IS SWITCHED OFF #

'
% & 2 E C E P T #ARRIER SIGNAL FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT

PROTECTION RECEIVED #
% & 2 E C & A I L #ARRIER RECEPTION FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT

PROTECTION FAULTY #'
% & % C H O %CHO SIGNAL FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON TRANSMITTED #
# ' #

/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATION OF THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
! 2 O F F !UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS SWITCHED OFF #'
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION INOPERATIVE IE CANNOT BE INITI

! 2 I N O P E R A T I V
ATED #'
! 2 B L O C K "LOCK AUTO RECLOSURE STATICALLY VIA BINARY INPUT #'
! 2 R E S E T 2ESET AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION FROM EXTERNAL VIA

BINARY INPUT #
P 2 ! 2 B L O C K "LOCK SINGLE POLE 2!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
P 2 ! 2 B L O C K "LOCK THREE POLE 2!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
2 ! 2 B L O C K "LOCK COMPLETE 2!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
$ ! 2 B L O C K "LOCK COMPLETE $!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
3 T A R T ! 2 3TARTING SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL !2

#
!2 #

!2 #

!2 #
4 R I P P ! 2 3INGLE POLE TRIP SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR

INTERNAL !2 #
4 R I P P ! 2 4HREE POLE TRIP SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR

INTERNAL !2 #
$ ! 2 A F T 2 ! 2 $!2 PERMITTED ONLY AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2 #'
! 2 # L O S E # M D 2ECLOSE COMMAND FROM AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION ISSUED

#
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATION OF THE INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
3 Y N C O F F 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS SWITCHED

OFF CLOSING IS RELEASED #'
3 Y N C B L O C K E D 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS BLOCKED
#'
3 Y N C F A U L T Y 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS DISTURBED
#'
3 Y N C 4 S U P % X P 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION SUPERVISION
TIME EXPIRED #
3 Y N C / V E R R I D E 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION OVERRIDDEN

#'
3 Y N C 3 Y N C H R O 3YNCHRONISM DETECTED #'
# ' #

3 Y N C 5 5 ,IVE LINE 5 AND DEAD BUS BAR 5 DETECTED

#'
3 Y N C 5 5 $EAD LINE 5 AND LIVE BUS BAR 5 DETECTED
#'
3 Y N C 5 5 $EAD LINE 5 AND DEAD BUS BAR 5 DETECTED
#'
3 Y N C 5 D I F F 3YNCHRONISM CHECK 5 EXCEEDED #'
3 Y N C F D I F F 3YNCHRONISM CHECK F EXCEEDED #'
3 Y N C D I F F 3YNCHRONISM CHECK EXCEEDED #'
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF FAULT LOCATION
3 T A R T & L T , O C 3TART FAULT LOCATOR VIA BINARY INPUT #'
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS FROM THE CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST FUNCTION
# " I N 4 E S T #IRCUIT BREAKER TEST IN PROGRESS #'
# " 4 E S T P , 4RIP SINGLE POLE , BY INTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST

FUNCTION #
FUNCTION #
FUNCTION #
# " 4 E S T P 4RIP THREE POLE BY INTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST FUNC
TION #
&URTHER MESSAGES
4 A B L E O V E R F L O W )F MORE MESSAGES HAVE BEEN RECEIVED THE LAST VALID

MESSAGE IS 4ABLE OVERFLOW
% N D O F T A B L E )F NOT ALL MEMORY PLACES ARE USED THE LAST MESSAGE IS
%ND OF TABLE
# ' #

&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
4HE ANNUNCIATIONS WHICH OCCURRED DURING THE LAST &OR THESE PURPOSES THE TERM SYSTEM FAULT MEANS
THREE NETWORK FAULTS CAN BE READ OFF ON THE FRONT PAN THE PERIOD FROM SHORT CIRCUIT INCEPTION UP TO FINAL
EL OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE 4HE INDICATIONS ARE CLEARANCE )F AUTO RECLOSE OCCURS THEN THE SYSTEM
RECORDED IN THE SEQUENCE FROM THE YOUNGEST TO THE FAULT IS FINISHED ON EXPIRY OF THE LAST RECLAIM OR LOCK
OLDEST UNDER ADDRESSES AND 7HEN OUT TIME THAT IS AFTER SUCCESSFUL OR UNSUCCESSFUL !2
A FURTHER FAULT OCCURS THE DATA RELATING TO THE OLDEST 4HUS THE TOTAL FAULT CLEARANCE PROCEDURE INCLUSIVE
ARE ERASED %ACH FAULT DATA BUFFER CAN CONTAIN UP TO !2 CYCLES OCCUPIES ONLY ONE FAULT ANNUNCIATION
ANNUNCIATIONS STORE 7ITHIN ONE SYSTEM FAULT SEVERAL FAULT EVENTS
CAN HAVE OCCURRED IE FROM PICK UP OF ANY PROTEC
)NPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED TION FUNCTION UNTIL DROP OFF OF THE LAST PICK UP OF A
PROTECTION FUNCTION
4O CALL UP THE LAST FAULT DATA ONE GOES TO ADDRESS
EITHER BY DIRECT ADDRESS $! % OR BY )N THE FOLLOWING CLARIFICATION ALL THE AVAILABLE FAULT AN
PAGING WITH THE KEYS Å OR Ç 7ITH THE KEYS ! OR " ONE NUNCIATIONS ARE INDICATED )N THE CASE OF A SPECIFIC
CAN PAGE THE INDIVIDUAL ANNUNCIATIONS FORWARDS OR FAULT OF COURSE ONLY THE ASSOCIATED ANNUNCIATIONS
BACKWARDS %ACH ANNUNCIATION IS ASSIGNED WITH A APPEAR IN THE DISPLAY !T FIRST AN EXAMPLE IS GIVEN FOR
SEQUENCE ITEM NUMBER A SYSTEM FAULT AND EXPLAINED
, ! 3 4 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE LAST

SYSTEM FAULT
& ! 5 , 4
UNDER ITEM THE DATE OF THE SYSTEM FAULT IS INDICATED IN

3 Y S T & L T THE SECOND LINE THE CONSECUTIVE NUMBER OF THE SYSTEM
FAULT
UNDER ITEM THE TIME OF THE BEGINNING OF THE FAULT IS GIV

& A U L T # EN TIME RESOLUTION IS MS
M S 4HE FOLLOWING ITEMS INDICATE ALL FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS

WHICH HAVE OCCURRED FROM FAULT DETECTION UNTIL DROP OFF
$ I S T & L T , % # OF THE DEVICE IN CHRONOLOGICAL SEQUENCE 4HESE ANNUN
CIATIONS ARE TAGGED WITH THE RELATIVE TIME IN MILLISECONDS
STARTING WITH THE FAULT DETECTION
M S
$ I S 4 R I P P #
M S
$ E V $ R O P O F F #
&OR FAULT LOCATION THE CONDUCTOR LOOP IS GIVEN FROM

M S WHICH THE FAULT LOCATION HAS BEEN DERIVED &AULT DISTANCE
& , , O O P , % IS DISPLAYED IN /HMS PRIMARY IN /HMS SECONDARY IN KI
LOMETERS AND IN PERCENTAGE LINE LENGTH CALCULATED FROM
THE PARAMETERS WHICH HAVE BEEN SET FOR LINE AND TRANS
FORMER DATA REFER TO 3ECTION
D K M
)F THE PER UNIT LINE REACTANCE HAS BEEN PARAMETERIZED IN
¬MILE INSTEAD OF ¬KM ADDRESS THEN THE FAULT
DISTANCE IS TO BE READ IN MILES

D ; =
ETC
# ' #

'ENERAL FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE DEVICE
3 Y S T & L T 3YSTEM FAULT WITH CONSECUTIVE NUMBER
& A U L T "EGINNING OF FAULT
& L T " U F F / V E R &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS LOST BUFFER OVERFLOW
2 ! 2 2 E L E A S E 2ELEASE 2!2 STAGES FROM EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE WHEN

OCCURRED DURING A FAULT
$ ! 2 2 E L E A S E 2ELEASE $!2 STAGE FROM EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE WHEN
OCCURRED DURING A FAULT
$ E V 4 R I P R E V 4RIP ON FAULT IN REVERSE BUS BAR DIRECTION
) , ) N )NTERRUPTED FAULT CURRENT OF PHASE ,
$ E V I C E 4 R I P 4HE GENERAL TRIP COMMAND OF THE DEVICE IS ANNUN

CIATED 'OING IE RESET OF THE TRIP IS INDICATED
$ E V $ R O P O F F $ROP OFF OF THE DEVICE GENERAL
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF DISTANCE PROTECTION
$ I S : " ! 2 B L K !UTO RECLOSURE BLOCKED BY FAULT IN ZONE :"
$ I S : , ! 2 B L K !UTO RECLOSURE BLOCKED BY FAULT IN ZONE :,
$ I S T & L T , &AULT DETECTION DISTANCE PROTECTION PHASE ,
$ I S T & L T , % &AULT DETECTION DISTANCE PROTECTION PHASE , %
$ I S T & L T , &AULT DETECTION DISTANCE PROTECTION PHASES , ,
$ I S T & L T , % &AULT DETECTION DISTANCE PROTECTION PHASES

, , %

, , %
# ' #


, , %
$ I S T & L T , &AULT DETECTION DISTANCE PROTECTION PHASES
, , ,
$ I S T & L T % &AULT DETECTION DISTANCE PROTECTION PHASES
, , , %
, O O P , % F )N LINE LOOP , % A FAULT IN FORWARD DIRECTION IS DE
TECTED
TECTED
TECTED
, O O P , F )N LINE LOOP , , A FAULT IN FORWARD DIRECTION IS DE
TECTED
TECTED
TECTED
, O O P , % R )N LINE LOOP , % A FAULT IN REVERSE DIRECTION IS DE
TECTED
TECTED
TECTED
, O O P , R )N LINE LOOP , , A FAULT IN REVERSE DIRECTION IS DE
TECTED
TECTED
TECTED
$ I S 4 R I P P , 4RIP SINGLE POLE , BY DISTANCE PROTECTION
$ I S 4 R I P P 4RIP THREE POLE BY DISTANCE PROTECTION
$ I S T 2 E C E P T #ARRIER SIGNAL FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTEC

TION RECEIVED
$ I S 3 E N D #ARRIER SEND SIGNAL FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE
PROTECTION TRANSMITTED
$ I S 4 R A N S " L O 4RANSIENT BLOCKING FUNCTION OF TELEPROTECTION WITH DIS
TANCE PROTECTION HAS OPERATED
&AULT ANNUNCIATION OF POWER SWING SUPPLEMENT
/ 3 4 R I P /UT OF STEP TRIP SIGNAL ISSUED
# ' #

&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS AND EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
5 S E R 4 3 T A R T 3TART USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 DURING FAULT
5 S E R 4 2 E S E T 2ESET USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 DURING FAULT
5 S E R O U T P U T /UTPUT OF USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 DURING FAULT
5 S E R 4 3 T A R T 3TART USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 DURING FAULT
5 S E R 4 2 E S E T 2ESET USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 DURING FAULT
5 S E R O U T P U T /UTPUT OF USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 DURING FAULT
% X T 4 R I P P , 4RIP BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION SINGLE POLE ,
% X T 4 R I P P 4RIP BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION THREE POLE
% X T 4 R I P W O ! 2 4RIP BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION THREE POLE WITHOUT

RECLOSURE
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
% M E R & L T % %ARTH FAULT DETECTION OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME

PROTECTION
% M E R & L T , &AULT DETECTION EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTEC
TION PHASE ,
% M E R & L T , % &AULT DETECTION EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTEC
TION PHASE , EARTH
TION PHASE ,
TION PHASE , EARTH
TION PHASES , ,
TION PHASES , , EARTH
TION PHASE ,
TION PHASE , EARTH
TION PHASES , ,
# ' #


TION PHASES , ,

TION PHASES , , ,
% M E R & L T % &AULT DETECTION EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTEC
TION PHASES , , , EARTH
% M E R ) &AULT DETECTION EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ON
HIGH PHASE CURRENT STAGE )
% M E R ) &AULT DETECTION EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ON

PHASE OVERCURRENT STAGE )
% M E R ) % &AULT DETECTION EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ON

EARTH OVERCURRENT STAGE )%
% M E R 4 R I P P , 4RIP SINGLE POLE , BY EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME

PROTECTION
% M E R 4 R I P P , 4RIP SINGLE POLE , BY EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME
PROTECTION
% M E R 4 R I P P , 4RIP SINGLE POLE , FROM EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME
PROTECTION
% M E R 4 R I P P 4RIP THREE POLE BY EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PRO
TECTION
&AULT ANNUNCIATION OF THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
/ , 4 R I P 4RIP BY THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
&AULT ANNUNCIATION OF EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
.OTE 4HESE ANNUNCIATION OCCUR ONLY IN THE FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS WHEN THE HIGH SENSITIVITY EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
IS CONFIGURED TO TRIP ON EARTH FAULT ADDRESS %!24( &!5,4 /. REFER ALSO TO 3ECTION /THERWISE
THE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE STORED ONLY IN THE EARTH FAULT REPORT REFER TO 3ECTION
% & $ E T E C T I O N %ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
% & $ E T 4 R I P 4RIP BY EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN EARTHED SYSTEMS
% & B L O C K E D %ARTH FAULT PROTECTION BLOCKED WHEN DURING FAULT
% & & L T ) E &AULT DETECTION EARTH FAULT PROTECTION )% STAGE

VALID FOR DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION AND TRANSMISSION
% & & L T ) E &AULT DETECTION EARTH FAULT PROTECTION NON DIRECTIONAL
# ' #

% & & L T ) E &AULT DETECTION EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DIRECTIONAL
% & 4 R I P 4RIP BY EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
% & 3 E N D $IRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION CARRIER

SIGNAL TRANSMITTED
% & 2 E C E P T $IRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION CARRIER
SIGNAL RECEIVED
% & 4 R A N S " L O C 4RANSIENT BLOCKING FUNCTION OF DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION HAS OPERATED
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
! 2 I N P R O G !UTO RECLOSE CYCLE IN PROGRESS
2 ! 2 4 P R U N $EAD TIME OF SINGLE POLE 2!2 IS RUNNING
2 ! 2 4 P R U N $EAD TIME OF THREE POLE 2!2 IS RUNNING
$ ! 2 4 P R U N $EAD TIME OF FIRST THREE POLE $!2 IS RUNNING
$ ! 2 4 P R U N $EAD TIME OF SECOND THREE POLE $!2 IS RUNNING
$ ! 2 4 P R U N $EAD TIME OF THIRD OR FURTHER THREE POLE $!2 IS RUN

NING
! 2 B L O C K D Y N !2 FUNCTION DYNAMICALLY BLOCKED BY INTERNAL CAUSE
! 2 # L O S E # M D 2ECLOSE COMMAND FROM AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION ISSUED
! 2 4 R I P P 4HREE POLE TRIP BY INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION

CAUSED BY BLOCKING DURING SINGLE POLE !2 CYCLE
&AULT ANNUNCIATION OF INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
3 Y N C 4 S U P % X P 3UPERVISION TIME FOR SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK

EXPIRED NO MORE CLOSE RELEASE
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF FAULT LOCATION
& A U L T , O C A T &AULT LOCATION DATA THE LINE LOOP IS INDICATED FROM

WHICH FAULT DATA HAVE BEEN CALCULATED
2 P R I ¬ #ALCULATED PRIMARY FAULT RESISTANCE IN OHMS BASED ON
THE PARAMETERIZED RATED VALUES ADDRESSES TO
REFER TO 3ECTION
8 P R I ¬ #ALCULATED PRIMARY FAULT REACTANCE IN OHMS BASED ON
REFER TO 3ECTION
# ' #

2 S E C ¬ #ALCULATED SECONDARY FAULT RESISTANCE IN OHMS BASED

ON !
8 S E C ¬ #ALCULATED SECONDARY FAULT REACTANCE IN OHMS BASED
ON !
D K M #ALCULATED FAULT DISTANCE IN KILOMETERS BASED ON THE
PARAMETERIZED RATED VALUES ADDRESSES TO
REFER TO 3ECTION AND THE LINE DATA AS PARAME
TERIZED UNDER ADDRESSES AND REFER TO 3EC
TION
D ; = #ALCULATED FAULT DISTANCE IN OF LINE LENGTH BASED ON
REFER TO 3ECTION AND THE LINE DATA AS
PARAMETERIZED UNDER ADDRESSES AND REFER
TO 3ECTION
&URTHER MESSAGES
4 A B L E E M P T Y MEANS THAT NO FAULT EVENT HAS BEEN RECORDED
4 A B L E O V E R F L O W MEANS THAT OTHER FAULT DATA HAVE OCCURRED HOWEVER

MEMORY IS FULL
4 A B L E S U P E R C E D E D A NEW FAULT EVENT HAS OCCURRED DURING READ OUT

PAGE ON WITH ! OR " THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE FIRST AN
NUNCIATION IN THE ACTUALIZED ORDER
% N D O F T A B L E )F NOT ALL MEMORY PLACES ARE USED THE LAST MESSAGE IS

%ND OF TABLE
4HE DATA OF THE SECOND TO LAST SYSTEM FAULT CAN BE FOUND UNDER ADDRESS 4HE AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE
THE SAME AS FOR THE LAST FAULT
N D 4 / , ! 3 4 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF

& ! 5 , 4 THE SECOND TO LAST SYSTEM FAULT
ETC
4HE DATA OF THE THIRD TO LAST SYSTEM FAULT CAN BE FOUND UNDER ADDRESS 4HE AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE THE
SAME AS FOR THE LAST FAULT
R D 4 / , ! 3 4 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF

& ! 5 , 4 THE THIRD TO LAST SYSTEM FAULT
ETC
# ' #

$ATA OF EARTH FAULTS IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS ADDRESS BLOCK
&OR EARTH FAULTS IN ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORKS KEYS Å OR Ç TO THE ADDRESS 7ITH THE KEYS ! OR "
A SPECIAL EARTH FAULT DATA STORE IS AVAILABLE UNDER AD ONE CAN PAGE FORWARDS OR BACKWARDS WITHIN THE INDI
DRESS 5P TO MESSAGES CAN BE STORED FOR CATIONS
EACH OF THE LAST THREE EARTH FAULTS )NPUT OF THE CODE
WORD IS NOT REQUIRED )N THE FOLLOWING LIST THE AVAILABLE EARTH FAULT ANNUNCI
ATIONS ARE ATTACHED TO THE BOX WITH MAIN HEADING )N
4HE EARTH FAULT REPORTS CAN BE CALLED UP BY DIRECT AD A SPECIFIC CASE OF COURSE ONLY THE ASSOCIATED INDI
DRESSING USING $! % OR BY PAGING WITH THE CATIONS APPEAR IN THE DISPLAY
) 3 / , ! 4 % $ "EGINNING OF BLOCK %ARTH FAULT EVENT DATA FOR

NON EARTHED SYSTEM
% ! 2 4 ( & , 4 $ ! 4 !
UNDER ITEM .O THE DATE AND THE SEQUENCE NUMBER

% & $ E T OF THE EARTH FAULT ARE DISPLAYED
)TEM .O SHOWS THE TIME OF COMMENCEMENT OF THE

% & $ E T E C T I O N # EARTH FAULT
4HE FOLLOWING ITEMS SHOW THE EARTH FAULT DATA

% & $ E T E C , %ARTH FAULT DETECTED IN PHASE ,
% & F O R W A R D S %ARTH FAULT IN FORWARD DIRECTION
% & R E V E R S E %ARTH FAULT IN REVERSE DIRECTION
% & U N D E F I N E D %ARTH FAULT DIRECTION UNDEFINED EG CURRENT TOO SMALL
) E A M ! !CTIVE COMPONENT OF EARTH FAULT CURRENT
) E R M ! REACTIVE COMPONENT OF EARTH FAULT CURRENT
% & $ E T 4 R I P 4RIP ON EARTH FAULT ONLY WHEN EARTH FAULT DETECTION IS

CONFIGURED TO TRIP
% & " U F F / V E R %ARTH FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS LOST BUFFER OVERFLOW
4 A B L E E M P T Y MEANS THAT NO EARTH FAULT HAS BEEN RECORDED YET
2EPORTS OF FURTHER EARTH FAULTS BEGIN WITH ITEM NUMBER AND EG
UNDER )TEM .O THE DATE OF ANOTHER EARTH FAULT

% & $ E T CAN BE DISPLAYED FOLLOWED BY THE RESPECTIVE DATA
# ' #

#IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION STATISTICS ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE NUMBER OF TRIP COMMANDS INITIATED BY THE RELAY CURED AGAINST AUXILIARY VOLTAGE FAILURE AND CAN BE
IS COUNTED SEPARATELY FOR EACH OF THE BREAKER POLES READ OFF IN ADDRESS BLOCK 4HE ADDRESS CAN BE
!LSO THE NUMBER OF AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS IS REACHED BY DIRECT ADDRESSING $! % OR BY
COUNTED SEPARATELY FOR SINGLE POLE 2!2 THREE PAGING WITH THE KEYS Å OR Ç UNTIL ADDRESS IS
POLE 2!2 FIRST SHOT AND THREE POLE $!2 FURTHER REACHED 4HE COUNTERS CAN BE CALLED UP USING THE
SHOTS !DDITIONALLY THE INTERRUPTED CURRENTS ARE KEY ! FOR FORWARDS PAGING OR " FOR BACKWARDS PAG
STATED FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL POLE AND GIVEN UNDER THE ING
FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS REFER TO 3ECTION FOLLOWING
EACH TRIP COMMAND 4HESE CURRENTS ARE ACCUMU %NTRY OF THE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED FOR READ OFF OF
LATED AND STORED #OUNTER STATUS AND STORES ARE SE COUNTER STATES
# " / 0 % 2 ! 4 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK #IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION

3 4 ! 4 ) 3 4 ) # 3 STATISTICS
! 2 P O L E .UMBER OF AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS AFTER SINGLE

POLE TRIP EG
0AGE ON WITH KEY ! TO GET FURTHER COUNTER STATES
.UMBER OF AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS AFTER THREE

! 2 P O L E POLE TRIP ST !2 CYCLE 2!2
$ ! 2 P O L .UMBER OF AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS AFTER THREE

POLE TRIP FURTHER !2 CYCLES $!2
4 2 ) 0 . O , .UMBER OF TRIP COMMANDS FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER POLE

,
4 2 ) 0 . O , .UMBER OF TRIP COMMANDS FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER

POLE ,
.UMBER OF TRIP COMMANDS FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER

4 2 ) 0 . O ,
POLE ,
¦ ) , ) N !CCUMULATED INTERRUPTED CURRENTS FOR #" POLE ,
4HE MAXIMUM VALUES OF THE COUNTERS ARE

2!2 POLE 2!2 POLE $!2 POLE DIGITS
4RIP .O , 4RIP .O , 4RIP .O , DIGITS
¦),)N ¦),)N ¦),)N DIGITS PLUS DECIMAL DIGIT
4HE COUNTERS CAN BE RESET TO IN BLOCK SEE 3ECTION
# ' #

2EAD OUT OF OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
4HE STEADY STATE RMS OPERATING VALUES CAN BE READ 4HE DATA ARE DISPLAYED IN ABSOLUTE PRIMARY VALUES
OUT AT ANY TIME IN ADDRESS BLOCK 4HE ADDRESS CAN AND IN PERCENT OF THE RATED DEVICE VALUES 4O ENSURE
BE CALLED UP DIRECTLY USING $! % OR BY CORRECT PRIMARY VALUES THE RATED DATA MUST BE EN
PAGING WITH Å OR Ç 4HE INDIVIDUAL MEASURED VALUES TERED TO THE DEVICE UNDER ADDRESS BLOCK AS DE
CAN BE FOUND BY FURTHER PAGING WITH ! OR " %NTRY OF SCRIBED IN 3ECTION
THE CODEWORD IS NOT NECESSARY 4HE VALUES WILL BE
UPDATED IN APPROXIMATELY TO SECONDS INTERVALS )N THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLE SOME TYPICAL VALUES HAVE
BEEN INSERTED )N PRACTICE THE ACTUAL VALUES APPEAR
/ 0 % 2 ! 4 ) / . ! , "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK /PERATIONAL MEASURED VAL

- % ! 3 5 2 % $ 6 ! , 5 % 3 UES
5SE ! KEY TO MOVE TO THE NEXT ADDRESS WITH THE NEXT MEASURED VALUE
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 % 0AGE ON WITH THE ! KEY TO READ OFF THE NEXT ADDRESS WITH
THE NEXT MEASURED VALUE OR PAGE BACK WITH "
) , !
/NE ADDRESS IS AVAILABLE FOR EACH MEASURED VALUE 4HE

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 % VALUES CAN BE REACHED ALSO BY DIRECT ADDRESSING USING
) , ! KEY $! FOLLOWED BY THE ADDRESS NUMBER AND EXECUTE
WITH %
4HE PRIMARY VALUES ADDRESSES TO ARE

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
BASED ON THE PRIMARY RATED VALUES AS PARAMETERIZED
) , ! UNDER ADDRESSES FOR 5. AND FOR ). REFER
3ECTION
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , % K 6
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , % K 6
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , % K 6
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , K 6
# ' #

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , K 6
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , K 6
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
0 A - 7
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
0 R - 6 ! R
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 % 4HE PERCENTAGE IS REFERRED TO RATED FREQUENCY (Z OR

(Z AS PARAMETERIZED UNDER ADDRESS REFER TO
F ; = 3ECTION
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
) , ; = 4HE PERCENTAGE IS REFERRED TO RATED CURRENT
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
) , ; =
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
) , ; =
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 % 4HE PERCENTAGE IS REFERRED TO RATED VOLTAGE DIVIDED BY

5 , % ; = o
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , % ; =
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , % ; =
# ' #

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
4HE PERCENTAGE IS REFERRED TO RATED VOLTAGE
5 , ; =
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , ; =
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , ; =
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 % 4HE PERCENTAGE IS REFERRED TO RATED APPARENT POWER

0 A ; = o w 5. w ).
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
0 R ; =
4HE CALCULATED TEMPERATURE RISE FOR THE OVERLOAD 4HE VALUES ARE AVAILABLE AS LONG AS THE THERMAL OVER
PROTECTION CAN BE READ OUT IN ADDRESS BLOCK 4HE LOAD PROTECTION IS CONFIGURED AS 4(%2-!, /, %8
ADDRESS CAN BE CALLED UP DIRECTLY USING $! )34 ADDRESS AND SWITCHED ON ADDRESS
% OR BY PAGING WITH Å OR Ç 4HE INDIVIDUAL 0AGE ON WITH THE ! KEY TO READ OFF THE NEXT ADDRESS
MEASURED VALUES CAN BE FOUND BY FURTHER PAGING WITH THE NEXT MEASURED VALUE OR PAGE BACK WITH "
WITH ! OR " %NTRY OF THE CODEWORD IS NOT NECESSARY
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 % 4HE CALCULATED TEMPERATURE RISES OF THE INDIVIDUAL

PHASES ARE NOT PRESENTED IF THE MEASURING METHOD
T R I P , WITH )MAX HAS BEEN SELECTED ADDRESS
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
T R I P ,
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
T R I P ,
4HE PERCENTAGE IS REFERRED TO THE TRIP TEMPERATURE RISE

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
ACCORDING TO THE MEASUREMENT METHOD AS SELECTED IN
T R I P ADDRESS
# ' #

2EAD OUT OF EARTH FAULT MEASURED VALUES IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS AD
DRESS BLOCK
4HE MEASURED VALUES DURING AN EARTH FAULT CAN BE 4HE DISPLAYED VALUES ARE THE ACTIVE COMPONENT )EA
READ OUT IN ADDRESS BLOCK 4HE ADDRESS CAN BE DI AND THE REACTIVE COMPONENT )ER OF THE EARTH CURRENT
RECTLY CALLED UP USING $! % OR BY PAGING AS PRIMARY VALUES AND AS SECONDARY VALUES AT THE
WITH KEYS Å OR Ç 4HE INDIVIDUAL VALUES CAN BE FOUND RELAY TERMINALS 0RE REQUISITE FOR CORRECT OUTPUT OF
THEN BY FURTHER PAGING WITH ! OR " %NTRY OF THE CODE THE CURRENT VALUES IS THAT THE RATED DATA ARE CORRECTLY
WORD IS NOT NECESSARY 4HE VALUES ARE RECORDED ONLY PARAMETERIZED IN ADDRESS BLOCK REFER TO 3ECTION

IF THE RELAY IS EQUIPPED WITH THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION
FUNCTION AND WHEN THIS IS CONFIGURED TO %8)34
)N THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLE SOME TYPICAL VALUES HAVE
BEEN INSERTED )N PRACTICE THE ACTUAL VALUES APPEAR
) 3 / , % & "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK -EASURED VALUES OF

EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
- % ! 3 5 2 % $ 6 ! , 5 % 3
5SE ! KEY TO DISPLAY THE NEXT ADDRESS WITH THE NEXT

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 % MEASURED VALUE OR USE " KEY FOR THE PREVIOUS AD
) E A ! DRESS
%ACH MEASURED VALUE IS ASSIGNED TO ONE ADDRESS

EACH ADDRESS ALTERNATIVELY CAN BE REACHED BY DIRECT
ADDRESSING USING KEY $! FOLLOWED BY THE ADDRESS
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
NUMBER
) E R !
4HE PRIMARY VALUES ADDRESSES AND ARE
BASED ON THE PRIMARY RATED VALUES AS PARAMETERIZED
UNDER ADDRESSES AND REFER TO 3ECTION

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
) E A ; M ! = M !
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
) E R ; M ! = M !
# ' #

/PERATIONAL CONTROL FACILITIES
$URING OPERATION OF THE PROTECTION RELAY IT MAY BE DE )N ORDER TO CONTROL FUNCTIONS VIA BINARY INPUTS IT IS
SIRED TO INTERVENE IN FUNCTIONS OR ANNUNCIATIONS MAN NECESSARY THAT THE BINARY INPUTS HAVE BEEN MAR
UALLY OR FROM SYSTEM CRITERIA 3! COMPRISES FACI SHALLED TO THE CORRESPONDING SWITCHING FUNCTIONS
LITIES EG TO RE ADJUST THE REAL TIME CLOCK TO ERASE DURING INSTALLATION OF THE DEVICE AND THAT THEY HAVE
STORED INFORMATIONS AND EVENT COUNTERS TO SWITCH ON BEEN CONNECTED REFER TO 3ECTION -ARSHALLING
OR OFF PARTIAL FUNCTIONS UNDER SPECIFIC CONDITIONS OR OF THE BINARY INPUTS
TO CHANGE OVER PRESELECTED SETS OF FUNCTION PARAME
TERS 4HE SCOPE OF OPERATIONAL CONTROL FACILITIES DE 4HE CONTROL FACILITIES BEGIN WITH ADDRESS BLOCK
PENDS ON THE ORDERED SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS OF THE DE 4HIS ADDRESS IS REACHED
VICE REFER TO 3ECTION /RDERING DATA BY BLOCK PAGING WITH THE KEYS Å FORWARDS OR Ç
BACKWARDS UP TO ADDRESS OR
4HE FUNCTIONS CAN BE CONTROLLED FROM THE OPERATING
PANEL ON THE FRONT OF THE DEVICE VIA THE OPERATING BY DIRECT SELECTION WITH ADDRESS CODE USING KEY
AND SYSTEM INTERFACE AS WELL AS VIA BINARY INPUTS $! ADDRESS AND EXECUTE WITH KEY %
$ % 6 ) # % "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK $EVICE CONTROL

# / . 4 2 / ,
!DJUSTING AND SYNCHRONIZING THE REAL TIME CLOCK ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE DATE AND TIME CAN BE ADJUSTED AT ANY TIME DUR QUIRED TO CHANGE THE DATA
ING OPERATION AS LONG AS THE REAL TIME CLOCK IS OPERA
TIVE 3ETTING IS CARRIED OUT IN BLOCK WHICH IS 3ELECTION OF THE INDIVIDUAL ADDRESSES IS BY FURTHER
REACHED BY DIRECT ADDRESSING $! % OR BY SCROLLING USING ! " AS SHOWN BELOW %ACH MODIFICA
PAGING WITH Å AND Ç )NPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS RE TION MUST BE CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTER KEY %
3 % 4 4 ) . ' "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 3ETTING THE REAL TIME CLOCK

2 % ! , 4 ) - % # , / # + #ONTINUE WITH !
!T FIRST THE ACTUAL DATE AND TIME ARE DISPLAYED

#ONTINUE WITH !

%NTER THE NEW DATE DIGITS FOR DAY DIGITS FOR MONTH
$ ! 4 % AND DIGITS FOR YEAR INCLUDING CENTURY USE THE ORDER
AS CONFIGURED UNDER ADDRESS 3ECTION BUT
ALWAYS USE A DOT FOR SEPARATOR
$$--9999 OR --$$9999
4 ) - % %NTER THE NEW TIME HOURS MINUTES SECONDS EACH

WITH DIGITS SEPARATED BY A DOT
((--33
5SING THE DIFFERENCE TIME THE CLOCK IS SET FORWARDS BY

$ ) & & 4 ) - % THE ENTERED TIME OR BACKWARDS USING THE KEY
4HE FORMAT IS THE SAME AS WITH THE TIME SETTING ABOVE
# ' #

%RASING STORED ANNUNCIATIONS AND COUNTERS ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE STATISTICAL INDICATIONS 3ECTION ADDRESS TION OF RESETTING THE ,%$ INDICATIONS ADDRESS
BLOCK ARE STORED IN %%02/-S IN THE DEVICE 4HEY CODEWORD ENTRY IS NECESSARY TO ERASE THE STORED
ARE NOT THEREFORE ERASED IF THE AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY ITEMS 2ESET IS SEPARATE FOR THE DIFFERENT GROUPS OF
FAILS !DDITIONALLY ANNUNCIATIONS AND THE STATUS OF COUNTERS MEMORIES AND ANNUNCIATIONS /NE REACH
THE ,%$ MEMORIES ARE STORED IN .6 2!-S AND THUS ES THE INDIVIDUAL ITEMS BY PAGING ! " %RASURE RE
SAVED PROVIDED THE BACK UP BATTERY IS OPERATIONAL QUIRES CONFIRMATION WITH THE KEY *9 4HE DISPLAY
4HESE STORES CAN BE CLEARED IN BLOCK "LOCK IS THEN CONFIRMS THE ERASURE )F ERASURE IS NOT REQUIRED
CALLED UP BY PAGING WITH THE KEYS Å OR Ç OR DIRECTLY PRESS KEY . OR SIMPLY PAGE ON
BY KEYING IN THE CODE $! % 7ITH THE EXCEP
"EGINNING OF BLOCK 2ESET

2 % 3 % 4
2 % 3 % 4 2EQUEST WHETHER THE ,%$ MEMORIES SHOULD BE RESET

, % $
2 % 3 % 4 2EQUEST WHETHER THE OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATION BUFFER

/ 0 % 2 ! 4 ! . . 5 . # STORE SHOULD BE ERASED
2 % 3 % 4 2EQUEST WHETHER THE FAULT ANNUNCIATION BUFFER AND

& ! 5 , 4 ! . . 5 . # FAULT RECORDING STORES SHOULD BE ERASED
2 % 3 % 4 2EQUEST WHETHER THE #" OPERATION COUNTERS SHOULD

# / 5 . 4 % 2 3 BE SET TO ZERO
2 % 3 % 4 2EQUEST WHETHER THE TOTAL OF SWITCHED SHORT CIRCUIT

4 / 4 ! , ) S C CURRENTS SHOULD BE SET TO ZERO
2 % 3 % 4 2EQUEST WHETHER THE EARTH FAULT REPORT BUFFER STORE FOR

EARTH FAULTS IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS SHOULD BE
% & ! . . 5 . #
ERASED
$URING ERASURE OF THE STORES WHICH MAY TAKE SOME TIME THE DISPLAY SHOWS 4!3+ ). 02/'2%33 !FTER ERASURE
THE RELAY ACKNOWLEDGES ERASURE EG
2 % 3 % 4
% 8 % # 5 4 % $
# ' #

/FF/N CONTROL OF PART FUNCTIONS OF THE DEVICE
$URING OPERATION OF THE PROTECTION RELAY IT MAY BE DE ! FUNCTION IS SWITCHED /&& WHEN THE OFF COMMAND
SIRED TO CONTROL THE RELAY MANUALLY OR FROM SYSTEM CRI IS GIVEN BY %)4(%2 THE BINARY INPUT /2 FROM THE OP
TERIA TEMPORARILY TO SWITCH OFF PARTIAL FUNCTIONS OF THE ERATOR PANEL OR THE OPERATING INTERFACE 4HUS IT IS EN
RELAY OR TO SWITCH THEM ON ONLY UNDER SPECIFIC CONDI SURED THAT A PARTIAL FUNCTION CAN ONLY BE SWITCHED ON
TIONS %XAMPLES MAY BE THE SWITCHING OFF OF THE TELE FROM THAT PLACE WHERE IT WAS PREVIOUSLY SWITCHED OFF
PROTECTION FUNCTION DURING MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR OF
THE TRANSMISSION MEDIUM OR THE SWITCHING ON OR OFF #ONTROL INPUTS WHICH ARE NOT MARSHALLED TO A BINARY
OF THE AUTO RECLOSE SYSTEM WHEN A TRANSFER BUS IS INPUT ARE REGARDED FROM THAT LOCATION AS SWITCHED
BEING USED DEPENDENT UPON WHETHER A TRANSFORMER ON SO THAT CHANGE OF THE CONDITION IS POSSIBLE FROM
OR LINE BRANCH IS SWITCHED TO THE TRANSFER THE OPERATOR PANEL OR THE OPERATING INTERFACE
3! ALLOWS PARTIAL FUNCTIONS TO BE SWITCHED ON OR
!T THE OPERATOR PANEL AND THE OPERATING INTERFACE THE
OFF VIA BINARY INPUTS OR MANUAL OPERATION VIA THE INTE
FACTORY SETTING IS EQUALLY THAT ALL PARTIAL FUNCTIONS ARE
GRATED OPERATOR PANEL OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE
SWITCHED ON SO THAT SWITCHING VIA BINARY INPUTS IS
AT THE FRONT USING A PERSONAL COMPUTER
POSSIBLE
&OR SWITCHING VIA BINARY INPUTS IT IS OF COURSE NECES
SARY THAT THE BINARY INPUTS HAVE BEEN MARSHALLED TO 4HE COMPLETION OF A SWITCHING COMMAND IS INDE
THE CORRESPONDING SWITCHING FUNCTIONS &URTHER PENDENT OF ITS CAUSE OUTPUT AS AN OPERATIONAL AN
MORE IT MUST BE NOTED THAT A BINARY INPUT IS REQUIRED NUNCIATION
FOR EACH FUNCTION SWITCHING OFF AND SWITCHING ON
4HE SWITCHING COMMAND IS STORED IN THE RELAY AND FUNCTION OFF #OMES AT THE INSTANT OF
PROTECTED AGAINST AUXILIARY VOLTAGE FAILURE THE FUNC SWITCH OFF
TION OF A BI STABLE STORE 4HE COMMAND CAN BE AN
NUNCIATED VIA AN ANNUNCIATION RELAY OR ,%$ DISPLAY FUNCTION OFF 'OES AT THE INSTANT THAT IT IS
SWITCHED ON
&OR SWITCHING VIA THE INTEGRATED OPERATOR PANEL OR
THE FRONT INTERFACE A CODE WORD IS NECESSARY 4HE 4HESE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE LISTED IN BLOCK UNDER
CONTROL FUNCTIONS ARE FOUND AT THE BEGINNING OF THE /0%2!4)/.!, !..5.#)!4)/.3 AND CAN ALSO BE
PARAMETER BLOCK OF EACH PROTECTION OR SUPPLEMENTA TRANSMITTED VIA THE SYSTEM ,3! INTERFACE TO A CEN
RY FUNCTION 4HE SWITCH CONDITION SHOWN IN THE DIS TRAL COMPUTER !LSO THEY CAN BE MARSHALLED AS BINARY
PLAY CAN BE CHANGED OVER USING THE .O KEY . OUTPUTS THE SIGNAL RELAY THEN INDICATES THE SWITCH
4HE OPPOSITE SWITCH CONDITION THEN APPEARS IN THE ED OFF CONDITION
DISPLAY %ACH CHANGE OF CONDITION MUST BE CON
FIRMED WITH THE % KEY 4HE CHANGE OVER IS FIRST RE &OR ANNUNCIATIONS ONE MUST DIFFERENTIATE
CORDED IN THE RELAY WHEN CODEWORD OPERATION HAS
BEEN TERMINATED 4HIS IS DONE BY THE KEY COMBINA
$IRECT CONFIRMATION OF A BINARY INPUT IS AVAILABLE AS
TION & % IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION KEY & FOLLOWED
LONG AS THE CORRESPONDING BINARY INPUT IS ENER
BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION
GIZED )T CAN BE OUTPUT VIA A SIGNAL RELAY OR ,%$ )N
3!6% .%7 3%44).'3 #ONFIRM WITH THE
9ES KEY *9 THAT THE NEW SETTINGS SHALL BECOME THE SUMMARY OF ALL ANNUNCIATIONS !PPENDIX #
VALID NOW 4HE SWITCHED CONDITIONS ARE THEN PERMA THESE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE IDENTIFIED WITH A SYM
NENTLY STORED IN %%02/-S AND PROTECTED AGAINST BOL
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE FAILURE THE DISPLAY CONFIRMS .%7
3%44).'3 3!6%$ )F YOU PRESS THE .O KEY . IN 4HE COMPLETION INDICATION OF THE SWITCHED OFF
STEAD CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE ABORTED IE ALL AL CONDITION IS SIGNALIZED INDEPENDENTLY OF THE
TERATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN CHANGED SINCE THE LAST SOURCE OF THE COMMAND )T APPEARS #OMES AT
CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST 4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS THE INSTANT OF SWITCH OFF AND DISAPPEARS 'OES
CAN BE MADE INEFFECTIVE AT THE INSTANT OF SWITCHING ON
! FUNCTION IS SWITCHED /. WHEN THE ON COMMAND 4HE FOLLOWING SURVEY SHOWS THE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
HAS BEEN GIVEN BY BOTH THE BINARY INPUT !.$ ALSO AND ALSO INDICATES WHICH CONFIRMATION INDICATIONS
FROM THE OPERATOR PANEL OR INTERFACE ARE GENERATED
# ' #

"INARY INPUT #OMPLETION INDICATION

CONFIRMATION COMES AND GOES
$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4 $ISTANCE PROTECTION WITHOUT EMERGENCY /# PROT

/ .
/ & & $IST OFF
0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP MODE FOR DISTANCE

0 5 4 4 PROTECTION
/ .
$IS0544 ON
/ & &
$IS0544 OFF $IS4ELE OFF
0 / 4 4 0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP MODE FOR DISTANCE

PROTECTION
/ .
$IS0/44 ON
/ & &
$IS0/44 OFF $IS4ELE OFF
% # ( / %CHO FUNCTION FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTEC

TION
/ .
IS SWITCHED OFF ALSO TOGETHER WITH
/ & &
% - % 2 ' / # %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION

/ .
/ & & %MER OFF
4 ( % 2 - ! , / , 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

! , ! 2 - / . , 9
/ . /, ON
/ & & /, OFF /, 0ROT OFF
& 5 3 % & ! ) , &USE FAILURE MONITOR

/ .
/ & &
# ' #

% ! 2 4 ( & ! 5 , 4 %ARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS

! , ! 2 - / . , 9
/ . %& $ET ON
/ & & %& $ET OFF %& $ET OFF
(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED

% & $ 4
SYSTEMS DIRECTIONAL DEFINITE TIME WITH NON DIRECTIONAL
/ . BACK UP STAGE
/ & &
%& 0ROT OFF
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR

% & # / - 0 ! 2
EARTHED SYSTEMS
/ .
%& COMPON
/ & & %& COMPOFF %& $IR OFF
% & % # ( / %CHO FUNCTION FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT

PROTECTION
/ .
IS SWITCHED OFF TOGETHER WITH %& #/-0!2
/ & &
(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED

% & ) 4
SYSTEMS NON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE TIME
/ .
/ & &
%& 0ROT OFF
! 2 & 5 . # 4 )NTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION

/ .
!2 ON
/ & & !2 OFF !2 OFF
)NTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

3 9 . # # ( % # +
/ . 3YNC ON
/ & & 3YNC OFF 3YNC OFF

!TTENTION 7HEN THE INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLT
AGE CHECK FUNCTION IS SWITCHED OFF EACH CLOSING COM
MAND IS RELEASED WITHOUT ANY CHECK
3 9 . - ! . # , )NTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK DURING MANU

AL CLOSE
/ .
IS SWITCHED OFF TOGETHER WITH ADDRESS
/ & &
# ' #

)NFORMATION TO ,3! DURING TEST OPERATION ADDRESS BLOCK
7HEN THE RELAY IS CONNECTED TO A CENTRAL STORAGE DE &.O 3YS -- BLOCK FOR BLOCKING ALL MES
VICE OR LOCALIZED SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM AND SAGES AND MEASURED VALUES
THE PROTOCOL ACCORDING 6$%7:6%) )%#
IS USED THEN THE INFORMATIONS WHICH ARE )N ORDER TO CARRY OUT SWITCH OVER BY THE OPERATOR
TRANSMITTED TO THE CENTRAL COMPUTING SYSTEM CAN BE ENTRY OF THE CODEWORD IS NECESSARY REFER TO 3ECTION
INFLUENCED &OR THIS PURPOSE ADDRESS BLOCK IS AVAIL
ABLE PROVIDED THE 6$%7:6%) PROTOCOL )%#
4HE STANDARDIZED PROTOCOL ALLOWS ALL ANNUNCIATIONS HAS BEEN CHOSEN DURING CONFIGURATION
MESSAGES AND MEASURED VALUES TO BE TAGGED WITH OF THE SERIAL SYSTEM INTERFACE 3ECTION ADDRESS
THE ORIGIN TEST OPERATION WHICH OCCUR WHILE THE ANDOR 6$%7 #/-0!4)",% OR 6$%7 %8
4%.$%$ 4HE BLOCK IS CALLED UP BY PAGING WITH THE
RELAY IS TESTED 4HUS THESE MESSAGES CAN BE DISTIN
KEYS Å OR Ç OR DIRECTLY BY KEYING IN THE CODE $!
GUISHED FROM THOSE WHICH OCCUR DURING REAL OPERA
% 5SE KEY ! TO SCROLL TO ADDRESS "Y
TION !DDITIONALLY IT IS POSSIBLE TO BLOCK ALL ANNUNCI
PRESSING THE .O KEY . THE POSITIONS OF THIS SWITCH
ATIONS MESSAGES AND MEASURED VALUES TO ,3! DUR ARE CHANGED 4HE DESIRED POSITION MUST BE CON
ING TEST OPERATION FIRMED WITH THE ENTER KEY %
4HIS FEATURES CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED VIA BINARY INPUTS !S WITH EVERY SETTINGS OF THE DEVICE FOR WHICH CODE
OR USING THE INTEGRATED OPERATING KEYBOARD OR VIA THE WORD INPUT IS NECESSARY CODEWORD OPERATION MUST
OPERATING 0# INTERFACE BE TERMINATED 4HIS IS DONE BY USING THE KEY COMBI
NATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION KEY & FOL
)N ORDER TO ACCOMPLISH SWITCH OVER VIA BINARY IN LOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE
PUTS THE RESPECTIVE INPUTS MUST HAVE BEEN AS QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3 #ONFIRM WITH
SIGNED DURING MARSHALLING REFER TO 3ECTION THE 9ES KEY *9 THAT THE NEW SETTINGS SHALL BE
4HE FOLLOWING INPUT FUNCTIONS ARE SUITABLE COME VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE .O KEY . IN
STEAD CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE ABORTED IE ALL AL
&.O 3YS 4EST FOR TAGGING THE MESSAGES TERATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN CHANGED SINCE THE LAST
AND MEASURED VALUES WITH THE ORIGIN 4EST CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST 4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS
OPERATION CAN BE MADE INEFFECTIVE
3 9 3 6 $ % 7 "EGINNING OF BLOCK !NNUNCIATIONS AND MEASURED VAL

UES FOR THE SYSTEM INTERFACE WITH 6$%7:6%) COMPAT
! . . 5 . # - % ! 3 6 ! , IBLE PROTOCOL )%#
3 9 3 4 % 3 4 /NLY FOR 6$%7:6%) COMPATIBLE PROTOCOL )%#

/ & &
IN /. POSITION THE 6$%7:6%) COMPATIBLE ANNUNCI
/ . ATIONS )%# ARE ASSIGNED WITH THE ORIGIN
TEST OPERATION
3 9 3 " , / # + /NLY FOR 6$%7:6%) COMPATIBLE PROTOCOL )%#

/ & &
IN /. POSITION NO ANNUNCIATIONS AND MEASURED VALUES
/ . ARE TRANSMITTED TO THE SYSTEM INTERFACE
$O NOT FORGET TO SWITCH THE ADDRESSES BACK TO /&& AFTER HAVING FINISHED TEST OPERATIONS
# ' #

3ELECTION OF PARAMETER SETS ADDRESS BLOCK
5P TO DIFFERENT SETS OF PARAMETERS CAN BE SELECTED 4HE CORRESPONDING PROCEDURE IS USED FOR THE OTHER
FOR THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS IE THE ADDRESSES PARAMETER SETS
ABOVE AND BELOW 4HESE PARAMETER SETS
CAN BE SWITCHED OVER DURING OPERATION LOCALLY USING C +EY COMBINATION &
THE OPERATOR PANEL OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE US ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET !
ING A PERSONAL COMPUTER OR ALSO REMOTELY USING
BINARY INPUTS OR THE SYSTEM INTERFACE C +EY COMBINATION &
ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET "
4HE FIRST PARAMETER SET IS IDENTIFIED AS SET ! THE OTHER
SETS ARE " # AND $ %ACH OF THESE SETS HAS BEEN SET C +EY COMBINATION &
DURING PARAMETERIZING 3ECTION PROVIDED ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET #
THE SWITCH OVER FACILITY IS USED
C +EY COMBINATION &
ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET $
2EAD OUT OF SETTINGS OF A PARAMETER
4HE RELAY OPERATES ALWAYS WITH THE ACTIVE PARAMETER
SET SET EVEN DURING READ OUT OF THE PARAMETERS OF ANY
DESIRED PARAMETER SET 4HE CHANGE OVER PROCE
)N ORDER TO LOOK UP THE SETTINGS OF A PARAMETER SET IN DURE DESCRIBED HERE IS THEREFORE ONLY VALID FOR
THE DISPLAY IT IS SUFFICIENT TO GO TO ANY ADDRESS OF THE READ OUT OF PARAMETERS IN THE DISPLAY
FUNCTION PARAMETERS IE ADDRESSES ABOVE AND
BELOW EITHER BY DIRECT ADDRESSING USING KEY
$! ENTERING THE FOUR FIGURE ADDRESS CODE AND TER #HANGE OVER OF THE ACTIVE PARAMETER
MINATING WITH ENTER KEY % OR BY PAGING THROUGH THE SET FROM THE OPERATING PANEL
DISPLAY WITH Å OR Ç 9OU CAN SWITCH OVER TO LOOK UP A
DIFFERENT PARAMETER SET EG &OR CHANGE OVER TO A DIFFERENT PARAMETER SET IE IF
A DIFFERENT SET SHALL BE ACTIVATED THE ADDRESS BLOCK
0RESS KEY COMBINATION & IE FIRST THE FUNCTION IS TO BE USED &OR THIS CODEWORD ENTRY IS RE
KEY & AND THEN THE NUMBER KEY !LL DISPLAYED QUIRED
PARAMETERS NOW REFER TO PARAMETER SET "
4HE BLOCK FOR PROCESSING PARAMETER SETS IS REACHED
4HE PARAMETER SET IS INDICATED IN THE DISPLAY BY A BY PRESSING THE DIRECT ADDRESS KEY $! FOLLOWED BY
LEADING CHARACTER ! TO $ BEFORE THE ADDRESS NUM THE ADDRESS AND ENTER KEY % OR BY PAGING
THROUGH THE DISPLAY WITH Å OR Ç 4HE HEADING OF THE
BER INDICATING THE PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION
BLOCK WILL APPEAR
0 ! 2 ! - % 4 % 2 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 0ARAMETER CHANGE OVER

# ( ! . ' % / 6 % 2 PROCESSING OF PARAMETER SETS
)T IS POSSIBLE TO SCROLL THROUGH THE INDIVIDUAL ADDRESS KEY %

ES USING THE ! KEY OR TO SCROLL BACKWARDS WITH "
!S WITH EVERY SETTINGS OF THE DEVICE FOR WHICH CODE
!DDRESS SHOWS THE ACTUALLY ACTIVE PARAMETER WORD INPUT IS NECESSARY CODEWORD OPERATION MUST
SET WITH WHICH THE RELAY OPERATES BE TERMINATED 4HIS IS DONE BY USING THE KEY COMBI
NATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION KEY & FOL
)N ORDER TO SWITCH OVER TO A DIFFERENT PARAMETER SET LOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE
SCROLL ON WITH ! TO ADDRESS 5SING THE QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3 #ONFIRM WITH
.O KEY . YOU CAN CHANGE TO ANY DESIRED PARAM THE 9ES KEY 9 THAT THE NEW SETTINGS SHALL BECOME
ETER SET ALTERNATIVELY YOU CAN DECIDE THAT THE PA VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE .O KEY . INSTEAD
RAMETER SETS ARE TO BE SWITCHED OVER FROM BINARY IN CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE ABORTED IE ALL ALTER
PUTS OR VIA THE SYSTEM INTERFACE USINF THE 6$%7 ATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN CHANGED SINCE THE LAST
:6%) PROTOCOL )%# )F THE DESIRED SET CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST 4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS
OR POSSIBILITY APPEARS IN THE DISPLAY PRESS THE ENTER CAN BE MADE INEFFECTIVE
# ' #

! # 4 ) 6 0 ! 2 ! - !DDRESS SHOWS THE ACTUALLY ACTIVE PARAMETER SET

3 % 4 !
! # 4 ) 6 ! 4 ) / . 5SE THE .O KEY . TO PAGE THROUGH THE ALTERNATIVE

POSSIBILITIES 4HE DESIRED POSSIBILITY IS SELECTED BY
3 % 4 ! PRESSING THE ENTER KEY %
3 % 4 "
3 % 4 #
3 % 4 $
)F YOU SELECT 3%4 "9 ").).054 THEN THE PARAMETER
3 % 4 " 9 " ) . ) . 0 5 4 SET CAN BE CHANGED OVER VIA BINARY INPUTS SEE 3EC
TION
3 % 4 " 9 , 3 ! # / . 4 2 )F YOU SELECT 3%4 "9 ,3! #/.42 THEN THE PARAMETER
SET CAN BE CHANGED OVER VIA THE SYSTEM INTERFACE
#HANGE OVER OF THE ACTIVE PARAMETER

SET VIA BINARY INPUTS "INARY INPUT CAUSES
0ARAM3ELEC 0ARAM3ELEC ACTIVE SET
)F CHANGE OVER OF PARAMETER SETS IS INTENDED TO BE
CARRIED OUT VIA BINARY INPUTS THE FOLLOWING IS TO BE NO NO 3ET !
HEEDED
YES NO 3ET "
,OCALLY IE FROM THE OPERATOR PANEL OR FROM 0# VIA NO YES 3ET #
THE OPERATING INTERFACE !#4)6!4)/. MUST BE YES YES 3ET $
SWITCHED TO 3%4 "9 ").).054 REFER 3ECTION
NO INPUT NOT ENERGIZED
YES INPUT ENERGIZED
LOGICAL BINARY INPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR CONTROL OF 4ABLE 0ARAMETER SELECTION VIA BINARY INPUT
THE PARAMETER SETS 4HESE BINARY INPUTS ARE
DESIGNATED 0ARAM3ELEC AND 0ARAM
3ELEC &.O AND
3ELECTOR SWITCH FOR
4HE LOGICAL BINARY INPUTS MUST BE ALLOCATED TO PARAM SET
PHYSICAL INPUT MODULES REFER 3ECTION IN OR !
DER TO ALLOW CONTROL !N INPUT IS TREATED AS NOT EN "
ERGIZED WHEN IT IS NOT ASSIGNED TO ANY PHYSICAL IN , ,
#
PUT
$ "INARY INPUT
4HE CONTROL INPUT SIGNALS MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY 0ARAM3ELEC
PRESENT AS LONG AS THE SELECTED PARAMETER SET
SHALL BE ACTIVE !
"
4HE ACTIVE PARAMETER SETS ARE ASSIGNED TO THE LOGICAL , #
BINARY INPUTS AS SHOWN IN 4ABLE ,
$
"INARY INPUT
! SIMPLIFIED CONNECTION EXAMPLE IS SHOWN IN &IGURE 0ARAM3ELEC
/F COURSE THE BINARY INPUTS MUST BE DECLARED IN
&IGURE #ONNECTION SCHEME FOR PARAMETER
NORMALLY OPEN ./ MODE
CHANGE OVER VIA BINARY INPUTS
# ' #

4ESTING AND COMMISSIONING
'ENERAL
0REREQUISITE FOR COMMISSIONING IS THE COMPLETION OF

THE PREPARATION PROCEDURES DETAILED IN #HAPTER $!.'%2
3ECONDARY CONNECTIONS OF THE CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS MUST BE SHORT CIRCUITED
BEFORE THE CURRENT LEADS TO THE RELAY ARE
INTERRUPTED
7ARNING )F A TEST SWITCH IS INSTALLED WHICH AUTOMATI
CALLY SHORT CIRCUITS THE CURRENT TRANSFORM
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THIS ER SECONDARY LEADS IT IS SUFFICIENT TO SET THIS
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT DURING OPERATION SWITCH TO THE 4EST POSITION 4HE SHORT
.ON OBSERVANCE OF THE SAFETY RULES CAN CIRCUIT SWITCH MUST BE CHECKED BEFORE
RESULT IN SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPER HAND REFER 3ECTION
TY DAMAGE
/NLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHALL WORK ON

AND AROUND THIS EQUIPMENT AFTER BECOM )T IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE ACTUAL SETTINGS FOR THE
ING THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ALL WARNINGS RELAY BE USED FOR THE TESTING PROCEDURE )F THESE VAL
AND SAFETY NOTICES OF THIS MANUAL AS WELL UES ARE NOT YET AVAILABLE TEST THE RELAY WITH THE FAC
AS WITH THE APPLICABLE SAFETY REGULATIONS TORY SETTINGS )N THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST
SEQUENCE THE PRESET SETTINGS ARE ASSUMED UNLESS
0ARTICULAR ATTENTION MUST BE DRAWN TO THE OTHERWISE NOTED FOR DIFFERENT SETTING VALUES FORMU
FOLLOWING LAE ARE GIVEN WHERE NECESSARY
! 4HE EARTHING SCREW OF THE DEVICE
&OR THE FUNCTIONAL TEST A THREE PHASE SYMMETRICAL
MUST BE CONNECTED SOLIDLY TO THE
VOLTAGE SOURCE WITH INDIVIDUALLY ADJUSTABLE VOLTAGE
PROTECTIVE EARTH CONDUCTOR BEFORE
ANY OTHER CONNECTION IS MADE OUTPUTS TOGETHER WITH A THREE PHASE SYMMETRICAL
CURRENT SOURCE WITH INDIVIDUALLY ADJUSTABLE CURRENTS
! (AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT
ON ALL CIRCUITS AND COMPONENTS CON SHOULD BE AVAILABLE &OR CHECKING THE DISTANCE
NECTED TO THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE OR TO THE ZONES !2 TELEPROTECTION AND BACK UP OVERCUR
MEASURING AND TEST QUANTITIES RENT A SINGLE PHASE CURRENT SOURCE IS SUFFICIENT BUT
! (AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT THIS IS NOT ADEQUATE FOR A CORRECT FUNCTIONAL CHECK OF
IN THE DEVICE EVEN AFTER DISCONNEC THE MEASURED VALUE MONITORING SYSTEMS AND POWER
TION OF THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE STORAGE SWING DETECTOR 0HASE DISPLACEMENT BETWEEN TEST
CAPACITORS CURRENT )0 AND TEST VOLTAGE 50 SHOULD PREFERABLY BE
! 4HE LIMIT VALUES GIVEN IN THE 4ECHNI CONTINUOUSLY ADJUSTABLE BUT AT LEAST SETTINGS OF ^
CAL DATA 3ECTION MUST NOT BE EX AND ^ SHALL BE AVAILABLE
CEEDED AT ALL NOT EVEN DURING TESTING
AND COMMISSIONING )F UNSYMMETRICAL CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES OCCUR DURING
THE TESTS IT IS LIKELY THAT THE ASYMMETRY MONITORING WILL
FREQUENTLY OPERATE 4HIS IS OF NO CONCERN BECAUSE
THE CONDITION OF STEADY STATE MEASURED VALUES IS
MONITORED AND UNDER NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
7HEN TESTING THE UNIT WITH A SECONDARY INJECTION TEST THESE ARE SYMMETRICAL UNDER SHORT CIRCUIT CONDI
SET IT MUST BE ENSURED THAT NO OTHER MEASURED VAL TIONS THESE MONITORING SYSTEMS ARE NOT EFFECTIVE !D
UES ARE CONNECTED AND THAT THE TRIPPING LEADS TO THE DITIONALLY UNSYMMETRICAL VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE THE
CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP COILS HAVE BEEN INTERRUPTED FUSE FAILURE MONITOR TO OPERATE 4HIS SWITCHES THE DIS
TANCE PROTECTION OUT OF SERVICE SO THAT DISTANCE MEA
SUREMENT IS NOT POSSIBLE )F THIS HAPPENS THIS MONI
TORING MUST EITHER BE MADE INEFFECTIVE DURING THE TEST
BY SWITCHING IT /&& UNDER !DDRESS OR IT MUST
BE ENSURED THAT DURING ALL TESTS WITHOUT EARTH CURRENT
DETECTION NO RESIDUAL VOLTAGE OCCURS
# ' #

./4% 4HE ACCURACY WHICH CAN BE ACHIEVED DURING !FTER TESTS WHICH CAUSE ,%$ INDICATIONS TO APPEAR
TESTING DEPENDS ON THE ACCURACY OF THE TESTING THESE SHOULD BE RESET AT LEAST ONCE BY EACH OF THE
EQUIPMENT 4HE ACCURACY VALUES SPECIFIED IN THE POSSIBLE METHODS THE RESET BUTTON ON THE FRONT PLATE
4ECHNICAL DATA CAN ONLY BE REPRODUCED UNDER THE AND VIA THE REMOTE RESET RELAY SEE CONNECTION DIA
REFERENCE CONDITIONS SET DOWN IN )%# RESP 6$% GRAMS !PPENDIX ! )F THE RESET FUNCTIONS HAVE BEEN
PART AND WITH THE USE OF PRECISION MEASUR TESTED RESETTING THE STORED INDICATIONS IS NO MORE
ING INSTRUMENTS 4HE TESTS ARE THEREFORE TO BE LOOKED NECESSARY AS THEY ARE ERASED AUTOMATICALLY WITH
UPON PURELY AS FUNCTIONAL TESTS EACH NEW PICK UP OF THE RELAY AND REPLACED BY THE
NEW ANNUNCIATIONS
$URING ALL THE TESTS IT IS IMPORTANT TO ENSURE THAT THE
CORRECT COMMAND TRIP CONTACTS CLOSE THAT THE ./4% 7HEN THE RELAY IS CONFIGURED SUCH THAT THE
PROPER INDICATIONS APPEAR AT THE ,%$S AND THE OUT POSITION OF THE AUXILIARY CONTACT OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
PUT RELAYS FOR REMOTE SIGNALLING )F THE RELAY IS CON IS PROCESSED IE THE CORRESPONDING INPUT IS MAR
NECTED TO A CENTRAL MEMORY DEVICE VIA THE SERIAL IN SHALLED THE TRIP COMMAND OF THE RELAY IS MAINTAINED
TERFACE CORRECT COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE RELAY AS LONG AS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS SIGNALLED TO BE
AND THE MASTER STATION MUST BE CHECKED CLOSED "UT THE TRIP COMMAND IS DE ENERGIZED AFTER
S PROVIDED THE FAULT CURRENT IS SWITCHED OFF
4ESTING THE OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION STAGE AND EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT
TIME PROTECTION
!PPLY SYMMETRICAL RATED VOLTAGES TO ALL THREE PHASES 7HEN FOR TEST CURRENT PHASE EARTH THE SET VALUE FOR
TO AVOID IMMEDIATE TRIP AFTER PICK UP )PH FACTORY SETTING X ). IS EXCEEDED THE
PICK UP INDICATION FOR )% ,%$ AT FACTORY SETTING
4ESTING CAN BE PERFORMED WITH SINGLE PHASE TWO AND PICK UP INDICATION APPEARS FOR THE TESTED
PHASE OR THREE PHASE TEST CURRENT WITHOUT DIFFICUL PHASE ,%$ FOR , OR ,%$ FOR , OR ,%$ FOR , AT
TIES FACTORY SETTING 7HEN TESTING PHASE PHASE PICK
UP INDICATION APPEARS FOR THE ASSOCIATED PHASES
3ETTING PARAMETER )PH ADDRESS IS DECISIVE
FOR THE PHASE CURRENTS &OR SETTING VALUES UP TO &INAL TIMES ARE NORMALLY TESTED AT X SETTING VALUE
X ). THE CURRENT CAN BE INCREASED GRADUALLY IN ANY $EPENDENT UPON POLARITY OF THE VOLTAGE DIRECTIONAL
PHASE UNTIL THE STAGE PICKS UP FINAL TIME 4 OR NON DIRECTIONAL FINAL TIME 4 WILL AP
PLY ADDRESS OR CONSIDER ALSO ADDRESS
FOR DIRECTIONAL TRIP )T MUST BE NOTED THAT THE SET
#AUTION TIMES ARE PURE DELAY TIMES OPERATING TIMES OF THE

MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS ARE NOT INCLUDED
4EST CURRENTS LARGER THAN TIMES ). MAY
OVERLOAD AND DAMAGE THE RELAY IF APPLIED
0UT VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER MCB IN TRIPPED POSITION
CONTINUOUSLY REFER TO 3ECTION FOR
OVERLOAD CAPABILITY /BSERVE A COOLING 2EPEAT TIME MEASUREMENT FOR ONE PHASE .OW THE
DOWN PERIOD DELAY TIME FOR EMERGENCY BACK UP OPERATION IS
APPLICABLE 4 ) ADDRESS 4 ) ADDRESS
4 )% ADDRESS ! PREREQUISITE IS THAT
&OR TESTS CURRENTS ABOVE X ). MEASUREMENT SHALL BE THE FUNCTION %-%2' /# %8)34 IS SELECTED UNDER
PERFORMED DYNAMICALLY )T SHOULD BE ENSURED THAT ADDRESS IN THE SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS 3ECTION
THE RELAY PICKS UP AT TIMES SETTING VALUE AND DOES AND THIS FUNCTION IS SWITCHED /. UNDER AD
NOT PICK UP AT TIMES SETTING VALUE 4HE RESET VALUE DRESS
SHOULD LIE AT OF THE PICK UP VALUE
# ' #

4ESTING THE VOLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION 5) IF FITTED
#LOSE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER MCB 3LOWLY DECREASE VOLTAGE UNTIL THE FAULT DETECTOR PICKS
UP
4ESTING CAN BE PERFORMED WITH SINGLE PHASE TWO C 7HEN THE TEST VOLTAGE GOES BELOW THE SET VALUE OF
PHASE OR THREE PHASE TEST CURRENT WITHOUT DIFFICUL ADDRESS 6 AT DELIVERY PICK UP AN
TIES NUNCIATION OCCURS FOR THE ASSOCIATED PHASE
$IST&LT , AND ,%$ AT DELIVERY FOR
3ET TEST VOLTAGE TO 6 PHASE , FOR A DIFFERENT PHASE ACCORDINGLY
$IST&LT , AND ,%$ FOR ,
3LOWLY INCREASE TEST CURRENT OF ONE PHASE UNTIL THE $IST&LT , AND ,%$ FOR ,
FAULT DETECTOR PICKS UP
)F VOLTAGE CONTROL IS CARRIED OUT WITH 5PH PH SET TEST
C 7HEN THE TEST CURRENT EXCEEDS THE SETTING VALUE VOLTAGE OF THE TESTED LOOP TO APPROXIMATELY THE RATED
ADDRESS TIMES ). WHEN DELIVERED VOLTAGE SET TEST CURRENT OF BOTH THE PHASES TO TWICE
PICK UP ANNUNCIATION OCCURS FOR THE ASSOCIATED THE SETTING VALUE )PH ADDRESS PHASE RELA
PHASES TIONSHIP OF TEST VOLTAGE AND TEST CURRENT IS IRRELEVANT
$IST&LT , AND ,%$ WHEN DELIVERED FOR 4HE PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGE IS DECISIVE FOR PICK
PHASE , FOR A DIFFERENT PHASE ACCORDINGLY UP
,%$ FOR , ,%$ FOR ,
3WITCH OFF TEST CURRENT 3LOWLY DECREASE VOLTAGE UNTIL THE FAULT DETECTOR PICKS
UP
4HE VOLTAGE DEPENDENT BRANCH OF THE PICK UP CHAR C 7HEN THE TEST VOLTAGE GETS SMALLER THAN THE SET
ACTERISTIC IS SHOWN IN &IGURE 7HEN DELIVERED THE VALUE OF ADDRESS 6 AT DELIVERY
SLOPE OF THE VOLTAGE DEPENDENT BRANCH IS PICK UP ANNUNCIATION OCCURS FOR BOTH THE ASSO
CIATED PHASES
$IST&LT, AND ,%$ AND ,%$ AT DELIV
ERY FOR PHASE LOOP , , FOR A DIFFERENT LOOP AC
56
CORDINGLY $IST&LT, AND ,%$ AND
,%$ FOR PHASE LOOP , , $IST&LT,
AND ,%$ AND ,%$ FOR PHASE LOOP , ,

4HE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED ABOVE IS VALID FOR THE PRE

5) SET VALUES OF 5PHE) ADDRESS 5PHE)
ADDRESS 5PHPH) ADDRESS AND
5) 5PHPH) ADDRESS )N THIS CASE THE SLOPE OF
THE VOLTAGE DEPENDENT BRANCH OF THE PICK UP CHAR
ACTERISTIC IS IE 5PHE) 5PHE) AND

5PHPH) 5PHPH)
)F THE VOLTAGE DEPENDENT BRANCH IS INCLINED THE EX

PECTED PICK UP VALUE OF THE VOLTAGE CAN BE CALCU
LATED ACCORDING THE FOLLOWING FORMULA PROVIDED THE
TEST CURRENT IS TIMES THE SETTING VALUE OF )PH
)PH )PH

0ICK UP VALUE 5
)PH
5) ; 5) 5) =
)). )PH )PH
&IGURE 6OLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION 5)
CHARACTERISTIC WHERE
5) IS THE SETTING VALUE 5PHE) ADDRESS

)F VOLTAGE CONTROL IS CARRIED OUT WITH 5PH % SET TEST WITH 5PH E CONTROL BUT 5PHPH) ADDRESS
VOLTAGE OF THE TESTED PHASE TO APPROXIMATELY THE WITH 5PH PH CONTROL
RATED PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE SET TEST CURRENT OF
THE SAME PHASE TO TWICE THE SETTING VALUE )PH AD 5) IS THE SETTING VALUE 5PHE) ADDRESS
DRESS 4HE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE IS DECI WITH 5PH E CONTROL BUT 5PHPH) ADDRESS
SIVE FOR PICK UP WITH 5PH PH CONTROL
# ' #

4ESTING THE IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION IF FITTED
#LOSE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER MCB $ETERMINE THE THRESHOLD POINT BY SLOW REDUCTION OF
THE VOLTAGE #HECK INDICATORS AND OUTPUTS 3INCE THE
!LWAYS APPLY THREE PHASE TEST VOLTAGE ENSURE FAULT DETECTION POLYGON IS MADE UP OF STRAIGHT LINES
CLOCKWISE PHASE ROTATION &IGURE DIFFERENT FORMULAE MUST BE USED FOR THE
THRESHOLD VOLTAGES DEPENDENT UPON THE INTERSEC
&EED A TEST CURRENT )0 X ). INTO THE LOOP UNDER TEST TIONS OF THESE LINES 4HE GENERAL FORMULAE ARE
)F THE TEST VOLTAGE WOULD EXCEED RATED VOLTAGE WHEN
THE THRESHOLD IS REACHED REDUCE TEST CURRENT BUT &OR THE REACTANCE INTERSECTIONS 8 REACH
ONLY SO FAR THAT OPERATION OF MINIMUM CURRENT DETEC
TION )PH ADDRESS IS GUARANTEED 4HE TEST 506 +8 8q! )0).
CURRENT MUST BE KEPT CONSTANT DURING A TEST
&OR THE RESISTANCE INTERSECTIONS 2 LIMITATION
506 +2 2! )0).
8 6ALIDITY RANGE +8 WHERE )0 TEST CURRENT

6ALIDITY
RANGE +2 8! ). RATED CURRENT OF RELAY
50 TEST VOLTAGE AT THRESHOLD
8q! SETTING VALUE 8! FOR 8 AXIS POSI
TIVE OR SETTING VALUE 8 ! FOR 8 AXIS
50 NEGATIVE
2! SETTING VALUE 2! OR 2!% FOR 2 AXIS
POSITIVE FOR 2 AXIS NEGATIVE

+8 FACTOR FOR 8 INTERSECTION ACCORDING
4ABLE
4ABLE
0 )0
2! 2!%
2
&OR PHASE TO EARTH TESTING THE TEST CURRENT IS
APPLIED TO ONE PHASE AND THE EARTH CURRENT PATH
4EST VOLTAGE IS THE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE
&OR TESTING PHASE TO PHASE THE CURRENT MUST FLOW

THROUGH THE TESTED PHASES IN OPPOSITE DIRECTIONS
4EST VOLTAGE IS THE PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGE )T IS ES
6ALIDITY
RANGE +2
SENTIAL TO ENSURE ABSOLUTE SYMMETRY OF THE TWO
PHASE VOLTAGES OTHERWISE ERROR WILL OCCUR
8 !
&OR THREE PHASE TESTING IT IS REASONABLE TO MEA
6ALIDITY RANGE +8 SURE ONE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE AND THE ASSO
CIATED PHASE CURRENT
&IGURE )MPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION CHARACTER
ISTIC &OR THE FACTORY SET VALUES AND )0). THE RESULTANT
VOLTAGES WILL BE AS 4ABLE
O O O O O
WITH FAULT TYPE 0 0 0 0
PHASE 50 6 50 6 50 6 50 6
PHASE 50 6 50 6 50 6 50 6
PHASE 50 6 50 6 50 6 50 6
4ABLE 4EST VOLTAGES 50 WITH TEST CURRENT )0 | ). AND PRESETTING
# ' #

+8 +2
WITH FAULT TYPE
0 ^^ GENERAL 0 ^^ GENERAL
PHASE
SIN 0 COS 0

PHASE COS 0
SIN 0
8 %8 , 2 %2 ,
PHASE 8% 8, 2% 2,
SIN 0 COS 0
4ABLE 4EST FACTORS +8 AND +2 FOR INDIVIDUAL SETTINGS
)F DIFFERENT VALUES HAVE BEEN SET FOR 2! ADDRESS 4ESTING THE DISTANCE ZONES
AND 2! ADDRESS THEN 2! IS VALID FOR
PHASE ANGLES BETWEEN 0() ! AND 0() ! AD !LWAYS APPLY THREE PHASE TEST VOLTAGE ENSURE
DRESS AND BETWEEN THE COMPLEMENT ANGLES CLOCKWISE PHASE ROTATION +EEP THE VOLTAGES IN THE
0() ! AND 0() ! &OR OTHER PHASE UNTESTED PHASES AT APPROXIMATELY RATED VALUE
ANGLES SETTING VALUE 2! IS DECISIVE
&EED A TEST CURRENT )0 ). INTO THE LOOP UNDER TEST
)F DIFFERENT VALUES HAVE BEEN SET FOR 2!% ADDRESS )F THE TEST VOLTAGE WOULD EXCEED RATED VOLTAGE WHEN
AND 2!% ADDRESS THEN 2!% IS VALID THE THRESHOLD IS REACHED REDUCE TEST CURRENT BUT
FOR PHASE ANGLES BETWEEN 0() !% AND 0() !% ONLY SO FAR THAT OPERATION OF THE OVERCURRENT DETEC
ADDRESS AND BETWEEN THE COMPLEMENT TION ADDRESS OR OF THE MINIMUM CURRENT DE
ANGLES 0() !% AND 0() !% &OR DIF TECTION )PH IS GUARANTEED ADDRESS OR
FERENT PHASE ANGLES SETTING VALUE 2!% IS DECISIVE 4HE TEST CURRENT MUST BE KEPT CONSTANT DURING A TEST
4ABLE GIVES THE FACTORS +8 AND +2 FOR YOUR OWN
SETTINGS FOR TEST ANGLES 0 AND AND THE
GENERALLY APPLICABLE FORMULAE
J8
6ALIDITY RANGE + 8
8
5 0
6ALIDITY RANGE + 2
^
0
) 0 2 2 %
^
2
&IGURE $ISTANCE ZONE CHARACTERISTICS
# ' #

$ETERMINE THE THRESHOLD POINT BY SLOW REDUCTION OF

THE VOLTAGE #HECK INDICATORS AND OUTPUTS 3INCE THE :ONE : 0 0
TRIPPING POLYGON IS MADE UP OF STRAIGHT LINES &IGURE
DIFFERENT FORMULAE MUST BE USED FOR THE THRESH PHASE 50 6 50 6
OLD VOLTAGES DEPENDENT UPON THE INTERSECTION OF PHASE 50 6 50 6
THESE LINES 4HE GENERAL FORMULAE ARE PHASE 50 6 50 6
&OR THE REACTANCE INTERSECTIONS 8 REACH

4ABLE 4EST VOLTAGES 50 FOR ZONE : AT )0
506 +8 8:ONE )0). | ). AND PRE SETTING
&OR THE RESISTANCE INTERSECTIONS 2 LIMITATION

506 +2 2:ONE )0).
:ONE : 0 0
WHERE )0 TEST CURRENT
). RATED CURRENT OF RELAY
PHASE 50 6 50 6
50 TEST VOLTAGE AT THRESHOLD
8:ONE SETTING VALUE 8 OF THE DISTANCE ZONE PHASE 50 6 50 6
TO BE CHECKED PHASE 50 6 50 6
2:ONE SETTING VALUE 2 OR 2% OF THE DISTANCE
ZONE TO BE CHECKED 4ABLE 4EST VOLTAGES 50 FOR ZONE : AT )0
+8 FACTOR FOR 8 INTERSECTION ACCORDING | ). AND PRE SETTING
4ABLE
4ABLE
/VERREACH ZONE :" CAN ONLY BE CHECKED UNDER
&OR PHASE TO EARTH TESTING THE THE TEST CURRENT IS STEADY STATE CONDITIONS WHEN AN INPUT RELAY HAS
APPLIED TO ONE PHASE AND THE EARTH CURRENT PATH BEEN ALLOCATED TO THE INPUT FUNCTION %XTENS
4EST VOLTAGE IS THE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE :" AND IS ENERGIZED &.O NOT ALLOCATED AT
DELIVERY
&OR TESTING PHASE TO PHASE THE TEST CURRENT MUST
FLOW THROUGH THE TESTED PHASES IN OPPOSITE DIREC
TIONS 4EST VOLTAGE IS THE PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGE :ONE :" 0 0
)T IS ESSENTIAL TO ENSURE ABSOLUTE SYMMETRY OF THE TWO
PHASE VOLTAGES OTHERWISE ERROR WILL OCCUR PHASE 50 6 50 6
PHASE 50 6 50 6
&OR THREE PHASE TESTING IT IS REASONABLE TO MEA PHASE 50 6 50 6
SURE ONE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE AND THE ASSO
CIATED PHASE CURRENT
4ABLE 4EST VOLTAGES 50 FOR ZONE :" AT )0 | ).
&OR THE FACTORY SET VALUES AND )0). THE RESULTANT AND PRE SETTING
VOLTAGES WILL BE AS 4ABLES TO
/VERREACH ZONE :, CAN ONLY BE CHECKED UNDER
4ABLE GIVES THE FACTORS +8 AND +2 FOR YOUR OWN STEADY STATE CONDITIONS WHEN AN INPUT RELAY HAS
SETTINGS FOR TEST ANGLES 0 ^ AND ^ AND THE BEEN ALLOCATED TO THE INPUT FUNCTION %XTENS :,
GENERALLY APPLICABLE FORMULAE AND IS ENERGIZED &.O NOT ALLOCATED AT DELIV
ERY
:ONE : :ONE :, 0 0

0 0
PHASE 50 6 50 6 PHASE 50 6 50 6
PHASE 50 6 50 6 PHASE 50 6 50 6
PHASE 50 6 50 6 PHASE 50 6 50 6
4ABLE 4EST VOLTAGES 50 FOR ZONE : AT )0 4ABLE 4EST VOLTAGES 50 FOR ZONE :, AT )0
| ). AND PRE SETTING | ). AND PRE SETTING
# ' #

4ESTING THE GRADING TIMES
&OR EACH TIME STAGE AT LEAST ONE ADDITIONAL DYNAMIC 7HEN MEASURING THE RESPONSE TIMES DO NOT FORGET
TEST SHOULD BE MADE TO CHECK THE CORRECT SIGNALLING THAT THE PROGRAMMED VALUES ARE DELAY TIMES 4HE IN
OF THE TIME STAGES &OR THIS PURPOSE A SHORT CIRCUIT HERENT MEASUREMENT AND TRIP TIME OF THE RELAY IS AD
APPROXIMATELY IN THE MIDDLE OF TWO ZONES WOULD BE DITIONAL
SIMULATED
4ESTING THE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION FUNCTIONS
7HEN PROGRAMMING THE SCOPE OF THE FUNCTIONS OF THE 0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH PROCEDURES
RELAY 3ECTION IT IS DECIDED WHETHER THE DIS
TANCE PROTECTION OPERATES WITH INTERTRIP FACILITY OR 4HE TRANSMISSION SIGNAL IS CHECKED BY SIMULATION OF
COMPARISON PROTECTION OR IF NO TELEPROTECTION WILL BE A SHORT CIRCUIT IN THE APPLICABLE ZONE
USED ADDRESS 7HEN USING A TELEPROTECTION
FEATURE TRANSMISSION AND RECEIVER CIRCUITS MUST BE 7ITH THE RELEASE PROCEDURES 0/44 -/$% :"
CHECKED 3INCE CORRECT FUNCTION OF THE OVERREACHING 2%,%!3% OR :" 5.",/#+ ADDRESS A
ZONE IS A PREREQUISITE THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION SHORT CIRCUIT IS SIMULATED IN :"
AS FAR AS FITTED SHOULD BE SWITCHED OFF ADDRESS
#OMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE DEVICES AND THE WITH 0/44 -/$% &$ $)2%# 2%,%!3% OR &$
CARRIER CHANNEL WILL BE CHECKED DURING COMMISSION 5.",/#+ FAULT DETECTION IN THE FORWARD DIRECTION
ING WITH PRIMARY VALUES SEE 3ECTION IS SIMULATED
WITH THE BLOCKING PROCEDURE 0/44 -/$% :"

",/#+).' OR 0),/4 7)2% #/-0 A SHORT CIRCUIT IN
THE REVERSE DIRECTION IS SIMULATED
0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH PROCEDURES
)N ALL THESE CASES THE TRANSMITTING RELAY CLOSES ITS
3IMULATE A SHORT CIRCUIT IN ZONE : &OR THE DURATION WORKING CONTACT
OF THE COMMAND RESPECTIVELY EXTENDED BY TRANS
MISSION SIGNAL PROLONGATION 4 3%.$ 02, AD 3IMILARLY TO CHECK THE RECEIVER CIRCUIT A SHORT CIRCUIT
DRESS THE TRANSMISSION SIGNAL APPEARS IS SIMULATED AND SIMULTANEOUSLY AN EXTERNAL BINARY
INPUT $IS 2ECEPT &.O IS ENERGIZED AS
7ITH PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP IN ZONE :" FOLLOWS
ADDRESS 0544 -/$% :" !##%,%2!
4)/. SIMULATE A SHORT CIRCUIT IN :" BUT BEYOND : WITH 0/44 -/$% :" 2%,%!3% OR :" 5.
4RIPPING RESULTS IMMEDIATELY THE RECEIVED SIGNAL ",/#+ ADDRESS A SHORT CIRCUIT IN :" BUT
$IS 2ECEPT &.O APPEARS RESPECTIVE BEYOND : IMMEDIATE TRIP RESULTS RESPECTIVELY
LY IN 4" OR WITHOUT RECEIVED SIGNAL FIRST IN A 4"
DELAYED STAGE
WITH 0/44 -/$% &$ $)2%# 2%,%!3% OR &$
&OR THE CONDITION PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER 5.",/#+ WITHIN THE FAULT DETECTION ZONE BEYOND
TRIP BY FAULT DETECTION ADDRESS &$ !##%, :" IMMEDIATE TRIP RESULTS
%2!4)/. THE RELAY MUST TRIP IMMEDIATELY UPON RE
CEIPT OF THE SIGNAL $IS 2ECEPT &.O AS WITH 0/44 -/$% :" ",/#+ OR 0),/4 7)2%
LONG AS IT HAS ALREADY PICKED UP #/-0 OR 2%6%23% ).4%2,/#+ WITHIN :" BUT
BEYOND : TRIPPING CAN ONLY OCCUR IN A HIGHER
STAGE
# ' #

4ESTING THE USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS
4HE OPERATION OF THE USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS IS 7HEN MEASURING THE DELAY TIMES IT MUST BE NOTED
WIDELY DEPENDENT OF THE APPLICATION 4HE INPUT CON THAT THE SET TIME PICK UP ANDOR DROP OFF DELAYS
DITION HAVE TO BE PRODUCED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE DO NOT INCLUDE THE INHERENT TIME OF THE INPUT AND OUT
INTENDED FUNCTION AND THE OUTPUT CONDITIONS MUST PUT MODULES THESE ARE ADDITIONAL
BE CHECKED
4ESTING THE THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION FUNCTION
4HE OVERLOAD FUNCTION CAN ONLY BE TESTED IF IT HAS 4O CHECK THE TIME CONSTANT THE CURRENT INPUT IS SIM
BEEN CONFIGURED AS 4(%2-!, /, %8)34 ADDRESS PLY SUBJECTED TO X THE PICK UP VALUE I E
REFER 3ECTION AND PARAMETERIZED AS OP
ERATIVE UNDER ADDRESS X K X ).
4HE BASIS CURRENT FOR THE DETECTION OF OVERLOAD IS AL 4RIPPING WILL THEN BE INITIATED AFTER A TIME INTERVAL
WAYS THE RATED CURRENT OF THE DEVICE /VERLOAD DATA WHICH CORRESPONDS TO HALF THE TIME CONSTANT
ARE CALCULATED FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL PHASE )F THE TESTS
ARE PERFORMED WITH THREE PHASE CURRENTS NO FURTHER )T IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO CHECK THE TRIP CHARACTERISTIC &IG
CONDITIONS ARE TO BE CONSIDERED 7HEN TESTING WITH A URE )T MUST BE NOTED THAT BEFORE EACH MEASURE
SINGLE PHASE CURRENT IT MUST BE NOTED THAT THE AV MENT THE TEMPERATURE RISE MUST BE REDUCED TO ZERO
ERAGE VALUE DIFFERS FROM THE EXPECTED RESULT WHEN 4HIS CAN BE ACHIEVED BY EITHER DE ACTIVATING AND
MEAN HAS BEEN SET FOR THE OPERATION MODE UNDER RE ACTIVATING THE OVERLOAD FUNCTION ADDRESS
ADDRESS REFER TO 3ECTION OR BY OBSERVING A CURRENT FREE PERIOD OF AT LEAST X Ç
7HEN APPLYING A TEST CURRENT

#AUTION
K | ).
OVERLOAD AND DAMAGE THE RELAY IF APPLIED
TRIPPING MUST NOT OCCUR !FTER AN APPROPRIATE TIME CONTINUOUSLY REFER TO 3ECTION FOR
APPROXIMATELY X Ç A STEADY STATE TEMPERATURE OVERLOAD CAPABILITY /BSERVE A COOLING
RISE ACCORDING TO THE FOLLOWING RELATIONSHIP IS ESTAB DOWN PERIOD
LISHED
)F TESTING WITH PRELOAD IS PERFORMED THEN IT MUST BE
TRIP K ENSURED THAT A CONDITION OF THERMAL EQUILIBRIUM HAS
BEEN ESTABLISHED BEFORE TIME MEASUREMENT COM
4HIS VALUE CAN BE READ OUT IN ADDRESS BLOCK FOR MENCES 4HIS IS THE CASE WHEN THE PRELOAD HAS
EACH PHASE BEEN APPLIED CONSTANTLY FOR A PERIOD OF AT LEAST X Ç
4ESTING THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION FUNCTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS IF FITTED
4ESTING OF THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS NOT COMPLETELY AND POLARITY OF THE MEASURING TRANSFORMER CONNEC
POSSIBLE WITH CONVENTIONAL TEST SETS SINCE THE SIMU TIONS ESSENTIAL FOR PROPER EARTH FAULT DETECTION CAN
LATION OF AN EARTH FAULT REQUIRES A COMPLETE DISPLACE ONLY BE TESTED WHEN PRIMARY LOAD CURRENT IS AVAILABLE
MENT OF THE VOLTAGE TRIANGLE 4HE CORRECT RELATIONSHIP DURING COMMISSIONING SEE 3ECTION
# ' #

4ESTING THE HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED SYSTEMS IF
FITTED
4HIS PROTECTIVE FUNCTION WHEN FITTED CAN BE PRO 4O TEST THE DIRECTIONAL STAGE A RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IS NEC
GRAMMED AS DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION WITH OR ESSARY )F ADDRESS IS SET AS 5X #/..%#4
WITHOUT DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON AND WITH NON DIREC 5DELTA 42!.3&/2- THE VOLTAGE FROM THE RESIDUAL
TIONAL BACK UP OR AS NON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE TIME VOLTAGE WINDING IS APPLIED TO THE MEASURED VALUE IN
OVERCURRENT ADDRESS SEE 3ECTION PUT OR A SINGLE PHASE VOLTAGE WILL BE APPLIED TO THE
PHASE INTO WHICH THE CURRENT IS FED )T MUST BE RE
"EFORE TESTING THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION THE DISTANCE MEMBERED THAT CURRENT AND VOLTAGE IN THAT SAME
PROTECTION SHALL BE SWITCHED OFF ADDRESS $)34 PHASE MUST BE IN PHASE OPPOSITION SO THAT THE RELAY
02/4 /&& SO THAT IT WILL NOT PICK UP PICK UP OF TRIPS IN THE FORWARDS DIRECTION ANNUNCIATION %&
THE DISTANCE PROTECTION BLOCKS THE EARTH FAULT PROTEC 4 &.O NOT ALLOCATED IN THE FACTORY SETTING
TION
)F DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON IS ALSO CARRIED OUT THE
)F THE DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DEFINITE TIME TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT CAN BE SIMULTANEOUSLY
OVERCURRENT IS SELECTED THEN FIRSTLY ITS NON DIREC CHECKED TRANSMITTING RELAY %& 3END &.O
TIONAL BACK UP STAGE IS CHECKED BY SLOWLY RAISING NOT ALLOCATED IN FACTORY SETTING
THE EARTH CURRENT IF THE EARTH CURRENT PATH OF THE RELAY
IS NOT CONNECTED TO THE STAR POINT OF THE CURRENT TRANS 4O CHECK THE RECEIVER CIRCUIT A SINGLE PHASE FAULT IN
FORMER SET BUT IS CONNECTED SO THAT IT WOULD DETECT THE FORWARDS DIRECTION IS SIMILARLY SIMULATED SIMULTA
THE EARTH FAULT CURRENT IN A PARALLEL LINE ADDRESS NEOUSLY WITH EXTERNAL INPUT OF THE BINARY SIGNAL %
)E #4 0!2!,,%, ,).% THEN ONE PHASE CURRENT IS & 2ECEPT &.O IS APPLIED
RAISED
&OR NON DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION ONE WORK
#AUTION ING POINT ON THE INVERSE TIME CHARACTERISTIC SEE &IG
URE IS CHECKED NORMALLY AT TIMES THE SET VALUE
OVERLOAD AND DAMAGE THE RELAY IF APPLIED )E ADDRESS 0ICK UP INDICATION %& &LT
CONTINUOUSLY REFER TO 3ECTION FOR )E &.O AT APPROXIMATELY TIMES SET
OVERLOAD CAPABILITY /BSERVE A COOLING VALUE NOT ALLOCATED IN THE FACTORY SETTING TRIP AFTER
DOWN PERIOD TIME DELAY EXPIRY %& 4RIP &.O ALLOCATED
IN THE FACTORY SETTING TO THE THREE TRIPPING RELAYS
!FTER PASSING THE VALUE OF THE SET VALUE )E AD
DRESS THE ANNUNCIATION %& &LT)E #AUTION
APPEARS &.O NOT ALLOCATED IN THE FACTORY SET
TING AND AFTER PASSING THE SET VALUE THE ANNUNCI 4EST CURRENTS LARGER THAN TIMES ). MAY
ATION %& &LT )E &.O NOT ALLOCATED OVERLOAD AND DAMAGE THE RELAY IF APPLIED
IN THE FACTORY SETTING CONTINUOUSLY REFER TO 3ECTION FOR
OVERLOAD CAPABILITY /BSERVE A COOLING
!FTER EXPIRY OF THE TIME 4 ./. $)2 ADDRESS DOWN PERIOD
THE ANNUNCIATION %& 4 &.O NOT ALLO
CATED IN THE FACTORY SETTING AND TRIP %& 4RIP 3WITCH DISTANCE PROTECTION ON ADDRESS
&.O APPEAR $)3402/4 /.
4ESTING THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTIONS IF FITTED
4HE INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION CAN BE DEPENDING ON THE 4O CHECK THE CONTROL OF THE OVERREACH ZONE PROPERLY
ORDERED MODEL PROGRAMMED TO SINGLE POLE THE TELEPROTECTION FUNCTION SHOULD BE SWITCHED TO
THREE POLE OR SINGLETHREE POLE !2 ADDRESS 0544 /&& ADDRESS OR 0/44 /&& AD
PROVIDED IT IS CONFIGURED UNDER ADDRESS DRESS AND ADDRESS MUST BE SET !2 WO
AS ).4%2.!, !2 %8)34 REFER TO 3ECTION 4%,% 9%3
AND SWITCHED TO !2 &5.#4 /. !DDRESS
# ' #

4HE BINARY INPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER READY MUST BE SIM $EPENDING OF THE SELECTED !2 PROGRAM ADDRESS
ULATED UNLESS AN OPEN CIRCUIT CONTACT HAS BEEN PRO 2!2 02/' A SINGLE PHASE ANDOR TWO
GRAMMED FOR THIS PURPOSE &.O #" PHASE SHORT CIRCUIT SHOULD BE SIMULATED WITHIN :
READY REFER ALSO TO 3ECTION )F THE CIRCUIT AND BEYOND : BUT WITHIN :" EACH TIME ONCE WITH
BREAKER IS NOT READY BEFORE BEGINNING OF A TEST A RE SUCCESSFUL AND ONCE WITH UNSUCCESSFUL !2 #HECK
CLOSE ATTEMPT MUST NOT RESULT CLEARANCE OF SHORT CIR THE PROPER REACTION OF THE RELAY ACCORDING TO THE SET
CUITS BEYOND : IS DELAYED BY 4 OR IN A LATER STAGE !2 PROGRAM &OR MULTI SHOT !2 $!2 ZONE :, IS
DECISIVE FROM THE SECOND SHOT ON
2ECLOSING IS EVEN BLOCKED WHEN AT THE MOMENT OF
!2 INITIATION TRIP COMMAND THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS .OTE THAT EACH NEW TEST CAN BEGIN ONLY AFTER THE RE
SIGNALLED TO BE OPEN IE THE BREAKER AUXILIARY CON CLAIM TIME OR LOCK OUT TIME FOR THE PREVIOUS TEST HAS
TACT IS MARSHALLED TO A BINARY INPUT &.O AND EXPIRED OTHERWISE AN AUTO RECLOSE CANNOT RESULT
THIS INPUT INDICATES AN OPEN BREAKER &OR SECURITY ,%$ !2 NOT READY &.O ,%$ AS DELIV
REASONS AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE SHALL ONLY BE CARRIED ERED MUST NOT BE ILLUMINATED
OUT WHEN THE CLOSED CIIRCUIT BREAKER HAS BEEN
OPENED BEFORE 7HEN MULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE IS USED THE SE
QUENCE ACCORDING TO THE DESIRED PROGRAMS AND
NUMBER OF RECLOSE ATTEMPTS IS TO BE CHECKED
4ESTING THE INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTIONS IF FITTED
4HE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION CAN 39.#(2 9%3 )F THE VOLTAGE AS PARAMETERIZED
OPERATE WITH THE INTEGRATED AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION OR UNDER ADDRESS IS IN PHASE
WITH AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSURE DEVICE !DDITIONAL WITH THE 5X VOLTAGE CLOSE COM
LY SYNCHRONISM OR DEAD LINE CHECK CAN BE PER MAND IS RELEASED IF THE VOLTAGES
FORMED BEFORE MANUAL CLOSING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER ARE IN COUNTER PHASE NO RE
! 0RE REQUISITE IS THAT IT IS CONFIGURED AS LEASE OCCURS
39.#(#(%#+ %8)34 !DDRESS REFER TO
3ECTION AND SWITCHED TO 39.# #(%#+ 55 9%3 )F THE MEASURED FEEDER VOLTAGE
/. !DDRESS 5 IS PRESENT BUT THE 5X VOLT
AGE 5 SWITCHED OFF CLOSE
4HE MEASURED VOLTAGE INPUT 5X MUST BE PARAMETER COMMAND IS RELEASED
IZED AS CONNECTED TO THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE 5 IE
ADDRESS 5X #/..%#4 5 42!.3&/2-%2 55 9%3 )F THE 5X VOLTAGE 5 IS PRESENT
)T MUST BE CONSIDERED WHICH VOLTAGE OF THE BUS BAR BUT THE MEASURED FEEDER VOLTAGE
SHALL BE USED !DDRESS MUST BE MATCHED 5 SWITCHED OFF CLOSE COM
, , , , , , , % , % OR , % 4HE MAND IS RELEASED
CORRESPONDING TEST VOLTAGE HAS TO BE CONNECTED TO
THE 5X INPUT OF THE RELAY .O TEST CURRENT MUST BE 55 9%3 )F THE 5X VOLTAGE 5 AND THE
APPLIED DURING THIS TEST MEASURED FEEDER VOLTAGE 5
ARE SWITCHED OFF CLOSE COM
4HE START TO MEASURE SIGNAL CAN BE GIVEN TO THE MAND IS RELEASED
RELAY VIA THE BINARY INPUT 3YNC 3TART &.O
4HE DEVICE CHECKS FOR CLOSE PERMISSION AC /6%22)$% 9%3 #LOSE COMMAND IS RELEASED IN
CORDING TO THE CHECK PROGRAM WHICH IS SET UNDER THE DEPENDENT ON WHETHER VOLTAGES
ADDRESSES TO )F THE CHECK RESULT IS POSI ARE PRESENT OR NOT OR WHAT IS THE
TIVE CLOSE COMMAND IS RELEASED !NNUNCIATION PHASE RELATIONSHIP
3YNC 2ELEASE &.O
# ' #

#OMMISSIONING USING PRIMARY TESTS
!LL SECONDARY TESTING SETS AND EQUIPMENT MUST BE ACCOUNT IN THE SETTING FOR DOUBLE EARTH FAULT PREFER
REMOVED 2ECONNECT CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORM ENCE IN ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORKS AD
ERS &OR TESTING WITH PRIMARY VALUES THE LINE MUST BE DRESS 3ECTION OR FOR DOUBLE EARTH FAULT
ENERGIZED TREATMENT IN EARTHED NETWORKS ADDRESS 3EC
TION AND WHEN APPROPRIATE IN THE ALLOCATION
OF THE INDIVIDUAL PHASE PICK UP INDICATIONS AND TRIP
7ARNING COMMANDS 3ECTION TO
0RIMARY TESTS SHALL BE PERFORMED ONLY BY #URRENTS AND VOLTAGES CAN BE READ OFF ON THE DISPLAY
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL WHICH IS TRAINED IN
IN THE FRONT OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE IN BLOCK
COMMISSIONING OF PROTECTION SYSTEMS AND
FAMILIAR WITH THE OPERATION OF THE PROTECTED AND COMPARED WITH THE ACTUAL MEASURED VALUES
OBJECT AS WELL AS THE RULES AND REGULATIONS
SWITCHING EARTHING ETC 3WITCH OFF VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB OF
THE FEEDER VOLTAGE #HECK THAT THE VOLTAGES INDI
CATED IN THE OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES ADDRESS
BLOCK ARE NEAR 3MALL VOLTAGE VALUES CAN BE TOL
ERATED
#URRENT VOLTAGE AND PHASE SE #HECK THAT THE RELAY HAS RECOGNIZED THE POSITION OF
QUENCE CHECKS THE MCB 4HE MESSAGE 64 MCB 4RIP # MUST
BE GIVEN IN THE OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS IN ADDRESS
BLOCK
#ONNECTIONS TO CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ARE
CHECKED WITH PRIMARY VALUES &OR THIS PURPOSE A )N CASE THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE IS CONNECTED TO THE
LOAD CURRENT OF AT LEAST OF THE RATED CURRENT IS RELAY IN ORDER TO OBTAIN SYNCHRONISM CHECK ALSO
NECESSARY )F THE MEASURING CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS ARE SWITCH OFF THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB
CORRECT NONE OF THE MEASURED VALUE MONITORING SYS OF THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE )N THE OPERATIONAL ANNUNCI
TEMS IN THE RELAY WILL OPERATE )F A FAULT INDICATION AP ATION ADDRESS BLOCK THE MESSAGE 6 MCB
PEARS THE POSSIBLE CAUSES CAN BE FOUND IN THE OP 4RIP # MUST OCCUR
ERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS !DDRESS
3WITCH THE MCBS ON 4HE ABOVE MESSAGES MUST
&OR CURRENT SUM OR VOLTAGE SUM ERRORS THE MATCHING OCCUR IN ADDRESS BLOCK AGAIN BUT WITH THE 'O
FACTORS 3ECTION SHOULD BE CHECKED ING INDEX EG 64 MCB 4RIP '
)F THE SYMMETRY MONITORING APPEARS IT IS POSSIBLE 3HOULD ONE OF THE MESSAGES NOT BE GIVEN UNDER THE
THAT ASYMMETRY IS IN FACT PRESENT ON THE LINE )F THIS IS OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATION THEN CHECK THE CONNECTION
A NORMAL OPERATIONAL CONDITION THE CORRESPONDING OF THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY CIRCUITS AND
MONITORING FUNCTION SHOULD BE SET AT A LESS SENSITIVE CHECK CORRECT MARSHALLING OF THE BINARY INPUTS FROM
VALUE 3ECTION THE AUXILIARY CONTACTS OF THE MCBS REFER 3ECTION

4HE PHASE ROTATION MUST BE CLOCKWISE OTHERWISE
THE INDICATION &AIL0HASE3EQ WILL APPEAR )F THE INDICES # FOR #OMING AND ' FOR 'OING
#HECK AND CORRECT THE PHASE RELATIONSHIPS IN THE ARE INTERCHANGED CHECK AND CORRECT THE CONTACT
MEASURING CIRCUITS )F THE NETWORK HAS COUNTER MODE OF THE BINARY INPUTS ./ OR .# CONTACT IN
CLOCKWISE ROTATION TWO PHASES MUST BE INTER ACCORDANCE WITH 3ECTION
CHANGED 4HIS PHASE EXCHANGE MUST BE TAKEN INTO
# ' #

$IRECTION CHECK WITH LOAD CURRENT
#ORRECT CONNECTIONS OF CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANS PERSONAL COMPUTER 4ESTS ARE LISTED FROM ADDRESS
FORMERS ARE CHECKED USING LOAD CURRENT OVER THE PRO THE DIRECTIONAL TEST IN ADDRESS
TECTED LINE 4HE LINE MUST BE ENERGIZED AND MUST
CARRY A LOAD CURRENT OF AT LEAST OF THE RATED CUR 4HE ADDRESS IS REACHED
RENT THIS SHALL BE OHMIC OR OHMIC INDUCTIVE 4HE DI
RECTION OF THE LOAD CURRENT MUST BE KNOWN )N CASES DIRECTLY WITH KEY $! FOLLOWED BY ADDRESS NUMBER
OF DOUBT INTERCONNECTED OR RING NETWORKS MUST BE AND FINALLY OPERATION OF THE ENTER KEY % OR
ISOLATED
BY PAGING THROUGH THE BLOCKS WITH Å OR Ç UNTIL
)NITIATION OF THE TEST IS MADE VIA OPERATOR KEYBOARD OR ADDRESS IS REACHED
"EGINNING OF BLOCK 4ESTS

4 % 3 4 3
$ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . "LOCK $IRECTIONAL TEST

) - 0 % $ ! . # % 3
7HEN THE ADDRESS APPEARS IN THE DISPLAY THE DIRECTIONAL TEST OF THE INDIVIDUAL MEASUREMENT LOOPS IS SE
LECTED WITH THE KEY ! &OR CONFIRMATION OF THE DIRECTIONAL TEST THE 9ES KEY *9 IS USED THIS STARTS THE DIRECTION
AL TEST 4HE SELECTED MEASUREMENT LOOP CARRIES OUT A DIRECTIONAL CHECK AND INDICATES THE RESULT ON THE DISPLAY
$ ) 2 % # 4 % 3 4 -AKE DIRECTIONAL TEST , % #ONFIRM WITH *9

, %
& O R W A R D $ I R ,OAD FLOW FORWARDS

OR
2 E V E R S E $ I R LOAD FLOW BACKWARDS
OR
U N D E F I N E D DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION NOT POSSIBLE
EG CURRENT TOO SMALL
4HE LOAD DIRECTION MUST BE INDICATED CORRECTLY 4HE NEXT ADDRESS SHOWS THE ACTIVE AND REACTIVE COMPONENT OF
THE LOAD IMPEDANCE 4HE LOAD IMPEDANCES ALLOW DETERMINATION OF THE POSITION OF THE LOAD IMPEDANCE VECTOR IN
THE 28 DIAGRAM &IGURE
) - 0 % $ ! . # % 3 !FTER CONFIRMATION WITH THE 9ES KEY *9 THE LOAD IMPED
, % ANCE WILL BE CALCULATED AND DISPLAYED
# ' #

2 R ¬ #ONTINUE WITH !
8 R ¬
4HE SAME APPLIES FOR THE OTHER LOOPS ADDRESSES AND FOR , % ADDRESSES AND FOR , %
ADDRESSES AND FOR , , ADDRESSES AND FOR , , ADDRESSES AND FOR
, , EG
$ ) 2 % # 4 % 3 4
, ,
) - 0 % $ ! . # % 3
, ,
!LL SIX MEASUREMENT LOOPS MUST INDICATE THE CORRECT )F THE LOAD IS CAPACITIVE CAUSED FOR EXAMPLE BY UN
DIRECTION OF THE LOAD FLOW )F ALL DIRECTIONS ARE WRONG DEREXCITED GENERATORS OR CHARGING CURRENTS BORDER
THE POLARITY OF THE MEASURING TRANSFORMERS AND THE LINE CASES CAN OCCUR WITH RESPECT TO THE DIRECTIONAL
PROGRAMMED POLARITY ADDRESS 3ECTION CHARACTERISTICS WHICH WILL LEAD TO UNDEFINED OR INCON
DO NOT AGREE WITH EACH OTHER #HECK THE PO SISTENT DIRECTIONAL INFORMATION "Y MEANS OF THE LOAD
LARITY AND PROGRAM CORRECTLY )F THE DIRECTIONS GIVEN IN IMPEDANCE CALCULATION THE POSITION OF THE LOAD IM
THE DISPLAY DIFFER FROM EACH OTHER THE INDIVIDUAL PEDANCE VECTOR CAN BE DETERMINED SEE &IGURE
PHASES IN THE CURRENT OR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONNEC
TIONS ARE INTERCHANGED OR THE PHASE RELATIONSHIP IS
NOT CORRECT #HECK THE CONNECTIONS
0OSITIVE REACTIVE POWER

8 POSITIVE
: ,OAD FORWARDS
$IRECTION
CHARACTERISTIC
!CTIVE POWER IN 2 POSITIVE
2 NEGATIVE LINE DIRECTION
^ 2
.EGATIVE REACTIVE POWER
8 NEGATIVE
BACKWARDS
,OAD
0ACTIVE 0REACTIVE
:
) ) ;/HM=
&IGURE ,OAD IMPEDANCE VECTOR
# ' #

%ARTH FAULT CHECKS FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS IF USED
4HE PRIMARY CURRENT TEST ALLOWS DETERMINATION OF THE /PEN THE LINE EARTHING SWITCHES
CORRECT POLARITY OF TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS FOR THE
EARTH FAULT DIRECTION DETERMINATION #LOSE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AT THE LINE END TO BE
TESTED
$!.'%2 #HECK THE DIRECTIONAL INDICATION GIVEN APPROPRI

ATELY ALLOCATED ,%$
/PERATIONS IN PRIMARY AREA MUST ONLY BE
PERFORMED WITH PLANT SECTIONS VOLTAGE
FREE AND EARTHED )N THE EARTH FAULT REPORT ON THE OPERATOR TERMINAL
ADDRESS SEE ALSO 3ECTION THE EARTH
4HE MOST RELIABLE TEST IS TO APPLY A PRIMARY EARTH FAULTED PHASE AND THE LINE DIRECTION IE %&
FAULT 4HE PROCEDURE IS AS FOLLOWS FORWARDS &.O WILL BE INDICATED !CTIVE
AND REACTIVE CURRENT ARE EQUALLY INDICATED FOR ISO
$ISCONNECT THE LINE AND EARTH AT BOTH ENDS THE LATED NETWORKS THE REACTIVE CURRENT FOR RESONANT
LINE MUST REMAIN DISCONNECTED AT THE REMOTE END EARTHED NETWORKS THE ACTIVE CURRENT IS CRITICAL )F
THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE TEST THE DISPLAY INDICATES %& REVERSE &.O
THEN THERE IS A CROSSED CONNECTION IN THE
!PPLY A BOLTED SINGLE PHASE EARTH BRIDGE TO THE EARTH CIRCUIT OF VOLTAGE OR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS )F
LINE /N OVERHEAD LINES THIS CAN BE DONE AT ANY THE DISPLAY SHOWS %& UNDEFINED &.O
CONVENIENT POINT BUT IN ANY CASE BEHIND THE CUR THE EARTH FAULT CURRENT IS PROBABLY TOO SMALL
RENT TRANSFORMERS LOOKED AT FROM THE DIRECTION OF
THE BUS BAR OF THE CIRCUIT UNDER TEST &OR CABLES $ISCONNECT THE LINE AND EARTH IT REMOVE THE
THE EARTH SHOULD BE APPLIED AT THE REMOTE END TER BOLTED EARTH CONNECTION
MINATION
4HE TEST IS THUS COMPLETED
# ' #

$IRECTION CHECK FOR DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IF USED
4HE PRIMARY CURRENT TEST ALLOWS DETERMINATION OF THE RENT OPTION IS USED ADDRESS %!24( &!5,4
CORRECT POLARITY OF TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS FOR THE ).6%23% 4)-% THEN THIS DIRECTIONAL CHECK BECOMES
EARTH FAULT DIRECTION PROTECTION )F THIS FUNCTION IS NOT SUPERFLUOUS 4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION SHALL BE
FITTED OR IF IT IS SET AS %!24( &!5,4 ./. %8)34 SWITCHED OFF ADDRESS SO THAT IT WILL NOT INTER
ADDRESS OR IF THE NON DIRECTIONAL EARTH CUR FERE WITH THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
3!
,
,
,
&IGURE %ARTH FAULT DIRECTION TEST WITH (OLMGREEN CONNECTION
4HE TRIP CIRCUITS SHOULD BE MADE INOPERATIVE AS THE WHICH THE VOLTAGE IS MISSING WILL BE USED )F THE LINE
RELAY WILL ISSUE A TRIP COMMAND DURING THIS TEST &UR IS CARRYING ACTIVE AND INDUCTIVE POWER IN LINE DIREC
THERMORE IT MUST BE NOTED THAT DURING ALL SUCH SIM TION PRACTICALLY THE SAME RELATIONSHIPS APPLY FOR THE
ULATIONS WHICH DO NOT REPRESENT EXACTLY THE PRACTICAL RELAY AS WITH AN EARTH FAULT IN THE LINE DIRECTION
CONDITIONS ASYMMETRY OF THE MEASURED VALUES CAN
CAUSE THE MEASURED VALUE MONITORS TO OPERATE #HECK THE DIRECTIONAL INDICATION )N THE FAULT EVENT RE
4HESE ANNUNCIATIONS SHOULD THEN BE IGNORED PORT ON THE DISPLAY PANEL ADDRESS SEE ALSO
SECTION AT LEAST THE FOLLOWING FAULT ANNUNCI
ATIONS MUST BE INDICATED %& &LT)E &.O
$!.'%2 %& &LT )E &.O AND %
!LL PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES MUST BE OB & 4RIP &.O 3HOULD DIRECTIONAL TRIP ANNUN
SERVED WHEN WORKING ON THE INSTRUMENT CIATION BE MISSING THEN A CROSSED CONNECTION IS
TRANSFORMERS 3ECONDARY CONNECTIONS PRESENT IN EITHER THE CURRENT OR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS MUST BE CONNECTIONS )F NO PICK UP ANNUNCIATION OCCURS THE
SHORT CIRCUITED BEFORE ANY CURRENT CURRENT IS PROBABLY TOO LOW OR THE PHASE RELATIONSHIP
LEADS TO THE RELAY ARE INTERRUPTED OF THE TEST CIRCUIT IS NOT CORRECT )F THERE IS NO INDICA
TION WHATSOEVER IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THE THRESHOLD VAL
4HE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE WILL BE DERIVED BY BYPASS UE OF THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE !DDRESS 5E
ING A VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER PHASE EG , SEE &IGURE HAS NOT BEEN REACHED
)F EARTH DETECTION WINDINGS OF THE VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERS ARE NOT AVAILABLE THE CORRESPONDING &INALLY PROPERLY RECONNECT ALL THE TRANSFORMER
PHASE SHOULD BE INTERRUPTED ON THE SECONDARY SIDE CONNECTIONS 3WITCH DISTANCE PROTECTION ON AD
)N THE CURRENT CIRCUIT ONLY THE CURRENT FROM THE CUR DRESS $)3402/4 /.
RENT TRANSFORMER CORRESPONDING TO THE PHASE IN
# ' #

#HECKING THE VOLTAGE POLARITY FOR SYNCHRONISM CHECK
4HIS CHECK SHOULD VERIFY THE CORRECT POLARITY OF THE THE CONNECTION GROUP OF THE TRANSFORMER REFER TO
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS FOR THE SYNCHRO 3ECTION )F THE PARAMETERS ARE CORRECT
NISM CHECK FUNCTION 4HE BUS BAR VOLTAGE MUST BE CHECK AND CORRECT THE POLARITY OF THE VOLTAGE TRANS
CONNECTED TO THE DEVICE 4HE MEASURED VOLTAGE 5X FORMER CONNECTION FROM THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE
MUST BE PARAMETERIZED CORRECT IN THE POWER SYSTEM
DATA ADDRESS 5X #/..%#4 5 42!.3 /PEN CIRCUIT BREAKER 3ET THE SYNCHRONISM CHECK
&/2-%2 REFER 3ECTION FUNCTION TO THE DEAD LINE CHECK PROGRAM IE AD
DRESS 55 9%3 3TART BY ENERGIZING THE
!T FIRST SET THE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION TO THE OVER BINARY START TO MEASURE INPUT &.O
RIDE PROGRAM IE ADDRESS /6%22)$% 9%3 3YNC 3TART 4HE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION
3TART SYNCHRONISM CHECK BY ENERGIZING THE BINARY MUST ISSUE THE RELEASE COMMAND ANNUNCIATION
START TO MEASURE INPUT &.O 3YNC 3YNC 2ELEASE &.O )F NOT CHECK AGAIN
3TART 4HE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION MUST ISSUE CAREFULLY ALL CONNECTIONS AND PARAMETERS RELATING TO
THE RELEASE COMMAND ANNUNCIATION 3YNC 2E THE SYNCHRONISM CHECK FUNCTION ACCORDING TO 3EC
LEASE &.O )F NOT CHECK ALL RELEVANT PARAM TION
ETERS ACCORDING 3ECTION AND
2E CHECK ADDRESSES TO IN CASE THEY
.EXT OPEN THE LINE ISOLATOR AND CLOSE THE CIRCUIT WERE ALTERED FOR THE TESTS
BREAKER AS TO &IGURE 4HUS BOTH VOLTAGE TRANS
FORMER SETS RECEIVE THE SAME VOLTAGE )F ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING IS TO BE ALLOWED THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER CLOSING TIME IS MEASURED AND SET CORRECTLY
IN ADDRESS SEE ALSO 3ECTION ! SUIT
ABLE ARRANGEMENT IS SHOWN IN &IGURE
4HE TIME METER IS SET TO THE S RANGE OR TO A RESOLU

TION OF MS #LOSE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MANUALLY THE
5 TIME METER IS STARTED AT THE SAME TIME 4HE VOLTAGE
5 APPEARS WHEN THE POLES OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ARE CLOSED THE TIME METER IS THEN STOPPED 4HE TIME
INDICATED ON THE METER IS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING
TIME
5
4HE EXPERIMENT MUST BE REPEATED IF THE TIME METER
DOES NOT STOP BECAUSE OF AN UNFAVOURABLE CLOSING
INSTANT
"US BAR
,INE
5
&IGURE -EASURED VOLTAGES FOR SYNCHRONISM
CHECK 3TART

4IME
3ET THE SYNCHRONISM CHECK FUNCTION TO THE SYNCHRO METER
CHECK PROGRAM IE ADDRESS 39.#(2 9%3 5
Õ
AND /6%22)$% ./ 3TART SYNCHRONISM
CHECK BY ENERGIZING THE BINARY START TO MEASURE 3TOP
INPUT &.O 3YNC 3TART 4HE SYNCHRO
CHECK FUNCTION MUST ISSUE THE RELEASE COMMAND
ANNUNCIATION 3YNC 2ELEASE &.O )F
NOT CHECK AT FIRST CONNECTION MATCHING UNDER AD &EEDER
DRESS 5 #/..%#4 REFER 3ECTION )F

MEASUREMENT IS CARRIED OUT OVER A TRANSFORMER &IGURE -EASURING THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING
CHECK ADDRESS TOO THIS PARAMETER MATCHES TIME
# ' #

#HECKING THE CARRIER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
!LL THE EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATED WITH TRANSMISSION OF )N THE 3COPE OF DEVICES UNDER ADDRESS MUST BE
SIGNALS SHOULD BE COMMISSIONED IN ACCORDANCE SET 4%,%02/4%# /6%22%!#( REFER 3ECTION
WITH THE APPROPRIATE DOCUMENTS AND 0/44 -/$% ADDRESS MUST BE PA
RAMETERIZED AS 2%6%23 ).4%2,/#+ REFER 3ECTION
4HE PROTECTION RELAY ON THE INCOMING FEEDER
AND THOSE ON ALL OUTGOING CIRCUITS MUST BE IN OPERA
#HECKING OVERREACH ZONE COMPARISON TION !T FIRST THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE FOR REVERSE INTERLOCK
VIA PILOT WIRES ING SHOULD NOT BE SWITCHED ON
4HIS OVERREACHING ZONE COMPARISON OPERATING
MODE DIFFERS FUNDAMENTALLY FROM THE OTHER TELEPRO 3IMULATE A SHORT CIRCUIT WITHIN ZONE : AND WITHIN THE
TECTION SYSTEMS IN ITS TRANSMISSION METHOD DC CUR OVERREACH ZONE :" "ECAUSE OF THE ABSENCE OF THE
RENT FAIL SAFE LOOP 4HE TEST PROCEDURE IS DE RECEIVE SIGNAL THE RELAY TRIPS IN THE DELAYED TIME
SCRIBED IN THE FOLLOWING )F A DIFFERENT TELEPROTECTION 4"
METHOD IS USED THIS SUB SECTION CAN BE PASSED
OVER .OW SWITCH ON THE DC VOLTAGE FOR THE REVERSE INTER
LOCKING 4HE TEST AS DESCRIBED ABOVE IS REPEATED
)N THE SCOPE OF DEVICES UNDER ADDRESS MUST BE WITH THE SAME RESULT
SET 4%,%02/4%# /6%22%!#( REFER 3ECTION
AND 0/44 -/$% ADDRESS MUST BE PA 3IMULATE A TRIP ON EACH PROTECTIVE DEVICE ON ALL OUT
RAMETERIZED AS 0),/4 7)2% #/-0 REFER 3ECTION GOING FEEDERS 3IMULTANEOUSLY A SHORT CIRCUIT IS SIM
4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION DEVICES AT BOTH LINE ULATED ON THE INCOMING FEEDER AS DESCRIBED BE
ENDS MUST BE IN OPERATION !T FIRST THE AUXILIARY VOLT FORE 4RIPPING NOW OCCURS AFTER DELAY 4
AGE FOR THE FAIL SAFE CURRENT LOOP AROUND THE PILOT
WIRES SHOULD NOT BE SWITCHED ON THE ADDITIONAL RE 4HESE TESTS HAVE SIMULTANEOUSLY PROVED THAT THE PI
LAYS ARE NOT ENERGIZED LOT WIRES ARE FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY !LL OTHER TESTS DE
SCRIBED IN THIS 3ECTION BECOME SUPERFLUOUS
3IMULATE A SHORT CIRCUIT BEYOND : BUT WITHIN THE
OVERREACH ZONE :" "ECAUSE OF THE PRESENCE OF THE
BLOCK SIGNAL THE RELAY FIRST TRIPS IN ONE OF THE UPPER
ZONES NORMALLY 4 -AKE THIS TEST FROM BOTH LINE #HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION WITH RE
ENDS LEASE SIGNAL
.OW SWITCH ON THE DC VOLTAGE FOR THE FAIL SAFE LOOP 7ITH PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP 0/44 US
4HE ADDITIONAL RELAYS FOR TELEPROTECTION MUST BE IN ING RELEASE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION 0/44 -/$% :"
OPERATION 4HE LOOP NOW CARRIES MONITORING CURRENT 2%,%!3% OR &$ $)2%# 2%,%!3% OR :" 5.",/#+
THE ADDITIONAL RELAYS AT BOTH LINE ENDS ARE ENERGIZED OR &$ 5.",/#+ ADDRESS IT IS SIMPLE TO
CHECK THE CARRIER SYSTEM FROM ONE END OF THE LINE
3IMULATE A SHORT CIRCUIT AT ONE LINE END BEYOND THE WITH THE ECHO FUNCTION 3IMULATE A SHORT CIRCUIT IN
FIRST ZONE BUT WITHIN THE OVERREACH ZONE :" 4RIP :" BEYOND : 3INCE THE RELAY AT THE OTHER LINE END
PING OCCURS AFTER 4" WHEN A DELAY IS SET -AKE HAS NOT PICKED UP ON FAULT THE ECHO FUNCTION WILL BE
THIS TEST ALSO AT BOTH LINE ENDS EFFECTIVE AT THAT END AND A TRIP SIGNAL RESULTS 4HE PRE
CONDITION IS THAT THE ECHO FUNCTION IS SWITCHED ON
3INCE THE DC MONITOR IS AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THE PILOT ADDRESS AT BOTH LINE ENDS 4HIS TEST IS TO BE
WIRE SYSTEM THIS TEST HAS SIMULTANEOUSLY PROVED PERFORMED FROM BOTH LINE ENDS
THAT THE PILOT WIRES ARE FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY !LL OTHER
TESTS DESCRIBED IN THIS 3ECTION BECOME SUPER 4HE EFFECT OF THE ECHO DELAY TIME AND THE INPUT OF THE
FLUOUS CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION CAN BE CHECKED AT THIS
STAGE 7ITH THE FOLLOWING TESTS THE ECHO FUNCTION OF
THE RELAY AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END IS CHECKED
#HECKING REVERSE INTERLOCKING 4HE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AT BOTH LINE ENDS MUST BE OPEN
! SHORT CIRCUIT IS SIMULATED AS ABOVE "ECAUSE OF THE
4HE TEST PROCEDURE IS DESCRIBED IN THE FOLLOWING )F A
ECHO FUNCTION OF THE RELAY AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END
DIFFERENT TELEPROTECTION METHOD IS USED THIS SUBSEC
SIGNAL IS RECEIVED AND A TRIP SIGNAL OCCURS AT ONCE
TION CAN BE PASSED OVER
# ' #

#LOSE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END !T THE RECEIVING END SIMULATE A FAULT WITHIN ZONE :"
2EPEAT ABOVE TEST ONCE MORE 2ECEIVED SIGNAL AND BUT BEYOND : WHEN SET 0544 -/$% :" !#
TRIP COMMAND OCCUR AGAIN BUT NOW WITH AN ADDITION #%,%2!4)/. ADDRESS 4HE PROTECTION TRIPS AT
AL DELAY CAUSED BY THE ECHO DELAY TIME AT THE OPPO ONCE OR 4" WITHOUT RECEPTION A DELAYED STAGE
SITE LINE END S AS DELIVERED SEE ADDRESS CAN ONLY BE EFFECTIVE
)F DELAYED AND UNDELAYED ECHO ARE INTERCHANGED THE !T THE RECEIVING END SIMULATE ANY PICK UP WHEN
FUNCTION MODE ./.# OPERATION OF THE BINARY INPUT SET 0544 -/$% &$ !##%,%2!4)/. ADDRESS
FOR #" POSITION SHOULD BE WRONG #HECK AND CORRECT 4HE PROTECTION TRIPS INSTANTANEOUS WITHOUT
IT AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END REFER 3ECTION 7HEN RECEPTION IN A DELAYED STAGE
DELIVERED FROM FACTORY THE INPUT FOR THE #" AUXILIARY
CONTACT IS ).054 ASSIGNED TO THE FUNCTION #" 2EPEAT TESTS FOR THE OTHER TRANSMISSION DIRECTION
!UXP CL REFER 3ECTION #HANGE THE FUNC
TION MODE FROM ./ TO .# #" !UXP CL .#
7ITH DIFFERENT ALLOCATION CHANGE THE MODE ACCORD
INGLY #HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION FOR DI
RECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PRO
/PEN CIRCUIT BREAKER 2EPEAT THESE TESTS FOR THE OTH TECTION
ER LINE END
)F 3! IS EQUIPPED WITH DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON
EARTH FAULT PROTECTION AND THIS FUNCTION IS SET AS
%!24( &!5,4 $)2%##/-0!2)3/. IN ADDRESS
#HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION WITH CARRIER TRANSMISSION MUST BE CHECKED 3WITCH
BLOCKING SIGNAL OFF DISTANCE PROTECTION ADDRESS $)34 02/4
/&&
7ITH OVERREACHING TRANSFER MODE USING BLOCKING SIG
NAL 0/44 -/$% :" ",/#+).' ADDRESS )T IS SIMPLE TO CHECK THE CARRIER SYSTEM FROM ONE END
AND UNDERSTANDING BETWEEN BOTH LINE ENDS IS NEC OF THE LINE WITH THE ECHO FUNCTION 3IMULATE AN EARTH
ESSARY FAULT IN LINE DIRECTION 3INCE THE RELAY AT THE OTHER LINE
END HAS NOT PICKED UP ON FAULT THE ECHO FUNCTION WILL
!T THE LINE END TO BE TESTED AS SENDER SIMULATE A FAULT BE EFFECTIVE AT THAT END AND A TRIP SIGNAL RESULTS 4HE
IN REVERSE DIRECTION AT THE OTHER END SIMULATE A FOR PRECONDITION IS THAT THE ECHO FUNCTION IS SWITCHED ON
WARD FAULT WITHIN ZONE :" BUT BEYOND THE LIMIT OF : ADDRESS AT BOTH LINE ENDS 4HIS TEST IS TO BE
3INCE THE TRANSMITTER SENDS A BLOCKING SIGNAL THE RE PERFORMED FROM BOTH LINE ENDS
CEIVING PROTECTION MUST NOT TRIP UNLESS IN A DELAYED
4HE EFFECT OF THE ECHO DELAY TIME AND THE INPUT OF THE
ZONE AS LONG AS BLOCKING SIGNAL IS TRANSMITTED !FTER
CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION CAN BE CHECKED UNLESS IT HAS
SWITCHING OFF THE REVERSE FAULT ON THE SENDING SIDE
ALREADY BEEN DONE UNDER 3ECTION 4HE OPPO
THE RECEIVING SIDE REMAINS BLOCKED FOR THE SEND PRO
SITE LINE END IS CHECKED
LONGATION 4 3%.$ 02, ADDRESS PLUS THE
TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME 4 42!.3",/ ADDRESS
4HE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AT BOTH LINE ENDS MUST BE OPEN
OF THE RECEIVING SIDE
!N EARTH FAULT IS SIMULATED AS ABOVE "ECAUSE OF THE
ECHO FUNCTION OF THE RELAY AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END
2EPEAT TEST FOR THE OTHER TRANSMISSION DIRECTION
SIGNAL IS RECEIVED AND A TRIP SIGNAL OCCURS AT ONCE
#LOSE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END

2EPEAT ABOVE TEST ONCE MORE RECEIVED SIGNAL AND
#HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION WITH UN
TRIP COMMAND OCCUR AGAIN BUT NOW WITH AN ADDITION
DERREACH TRANSFER SIGNAL
AL DELAY CAUSED BY THE ECHO DELAY TIME OF THE RELAY AT
THE OPPOSITE LINE END S AS DELIVERED SEE !D
7ITH PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP 0544 THE DRESS
SCOPE OF DEVICES IS SET 4%,%02/4%# 5.$%2
2%!#( IN ADDRESS !N UNDERSTANDING BETWEEN /PEN CIRCUIT BREAKER 2EPEAT THESE TESTS FOR THE OTH
BOTH LINE ENDS IS NECESSARY ER LINE END
!T THE LINE END TO BE TESTED AS SENDER SIMULATE A FAULT 3WITCH DISTANCE PROTECTION ON ADDRESS
WITHIN ZONE : $)3402/4 /.
# ' #

4RIPPING TEST INCLUDING CIRCUIT BREAKER
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 3! ALLOWS SIMPLE CHECKING INPUT INDICATES THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION )F THE
OF THE TRIPPING CIRCUIT AND THE CIRCUIT BREAKER )F THE AUXILIARY CONTACT IS ASSIGNED TO A BINARY INPUT IT MUST
DEVICE INCORPORATES AN INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE SYS BE CONNECTED TOO )F IT IS NOT ASSIGNED TO ANY BINARY
TEM A TRIP CLOSE TEST CYCLE IS ALSO POSSIBLE 4HE TEST INPUT THEN THE DEVICE WILL PERFORM TRIPPING TEST WITH
CAN BE INITIATED EITHER VIA A BINARY INPUT OUT INTERROGATION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION
42)0 #,/3% TEST CYCLE ADDRESS $!.'%2

BLOCK
! SUCCESSFULLY STARTED TEST CYCLE WILL
0REREQUISITE FOR THE START OF A TRIP CLOSE TEST CYCLE IS LEAD TO CLOSING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
THAT THE RELAY HAS AN INTEGRATED AUTO RECLOSE FUNC
TION WHICH IS PROGRAMMED AS %8)34 ADDRESS )NITIATION OF THE TEST CYCLE CAN BE GIVEN FROM THE OPER
AND IT IS SWITCHED ON !DDRESS ATOR KEYBOARD OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE ! CODE
WORD INPUT IS NECESSARY 4HE PROCEDURE IS STARTED
! 42)0 #,/3% TEST CYCLE IS ALSO POSSIBLE WITH AN WITH ADDRESS WHICH CAN BE REACHED BY DIRECT
EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE SYSTEM 3INCE IN THIS CASE ADDRESSING $! % OR BY PAGING WITH Ç OR Å
HOWEVER 3! ONLY GIVES THE TRIPPING COMMAND )N THE ADDRESSES OF THIS BLOCK THERE IS A NUMBER OF
THE PROCEDURE SHALL BE FOLLOWED AS DESCRIBED IN 3EC POSSIBILITIES AVAILABLE WHICH ARE SHOWN IN THE FOLLOW
TION ING BOXES 3INGLE POLE TRIP CLOSE TESTS WILL ONLY
BE CARRIED OUT BY THE RELAY WHEN SINGLE POLE !2 IS
)F THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACTS ADVISE THE ALSO PERMITTED 4HREE POLE TRIP CLOSE CYCLE WILL
RELAY THROUGH A BINARY INPUT OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER ONLY BE CARRIED OUT WHEN THREE POLE !2 IS PER
POSITION THE TEST CYCLE CAN ONLY BE STARTED WHEN THE MITTED
CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED 4HIS ADDITIONAL SECURITY FEA
TURE SHOULD NOT BE OMITTED &URTHER PREREQUISITES FOR THE START OF TEST ARE THAT NO
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION FAULT DETECTOR HAS PICKED UP AND
$URING MARSHALLING OF THE BINARY INPUTS REFER 3EC THAT THE CONDITIONS FOR RECLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER READY
TION THE RELAY HAS BEEN INFORMED WHICH BINARY !2 NOT BLOCKED ARE FULFILLED
# " 4 % 3 4 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK #IRCUIT BREAKER TEST

42)0 #,/3% CYCLE
4 2 ) 0 # , / 3 % # 9 # , %
# " 4 % 3 4 #ARRY OUT TEST CYCLE WITH POLE , OF CIRCUIT BREAKER

, 7 ) 4 ( ! 2 #ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON KEY !
#ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY THAT CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED OR

# " # , / 3 % $
ABORT BY PAGE ON !
!FTER CONFIRMATION BY THE OPERATOR THAT THE CIRCUIT LONG AS THE AUXILIARY CONTACT INDICATES THAT THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER IS CLOSED THE TEST CYCLE PROCEEDS )F THE TEST BREAKER IS NOT CLOSED EVEN IF THE OPERATOR HAS CON
IS TERMINATED SUCCESSFULLY THIS IS ANNUNCIATED IN THE FIRMED THAT IT IS /NLY WHEN NO CIRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIA
DISPLAY OR ON THE 0# SCREEN )F HOWEVER THE CIRCUIT RY CONTACT IS ASSIGNED TO ANY BINARY INPUT WILL THE
BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT IS ASSIGNED TO A BINARY IN RELAY CONSIDER THE OPERATOR S CONFIRMATION VALID
PUT AND CONNECTED THE RELAY REJECTS THE TEST CYCLE AS
# ' #

#ARRY OUT TEST CYCLE WITH POLE , OF CIRCUIT BREAKER

# " 4 % 3 4
#ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON
, 7 ) 4 ( ! 2 KEY !
# " # , / 3 % $ #ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY THAT CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED OR

ABORT WITH PAGE ON KEY !
#ARRY OUT TEST CYCLE WITH POLE , OF CIRCUIT BREAKER

# " 4 % 3 4
#ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON
, 7 ) 4 ( ! 2 KEY !
# " # , / 3 % $ #ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY THAT CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED

OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON KEY !
# " 4 % 3 4 #ARRY OUT THREE POLE TEST CYCLE OF CIRCUIT BREAKER

, 7 ) 4 ( ! 2 #ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON KEY !
#ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY THAT CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED

# " # , / 3 % $ OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON KEY !
#ARRY OUT SEQUENCE OF SINGLE POLE TEST CYCLES

# " 4 % 3 4
, , , OF CIRCUIT BREAKER #ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY
3 % 1 5 , , , OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON KEY !
# " # , / 3 % $ #ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY THAT CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED

OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON KEY !
,IVE TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER ADDRESS BLOCK
4O CHECK THE TRIPPING CIRCUITS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CAN

BE TRIPPED BY 3! INDEPENDENTLY OF WHETHER AN $!.'%2
AUTO RECLOSE WILL OCCUR OR NOT (OWEVER THIS TEST
! SUCCESSFULLY STARTED TEST CYCLE CAN
CAN ALSO BE MADE WITH AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE LEAD TO CLOSING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
RELAY WHEN AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSURE DE
VICE IS CONNECTED
)F THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACTS ADVISE THE
RELAY THROUGH A BINARY INPUT OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
)NITIATION OF THE TEST CAN BE GIVEN FROM THE OPERATOR
POSITION THE TEST CAN ONLY BE STARTED WHEN THE CIRCUIT KEYBOARD OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE ! CODEWORD
BREAKER IS CLOSED 4HIS ADDITIONAL SECURITY FEATURE INPUT IS NECESSARY 4HE PROCEDURE IS STARTED WITH AD
SHOULD NOT BE OMITTED WHEN AN EXTERNAL AUTO RE DRESS WHICH CAN BE REACHED BY DIRECT DIALLING
CLOSE RELAY IS PRESENT $! % OR BY PAGING WITH Å OR Ç )N THE AD
DRESSES OF THIS BLOCK THERE IS A NUMBER OF POSSIBILI
$URING MARSHALLING OF THE BINARY INPUTS REFER 3EC TIES AVAILABLE WHICH ARE SHOWN IN THE FOLLOWING
TION THE RELAY HAS BEEN INFORMED WHICH BINARY BOXES
INPUT INDICATES THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION )F THE
AUXILIARY CONTACT IS ASSIGNED TO A BINARY INPUT IT MUST )N ORDER TO TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SINGLE POLE IT IS
BE CONNECTED TOO )F IT IS NOT ASSIGNED TO ANY BINARY NECESSARY TO PERMIT SINGLE POLE TRIPPING THROUGH
INPUT THEN THE DEVICE WILL PERFORM TRIPPING TEST WITH THE BINARY INPUT P 4RIP 0ERM &.O WITH
OUT INTERROGATION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION EXTERNAL SINGLE POLE !2 OTHERWISE THE SINGLE POLE
TEST WILL NOT BE CARRIED OUT
# ' #

4O TRIP ALL THREE POLES OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AN EXTER )N THE ABSENCE OF AUTO RECLOSE ONLY THE THREE
NAL SIGNAL /NLY POLE MUST NOT BE PRESENT FROM POLE TRIP ADDRESS HAS ANY MEANING
AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE RELAY &.O
0REREQUISITE FOR STARTING THE TEST IS THAT NO PROTECTION
FUNCTION OF THE RELAY BE PICKED UP
# " 4 % 3 4 "EGINNING OF THE BLOCK TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER

, ) 6 % 4 2 ) 0
4RIP CIRCUIT BREAKER POLE , #ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY OR

# " 4 2 ) 0
ABORT BY PAGING ON WITH !
# " 0 / , % ,
# " # , / 3 % $ OR ABORT BY PAGING ON WITH !
!FTER CONFIRMATION BY THE OPERATOR THAT THE CIRCUIT LONG AS THE AUXILIARY CONTACT INDICATES THAT THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER IS CLOSED THE TEST CYCLE PROCEEDS )F THE TEST BREAKER IS NOT CLOSED EVEN IF THE OPERATOR HAS CON
IS TERMINATED SUCCESSFULLY THIS IS ANNUNCIATED IN THE FIRMED THAT IT IS /NLY WHEN NO CIRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIA
DISPLAY OR ON THE 0# SCREEN )F HOWEVER THE CIRCUIT RY CONTACT IS ASSIGNED TO ANY BINARY INPUT WILL THE
BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT ASSIGNED TO A BINARY INPUT RELAY CONSIDER THE OPERATOR S CONFIRMATION VALID
AND CONNECTED THE RELAY REJECTS THE TEST CYCLE AS

# " 4 2 ) 0
# " 0 / , % ,

# " 4 2 ) 0
# " 0 / , % ,
4RIP CIRCUIT BREAKER THREE POLE #ONFIRM WITH *9

# " 4 2 ) 0
KEY OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON KEY !
# " 4 ( 2 % % 0 / , %
# " # , / 3 % $ OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON +EY !
# ' #

3TARTING A TEST FAULT RECORD ADDRESS BLOCK
! FAULT RECORD STORAGE CAN BE STARTED USING THE OPER 3CANNING A TEST FAULT RECORD IS ESPECIALLY INTERESTING
ATING PANEL OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE 3TARTING A FOR USE ON CABLES AND LONG OVERHEAD LINES WHERE
TEST FAULT RECORD IS ALSO POSSIBLE VIA A BINARY INPUT CONSIDERABLE INRUSH CURRENTS CAN BE PRODUCED BY
PROVIDED THIS IS ACCORDINGLY ALLOCATED &.O CHARGING OF THE LINE CAPACITANCES 4HE FAULT RECORD IS
3TART &LT2EC TRIGGERED VIA A BINARY INPUT AT THE INSTANT OF THE
BREAKER CLOSING COMMAND
4HE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS AS SET IN ADDRESS
BLOCK ARE DECISIVE FOR THIS FAULT RECORDING REFER TO -ANUAL STARTING OF A FAULT RECORD CAN BE CARRIED OUT IN
3ECTION ADDRESS CONCERNS TRIGGERING VIA ADDRESS BLOCK WHICH CAN BE REACHED BY PAGING
BINARY INPUT ADDRESS TRIGGERING VIA THE OPERAT
WITH Å OR Ç OR BY DIRECT DIALLING WITH $! %
ING KEYBOARD OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE 4HE
4HE START ADDRESS IS REACHED WITH !
PRE TRIGGER TIME WAS SET UNDER ADDRESS
4 % 3 4 "EGINNING OF BLOCK 4EST FAULT RECORDING

& ! 5 , 4 2 % # / 2 $ ) . ' PAGE ON WITH ! TO ADDRESS
& ! 5 , 4 2 % # 3TART FAULT RECORDING #ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY OR ABORT

3 4 ! 2 4 WITH PAGE ON KEY !
3 5 # # % 3 3 & 5 , 4HE RELAY ACKNOWLEDGES SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION OF THE

TEST RECORDING
# ' #

0UTTING THE RELAY INTO OPERATION
!LL SETTING VALUES SHOULD BE CHECKED AGAIN IN CASE FRONT SO THAT FROM THEN ON ONLY REAL FAULTS ARE INDI
THEY WERE ALTERED DURING THE TESTS 0ARTICULARLY CHECK CATED &ROM THAT MOMENT THE MEASURED VALUES OF
THAT ALL DESIRED PROTECTION FUNCTIONS HAVE BEEN PRO THE QUIESCENT STATE ARE DISPLAYED $URING PUSHING
GRAMMED IN THE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ADDRESS THE 2%3%4 BUTTON THE ,%$S ON THE FRONT WILL LIGHT
BLOCKS AND REFER TO 3ECTION AND ALL DE UP EXCEPT THE "LOCKED ,%$ THUS A ,%$ TEST IS
SIRED PROTECTION FUNCTIONS HAVE BEEN SWITCHED /. PERFORMED AT THE SAME TIME
4HE COUNTERS FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION STATISTICS #HECK THAT THE MODULES ARE PROPERLY INSERTED 4HE
SHOULD BE ERASED ADDRESS BLOCK REFER TO 3ECTION GREEN ,%$ MUST BE ON ON THE FRONT THE RED ,%$ MUST
NOT BE ON
0USH THE KEY -3 ON THE FRONT 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS #LOSE HOUSING COVER
THE BEGINNING OF THE ANNUNCIATION BLOCKS 4HUS IT IS
POSSIBLE THAT THE MEASURED VALUES FOR THE QUIESCENT !LL TERMINAL SCREWS EVEN THOSE NOT IN USE MUST
STATE OF THE RELAY CAN BE DISPLAYED SEE BELOW BE TIGHTENED
4HESE VALUES HAS BEEN CHOSEN DURING CONFIGURATION
REFER TO 3ECTION UNDER THE ADDRESSES )F A TEST SWITCH IS AVAILABLE THEN THIS MUST BE IN THE
AND OPERATING POSITION
3TORED INDICATIONS ON THE FRONT PLATE SHOULD BE RESET 4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY IS NOW READY FOR OPERA
BY PRESSING THE PUSH BUTTON 2%3%4 ,%$ ON THE TION
# ' #

3! 6 -AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING
-AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING
3IEMENS DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAYS ARE DESIGNED TO RE 2OUTINE CHECKS

QUIRE NO SPECIAL MAINTENANCE !LL MEASUREMENT AND
SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUITS ARE FULLY SOLID STATE AND
THEREFORE COMPLETELY MAINTENANCE FREE )NPUT MOD 2OUTINE CHECKS OF CHARACTERISTICS OR PICK UP VALUES
ULES ARE EVEN STATIC RELAYS ARE HERMETICALLY SEALED OR ARE NOT NECESSARY AS THEY FORM PART OF THE CONTINU
PROVIDED WITH PROTECTIVE COVERS OUSLY SUPERVISED FIRMWARE PROGRAMS 4HE PLANNED
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS FOR CHECKING AND MAINTE
)F THE DEVICE IS EQUIPPED WITH A BACK UP BATTERY FOR NANCE OF THE PLANT CAN BE USED TO PERFORM OPERATION
SAVING OF STORED ANNUNCIATIONS AND THE INTERNAL TIME AL TESTING OF THE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT 4HIS MAINTE
CLOCK THE BATTERY SHOULD BE REPLACED AFTER AT MOST NANCE SERVES MAINLY FOR CHECKING THE INTERFACES OF
YEARS OF OPERATION REFER TO 3ECTION 4HIS REC THE UNIT IE THE COUPLING WITH THE PLANT 4HE FOLLOW
OMMENDATION IS VALID INDEPENDENT ON WHETHER THE ING PROCEDURE IS RECOMMENDED
BATTERY HAS BEEN DISCHARGED BY OCCASIONAL SUPPLY
VOLTAGE FAILURES OR NOT 2EAD OUT OF OPERATIONAL VALUES ADDRESS BLOCK
AND COMPARISON WITH THE ACTUAL VALUES FOR
!S THE PROTECTION IS ALMOST COMPLETELY SELF MONI CHECKING THE ANALOG INTERFACES
TORED FROM THE MEASURING INPUTS TO THE COMMAND
OUTPUT RELAYS HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE FAULTS ARE AU 3IMULATION OF AN INTERNAL SHORT CIRCUIT WITH X ).
TOMATICALLY ANNUNCIATED 4HIS ENSURES THE HIGH AVAIL FOR CHECKING THE ANALOG INPUT AT HIGH CURRENTS
ABILITY OF THE RELAY AND ALLOWS A MORE CORRECTIVE RATH
ER THAN PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE STRATEGY 4ESTS AT
SHORT INTERVALS BECOME THEREFORE SUPERFLUOUS 7ARNING
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT ON
7ITH DETECTED HARDWARE FAULTS THE RELAY BLOCKS ITSELF
ALL CIRCUITS AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED
DROP OFF OF THE AVAILABILITY RELAY SIGNALS EQUIPMENT WITH THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE OR WITH THE
FAULT )F THERE IS A FAULT DETECTED IN THE EXTERNAL MEA MEASURING AND TEST QUANTITIES
SURING CIRCUITS GENERALLY AN ALARM IS GIVEN ONLY
2ECOGNIZED SOFTWARE FAULTS CAUSE THE PROCESSOR TO

#AUTION
RESET AND RESTART )F SUCH A FAULT IS NOT ELIMINATED BY
RESTARTING FURTHER RESTARTS ARE INITIATED )F THE FAULT IS 4EST CURRENTS LARGER THAN TIMES ). MAY
STILL PRESENT AFTER THREE RESTART ATTEMPTS THE PROTEC OVERLOAD AND DAMAGE THE RELAY IF
TIVE SYSTEM WILL SWITCH ITSELF OUT OF SERVICE AND INDI APPLIED CONTINUOUSLY REFER TO 3ECTION
CATE THIS CONDITION BY THE RED ,%$ "LOCKED ON THE FOR OVERLOAD CAPABILITY /BSERVE A
FRONT PLATE $ROP OFF OF THE AVAILABILITY RELAY SIGNALS COOLING DOWN PERIOD
EQUIPMENT FAULT
4HE REACTION TO DEFECTS AND INDICATIONS GIVEN BY THE #IRCUIT BREAKER TRIP CIRCUITS ARE TESTED BY ACTUAL
RELAY CAN BE INDIVIDUALLY AND IN CHRONOLOGICAL SE LIVE TRIPPING 2ESPECTIVE NOTES ARE GIVEN IN 3EC
QUENCE READ OFF AS OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS UNDER TION
THE ADDRESS FOR DEFECT DIAGNOSIS REFER TO 3EC
TION
)F THE RELAY IS CONNECTED TO A LOCAL SUBSTATION AUTO

MATION SYSTEM ,3! DEFECT INDICATIONS WILL ALSO BE
TRANSFERRED VIA THE SERIAL INTERFACE TO THE CENTRAL CON
TROL SYSTEM
7ARNING
%NSURE THAT THE CONNECTION MODULES ARE NOT
DAMAGED WHEN REMOVING OR INSERTING THE
DEVICE MODULES (AZARDOUS VOLTAGES MAY
OCCUR WHEN THE HEAVY CURRENT PLUGS ARE
DAMAGED
# ' #

2EPLACING THE BACK UP BATTERY
4HE DEVICE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE STORED IN .6 2!-S 3HORTEN THE LEGS TO MM INCH EACH AND
! BACK UP BATTERY IS INSERTED SO THAT THEY ARE RE BEND OVER AT A LENGTH OF MM INCH
TAINED EVEN WITH A LONGER FAILURE OF THE DC SUPPLY
VOLTAGE 4HE BACK UP BATTERY IS ALSO REQUIRED FOR THE
INTERNAL SYSTEM CLOCK WITH CALENDER TO CONTINUE IN
THE EVENT OF A POWER SUPPLY FAILURE
4HE BACK UP BATTERY SHOULD BE REPLACED AT THE LAT

EST AFTER YEARS OF OPERATION 4HE WAY OF DISPLACE
MENT DEPENDS ON THE PRODUCTION SERIES OF THE RELAY
4HIS PRODUCTION SERIES IS FOUND ON THE NAME PLATE
BEHIND THE COMPLETE ORDER DESIGNATION $IMENSIONS
IN MM
2ECOMMENDED BATTERY
,ITHIUM BATTERY 6 !H TYPE #2 !! EG &IGURE "ENDING THE BACK UP BATTERY
6!24! /RDER .O FOR RELAYS UNTIL
PRODUCTION SERIES ''
6!24! /RDER .O FOR RELAYS FROM
PRODUCTION SERIES (( OR LATER 2ELAYS FROM PRODUCTION SERIES (( OR LATER HAVE
NO AXIAL LEGS
4HE BATTERY IS LOCATED AT THE REAR EDGE OF THE PROCES
SOR BOARD OF THE BASIC MODULE 4HE BASIC MODULE ,OOSEN THE BASIC MODULE USING THE PULLING AIDS
MUST BE REMOVED FROM THE HOUSING IN ORDER TO RE PROVIDED AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM &IGURE
PLACE THE BATTERY
0REPARE AREA OF WORK PROVIDE CONDUCTIVE SURFACE 7ARNING

FOR THE BASIC MODULE
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT IN
/PEN HOUSING COVER THE DEVICE EVEN AFTER DISCONNECTION OF
THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE OR AFTER REMOVAL OF THE
MODULES FROM THE HOUSING STORAGE CA
2EAD OUT DEVICE ANNUNCIATIONS IE ALL ADDRESSES
PACITORS
WHICH COMMENCE WITH ONWARDS 4HIS IS
CARRIED OUT MOST CONVENIENT USING THE FRONT OPER
ATING INTERFACE AND A PERSONAL COMPUTER WITH THE #AUTION
$)'3)q PROTECTION DATA PROCESSING PROGRAM THE
%LECTROSTATIC DISCHARGES VIA THE COMPO
INFORMATION IS THUS STORED IN THE 0#
NENT CONNECTIONS THE 0#" TRACKS OR THE
CONNECTING PINS OF THE MODULES MUST BE
.OTE !LL CONFIGURATION DATA AND SETTINGS OF THE DE AVOIDED UNDER ALL CIRCUMSTANCES BY PRE
VICE ARE STORED IN %%02/-S PROTECTED AGAINST VIOUSLY TOUCHING AN EARTHED METAL SUR
SWITCHING OFF OF THE POWER SUPPLY 4HEY ARE STORED FACE
INDEPENDENT OF THE BACK UP BATTERY 4HEY ARE
THEREFORE NEITHER LOST WHEN THE BATTERY IS RE 0ULL OUT BASIC MODULE AND PLACE ONTO THE CONDUC
PLACED NOR WHEN THE DEVICE IS OPERATED WITHOUT A TIVE SURFACE
BATTERY
5NSCREW USED BATTERY FROM THE TERMINALS OR RE
/NLY FOR RELAY UNTIL PRODUCTION SERIES '' 0RE MOVE IT FROM THE HOLDER DO NOT PLACE ON THE CON
PARE THE BATTERY AS IN &IGURE DUCTIVE SURFACE 2EFER TO &IGURE FOR RELAY UNTIL
PRODUCTION SERIES '' AND TO &IGURE FROM PRO
DUCTION SERIES ((
#AUTION
$O NOT SHORT CIRCUIT BATTERY $O NOT RE )NSERT THE PREPARED BATTERY INTO THE TERMINALS OR
VERSE BATTERY POLARITIES $O NOT CHARGE HOLDER AS IN &IGURE UNTIL PRODUCTION SERIES
BATTERY '' AND TIGHTEN THE SCREWS OR AS IN &IGURE
FROM PRODUCTION SERIES ((
# ' #

6IEW UPON
THE PCB
2EAR VIEW ON THE
REMOVED BASIC MODULE
&IGURE )NSTALLATION OF THE BACK UP BATTERY FOR RELAY UNTIL PRODUCTION SERIES ''
)NSERT BASIC MODULE INTO THE HOUSING ENSURE THAT $O NOT REVERSE POLARITIES $O NOT RE
THE RELEASING LEVER IS PUSHED FULLY TO THE LEFT BEFORE CHARGE $O NOT THROW INTO FIRE $ANGER
THE MODULE IS PRESSED IN OF EXPLOSION
&IRMLY PUSH IN THE MODULE USING THE RELEASING LE 0ROVIDED THE INTERNAL SYSTEM CLOCK IS NOT AUTOMAT
VER &IGURE ICALLY SYNCHRONIZED VIA THE ,3! INTERFACE IT CAN
NOW BE SET OR SYNCHRONIZED AS DESCRIBED IN 3EC
TION
7ARNING
#LOSE HOUSING COVER
4HE DISCHARGED BATTERY CONTAINS ,ITHIUM
)T MUST ONLY BE DISPOSED OFF IN LINE WITH THE 4HE REPLACEMENT OF THE BACK UP BATTERY HAS THUS
APPLICABLE REGULATIONS BEEN COMPLETED
6IEW UPON
2EAR VIEW ON THE THE PCB
REMOVED BASIC MODULE
&IGURE )NSTALLATION OF THE BACK UP BATTERY FOR RELAY FROM PRODUCTION SERIES ((
# ' #

&AULT TRACING
)F THE PROTECTIVE DEVICE INDICATES A DEFECT THE FOLLOW 2EPLACING THE MINI FUSE
ING PROCEDURE IS SUGGESTED
3ELECT A REPLACEMENT FUSE } MM %NSURE
)F NONE OF THE ,%$S ON THE FRONT PLATE OF THE MODULE IS THAT THE RATED VALUE TIME LAG MEDIUM SLOW AND
ON THEN CHECK CODE LETTERS ARE CORRECT &IGURE
(AVE THE MODULES BEEN PROPERLY PUSHED IN AND 0REPARE AREA OF WORK PROVIDE CONDUCTIVE SURFACE
LOCKED FOR THE BASIC MODULE
)S THE /./&& SWITCH ON THE FRONT PLATE IN THE /. /PEN HOUSING COVER
POSITION
)S THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE AVAILABLE WITH THE CORRECT

POLARITY AND OF ADEQUATE MAGNITUDE CONNECTED
7ARNING
TO THE CORRECT TERMINALS 'ENERAL DIAGRAMS IN !P (AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT IN
PENDIX ! THE DEVICE EVEN AFTER DISCONNECTION OF
THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE OR AFTER REMOVAL OF THE
(AS THE MINI FUSE IN THE POWER SUPPLY SECTION MODULES FROM THE HOUSING STORAGE CA
BLOWN SEE &IGURE )F APPROPRIATE REPLACE THE PACITORS
FUSE ACCORDING TO 3ECTION
,OOSEN THE BASIC MODULE USING THE PULLING AIDS
)F THE RED FAULT INDICATOR "LOCKED ON THE FRONT IS ON
PROVIDED AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM &IGURE
AND THE GREEN READY ,%$ REMAINS DARK THE DEVICE
HAS RECOGNIZED AN INTERNAL FAULT 2E INITIALIZATION OF
THE PROTECTION SYSTEM COULD BE TRIED BY SWITCHING #AUTION
THE DC AUXILIARY VOLTAGE OFF AND ON AGAIN 4HIS HOW
EVER RESULTS IN LOSS OF FAULT DATA AND MESSAGES IF THE %LECTROSTATIC DISCHARGES VIA THE COMPO
RELAY IS NOT EQUIPPED WITH A BUFFER BATTERY AND IF A NENT CONNECTIONS THE 0#" TRACKS OR THE
CONNECTING PINS OF THE MODULES MUST BE
PARAMETERIZING PROCESS HAS NOT YET BEEN COM
AVOIDED UNDER ALL CIRCUMSTANCES BY PRE
PLETED THE LAST PARAMETERS ARE NOT STORED
VIOUSLY TOUCHING AN EARTHED METAL SUR
FACE
-INI FUSE OF THE POWER SUPPLY

MEDIUM SLOW -
2EAR VIEW ON THE REMOVED
BASIC MODULE RATED
AT 5(.6 VALUE
!%
!%
!'
&IGURE -INI FUSE OF THE POWER SUPPLY
# ' #

0ULL OUT BASIC MODULE AND PLACE ONTO THE CONDUC &IRMLY PUSH IN THE MODULE USING THE RELEASING LE
TIVE SURFACE VER &IGURE
2EMOVE BLOWN FUSE FROM THE HOLDER &IGURE #LOSE HOUSING COVER
&IT NEW FUSE INTO THE HOLDER &IGURE 3WITCH ON THE DEVICE AGAIN )F A POWER SUPPLY FAILURE
IS STILL SIGNALLED A FAULT OR SHORT CIRCUIT IS PRESENT IN
)NSERT BASIC MODULE INTO THE HOUSING ENSURE THAT THE INTERNAL POWER SUPPLY 4HE DEVICE SHOULD BE RE
THE RELEASING LEVER IS PUSHED FULLY TO THE LEFT BEFORE TURNED TO THE FACTORY SEE #HAPTER
THE MODULE IS PRESSED IN &IGURE
2EMOVING THE BASIC MODULE

,OOSEN THE BASIC MODULE USING THE PULLING AIDS
PROVIDED AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM
0ULL OUT BASIC MODULE AND PLACE ONTO CONDUCTIVE
SURFACE
)NSERTING THE BASIC MODULE

0USH RELEASING LEVER FULLY TO THE LEFT
)NSERT MODULE
&IRMLY PUSH IN THE MODULE USING THE
RELEASING LEVER
6IEW FROM ABOVE ONTO A SIZE

MODULE WITH RELEASING LEVER
&IGURE !ID FOR REMOVING AND INSERTING BASIC MODULE
# ' #

3! 6 2EPAIRS 3TORAGE
2EPAIRS 3TORAGE
2EPAIR OF DEFECTIVE MODULES IS NOT RECOMMENDED AT 3OLID STATE PROTECTIVE RELAYS SHALL BE STORED IN DRY
ALL BECAUSE SPECIALLY SELECTED ELECTRONIC COMPO AND CLEAN ROOMS 4HE LIMIT TEMPERATURE RANGE FOR
NENTS ARE USED WHICH MUST BE HANDLED IN ACCOR STORAGE OF THE RELAYS OR ASSOCIATED SPARE PARTS IS
DANCE WITH THE PROCEDURES REQUIRED FOR %LECTROSTATI ^# TO ^# REFER 3ECTION UNDER THE
CALLY %NDANGERED #OMPONENTS %%# &URTHER 4ECHNICAL DATA CORRESPONDING TO ^& TO ^&
MORE SPECIAL MANUFACTURING TECHNIQUES ARE NECES
SARY FOR ANY WORK ON THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS IN OR 4HE RELATIVE HUMIDITY MUST BE WITHIN LIMITS SUCH THAT
DER TO DO NOT DAMAGE THE BATH SOLDERED MULTILAYER NEITHER CONDENSATION NOR ICE FORMS
BOARDS THE SENSITIVE COMPONENTS AND THE PROTEC
TIVE FINISH )T IS RECOMMENDED TO REDUCE THE STORAGE TEMPERA
TURE TO THE RANGE # TO # & TO &
4HEREFORE IF A DEFECT CANNOT BE CORRECTED BY OPERA THIS PREVENTS FROM EARLY AGEING OF THE ELECTROLYTIC CA
TOR PROCEDURES SUCH AS DESCRIBED IN #HAPTER IT IS PACITORS WHICH ARE CONTAINED IN THE POWER SUPPLY
RECOMMENDED THAT THE COMPLETE RELAY SHOULD BE RE
TURNED TO THE MANUFACTURER 5SE THE ORIGINAL TRANS &OR VERY LONG STORAGE PERIODS IT IS RECOMMENDED
PORT PACKAGING FOR RETURN )F ALTERNATIVE PACKING IS THAT THE RELAY SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO THE AUXILIARY
USED THIS MUST PROVIDE THE DEGREE OF PROTECTION VOLTAGE SOURCE FOR ONE OR TWO DAYS EVERY OTHER YEAR
AGAINST MECHANICAL SHOCK AS LAID DOWN IN )%# IN ORDER TO REGENERATE THE ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
CLASS AND )%# CLASS 4HE SAME IS VALID BEFORE THE RELAY IS FINALLY INSTALLED
)N EXTREME CLIMATIC CONDITIONS TROPICS PRE WARM
)F IT IS UNAVOIDABLE TO REPLACE INDIVIDUAL MODULES IT IS ING WOULD THUS BE ACHIEVED AND CONDENSATION
IMPERATIVE THAT THE STANDARDS RELATED TO THE HANDLING AVOIDED
OF %LECTROSTATICALLY %NDANGERED #OMPONENTS ARE
OBSERVED "EFORE INITIAL ENERGIZATION WITH SUPPLY VOLTAGE THE
RELAY SHALL BE SITUATED IN THE OPERATING AREA FOR AT
7ARNING EQUALIZATION AND TO AVOID HUMIDITY INFLUENCES AND
CONDENSATION
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT IN THE
DEVICE EVEN AFTER DISCONNECTION OF THE SUP
PLY VOLTAGE OR AFTER REMOVAL OF THE MODULE
FROM THE HOUSING STORAGE CAPACITORS
#AUTION
%LECTROSTATIC DISCHARGES VIA THE COMPONENT
CONNECTIONS THE 0#" TRACKS OR THE CONNECT
ING PINS OF THE MODULES MUST BE AVOIDED UN
DER ALL CIRCUMSTANCES BY PREVIOUSLY TOUCH
ING AN EARTHED METAL SURFACE 4HIS APPLIES
EQUALLY FOR THE REPLACEMENT OF REMOVABLE
COMPONENTS SUCH AS %02/- OR %%02/-
CHIPS &OR TRANSPORT AND RETURNING OF INDIVID
UAL MODULES ELECTROSTATIC PROTECTIVE PACK
ING MATERIAL MUST BE USED
#OMPONENTS AND MODULES ARE NOT ENDANGERED AS

LONG AS THEY ARE INSTALLED WITHIN THE RELAY
3HOULD IT BECOME NECESSARY TO EXCHANGE ANY DE

VICE OR MODULE THE COMPLETE PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT
SHOULD BE REPEATED 2ESPECTIVE NOTES ARE CONTAINED
IN #HAPTER AND
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
!PPENDIX
! 'ENERAL DIAGRAMS
# 4ABLES
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
! 'ENERAL DIAGRAMS

.
/
+/--!.$/2%,!)3 #/--!.$
)
3
)
6
2
- %
2 0
! 5
, 3
! %
-%,$%2%,!)3 2%,!9
$
4 5
. "
,
2
! # !
! %
- 4 6 6
+ )
- 3 4
+ # 2
/ , !
# / 5
# ! , 2
/ 3
2 %
% , !
% $ 0
3 " G %
. . N /
/ % % -
U
, 3 2 K %
'
# ! C G #
)
2 ¼ N
G % R 6
O ) G U
N D %
D 2 N R H
U E C $
N G 2 U T
R A
A E ! N
R IE W IT
M # U
R E
N K R
C E
M LA LD B E
O A N LO E
B
+ R E T
E " -
D ¤
N N R
IN E E 5 3
7 E
% ' 3 + , - '

+ + - - - - -

" " " " ! ! ! ! " " " " " " " " " " " " ! ! !

!UFBAU 'EH¤USE 352&!#% -/5.4).' #!3%
%INBAU 'EH¤USE &,53( -/5.4).' #!3%
!
%
'
! ! ! ! !
% % % % %
' : ' : '

! ! ! ! ! ! $ $ " " " " # # # # # ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

.
/
)
4 4
!
%).'!"% ).054
#
2 !
$ % 4
% 0
.
, / /
4
" #
%
# %
3 8
% - 3
5
2 4 ! /
,
% 6
" #
4
/ T ,
A # !
-
M T 5
%
O K .
2 T A
U T !

T A N -
E
L O
S K
D
E FS IN
2 W IL %

S ( D
$ G N
% P 3 A
, 3 , (

, , , . X X
, , , , , , % %
5
5
5
5
5
5
, % , % , % , %
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

&IGURE ! 'ENERAL DIAGRAM 3! SHEET OF
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX

+/--!.$/2%,!)3 #/--!.$

, , , 3
2
$ $ $
%
. . . 6
! ! ! , %
- - - ! 2
2
-%,$%2%,!)3 2%,!9
- - - .
%
/ / / /
. )
# # # % 4
)0 )0 )0 ' !
2 2 2 0 #
4 4 4 ) , , , /
2 % ,
4 4 4 4
2 2 2 4
, , , ! ! ! 2 S
G T
4 4 4 ! R
O O O N ¤
D D D 3 3 3 4
U 3 W
N N N S
A A A K
L¶ C
M M M S , , , % ¼
U R
M M M G G G G
O O O LA N N N N G
A U U U U N
+ + + R
G G G G U
E T
N E E E E H
S S S R R R R
U U U E N N N N IC
! ! ! ' ! ! ! ! 2

+ + + - - - - - -

$ $ $ $ # # # # $ $ $ $ # # # $ $ $ $ $ $ # # $ $

!UFBAU 'EH¤USE 352&!#% -/5.4).' #!3%
%INBAU 'EH¤USE &,53( -/5.4).' #!3%
!
%
:
! 6
% 3
:

$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " "

2
/
4
)
%).'!"% ).054
.
/
-
%
6 ,
) %
%
.
#
. +
%
! 9 #
2
( $ /
2 # ! , &
%
) % " &
T 2 .
2 R /
/
2 ¶ 2
T "
! S ! 2
# E # 2
!
G !
K

G G IT C
S
N N E
R LO IN U
FA FA E " % !
P P B
M M 3 5 5 5
% % , + + +

, ,

(
5
, % , % , % , % , % , %

# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
2X$ ! ! 4X$

6
-2 ! ! -4

36
%INBAU UND !UFBAUGEH¤USE MIT 6

3CHNITTSTELLE
&,53( !.$ 352&!#% -/5.4).' #!3% 7)4(

6 3%2)!, $!4! ,).+
3!

"
! !
& 3-! & 3-!
36
%INBAU 'EH¤USE MIT ,7, -ODUL

&,53( -/5.4).' #!3% 7)4( &)"2%
/04)# ).4%2&!#%
3!

!

#%&'
! !
& 3-! ! ! & 3-!
36
!UFBAU 'EH¤USE MIT ,7, -ODUL

352&!#% -/5.4).' #!3% 7)4( &)"2%
/04)# ).4%2&!#%
3!

"!
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
3URFACE MOUNTING
&LUSH MOUNTING#UBICLE INSTALLATION

, , , !
), "
! "
3IGNAL RELAY 4RANSMISSION SIGNAL
)%
! "

), "
!
"
! 3IGNAL RELAY !2 BLOCKED
), "
),
), ! "
), $ "
)% 3IGNAL RELAY #" ALARM SUPPRESSION
$ "

"
"
5, " -EASURED QUANTITIES FAULTY
3IGNAL RELAY
" GENERAL

5, " !
5,
5, ! $EVICE OPERATIVE
3IGNAL RELAY
5, ! DEVICE FAULTY
"
5. 5, #
" #
5. 3IGNAL RELAY 'ENERAL TRIP
5E
#

# $
3IGNAL RELAY $ &AULT DETECTION ,
5N
$
#
3IGNAL RELAY $ &AULT DETECTION ,
, $
# 3IGNAL RELAY $ &AULT DETECTION ,
,
#
# 3IGNAL RELAY &AULT DETECTION %
, 5X #
$
#
5X 3IGNAL RE 2EVERSE DIRECTION
$
! LAY
"INARY
2ESET ,%$ !
INPUT 3!
!
"INARY
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER ! "
INPUT
MCB 4RIP RE "
!
#" AUXILIARY CONTACT "INARY " #,/3% COMMAND
LAIS
!
#" CLOSED INPUT "
!
"INARY !
-ANUAL CLOSING !
INPUT 4RIP RE !
'ENERAL FAULT
$ LAIS !
"INARY DETECTION
3IGNAL RECEPTION $ !
INPUT
$ $
"INARY
2ECEPTION FAULTY $ $
INPUT 4RIP RE
$ 42)0 ,
$ LAIS
"INARY $
#" READY FOR CLOSE
$ INPUT
TRIP CYCLE #
$
"INARY #
"LOCK !2 $ 4RIP RE
INPUT # 42)0 ,
LAIS
$ #
"INARY
3WITCH !2 ON $ $
INPUT
$ $
"INARY 4RIP RE
3WITCH !2 OFF $ 42)0 ,
$ LAIS
INPUT
$
"
,
0OWER SUPPLY "
,
2X$ ! !

3ERIAL INTERFACE 623# 4X$ /PTIONAL
-2 ! K6 INSULATED ! -4
COUPLING TO CENTRAL STATION
6 INTERFACE
3ERIAL INTERFACE FOR OPTICAL FIBRE OPTICAL FIBRE INTERFACE

COUPLING TO CENTRAL STATION
"INARY INPUTS SIGNAL RELAYS
TRIP RELAYS ,%$ S ARE
FREELY ARRANGABLE
OPTIONAL SENSITIVITY
NORMAL SENSITIVITY
HIGH SENSITIVITY FOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION
IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS 3!

OPTIONAL CONNECTION # PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING

TO OPEN DELTA VOLTAGE AS ILLUSTRATED " PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING
TO BUS BAR VOLTAGE FOR SYNCHRO CHECK
% CUBICLE INSTALLATION
&IGURE " #ONNECTION EXAMPLE 3!
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
"US SURFACE FLUSH "US SURFACE FLUSH
BAR BAR
3! 3!
&EEDER #4S
), ! !
&EEDER #4S
), ! !
), ! ! ), ! !

,INE ,INE
), ! ! ), ! !
)% $ $
)% $
$
EGSUMMATION
&IGURE " #4 CIRCUITS WITH #4S TRANSFORMER
.OTE )F THE CURRENT POLARITY IS CHANGED UNDER

ADDRESS THIS CHANGES ALSO THE
POLARITY OF THE CURRENT INPUT )%
"US SURFACE FLUSH

&IGURE " #4 CIRCUITS WITH #4S AND ADDITIONAL
BAR )% SUMMATION #4
3!
&EEDER #4S
), ! !
), ! !

,INE !
), ! !
"US SURFACE FLUSH
BAR
)% $ $ 3!
&EEDER #4S
), ! !
), ! !

,INE
), ! !
,INE "
)% $
$
EGSUMMATION
TRANSFORMER
&IGURE " #4 CIRCUITS WITH #4S AND EARTH CUR
RENT OF A PARALLEL LINE " .OTE )F THE CURRENT POLARITY IS CHANGED UNDER
ADDRESS THIS CHANGES ALSO THE
POLARITY OF THE CURRENT INPUT )%
&IGURE " #4 CIRCUITS WITH #4S AND ADDITIONAL

)% SUMMATION #4 NOT FOR EARTHED SYS
TEMS
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
SURFACE FLUSH SURFACE FLUSH
3! 3!
&EEDER 64S 5, " 5, "
5, " &EEDER

5, "
64S
5, " 5, "
" "
5EN #
&IGURE " 64 CIRCUITS WITH 64S

#
.OTE
)F OPEN DELTA VOLTAGE IS NOT AVAILABLE NEITHER FROM

FEEDER 64S NOR FROM BUS BAR 64S THE APPROPRIATE
&IGURE " 64 CIRCUITS WITH 64S WITH OPEN DEL INPUT ON THE RELAY REMAINS UNCONNECTED .EVERTHE
TA WINDINGS E N LESS THE RELAY IS ABLE TO DETECT EARTH FAULTS PROVIDED
THREE STAR CONNECTED AND EARTHED VOLTAGE TRANS
FORMERS ARE AVAILABLE REFER &IGURE "
SURFACE FLUSH
3! SURFACE FLUSH

5, "
5, 3!
&EEDER 64S
IN 6 CONNEC
" 5, "
TION
5, " 5, "
&EEDER
64S
5, "
"
5EN #
OPEN DELTA ANY VOLTAGE

5 #
VOLTAGE FROM FROM THE
#
BUS BAR BUS BAR
PHASE #
EARTH
&IGURE " 64 CIRCUITS WITH 64S AND OPEN DELTA OR

VOLTAGE FROM A BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANS
FORMER SET NOT FOR EARTHED SYSTEMS
ANY VOLTAGE 5 #
FROM THE
BUS BAR
PHASE #
PHASE
&IGURE " 64 CIRCUITS WITH 64S AND ANY DESIRED

VOLTAGE FROM THE BUS BAR 64S
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
#
$
# # 6
# $ $
$ #
)0 6 6 $
N IT 2 6
#

E M
4
$ 6
D S
3
, 6

N N 5

E A !
G
3 R E
4 N
A V
I
F
P E
C
M E
! % 2
3 " # $
8
L

3TATION "
E 8
S
S
¼
L + + + + + +
E
H
C D
O Y Y Y Y Y Y
3
# LA LA LA LA LA LA
R E E E E E E
"
&
E ! 2 2 2 2 2 2
A B , D
R S
I S
I S
I S
I S
I S
I
0
- / LA LA LA LA LA LA
,
2 2 E E E E E E
2 2 2 2 2 2
8
8
2 2

! + +
0

C D

N
, , IO
T G N
N G
N IA U N N IO
T
%NERGIELEITUNG
E C O
IT
D N
D FA IA
IN
0OWER LINE
N U C P C
E N B E N
R N M U
3 N E N % N
A V
N O N N
E N N
R C A
E
G IO E E G N
N S D RI N
U S I A U IO
T
Z W
LD M T T LD P
E S U O E E
H LI C
- N C - E
0
RA 3 2
4
#
$
"

C D K
K

8
8
+ + K
K
G
N
U
2 2 S K
! S P + + K +
0 A O

P LO
N
,

2 2 A RE
I
N
R
E W
A B
D
T
A LO
I
Z
T P
3TATION !
U R
H O
F
C
3 S X X X X X X
R E 2 2 2 2 2 2
U C
Z N
A
T
N
E S
I
F S
! U
3 G E T RE
N IV S
S R
A
F E E
C D
P E N P
N IT M 2 A
T
P
O K
E M % S R + + K +
S 0 R
D )
E $
N N 2
,
E A 4

ID
R 3
K
3 4 7
5
K

!

K K

, , , , , , , ,

&IGURE " 0ILOT WIRE CONNECTION SCHEME FOR OVERREACH TRANSFER VIA PILOT WIRES WITH 3! AT BOTH LINE
ENDS
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX

, ,

#
T $
E # # 6
D # $ $
$ #
Z N TL $
T
U )0 6
6 6 #
U IO
T A 2 $ 6
H 4
C C &
6
S E
T G T 3
S O N ,
G R 5
N P U !
G
TU E E
I R
E IN N
, , !
3TATION "

, 8 " # $
L
E 8
S
S
¼
L + + + + + +
E
H
C D
3 O Y Y Y Y Y Y
E # A
L A
L A
L A
L A
L A
L
R R E E E E E E
T U " E
R LI & ! 2 2 2 2 2 2
! ¶ D
T A
F , R 0 IS IS IS IS IS IS
S - / A A A A A A
E
G RE
I
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
#
N W 2 2 2 2 2 2
R T
E
D LO
I
7 " A P
3 FS
LI N
( IO
T

G IA
N C
U N
U
LD N
E N
- !
S
G
N
N U N
%NERGIELEITUNG
IO
T D IO
T
IN N
0OWER LINE
IA C
C B E IO
T
R N G
N
N U
E N N IA
E V O A C
N N F
D N R C P N
N A E U
E E
RI M N
N D
3 A % N
IO Z W A
N T T N
E S U E N
S O
LI
G I H G IO
N C 0 N T
M P
U S 3 U
D N D E
L L C
#
$
"
E RA E E
- 4 - 2

C D
8
8 + +

G
N
U
2 2 S
! S P # # #
0 A O
P O
L
N
, 2 2 A E
RI
N
R
E W
A B T
D O
A LI
TZ P
3TATION !
U R
H FO
C
3 S X X X X X X
R E 2 2 2 2 2 2
U C
Z N
A
T
N
E
F IS
! S
3 G E TU E
R
N V
I S
S R
FA E D E
P C P
E N
TI P
N M 2 TA O K
E M % S R + + +
D S )0 R
$ K
N 2 E
N 4 , D
E A
I
R 3 K
3 4 7
5
K

!

K K

, , , , , , , ,

&IGURE " 0ILOT WIRE CONNECTION SCHEME FOR OVERREACH TRANSFER VIA PILOT WIRES WITH 3! AT ONE LINE END
AND 37 AT THE OTHER LINE END
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
# 4ABLES
4ABLE # !NNUNCIATIONS FO ,3!
4ABLE # !NNUNCIATIONS FOR 0# ,# DISPLAY AND BINARY INPUTSOUTPUTS
4ABLE # 2EFERENCE TABLE FOR FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
4ABLE # 4ESTS AND COMMISSIONING AIDS ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
4ABLE # !NNUNCIATIONS MEASURED VALUES ETC ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
4ABLE # 2EFERENCE TABLE FOR CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
4ABLE # /PERATIONAL DEVICE CONTROL FACILITIES ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
./4% 4HE FOLLOWING TABLES LIST ALL DATA WHICH ARE AVAILABLE IN THE MAXIMUM COMPLEMENT OF THE DEVICE $EPEN
DENT ON THE ORDERED MODEL ONLY THOSE DATA MAY BE PRESENT WHICH ARE VALID FOR THE INDIVIDUAL VERSION
./4% 4HE ACTUAL TABLES ARE ATTACHED TO THE PURCHASED RELAY
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Annunciations 7SA511 for LSA (DIN 19244 and according VDEW/ZVEI)

µµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµ
FNo. - Function number of annunciation
Op/Ft - Operation/Fault annunciation
C/CG: Coming/Coming and Going annunciation
V : Annunciation with Value
M : Measurand
LSA No.- Number of annunciation for former LSA (DIN 19244)
according to VDEW/ZVEI:
CA - Compatible Annunciation
GI - Annunciation for General Interrogation
BT - Binary Trace for fault recordings
Typ - Function type (p: according to the configured "Function type")
Inf - Information number
Â¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬§
Ann.LSA VDEW/ZVEI
FNo. Meaning OpFtNo.CAGIBTTypInf
«¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
11>User defined annunciation 1 CG 24CAGIBT p 27
15>Testing via system-interface 135 53
16>Block. of monitoring dir. via sys.-int 135 54
51Device operative / healthy CG 1 GI 135 81
52Any protection operative CG CAGI p 18
55Re-start of processor system C 8CA p 4
56Initial start of processor system C 14CA p 5
59Real time response to LSA C 6
60LED Reset C 13CA p 19
61Logging and measuring functions blockedCG CAGI p 20
62Test mode CG CAGI p 21
63PC operation via system interface CG GI 135 83
95Parameters are being set CG 11CAGI p 22
96Parameter set A is active CG 40CAGI p 23
97Parameter set B is active CG 41CAGI p 24
98Parameter set C is active CG 42CAGI p 25
99Parameter set D is active CG 43CAGI p 26
110Annunciations lost (buffer overflow) C 9 135130
112Annunciations for LSA lost C 10 135131
113Fault tag lost BT135136
140General internal failure of device CG CAGI p 47
141Failure of internal 24 VDC power supplyCG 96 GI 135161
143Failure of internal 15 VDC power supplyCG 97 GI 135163
144Failure of internal 5 VDC power supply CG 98 GI 135164
145Failure of internal 0 VDC power supply CG 99 GI 135165
151Failure in I/O module 1 CG 100 GI 135166
152Failure in I/O module 2 CG 101 GI 135167
154Supervision trip circuit CG CAGI p 36
160Common alarm CG CAGI p 46
161Measured value supervision of currents CG CAGI p 32
162Failure: Current summation supervision CG 104 GI 135182
163Failure: Current symmetry supervision CG 107 GI 135183
164Measured value supervision of voltages CG CAGI p 33
165Failure: Voltage sum superv. (ph-e) CG 105 GI 135184
166Failure: Voltage sum superv. (ph-ph) CG 106 GI 135185
167Failure: Voltage symmetry supervision CG 108 GI 135186
168Failure: Measuring voltages absent CG 109 GI 135187
169Fuse failure monitor operated (>10s) CG 110 GI 135188
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬¬Á
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Â¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬§
Ann.LSA VDEW/ZVEI
«¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
171Failure: Phase sequence supervision CG 111CAGI p 35
204Fault recording initiated via bin.input BT135204
205Fault recording initiated via keyboard BT135205
206Fault recording initiated via PC interf BT135206
301Fault in the power system CG 2 135231
302Flt. event w. consecutive no. C 135232
303E/Flt.det. in isol/comp.netw. CG GI 135233
361>U Line side VT MCB tripped CG 20CAGI p 38
362>U2 Busbar side VT MCB tripped CG GI 150 12
501General fault detection of device CG221CAGIBT p 84
502General drop-off of device C 152 150152
503General device fault detection: Ph. L1 CG CAGIBT p 64
506General device fault detection: Ph. N CG CAGIBT p 67
507General device trip: Phase L1 C CA BT p 69
511General trip of device C CA BT p 68
516General trip for fault in forward dir. C 242 150166
517General trip for fault in reverse dir. C 243 150167
521Interrupted current: Phase L1(I/In) V250 150171
561Circuit breaker manually closed (pulse)C 18 150211
562CB close command for manual closing C 150212
601Current in phase IL1 [%] = M CA 134128
621UL1E [%]= M CA 134128
622UL2E [%]= M CA 134128
623UL3E [%]= M CA 134128
624UL12 [%] = M 134128
625UL23 [%] = M 134128
626UL31 [%] = M 134128
641Active power Pa [%] = M CA 134128
642Reactive power Pr [%] = M CA 134128
644Frequency f [%] = M CA 134128
701Iea [mA] = M 134128
702Ier [mA] = M 134128
1114Fault resistance, Ohm prim. V 151 14
1115Fault reactance, Ohm prim. V CA p 73
1117Fault resistance, Ohm sec. V201 151 17
1118Fault reactance, Ohm sec. V202 151 18
1119Distance to fault in km V203 151 19
1120Distance to fault in % V204 151 20
1174Circuit breaker test in progress CG 21 GI 151 74
1181Circuit breaker test: General trip C 151 81
1261E/F det. (isol./comp. net) switched offCG 95 GI 151161
1262E/F detection (isol./comp. net) blockedCG GI 151162
1263E/F detection (isol./comp. net) active CG GI 151163
1272Earth fault (isol./comp.) L1 detected CG 89CAGI p 48
1276Earth fault (isol./comp.) forward dir. CG 92CAGI p 51
1277Earth fault (isol./comp.) reverse dir. CG 93CAGI p 52
1278Earth fault (isol./comp.) undef. dir. CG 94 GI 151178
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬¬Á
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Â¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬§
Ann.LSA VDEW/ZVEI
«¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
1281Trip by earth fault det. (isol./comp.) C 151181
1316>Carrier reception for direct. E/F compCG 68 GI 166 16
1317>Carrier reception for dir. E/F faulty CG 67 GI 166 17
1331Earth fault protection is switched off CG 71 GI 166 31
1332Earth fault protection is blocked CG GI 166 32
1333Earth fault protection is active CG GI 166 33
1334Earth fault prot. direct.stage blocked CG 64 GI 166 34
1341Earth fault detection 75% Ie picked up CG208 BT166 41
1342Earth fault detection non-direct. Ie CG208 166 42
1343Earth fault detection directional Ie CG209 166 43
1352Earth fault prot. dir. time expired C 246 166 52
1353Earth fault prot. non-dir. time expired C 247 166 53
1381Earth fault dir. comp. is switched off CG GI 166 81
1384Carrier transmission for dir. comp. E/F C 245 166 84
1385Echo signal for directional comp. E/F C 70 166 85
1386Transient block. of E/F protection C 218 166 86
1511Thermal overload prot. is switched off CG GI 167 11
1512Thermal overload protection is blocked CG GI 167 12
1513Thermal overload protection is active CG GI 167 13
1515Thermal overload prot.: Current warningCG GI 167 15
1516Thermal overload prot.: Thermal warningCG GI 167 16
1517Thermal overload prot.: Pick-up thermalCG GI 167 17
1521Thermal overload protection trip C BT167 21
2051Emergency O/C protect. is switched off CG GI 61 51
2052Emergency O/C protection is blocked CG GI 61 52
2053Emergency O/C protection is active CG GI 61 53
2054Emergency O/C protection is running CG 50CAGI p 37
2061Emerg. O/C prot.: General fault detect. CG160 BT 61 61
2062Emerg. O/C prot.: Fault detection L1 CG145 61 62
2065Emerg. O/C prot.: Earth fault detection CG148 61 65
2071Emerg. O/C earth fault detection only C 61 71
2072Emerg. O/C fault detection L1 only C 161 61 72
2073Emerg. O/C fault detection L1E C 162 61 73
2076Emerg. O/C fault detection L12 C 165 61 76
2091Emerg. O/C phase fault detection I>> CG 61 91
2093Emerg. O/C phase fault detection I> CG 61 93
2097Emerg. O/C earth fault detection IE> CG 61 97
2121Emerg. O/C prot.: Time TI>> expired C 153 61121
2123Emerg. O/C prot.: Time TI> expired C 157 61123
2127Emerg. O/C prot.: Time TIE> expired C 157 61127
2141Emerg. O/C protection: General Trip C 191CA p 72
2142Emerg. O/C protection: Trip 1pole L1 C 238 61142
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬¬Á
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Â¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬§
Ann.LSA VDEW/ZVEI
«¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
2145Emerg. O/C protection: Trip 3pole C 241 61145
2704>AR: Reset auto-reclose function CG GI 40 4
2709>AR: Block delayed auto-reclose CG 76 GI 40 9
2711>AR: External start for internal AR CG 28 GI 40 11
2712>AR: Ext. Trip L1 for internal AR CG 29 GI 40 12
2781AR: Auto-reclose is switched off CG 79 GI 40 81
2782AR: Auto-reclose is switched on CG CAGI p 16
2783AR: Auto-reclose is blocked CG 72 GI 40 83
2784AR: Auto-reclose is not ready CG CAGIBT p130
2785AR: Auto-reclose is dynamically blockedCG 233 GI 40 85
2787AR: Circuit breaker not ready CG 78 GI 40 87
2801AR: Auto-reclose in progress CGCG228 GI 40101
2813AR: 1pole dead time for RAR is running CGCG230 GI 40113
2814AR: 3pole dead time for RAR is running CGCG230 GI 40114
2833AR: 3pole dead time 1 for DAR running CGCG230 GI 40133
2851AR: Close command from auto-reclose C 248CA BT p128
2854AR: Close command after 3pole DAR cycleC CA p129
2863AR: Definitive trip C 74 40163
2871AR: Trip during 1pole AR cycle C 40171
2931Synchro-check function is switched off CG GI 41 31
2932Synchro-check function is blocked CG GI 41 32
2934Synchro-check function faulty CG GI 41 34
2935Synchro-check supervision time expired C 41 35
2941Synchro-check function is running CG GI 41 41
2942Synchro-check function override/bypass C 41 42
2943Synchronism (U1>,U2>) detected C 41 43
2944Live line,dead busbar(U1>,U2<) detectedC 41 44
2945Dead line,live busbar(U1<,U2>) detectedC 41 45
2946Dead line,dead busbar(U1<,U2<) detectedC 41 46
2947Sync.: Voltage diff. greater than limitC 41 47
2948Sync.: Freq. diff. greater than limit C 41 48
2949Sync.: Angle diff. greater than limit C 41 49
2951Synchronism release (to ext. AR) C 41 51
2961Close command from synchro-check C 41 61
3651Distance protection is switched off CG 55 GI 28 51
3652Distance protection is blocked CG 48 GI 28 52
3653Distance protection is active CG GI 28 53
3671Dist.: General fault detection CG144 28 71
3672Dist.: Fault detection , phase L1 CG145 GIBT 28 72
3675Dist.: Fault detection , earth fault CG148 GIBT 28 75
3681Dist.: Fault detection only phase L1 C 161 28 81
3682Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,E C 162 28 82
3685Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,2 C 165 28 85
3686Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,2,E C 166 28 86
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬¬Á
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Â¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬§
Ann.LSA VDEW/ZVEI
«¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
3693Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,2,3 C 173 28 93
3694Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,2,3,E C 174 28 94
3719Dist.: Fault det. in forward direction C 149CA BT p 74
3720Dist.: Fault det. in reverse direction C 150CA BT p 75
3771Dist.: Time T1 ( Zone Z1 ) expired C 153CA p 78
3778Dist.: Time T4 (direct. zone) expired C 156CA p 81
3779Dist.: Time T5 (non-dir. zone) expired C 157CA p 82
3780Dist.: Time T1B ( Zone Z1B ) expired C 158 28180
3783Dist.: Time T1L ( Zone Z1L ) expired C 159 28183
3801Distance protection: General trip C 28201
3802Dist.: Trip phase L1 1pole only C 238 28202
3805Dist.: Trip 3pole C 241 28205
4051Dist. teleprotection is switched on CG CAGI p 17
4052Dist. teleprotection is switched off CG 63 GI 29 52
4054Dist. teleprotection: Carrier reception C 57CA p 77
4055Dist. teleprotection: Carrier faulty CG 60CAGI p 39
4056Dist. teleprotection: Carrier send C 244CA p 76
4067POTT teleprotection: Carrier echo send C 59 29 67
4068POTT teleprotection: Transient block C 198 29 68
4164Power swing detection CG 80 GI 29164
4166Out-of-step trip 3pole C 81 29166
4431Ext. trip via binary input: Trip C 51 31
4432Ext. trip via binary input: 1pole L1 C 51 32
4435Ext. trip via binary input: 3pole C 51 35
4436Ext. trip via binary input: Without AR C 51 36
6254Output signal of user defined timer T1 CG GI 214 54
6255Output signal of user defined timer T2 CG GI 214 55
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬¬¬©¬¬¬Á
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Annunciations 7SA511 for PC, LC-display and binary inputs/outputs

µµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµ
FNo. - Function number of annunciation
Op/Ft - Operation/Fault annunciation
C/CG: Coming/Coming and Going annunciation
M : Measurand
E - Earth fault annunciation
IOT - I: can be marshalled to binary input
O: can be marshalled to binary output (LED, signal relay)
T: can be marshalled to trip relay
Â¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬ª¬¬ª¬ª¬¬¬§
FNo.Abbreviation Meaning OpFtEIOT
«¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
3>Time Synchro>Time synchronization IO
4>Start FltRec>Start fault recording C IO
5>LED reset >Reset LED indicators IO
7>ParamSelec.1>Parameter set selection 1 (with No.8) IO
8>ParamSelec.2>Parameter set selection 2 (with No.7) IO
11>Annunc. 1 >User defined annunciation 1 CG IOT
15>Sys-Test >Testing via system-interface IO
16>Sys-MM-block>Block. of monitoring dir. via sys.-int IO
51Dev.operativeDevice operative / healthy CG O
52Prot. operat.Any protection operative CG O
56Initial startInitial start of processor system C
60LED reset LED Reset C O
61LogMeasBlock Logging and measuring functions blockedCG
62Test mode Test mode CG
95Param.runningParameters are being set CG O
96Param. Set A Parameter set A is active CG O
97Param. Set B Parameter set B is active CG O
98Param. Set C Parameter set C is active CG O
99Param. Set D Parameter set D is active CG O
100Wrong SW-versWrong software-version C
101Wrong dev. IDWrong device identification C
110Annunc. lost Annunciations lost (buffer overflow) C
111Annu. PC lostAnnunciations for PC lost C
115Flt.Buff.OverFault annunciation buffer overflow C
116E/F Buff.OverE/F buffer overflow E
120Oper.Ann.InvaOperational annunciations invalid CG
121Flt.Ann.InvalFault annunciations invalid CG
122E/F.Prot InvaEarth fault annunciations invalid CG
123Stat.Buff.InvStatistic annunciation buffer invalid CG
124LED Buff.InvaLED annunciation buffer invalid CG
129VDEW-StateInvVDEW state invalid CG
135Chs Error Error in check sum CG
136Chs.A Error Error in check sum for parameter set A CG
137Chs.B Error Error in check sum for parameter set B CG
138Chs.C Error Error in check sum for parameter set C CG
139Chs.D Error Error in check sum for parameter set D CG
141Failure 24V Failure of internal 24 VDC power supplyCG OT
143Failure 15V Failure of internal 15 VDC power supplyCG OT
144Failure 5V Failure of internal 5 VDC power supply CG OT
145Failure 0V Failure of internal 0 VDC power supply CG OT
151Failure I/O 1Failure in I/O module 1 CG OT
152Failure I/O 2Failure in I/O module 2 CG OT
154Fail. TripRelSupervision trip circuit CG
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬©¬¬¬Á
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Â¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬ª¬¬ª¬ª¬¬¬§
«¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
159LSA disruptedLSA (system interface) disrupted CG
161I supervisionMeasured value supervision of currents O
162Failure ÌI Failure: Current summation supervision CG OT
163Failure IsymmFailure: Current symmetry supervision CG OT
164U supervisionMeasured value supervision of voltages O
165Failure ÌUp-eFailure: Voltage sum superv. (ph-e) CG OT
166Failure ÌUp-pFailure: Voltage sum superv. (ph-ph) CG OT
167Failure UsymmFailure: Voltage symmetry supervision CG OT
168Failure UmeasFailure: Measuring voltages absent CG OT
169Fuse-Failure Fuse failure monitor operated (>10s) CG OT
170FFM pick-up Fuse failure monitor pick-up CG
171Fail.PhaseSeqFailure: Phase sequence supervision CG OT
203Flt.RecDatDelFault recording data deleted C
204Flt.Rec.viaBIFault recording initiated via bin.inputC
205Flt.Rec.viaKBFault recording initiated via keyboard C
206Flt.Rec.viaPCFault recording initiated via PC interfC
244D Time= Diff. time of clock synchronism M
301Syst.Flt Fault in the power system CGC
302Fault Flt. event w. consecutive no. C
303E/F Det. E/Flt.det. in isol/comp.netw. CG E
354>CB Aux.3p cl>CB aux. contact:3poles closed (series) IOT
356>Manual Close>Manual close IOT
357>CloseCmd.Blo>Block all close commands from externalCG IOT
361>VT mcb Trip >U Line side VT MCB tripped CG IOT
362>V2 mcb Trip >U2 Busbar side VT MCB tripped CG IOT
381>1p Trip Perm>External auto-reclose ready for 1pole CG IOT
382>Only 1pole >External AR programmed for 1pole only CG IOT
383>RAR Release >Release overreach zones RAR CGCG IOT
384>DAR Release >Release overreach zones DAR CGCG IOT
501Device FltDetGeneral fault detection of device OT
502Dev. Drop-offGeneral drop-off of device C
503Dev.FltDet L1General device fault detection: Ph. L1 OT
506Dev.FltDet N General device fault detection: Ph. N OT
511Device Trip General trip of device G OT
512Dev.Trip 1pL1General 1pole trip of device: Phase L1 OT
515Dev.Trip 3p General 3pole trip of device OT
516Dev.Trip forwGeneral trip for fault in forward dir. OT
517Dev.Trip rev.General trip for fault in reverse dir. C OT
521IL1/In= Interrupted current: Phase L1(I/In) C
545T-Drop Time from fault detection to drop-off
546T-Trip Time from fault detection to trip
561Manual Close Circuit breaker manually closed (pulse)C OT
562Man.Close CmdCB close command for manual closing OT
563CB Alarm SuppCB alarm suppressed OT
601IL1[%] = Current in phase IL1 [%] = M
621UL1E[%]= UL1E [%]= M
622UL2E[%]= UL2E [%]= M
623UL3E[%]= UL3E [%]= M
624UL12[%]= UL12 [%] = M
625UL23[%]= UL23 [%] = M
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬©¬¬¬Á
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Â¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬ª¬¬ª¬ª¬¬¬§
«¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
626UL31[%]= UL31 [%] = M
641Pa[%]= Active power Pa [%] = M
642Pr[%]= Reactive power Pr [%] = M
644f [%]= Frequency f [%] = M
651IL1 = Current in phase IL1 = M
671UL1E= Voltage UL1E = M
674UL12= Voltage UL12 = M
691Pa= Active power Pa = M
692Pr= Reactive power Pr = M
701Iea[mA]= Iea [mA] = M
702Ier[mA]= Ier [mA] = M
711Iea = Iea = M
712Ier = Ier = M
801Ñ/Ñtrip = Temperat. rise for warning and trip M
802Ñ/ÑtripL1= Temperature rise for phase L1 M
1001TripNo L1= Number of trip commands: Phase L1 M
1004ÌIL1/In= Summated current tripped IL1/In M
1011AR 1pole= No. of auto-reclose commands:1p RAR M
1012AR 3pole= No. of auto-reclose commands:3p RAR M
1013DAR 3pol= No. of auto-reclose commands:3p DAR M
1106>Start FltLoc>Start fault locator CG IOT
1114Rpri= Fault resistance, Ohm prim. C
1115Xpri= Fault reactance, Ohm prim. C
1117Rsec= Fault resistance, Ohm sec. C
1118Xsec= Fault reactance, Ohm sec. C
1119d = Distance to fault in km C
1120d[%]= Distance to fault in % C
1156>CB Test >CB test start IOT
1174CB in Test Circuit breaker test in progress CG OT
1181CB Test Trip Circuit breaker test: General trip OT
1182CB Test 1pL1 Circuit breaker test: Trip 1pole L1 C OT
1185CB Test 3p Circuit breaker test: Trip 3pole C OT
1251>E/F Det. on >Switch on E/F det. for isol./comp. net IOT
1252>E/F Det. off>Switch off E/F det. for isol./comp.net IOT
1253>E/F Det.bloc>Block E/F det. for isol./comp. net IOT
1261E/F Det. off E/F det. (isol./comp. net) switched offCG OT
1262E/F Det.blockE/F detection (isol./comp. net) blockedCG OT
1263E/F Det.activE/F detection (isol./comp. net) active OT
1271E/F DetectionEarth fault in isol./comp. net detected C E OT
1272E/F Detec. L1Earth fault (isol./comp.) L1 detected E OT
1276E/F forwards Earth fault (isol./comp.) forward dir. E OT
1277E/F reverse Earth fault (isol./comp.) reverse dir. E OT
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬©¬¬¬Á
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Â¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬ª¬¬ª¬ª¬¬¬§
«¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
1278E/F undefinedEarth fault (isol./comp.) undef. dir. E OT
1281E/F Det. TripTrip by earth fault det. (isol./comp.) C E OT
1289Iea Active component Iea E
1290Ier Reactive component Ier E
1303>E/F block >Block E/F protection IOT
1311>E/F comp. on>Switch on directional E/F comparison IOT
1312>E/F comp.off>Switch off directional E/F comparison IOT
1316>E/F Recept >Carrier reception for direct. E/F compC C IOT
1317>E/F Rec.Fail>Carrier reception for dir. E/F faulty CG IOT
1331E/F Prot. offEarth fault protection is switched off CG OT
1332E/F blocked Earth fault protection is blocked CGCG OT
1333E/F active Earth fault protection is active OT
1334E/F Dir.blockEarth fault prot. direct.stage blocked OT
1341E/F Flt75%Ie>Earth fault detection 75% Ie picked up CG OT
1342E/F Flt Ie<->Earth fault detection non-direct. Ie C OT
1343E/F Flt Ie ->Earth fault detection directional Ie C OT
1344E/F Ue> Earth fault displacement voltage Ue> OT
1351E/F T-Delay Earth fault protection time expired OT
1352E/F T-> Earth fault prot. dir. time expired OT
1353E/F T<-> Earth fault prot. non-dir. time expired OT
1361E/F Trip Trip by earth fault protection C OT
1381E/F Dir off Earth fault dir. comp. is switched off CG OT
1384E/F Send Carrier transmission for dir. comp. E/F C OT
1385E/F Echo Echo signal for directional comp. E/F C OT
1386E/F TransBlocTransient block. of E/F protection C OT
1501>O/L on >Switch on thermal overload protection IOT
1502>O/L off >Switch off thermal overload protection IOT
1503>O/L block >Block thermal overload protection IOT
1511O/L Prot. offThermal overload prot. is switched off CG OT
1512O/L blocked Thermal overload protection is blocked CG OT
1513O/L active Thermal overload protection is active OT
1515O/L Warn I Thermal overload prot.: Current warningCG OT
1516O/L Warn Ñ Thermal overload prot.: Thermal warningCG OT
1517O/L pickup Ñ Thermal overload prot.: Pick-up thermalCG OT
1521O/L Trip Thermal overload protection trip C OT
2003>Emer. block >Block emergency overcurrent protection IOT
2010>I>> block >Block I>> stage of emerg. O/C protec. CG IOT
2051Emer. off Emergency O/C protect. is switched off CG OT
2052Emer. block Emergency O/C protection is blocked CG OT
2053Emer. active Emergency O/C protection is active OT
2054Emer. mode Emergency O/C protection is running CG OT
2061Emer.Gen.Flt Emerg. O/C prot.: General fault detect. OT
2062Emer. Flt L1 Emerg. O/C prot.: Fault detection L1 OT
2065Emer. Flt E Emerg. O/C prot.: Earth fault detection OT
2071Emer. Flt E Emerg. O/C earth fault detection only C
2072Emer. Flt L1 Emerg. O/C fault detection L1 only C
2073Emer. Flt L1EEmerg. O/C fault detection L1E C
2076Emer. Flt L12Emerg. O/C fault detection L12 C
2077Emer.Flt L12EEmerg. O/C fault detection L12E C
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬©¬¬¬Á
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Â¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬ª¬¬ª¬ª¬¬¬§
«¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
2084Emer.Flt L123Emerg. O/C fault detection L123 C
2085Emer.Flt 123EEmerg. O/C fault detection L123E C
2091Emer. I>> Emerg. O/C phase fault detection I>> C OT
2093Emer. I> Emerg. O/C phase fault detection I> C OT
2097Emer. IE> Emerg. O/C earth fault detection IE> C OT
2121Emer. TI>> Emerg. O/C prot.: Time TI>> expired OT
2123Emer. TI> Emerg. O/C prot.: Time TI> expired OT
2127Emer. TIE> Emerg. O/C prot.: Time TIE> expired OT
2141Emer.Gen.TripEmerg. O/C protection: General Trip OT
2142Emer.Trip1pL1Emerg. O/C protection: Trip 1pole L1 C OT
2145Emer.Trip 3p Emerg. O/C protection: Trip 3pole C OT
2701>AR on >AR: Switch on auto-reclose function IOT
2702>AR off >AR: Switch off auto-reclose function IOT
2703>AR block >AR: Block auto-reclose function CG IOT
2704>AR reset >AR: Reset auto-reclose function C IOT
2706>1p RAR block>AR: Block 1pole rapid auto-reclose CG IOT
2707>3p RAR block>AR: Block 3pole rapid auto-reclose CG IOT
2708>RAR block >AR: Block rapid auto-reclose CG IOT
2709>DAR block >AR: Block delayed auto-reclose CG IOT
2711>Start AR >AR: External start for internal AR C IOT
2712>Trip L1 AR >AR: Ext. Trip L1 for internal AR C IOT
2715>Trip 1p AR >AR: Ext. 1pole trip for internal AR C IOT
2716>Trip 3p AR >AR: Ext. 3pole trip for internal AR C IOT
2721>DAR aft. RAR>AR: Delayed AR only after rapid AR CG IOT
2730>CB ready >AR: Circuit breaker ready for reclose IOT
2731>Sync.release>AR: Synchronism from ext. sync.-check IOT
2781AR off AR: Auto-reclose is switched off CG OT
2782AR on AR: Auto-reclose is switched on OT
2783AR inoperativAR: Auto-reclose is blocked CG OT
2784AR not ready AR: Auto-reclose is not ready OT
2785AR block.dyn.AR: Auto-reclose is dynamically blocked C OT
2787CB not ready AR: Circuit breaker not ready OT
2788AR T-CB Exp. AR: CB supervision time expired OT
2801AR in prog. AR: Auto-reclose in progress C OT
2811RAR only AR: Only rapid auto-reclosing allowed OT
2812RAR T-act.runAR: Action time for RAR is running OT
2813RAR T-1p run.AR: 1pole dead time for RAR is running C OT
2814RAR T-3p run.AR: 3pole dead time for RAR is running C OT
2815RAR 1p Prog. AR: 1pole rapid auto-reclose program OT
2816RAR 3p Prog. AR: 3pole rapid auto-reclose program OT
2817RAR Zone Rel.AR: Zone extension for rapid reclosing OT
2818AR evolv.Flt.AR: Evolving fault recognition OT
2831DAR Only AR: Only delayed auto-reclosing allowed OT
2832DAR T-act.runAR: Action time for DAR is running OT
2833DAR T-3p1 runAR: 3pole dead time 1 for DAR running C OT
2837DAR Zone Rel.AR: Zone extension for delayed reclose OT
2851AR Close Cmd.AR: Close command from auto-reclose C C OT
2852RAR 1p Close AR: Close command after 1pole RAR cycle OT
2853RAR 3p Close AR: Close command after 3pole RAR cycle OT
2854DAR 3p Close AR: Close command after 3pole DAR cycle OT
2861AR T-Recl.runAR: Reclaim time is running OT
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬©¬¬¬Á
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Â¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬ª¬¬ª¬ª¬¬¬§
«¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
2862AR successfulAR: Auto-reclose cycle successful OT
2863Definit.Trip AR: Definitive trip OT
28641p Trip Perm.AR: 1pole trip allowed by internal AR OT
2865Sync.Meas.ReqAR: Sync-check request OT
2871AR Trip 3p AR: Trip during 1pole AR cycle C OT
2901>Sync. on >Switch on synchro-check function IOT
2902>Sync. off >Switch off synchro-check function IOT
2903>Sync. block >Block synchro-check function IOT
2906>Sync. Start >Initiate internal synchro-check IOT
2907>Sync. synch >Sync.: Check synchronism IOT
2908>Sync. U1>U2<>Sync. live line (U1>), dead bus (U2<) IOT
2909>Sync. U1<U2>>Sync. dead line (U1<), live bus (U2>) IOT
2910>Sync. U1<U2<>Sync. dead line (U1<), dead bus (U2<) IOT
2911>Sync. o/ride>Synchro-check override ( bypass ) IOT
2931Sync. off Synchro-check function is switched off CG OT
2932Sync. blockedSynchro-check function is blocked CG OT
2934Sync. faulty Synchro-check function faulty CG OT
2935Sync.Tsup.ExpSynchro-check supervision time expired C C OT
2941Sync. runningSynchro-check function is running OT
2942Sync.OverrideSynchro-check function override/bypass CG OT
2943Sync. SynchroSynchronism (U1>,U2>) detected CG OT
2944Sync. U1>U2< Live line,dead busbar(U1>,U2<) detectedCG OT
2945Sync. U1<U2> Dead line,live busbar(U1<,U2>) detectedCG OT
2946Sync. U1<U2< Dead line,dead busbar(U1<,U2<) detectedCG OT
2947Sync. Udiff> Sync.: Voltage diff. greater than limitCG OT
2948Sync. fdiff> Sync.: Freq. diff. greater than limit CG OT
2949Sync. phidif>Sync.: Angle diff. greater than limit CG OT
2951Sync. releaseSynchronism release (to ext. AR) OT
2961Sync.CloseCmdClose command from synchro-check OT
3603>Dist. block >Block distance protection IOT
3611>Extens. Z1B >Dist.: Zone 1B extension from externalCG IOT
3612>Extens. Z1L >Dist.: Zone 1L extension from externalCG IOT
3651Dist. off Distance protection is switched off CG OT
3652Dist. blockedDistance protection is blocked CG OT
3653Dist. active Distance protection is active OT
3661DisZ1B AR blkDist.: Block AR by fault detec. Z1B C OT
3662DisZ1L AR blkDist.: Block AR by fault detec. Z1L C OT
3671Dist.Gen.Flt.Dist.: General fault detection OT
3672Dist.Fault L1Dist.: Fault detection , phase L1 OT
3675Dist.Fault E Dist.: Fault detection , earth fault OT
3681Dist.Flt.L1 Dist.: Fault detection only phase L1 C
3682Dist.Flt.L1E Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,E C
3685Dist.Flt.L12 Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,2 C
3686Dist.Flt.L12EDist.: Fault detection phase L1,2,E C
3693Dist.Flt.L123Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,2,3 C
3694Dist.Flt.123EDist.: Fault detection phase L1,2,3,E C
3701Loop L1-E f Dist.: Loop L1E selected forward CG OT
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬©¬¬¬Á
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Â¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬ª¬¬ª¬ª¬¬¬§
«¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
3704Loop L1-2 f Dist.: Loop L12 selected forward CG OT
3707Loop L1-E r Dist.: Loop L1E selected reverse CG OT
3710Loop L1-2 r Dist.: Loop L12 selected reverse CG OT
3719Dist. For.DirDist.: Fault det. in forward direction OT
3720Dist. Rev.DirDist.: Fault det. in reverse direction OT
3771Dist. T1 Dist.: Time T1 ( Zone Z1 ) expired OT
3778Dist. T4 Dist.: Time T4 (direct. zone) expired OT
3779Dist. T5 Dist.: Time T5 (non-dir. zone) expired OT
3780Dist. T1B Dist.: Time T1B ( Zone Z1B ) expired OT
3783Dist. T1L Dist.: Time T1L ( Zone Z1L ) expired OT
3801Dis.Gen. TripDistance protection: General trip OT
3802Dis.Trip 1pL1Dist.: Trip phase L1 1pole only C OT
3805Dis.Trip 3p Dist.: Trip 3pole C OT
3808Dis.Trip backDist.: Trip in back-up stage OT
3811Dis.TripZ1/1pDist.: Trip 1pole in zone Z1/T1 OT
3813Dis.TripZ1B1pDist.: Trip 1pole in zone Z1B/T1B OT
3814Dis.TripZ1B3pDist.: Trip 3pole in zone Z1B/T1B OT
3815Dis.Trip Z1L Dist.: Trip for fault in zone Z1L/T1L OT
3818Dis.TripZ3/T3Dist.: Trip for fault in zone Z3/T3 OT
3819Dis.Trip FD->Dist.: Trip by fault detection, direct OT
3820Dis.Trip <-> Dist.: Trip by fault detec., non-direct OT
4004>Dis. Recept >Dist. teleprotection: Carrier receive C C IOT
4005>Dis.RecFail >Dist. teleprotection: Carrier faulty CG IOT
4011>Dis.POTT on >Dist.:Switch on teleprotection POTT IOT
4012>Dis.POTT off>Dist.:Switch off teleprotection POTT IOT
4021>Dis.PUTT on >Dist.:Switch on teleprotection PUTT IOT
4022>Dis.PUTT off>Dist.:Switch off teleprotection PUTT IOT
4051Dis.Tele.on Dist. teleprotection is switched on OT
4052Dis.Tele.off Dist. teleprotection is switched off CG OT
4054Dis. Recept Dist. teleprotection: Carrier reception OT
4055Dis. RecFail Dist. teleprotection: Carrier faulty CG OT
4056Dis. Send Dist. teleprotection: Carrier send C OT
4067Dis.POTT EchoPOTT teleprotection: Carrier echo send C OT
4068Dis.TransBlo POTT teleprotection: Transient block C OT
4164Power Swing Power swing detection CG OT
4165P/S T-action Power swing action time running OT
4166O/S Trip Out-of-step trip 3pole C C OT
4403>Ext.Trip blk>Block external trip function CG IOT
4412>Ext.Trip L1 >External trip L1 via binary input C IOT
4416>Ext.Trp.woAR>External 3pole trip without AR CG IOT
4431Ext.Gen. TripExt. trip via binary input: Trip OT
4432Ext.Trip 1pL1Ext. trip via binary input: 1pole L1 C OT
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬©¬¬¬Á
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Â¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ª¬¬ª¬¬ª¬ª¬¬¬§
«¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
4435Ext.Trip 3p Ext. trip via binary input: 3pole C OT
4436Ext.Trip woARExt. trip via binary input: Without AR C OT
6206>User T1Start>Start of user defined timer T1 CGCG IOT
6207>User T1Reset>Reset of user defined timer T1 C C IOT
6208>User T2Start>Start of user defined timer T2 CGCG IOT
6209>User T2Reset>Reset of user defined timer T2 C C IOT
6254User output 1Output signal of user defined timer T1 CGC OT
6255User output 2Output signal of user defined timer T2 CGC OT
¨¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬©¬¬©¬¬©¬©¬¬¬Á
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Reference Table for Functional Parameters 7SA511

µµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµ
1000 PARAMETERS
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
1100 POWERSYSTEM DATA
1101 CT STARPNT Current transformer polarity
TOWARDS LINE [ ] Towards line
TOWARDS BUSBAR [ ] Towards busbar
1102 SYSTEMSTAR System star-point condition
SOLIDLY EARTHED [ ] Solidly earthed
COMPENSATED [ ] Compensated
ISOLATED [ ] Isolated
1103 Un PRIMARY Primary rated voltage
min. 1 kV
max. 1200 ¬¬¬¬
1104 Un SECOND. Secondary rated voltage
min. 80 V
max. 125 ¬¬¬¬
1105 In PRIMARY Primary rated current
min. 10 A
max. 5000 ¬¬¬¬
1109 Ux CONNECT Ux voltage transformer connection
NOT CONNECTED [ ] Not connected
Udelta TRANSFORM [ ] Udelta transformer
U2 TRANSFORMER [ ] U2 transformer
1110 Uph/Udelta Matching factor Uph/Udelta (sec.earth voltage)
min. 0.10
max. 9.99 ¬¬¬¬
1111 Ie CT Ie current transformer
PROTECTED LINE [ ] Protected line
PARALLEL LINE [ ] Parallel line
1112 Ie/Iph Matching factor Ie/Iph for earth current
min. 0.100
max. 20.000 ¬¬¬¬
1116 U2 CONNECT Voltage transformer U2 input connection
L1-L2 [ ] L1-L2
L2-L3 [ ] L2-L3
L3-L1 [ ] L3-L1
L1-E [ ] L1-E
L2-E [ ] L2-E
L3-E [ ] L3-E
1117 RE/RL Residual compensating factor RE/RL
min. -7.00
max. 7.00 ¬¬¬¬
1118 XE/XL Residual compensating factor XE/XL
min. -7.00
max. 7.00 ¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
1119 RM/RL Mutual compensating factor RM/RL

min. -7.00
max. 7.00 ¬¬¬¬
1120 XM/XL Mutual compensating factor XM/XL
min. -7.00
max. 7.00 ¬¬¬¬
1122 X SEC Secondary reactance per unit line length Xsec
min. 0.010 Ò/km
max. 5.000 ¬¬¬¬
1124 LINELENGTH Line length
min. 1.0 km
max. 550.0 ¬¬¬¬
1130 T-TRIP I> Trip command min.duration for I > I-RES
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
1131 T-TRIP I< Trip command min.duration for I < I-RES
min. 0.01 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
1132 U1-U2 ANGL Phase angle between U1 and U2
min. -179 à
max. 180 ¬¬¬¬
1133 T-CB CLOSE Closing (operating) time of circuit breaker
min. 0.01 s
max. 0.50 ¬¬¬¬
1135 T-CLOSE Maximum close command duration
min. 0.01 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
1136 3-P. COUPL 3 pole coupling
WITH FAULT DETEC [ ] With fault detection
WITH TRIP COMM. [ ] With trip command
1137 TRIP2phFLT Trip type with 2phase faults
THREE-POLE [ ] Three-pole
1-POLE LEADING [ ] 1-pole leading
1-POLE LAGGING [ ] 1-pole lagging
1145 T-M/C-PROL Prolongation time after manual closing
min. 0.01 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
1149 T-EXT.STAB Stabilization time for external trip
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
1150 FILTER Filter for measured quantities
NORMAL [ ] Normal
LONG [ ] Long
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
1200 DIST.PROT. GENERAL SETTINGS

1201 DIST.PROT. Distance protection function
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
1202 DIR. FD&T4 Direction for fault detection directional trip
FORWARDS [ ] Forwards
REVERSE [ ] Reverse
NON-DIRECTIONAL [ ] Non-directional
1203 T4 Delay T4 fault detection directional trip
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
1204 T5 Delay T5 fault detection non-directional trip
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
1205 MAN. CLOSE Distance zone effective with manual close
Z1B DIRECTIONAL [ ] Z1B directional
Z1B NON DIRECT. [ ] Z1B non-directional
FD EFFECTIVE [ ] Fault detection
Z1 EFFECTIVE [ ] Z1 effective
1216 RAR -> Z1B Distance zone Z1B effective before 1st RAR
YES [ ] yes
NO [ ] no
1217 DAR BLOCK Effective zone if DAR is blocked
Z1; T1 [ ] Z1; T1
Z1; T1B [ ] Z1; T1B
1218 DAR -> Z1L Distance zone Z1L effective before DAR
YES [ ] yes
NO [ ] no
1221 BLK.AR Z1B Autoreclosure is blocked for Z1B faults
NO [ ] no
WITHIN [ ] Within
OUTSIDE [ ] Outside
1222 BLK.AR Z1L Autoreclosure is blocked for Z1L faults
NO [ ] no
WITHIN [ ] Within
OUTSIDE [ ] Outside
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
1300 DIST.PROT. INDEPEND. ZONES
1301 R1 Zone 1: Resistance (phase-phase) R1
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 65.00 ¬¬¬¬
1302 X1 Zone 1: Reactance (reach) X1
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 130.00 ¬¬¬¬
1303 R1E Zone 1: Resistance (phase-earth) R1E
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 130.00 ¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
1304 DIREC. Z1 Zone 1: Direction

REVERSE [ ] Reverse
1305 T1 1PHASE Zone 1: Delay for single phase faults T1 1PH
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
1306 T1 >1PHASE Zone 1: Delay for multi-phase faults T1
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 65.00 ¬¬¬¬
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 130.00 ¬¬¬¬
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 130.00 ¬¬¬¬
REVERSE [ ] Reverse
1315 T2 1PHASE Zone 2: Delay for single phase faults T2 1PH
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
1316 T2 >1PHASE Zone 2: Delay for multi-phase faults T2
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
1317 TRIP 1P Z2 Single pole trip for faults in Z2
NO [ ] no
YES [ ] yes
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 65.00 ¬¬¬¬
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 130.00 ¬¬¬¬
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 130.00 ¬¬¬¬
REVERSE [ ] Reverse
1325 T3 Zone 3: Delay for all faults T3
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
1400 DIST.PROT. CONTROLLED ZONES

1401 R1B Zone 1B: Resistance (phase-phase) R1B
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 65.00 ¬¬¬¬
1402 X1B Zone 1B: Reactance (reach) X1B
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 130.00 ¬¬¬¬
1403 R1BE Zone 1B: Resistance (phase-earth) R1BE
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 130.00 ¬¬¬¬
1404 DIREC. Z1B Zone 1B: Direction
REVERSE [ ] Reverse
1405 T1B 1PHASE Zone 1B: Delay for single phase faults T1B 1PH
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
1406 T1B >1PHAS Zone 1B: Delay for multi-phase faults T1B
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
1411 R1L Zone 1L: Resistance (phase-phase) R1L
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 65.00 ¬¬¬¬
1412 X1L Zone 1L: Reactance (reach) X1L
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 130.00 ¬¬¬¬
1413 R1LE Zone 1L: Resistance (phase-earth) R1LE
min. 0.05 Ò
max. 130.00 ¬¬¬¬
1414 DIREC. Z1L Zone 1L: Direction
REVERSE [ ] Reverse
1415 T1L Zone 1L: Delay for all faults T1L
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
1500 DIST.PROT. FAULT DETEC.PROG
1501 PROG. U/I Program for U/I fault detection
LE:Uphe/LL:Uphph [ ] LE:Uphe/LL:Uphph
LE:Uphph/LL:Uphp [ ] LE:Uphph/LL:Uphp
LE:Uphe/LL:Uphe [ ] LE:Uphe/LL:Uphe
LE:Uphe/LL:I>> [ ] LE:Uphe/LL:I>>
1503 PROG. ZA Program for impedance fault detection
LE:Zphe/LL:Zphph [ ] LE:Zphe/LL:Zphph
LE:Zphe/LL:I>> [ ] LE:Zphe/LL:I>>
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
1600 DIST.PROT. FAULT DETECTION

1601 Iph>> Overcurrent detection Iph>>
min. 0.25 I/In
max. 4.00 ¬¬¬¬
1602 Ie> Earth fault detection Ie>
min. 0.10 I/In
max. 1.00 ¬¬¬¬
1611 Iph> Minimum current for fault detection Iph>
min. 0.10 I/In
max. 1.00 ¬¬¬¬
1612 Uphe(I>>) Undervoltage pick-up at I>> (phase-earth)
min. 20 V
max. 70 ¬¬¬¬
1613 Uphe(I>) Undervoltage pick-up at I> (phase-earth)
min. 20 V
max. 70 ¬¬¬¬
1614 Uphph(I>>) Undervoltage pick-up at I>> (phase-phase)
min. 40 V
max. 130 ¬¬¬¬
1615 Uphph(I>) Undervoltage pick-up at I> (phase-phase)
min. 40 V
max. 130 ¬¬¬¬
1621 Iph> Minimum current for fault detection Iph>
min. 0.10 I/In
max. 4.00 ¬¬¬¬
1622 X+A Fault detection forward reach X+A
min. 0.10 Ò
max. 200.00 ¬¬¬¬
1623 X-A Fault detection reverse reach X-A
min. 0.10 Ò
max. 200.00 ¬¬¬¬
1624 RA1 Fault det. resistance (ph-ph, phi<PHI A) RA1
min. 0.10 Ò
max. 200.00 ¬¬¬¬
1625 RA2 Fault det. resistance (ph-ph, phi>PHI A) RA2
min. 0.10 Ò
max. 200.00 ¬¬¬¬
1626 RA1E Fault det. resistance (ph-e, phi<PHI AE) RA1E
min. 0.10 Ò
max. 200.00 ¬¬¬¬
1627 RA2E Fault det. resistance (ph-e, phi>PHI AE) RA2E
min. 0.10 Ò
max. 200.00 ¬¬¬¬
1628 ANGLE PHIA Fault det. ph-ph angle betw. RA1/RA2 PHI A
min. 30 à
max. 80 ¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
1629 ANG. PHIAE Fault det. ph-e angle betw. RA1E/RA2E PHI AE
min. 30 à
max. 80 ¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
1700 FAULT IN EARTHED NETWORKS
1701 Ue> Displacement voltage for earth fault det. Ue>
min. 2 V
max. 100/Ô ¬¬¬¬
1703 PHPHE FLTS Loop selection with Ph-Ph-E faults
PHASE-PHASE ONLY [ ] Phase to phase only
LEADING PH-E [ ] Leading phase-earth
LAGGING PH-E [ ] Lagging phase-earth
1704 3PH FAULTS Loop selection with 3phase faults
E/F CONTROL [ ] Dependent on E/F det
PHASE-PHASE ONLY [ ] Phase to phase only
PHASE-EARTH ONLY [ ] Phase to earth only
1705 1PH FAULTS Loop select. for single ph. w/o earth flt.det.
PHASE-EARTH [ ] Phase-earth
PHASE-PHASE [ ] Phase-phase
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
1800 FAULT NON-EARTHED NET
1801 TIe 1PHASE Delay time for single phase flt. det. TIe 1PH
min. 0.00 s
max. 0.50/Ô ¬¬¬¬
1802 Ue> Displacement voltage for earth fault det. Ue>
min. 10 V
max. 100 ¬¬¬¬
1803 PHASE PREF Phase preference for double earth faults
L3(L1) ACYCLIC [ ] L3(L1) acyclic
L3(L1) CYCLIC [ ] L3(L1) cyclic
L1(L3) CYCLIC [ ] L1(L3) cyclic
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
2000 POWER SWING
2002 P/S PROGR. Program of power swing (P/S) function
BLOCK ALL [ ] Block all zones
BLOCK Z1 ONLY [ ] Block Z1 only
BLOCK ALL BUT Z1 [ ] Block all but Z1
OUT-OF-STEP TRIP [ ] Out-of-step trip
2003 Delta R Distance between P/S and fault detect. polygon
min. 0.10 Ò
max. 50.00 ¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
2004 dR/dT Rate of change of P/S vector dR/dT

min. 0 Ò/s
max. 200 ¬¬¬¬
2005 P/S T-ACT. Power swing action time P/S T-ACT.
min. 0.01 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
2100 TELEPROTEC PERM. UNDERREACH
2101 PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
2102 PUTT MODE Permissive underreach transfer trip mode
Z1B ACCELERATION [ ] Z1B acceleration
FD ACCELERATION [ ] FD acceleration
2103 T-SEND-PRL Send signal prolongation for PUTT
min. 0.01 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
2104 T-REC-PROL Receive signal prolongation for PUTT
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
2106 T-SEND-DEL Send signal delay for PUTT
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
2200 TELEPROTEC PERM. OVERREACH
2201 POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
2202 POTT MODE Permissive overreach transfer trip mode
Z1B RELEASE [ ] Z1B release
FD DIREC RELEASE [ ] Direct. comparison
Z1B UNBLOCK [ ] Unblocking with Z1B
FD UNBLOCK [ ] Unblocking with FD
Z1B BLOCKING [ ] Blocking with Z1B
PILOT WIRE COMP. [ ] Comp. via pilot wire
REVERS INTERLOCK [ ] Reverse interlocking
2203 T-TRANSBLO Transient blocking time after external fault
min. 0.01 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
2204 T-WAIT Waiting time for trans.block. (missing recept)
min. 0.01 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
2206 T-SEND-PRL Send signal prolongation for POTT
min. 0.01 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
2210 POTT DirFD Effect. direction for directional comparison

REVERSE [ ] Reverse
2212 T-SEND DEL Send signal delay for POTT
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
2220 ECHO Echo function for weak infeed
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
2221 T-ECHO-DEL Echo delay time
min. 0.01 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
2222 T-ECHO-IMP Duration of echo impulse
min. 0.02 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
2223 T-ECHO-BLO Echo blocking time
min. 0.01 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
2300 USER LOGIC FUNCTIONS
2302 T-PICKUP 1 1st user logic function: Pick-up time
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
2303 T-DROP 1 1st user logic function: Drop-off time
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
2305 T-PICKUP 2 2nd user logic function: Pick-up time
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
2306 T-DROP 2 2nd user logic function: Drop-off time
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
2600 EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROT
2601 EMERG. O/C Emergency overcurrent definite time protection
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
2602 I>> Highset phase overcurrent threshold (DT) I>>
min. 0.50 I/In
max. 9.99 ¬¬¬¬
2603 T-I>> Delay time for I>> TI>>
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
2612 I> Phase overcurrent threshold (DT) I>

min. 0.10 I/In
max. 4.00 ¬¬¬¬
2613 T-I> Delay time for I> TI>
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
2621 M/CLOSE PH Phase overcurrent stage effect.: Manual close
I>> UNDELAYED [ ] I>> undelayed
I> UNDELAYED [ ] I> undelayed
INEFFECTIVE [ ] Ineffective
2623 RAR ZONE P Phase overcurrent stage effect.: Auto reclose
I>> WITH AR [ ] I>> only with AR
I>> ALWAYS [ ] I>> always
2642 IE> Earth overcurrent threshold (DT) IE>
min. 0.10 I/In
max. 4.00 ¬¬¬¬
2643 T-IE> Delay time for IE> TIE>
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
2651 M/CLOSE E Earth overcurrent stage effect: Manual close
IE> UNDELAYED [ ] Ie> undelayed
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
2700 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROT.
2701 THERMAL OL State of thermal overload protection
ALARM ONLY [ ] Alarm only
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
2702 K-FACTOR K-factor for thermal overload protection
min. 0.10
max. 4.00 ¬¬¬¬
2703 T-CONSTANT Time constant for thermal overload protection
min. 1.0 min
max. 999.9 ¬¬¬¬
2704 Ñ WARN Thermal warning stage
min. 50 %
max. 100 ¬¬¬¬
2705 I WARN Current warning stage
min. 0.10 I/In
max. 4.00 ¬¬¬¬
2706 O/L CALCUL Calculation method for thermal stages
Ñ MAX [ ] Theta max
Ñ MEAN [ ] Theta mean
Ñ FROM IMAX [ ] Theta from Imax
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
2900 MEAS.VALUE SUPERVISION

2901 SYM.Uthres Symmetry threshold for voltage monitoring
min. 10 V
max. 100 ¬¬¬¬
2902 SYM.Fact.U Symmetry factor for voltage monitoring
min. 0.58
max. 0.95 ¬¬¬¬
2903 SYM.Ithres Symmetry threshold for current monitoring
min. 0.10 I/In
max. 1.00 ¬¬¬¬
2904 SYM.Fact.I Symmetry factor for current monitoring
min. 0.10
max. 0.95 ¬¬¬¬
2905 SUM.Ithres Summation threshold for current monitoring
min. 0.10 I/In
max. 2.00 ¬¬¬¬
2906 SUM.Fact.I Factor for current summation monitoring
min. 0.00
max. 0.95 ¬¬¬¬
2907 UMEAS U< Threshold for voltage failure monitor
min. 10 V
max. 125 ¬¬¬¬
2908 UMEAS I> Minimum current for voltage failure monitor
min. 0.06 I/In
max. 1.00 ¬¬¬¬
2910 FUSE-FAIL Fuse failure monitoring (FFM)
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
2911 FFM 3*Uo> Displacement voltage level for FFM
min. 10 V
max. 100 ¬¬¬¬
2912 FFM Ie< Earth current for fuse failure monitoring
min. 0.10 I/In
max. 1.00 ¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
3000 EARTHFAULT NON-EARTHED NET
3001 EARTHFAULT Sensitive earth fault det. in non-earthed net
ALARM ONLY [ ] Alarm only
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
3002 Ue> Displacement voltage level Ue>
min. 10 V
max. 100 ¬¬¬¬
3003 Uph< Phase-earth voltage of faulted phase Uph<
min. 10 V
max. 100 ¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
3004 Uph> Phase-earth voltage of healthy phases Uph>

min. 10 V
max. 100 ¬¬¬¬
3005 Ie> Current level for directional determination
min. 0.003 A
max. 1.000 ¬¬¬¬
3006 CT ERR. I1 Second. current I1 for max error angle of C.T.
min. 0.003 A
max. 1.600 ¬¬¬¬
3007 CT ERR. F1 Error angle of C.T. at I1
min. 0.0 à
max. 5.0 ¬¬¬¬
3008 CT ERR. I2 Second. current I2 for max error angle of C.T.
min. 0.003 A
max. 1.600 ¬¬¬¬
3009 CT ERR. F2 Error angle of C.T. at I2
min. 0.0 à
max. 5.0 ¬¬¬¬
3010 T-E/F Duration of displacement voltage for E/F det.
min. 0.0 s
max. 320.0 ¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
3100 EARTHFAULT DIREC/NON-DIREC
3101 E/F D.T. Earth fault definite time protection
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
3103 Ie> Pick-up value for earth current detection
min. 0.10 I/In
max. 4.00 ¬¬¬¬
3104 Ue> Minimum voltage for directional determination
min. 1.0 V
max. 10.0 ¬¬¬¬
3106 T-DIRECT. Delay time for directional trip
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
3107 DIRECTION Direction for directional stage
REVERSE [ ] Reverse
3108 T-NON-DIR. Delay time for non-directional trip
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
3109 T-BLOCK Blocking time after dist.prot. has dropped off
min. 0.01 s
max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
3200 EARTHFAULT DIREC.COMPARISON

3201 E/F COMPAR Directional comparison for E/F def. time prot
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
3202 T-DELAY Delay time for transmission and trip on recept
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
3203 T-TRANSBLO Transient blocking time after external fault
min. 0.01 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
3204 T-WAIT Waiting time for trans.block. (missing recept)
min. 0.01 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
3210 E/F ECHO Echo function for directional comparison
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
3211 T-ECHO-DEL Echo delay time
min. 0.01 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
3212 T-ECHO-IMP Duration of echo impulse
min. 0.02 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
3213 T-ECHO-BLO Echo blocking time
min. 0.01 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
3300 EARTHFAULT NON-DIRECTIONAL
3301 E/F I.T. Non directional inverse time E/F protection
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
3302 E/F CHARAC Trip time characteristic
NORMAL INVERSE [ ] Normal inverse
VERY INVERSE [ ] Very inverse
EXTREMELY INVERS [ ] Extremely inverse
3303 Ie> Pick-up value for earth current detection
min. 0.10 I/In
max. 4.00 ¬¬¬¬
3304 T-Ie> Delay time multiplier
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
3305 T-BLOCK Blocking time after dist.prot. has dropped off
min. 0.01 s
max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
3400 AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION

3401 AR FUNCT Auto-reclose function
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
3402 AR BLO REV Auto-reclose block with reverse faults
YES [ ] yes
NO [ ] no
3403 MC BLOCK Auto-reclose block with manual close
YES [ ] yes
NO [ ] no
3405 T-RECLAIM Reclaim time after successful AR
min. 0.50 s
max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬
3406 T-LOCK Lock-out time after unsuccessful AR
min. 0.50 s
max. 320.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
3407 T-BLOCK MC Blocking duration with manual close
min. 0.50 s
max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬
3412 CB? 1.TRIP CB ready interrogation at 1st trip command
YES [ ] yes
NO [ ] no
3413 CB? CLOSE CB ready interrogation before reclosing
CB? NEVER [ ] CB? never
CB? WITH EACH AR [ ] CB? with each AR
CB? WITH 2nd AR [ ] CB? with 2nd AR
3415 T-CB-SUPV Circuit breaker supervision time
min. 0.01 s
max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬
3419 SYN-REQUST AR request for synchro-check
BEFORE 3POLE AR [ ] Before 3pole AR
ONLY BEFORE DAR [ ] Only before DAR
BEFORE 2nd DAR [ ] Before second DAR
NEVER [ ] Never
3422 RAR PROG. Rapid auto-reclose program
THREE-POLE [ ] Three-pole
SINGLE-POLE [ ] Single-pole
SINGLE/THREE-POL [ ] Single/three-pole
3423 3U0 PROC. 3U0 processing measurement before closing
1-POLE WITH U0 [ ] 1-pole with U0
1-POLE W/O U0 [ ] 1-pole without U0
3424 RAR T-ACT. Rapid auto-reclose action time
min. 0.01 s
max. 320.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
3425 RAR T-3POL RAR 3pole dead time
min. 0.01 s
max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
3426 RAR T-1POL RAR 1pole dead time

min. 0.01 s
max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬
3427 RAR T1POL2 RAR accelerated 1pole dead time (U0 dependent)
min. 0.01 s
max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬
3428 EV.F.RECOG Evolving fault recognition with 1pole AR
3429 EV.F.BLOCK Blocking with evolving faults
ALWAYS [ ] Always
NEVER [ ] Never
>T-DISCR. [ ] >T-discrimination
3430 T-DISCRIM Discrimination time for evolving faults
min. 0.01 s
max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬
3431 AR TRIP 3P 3p trip when AR is blocked during 1p dead time
YES [ ] yes
NO [ ] no
3442 DAR PROG. Delayed auto-reclose program
NO DAR [ ] No DAR
DAR WITHOUT RAR [ ] DAR without RAR
DAR AFTER RAR [ ] DAR only after RAR
3443 DAR No.1PH Number of DAR shots after 1 pole initiation
min. 0
max. 9 ¬¬¬¬
3444 DAR No.3PH Number of DAR shots after 3 pole initiation
min. 0
max. 9 ¬¬¬¬
3445 DAR T-ACT. Delayed auto-reclose action time
min. 0.01 s
max. 320.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
3446 DAR T3POL1 DAR 3pole dead time for 1st shot
min. 0.01 s
max. 1800.00 ¬¬¬¬
3447 DAR T3POL2 DAR 3pole dead time for 2nd shot
min. 0.01 s
max. 1800.00 ¬¬¬¬
3448 DAR T3POL3 DAR 3pole dead time for 3rd and further shots
min. 0.01 s
max. 1800.00 ¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
3500 CHECK SYNCHRONISM
3501 SYNC-CHECK Synchro-check function
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
3502 U< Maximum voltage for dead line or busbar

min. 2 V
max. 60 ¬¬¬¬
3503 U> Minimum voltage for live line or busbar
min. 20 V
max. 125 ¬¬¬¬
3505 DELTA U< Maximum voltage difference
min. 2 V
max. 50 ¬¬¬¬
3506 DELTA f< Maximum frequency difference
min. 0.03 Hz
max. 1.00 ¬¬¬¬
3507 DELTA PHI< Maximum angle difference
min. 1 à
max. 60 ¬¬¬¬
3508 DEL.f<SYNC Maximum freq. difference for synchronous AR
min. 0.01 Hz
max. 0.10/Ô ¬¬¬¬
3515 SYNCHR. Synchronism-check before AR (U1>/U2>)
YES [ ] yes
NO [ ] no
3516 U1>U2< Live line / dead bus check before AR (U1>/U2<)
NO [ ] no
YES [ ] yes
3517 U1<U2> Dead line / live bus check before AR (U1</U2>)
NO [ ] no
YES [ ] yes
3518 U1<U2< Dead line / dead bus check before AR (U1</U2<)
NO [ ] no
YES [ ] yes
3519 OVERRIDE Override of any check before AR
NO [ ] no
YES [ ] yes
3521 SYN.MAN.CL Synchro-check with manual close
ON [ ] on
OFF [ ] off
3522 MC Df<SYNC Frequency difference for synchronous MC
min. 0.01 Hz
max. 0.10/Ô ¬¬¬¬
3525 MC SYNCHR Synchro-check before MC (U1>/U2>)
YES [ ] yes
NO [ ] no
3526 MC U1>U2< Live line/dead bus check before MC (U1>/U2<)
NO [ ] no
YES [ ] yes
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
3527 MC U1<U2> Dead line/live bus check before MC (U1</U2>)

NO [ ] no
YES [ ] yes
3528 MC U1<U2< Dead line/dead bus check before MC (U1</U2<)
NO [ ] no
YES [ ] yes
3529 MC O/RIDE Override of any check before MC
NO [ ] no
YES [ ] yes
3530 T-SYN.SUPV Synchro-check supervision time
min. 0.01 s
max. 320.00 ¬¬¬¬
3531 T IN-SYNC Synchronism criteria maintained timer
min. 0.00 s
max. 32.00 ¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
3800 FAULT LOCATION
3802 START Start condition for fault locator
DROP-OFF or TRIP [ ] Drop-off or trip
TRIP COMMAND [ ] Trip command
3805 PARAL.LINE Parallel line compensation
NO [ ] no
YES [ ] yes
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Tests and Commissioning Aids 7SA511

µµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµ
4000 TESTS
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
4200 DIRECTION/ IMPEDANCES
4201 DIREC. TEST Direction test L1-E
4202 IMPEDANCES Impedance test L1-E
4207 DIREC. TEST Direction test L1-L2
4208 IMPEDANCES Impedance test L1-L2
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
4300 CB TEST TRIP-CLOSE CYCLE
4301 CB TEST Circuit breaker test with AR 1pole L1
4304 CB TEST Circuit breaker test with AR 3pole
4305 CB TEST Circuit breaker test with AR sequence L1-L2-L3
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
4400 CB TEST LIVE TRIP
4401 CB TRIP Circuit breaker trip test 1pole L1
4404 CB TRIP Circuit breaker trip test 3pole
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
4900 TEST FAULT RECORDING
4901 FAULT REC. Initiation of fault recording
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Annunciations, Measured Values etc. 7SA511

µµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµ
5000 ANNUNCIATIONS
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
5100 OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
5200 LAST FAULT
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
5300 2nd TO LAST FAULT
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
5400 3rd TO LAST FAULT
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
5500 ISOLATED EARTH FLT DATA
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
5600 CB OPERAT. STATISTICS
5601 AR 1pole= No. of auto-reclose commands:1p RAR
5602 AR 3pole= No. of auto-reclose commands:3p RAR
5603 DAR 3pol= No. of auto-reclose commands:3p DAR
5604 TripNo L1= Number of trip commands: Phase L1
5607 ÌIL1/In= Summated current tripped IL1/In
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
5700 OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES
5701 IL1 = Current in phase IL1 =
5704 UL1E= Voltage UL1E =
5707 UL12= Voltage UL12 =
5710 Pa= Active power Pa =
5711 Pr= Reactive power Pr =
5712 f [%]= Frequency f [%] =
5713 IL1[%] = Current in phase IL1 [%] =
5716 UL1E[%]= UL1E [%]=
5717 UL2E[%]= UL2E [%]=
5718 UL3E[%]= UL3E [%]=
5719 UL12[%]= UL12 [%] =
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
5720 UL23[%]= UL23 [%] =

5721 UL31[%]= UL31 [%] =
5722 Pa[%]= Active power Pa [%] =
5723 Pr[%]= Reactive power Pr [%] =
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
5800 ISOL. E/F MEASURED VALUES
5801 Iea = Iea =
5802 Ier = Ier =
5803 Iea[mA]= Iea [mA] =
5804 Ier[mA]= Ier [mA] =
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
5900 OVERLOAD MEASURED VALUES
5901 Ñ/ÑtripL1= Temperature rise for phase L1
5904 Ñ/Ñtrip = Temperat. rise for warning and trip
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Reference Table for Configuration Parameters 7SA511

µµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµ
6000 MARSHALLING
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6100 MARSHALLING BINARY INPUTS
6101 BINARY INPUT 1 Binary input 1
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX

¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6200 MARSHALLING SIGNAL RELAYS
6201 SIGNAL RELAY 1 Signal relay 1
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX

¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX

¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6300 MARSHALLING LED INDICATORS
6301 LED 1 LED 1
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6302 LED 2 LED 2
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6303 LED 3 LED 3
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6304 LED 4 LED 4
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6305 LED 5 LED 5
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6306 LED 6 LED 6
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
6307 LED 7 LED 7

¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6308 LED 8 LED 8
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6309 LED 9 LED 9
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6310 LED 10 LED 10
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6311 LED 11 LED 11
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6312 LED 12 LED 12
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6313 LED 13 LED 13
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
6314 LED 14 LED 14

¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
6400 MARSHALLING TRIP RELAYS
6401 TRIP RELAY 1 Trip relay 1
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7000 OP. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
7100 INTEGRATED OPERATION

7102 DATE FORMAT Date format
DD.MM.YYYY [ ] dd.mm.yyyy
MM/DD/YYYY [ ] mm/dd/yyyy
7105 OPER. 1st L Operational message for 1st display line
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7106 OPER. 2nd L Operational message for 2nd display line
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7107 FAULT 1st L Fault message for 1st display line
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7108 FAULT 2nd L Fault message for 2nd display line
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬ ¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7110 FAULT INDIC Fault indication: LED and LCD
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7200 PC/SYSTEM INTERFACES
7201 DEVICE ADD. Device address
min. 1
max. 254 ¬¬¬¬
7202 FEEDER ADD. Feeder address
min. 1
max. 254 ¬¬¬¬
7203 SUBST. ADD. Substation address
min. 1
max. 254 ¬¬¬¬
7208 FUNCT. TYPE Function type in accordance with VDEW/ZVEI
min. 1
max. 254 ¬¬¬¬
7209 DEVICE TYPE Device type
min. 1
max. 254 ¬¬¬¬
7211 PC INTERF. Data format for PC-interface
DIGSI V3 [ ] DIGSI V3
ASCII [ ] ASCII
7214 PC GAPS Transmission gaps for PC-interface
min. 0.0 s
max. 5.0 ¬¬¬¬
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
7215 PC BAUDRATE Transmission baud rate for PC-interface

9600 BAUD [ ] 9600 Baud
19200 BAUD [ ] 19200 Baud
1200 BAUD [ ] 1200 Baud
2400 BAUD [ ] 2400 Baud
4800 BAUD [ ] 4800 Baud
7216 PC PARITY Parity and stop-bits for PC-interface
NO 2 STOP [ ] No parity,2 stopbits
NO 1 STOP [ ] No parity,1 stopbit
7221 SYS INTERF. Data format for system-interface
VDEW COMPATIBLE [ ] VDEW compatible
VDEW EXTENDED [ ] VDEW extended
LSA [ ] LSA
7222 SYS MEASUR. Measurement format for system-interface
VDEW COMPATIBLE [ ] VDEW compatible
VDEW EXTENDED [ ] VDEW extended
7224 SYS GAPS Transmission gaps for system-interface
min. 0.0 s
max. 5.0 ¬¬¬¬
7225 SYS BAUDR. Transmission baud rate for system-interface
9600 BAUD [ ] 9600 Baud
19200 BAUD [ ] 19200 Baud
1200 BAUD [ ] 1200 Baud
2400 BAUD [ ] 2400 Baud
4800 BAUD [ ] 4800 Baud
7226 SYS PARITY Parity and stop-bits for system-interface
VDEW/DIGSIV3/LSA [ ] VDEW/DIGSI V3/LSA
NO 2 STOP [ ] No parity,2 stopbits
NO 1 STOP [ ] No parity,1 stopbit
7227 SYS-SWITCH Online-switch VDEW-DIGSI enabled
NO [ ] no
YES [ ] yes
7235 SYS PARAMET Parameterizing via system-interface
NO [ ] no
YES [ ] yes
7239 7SM70/71 Fault location output with 7SM70/7SM71
NOT CONNECTED [ ] Not connected
CONNECTED [ ] Connected
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7400 FAULT RECORDINGS
7402 INITIATION Initiation of data storage
STORAGE BY FD. [ ] Storage by fault det
STORAGE BY TRIP [ ] Storage by trip
START WITH TRIP [ ] Start with trip
7403 SCOPE Scope of stored data
FAULT EVENT [ ] Fault event
FAULT IN POW.SYS [ ] Fault in power syst.
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
7410 T-MAX Maximum time period of a fault recording

min. 0.30 s
max. 5.00 ¬¬¬¬
7411 T-PRE Pre-trigger time for fault recording
min. 0.05 s
max. 0.50 ¬¬¬¬
7412 T-POST Post-fault time for fault recording
min. 0.05 s
max. 0.50 ¬¬¬¬
7431 T-BINARY IN Storage time by initiation via binary input
min. 0.10 s
max. 5.00/Ô ¬¬¬¬
7432 T-KEYBOARD Storage time by initiation via keyboard
min. 0.10 s
max. 5.00 ¬¬¬¬
7490 SYS LENGTH Length of fault record (former LSA)
660 VALUES FIX [ ] 660 values fix
<=3000 VAL. VAR [ ] <=3000 val. var
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7800 SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS
7812 DIST. PROT. Distance protection
EXIST [ ] Existent
NON-EXIST [ ] Non-existent
7813 DIST.F.DET. Distance protection: Fault detection program
OVERCURRENT [ ] Overcurrent FD.
IMPEDANCE ZONE [ ] Impedance zone FD.
U/I FAULT DET. [ ] U/I fault detection
7820 POWER SWING Power swing detection
EXIST [ ] Existent
7821 TELEPROTEC. Teleprotection for distance protection
UNDERREACH [ ] Underreach
OVERREACH [ ] Overreach
7823 USER LOGIC User definable logic functions
EXIST [ ] Existent
7826 EMERG. O/C Emergency overcurrent time protection
EXIST [ ] Existent
7827 THERMAL OL Thermal overload protection
EXIST [ ] Existent
7830 ISOL. E/F Earth fault detection for isol./comp. networks
EXIST [ ] Existent
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
7831 EARTH FAULT Earth fault protection for earthed networks

DIR/NON-DIR [ ] Directional/non-dir.
DIREC.COMPARISON [ ] Direc. comparison
INVERSE TIME [ ] Inverse time
7834 INTERNAL AR Internal auto-reclose function
EXIST [ ] Existent
7835 SYNCH.CHECK Internal synchronism and voltage check
EXIST [ ] Existent
7838 FAULT LOCAT Fault locator
EXIST [ ] Existent
7885 PARAM. C/O Parameter change-over
EXIST [ ] Existent
7899 FREQUENCY Rated system frequency
fN 50 Hz [ ] fN 50 Hz
fN 60 Hz [ ] fN 60 Hz
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
7900 DEVICE CONFIGURATION
7910 CB TEST BI CB test via binary input program
TRIP-CLOSE 3POLE [ ] Trip-close 3pole
SEQU. L1-L2-L3 [ ] Sequence L1-L2-L3
THREE-POLE TRIP [ ] Three-pole trip
7912 AR w/ DIST. Auto-reclose with distance protection
YES [ ] yes
NO [ ] no
7921 AR w/o TELE Auto-reclose when teleprotect. is not operativ
YES [ ] yes
NO [ ] no
7926 AR w/ EMERG Auto-reclose with emergency overcurrent prot.
YES [ ] yes
NO [ ] no
7930 AR w/ IS.EF Auto-reclose with E/F det. in isol./comp. net
YES [ ] yes
NO [ ] no
7931 AR w/ E/F Auto-reclose with E/F protect. in earthed net
YES [ ] yes
NO [ ] no
7941 AR w/ EXT. Auto-reclose with ext. trip via binary input
YES [ ] yes
NO [ ] no
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
Operational Device Control Facilities 7SA511

µµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµµ
8000 DEVICE CONTROL
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
8100 SETTING REAL TIME CLOCK
8101 DATE / TIME Actual date and time
8102 DATE Setting new date
8103 TIME Setting new time
8104 DIFF. TIME Setting difference time
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
8200 RESET
8201 RESET Reset of LED memories
8202 RESET Reset of operational annunciation buffer
8203 RESET Reset of fault annunciation buffer
8204 RESET Reset of CB operation counters
8205 RESET Reset of the total of interrupted currents
8206 RESET Reset of earth fault report buffer
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
8300 SYS-VDEW ANNUNC.-MEAS.VAL
8301 SYS TEST Testing via system-interface
OFF [ ] off
ON [ ] on
8302 SYS BLOCK Blocking of monitoring direction via sys.-int.
OFF [ ] off
ON [ ] on
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
8500 PARAMETER CHANGE-OVER
8501 ACTIV PARAM Actual active parameter set
8503 ACTIVATING Activation of parameter set
SET A [ ] Set a
SET B [ ] Set b
SET C [ ] Set c
SET D [ ] Set d
SET BY BIN.INPUT [ ] Set via binary input
SET BY LSA CONTR [ ] Set by lsa control
8510 COPY Copy original parameter set to set A
8511 COPY Copy original parameter set to set B
# ' #

3! 6 !PPENDIX
8512 COPY Copy original parameter set to set C

8513 COPY Copy original parameter set to set D
8514 COPY Copy parameter set A to set B
8515 COPY Copy parameter set A to set C
8516 COPY Copy parameter set A to set D
8517 COPY Copy parameter set B to set A
8518 COPY Copy parameter set B to set C
8519 COPY Copy parameter set B to set D
8520 COPY Copy parameter set C to set A
8521 COPY Copy parameter set C to set B
8522 COPY Copy parameter set C to set D
8523 COPY Copy parameter set D to set A
8524 COPY Copy parameter set D to set B
8525 COPY Copy parameter set D to set C
¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬
9800 OPERATING SYSTEM CONTROL
9802 MONITOR Monitor
# ' #

3! 6
# ' #

3! 6 #ORRECTIONS3UGGESTIONS
4O &ROM
????????????????????????????????????????
3)%-%.3 !+4)%.'%3%,,3#(!&4 .AME
$EPT %6 3 350
????????????????????????????????????????
$ "%2,). #OMPANY$EPT
'ERMANY
????????????????????????????????????????
!DDRESS
$EAR READER
PRINTING ERRORS CAN NEVER BE ENTIRELY ELIMINATED ????????????????????????????????????????

THEREFORE SHOULD YOU COME ACROSS ANY WHEN 4ELEPHONE NO
READING THIS MANUAL KINDLY ENTER THEM IN THIS
FORM TOGETHER WITH ANY COMMENTS OR SUG
GESTIONS FOR IMPROVEMENT THAT YOU MAY HAVE ????????????????????????????????????????
#ORRECTIONS3UGGESTIONS
# ' #

3UBSTANTIAL ALTERATIONS AGAINST PREVIOUS ISSUE
!LTERATIONS IN $40 PLATFORM CHARACTER FONTS AND LAYOUT
#OPYING OF THIS DOCUMENT AND GIVING IT TO OTHERS AND THE USE

OR COMMUNICATION OF THE CONTENTS THEREOF ARE FORBIDDEN WITH
OUT EXPRESS AUTHORITY /FFENDERS ARE LIABLE TO THE PAYMENT OF
DAMAGES !LL RIGHTS ARE RESERVED IN THE EVENT OF THE GRANT OF
3UBJECT TO TECHNICAL ALTERATION A PATENT OR THE REGISTRATION OF A UTILITY MODEL OR DESIGN
3IEMENS !KTIENGESELLSCHAFT /RDER .O # ' #
!VAILABLE FROM ,:& &¼RTH "ISLOHE
0RINTED IN THE &EDERAL 2EPUBLIC OF 'ERMANY
!' &/ %N

.Umerical $istance 0rotection 2elay 3) 02/4%# 3!:) Nstruction - Anual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

.Umerical $istance 0rotection 2elay 3) 02/4%# 3!:) Nstruction - Anual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

.

UMERICAL $ISTANCE 0ROTECTION 2ELAY

3)02/4%# 3! 6

D 3IEMENS !' 

4HE DEVICE IS DESIGNED AND MANUFACTURED FOR APPLICATION IN INDUSTRIAL ENVIRONMENT

 # ' #

# ' # 

 # ' #

 4REATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS                                                            

 )NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS                                                        

# ' # 

 /PERATING INSTRUCTIONS                                                         

 3AFETY PRECAUTIONS                                                                 

 $IALOG WITH THE RELAY                                                               

 3ETTING THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS                                                   

 !NNUNCIATIONS                                                                     

 # ' #

 /PERATIONAL CONTROL FACILITIES                                                        

 4ESTING AND COMMISSIONING                                                         

 #OMMISSIONING USING PRIMARY TESTS                                                 

 0UTTING THE RELAY INTO OPERATION                                                      

 -AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING                                                 

 2EPLACING THE BACK UP BATTERY                                                     

 &AULT TRACING                                                                       

# ' # 

! 'ENERAL DIAGRAMS                                                                  

 # ' #

 !PPLICATION  &EATURES

# ' # 

 )MPLEMENTED FUNCTIONS

3! CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

5NIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE OPTIONALLY WITH DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON VIA COM

 # ' #

# ' # 

 # ' #

6OLTAGE CONNECTOR (EAVY CURRENT CONNECTOR

# ' # 

3! (OUSING FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING 80 

-AX  TERMINALS FOR CROSS SECTION MAX  MM

 # ' #

3! (OUSING FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR CUBICLE INSTALLATION 80 

   

2ESET AND PAGING

(EAVY CURRENT CONNECTORS

/PTICAL FIBRE CONNECTORS

# ' # 

 /RDERING DATA

IN HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING                 "

IN HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING                   #

IN HOUSING 80 FOR CUBICLE INSTALLATION

&AULT DETECTION SYSTEMS

/VERCURRENT FAULT DETECTORS                                                

/VERCURRENT AND VOLTAGE CONTROLLED UNDERIMPEDANCE 5)

/VERCURRENT AND UNDERIMPEDANCE 5) FAULT DETECTORS                        

-EASURED CURRENT INPUT FOR EARTH CURRENT

)NPUT FOR )% RESIDUAL CURRENT OF PROTECTED LINE                                       

)NPUT FOR )%0 PARALLEL LINE COMPENSATION FOR FAULT LOCATION                             

3ERIAL INTERFACE FOR COUPLING TO A CONTROL CENTRE

WITHOUT SERIAL INTERFACE                                                               !

WITH ISOLATED SERIAL INTERFACE SIMILAR 6 OR 23  #                                    "

WITH SERIAL INTERFACE FOR OPTICAL FIBRE CONNECTION                                          #

 # ' #

WITHOUT !2 WITHOUT 3# WITHOUT 0#/                                                 !

3)02/4%# 3! 6

D 3IEMENS !'

4HE DEVICE IS DESIGNED AND MANUFACTURED FOR APPLICATION IN INDUSTRIAL ENVIRONMENT

# ' #

# ' #

# ' #

4REATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS

)NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

# ' #

/PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

3AFETY PRECAUTIONS

$IALOG WITH THE RELAY

3ETTING THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS

!NNUNCIATIONS

# ' #

/PERATIONAL CONTROL FACILITIES

4ESTING AND COMMISSIONING

#OMMISSIONING USING PRIMARY TESTS

0UTTING THE RELAY INTO OPERATION

-AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING

2EPLACING THE BACK UP BATTERY

&AULT TRACING

# ' #

! 'ENERAL DIAGRAMS

# ' #

!PPLICATION &EATURES

# ' #

)MPLEMENTED FUNCTIONS

3! CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS %MERGENCY OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

# ' #

# ' #

# ' #

# ' #

3! (OUSING FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING 80

-AX TERMINALS FOR CROSS SECTION MAX MM

# ' #

3! (OUSING FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR CUBICLE INSTALLATION 80

(EAVY CURRENT CONNECTORS

/PTICAL FIBRE CONNECTORS

# ' #

/RDERING DATA

IN HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING "

IN HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING #

IN HOUSING 80 FOR CUBICLE INSTALLATION

/VERCURRENT FAULT DETECTORS

/VERCURRENT AND VOLTAGE CONTROLLED UNDERIMPEDANCE 5)

/VERCURRENT AND UNDERIMPEDANCE 5) FAULT DETECTORS

)NPUT FOR )% RESIDUAL CURRENT OF PROTECTED LINE

)NPUT FOR )%0 PARALLEL LINE COMPENSATION FOR FAULT LOCATION

WITHOUT SERIAL INTERFACE !

WITH ISOLATED SERIAL INTERFACE SIMILAR 6 OR 23 # "

WITH SERIAL INTERFACE FOR OPTICAL FIBRE CONNECTION #

# ' #

WITHOUT !2 WITHOUT 3# WITHOUT 0#/ !

WITH !2 POLE WITH 3# WITHOUT 0#/ "

WITH !2 POLE WITH 3# WITHOUT 0#/ #

WITHOUT !2 WITH 3# WITH 0#/ %

WITH !2 POLE WITH 3# WITH 0#/ &

WITH !2 POLE WITH 3# WITH 0#/ '

03 0OWER 3WING OPTION

WITHOUT 03 WITHOUT %&

WITH 03 WITHOUT %&

WITHOUT 03 WITH %&

WITH 03 WITH %&

# ' #

'ENERAL DATA

2ATED VOLTAGE 5. 6 TO 6 SETTABLE

2ATED FREQUENCY F. (Z OR (Z SETTABLE

"URDEN CT CIRCUITS PER PHASE AND RESIDUAL PATH

!UXILIARY DC VOLTAGE SUPPLY VIA INTEGRATED DCDC CONVERTER

/PERATING RANGES TO 6 DC TO 6 DC TO 6 DC

3UPERIMPOSED AC VOLTAGE AT RATED VOLTAGE

0OWER CONSUMPTION QUIESCENT APPROX 7

"RIDGING TIME DURING FAILURESHORT CIRCUIT

# ' #

(EAVY DUTY TRIP CONTACTS

4RIP RELAYS NUMBER

"INARY INPUTS NUMBER

6OLTAGE RANGE RECONNECTABLE TO 6 DC UP TO PRODUCTION SERIES ''

-AX CONTROL VOLTAGE 6DC